Vaniquotes - User contributions [en]

Trade (Letters)

2010-09-08T17:05:15Z

Partha-sarathi:

<div id="compilation">
<div id="facts">
{{terms|"trade"|"traded"|"trader"|"traders"|"trades"|"tradesmen"|"trading"}}
{{notes|}}
{{compiler|Vraja-kumara|Partha-sarathi}}
{{complete|ALL}}
{{first|16Jul10}}
{{last|08Sep10}}
{{totals_by_section|BG=0|SB=0|CC=0|OB=0|Lec=0|Con=0|Let=26}}
{{total|26}}
{{toc right}}
[[Category:Trade|1]]
[[Category:Compilations from Letters]]
</div>
<div id="Correspondence" class="section" sec_index="6" parent="compilation" text="Correspondence"><h2>Correspondence</h2>
</div>
<div id="1947_to_1965_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="0" parent="Correspondence" text="1947 to 1965 Correspondence"><h3>1947 to 1965 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoMrBaileyAllahabad14September1951_0" class="quote" parent="1947_to_1965_Correspondence" book="Let" index="11" link="Letter to Mr. Bailey -- Allahabad 14 September, 1951" link_text="Letter to Mr. Bailey -- Allahabad 14 September, 1951">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Mr. Bailey -- Allahabad 14 September, 1951|Letter to Mr. Bailey -- Allahabad 14 September, 1951]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">When we speak of Philosophy it is something higher than the attempt of combining the East and the West. The whole cosmic situation is a complete unit and unless and attempt genuine is made for harmonizing the whole disturbed system and partial attempt on our part however large in magnitude will fail to approach the ultimate goal.</p>
<p>Sages of India realized this by a perfect deductive process which descends on human consciousness by the transcendental unbroken chain of disciplic succession—that material civilization is a gigantic temporary demonstration of a rabid process of sense-gratification. In that mode of civilization the sense organs are given unrestricted liberty to gratify ever-increasing desires and the whole show of cultural advancement in science, art, education, trade, industry economics and politics is only varied activities of the sense organs.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoMrBaileyAllahabad7July1953_1" class="quote" parent="1947_to_1965_Correspondence" book="Let" index="15" link="Letter to Mr. Bailey -- Allahabad 7 July, 1953" link_text="Letter to Mr. Bailey -- Allahabad 7 July, 1953">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Mr. Bailey -- Allahabad 7 July, 1953|Letter to Mr. Bailey -- Allahabad 7 July, 1953]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Sages of India realized it by a perfect deductive process which descends on human consciousness by a transcendental chain of unbroken bona fide disciplic succession that material civilization is a temporary gigantic demonstration of a rabid process of sense gratification. The sense organs are given uncertain liberty to gratify their desires and the whole show of science education, trade, industry, economy and politics are but different spheres of activities in the realm of gratifying the senses.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1967_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="2" parent="Correspondence" text="1967 Correspondence"><h3>1967 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoBrahmanandaSanFrancisco25January1967_0" class="quote" parent="1967_Correspondence" book="Let" index="3" link="Letter to Brahmananda -- San Francisco 25 January, 1967" link_text="Letter to Brahmananda -- San Francisco 25 January, 1967">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Brahmananda -- San Francisco 25 January, 1967|Letter to Brahmananda -- San Francisco 25 January, 1967]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Further, $200.00 may be transferred to my account in the Trade Bank And Trust Co. at 4th street for purchasing some musical instruments for Mr. Jonathan Altman. This month as usual the check may not be sent to him but advice may be sent to him that the amount has been paid to my account for purchasing his musical instruments in India. The cost will be about $500.00 out of which $200.00 has to be sent immediately. So after transferring the above amount you can let us both know about it so that I can take the necessary steps.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoBrahmanandaSanFrancisco14February1967_1" class="quote" parent="1967_Correspondence" book="Let" index="21" link="Letter to Brahmananda -- San Francisco 14 February, 1967" link_text="Letter to Brahmananda -- San Francisco 14 February, 1967">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Brahmananda -- San Francisco 14 February, 1967|Letter to Brahmananda -- San Francisco 14 February, 1967]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I have also received the letter of Mr. Altman and I shall act according to his desire. So you can transfer $200.00 for Altman and $6000.00 altogether $6200.00 to my savings account No. 19282 at the Trade Bank And Trust Company and letter of transfer is enclosed herewith. I have duly signed the letter and you also sign it and forward it to the Bank. They will do the needful. This $6000.00 will be transferred forth with by me as soon as there is a Sale contract for purchase of the house. Till then it will remain in my Savings Account.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoMukundaDelhi29September1967_2" class="quote" parent="1967_Correspondence" book="Let" index="158" link="Letter to Mukunda -- Delhi 29 September, 1967" link_text="Letter to Mukunda -- Delhi 29 September, 1967">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Mukunda -- Delhi 29 September, 1967|Letter to Mukunda -- Delhi 29 September, 1967]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I think the picture you have must belong to the N.Y. branch. So far as musical instruments are concerned I don't think it is worthwhile. Shipping charges and packing and duty come to more than that one could purchase in the states. To send one tamboura by air the total price would come to $163 and by ship 110. If you wish to purchase 20 items at a time then you can get trade shipping rates. Please send my blessings to all the boys and girls in San Francisco.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1968_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="3" parent="Correspondence" text="1968 Correspondence"><h3>1968 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoManagerofBankofBarodaLosAngeles29January1968_0" class="quote" parent="1968_Correspondence" book="Let" index="36" link="Letter to Manager of Bank of Baroda -- Los Angeles 29 January, 1968" link_text="Letter to Manager of Bank of Baroda -- Los Angeles 29 January, 1968">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Manager of Bank of Baroda -- Los Angeles 29 January, 1968|Letter to Manager of Bank of Baroda -- Los Angeles 29 January, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I beg to inform you that today I have advised the Trade Bank & Trust Co. of New York to transfer by air mail three hundred and eighty dollars and no cents ($380.00) for credit of my S.B. account No. 1432, with you.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoBrahmanandaSeattle16October1968_1" class="quote" parent="1968_Correspondence" book="Let" index="376" link="Letter to Brahmananda -- Seattle 16 October, 1968" link_text="Letter to Brahmananda -- Seattle 16 October, 1968">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Brahmananda -- Seattle 16 October, 1968|Letter to Brahmananda -- Seattle 16 October, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Besides that, I have got some money in the Trade and Trust Bank, and some money in Bank of America. In the Bank of America, Haight Clayton Branch, San Francisco, Cal., my account number is 262101746. I think that is sufficient reference for them, and they can draw the bill at 60 days sight, and supply the books to us.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoBrahmanandaLosAngeles31December1968_2" class="quote" parent="1968_Correspondence" book="Let" index="524" link="Letter to Brahmananda -- Los Angeles 31 December, 1968" link_text="Letter to Brahmananda -- Los Angeles 31 December, 1968">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Brahmananda -- Los Angeles 31 December, 1968|Letter to Brahmananda -- Los Angeles 31 December, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So far as your safe, I will send some papers for safe-keeping later on. I have also a safe deposit box in the bank here, and there is no charge for its use. I am wondering if there is any charge for the box at the Trade Bank. You have written that you have received the 2nd canto Srimad-Bhagavatam, and please keep it carefully in my room for the present time.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1969_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="4" parent="Correspondence" text="1969 Correspondence"><h3>1969 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoKrsnadasaLosAngeles28January1969_0" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="70" link="Letter to Krsna dasa -- Los Angeles 28 January, 1969" link_text="Letter to Krsna dasa -- Los Angeles 28 January, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Krsna dasa -- Los Angeles 28 January, 1969|Letter to Krsna dasa -- Los Angeles 28 January, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I am so pleased to know that Uttama Sloka and yourself are now working in the printer trade, and Sivananda is busily engaged in decorating the temple. Similarly, it is very good that you are holding outside engagements for organizations outside of the temple and you are meeting with interested people. But perhaps the best news of all is that soon we shall have our own press for printing Krishna Consciousness literature in the German language. Our life and soul is kirtana and presenting literature to the public at large, and I can understand that Krishna is dictating to you from within how to carry this out successfully. I think that translation work should be done on such articles that may be included in a German edition of Back To Godhead, as well as my Introduction to Bhagavad-gita As It Is. I am wondering if there are people there who can speak English with you. Please inform me on this matter.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoKrsnadasaNewVrindaban13June1969_1" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="363" link="Letter to Krsna dasa -- New Vrindaban 13 June, 1969" link_text="Letter to Krsna dasa -- New Vrindaban 13 June, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Krsna dasa -- New Vrindaban 13 June, 1969|Letter to Krsna dasa -- New Vrindaban 13 June, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I can understand from your attitude that your father must be good gentleman, otherwise how could he have such a nice son? So there is no need of playing hide-and-seek. If you continue learning the jeweler's trade, he will not be displeased. Besides that, some of our men must work, otherwise it is difficult to maintain all the expenses in the European countries.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoGargamuniLondon22September1969_2" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="576" link="Letter to Gargamuni -- London 22 September, 1969" link_text="Letter to Gargamuni -- London 22 September, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Gargamuni -- London 22 September, 1969|Letter to Gargamuni -- London 22 September, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I am pleased to note your attitude regarding business. Our policy is nirbandhe krishna sambandha: We shall accept all kinds of civil activities, including business, trade, industry, only in connection with Krishna. I am glad that you are following this principle, and Krishna will be very, very pleased upon you to make you advance in Krishna Consciousness. Regarding Dwarkin & Sons, don't bother about it now. I shall see later on. I am keeping the invoice, and when it is required, we shall utilize. Hope this meets you in good health.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoManagerTheBankofBarodaLondon25November1969_3" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="696" link="Letter to Manager The Bank of Baroda -- London 25 November, 1969" link_text="Letter to Manager The Bank of Baroda -- London 25 November, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Manager The Bank of Baroda -- London 25 November, 1969|Letter to Manager The Bank of Baroda -- London 25 November, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Therefore, you can cancel the previous instruction in connection with the INDO CRAFTER payment for Rupees 2,600. In this connection I beg to remind you that when I was in the States last year I sent you $400 and odds through the Trade Bank and Trust Company, and the purpose also was declared there for printing of books. Since then, the arrangement for printing books has not materialized, so I want to utilize this money for commercial purchases from India. Please let me know if there is any difficulty in this connection due to exchange control. If so, please let me know what to do in this matter. Thanking you in anticipation of your early reply.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1970_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="5" parent="Correspondence" text="1970 Correspondence"><h3>1970 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoJanardanaLosAngeles16January1970_0" class="quote" parent="1970_Correspondence" book="Let" index="29" link="Letter to Janardana -- Los Angeles 16 January, 1970" link_text="Letter to Janardana -- Los Angeles 16 January, 1970">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Janardana -- Los Angeles 16 January, 1970|Letter to Janardana -- Los Angeles 16 January, 1970]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">This means as stated in the Bhagavad-gita there are different symptoms of different classes of men—just like a Brahmana is truthful, clean, self-controlled, equipoised, tolerant, simple, full of knowledge, theist, and so on. Similarly a Ksatriya has symptoms—a tendency for ruling over others, martial spirited, charitable, does not flee away from the battlefield and so on. Similarly, the symptoms of a Vaisya is his tendency to agriculture, trade, cow protection and banking. And the Sudra's tendency is to some way or other work anywhere and get some wages.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoHamsadutaLosAngeles23January1970_1" class="quote" parent="1970_Correspondence" book="Let" index="43" link="Letter to Hamsaduta -- Los Angeles 23 January, 1970" link_text="Letter to Hamsaduta -- Los Angeles 23 January, 1970">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Hamsaduta -- Los Angeles 23 January, 1970|Letter to Hamsaduta -- Los Angeles 23 January, 1970]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Especially in main cities (Berlin, Frankfurt, Cologne, Munich, Stutgart, etc.) all of which have a population of half a million to a million (except Berlin which had three million), but they are centers of industry, trade, art, travel and all have Universities."</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoSyamasundaraLosAngeles10February1970_2" class="quote" parent="1970_Correspondence" book="Let" index="87" link="Letter to Syamasundara -- Los Angeles 10 February, 1970" link_text="Letter to Syamasundara -- Los Angeles 10 February, 1970">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Syamasundara -- Los Angeles 10 February, 1970|Letter to Syamasundara -- Los Angeles 10 February, 1970]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I think if George writes a small foreword, then we can include it along with other description in the pamphlet. I think if we issue such prologue pamphlet and put it within the paper cover of the album, we can expect some order from many customers before the book is out of the press, and in that case perhaps we have to mention the price and delivery terms to save time. If the shopkeepers who will sell the records will send us order, we shall give them sufficient trade discount. So I shall be glad to hear from you how you like this idea. If you like it, then please let me know by return mail the latest date on which you will require them, so that I can arrange for that.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1971_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="6" parent="Correspondence" text="1971 Correspondence"><h3>1971 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoChiefControllerofImportsandExportsCalcutta25May1971_0" class="quote" parent="1971_Correspondence" book="Let" index="216" link="Letter to Chief Controller of Imports and Exports -- Calcutta 25 May, 1971" link_text="Letter to Chief Controller of Imports and Exports -- Calcutta 25 May, 1971">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Chief Controller of Imports and Exports -- Calcutta 25 May, 1971|Letter to Chief Controller of Imports and Exports -- Calcutta 25 May, 1971]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">As before, we wish to reiterate that the religious books received from either Japan or our New York Press, are gifts, and there is no intention to sell these books in India, nor is there any question of foreign trade in any of our activities.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1972_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="7" parent="Correspondence" text="1972 Correspondence"><h3>1972 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoBalimardanaBombayMarch221972_0" class="quote" parent="1972_Correspondence" book="Let" index="140" link="Letter to Bali-mardana -- Bombay March 22, 1972" link_text="Letter to Bali-mardana -- Bombay March 22, 1972">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Bali-mardana -- Bombay March 22, 1972|Letter to Bali-mardana -- Bombay March 22, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I have just now noticed in the clause no. 6 that it appears we are allowed to distribute by "direct distribution through non-book-trade outlets," so it appears the contract is all right because we have not got much to do with bookstores anyway, so I have no strong objection to this contract. Let us try it as an experiment.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1973_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="8" parent="Correspondence" text="1973 Correspondence"><h3>1973 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoTamalaKrsnaLosAngeles5December1973_0" class="quote" parent="1973_Correspondence" book="Let" index="408" link="Letter to Tamala Krsna -- Los Angeles 5 December, 1973" link_text="Letter to Tamala Krsna -- Los Angeles 5 December, 1973">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Tamala Krsna -- Los Angeles 5 December, 1973|Letter to Tamala Krsna -- Los Angeles 5 December, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So far as the arrangement with Australia for trading books for ghee, go ahead and do it with my permission. Karandhara has agreed.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1974_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="9" parent="Correspondence" text="1974 Correspondence"><h3>1974 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoRevatinandanaLosAngeles9January1974_0" class="quote" parent="1974_Correspondence" book="Let" index="22" link="Letter to Revatinandana -- Los Angeles 9 January, 1974" link_text="Letter to Revatinandana -- Los Angeles 9 January, 1974">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Revatinandana -- Los Angeles 9 January, 1974|Letter to Revatinandana -- Los Angeles 9 January, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I know you are a very good cook and I can understand that you have found the books useful for distribution. I have no objection to your printing it with the name "Revatinandana Swami's Cookbook", but the royalty should go to the Bhaktivedanta Book Trust. Just as I am publishing Bhagavad-gita As It Is with Macmillan Co. but the royalty is going to the BBT. I think this method is appropriate. If you yourself take the royalty it will be personal interest in money and trade, and this will deviate your principle of sannyasa. Sannyasi means he is in renounced order and lives by begging alms for the bare necessities of life. It is not good to make trade to get money for personal expenditure. If the royalty is given to the BBT, we will keep a separate account from this royalty and necessary expenditures for your preaching may be supplied from the BBT.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1975_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="10" parent="Correspondence" text="1975 Correspondence"><h3>1975 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoDigambarSinghJohannesburg20October1975_0" class="quote" parent="1975_Correspondence" book="Let" index="606" link="Letter to Digambar Singh -- Johannesburg 20 October, 1975" link_text="Letter to Digambar Singh -- Johannesburg 20 October, 1975">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Digambar Singh -- Johannesburg 20 October, 1975|Letter to Digambar Singh -- Johannesburg 20 October, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">The Krisans shall live comfortably in the cottages. They should produce their food, their milk, and their cloth. Everything produced will be used by themselves. If there is any excess production then the question of trade will arise. That we shall see later on. All the products produced will belong to Krishna-Balarama.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoPalikaBombay13November1975_1" class="quote" parent="1975_Correspondence" book="Let" index="677" link="Letter to Palika -- Bombay 13 November, 1975" link_text="Letter to Palika -- Bombay 13 November, 1975">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Palika -- Bombay 13 November, 1975|Letter to Palika -- Bombay 13 November, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">If you produce milk, you should not drink milk very much. Rather, you should save it and convert it into ghee and then sell it to the householders and centers and thus maintain your asrama. The excess quantity of ghee may be exchanged by trade. Kirtana is our first duty. The Deity worship should be simple and the eating should be as meager as possible.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoJagadisaBombay20November1975_2" class="quote" parent="1975_Correspondence" book="Let" index="700" link="Letter to Jagadisa -- Bombay 20 November, 1975" link_text="Letter to Jagadisa -- Bombay 20 November, 1975">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Jagadisa -- Bombay 20 November, 1975|Letter to Jagadisa -- Bombay 20 November, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Regarding the New Orleans' farm, do not make sugar. Just boil it and make molasses. You can eat the molasses instead of sugar. Just boil it and keep boiling it until granule forms and then keep in a pot. Don't try to make sugar and sell it. That will simply increase the botheration. If you start trading business, then so many problems will be there. You should produce just enough for our own use. Trading leads to envy and jealousy and cheating, then everything is lost. I am seeing now that the business activities in our society, they are increasing.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1976_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="11" parent="Correspondence" text="1976 Correspondence"><h3>1976 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoJayatirthaMayapur22January1976_0" class="quote" parent="1976_Correspondence" book="Let" index="60" link="Letter to Jayatirtha -- Mayapur 22 January, 1976" link_text="Letter to Jayatirtha -- Mayapur 22 January, 1976">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Jayatirtha -- Mayapur 22 January, 1976|Letter to Jayatirtha -- Mayapur 22 January, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Just try to improve the Prasadam system so nicely that one will not want any other arrangement. Another thing, is that the grhasthas may be encouraged to do agriculture. In the Indian villages like in Vrindaban, they get enough ghee for their personal use, and sufficient excess to be sold to the merchants, who then also get some money. Cow protection means good food and good trade. So I can give you suggestions how to manage everything, but it is up to the GBC to practically execute all these points.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoYasomatinandanaChandigarh14October1976_1" class="quote" parent="1976_Correspondence" book="Let" index="562" link="Letter to Yasomatinandana -- Chandigarh 14 October, 1976" link_text="Letter to Yasomatinandana -- Chandigarh 14 October, 1976">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Yasomatinandana -- Chandigarh 14 October, 1976|Letter to Yasomatinandana -- Chandigarh 14 October, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">They may keep whatever they require for their maintenance and the excess production may be traded or sold. But we are not going to develop a competitive farming enterprise for making money. The basic principle is to become independent of artificial city life, working in factories producing nut and bolts. Gandhi had this Idea, the one defect was that there was no Krishna in the center. So the same idea of village organization, but keeping Krishna in the center should be introduced on our farm projects.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoYasomatinandanaVrindaban28November1976_2" class="quote" parent="1976_Correspondence" book="Let" index="666" link="Letter to Yasomatinandana -- Vrindaban 28 November, 1976" link_text="Letter to Yasomatinandana -- Vrindaban 28 November, 1976">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Yasomatinandana -- Vrindaban 28 November, 1976|Letter to Yasomatinandana -- Vrindaban 28 November, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">You say we must have a gosala trust, that is our real purpose. krsi-goraksya-vanijyam vaisya karma svabhava-jam, (Bg 18.44). Where there is agriculture there must be cows. That is our mission: Cow protection and agriculture and if there is excess, trade. This is a no-profit scheme. For the agriculture we want to produce our own food and we want to keep cows for our own milk. The whole idea is that we are Iskcon, a community to be independent from outside help. This farm project is especially for the devotees to grow their own food. Cotton also, to make their own clothes. And keeping cows for milk and fatty products.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoYasomatinandanaVrindaban28November1976_3" class="quote" parent="1976_Correspondence" book="Let" index="666" link="Letter to Yasomatinandana -- Vrindaban 28 November, 1976" link_text="Letter to Yasomatinandana -- Vrindaban 28 November, 1976">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Yasomatinandana -- Vrindaban 28 November, 1976|Letter to Yasomatinandana -- Vrindaban 28 November, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Our mission is to protect our devotees from unnecessary heavy work to save time for advancing in Krsna consciousness. This is our mission. So there is no question of profit, but if easily there are surplus products, then we can think of trading. Otherwise we have no such intention. We want a temple, a gosala and agriculture. A community project as in Europe and America. We are making similar attempts in India in several places. Immediately I'm going to Hyderabad to organize the farm project there. We have 600 acres. We have the permission from the government. There is no question of ceiling.</p>
</div>
</div>
</div>

Concession (Letters)

2010-09-07T08:38:55Z

Partha-sarathi:

<div id="compilation">
<div id="facts">
{{terms|"concession"|"concessional"|"concessions"}}
{{notes|}}
{{compiler|Visnu Murti|Partha-sarathi}}
{{complete|ALL}}
{{first|24Nov08}}
{{last|07Sep10}}
{{totals_by_section|BG=0|SB=0|CC=0|OB=0|Lec=0|Con=0|Let=58}}
{{total|58}}
{{toc right}}
[[Category:Concession|1]]
[[Category:Compilations from Letters]]
</div>
<div id="Correspondence" class="section" sec_index="6" parent="compilation" text="Correspondence"><h2>Correspondence</h2>
</div>
<div id="1947_to_1965_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="0" parent="Correspondence" text="1947 to 1965 Correspondence"><h3>1947 to 1965 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoScindiaSteamNavigationCompanyLtdDelhi31March1961_0" class="quote" parent="1947_to_1965_Correspondence" book="Let" index="50" link="Letter to Scindia Steam Navigation Company Ltd -- Delhi 31 March, 1961" link_text="Letter to Scindia Steam Navigation Company Ltd -- Delhi 31 March, 1961">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Scindia Steam Navigation Company Ltd -- Delhi 31 March, 1961|Letter to Scindia Steam Navigation Company Ltd -- Delhi 31 March, 1961]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Kindly refer to your letter No. OPD/FREE/369 dated 30/12/58 and I beg to inform you that you agreed to give me 50% concession from India to U.S.A. and I had to postpone my journey for not being able to pay you even 50% charges. I am a Sannyasi and my expenses for propagting the transcendental message is borne by the philanthrophist every where. Recently I have been invited by the Japanese friends to attend an international Congress for Cultivating Human spirit and the copy of the invitation certificate will speak for itself.</p>
<p>I shall therefore request you to give me full concession for going and coming back from Japan. India has to teach the world for cultivating human spirit and we are meant for this purpose. Please therefore cooperate with us broadcasting the message of cultivating human spirit and increase India's original culture of spiritual value for which counties outside India are always eager to have it.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoScindiaSteamNavigationCompanyLtdDelhi31March1961_1" class="quote" parent="1947_to_1965_Correspondence" book="Let" index="50" link="Letter to Scindia Steam Navigation Company Ltd -- Delhi 31 March, 1961" link_text="Letter to Scindia Steam Navigation Company Ltd -- Delhi 31 March, 1961">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Scindia Steam Navigation Company Ltd -- Delhi 31 March, 1961|Letter to Scindia Steam Navigation Company Ltd -- Delhi 31 March, 1961]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">N.B. Japan is far nearer than U.S.A. and therefore your sacrifice for travel to Japan even in full concession will be not more than 50% concession to U.S.A. I hope therefore you will agree to this international cultural harmony and let me know your affirmation per return of post.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoShastryjiUnknownPlaceJune1964_2" class="quote" parent="1947_to_1965_Correspondence" book="Let" index="63" link="Letter to Shastryji -- Unknown Place June 1964" link_text="Letter to Shastryji -- Unknown Place June 1964">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Shastryji -- Unknown Place June 1964|Letter to Shastryji -- Unknown Place June 1964]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">If you actually want good government not only for India but also for all the world over, you must promote the sales of this publication either or you may purchase some thousands of copies of this publication of concessional rate & distribute both the same to all leading & thinking men of the world. Srimad-Bhagavatam is a ___ literature and it is specially needed at this hour of human disparity all over the world.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1966_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="1" parent="Correspondence" text="1966 Correspondence"><h3>1966 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoJanisNewYork29October1966_0" class="quote" parent="1966_Correspondence" book="Let" index="26" link="Letter to Janis -- New York 29 October, 1966" link_text="Letter to Janis -- New York 29 October, 1966">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Janis -- New York 29 October, 1966|Letter to Janis -- New York 29 October, 1966]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Under separate post parcel I am sending you all the above newly published literatures and I shall request you to enlist as many subscribers for Back to Godhead Magazine because we have to submit at least 200 subscribers names to the postal authorities for getting the concessional rates.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1967_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="2" parent="Correspondence" text="1967 Correspondence"><h3>1967 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoKirtananandaSanFrancisco10February1967_0" class="quote" parent="1967_Correspondence" book="Let" index="13" link="Letter to Kirtanananda -- San Francisco 10 February, 1967" link_text="Letter to Kirtanananda -- San Francisco 10 February, 1967">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Kirtanananda -- San Francisco 10 February, 1967|Letter to Kirtanananda -- San Francisco 10 February, 1967]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I learn also that you made the new kachori according to my direction and it has come out very successful. I have taught two more things to Ranchor namely "Nan khatai" and "Peda" which you have to learn from him by succession. Srimati Jadurani writes "many of Swami Satcitananda's disciples were present in the last Sunday's feasting and returned this morning to Kirtana. Our traps are too strong to resist." I think you will agree with her. I am glad to learn that the film taken by Mr. Richard Witty has come out very successful. It is all Krishna's blessings. I think we may purchase one copy of the film at some concessional rate from Mr. Witty.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoMrinalineVrindaban27August1967_1" class="quote" parent="1967_Correspondence" book="Let" index="131" link="Letter to Mrinaline -- Vrindaban 27 August, 1967" link_text="Letter to Mrinaline -- Vrindaban 27 August, 1967">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Mrinaline -- Vrindaban 27 August, 1967|Letter to Mrinaline -- Vrindaban 27 August, 1967]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I am very glad to learn that many of my devotees are coming to India. Students who will come here for studying Krishna philosophy as scholar and devotee will have ample opportunity. My god-brother Swami B.H. Bon, has agreed to give them free boarding, lodging and tuition, at least for ten students at a time. So they are welcome. I am also trying for their concession of passage as well as a permanent home in Vrindaban. Let us depend upon the Will of Krishna.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoHayagrivaVrindaban29August1967_2" class="quote" parent="1967_Correspondence" book="Let" index="137" link="Letter to Hayagriva -- Vrindaban 29 August, 1967" link_text="Letter to Hayagriva -- Vrindaban 29 August, 1967">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Hayagriva -- Vrindaban 29 August, 1967|Letter to Hayagriva -- Vrindaban 29 August, 1967]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I am also scheduled to go to Delhi on the 5th; so after Acyutananda's arrival, if he likes to stay for some days in Vrindaban, I will make arrangements with Swami Bon (who as you know has offered free room and board and tuition to any interested student), or he can accommodate __ three of us will do some traveling about India __ for the society. Since we have this good arrangement with the Inst. for Oriental Philos., I think we may not for the time being open such a center in the states. I am also going to Bombay to try and induce the managing director to give us some concession on the Scindia Line. I repeat once more, that I am also feeling your separation, and I am trying to return as soon as possible.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoMukundaCalcutta8December1967_3" class="quote" parent="1967_Correspondence" book="Let" index="229" link="Letter to Mukunda -- Calcutta 8 December, 1967" link_text="Letter to Mukunda -- Calcutta 8 December, 1967">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Mukunda -- Calcutta 8 December, 1967|Letter to Mukunda -- Calcutta 8 December, 1967]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">You will be glad to know that I have arranged with Messrs. Dwarkin & Son, 8/2 Esplanade East, Calcutta-1, to supply all kinds of musical instruments to our society at a special discount of 20%. Ramanuja has already written you about this thing. There is one company, the "American Mail Line" Navigation Service from Calcutta to San Francisco, Los Angeles, etc. They have got their office in San Francisco at #601 California Street. You can see the manager there and try to get free or concessional freight service for our temple goods. The only thing is that you have to impress upon them that Krishna Consciousness is an international organization for invoking man's dormant spiritual life. You can show him our other literatures, records and activities to convince him in this regard.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1968_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="3" parent="Correspondence" text="1968 Correspondence"><h3>1968 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoBrahmanandaLosAngeles21January1968_0" class="quote" parent="1968_Correspondence" book="Let" index="24" link="Letter to Brahmananda -- Los Angeles 21 January, 1968" link_text="Letter to Brahmananda -- Los Angeles 21 January, 1968">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Brahmananda -- Los Angeles 21 January, 1968|Letter to Brahmananda -- Los Angeles 21 January, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I am negotiating with one place in India for publishing Back to Godhead, at least 10,000 copies per month, at a concessional rate. Please consult with Rayarama and let me know your opinion about this. Hope you are all well.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoBrahmanandaLosAngeles4March1968_1" class="quote" parent="1968_Correspondence" book="Let" index="104" link="Letter to Brahmananda -- Los Angeles 4 March, 1968" link_text="Letter to Brahmananda -- Los Angeles 4 March, 1968">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Brahmananda -- Los Angeles 4 March, 1968|Letter to Brahmananda -- Los Angeles 4 March, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So, after clearing the books, we will see to the account. In the meantime, if possible you can see the American Export Isbrandtsen Lines, Inc., whose office is situated at 26 Broadway, New York, N.Y., 10004. I think you can see the manager of this carrying company and try to get some concessional rates for things we import from India. Here in San Francisco, there is one carrying company, American Mail Lines, and they have agreed to give us 10% concession on the freight. When I go to S.F., I shall see that they may grant some more concession. You have to convince the carrying company that our this world wide Krishna Consciousness movement, so everything required is for the help of this society. Government gives us all facility of exemptions from the tax, and as we have got to import so many articles from India, and maybe we may export also so many things from America to India for maintaining the status of the institution, they may give us some concessional rates. You may mention that Scindia Steam Navigation Co. of Bombay was giving us concession all free, but recently, might be due to their internal dissension, they have stopped this concession. So we can claim some concessional rate from everyone because our society is for public welfare activities. Hope you are well.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoBrahmanandaSanFrancisco12March1968_2" class="quote" parent="1968_Correspondence" book="Let" index="109" link="Letter to Brahmananda -- San Francisco 12 March, 1968" link_text="Letter to Brahmananda -- San Francisco 12 March, 1968">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Brahmananda -- San Francisco 12 March, 1968|Letter to Brahmananda -- San Francisco 12 March, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">The American Mail Lines has verbally promised 10% concession, but we have no written letter. But we were getting free concession from Scindia Navigations; that letter I have got, and am enclosing herewith, keep it in your files.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoBrahmanandaSanFrancisco9September1968_3" class="quote" parent="1968_Correspondence" book="Let" index="303" link="Letter to Brahmananda -- San Francisco 9 September, 1968" link_text="Letter to Brahmananda -- San Francisco 9 September, 1968">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Brahmananda -- San Francisco 9 September, 1968|Letter to Brahmananda -- San Francisco 9 September, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Regarding records: You must take quotation from different record manufacturing company, or from the same company immediately, from whom you took our Hare Krishna record. We shall ourselves issue so many records. And so far this record is concerned, in a suitable moment you can talk with Mr. Kallman that Swamiji was telling that he has not received any royalty of 5%. The agreement is there; you can see. So he must pay. But if he does not pay we don't mind; we shall issue our own records and try to sell. But you can speak with him, that Swamiji is speaking like that. At least, he must give us the concession that whenever we shall require the records, he must give us at cost price. So far you have already paid him $500.00 for one thousand records.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoAnnapurnaLosAngeles5December1968_4" class="quote" parent="1968_Correspondence" book="Let" index="470" link="Letter to Annapurna -- Los Angeles 5 December, 1968" link_text="Letter to Annapurna -- Los Angeles 5 December, 1968">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Annapurna -- Los Angeles 5 December, 1968|Letter to Annapurna -- Los Angeles 5 December, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">At least he should let us conduct our business there for the benefit of all of mankind. It is understood that the landlord belongs to the hippie group and he has purchased the house for hippie propaganda but now wishes to sell the house and property. If some concessional rate is offered then we can also try to purchase the property. So consult with your godbrothers and Gurudasa is the best man to tackle with this landlord and appeal to him to donate this house free for this great cause of spreading Krishna Consciousness. So again I thank you for your nice letter and the sentiments expressed therein and please keep me informed as to your well-being.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1969_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="4" parent="Correspondence" text="1969 Correspondence"><h3>1969 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoJayapatakaLosAngeles30January1969_0" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="73" link="Letter to Jayapataka -- Los Angeles 30 January, 1969" link_text="Letter to Jayapataka -- Los Angeles 30 January, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Jayapataka -- Los Angeles 30 January, 1969|Letter to Jayapataka -- Los Angeles 30 January, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">You have asked about the specialness of the month of Karatieya, and the answer is that is is a special inducement for persons who are not in Krishna Consciousness to perform some devotional service. For persons who are doing nothing in Krishna Consciousness, it is an indirect inducement to take to devotional service in earnest seriousness, every moment is Karatieya. In this connection, there is a good example that sometimes a store gives special concession to attract new customers. But for those who are already customers there is no need of a special sale. They will purchase at any cost if they know the import and value of the goods. Similarly, those who are pure devotees do not aspire for any concession, and out of spontaneous love try to engage themselves in devotional service 24 hours each day, 365 days every year, without any stoppage.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoSatsvarupaLosAngeles31January1969_1" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="76" link="Letter to Satsvarupa -- Los Angeles 31 January, 1969" link_text="Letter to Satsvarupa -- Los Angeles 31 January, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Satsvarupa -- Los Angeles 31 January, 1969|Letter to Satsvarupa -- Los Angeles 31 January, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Regarding your letter dated January 25, 1969, I have already sent to you tapes #2 and #3. As an experiment, I sent tape #3 by ordinary mail at the concession rate for tapes. Please let me know when this tape #3 has reached you. If it does not arrive too late then we can continue to exchange in the mail at this postage rate of five cents. You do not require to send finished tapes to Dinesh. Please send them directly to me.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoKrsnadasaLosAngeles13February1969_2" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="117" link="Letter to Krsna dasa -- Los Angeles 13 February, 1969" link_text="Letter to Krsna dasa -- Los Angeles 13 February, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Krsna dasa -- Los Angeles 13 February, 1969|Letter to Krsna dasa -- Los Angeles 13 February, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Regarding Jaya Govinda, the concessional rate of $200 suggested by you to Jaya Govinda is very nice. What is there if he comes from New Delhi to Moscow, it takes only 6 hours. So if he starts by plane some night, he can reach Moscow in the morning, and if he then leaves for Germany, by train he will arrive Hamburg the next morning. So to save $185 is a good proposal rather than to wait 3 months to send him the full amount. Instead of waiting 3 months, he can travel for three days, so there is no difficulty with this plan. Regarding the Raghu Pati Raghava song, we are not concerned with this song because it had a political motive; it is not pure devotional service. Gandhi was a great statesman in the garb of a saintly person, so that the Indian population would blindly follow him. But his motive was political and we are therefore not very interested with it. However, you can sing the first two lines, (Raghu Pati Raghava Raja Ram, Patita Pavana Sita Ram). I hope this will meet you in very good health.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoCidanandaDindayalAniruddhaMakhanlalLosAngeles23February1969_3" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="145" link="Letter to Cidananda, Dindayal, Aniruddha, Makhanlal -- Los Angeles 23 February, 1969" link_text="Letter to Cidananda, Dindayal, Aniruddha, Makhanlal -- Los Angeles 23 February, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Cidananda, Dindayal, Aniruddha, Makhanlal -- Los Angeles 23 February, 1969|Letter to Cidananda, Dindayal, Aniruddha, Makhanlal -- Los Angeles 23 February, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">But I am begging from you $750 per month against 5,000 copies of Back To Godhead. Out of this 5,000 copies, if you simply sell 1,500 copies you immediately realize your $750. The balance of 3,500 copies will be in your hands. If you can sell them at any price, not less than 30 cents per copy to stores, then whatever amount you realize will be clear profit for the Temple. If still there is some balance copies, then these copies we can distribute free by post to heads of the society, schools, colleges, libraries, and so many other institutions. So we have to make a list of them, and take concession rates from the post office. In this way we can make vigorous propaganda with Back to Godhead. Besides that, if you can introduce Sankirtana and classes and Back to Godhead in Berkeley, that will be another great advantage.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoBrahmanandaLosAngeles29February1969_4" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="155" link="Letter to Brahmananda -- Los Angeles 29 February, 1969" link_text="Letter to Brahmananda -- Los Angeles 29 February, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Brahmananda -- Los Angeles 29 February, 1969|Letter to Brahmananda -- Los Angeles 29 February, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">If you make more profit you should do so, and I have no objection. But whatever you sell after the 1,500 copies sold retail is profit for your temple. What ever balance has not been sold will be distributed free, and you should apply for concession rates at the Post Office. In Los Angeles, we have already applied, and the postal charge will be about 3 cents or 4 cents per issue. So as far as I am concerned, I shall collect about $3,000 monthly. Out of this, $2,000 is to be paid to Dai Nippon, and I will keep $1000. Out of this amount, the postal charges will take about $300-400, and the balance $600 I shall spend for developing of the press department. So from Back To Godhead I don't want anything for my book fund. I simply want my books to be nicely distributed.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoUpendraAllstonMass29April1969_5" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="257" link="Letter to Upendra -- Allston, Mass 29 April, 1969" link_text="Letter to Upendra -- Allston, Mass 29 April, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Upendra -- Allston, Mass 29 April, 1969|Letter to Upendra -- Allston, Mass 29 April, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Regarding Back To Godhead, when we get copies from Japan, I have program to distribute several thousand copies freely. In the meantime, get the concessional rate from the Post Office. They have got such rates in Los Angeles and New York, it is about 2 and a half or 3 cents per copy. so you may select some nice, important names; government men, leading industrialists, businessmen, and when you get the concessional rates you should distribute at least 100 copies from your center freely. The postage and copies will be supplied to you.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoBrahmanandaColumbusOhio15May1969_6" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="290" link="Letter to Brahmananda -- Columbus, Ohio 15 May, 1969" link_text="Letter to Brahmananda -- Columbus, Ohio 15 May, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Brahmananda -- Columbus, Ohio 15 May, 1969|Letter to Brahmananda -- Columbus, Ohio 15 May, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">If all problems come to me, even personal problems, then it becomes a heavy task for me. I received your letter, full of problems; Gargamuni's, full of problems; Rayarama's, full of problems, and similarly Iskcon Media's, full of problems. If everyone's problems are sent by me, then who will solve my problems? I have divided these departments to solve problems, but if in the end they are all sent to me and I have to tackle, then just imagine what is my position. The best thing would be to stop all activities and simply chant Hare Krishna. Regarding the Doubleday book stores, we do not like to give on consignment, but if some very big stores will take our literature only in that way, then we must make concession.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoKrsnadasaLosAngeles4July1969_7" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="417" link="Letter to Krsna dasa -- Los Angeles 4 July, 1969" link_text="Letter to Krsna dasa -- Los Angeles 4 July, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Krsna dasa -- Los Angeles 4 July, 1969|Letter to Krsna dasa -- Los Angeles 4 July, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So if in the meantime he sends ticket for Purusottama, then he can also go with me. I think the best arrangement would have been if by mutual consultation you make the transportation arrangements for my European journey. I do not know when Mukunda is going to send me those tickets, so you can consult with him. In the meantime, if you are able only to send one ticket for me, Purusottama may go later on. But anyway, I heard that after the 4th of August there will be a concession in the fare from America to Europe, so you can inquire about it. I shall be in San Francisco by the 25th of July, so you can let me know your decision at the San Francisco address or the Los Angeles address, which ever is more convenient for you.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoBrahmanandaLosAngeles8July1969_8" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="428" link="Letter to Brahmananda -- Los Angeles 8 July, 1969" link_text="Letter to Brahmananda -- Los Angeles 8 July, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Brahmananda -- Los Angeles 8 July, 1969|Letter to Brahmananda -- Los Angeles 8 July, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Regarding MacMillan, if they will not print our Bhagavad-gita As It Is in hard bound then why not publish our own edition of the book, enlarge and revised hard bound? We cannot be checked by their decision to print or not to print our books. The paper bound copies may be taken from them, and then our own bookbinders can turn them into hard bound editions by pasting the cover on cardboard only. In this case, MacMillan should give us special concession.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1970_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="5" parent="Correspondence" text="1970 Correspondence"><h3>1970 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoHanumanPrasadPoddarLosAngeles5February1970_0" class="quote" parent="1970_Correspondence" book="Let" index="77" link="Letter to Hanuman Prasad Poddar -- Los Angeles 5 February, 1970" link_text="Letter to Hanuman Prasad Poddar -- Los Angeles 5 February, 1970">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Hanuman Prasad Poddar -- Los Angeles 5 February, 1970|Letter to Hanuman Prasad Poddar -- Los Angeles 5 February, 1970]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">The government is neither encouraging or discouraging. sometimes the police department prohibits our Sankirtana Party when they go out in the street. In the United States this hindrance by the police is not very much, but in London they have practically stopped us. In Hamburg and Tokyo they are also not very strict. In the beginning we have difficulty everywhere. By now, as people in general are appreciating our movement—that we are devotees of the Lord, boys and girls of nice behavior and character—they give us as far as possible all concessions. The government draft board has accepted our Society as religious, so they are kind upon us. But, we do not get any direct financial help either from the government or big foundations. Neither have we been able to contact the richer section of the people.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoTamalaKrsnaLosAngeles20February1970_1" class="quote" parent="1970_Correspondence" book="Let" index="112" link="Letter to Tamala Krsna -- Los Angeles 20 February, 1970" link_text="Letter to Tamala Krsna -- Los Angeles 20 February, 1970">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Tamala Krsna -- Los Angeles 20 February, 1970|Letter to Tamala Krsna -- Los Angeles 20 February, 1970]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So far Ksirodakasayi is concerned, or anyone else who is newcomer, should be allowed some concession. And after some time when he is accustomed to our principle, then we can make the screw tight. I think this point will be sufficient hint to deal with him.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoTrivikramaLosAngeles7March1970_2" class="quote" parent="1970_Correspondence" book="Let" index="154" link="Letter to Trivikrama -- Los Angeles 7 March, 1970" link_text="Letter to Trivikrama -- Los Angeles 7 March, 1970">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Trivikrama -- Los Angeles 7 March, 1970|Letter to Trivikrama -- Los Angeles 7 March, 1970]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I do not think that Hamsaduta is pressing you for marriage. Marriage is a concession for a person who cannot control his sex desires. Of course it is a difficult job for the boys in this country because they have free access to intermingling with the girls. Under the circumstances, it is my open order for everyone that everyone can marry without any artificial pose. But if somebody is able to remain a Brahmacari, there should not be any causing for his marriage.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1971_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="6" parent="Correspondence" text="1971 Correspondence"><h3>1971 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoSudamaSurat1January1971_0" class="quote" parent="1971_Correspondence" book="Let" index="4" link="Letter to Sudama -- Surat 1 January, 1971" link_text="Letter to Sudama -- Surat 1 January, 1971">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Sudama -- Surat 1 January, 1971|Letter to Sudama -- Surat 1 January, 1971]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Married life does not mean that there will be no disagreement between husband and wife—that is a custom from time immemorial. According to Vedic system, disagreement or quarrel between husband and wife should never be taken very seriously. The Vedic system therefore gives a concession for the wife to separate from her husband for some time and go to her father's house. So Cintamani may come to me for some time, but you cannot deviate from your responsibility in Japan. If so desired, Karatieya Maharaja and Bruce can go immediately to help you, so arrange for their passage and I shall send them back. I think Bruce has got his return ticket.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoAcyutanandaLondon28June1971_1" class="quote" parent="1971_Correspondence" book="Let" index="258" link="Letter to Acyutananda -- London 28 June, 1971" link_text="Letter to Acyutananda -- London 28 June, 1971">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Acyutananda -- London 28 June, 1971|Letter to Acyutananda -- London 28 June, 1971]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">From Paris I went directly to L.A., about 6000 miles at one stretch and I was on the plane for 12 hours, thereby getting a one day concession. From L.A. I went to San Francisco yesterday and the Rathayatra festival was very very gorgeously performed. There were three Rathas consecutively and Lord Jagannatha's Ratha was bigger than the other two. People received us so nicely and one mayor was the chief guest in the meeting in which more than 10,000 people assembled and the mayor spoke very highly of our movement. She is very much impressed with the basic principle of our Back to Godhead movement. In this way we are getting support gradually in the U.S.A. Maybe our movement will be supported in the future in the United Nations. So we Krishna Consciousness people have accepted a very important and responsible task in the whole world, therefore our principle work also must be very responsible.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoTamalaKrsnaLondon28June1971_2" class="quote" parent="1971_Correspondence" book="Let" index="259" link="Letter to Tamala Krsna -- London 28 June, 1971" link_text="Letter to Tamala Krsna -- London 28 June, 1971">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Tamala Krsna -- London 28 June, 1971|Letter to Tamala Krsna -- London 28 June, 1971]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">From Paris I went to L.A. directly, about 6000 miles at one stretch and I was on the plane for twelve hours, thereby getting a one day concession. From L.A. I went to Rathayatra festival in San Francisco yesterday and the festival was very gorgeously performed. There were three Rathas and Lord Jagannatha's Ratha was bigger than the other two. People received us so nicely and one mayor was the chief guest in the meeting in which more than 10,000 gathered and the mayor spoke very highly of our movement. She is very much impressed with the basic principle of our back to Godhead movement. In this way we are getting support gradually in the U.S.A. Maybe our movement will be supported in the future by United Nations. So we Krishna Consciousness people have accepted a very important and responsible task in the whole world. Therefore our principle work must also be very serious and responsible.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoMadhudvisaLosAngeles29June1971_3" class="quote" parent="1971_Correspondence" book="Let" index="260" link="Letter to Madhudvisa -- Los Angeles 29 June, 1971" link_text="Letter to Madhudvisa -- Los Angeles 29 June, 1971">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Madhudvisa -- Los Angeles 29 June, 1971|Letter to Madhudvisa -- Los Angeles 29 June, 1971]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">From Paris I went directly to L.A., about 6,000 miles at one stretch and I was on the plane for 12 hours, therefore getting a one day concession. From L.A. I went to San Francisco yesterday and the Rathayatra festival was very very gorgeously performed. There were three Rathas consecutively and Lord Jagannatha's Ratha was bigger than the other two. People received us so nicely and one mayor was the chief guest in the meeting in which more than 10,000 people assembled and the mayor spoke very highly of our movement. She is very much impressed with the basic principle of our Back to Godhead movement. In this way we are getting support gradually in the U.S.A. Maybe our movement will be supported in the future by the United Nations. So we Krishna Consciousness people have accepted a very important and responsible task in the whole world, therefore, our principal work also must be very responsible.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoVamanadevaIndiraDelhi8December1971_4" class="quote" parent="1971_Correspondence" book="Let" index="563" link="Letter to Vamanadeva, Indira -- Delhi 8 December, 1971" link_text="Letter to Vamanadeva, Indira -- Delhi 8 December, 1971">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Vamanadeva, Indira -- Delhi 8 December, 1971|Letter to Vamanadeva, Indira -- Delhi 8 December, 1971]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Preaching is our first-class engagement, including Sankirtana party, selling books, speaking, like that. But if for some reason a devotee is unable to do these things, then I say that they are allowed to live outside and work as a concession. Our service for Krishna is voluntary and can never be forced.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1972_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="7" parent="Correspondence" text="1972 Correspondence"><h3>1972 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoSriGovindaJaipur20January1972_0" class="quote" parent="1972_Correspondence" book="Let" index="57" link="Letter to Sri Govinda -- Jaipur 20 January, 1972" link_text="Letter to Sri Govinda -- Jaipur 20 January, 1972">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Sri Govinda -- Jaipur 20 January, 1972|Letter to Sri Govinda -- Jaipur 20 January, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">If you and your wife want to have children for raising them in Krishna Consciousness, and if you are prepared to take the full responsibility for delivering them from the clutches of birth and death, then I have no objection. I have allowed my disciples to marry as a concession for having household life, because you American boys and girls are accustomed to mix freely with one another, so what can I do? But brahmacari life or celibacy is better, because if the semina is saved it fertilizes the brain for sharpening the memory, and if there is good memory, our Krishna Consciousness becomes perfect: hearing, chanting, remembering—that is the process.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoHarsaraniMayapur28February1972_1" class="quote" parent="1972_Correspondence" book="Let" index="121" link="Letter to Harsarani -- Mayapur 28 February, 1972" link_text="Letter to Harsarani -- Mayapur 28 February, 1972">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Harsarani -- Mayapur 28 February, 1972|Letter to Harsarani -- Mayapur 28 February, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Henceforward, anyone proposing to marry must produce some outside income and live outside the temple, they must know this in advance and be prepared to carry such burden. Let them be married, but at their own risk. I cannot sanction anymore. My Guru Maharaja never allowed, but when I came to your country it was a special circumstance so I gave concession, but I am not so much inclined anymore, so I shall not sanction, but they may marry on their own risk of knowing that such arrangement is always troublesome.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoKirtirajaMayapur28February1972_2" class="quote" parent="1972_Correspondence" book="Let" index="122" link="Letter to Kirtiraja -- Mayapur 28 February, 1972" link_text="Letter to Kirtiraja -- Mayapur 28 February, 1972">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Kirtiraja -- Mayapur 28 February, 1972|Letter to Kirtiraja -- Mayapur 28 February, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">One must be convinced that sex-life without exception means trouble, therefore he is able to stop it at the thinking stage by not allowing it to be felt, much less willed and acted. I am so much disgusted by this troublesome business of marriage, because nearly every day I receive some complaint from husband or wife, and practically this is not my business as sannyasi to be marriage counsellor, so henceforward I am not sanctioning any more marriages, and those who want to marry must know in advance and be prepared to make outside income to support wife and home separately from the temple, and in the temple husband and wife shall live separately, that must be or what is the meaning of spiritual society like ours? I made a concession, but how can I encourage something which has proven to be so much trouble?</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoGirirajaCyavanaTokyo25April1972_3" class="quote" parent="1972_Correspondence" book="Let" index="199" link="Letter to Giriraja, Cyavana -- Tokyo 25 April, 1972" link_text="Letter to Giriraja, Cyavana -- Tokyo 25 April, 1972">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Giriraja, Cyavana -- Tokyo 25 April, 1972|Letter to Giriraja, Cyavana -- Tokyo 25 April, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Another thing, your selling at Rs. 100/- 120/- is too high. At most we should ask about Rs. 80/-. Our project is to receive guests and sell flats to devotees. Indira said many there are men devotees in Bombay who are anxious for such association, so she will be very much expert in seeking out customers for the flats, so you should take all help from her, she is very important lady and also very much convinced by our philosophy. Tea-drinking may be allowed a little, but no meat, drinking, gambling, like that. So on these considerations we are prepared to give some concessional rate to devotees for living with us there.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoBhavanandaHonolulu9May1972_4" class="quote" parent="1972_Correspondence" book="Let" index="233" link="Letter to Bhavananda -- Honolulu 9 May, 1972" link_text="Letter to Bhavananda -- Honolulu 9 May, 1972">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Bhavananda -- Honolulu 9 May, 1972|Letter to Bhavananda -- Honolulu 9 May, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So far your observation that the Bengalis have been degraded by bogus so-called sadhus, yes, the Bengali's are generally fish-eaters and some are flesh-eaters, so the Ramakrishna Mission gave this concession that there is nothing harmful in eating flesh. The Bengalis got this appetite for eating flesh and fish and at the same time becoming one with God. This foolish theory and fanaticism has killed the Bengali culture. Not all, but a few percentage.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoJayapatakaHonolulu17May1972_5" class="quote" parent="1972_Correspondence" book="Let" index="261" link="Letter to Jayapataka -- Honolulu 17 May, 1972" link_text="Letter to Jayapataka -- Honolulu 17 May, 1972">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Jayapataka -- Honolulu 17 May, 1972|Letter to Jayapataka -- Honolulu 17 May, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">With this spirit we should combine. So next you can talk with them on this understanding. I can understand also that Lalita Prasad Thakura is very much favorable in giving us the concession but his assistants may be hesitating unnecessarily.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoBhagavanLosAngeles16June1972_6" class="quote" parent="1972_Correspondence" book="Let" index="326" link="Letter to Bhagavan -- Los Angeles 16 June, 1972" link_text="Letter to Bhagavan -- Los Angeles 16 June, 1972">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Bhagavan -- Los Angeles 16 June, 1972|Letter to Bhagavan -- Los Angeles 16 June, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Regarding the cars I am very much anxious to hear what is your progress in this connection. We must have some cars or vans for sending to India, so if you cannot get free we shall pay at 50% reduction or some big concession. And we shall advertise on the cars "donated by such-and-such company." That will be good diplomacy for them in India.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoGirirajaLosAngeles21June1972_7" class="quote" parent="1972_Correspondence" book="Let" index="336" link="Letter to Giriraja -- Los Angeles 21 June, 1972" link_text="Letter to Giriraja -- Los Angeles 21 June, 1972">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Giriraja -- Los Angeles 21 June, 1972|Letter to Giriraja -- Los Angeles 21 June, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">There is no question of selling the flats, as you had proposed this idea before of our own men owning the flats and leasing or renting them to devotees. Somehow or other, all of our tenants should be our devotees, and we can give them concession rents, but they should be devotees and at least in our colony there should be no violations of our rules and regulations. Actually make it a Hare Krishna land or a pilgrimage for Vaisnavas and the Indian people in general.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoTamalaKrsnaLosAngeles30September1972_8" class="quote" parent="1972_Correspondence" book="Let" index="527" link="Letter to Tamala Krsna -- Los Angeles 30 September, 1972" link_text="Letter to Tamala Krsna -- Los Angeles 30 September, 1972">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Tamala Krsna -- Los Angeles 30 September, 1972|Letter to Tamala Krsna -- Los Angeles 30 September, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">But as a matter of concession we can pay further 5 lacs of rupees, to be deducted from the total price of 14 lacs. We have already paid 2 lacs, and if we pay further 5 lacs, taking loan from others, then it is to be understood that we have paid 7 lacs on the total, and the further 7 lacs will be paid, either taking loan from the bank, failing which, in terms of the original purchase agreement as already devised there, we shall take the remaining 7 lacs as mortgage from Mr. Nair.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoGirirajaLosAngeles4October1972_9" class="quote" parent="1972_Correspondence" book="Let" index="529" link="Letter to Giriraja -- Los Angeles 4 October, 1972" link_text="Letter to Giriraja -- Los Angeles 4 October, 1972">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Giriraja -- Los Angeles 4 October, 1972|Letter to Giriraja -- Los Angeles 4 October, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">We must have that land, and on the terms of the purchase agreement. Otherwise we shall bring him to the criminal court. We are in possession of the land in legal terms, so even the government cannot take it. We can give Mr. Nair this much concession, the five lakhs worth, but it must be deducted from the purchase price. Otherwise, we shall not give any concession we shall go to the courts. You consult the lawyers. The committee. is there, I want that the land should be purchased, that's all.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoMadhudvisaBombay21December1972_10" class="quote" parent="1972_Correspondence" book="Let" index="628" link="Letter to Madhudvisa -- Bombay 21 December, 1972" link_text="Letter to Madhudvisa -- Bombay 21 December, 1972">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Madhudvisa -- Bombay 21 December, 1972|Letter to Madhudvisa -- Bombay 21 December, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Regarding you question, do mental sinful activities cause a bad reaction? The answer is no, they do not. We do not suffer for thinking something sinful. Not in this age. That is a special concession for Kali-yuga. Yes, you are correct in stating that spiritual activities, even mentally performed, are beneficial. You have seen the picture in NOD how a brahmana simply by mental service was promoted to Vaikuntha.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1974_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="9" parent="Correspondence" text="1974 Correspondence"><h3>1974 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoGurudasaPranavaCalcutta26September1974_0" class="quote" parent="1974_Correspondence" book="Let" index="439" link="Letter to Gurudasa, Pranava -- Calcutta 26 September, 1974" link_text="Letter to Gurudasa, Pranava -- Calcutta 26 September, 1974">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Gurudasa, Pranava -- Calcutta 26 September, 1974|Letter to Gurudasa, Pranava -- Calcutta 26 September, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">This is to request you to go see Sri Seth Hanuman Prasad Poddar, Churuwalla Thek, Swami Ghat, P.O. Mathura, U.P. He is the managing director of a large plot of land near Birla Mandir between Mathura and Vrindaban. He will give us 25 bighas at Mathura Gochar Bhumi as a concessional free gift. So immediately go and see the land, and if suitable then immediately take it.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoGirirajPrabhuMayapur_1" class="quote" parent="1974_Correspondence" book="Let" index="447" link="Letter to Giriraj Prabhu -- Mayapur" link_text="Letter to Giriraj Prabhu -- Mayapur">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Giriraj Prabhu -- Mayapur|Letter to Giriraj Prabhu -- Mayapur]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Regarding the Tax Comission, yes use Mr. Nair's letter that he wanted to give us the land at concession because we had no money at the time. Prabhupad replied that he would pay on installment and Nsir agreed because our cause is very great. We get so many donations of land. Prabhupad has asked me to write to Mahamsa Swami for him to send the Pulla Reddy letter. This letter from Mrs, Saroff is difficult to obtained at a later date. So you can mention the Vrindaban land in your appeal, but there are also many others. The most recent is a parcel of land donated in Orissa to ISKCON-Bombay. Enclosed please find the document. Similarly in foreign countries Bhaktivedanta Manor was given by George Harrison, and Alfred Ford is giving the Hawaii property, and when this is transaction is completed we can supply the relative documents. So because of the nature of out institution we regularly get donations of land which are not used for profit-making.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoGirirajaMayapur1October1974_2" class="quote" parent="1974_Correspondence" book="Let" index="449" link="Letter to Giriraja -- Mayapur 1 October, 1974" link_text="Letter to Giriraja -- Mayapur 1 October, 1974">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Giriraja -- Mayapur 1 October, 1974|Letter to Giriraja -- Mayapur 1 October, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Regarding the Tax Commission Notice, I understand from Mr. Sethi that at time land in the vicinity of his house was selling for Rs. 60/-, so we have not paid less. The most important point is that Mr. Nair wanted to give us the land at a concessional rate because we are a charitable institution. I have already sent under separate post (Registered), the photocopy of a land donated to us in Orissa, Bhuvaneśvara, and I have asked Mahamsa Swami to also send the photocopy of his gift deed. So we get so many donations of land, due to the charitable nature of our organization.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1975_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="10" parent="Correspondence" text="1975 Correspondence"><h3>1975 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoGirirajaPhiladelphia14July1975_0" class="quote" parent="1975_Correspondence" book="Let" index="409" link="Letter to Giriraja -- Philadelphia 14 July, 1975" link_text="Letter to Giriraja -- Philadelphia 14 July, 1975">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Giriraja -- Philadelphia 14 July, 1975|Letter to Giriraja -- Philadelphia 14 July, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Why are you making concessions to the tenants? There shall be no common area for the tenants to sit. Why are you doing this? This shall not be allowed. It is not in the Rent Act. This is all nonsense concessions. They should be placed in their rooms, that is all. We have to construct buildings on all the vacant lands. The common reading room is for the public and not for the tenants.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoGirirajaPhiladelphia14July1975_1" class="quote" parent="1975_Correspondence" book="Let" index="409" link="Letter to Giriraja -- Philadelphia 14 July, 1975" link_text="Letter to Giriraja -- Philadelphia 14 July, 1975">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Giriraja -- Philadelphia 14 July, 1975|Letter to Giriraja -- Philadelphia 14 July, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">You now have to make a program for building on all the vacant land. Every inch of available land will be built up. In the back side of my apartment the single story tenants should be induced to occupy temporarily the rooftop flats, and we shall construct a three or four story building where their houses are on their plot and shall then give them the same area to live in the new building. Now make this plan. Every drop of land must be filled with buildings. We cannot spare any land for any other purpose. Take sanction and make plans for these buildings. If the tenants become devotees and follow our principles, arising early like the others, then we can forgo their rent, but no nonsense concessions of sitting room. This is all rubbish things. So make plans for all vacant lands for buildings. We actually do not want anyone to live there who is not a devotee. Note this policy and do the needful.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoIdealAdvertisingAgencyJohannesburg22October1975_2" class="quote" parent="1975_Correspondence" book="Let" index="616" link="Letter to Ideal Advertising Agency -- Johannesburg 22 October, 1975" link_text="Letter to Ideal Advertising Agency -- Johannesburg 22 October, 1975">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Ideal Advertising Agency -- Johannesburg 22 October, 1975|Letter to Ideal Advertising Agency -- Johannesburg 22 October, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">It is understood that you are connected with all the important Eastern and Indian newspaper societies. We are interested in advertising in the important Indian daily newspapers. If you kindly send me the respective contract rates of advertising, at the same time our society being a charitable religious concern to propagate God-consciousness all over the world, if there is any special concession for us.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoAmritaPatrikaNewspaperMauritius25October1975_3" class="quote" parent="1975_Correspondence" book="Let" index="622" link="Letter to Amrita Patrika Newspaper -- Mauritius 25 October, 1975" link_text="Letter to Amrita Patrika Newspaper -- Mauritius 25 October, 1975">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Amrita Patrika Newspaper -- Mauritius 25 October, 1975|Letter to Amrita Patrika Newspaper -- Mauritius 25 October, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">We are interested in advertising in the important daily Indian newspapers. If you can kindly send me the respective contract rates of advertising, at the same time our society being a charitable religious concern to propagate God-consciousness all over the world, if there is any special concession for us.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoHinduNewspaperMauritius25October1975_5" class="quote" parent="1975_Correspondence" book="Let" index="623" link="Letter to Hindu Newspaper -- Mauritius 25 October, 1975" link_text="Letter to Hindu Newspaper -- Mauritius 25 October, 1975">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Hindu Newspaper -- Mauritius 25 October, 1975|Letter to Hindu Newspaper -- Mauritius 25 October, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">We are interested in advertising in the important daily Indian newspapers. If you can kindly send me the respective contract rates of advertising, at the same time our society being a charitable religious concern to propagate God-consciousness all over the world, if there is any special concession for us.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoTheStatesmanMauritius25October1975_4" class="quote" parent="1975_Correspondence" book="Let" index="624" link="Letter to The Statesman -- Mauritius 25 October, 1975" link_text="Letter to The Statesman -- Mauritius 25 October, 1975">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to The Statesman -- Mauritius 25 October, 1975|Letter to The Statesman -- Mauritius 25 October, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">We are interested in advertising in the important daily Indian newspapers. If you can kindly send me the respective contract rates of advertising, at the same time our society being a charitable religious concern to propagate God-consciousness all over the world, if there is any special concession for us.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoTheTimesofIndiaMauritius25October1975_6" class="quote" parent="1975_Correspondence" book="Let" index="625" link="Letter to The Times of India -- Mauritius 25 October, 1975" link_text="Letter to The Times of India -- Mauritius 25 October, 1975">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to The Times of India -- Mauritius 25 October, 1975|Letter to The Times of India -- Mauritius 25 October, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">We are interested in advertising in the important daily Indian newspapers. If you can kindly send me the respective contract rates of advertising, at the same time our society being a charitable religious concern to propagate God-consciousness all over the world, if there is any special concession for us.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1976_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="11" parent="Correspondence" text="1976 Correspondence"><h3>1976 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoRamesvaraCalcutta12January1976_0" class="quote" parent="1976_Correspondence" book="Let" index="34" link="Letter to Ramesvara -- Calcutta 12 January, 1976" link_text="Letter to Ramesvara -- Calcutta 12 January, 1976">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Ramesvara -- Calcutta 12 January, 1976|Letter to Ramesvara -- Calcutta 12 January, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">The postman will then deliver it to some respectable gentleman. Everyone who gets it will think: "I am a most respectable gentleman because he has give it to me." The best thing is to find out the customers list to some big magazine like "Time" or "Life", and post it to them. I think the post office can give concession rate for huge numbers of postings. Yes, go on adding any new important quotes in the reprinting.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoYasomatinandanaMayapur15February1976_1" class="quote" parent="1976_Correspondence" book="Let" index="140" link="Letter to Yasomatinandana -- Mayapur 15 February, 1976" link_text="Letter to Yasomatinandana -- Mayapur 15 February, 1976">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Yasomatinandana -- Mayapur 15 February, 1976|Letter to Yasomatinandana -- Mayapur 15 February, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Yes, I approve your distribution ideas, namely subscriber agents, news agents. The subscription drive is a solid program. And if you regularly publish and get registered, you can get a one or two paise charges (postal concession). All right, you may take advertisements. Go ahead and educate the public regarding our philosophy and ISKCON activities. Also in the future there are many cities such as Bombay, Surat, and Calcutta with large numbers of Gujaratis, you may arrange for getting subscriptions there. Gradually as you work there, you will get local men to join you.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoRamesvaraIndia25February1976_2" class="quote" parent="1976_Correspondence" book="Let" index="166" link="Letter to Ramesvara -- India 25 February, 1976" link_text="Letter to Ramesvara -- India 25 February, 1976">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Ramesvara -- India 25 February, 1976|Letter to Ramesvara -- India 25 February, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Sudama Vipra Maharaja is here and he has advised me that he will order 10,000 Bhagavad-gitas, abridged edition. You can give him concession rate as far as possible and he will pay cash down something.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoAmbassadoroftheofUnitedStatesofAmericaDelhi27March1976_3" class="quote" parent="1976_Correspondence" book="Let" index="210" link="Letter to Ambassador of the of United States of America -- Delhi 27 March, 1976" link_text="Letter to Ambassador of the of United States of America -- Delhi 27 March, 1976">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Ambassador of the of United States of America -- Delhi 27 March, 1976|Letter to Ambassador of the of United States of America -- Delhi 27 March, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I have seen a house situated at 12 Ring Road, New Delhi, which is your property. Immediately we need a house for our residential purposes. My disciples are mostly Americans. Our main activities are to preach philosophical and cultural literatures, a list of which is also enclosed. It is understood that the house is for sale and if you kindly give us some concession rate we can immediately pay you. So kindly do the needful. I am sending you Gurudasa Adhikari to take care of this on my behalf.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoJayapatakaVrindaban23October1976_4" class="quote" parent="1976_Correspondence" book="Let" index="581" link="Letter to Jayapataka -- Vrindaban 23 October, 1976" link_text="Letter to Jayapataka -- Vrindaban 23 October, 1976">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Jayapataka -- Vrindaban 23 October, 1976|Letter to Jayapataka -- Vrindaban 23 October, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Regarding the concessional paper, we are already getting government paper. If you want we can get as much as you require. It is already sanctioned. However many tons you require just tell Gopala Krsna and he'll do the needful.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoJayapatakaHyderabad4December1976_5" class="quote" parent="1976_Correspondence" book="Let" index="673" link="Letter to Jayapataka -- Hyderabad 4 December, 1976" link_text="Letter to Jayapataka -- Hyderabad 4 December, 1976">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Jayapataka -- Hyderabad 4 December, 1976|Letter to Jayapataka -- Hyderabad 4 December, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">If you can get concessional paper there that's alright. Do it.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1977_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="12" parent="Correspondence" text="1977 Correspondence"><h3>1977 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoKirtirajaMayapur19March1977_0" class="quote" parent="1977_Correspondence" book="Let" index="69" link="Letter to Kirtiraja -- Mayapur 19 March, 1977" link_text="Letter to Kirtiraja -- Mayapur 19 March, 1977">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Kirtiraja -- Mayapur 19 March, 1977|Letter to Kirtiraja -- Mayapur 19 March, 1977]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I am very grateful to the boy and girl who are distributing our books in Poland. Gradually, it will be alright if they are initiated. In their case some special concession may be made to encourage them, even they cannot follow so strictly. Let them continue still a little longer before initiation.</p>
</div>
</div>
</div>

Climate (Letters)

2010-09-06T10:20:04Z

Partha-sarathi:

<div id="compilation">
<div id="facts">
{{terms|"climate"|"climates"|"climatic"}}
{{notes|}}
{{compiler|Visnu Murti|Partha-sarathi}}
{{complete|ALL}}
{{first|24Nov08}}
{{last|06Sep10}}
{{totals_by_section|BG=0|SB=0|CC=0|OB=0|Lec=0|Con=0|Let=58}}
{{total|58}}
{{toc right}}
[[Category:Climate|1]]
[[Category:Compilations from Letters]]
</div>
<div id="Correspondence" class="section" sec_index="6" parent="compilation" text="Correspondence"><h2>Correspondence</h2>
</div>
<div id="1947_to_1965_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="0" parent="Correspondence" text="1947 to 1965 Correspondence"><h3>1947 to 1965 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoMrToshihiroNakanoDelhi1April1961_0" class="quote" parent="1947_to_1965_Correspondence" book="Let" index="51" link="Letter to Mr. Toshihiro Nakano -- Delhi 1 April, 1961" link_text="Letter to Mr. Toshihiro Nakano -- Delhi 1 April, 1961">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Mr. Toshihiro Nakano -- Delhi 1 April, 1961|Letter to Mr. Toshihiro Nakano -- Delhi 1 April, 1961]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">My small booklet Easy Journey to Other Planets is a novel step towards the path of cultivating Human spirit. The Russian scientists are trying to reach other planets by sputniks but such attempt is more or less utopian. There are innumerable planets, within the visible sky and each of them have different climatic conditions. Human being of this planet can hardly adjust with the climatic conditions of other planets even if he is able to reach there by the sputniks. The easy method is suggested in my book which is called Bhakti-yoga easy to be performed by any layman in any part of the world.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1967_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="2" parent="Correspondence" text="1967 Correspondence"><h3>1967 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoRupanugaSanFrancisco11February1967_0" class="quote" parent="1967_Correspondence" book="Let" index="17" link="Letter to Rupanuga -- San Francisco 11 February, 1967" link_text="Letter to Rupanuga -- San Francisco 11 February, 1967">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Rupanuga -- San Francisco 11 February, 1967|Letter to Rupanuga -- San Francisco 11 February, 1967]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Here the climate is certainly like India and I am feeling comfortable but uncomfortable also because at New York I felt at Home on account of so many beloved students like you. As you are feeling my absence so I am feeling for you. But we are all happy on account of Krishna Consciousness either here or there. May Krishna join us always in His transcendental service. I am very glad to learn that Eric has learnt Krishna Consciousness better than his parents. I thank him very much. This is the example of unsophisticated mind. The child is innocent and therefore he has taken the consciousness so quickly. And he appears to be previously practiced to such consciousness. Please help him more and it is the duty of good parents to help their children advanced in Krishna consciousness. I am glad to learn that devotees at New York are improving especially in the chanting on beads.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoDayanandaNandaraniUddhavaDelhi20September1967_1" class="quote" parent="1967_Correspondence" book="Let" index="147" link="Letter to Dayananda, Nandarani, Uddhava -- Delhi 20 September, 1967" link_text="Letter to Dayananda, Nandarani, Uddhava -- Delhi 20 September, 1967">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Dayananda, Nandarani, Uddhava -- Delhi 20 September, 1967|Letter to Dayananda, Nandarani, Uddhava -- Delhi 20 September, 1967]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Kirtanananda has experience to start a new centre and therefore I have entrusted him with this great task. I hope he will be successful there as I have given him one important letter of introduction for London. Please pray to the Lord that he may be successful. I have heard from friends that the climate of Los Angeles is warmer. For my health I require warmer climate. Whatever improvement is made here in the matter of my health it is all due to warm climate. As such I shall be pleased to know about Los Angeles with special reference to its climatic conditions.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1968_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="3" parent="Correspondence" text="1968 Correspondence"><h3>1968 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoAndreaTempleLosAngeles13January1968_0" class="quote" parent="1968_Correspondence" book="Let" index="5" link="Letter to Andrea Temple -- Los Angeles 13 January, 1968" link_text="Letter to Andrea Temple -- Los Angeles 13 January, 1968">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Andrea Temple -- Los Angeles 13 January, 1968|Letter to Andrea Temple -- Los Angeles 13 January, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Recently I have come to Los Angeles where the warmer climate is better for my health than in San Francisco. I am told the Bahama Islands are very warm year round, and I am very interested to come there. If you can find an appropriate storefront, and decorate it nicely for a Temple, with altar, pictures, candles, incense, etc., and begin holding Kirtana there, then I will come there in February to the Bahama Islands, and give lectures there in the Temple. You will be doing very good service to Krishna, and it is not very difficult to do. People will come, you will see. However, if it is not possible to do this, then I will be very happy to meet you when I go to New York in April, and to Montreal afterward.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoUmapatiLosAngeles14January1968_1" class="quote" parent="1968_Correspondence" book="Let" index="9" link="Letter to Umapati -- Los Angeles 14 January, 1968" link_text="Letter to Umapati -- Los Angeles 14 January, 1968">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Umapati -- Los Angeles 14 January, 1968|Letter to Umapati -- Los Angeles 14 January, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Since you talked with me on the telephone, I received also your letter of Dec. 30, 1967, but I could not reply the same on account of my shifting to Los Angeles. I have come here last Saturday the 6th of January. I am feeling well here because the climate is warmer. I thank you very much for your acceptance of my guidance. My guidance means Krishna's guidance. I am very poor and therefore I can pray only to Krishna for your guidance. Krishna is Absolute and we are all under His guidance but the bona fide Spiritual Master is accepted as guidance because he is transparent via media between Krishna and the devotee.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoJanardanaLosAngeles7February1968_2" class="quote" parent="1968_Correspondence" book="Let" index="46" link="Letter to Janardana -- Los Angeles 7 February, 1968" link_text="Letter to Janardana -- Los Angeles 7 February, 1968">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Janardana -- Los Angeles 7 February, 1968|Letter to Janardana -- Los Angeles 7 February, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">In the Western countries, there is no dearth of men and money, as well as intelligence, simply to get them together and our program will be successful. My present program is that I am waiting for a little warmer climate otherwise I would have gone to N.Y. without waiting further. Therefore my present program is that I shall remain in the Western Coast, Cal., during Feb. and March. Then I shall go to New York in April. When I will come there and we'll meet together. Then I will go to Boston in May, then by the month of June I will go to Montreal.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoAcyutanandaLosAngeles1March1968_3" class="quote" parent="1968_Correspondence" book="Let" index="93" link="Letter to Acyutananda -- Los Angeles 1 March, 1968" link_text="Letter to Acyutananda -- Los Angeles 1 March, 1968">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Acyutananda -- Los Angeles 1 March, 1968|Letter to Acyutananda -- Los Angeles 1 March, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">This means that you have become very much anxious to return back to USA, and I have become very much anxious to return back to USA, and I have also already sanctioned it, in reply to your last letter post-dated Feb. 21. The real thing is that you are feeling alone, and because you are so to say, child, you have become nervous. Otherwise for a preacher there is no difficulty anywhere, irrespective of climate and conditions. I came here in the month of December, and as my country is warmer to you, similarly your country is colder to me. I am also in diseased condition.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoNandaraniDayanandaSanFrancisco29March1968_4" class="quote" parent="1968_Correspondence" book="Let" index="131" link="Letter to Nandarani, Dayananda -- San Francisco 29 March, 1968" link_text="Letter to Nandarani, Dayananda -- San Francisco 29 March, 1968">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Nandarani, Dayananda -- San Francisco 29 March, 1968|Letter to Nandarani, Dayananda -- San Francisco 29 March, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">If I go however, to the Bahamas, in the meantime certainly I shall go to your place, and I shall inform you beforehand. But shortly I am visiting New York, and from there I shall go to Boston, then I may go to Montreal; this is the present program. But at the same time, I am seeking a place which will be both conducive to my health and comfortable. I understand that Florida is just prototype of Indian climate, like Bombay or elsewhere there. And I shall go, once, just to see how does it suit me. And from New York, it is nearer than San Francisco.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoKirtananandaLosAngeles18November1968_5" class="quote" parent="1968_Correspondence" book="Let" index="426" link="Letter to Kirtanananda -- Los Angeles 18 November, 1968" link_text="Letter to Kirtanananda -- Los Angeles 18 November, 1968">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Kirtanananda -- Los Angeles 18 November, 1968|Letter to Kirtanananda -- Los Angeles 18 November, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I thank you very much for your short note along with Hayagriva's letter. I am so glad to receive your note because I was a little restless for not receiving your letters since a few days. I have written already to Hayagriva about New Vrndavana how I am thinking of this place. And let us jointly endeavor for fulfilling this purpose. Yes, this climate of California, especially Los Angeles is very nice. I am always anxious to go and see the Govardhana hills in New Vrindaban and I hope Krishna will fulfill my desire as soon as possible.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoGaurasundaraLosAngeles17December1968_6" class="quote" parent="1968_Correspondence" book="Let" index="495" link="Letter to Gaurasundara -- Los Angeles 17 December, 1968" link_text="Letter to Gaurasundara -- Los Angeles 17 December, 1968">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Gaurasundara -- Los Angeles 17 December, 1968|Letter to Gaurasundara -- Los Angeles 17 December, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Better would be that you and my other dear disciples try to manage all centers as far as possible independently. For me, in my old age, moving constantly does not suit my health. The Los Angeles climate is not unsuitable for me so I am thinking of making my head-quarters here because it is very important city also. But as soon as there is the need of my presence some place I must go where I am required. On this principle please prepare to work. Regarding Govinda Dasi, she can immediately start for Hawaii if you send her the passage fare.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1969_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="4" parent="Correspondence" text="1969 Correspondence"><h3>1969 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoSyamasundaraLosAngeles11January1969_0" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="12" link="Letter to Syamasundara -- Los Angeles 11 January, 1969" link_text="Letter to Syamasundara -- Los Angeles 11 January, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Syamasundara -- Los Angeles 11 January, 1969|Letter to Syamasundara -- Los Angeles 11 January, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Today I received letters from Guru das and Mukunda, and it is understood that Mr. George Harrison is arranging for a first class temple, better than the one to be had on Baker Street. In the meantime I have received a letter from Petamber Dindayal in Guyana, and he has invited me to go there. There is an invitation to go to Hawaii also, but above all I am very much anxious to see a London temple established first. So please let me know by return mail if there is an immediate chance of my going to London. Then I shall make my program in that way. I do not mind any climatic condition there; I am quite fit, and whenever required, I am prepared to go there. You have mentioned a very encouraging invitation that my visit there will be the biggest event in London since the time of the Roman Invasion. Actually this will be so. This time there is no question of invasion, but this time, if England is prepared, they will receive something sublime which they cannot produce in their country, neither in Manchester, Glasgow, nor Edinburgh. As I stated in my last letter to you that London is still a leading city of the world, and if Mr. George Harrison cooperates with us, certainly we shall be able to deliver something sublime to the world by joint endeavor.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoHayagrivaLosAngeles12February1969_1" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="115" link="Letter to Hayagriva -- Los Angeles 12 February, 1969" link_text="Letter to Hayagriva -- Los Angeles 12 February, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Hayagriva -- Los Angeles 12 February, 1969|Letter to Hayagriva -- Los Angeles 12 February, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I have already written to them about this, but if it doesn't take place, then why not make foundation stone ceremony on that date in New Vrindaban? If the climate is not too much obstructive, then we can hold a ceremony on that day on account of Lord Caitanya's Advent and lay down the foundation stone of our New Vrindaban construction work.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoKrsnadasaLosAngeles13February1969_2" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="117" link="Letter to Krsna dasa -- Los Angeles 13 February, 1969" link_text="Letter to Krsna dasa -- Los Angeles 13 February, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Krsna dasa -- Los Angeles 13 February, 1969|Letter to Krsna dasa -- Los Angeles 13 February, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Your efforts to repeat the philosophy as it is will be successful by two things; the mercy of Krishna and the mercy of the Spiritual Master. These will keep us always fit in speaking the right thing. If the climate is suitable now in Germany, or as soon as it is so, I can immediately go to Germany. What is the temperature there now? How far are you from Switzerland? I am very much anxious to go to Europe to visit London, Germany and other places as soon as there is an opportunity. The only problem is it should not be too cold for me, an old man. So you let me know the maximum temperature at the present moment, or if in the month of March the climate will be all right. I can tolerate very nicely temperatures of 50-60 degrees.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoRupanugaLosAngeles14February1969_3" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="121" link="Letter to Rupanuga -- Los Angeles 14 February, 1969" link_text="Letter to Rupanuga -- Los Angeles 14 February, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Rupanuga -- Los Angeles 14 February, 1969|Letter to Rupanuga -- Los Angeles 14 February, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Regarding your desire to take me there for some time, it is long overdue, and if the climate is suitable, I can go now even, if you think it is necessary. For installation of the Deities, it is better to do this when I go there. Besides that, the Deity is too small for temple installation. But anyway, Krishna and Radha have come to you, and we should welcome Them and let working on the altar go on. I am glad to learn that Bhurijana is preparing to leave for North Carolina tomorrow. It is a very good attempt. I want to open hundreds of centers for preaching this Krishna Consciousness, and one who helps me in this endeavor is certainly very dear to Krishna and all of the acaryas. You have nicely written "All Glories to Lord Caitanyas Merciful Sankirtana Invasion of Europe", and you will be pleased to know that there is a newspaper article in a San Francisco paper which has the heading "Krishna Chant Startles London". So I hope that this Krishna chanting will startle the whole Western Hemisphere.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoKirtananandaLosAngeles20February1969_4" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="138" link="Letter to Kirtanananda -- Los Angeles 20 February, 1969" link_text="Letter to Kirtanananda -- Los Angeles 20 February, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Kirtanananda -- Los Angeles 20 February, 1969|Letter to Kirtanananda -- Los Angeles 20 February, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I beg to acknowledge receipt of your letter dated February 18, 1969. I thank you very much for your inviting me to New Vrindaban, but, considering the local climate as presented by you I think I shall postpone it until the end of April. I am enclosing here reply to the letter of Hayagriva and Syama devi.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoSatsvarupaHawaii8March1969_5" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="161" link="Letter to Satsvarupa -- Hawaii 8 March, 1969" link_text="Letter to Satsvarupa -- Hawaii 8 March, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Satsvarupa -- Hawaii 8 March, 1969|Letter to Satsvarupa -- Hawaii 8 March, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">This climate of Hawaii is most healthy, with sunshine and fresh sea breeze, so I think if it is possible for Jadurani to come to this climate she may improve her health nicely. Consult together on this proposal, and you can correspond with Gaurasundara and Govinda dasi here in this regard.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoPurusottamaHawaii10March1969_6" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="165" link="Letter to Purusottama -- Hawaii 10 March, 1969" link_text="Letter to Purusottama -- Hawaii 10 March, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Purusottama -- Hawaii 10 March, 1969|Letter to Purusottama -- Hawaii 10 March, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Dindayal wants me in San Francisco for a few days. So I have agreed. You can talk with him by phone & ask him to send me the passage money. As soon as I get it I shall start for San Francisco because here there is no serious engagements. Of course the climate is nice & I am keeping nice here. Karatieya is ill for indigestion. Hope you are well. Please offer my blessings to all there. The condition of the centre is not very satisfactory. So I am trying to rectify it.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoRayaramaHawaii20March1969_7" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="191" link="Letter to Rayarama -- Hawaii 20 March, 1969" link_text="Letter to Rayarama -- Hawaii 20 March, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Rayarama -- Hawaii 20 March, 1969|Letter to Rayarama -- Hawaii 20 March, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Your letter dated March 11, 1969 is in hand, and I have noted the contents. regarding Hawaii: Certainly it is very nice place, the climate is milder and there is much fresh air from the ocean and sunshine, and the sceneric position is also beautiful. I would have immediately developed a colony for press operation, but unfortunately there is no facility for conducting a press here at present. But so far I can think, your editorial staff must be situated where we have got our own press. I do not know whether it is Krishna's desire that we should start our press immediately—but the circumstances give me to understand that we must start our press immediately.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoBalabhadraBostonAllston25April1969_8" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="244" link="Letter to Balabhadra -- Boston (Allston) 25 April, 1969" link_text="Letter to Balabhadra -- Boston (Allston) 25 April, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Balabhadra -- Boston (Allston) 25 April, 1969|Letter to Balabhadra -- Boston (Allston) 25 April, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I am so glad to learn that your capatis and other preparations are attracting many guests at our love feast. Here also, as well as in Buffalo, things are improving very rapidly. I think that Hawaii is certainly a very good place for a center. While I was there, I enjoyed the climate very much. In comparison to the climate of the Eastern portion of America, Hawaii is certainly a very good place. Next time, when you get many mangoes, if you invite me I shall go there again.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoGovindaGaurasundaraAllstonMass25April1969_9" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="250" link="Letter to Govinda, Gaurasundara -- Allston, Mass 25 April, 1969" link_text="Letter to Govinda, Gaurasundara -- Allston, Mass 25 April, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Govinda, Gaurasundara -- Allston, Mass 25 April, 1969|Letter to Govinda, Gaurasundara -- Allston, Mass 25 April, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Similarly, I am also from yesterday feeling little uncomfortable on account of backache. I think the constant change of climate in Buffalo has affected my rheumatic tendencies, so today I am not feeling very well. In Buffalo we had very nice meetings, and the students, both boys and girls, were very receptive. I am so glad to learn that your center also is improving. Day by day continue to work seriously and faithfully, and it will surely grow to be a very nice center. I have talked with Jadurani yesterday, and she asked my opinion of her going to Hawaii. I advised her to go as soon as possible, and she has proposed to go there when I leave Boston. She is not very seriously ill, but she feels little ill, and with change of climate I think she will improve without any doubt.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoTamalaKrsnaAllstonMass26April1969_10" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="252" link="Letter to Tamala Krsna -- Allston, Mass 26 April, 1969" link_text="Letter to Tamala Krsna -- Allston, Mass 26 April, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Tamala Krsna -- Allston, Mass 26 April, 1969|Letter to Tamala Krsna -- Allston, Mass 26 April, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">The climate of Los Angeles is very much suitable for me, and if by Krishna's Grace we can have a nice headquarters for the Western side as planned by you, I shall be glad to place myself at your disposal. I am now seeking to sit down simply for training preachers and diverting my attention for completing the translation work of Srimad-Bhagavatam, but I do not know where Krishna will like me to do this work. But your nice plan makes me hopeful that Los Angeles may be the suitable place. We have certainly to develop the New Vrindaban plan, but side by side the Los Angeles plan should also be executed. I do not know how Krishna will help us, but your idea is very excellent.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoGopalaKrsnaAllstonMass30April1969_11" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="259" link="Letter to Gopala Krsna -- Allston, Mass 30 April, 1969" link_text="Letter to Gopala Krsna -- Allston, Mass 30 April, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Gopala Krsna -- Allston, Mass 30 April, 1969|Letter to Gopala Krsna -- Allston, Mass 30 April, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I am very glad that you are thinking of marrying. Why don't you marry one Krishna Conscious girl? I think instead of going to India, you should find out some Krishna Conscious girl, either from America or Canada. We have got so many nice girls in Krishna Consciousness, and she will help you in your further advancement. You are already accustomed to the climate in this part of the world, and you have got a nice job. Therefore, I would recommend you to get married here. Lord Ramacandra once said that wife can be found in every country. DESHE DESHE KALATRATRANI. DESHE DESHE means in every country, and KALATRATRANI means wives. So all the ksatriyas married in different countries. Of course you are not expected to have many wives in different countries, but if you have one wife in one country that does not hamper. But I recommend you to marry one Krishna Conscious girl from our group. Then you will be happy.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoKrsnadasaColumbusOhio17May1969_12" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="294" link="Letter to Krsna dasa -- Columbus, Ohio 17 May, 1969" link_text="Letter to Krsna dasa -- Columbus, Ohio 17 May, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Krsna dasa -- Columbus, Ohio 17 May, 1969|Letter to Krsna dasa -- Columbus, Ohio 17 May, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I am very pleased also to note that the Peace Formula will be printed very soon, and I am expecting it to come at any moment. I will be going to New Vrindaban in about a week, so you may send it there. The address is as follows: New Vrindaban, RD 3, Moundsville, West Virginia. You have written to say that the climate in Germany is very nice in July and August, so when Mandali Bhadra and Vrndavanesvari arrive there, you call me and I shall go there whether I am in London or the USA. So far as getting engagements, don't expect any help from Sadananda because I understand he is practically ruined by his health. So don't trouble him, and let him take full rest.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoTamalaKrsnaTittenhurst19September1969_13" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="573" link="Letter to Tamala Krsna -- Tittenhurst 19 September, 1969" link_text="Letter to Tamala Krsna -- Tittenhurst 19 September, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Tamala Krsna -- Tittenhurst 19 September, 1969|Letter to Tamala Krsna -- Tittenhurst 19 September, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">In England there is very good prospect for pushing on Krishna Consciousness. I am trying to make some arrangement with Mr. Lennon to have the facility for having this garden house. Here we can accommodate many devotees, and if the opportunity is offered to us, we can organize a very strong Sankirtana Party here and establish at least four or five branches in England. But the climate is not at all suitable for me. The idea you described in your letter about unifying the temples is very nice. I am enclosing herewith one newspaper cutting of our airport reception for your reference. Last Tuesday night we appeared on one very popular BBC television show for a forty-five minute interview, and it was very successful.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoHamsadutaTittenhurst2November1969_14" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="646" link="Letter to Hamsaduta -- Tittenhurst 2 November, 1969" link_text="Letter to Hamsaduta -- Tittenhurst 2 November, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Hamsaduta -- Tittenhurst 2 November, 1969|Letter to Hamsaduta -- Tittenhurst 2 November, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Tamala Krishna told me about such land, and he is very hopeful about getting our men in that quarter (California). So you can try for it, and if possible please let me know what is the actual situation of the land. Regarding my accepting a teaching position in Berkeley University, which is said to be the finest University in the United States, this is also a nice proposal. Actually, I want to have such position for some time in order to attract the University students. But one thing must be noted that I will not be free to take the class between 11 am and 5 pm. If that is possible, you can negotiate for such post. If actually I get such post, naturally I will have to live in Berkeley. And as you say the climate is nice there, there will be no difficulty.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoUmapatiLondon18November1969_15" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="685" link="Letter to Umapati -- London 18 November, 1969" link_text="Letter to Umapati -- London 18 November, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Umapati -- London 18 November, 1969|Letter to Umapati -- London 18 November, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">They are very nice. I understand the whole situation that you have not yet been able to find out a suitable place for living together, although Janardana is there. I think the same problem was experienced by the London devotees previously. Anyway, you will be pleased to learn that Tamala from Los Angeles has come here, and our Sankirtana Party has got some engagement in Hamburg from the 20th through the 24th of this month, so they will stay in the Hamburg temple for 4 or 5 days. Janardana wrote me in some letter a few days back asking if I can go there, but due to the climatic condition I do not wish to move further from here. So you consult amongst yourselves whether you require Tamala's and the Sankirtana Party's help. You can let them know immediately in Hamburg. The address is Internationalle Gesellschaft fur Krishna Bewusstein, 2 Hamburg 6, Bartelsstrasse 65, West Germany.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoPradyumnaLondon27November1969_16" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="703" link="Letter to Pradyumna -- London 27 November, 1969" link_text="Letter to Pradyumna -- London 27 November, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Pradyumna -- London 27 November, 1969|Letter to Pradyumna -- London 27 November, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So I am not very much sure about Syama Dasi's moving to Boston. But you and Arundhati can do it immediately. I am also going there, so we shall sit down together and call also Hayagriva and Syama Dasi to hold a nice meeting of all the editors, printers, etc. We will chalk out a nice program so that our work may go on very smoothly without any impediments, and surely Krishna will help us. So far as I am concerned, I would have been very glad to stay with all the editors and press workers in my presence, but the only consideration is the climatic influence.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1970_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="5" parent="Correspondence" text="1970 Correspondence"><h3>1970 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoBapiLosAngeles15February1970_0" class="quote" parent="1970_Correspondence" book="Let" index="97" link="Letter to Bapi -- Los Angeles 15 February, 1970" link_text="Letter to Bapi -- Los Angeles 15 February, 1970">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Bapi -- Los Angeles 15 February, 1970|Letter to Bapi -- Los Angeles 15 February, 1970]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So I welcome you and when you come here you will be at liberty to stay in any one of my preaching centers. I have got now twenty-six different centers in Europe, U.S.A., Canada, Japan, and Australia beginning from Hamburg, Germany down to Tokyo, covering about 14,000 miles. Generally I stay in Los Angeles because the climate of this city is almost like our Bengal.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoSrimanBankajiLosAngeles13March1970_1" class="quote" parent="1970_Correspondence" book="Let" index="165" link="Letter to Sriman Bankaji -- Los Angeles 13 March, 1970" link_text="Letter to Sriman Bankaji -- Los Angeles 13 March, 1970">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Sriman Bankaji -- Los Angeles 13 March, 1970|Letter to Sriman Bankaji -- Los Angeles 13 March, 1970]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I beg to thank you very much for your kind letter dated 23 February, 1970, addressed to my London center and now re-directed to me. I left London sometime by the end of December, and since then I am staying here which is my headquarters. Here we have got the biggest center for training preachers, and the climate here is quite suitable for us (Indian).</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoHayagrivaBombay8November1970_2" class="quote" parent="1970_Correspondence" book="Let" index="578" link="Letter to Hayagriva -- Bombay 8 November, 1970" link_text="Letter to Hayagriva -- Bombay 8 November, 1970">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Hayagriva -- Bombay 8 November, 1970|Letter to Hayagriva -- Bombay 8 November, 1970]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Here I am working in Bombay to establish one Krishna Consciousness Headquarters for India. There are many big influential industrialists in Bombay and the climate is very nice. So it Krishna desires, we will have a temple here. If I get such a nice temple, I may call all the men who are in India to come here, and at that time you may come also. Presently Hamsaduta, Acyutananda Swami, Jayapataka Swami, Madhudvisa Swami, and some others are in Calcutta. Kirtanananda Swami is with Ramananda in Gorakhpur and Gurudasa and Yamuna with some other devotees are in Delhi. So everyone here is trying to establish a temple and we will see where Krishna wants us to have it.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1971_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="6" parent="Correspondence" text="1971 Correspondence"><h3>1971 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoVamanadevaBombay25March1971_0" class="quote" parent="1971_Correspondence" book="Let" index="119" link="Letter to Vamanadeva -- Bombay 25 March, 1971" link_text="Letter to Vamanadeva -- Bombay 25 March, 1971">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Vamanadeva -- Bombay 25 March, 1971|Letter to Vamanadeva -- Bombay 25 March, 1971]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">You have got so many Tulasi plants there. Very nice. So you can grow more. Is the climate suitable for growing? Hawaii is undoubtedly suitable but St. Louis also? Anyway, it is growing, and that is mother Tulasi's great favor.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoMadhudvisaLondon14August1971_1" class="quote" parent="1971_Correspondence" book="Let" index="357" link="Letter to Madhudvisa -- London 14 August, 1971" link_text="Letter to Madhudvisa -- London 14 August, 1971">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Madhudvisa -- London 14 August, 1971|Letter to Madhudvisa -- London 14 August, 1971]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Yes, we can hold in Madras a ceremony similar to the one we held in Bombay and Calcutta. In all probability I shall be in India by the end of September. Maybe earlier also because London climate is very much unsuitable for me. It is always damp, dark, and cold. So very soon either I will have to go back to N.Y. or towards India. Syamasundara. is contemplating that we go to Switzerland. What is the climatic condition in Bombay now?</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoTamalaKrsnaLondon14August1971_2" class="quote" parent="1971_Correspondence" book="Let" index="363" link="Letter to Tamala Krsna -- London 14 August, 1971" link_text="Letter to Tamala Krsna -- London 14 August, 1971">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Tamala Krsna -- London 14 August, 1971|Letter to Tamala Krsna -- London 14 August, 1971]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">The climate here in London is not at all suitable for me. There is no sunshine. Almost always there is darkness and rain. So it has affected my health, because I am already rheumatic.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoDrBaliKenya9September1971_3" class="quote" parent="1971_Correspondence" book="Let" index="452" link="Letter to Dr. Bali -- Kenya 9 September, 1971" link_text="Letter to Dr. Bali -- Kenya 9 September, 1971">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Dr. Bali -- Kenya 9 September, 1971|Letter to Dr. Bali -- Kenya 9 September, 1971]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">One S. Indian gentleman, Mr. Cheety, came to see my in L.A. when I was there and he has invited me to go to his place. I had promised him that I am going there during my Madras tour in October. Formerly also when I talked with Vaijyantimala, she also said that October would be first class climate for going there. But now the program is changed, so I have no idea about the programs in India.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoBalimardanaNairobiOctober91971_4" class="quote" parent="1971_Correspondence" book="Let" index="488" link="Letter to Bali-mardana -- Nairobi October 9, 1971" link_text="Letter to Bali-mardana -- Nairobi October 9, 1971">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Bali-mardana -- Nairobi October 9, 1971|Letter to Bali-mardana -- Nairobi October 9, 1971]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I have not heard for many days about Kuala Lumpur activities and also Hong Kong. I hope you might have received news from them. So I wish that you may stay for some time in Delhi to recoup your health. Delhi climate is now very good. So you take in the morning sugar candy juice. Just soak some sugar candy overnight in water and take early in the morning and that will help you. Don't take any fatty vegetables (too much ghee and spices). Take green vegetables in salad with lime juice. Green papaya boiled is also nice.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1972_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="7" parent="Correspondence" text="1972 Correspondence"><h3>1972 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoVaikunthanathaCalcutta21February1972_0" class="quote" parent="1972_Correspondence" book="Let" index="109" link="Letter to Vaikunthanatha -- Calcutta 21 February, 1972" link_text="Letter to Vaikunthanatha -- Calcutta 21 February, 1972">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Vaikunthanatha -- Calcutta 21 February, 1972|Letter to Vaikunthanatha -- Calcutta 21 February, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Below we are having in Bombay a very, very nice temple, with continuous bhoga being offered throughout the day so that dwellers in the apartments can take prasada whenever they want and they will be offered all varieties to please everyone. I have heard that Americans like to go to the Caribbean islands in the winter where it is very warm, so if they are devotees also, as we may gradually recruit them, they may want to have their apartments there to take advantage of the climate and the pure devotional atmosphere at the same time. So let us see what develops.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoDonLosAngeles20May1972_1" class="quote" parent="1972_Correspondence" book="Let" index="265" link="Letter to Don -- Los Angeles 20 May, 1972" link_text="Letter to Don -- Los Angeles 20 May, 1972">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Don -- Los Angeles 20 May, 1972|Letter to Don -- Los Angeles 20 May, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I am especially engladdened that you have gone to such cold climate as northern Canada and despite all difficulty you are making good progress in the advancement of Krishna Consciousness there. I have read your booklet with great pleasure and I am forwarding it to Back to Godhead for publishing.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1973_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="8" parent="Correspondence" text="1973 Correspondence"><h3>1973 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoDinatariniBombay4January1973_0" class="quote" parent="1973_Correspondence" book="Let" index="8" link="Letter to Dinatarini -- Bombay 4 January, 1973" link_text="Letter to Dinatarini -- Bombay 4 January, 1973">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Dinatarini -- Bombay 4 January, 1973|Letter to Dinatarini -- Bombay 4 January, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So far geography and history are concerned, you may teach geography as it is, there is no harm to getting knowledge about our material earth planet, even up to learning all of the countries and places, names, landscape, production, natural resources, climates, oceans, deserts, everything should be there. Krsna Consciousness devotees shall not be known as fools. All of you nice boys and girls have had that kind of education, and you are preaching now Krsna consciousness in its pure form, so there is no hindrance for learning such things, just as you have also learned them as child. So teach them in this way, exactly as you have also been taught geography, history and other things.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoSudamaNewYork8April1973_1" class="quote" parent="1973_Correspondence" book="Let" index="119" link="Letter to Sudama -- New York 8 April, 1973" link_text="Letter to Sudama -- New York 8 April, 1973">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Sudama -- New York 8 April, 1973|Letter to Sudama -- New York 8 April, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I am still in New York, but if the climate is not suitable, I may be going to Los Angeles very soon.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoSatsvarupaLosAngeles19April1973_2" class="quote" parent="1973_Correspondence" book="Let" index="139" link="Letter to Satsvarupa -- Los Angeles 19 April, 1973" link_text="Letter to Satsvarupa -- Los Angeles 19 April, 1973">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Satsvarupa -- Los Angeles 19 April, 1973|Letter to Satsvarupa -- Los Angeles 19 April, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Regarding Gurukula, it is not required that parents live there with there children. We can take care of the children, but not the parents. Any parents there must be engaged preaching and selling books, and going on the Sankirtana party. Mohanananda Prabhu has agreed to fully cooperate, now you just direct him. I just want that the children learn English and Sanskrit nicely, that's all. I want that things go on there nicely, it is so important work. If necessary I will come there myself to see how it is going, but only if the climate is suitable, neither too hot nor too cold. This Los Angeles climate is just suitable for me.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoBhavanandaLosAngeles13May1973_3" class="quote" parent="1973_Correspondence" book="Let" index="180" link="Letter to Bhavananda -- Los Angeles 13 May, 1973" link_text="Letter to Bhavananda -- Los Angeles 13 May, 1973">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Bhavananda -- Los Angeles 13 May, 1973|Letter to Bhavananda -- Los Angeles 13 May, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Last time when I was in Calcutta, the great ayurvedic physician Bimalananda Tarkatirtha felt my pulse and he said there is something very wrong within me but I left the next day. Unfortunately since I have come to the Western countries beginning from Zurich (Switzerland) then to New York then Los Angeles, but everywhere the climate is not at all suitable for me. I have received one letter from Madhavananda who was instructed by the physician that I should come back to India immediately. So I am coming back, and I will stay at Mayapur. Last time when I was there I left with you some instruction namely fixing the closet doors, iron bars on the windows and I hope you have these all finished by this time as well as the toilet facilities. I was pleased to learn from Madhavananda that he collected Rs. 42,000/. in one month for Mayapur construction. I hope things are going on nicely without any scarcity of money.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoCandanacaryaKasturikaDallas20May1973_4" class="quote" parent="1973_Correspondence" book="Let" index="191" link="Letter to Candanacarya, Kasturika -- Dallas 20 May, 1973" link_text="Letter to Candanacarya, Kasturika -- Dallas 20 May, 1973">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Candanacarya, Kasturika -- Dallas 20 May, 1973|Letter to Candanacarya, Kasturika -- Dallas 20 May, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Now I am in Dallas and the climate here is very suitable with plenty of good sunshine. I shall remain here for a few days and if my health improves there will be no need for my going back to India.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoKarandharaMayapur8June1973_5" class="quote" parent="1973_Correspondence" book="Let" index="205" link="Letter to Karandhara -- Mayapur 8 June, 1973" link_text="Letter to Karandhara -- Mayapur 8 June, 1973">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Karandhara -- Mayapur 8 June, 1973|Letter to Karandhara -- Mayapur 8 June, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Yes, in Mayapur I am much improved from how I was in Los Angeles. The great advantage here is that there is always open air and a good breeze which is naturally very good for any breathing difficulties. The coughing is almost gone, but still sometimes at night it gives a little trouble. So I am under the treatment of one of the best physicians in Calcutta. I am taking this medicine and am gradually improving. Certainly Mayapur is by far a better place than Los Angeles because you can enjoy the free air here. The climate is not too hot, but a little moist with humidity but on the whole it is very pleasing. Our building is most superexcellently situated, and it is the experience of many respectable outsiders that while the outer atmosphere is unbearably hot, in our building it is pleasing.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoSudamaBombay10December1973_6" class="quote" parent="1973_Correspondence" book="Let" index="330" link="Letter to Sudama -- Bombay 10 December, 1973" link_text="Letter to Sudama -- Bombay 10 December, 1973">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Sudama -- Bombay 10 December, 1973|Letter to Sudama -- Bombay 10 December, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So far your health is concerned, Hawaii is very good climate. You can take bath in the sea, and that will keep your health. Take dhal, especially urd, arhad, and tour, a little cheese, peanuts, green vegetables, especially squash leaf.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1974_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="9" parent="Correspondence" text="1974 Correspondence"><h3>1974 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoMuralidharaParis9June1974_0" class="quote" parent="1974_Correspondence" book="Let" index="235" link="Letter to Muralidhara -- Paris 9 June, 1974" link_text="Letter to Muralidhara -- Paris 9 June, 1974">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Muralidhara -- Paris 9 June, 1974|Letter to Muralidhara -- Paris 9 June, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I am sorry to hear of your wife's poor health. You have tried so many treatments, pills and better climates and visits to doctors, but there is no improvement. I think you can admit her to the hospital on a longer term basis for recooping her health. You should not expect to have children until she is in good health.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoJayatirthaVrindaban14September1974_1" class="quote" parent="1974_Correspondence" book="Let" index="403" link="Letter to Jayatirtha -- Vrindaban 14 September, 1974" link_text="Letter to Jayatirtha -- Vrindaban 14 September, 1974">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Jayatirtha -- Vrindaban 14 September, 1974|Letter to Jayatirtha -- Vrindaban 14 September, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I like Hawaii very much. Somehow or other secure that house. I am anxious to go there. Although I am Indian I see now that the Indian climate does not suit me very much. The sickness I had, I never had such experience in the foreign countries. I think the dangerous point is now over, and I am improving slowly. Not only that but several members have fallen sick in this season in Vrindaban. I am very much anxious for all of them. Even Srutakirti has to return. His health is not very suitable. Similarly Bharadraja has also fallen sick. So kindly arrange for their dispatch to L.A.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1975_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="10" parent="Correspondence" text="1975 Correspondence"><h3>1975 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoBonMaharajaHonolulu5June1975_0" class="quote" parent="1975_Correspondence" book="Let" index="302" link="Letter to Bon Maharaja -- Honolulu 5 June, 1975" link_text="Letter to Bon Maharaja -- Honolulu 5 June, 1975">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Bon Maharaja -- Honolulu 5 June, 1975|Letter to Bon Maharaja -- Honolulu 5 June, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">One of my disciples informed me that you had been in our Toronto temple. Now, I invite you to come to Hawaii. The climate is very nice here and I wish that we may pass a few days together in this nice climate.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoMahamsaBombay17August1975_1" class="quote" parent="1975_Correspondence" book="Let" index="465" link="Letter to Mahamsa -- Bombay 17 August, 1975" link_text="Letter to Mahamsa -- Bombay 17 August, 1975">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Mahamsa -- Bombay 17 August, 1975|Letter to Mahamsa -- Bombay 17 August, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">You may construct a library and a meditation hall to please the donors, but as far as possible the library should carry our books and books of other Vaisnava acaryas. The meditation hall you may put pictures of Krishna on all four sides. The construction may start as soon as you have raised enough money to local help. If the climate there is nice, then I may also come there.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoSvarupaDamodaraBombay12November1975_2" class="quote" parent="1975_Correspondence" book="Let" index="672" link="Letter to Svarupa Damodara -- Bombay 12 November, 1975" link_text="Letter to Svarupa Damodara -- Bombay 12 November, 1975">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Svarupa Damodara -- Bombay 12 November, 1975|Letter to Svarupa Damodara -- Bombay 12 November, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Regarding your letter of September 21, yes, it is a very good idea to have a meeting at the Mayapur meeting time to thoroughly discuss the Bhaktivedanta Institute. So please do the needful. It will be a great service if you can organize such an Institute in the U.S.A. In Dallas there is one former army base which is now vacant that has a number of buildings and enough land. It is located about 70 miles from the city of Dallas. So you should immediately correspond with Jagadisa. It is very big and nice. I think we should take it for the Bhaktivedanta Institute. The climate there is also nice.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoBhagavanBombay14November1975_3" class="quote" parent="1975_Correspondence" book="Let" index="682" link="Letter to Bhagavan -- Bombay 14 November, 1975" link_text="Letter to Bhagavan -- Bombay 14 November, 1975">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Bhagavan -- Bombay 14 November, 1975|Letter to Bhagavan -- Bombay 14 November, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Regarding Rome, that is very good that you have 50 devotees. Are they all Italian? Yes, that is nice that you are looking for a new building in Rome. Rome is a crowded city. We must have there a very big building. The climate there is also nice. It is always sunny. In Rome I have seen many houses exactly like Indian houses. Also in Paris I have seen this. I have received the Italian new literatures and they are very, very nice. Thank you very much.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1976_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="11" parent="Correspondence" text="1976 Correspondence"><h3>1976 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoAbhiramaBombay9January1976_0" class="quote" parent="1976_Correspondence" book="Let" index="18" link="Letter to Abhirama -- Bombay 9 January, 1976" link_text="Letter to Abhirama -- Bombay 9 January, 1976">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Abhirama -- Bombay 9 January, 1976|Letter to Abhirama -- Bombay 9 January, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Now you have got very excellent land, so develop it very nicely. Miami is a tropical climate, so it should be made very lush with fruit and flower trees. I was very glad to see how your temple is now amongst the big leaders of book distribution. This is a sure sign of spiritual strength, for where there is preaching there must be life. Please go on increasing more and more the book distribution. You are working in the right direction.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoHamsadutaHonolulu29May1976_1" class="quote" parent="1976_Correspondence" book="Let" index="317" link="Letter to Hamsaduta -- Honolulu 29 May, 1976" link_text="Letter to Hamsaduta -- Honolulu 29 May, 1976">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Hamsaduta -- Honolulu 29 May, 1976|Letter to Hamsaduta -- Honolulu 29 May, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">In Solan, if possible take the offer by the Babaji. Land in that part of the country is very nice, with nice climate also. Yes, it will be a good idea if he can give over the asrama to us.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoGargamuniLosAngeles7June1976_2" class="quote" parent="1976_Correspondence" book="Let" index="338" link="Letter to Gargamuni -- Los Angeles 7 June, 1976" link_text="Letter to Gargamuni -- Los Angeles 7 June, 1976">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Gargamuni -- Los Angeles 7 June, 1976|Letter to Gargamuni -- Los Angeles 7 June, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">In the hot climates, hold programs at nightime, and the daytime can be used for resting. Also, green mango sherbet can be prepared. Roast the green mango, and take out the pulp. Mix this pulp with a little salt, black pepper, sugar, and make a liquid by adding some water, then drink it. This will give protection from stroke from the heat.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoGauraGovindaVrindaban18September1976_3" class="quote" parent="1976_Correspondence" book="Let" index="509" link="Letter to Gaura Govinda -- Vrindaban 18 September, 1976" link_text="Letter to Gaura Govinda -- Vrindaban 18 September, 1976">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Gaura Govinda -- Vrindaban 18 September, 1976|Letter to Gaura Govinda -- Vrindaban 18 September, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I have three questions: I may come there by the middle of October, what is the climate like? I have heard that there is a famous fountain there whose waters are very digestive for people who are sick and it is a good tonic, is this true, do you know of this? Did you register the lands, complete the forms?</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoVidyaVrindaban25October1976_4" class="quote" parent="1976_Correspondence" book="Let" index="598" link="Letter to Vidya -- Vrindaban 25 October, 1976" link_text="Letter to Vidya -- Vrindaban 25 October, 1976">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Vidya -- Vrindaban 25 October, 1976|Letter to Vidya -- Vrindaban 25 October, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">If it is not possible for Tulasi to survive the winters when planted in the ground, then a suitable house should be provided for her. Even in the Canadian temples which are in a much colder climate are keeping Tulasi nicely. Why should there be so much difficulty in Los Angeles, which has such a nice climate. Just do everything very carefully. Tulasi flourishes where there is love and devotion.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoGauraGovindaVrindaban17November1976_5" class="quote" parent="1976_Correspondence" book="Let" index="646" link="Letter to Gaura Govinda -- Vrindaban 17 November, 1976" link_text="Letter to Gaura Govinda -- Vrindaban 17 November, 1976">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Gaura Govinda -- Vrindaban 17 November, 1976|Letter to Gaura Govinda -- Vrindaban 17 November, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">What is the climate like there in Bhuvaneśvara now? I want to come there. I want to begin work immediately on constructing a temple exactly like Jagannatha's temple in Puri. You can immediately begin to get estimates from contractors. It will be a very important temple.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1977_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="12" parent="Correspondence" text="1977 Correspondence"><h3>1977 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoGirirajaNewDelhi11May1977_0" class="quote" parent="1977_Correspondence" book="Let" index="110" link="Letter to Giriraja -- New Delhi 11 May, 1977" link_text="Letter to Giriraja -- New Delhi 11 May, 1977">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Giriraja -- New Delhi 11 May, 1977|Letter to Giriraja -- New Delhi 11 May, 1977]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Yes, my health is improving a very little. The house that we have been given is the best in Risikesh. It is very nice and the climate is much better than Bombay's. Many persons are coming in the afternoons for darsana. I hope this meets you well.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoRamesvaraNewDelhi11May1977_1" class="quote" parent="1977_Correspondence" book="Let" index="111" link="Letter to Ramesvara -- New Delhi 11 May, 1977" link_text="Letter to Ramesvara -- New Delhi 11 May, 1977">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Ramesvara -- New Delhi 11 May, 1977|Letter to Ramesvara -- New Delhi 11 May, 1977]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I am staying here in Risikesh in the best house. It is situated just on the Ganges and the climate is very first-class. Many persons are coming in the afternoon for darsana, and in every case they are going away very much impressed that our movement is not some concoction.</p>
</div>
</div>
</div>

Preaching Krsna consciousness (Letters)

2010-09-04T09:26:01Z

Partha-sarathi:

<div id="compilation">
<div id="facts">
{{terms|"preach krishna consciousness"|"preach krsna consciousness"|"preached Krsna consciousness"|"preached krishna consciousness"|"preached krsna consciousness"|"preaches krsna consciousness"|"preaching krishna consciousness"|"preaching krsna consciousness"}}
{{notes|}}
{{compiler|Visnu Murti|Partha-sarathi}}
{{complete|ALL}}
{{first|12Aug10}}
{{last|04Sep10}}
{{totals_by_section|BG=0|SB=0|CC=0|OB=0|Lec=0|Con=0|Let=77}}
{{total|77}}
{{toc right}}
[[Category:Preaching Krsna Consciousness|1]]
[[Category:Compilations from Letters]]
</div>
<div id="Correspondence" class="section" sec_index="6" parent="compilation" text="Correspondence"><h2>Correspondence</h2>
</div>
<div id="1967_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="2" parent="Correspondence" text="1967 Correspondence"><h3>1967 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoMrFultonSanFrancisco3April1967_0" class="quote" parent="1967_Correspondence" book="Let" index="56" link="Letter to Mr. Fulton -- San Francisco 3 April, 1967" link_text="Letter to Mr. Fulton -- San Francisco 3 April, 1967">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Mr. Fulton -- San Francisco 3 April, 1967|Letter to Mr. Fulton -- San Francisco 3 April, 1967]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Thanking you once more and awaiting your early reply. I am returning to New York on the 9th April 1967 by United Air Line.</p>
<p>Yours sincerely,</p>
<p>A.C. Bhaktivedanta Swami</p>
<p>Enclosure: Signed Agreement & eight other papers.</p>
<p>This is to certify that His Holiness Tridandi-Swami Bhaktivedanta Swami Maharaja is a bona fide initiated disciple of His Divine Grace Sri Srimad Bhaktisiddhanta Sarasvati Prabhupada, the Founder-Acarya of the Gaudiya Math Institutions and in November 1959 he took Sannyasam (renounced order of life) from His Holiness Tridandi Swami Bhakti Prajnan Kesava Maharaja, the Founder-President of the Gaudiya Vedanta Society. He is therefore an authorized Preacher and Teacher in the line of disciplic succession from Lord Caitanya Mahaprabhu, who preached Krishna Consciousness all over India about 500 years ago and authorized His all disciplic successors to preach the Philosophy of Bhagavad-gita and Srimad-Bhagavatam in all towns and villages of the world. It is a great pleasure for all members of the Gaudiya Vaisnava Vedantists that Tridandi Swami Bhaktivedanta Swami Maharaja is engaged in preaching the cult in the western world.</p>
<p>Swami B. V. Narayana</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoMukundaNewYork10June1967_1" class="quote" parent="1967_Correspondence" book="Let" index="100" link="Letter to Mukunda -- New York 10 June, 1967" link_text="Letter to Mukunda -- New York 10 June, 1967">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Mukunda -- New York 10 June, 1967|Letter to Mukunda -- New York 10 June, 1967]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">The idea is that if I get that permanent visa, then I shall settle things up in that way. I do not mind whether I am in the U.S.A. or Vrndavana, because my life and soul is to preach Krishna Consciousness; but if you think those certificates are not sufficient for my permanent visa after consulting gentlemen like Mr. Dhar or others whom you are consulting, then I shall think of going back to India.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoDayanandaNewYork22July1967_2" class="quote" parent="1967_Correspondence" book="Let" index="110" link="Letter to Dayananda -- New York 22 July, 1967" link_text="Letter to Dayananda -- New York 22 July, 1967">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Dayananda -- New York 22 July, 1967|Letter to Dayananda -- New York 22 July, 1967]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">May Krishna bless you more and more so that your ambition to preach Krishna Consciousness may be successfully carried out. Both you and your wife, Nandarani, are very intelligent, and I have several times received her letters, and she is also making very good progress. It is the Grace of Lord Krishna that He has put me in contact with so many rare souls who are taking Krishna Consciousness in all seriousness, and I am confident that in the future all my student boys and girls will preach this Krishna Consciousness in the western world more successfully.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoBrahmanandaDelhi4October1967_3" class="quote" parent="1967_Correspondence" book="Let" index="164" link="Letter to Brahmananda -- Delhi 4 October, 1967" link_text="Letter to Brahmananda -- Delhi 4 October, 1967">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Brahmananda -- Delhi 4 October, 1967|Letter to Brahmananda -- Delhi 4 October, 1967]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Regarding Ambassador Nehru I am especially interested in him because he wanted to help me in getting my permanent visa. Please try to utilize him in some way or other to get this visa otherwise I am quite fit to return to your place. I am always anxious to be with you for the remaining days of my life, preaching Krishna Consciousness in the Western World. This time I shall go with the determination for my mission in the Western World & try & get me a permanent visa or immigration papers—whichever is easiest. I think you have my certificates in my apartment & you can utilize them. Two very important things are resting with you. First arrangement with MacMillan and second to get my permanent visa. You are very sincere and Krishna will certainly help you in this attempt. I have duly received the bank receipt along with the letter.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoHayagrivaCalcutta19October1967_4" class="quote" parent="1967_Correspondence" book="Let" index="188" link="Letter to Hayagriva -- Calcutta 19 October, 1967" link_text="Letter to Hayagriva -- Calcutta 19 October, 1967">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Hayagriva -- Calcutta 19 October, 1967|Letter to Hayagriva -- Calcutta 19 October, 1967]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So your desire to teach Krishna Consciousness to the students instead of English is very nice & Krishna will be bestowing his blessings upon you for your thinking in that way. From my part as I am your ever well-wisher I wish that you may preach Krishna Consciousness to the students of the entire western world. You are a sincere soul & both your mother Father are happy to see you in Krishna Consciousness. Please continue this attitude throughout your life & you will be blessed not only in this life but in your next eternal life in association with Krishna. Krishna has given you a very nice chance in the city of Wilkes-Barre Penn. & the idea of purchasing land as you have suggested is very nice.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoKrsnaDeviNavadvipa29October1967_5" class="quote" parent="1967_Correspondence" book="Let" index="200" link="Letter to Krsna Devi -- Navadvipa 29 October, 1967" link_text="Letter to Krsna Devi -- Navadvipa 29 October, 1967">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Krsna Devi -- Navadvipa 29 October, 1967|Letter to Krsna Devi -- Navadvipa 29 October, 1967]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I was very glad to receive your letter dated Oct. 20. I can understand your anxiety about your husband & rest assured that I shall never advise your husband to leave you. Both of you are very good souls & constantly engaged in the service of the Lord. One who has got a helpful wife at home does not require to accept Sannyas. If required, both you and your husband can preach Krishna Consciousness combinedly. We are concerned more for Krishna Consciousness & if that work is executed more nicely by cooperation of husband & wife, there is no necessity of thinking wife as impediment to Krishna Consciousness. While I am living you should act according to my instructions & there is no question of impediment.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoBrahmanandaCalcutta11November1967_6" class="quote" parent="1967_Correspondence" book="Let" index="211" link="Letter to Brahmananda -- Calcutta 11 November, 1967" link_text="Letter to Brahmananda -- Calcutta 11 November, 1967">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Brahmananda -- Calcutta 11 November, 1967|Letter to Brahmananda -- Calcutta 11 November, 1967]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Gradually Kirtanananda and Hayagriva joined but they did not take any responsibility. Still I was maintaining the establishment simply depending on Krishna and then Krishna sent me everything—men and money. Similarly, if a sincere soul goes out and opens a center in any part of the world Krishna will help him in all respects. Without being empowered by Krishna, nobody can preach Krishna Consciousness. It is not academic qualification or financial strength which helps in these matters, but it is sincerity of purpose which helps us always.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoSubalaCalcutta12November1967_7" class="quote" parent="1967_Correspondence" book="Let" index="213" link="Letter to Subala -- Calcutta 12 November, 1967" link_text="Letter to Subala -- Calcutta 12 November, 1967">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Subala -- Calcutta 12 November, 1967|Letter to Subala -- Calcutta 12 November, 1967]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Still, I was maintaining the establishment simply depending on Krishna and then Krishna sent me everything; men & money. Similarly, if a sincere soul goes out and opens a center in any part of the part, Krishna will help him in all respects. Without being empowered by Krishna nobody can preach Krishna Consciousness. It is not academic qualification or financial strength which helps in the matter, but it is sincerity of purpose which helps us always. Therefore I wish that you will remain in charge of Boston. Let Mukunda be in charge of San Francisco.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoBrahmanandaCalcutta18November1967_8" class="quote" parent="1967_Correspondence" book="Let" index="218" link="Letter to Brahmananda -- Calcutta 18 November, 1967" link_text="Letter to Brahmananda -- Calcutta 18 November, 1967">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Brahmananda -- Calcutta 18 November, 1967|Letter to Brahmananda -- Calcutta 18 November, 1967]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I hope therefore they will not go astray and the misunderstanding may be cleared up in due course of time. (Even amongst our God-brothers we have misunderstanding but none of us is astray from the service of Krishna. My Guru Maharaja ordered us to execute his mission combinedly. Unfortunately we are now separated. But none of us have stopped preaching Krishna Consciousness. Even if there was misunderstanding amongst the God-brothers of my Guru Maharaja none of them deviated from the transcendental loving service of Krishna.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoBrahmanandaCalcutta12December1967_9" class="quote" parent="1967_Correspondence" book="Let" index="231" link="Letter to Brahmananda -- Calcutta 12 December, 1967" link_text="Letter to Brahmananda -- Calcutta 12 December, 1967">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Brahmananda -- Calcutta 12 December, 1967|Letter to Brahmananda -- Calcutta 12 December, 1967]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I've also noted down your program for European tour. I am very glad that you are preparing the ground work for starting our centers in London, Amsterdam and Berlin. It may be that we can add another in Tokyo. Yes, we must have hundreds of such branches for preaching Krishna Consciousness all over the world. I have already made arrangements for supply of Saris, incense, musical instruments, mrdangams, karatalas, spices, etc. I am also arranging to print 2 volumes of Srimad-Bhagavatam in Delhi. Acyutananda and Ramanuja are going back to Vrindaban on the 15th after sending me off for San Francisco.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoMadhusudanaSanFrancisco30December1967_10" class="quote" parent="1967_Correspondence" book="Let" index="255" link="Letter to Madhusudana -- San Francisco 30 December, 1967" link_text="Letter to Madhusudana -- San Francisco 30 December, 1967">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Madhusudana -- San Francisco 30 December, 1967|Letter to Madhusudana -- San Francisco 30 December, 1967]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I am very glad that you are prepared to go to Vrindaban. Many students, boys and girls, are also prepared here to go to Vrindaban. I am just in negotiation for a good place for you and as soon as it is fixed up, we shall go to Vrindaban, at least one dozen students. Acyutananda and Ramanuja had very good reception and they are planning to preach Krishna Consciousness and to open a branch there, and I have encouraged them in that idea. My dream is that at least one dozen students shall remain in Vrindaban and trained up nicely, and sent for preaching work all over the world.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1968_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="3" parent="Correspondence" text="1968 Correspondence"><h3>1968 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoMadhusudanaLosAngeles1February1968_0" class="quote" parent="1968_Correspondence" book="Let" index="40" link="Letter to Madhusudana -- Los Angeles 1 February, 1968" link_text="Letter to Madhusudana -- Los Angeles 1 February, 1968">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Madhusudana -- Los Angeles 1 February, 1968|Letter to Madhusudana -- Los Angeles 1 February, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Yes, the verse concerning Arca Vigraha is like this: "arcasiladhir gurusu naramati vaisnave jati budhi." The meaning is that one should not think of the Deity as made of stone, wood, etc. Another verse is, "Archaiam Evam Paria Ja Pujan Sadraya Hatay." The meaning is that one who worships the Deity with great devotion but doesn't show any devotion to the devotees of the Lord, or doesn't preach Krishna Consciousness for the benefit of the general public, he is in the lower stage of devotional service.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoKarunamayiLosAngeles25February1968_1" class="quote" parent="1968_Correspondence" book="Let" index="85" link="Letter to Karunamayi -- Los Angeles 25 February, 1968" link_text="Letter to Karunamayi -- Los Angeles 25 February, 1968">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Karunamayi -- Los Angeles 25 February, 1968|Letter to Karunamayi -- Los Angeles 25 February, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So long we are engaged in the service of the Lord, He has assured us all protection. But if we are attacked, of course we must defend ourselves as best we can. Nobody can compare with the Merciful Nityananda. He can defend Himself quite well; He could have killed the sinners in an instant, but He had decided that He wanted to save these sinners. He was setting an example that we have to preach Krishna Consciousness even at the risk of personal violence. Just like the children sometimes become violent, but the father knows he can defend himself at any time, and so he tries to teach them correctly by reprimanding them.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoAniruddhaAllstonMass30May1968_2" class="quote" parent="1968_Correspondence" book="Let" index="178" link="Letter to Aniruddha -- Allston, Mass 30 May, 1968" link_text="Letter to Aniruddha -- Allston, Mass 30 May, 1968">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Aniruddha -- Allston, Mass 30 May, 1968|Letter to Aniruddha -- Allston, Mass 30 May, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Regarding your personal sentiments not being in agreement with Umapati: I am very sorry that this thing has happened. We are preaching Krishna Consciousness, the greatest platform of harmony, and if we dissent amongst ourselves, and disunite, it doesn't look very well. You are sinceremost servant of Krishna. I know that you have worked very good for Krishna. I think you should not be disturbed by minor disagreement. If you think that you cannot agree with Umapati, you can stop discussing with him, and if there is any point of judgment, you can refer to me. I am always at your service.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoDayanandaMontreal7July1968_3" class="quote" parent="1968_Correspondence" book="Let" index="226" link="Letter to Dayananda -- Montreal 7 July, 1968" link_text="Letter to Dayananda -- Montreal 7 July, 1968">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Dayananda -- Montreal 7 July, 1968|Letter to Dayananda -- Montreal 7 July, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Some lawyers advised me to appeal but I did not like the idea. Here in Canada, I may get a permanent visa but the difficulty is that during the winter the severe cold here may be unbearable for me or for my attendants. The male attendant, Gaurasundara, may agree, but the female attendant, Mrs. Gaurasundara, is not agreeable. Anyway—apart from this point of view, it is sure that I personally cannot tolerate the severe cold here. Under the circumstances, if some arrangement is made in Florida, then during the winter season, we can work there, and as you have said that many tourists and well-to-do men assemble there, it will be a good opportunity for preaching Krishna Consciousness at that time. Another point is that I would have preferred to have permanent residence visa in USA rather than in Canada, and I have heard that if somebody adopts me as a child or something else, I can get the permanent visa. But if you adopt me as your old child, probably the visa department will laugh, that what you will do with an old child who is going to die very soon. But, if there is possibility to adopt me as old father, then you can try for it.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoMangalaniloyMontreal7July1968_4" class="quote" parent="1968_Correspondence" book="Let" index="227" link="Letter to Mangalaniloy -- Montreal 7 July, 1968" link_text="Letter to Mangalaniloy -- Montreal 7 July, 1968">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Mangalaniloy -- Montreal 7 July, 1968|Letter to Mangalaniloy -- Montreal 7 July, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I was thinking about you since I have come back this time to this country, how to get you here, because there is ample possibilities for preaching Krishna Consciousness movement all over western world now, because the people are wanting something real spiritual life. Unfortunately, so-called swamis and yogis come in this part of the world and they exploit people and then go away. So the government here is also not very optimistic of such kind of swamis. But in spite of all difficulties, there is ample possibility of spreading pure devotional service of the Lord, or Krishna Consciousness movement, all over the western world.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoKirtananandaHayagrivaMontreal23August1968_5" class="quote" parent="1968_Correspondence" book="Let" index="280" link="Letter to Kirtanananda, Hayagriva -- Montreal 23 August, 1968" link_text="Letter to Kirtanananda, Hayagriva -- Montreal 23 August, 1968">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Kirtanananda, Hayagriva -- Montreal 23 August, 1968|Letter to Kirtanananda, Hayagriva -- Montreal 23 August, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">People who came from Europe to this part of the world, they named so many new provinces, and countries, just like New England, New Amsterdam, New York, so I also came in this part of the world to preach Krishna Consciousness and by His Grace and by your endeavor, New Vrindaban is being constructed.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoGurudasaSanFrancisco18September1968_6" class="quote" parent="1968_Correspondence" book="Let" index="308" link="Letter to Gurudasa -- San Francisco 18 September, 1968" link_text="Letter to Gurudasa -- San Francisco 18 September, 1968">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Gurudasa -- San Francisco 18 September, 1968|Letter to Gurudasa -- San Francisco 18 September, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I am in due receipt of your letter of the 13rd Sept., and I am so glad to learn that you are active in preaching Krishna Consciousness in London. You all 3 couples are expert in the matter of preaching Krishna Consciousness, and your last effort in the matter of performing Ratha Yatra festival was so successful.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoAniruddhaSeattle27September1968_7" class="quote" parent="1968_Correspondence" book="Let" index="330" link="Letter to Aniruddha -- Seattle 27 September, 1968" link_text="Letter to Aniruddha -- Seattle 27 September, 1968">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Aniruddha -- Seattle 27 September, 1968|Letter to Aniruddha -- Seattle 27 September, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Now, my plan is that personally I shall try to retire from active participation, but I want a place where I can live with at least 15 devotees engaged in editorial work, recording work, photographic work, painting work, etc., so that I may prepare materials for the preaching party who will go with all these paraphernalia and preach Krishna Consciousness all over the world. If you think that you can help me in this respect then it may be I can make Hollywood as my headquarters. In the meantime, I have received letter from Hawaii, and it appears that a good center can be opened there. So let us organize all the centers which are already opened. And until we are fully organized, all these places are fully organized, we shall not make any more attempts.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoSatsvarupaSeattle28September1968_8" class="quote" parent="1968_Correspondence" book="Let" index="335" link="Letter to Satsvarupa -- Seattle 28 September, 1968" link_text="Letter to Satsvarupa -- Seattle 28 September, 1968">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Satsvarupa -- Seattle 28 September, 1968|Letter to Satsvarupa -- Seattle 28 September, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">They are selling Back To Godhead nicely, and getting good sympathy from the public by considerable collections. We are not after collecting money, but when people offer something out of love and sympathy for our mission, it becomes a great asset. I am sure if you all my beloved disciples combined together try to preach Krishna Consciousness in this spirit, Krishna will give the necessary strength. By the Grace of Krishna and the Spiritual Master, the dumb man can speak like a great orator, and a lame man can cross over a great mountain. So we must have the necessary unflinching faith in Krishna and Spiritual Master, and the strength will be supplied by Krishna. After all, anything which we experience is but a fraction of the unlimited energy of Krishna. And even by fragmental touch of such spiritual energy of the Lord, we can make our life successful.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoRupanugaSeattle15October1968_9" class="quote" parent="1968_Correspondence" book="Let" index="367" link="Letter to Rupanuga -- Seattle 15 October, 1968" link_text="Letter to Rupanuga -- Seattle 15 October, 1968">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Rupanuga -- Seattle 15 October, 1968|Letter to Rupanuga -- Seattle 15 October, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">When you speak the truth it must be very palatable. So this social convention is not applicable to a person who is preaching the Absolute Truth. Absolute Truth is not dependent on material pleasure or unpleasure. I think Mahapurusa's personality did not impress upon him, but so far I know, his behavior could not be anything offensive. So forget the incident, but our mission is to preach Krishna Consciousness, and if possible, try to tackle this gentleman. Because he has got some inclination toward Krishna Consciousness, so let us try, to help him as far as possible. So continue correspondence with him, and let us see how we can deal with him later on.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoSatsvarupaLosAngeles18November1968_10" class="quote" parent="1968_Correspondence" book="Let" index="430" link="Letter to Satsvarupa -- Los Angeles 18 November, 1968" link_text="Letter to Satsvarupa -- Los Angeles 18 November, 1968">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Satsvarupa -- Los Angeles 18 November, 1968|Letter to Satsvarupa -- Los Angeles 18 November, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">The yogis are not devotees. They are more or less after some material perfection. But generally one who sees Narayana, he becomes a devotee. And sometimes such devotee before entering the Supreme Abode of Krishna or Narayana, they want to see some of the wonders of this material world. Just like I have come to your country, and I have no interest for sight seeing, but my main business is preaching Krishna Consciousness, but still, when I go to a new place, sometimes devotees take me to some important sight seeing place. Similarly, a yogi after becoming a devotee sometimes go to other planets also and Narayana fulfills such material desires. In other words, a devotee even if he wants to fulfill some material desires, he is given the chance by the Lord, but a pure devotee in higher status does not desire like that. They do not care for any siddhis.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1969_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="4" parent="Correspondence" text="1969 Correspondence"><h3>1969 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoKrsnadasaLosAngeles1January1969_0" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="3" link="Letter to Krsna dasa -- Los Angeles 1 January, 1969" link_text="Letter to Krsna dasa -- Los Angeles 1 January, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Krsna dasa -- Los Angeles 1 January, 1969|Letter to Krsna dasa -- Los Angeles 1 January, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I am very pleased to know that the professor who refused prasadam on sectarian grounds was not further disturbed by you. This was very well planned. People in a lower standard of spiritual understanding are generally sectarian, but unless they are so where is our possibility of preaching Krishna Consciousness. Our policy is very simple and plain. We invite people to participate in chanting, dancing and eating prasadam. So far as your activities there I am very much pleased that they are going up to this point and I am asking Jaya Govinda to join you as soon as possible. You also try to correspond with him and surely when he comes, you four boys will be quite competent to secure seven local devotees to legalize our society in Germany.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoHayagrivaLosAngeles31January1969_1" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="74" link="Letter to Hayagriva -- Los Angeles 31 January, 1969" link_text="Letter to Hayagriva -- Los Angeles 31 January, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Hayagriva -- Los Angeles 31 January, 1969|Letter to Hayagriva -- Los Angeles 31 January, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">The boys and girls in London are doing very nicely. My Guru Maharaja sent one sannyasi, Swami Bon Maharaja, to preach Krishna Consciousness in London, sometimes in 1933. Although he tried for three years and at the expense of my Guru Maharaja, he could do not do any appreciable work.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoJanardanaLosAngeles2March1969_2" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="156" link="Letter to Janardana -- Los Angeles 2 March, 1969" link_text="Letter to Janardana -- Los Angeles 2 March, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Janardana -- Los Angeles 2 March, 1969|Letter to Janardana -- Los Angeles 2 March, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Actually we have nothing to do with compromising with Christians or Buddhists. Our principles should be to preach Krishna Consciousness as it is spoken in the Bhagavad-gita and Srimad-Bhagavatam. As we are now collecting some fortunate students in our movement, similarly, it will be possible to collect more students in the future. But it is a fact that the unfortunate persons who stick to the four material misbehaviors, just like illicit sex life, etc. cannot accept these principles of Krishna Consciousness. But still there is chance for them simply by giving aural reception to this transcendental sound of Hare Krishna Mantra.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoIsanaVibhavatiHawaii8March1969_3" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="159" link="Letter to Isana, Vibhavati -- Hawaii 8 March, 1969" link_text="Letter to Isana, Vibhavati -- Hawaii 8 March, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Isana, Vibhavati -- Hawaii 8 March, 1969|Letter to Isana, Vibhavati -- Hawaii 8 March, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Chant 16 rounds minimum daily, attend classes in the temple, and read Bhagavad-gita, and Srimad-Bhagavatam regularly. Whenever there is any question, ask me, and try to preach Krishna Consciousness movement to your best capacity. I am very glad to learn that Mukunda has invited you to go to London and if there is possibility you should go immediately, both of you, and join with them. The six boys and girls, husband and wife, are preaching Krishna Consciousness movement in London so nicely, that in the London Times there was a news heading like: Krishna Chant Startles London.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoIsanaVibhavatiHawaii8March1969_4" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="159" link="Letter to Isana, Vibhavati -- Hawaii 8 March, 1969" link_text="Letter to Isana, Vibhavati -- Hawaii 8 March, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Isana, Vibhavati -- Hawaii 8 March, 1969|Letter to Isana, Vibhavati -- Hawaii 8 March, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">My Spiritual Master used to send preachers who were all in the renounced order of life (sannyasis), but I am doing a completely different process—namely, preparing some young couples of husband and wife to take up this job. this is approved by Lord Caitanya. He said that it does not matter whether the preacher is in the renounced order of life, or a family man, or a brahmana or a sudra—nothing is hampering in the process of preaching Krishna Consciousness. The only qualification required is that one should know the genesis of Krishna Consciousness and then he is just the fit person to preach this great philosophy.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoSwamiBhaktivedantaHawaii14March1969_5" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="171" link="Letter to Swami Bhaktivedanta -- Hawaii 14 March, 1969" link_text="Letter to Swami Bhaktivedanta -- Hawaii 14 March, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Swami Bhaktivedanta -- Hawaii 14 March, 1969|Letter to Swami Bhaktivedanta -- Hawaii 14 March, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">They are executing the rules and regulations as described in statement 5. And they are feeling happy. Many of them have taken to household life and they are living very peacefully with wife and children, and some of the married couples have gone to England and they have been preaching Krishna Consciousness movement very creditably. So this movement is very precious missionary activities for the present society. I request the government should very scrutinizingly and wisely study this movement without being biased to some stereotyped ideas. It will be good for this country, and for the whole world at large if this movement is seriously taken up and broadcast all over the world by the American people, joined by the English as well. I think my idea and plan is coming to be true very soon because I have many intelligent and sympathetic disciples, both from America and England.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoVrndavanesvariNewVrindaban25May1969_6" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="306" link="Letter to Vrndavanesvari -- New Vrindaban 25 May, 1969" link_text="Letter to Vrndavanesvari -- New Vrindaban 25 May, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Vrndavanesvari -- New Vrindaban 25 May, 1969|Letter to Vrndavanesvari -- New Vrindaban 25 May, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Anyone keeping himself under such impression, but at the same time trying to get into Krishna Consciousness is called neophyte devotee, or prakrta. Lord Caitanya has given us a very nice method of chanting Hare Krishna, and if we execute this without any offense, we can transcend this prakrta platform and come to the spiritual platform of serving Krishna. And unless we serve Krishna there is no possibility of getting His Grace, and without His Grace it is not possible to preach Krishna Consciousness. Therefore, we should more depend to receive His Grace then to depend on mental or intellectual activities.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoTamalaKrsnaNewVrindaban1June1969_7" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="334" link="Letter to Tamala Krsna -- New Vrindaban 1 June, 1969" link_text="Letter to Tamala Krsna -- New Vrindaban 1 June, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Tamala Krsna -- New Vrindaban 1 June, 1969|Letter to Tamala Krsna -- New Vrindaban 1 June, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So I wish that you will live for hundred years and execute this Krishna Movement so that in this very life you shall enter into the abode of Krishna. As soon as one's service is recognized by Krishna, he is immediately called, "Please come here." That is the verdict of the Vedic literature. So we should work in such a nice way that we can draw the attention of Krishna to call us. You will find in Bhagavad-gita that anyone who takes the task of preaching Krishna Consciousness is the dearmost devotee of the Lord.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoGopalaKrsnaNewVrindaban5June1969_8" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="344" link="Letter to Gopala Krsna -- New Vrindaban 5 June, 1969" link_text="Letter to Gopala Krsna -- New Vrindaban 5 June, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Gopala Krsna -- New Vrindaban 5 June, 1969|Letter to Gopala Krsna -- New Vrindaban 5 June, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So far your parents are concerned, I have received another letter from a friend of your parents whose name is Bhartendu Vimal. I am enclosing this letter for you to read. Your father has induced him to ask me not to initiate you. This gentleman came to see me in San Francisco. He might be some congressman, and at the expense of the government he was making some so-called cultural tour. The government is interested to send anyone for dancing or recitation of poetry, but when the government is requested for giving some facilities for preaching Krishna consciousness, they will not encourage. On the other hand they encourage publications in which Krishna is depicted as black and low-born. This is the position of our government.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoYamunaNewVrindaban21June1969_9" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="388" link="Letter to Yamuna -- New Vrindaban 21 June, 1969" link_text="Letter to Yamuna -- New Vrindaban 21 June, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Yamuna -- New Vrindaban 21 June, 1969|Letter to Yamuna -- New Vrindaban 21 June, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Otherwise, there is no need of hurrying. Do everything peacefully and conveniently. I have asked one married couple from Montreal, Isanadas and Vibhavati, to go to London, as well as I have asked one brahmacari named Trivikrama, and probably Sudama will also go there. So nicely organize your Sankirtana Party, and go on with your regular program of preaching Krishna Consciousness.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoGovindaLosAngeles7July1969_10" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="423" link="Letter to Govinda -- Los Angeles 7 July, 1969" link_text="Letter to Govinda -- Los Angeles 7 July, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Govinda -- Los Angeles 7 July, 1969|Letter to Govinda -- Los Angeles 7 July, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">It is very much pleasing to me. I was shocked when I heard that Gaurasundara was hurt on the chin, but at the same time, I was so much enlivened by hearing of your spirited preaching activities. I am proud that a little young girl like you is so much spirited in preaching Krishna consciousness. Undoubtedly I was very much sorry to learn about Gaurasundara being attacked by a fanatic, but don't be disheartened. Even Nityananda also faced such difficult problems, but try to avoid them as far as possible. The whole world is full of fanatics and atheist classes of men, so sometimes we have to face such difficulties. But this is all tapasya. Without tapasya, nobody can approach Krishna. So preachers who boldly face all kinds of difficulties are considered to be under tapasya, and Krishna takes note of such tapasya of the devotee, and the devotee is recognized by Him. I have asked the BTG men to publish your heroic preaching activities under the heading of "Heroine Govinda Dasi." So I am sure Krishna is very much pleased of this incident, and He will surely bestow His blessings both on you and Gaurasundara. So try to continue preaching Krishna Consciousness to the suffering humanity as far as possible.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoBhurijanaLosAngeles8July1969_11" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="424" link="Letter to Bhurijana -- Los Angeles 8 July, 1969" link_text="Letter to Bhurijana -- Los Angeles 8 July, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Bhurijana -- Los Angeles 8 July, 1969|Letter to Bhurijana -- Los Angeles 8 July, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I am pleased to note that you have decided to remain as brahmacari because it will be the most "undiverting" for your Krishna Consciousness. Actually this is correct. If one is able to remain as brahmacari, that is first class because so much botheration of household life is immediately avoided. But Krishna Consciousness is not limited that one must be brahmacari to execute, or one must be sannyasi to execute. Spiritual means that there is no conditions whatever, so in any position one may be in, he can chant Hare Krishna, preach Krishna Consciousness, and pray to Krishna to engage him more and more in His transcendental loving service.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoMukundaLosAngeles28July1969_12" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="475" link="Letter to Mukunda -- Los Angeles 28 July, 1969" link_text="Letter to Mukunda -- Los Angeles 28 July, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Mukunda -- Los Angeles 28 July, 1969|Letter to Mukunda -- Los Angeles 28 July, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So far as Trivikrama is concerned, he is a super first-class brahmacari. His service attitude, his submission is very nice although he is still a new member. The thing is that he had the association of Rupanuga who is an ideal householder devotee. I am feeling very much proud personally because my so many householder devotees are preaching Krishna Consciousness so nicely. Caitanya Mahaprabhu did not make any distinction between the so-called brahmacari, householder, or sannyasi. He specifically stressed that these designations are superficial, pertaining to bodies. Krishna Consciousness is the function of the soul, jivatma. In the Vedas it is said that the spirit soul is without any touch of material contamination, but when he forgets Krishna he thinks himself as a material product. That is called Maya. But in any position, if one can understand the science of Krishna Consciousness, he can deliver many, many fallen souls.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoGurudasaLosAngeles12August1969_13" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="513" link="Letter to Gurudasa -- Los Angeles 12 August, 1969" link_text="Letter to Gurudasa -- Los Angeles 12 August, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Gurudasa -- Los Angeles 12 August, 1969|Letter to Gurudasa -- Los Angeles 12 August, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I am in due receipt of your letter of the 13rd Sept., and I am so glad to learn that you are active in preaching Krishna Consciousness in London. You all 3 couples are expert in the matter of preaching Krishna Consciousness, and your last effort in the matter of performing Ratha Yatra festival was so successful. So I am sure by your combined effort in London, there will be a great successful center. I am so pleased to learn about your staunch faith in Krishna and your Spiritual Master. May Krishna bless you more and more in the matter of advancement of Krishna Consciousness.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoJayagovindaLosAngeles13August1969_14" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="514" link="Letter to Jayagovinda -- Los Angeles 13 August, 1969" link_text="Letter to Jayagovinda -- Los Angeles 13 August, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Jayagovinda -- Los Angeles 13 August, 1969|Letter to Jayagovinda -- Los Angeles 13 August, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Therefore it is Maya. Maya means things which have no existence independent of Godhead, but its business is to cover Godhead. Similarly, either the Ram Krishna Mission or Maharishi's group, they have no existence independent of Krishna, but their activities are just like the cloud covering Krishna. Actually, they never directly preach Krishna Consciousness. On the other hand, they do something to cover Krishna Consciousness. So although water is generated from fire, we cannot pour on water when the fire is blazing. We cannot adulterate Krishna Consciousness with the Ram Krishna Mission or with anything else.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoGurudasaTittenhurst15September1969_15" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="593" link="Letter to Gurudasa -- Tittenhurst 15 September, 1969" link_text="Letter to Gurudasa -- Tittenhurst 15 September, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Gurudasa -- Tittenhurst 15 September, 1969|Letter to Gurudasa -- Tittenhurst 15 September, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I am in due receipt of your letter of the 13rd Sept., and I am so glad to learn that you are active in preaching Krishna Consciousness in London. You all 3 couples are expert in the matter of preaching Krishna Consciousness, and your last effort in the matter of performing Ratha Yatra festival was so successful.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1970_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="5" parent="Correspondence" text="1970 Correspondence"><h3>1970 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoBrahmanandaLosAngeles22January1970_0" class="quote" parent="1970_Correspondence" book="Let" index="40" link="Letter to Brahmananda -- Los Angeles 22 January, 1970" link_text="Letter to Brahmananda -- Los Angeles 22 January, 1970">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Brahmananda -- Los Angeles 22 January, 1970|Letter to Brahmananda -- Los Angeles 22 January, 1970]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">"Sriman Acyutananda das Brahmacari, who is now visiting Calcutta. We have got a very good friend enthusiastic in preaching Krishna Consciousness, Mr. B. K. Ghosh M.A. LL. B. He is himself a great admirer of Caitanya philosophy and he is holding Sankirtana meetings every Sunday in different places of Calcutta and suburbs. The above picture was taken in a meeting where Acyutananda Brahmacari spoke nicely on Krishna Consciousness philosophy under the presidency of Honorable Mr. Justice P. B. Mukherjee of the Calcutta high-court, he is sitting just on the left of Acyutananda das Brahmachari. So gradually a nice center of the International Society for Krishna Consciousness is growing with the prospect of headquarters at Mayapur, the birthsite of Lord Caitanya."</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoMadhudvisaLosAngeles26January1970_1" class="quote" parent="1970_Correspondence" book="Let" index="53" link="Letter to Madhudvisa -- Los Angeles 26 January, 1970" link_text="Letter to Madhudvisa -- Los Angeles 26 January, 1970">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Madhudvisa -- Los Angeles 26 January, 1970|Letter to Madhudvisa -- Los Angeles 26 January, 1970]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So far the Christian preachers are concerned you may ask them to leave the Temple and address them like this - If you have to preach your Christian philosophy, why don't you ask people to come to your place? Why do you come here and disturb? Our Temple is especially meant for preaching Krishna Consciousness. In the world there are different philosophies and they have got their own temples also, long before our Temple was opened. There are places of worship of the Jews, of the Christians and of many other sects. They have got their different camps. Why do you come here and create disturbance?</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoKsirodakasayiLosAngeles29January1970_2" class="quote" parent="1970_Correspondence" book="Let" index="58" link="Letter to Ksirodakasayi -- Los Angeles 29 January, 1970" link_text="Letter to Ksirodakasayi -- Los Angeles 29 January, 1970">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Ksirodakasayi -- Los Angeles 29 January, 1970|Letter to Ksirodakasayi -- Los Angeles 29 January, 1970]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">You have been for the last fifteen years in London, and you were sincerely working for advancement of your spiritual life. Now Krishna has given you a good chance, a good opportunity for preaching Krishna Consciousness to all classes of men without any discrimination.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoEkayaniLosAngeles10February1970_3" class="quote" parent="1970_Correspondence" book="Let" index="85" link="Letter to Ekayani -- Los Angeles 10 February, 1970" link_text="Letter to Ekayani -- Los Angeles 10 February, 1970">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Ekayani -- Los Angeles 10 February, 1970|Letter to Ekayani -- Los Angeles 10 February, 1970]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I have heard about Vamanadeva in his last news bulletin, and both of them are doing nicely there on account of being sincere to the Spiritual Master and Krishna. From the beginning I encouraged young boys and girls to be married and united together to preach Krishna Consciousness, and this process has proved practical. So when you are also married with a good devotee, you can do the same work and open a center in some place convenient to you. That will spread our Krishna Consciousness movement.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoJayapatakaSoLaCienegaBlvdLosAngelesCal90034February131970_4" class="quote" parent="1970_Correspondence" book="Let" index="93" link="Letter to Jayapataka - So. La Cienega Blvd. Los Angeles, Cal. 90034 February 13, 1970" link_text="Letter to Jayapataka - So. La Cienega Blvd. Los Angeles, Cal. 90034 February 13, 1970">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Jayapataka - So. La Cienega Blvd. Los Angeles, Cal. 90034 February 13, 1970|Letter to Jayapataka - So. La Cienega Blvd. Los Angeles, Cal. 90034 February 13, 1970]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I am also glad to learn that everything in Montreal is now running smoothly under the direction of Sripati, and similarly that Raktak is very capable to manage the new center in Toronto as you are now feeling uncertainty what to do now yourself. From your letter it appears that Toronto has more potential for Krsna Conscious engagements, so why not remain there and assist Raktak. Our main business is service. Management of the temple must be there, but being president is not our business. Our business is to preach Krsna Consciousness. So if your presence there is helpful you may remain for some time.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoKirtananandaLosAngeles18February1970_5" class="quote" parent="1970_Correspondence" book="Let" index="104" link="Letter to Kirtanananda -- Los Angeles 18 February, 1970" link_text="Letter to Kirtanananda -- Los Angeles 18 February, 1970">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Kirtanananda -- Los Angeles 18 February, 1970|Letter to Kirtanananda -- Los Angeles 18 February, 1970]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Your touring in different places and preaching Krsna Consciousness is fulfilling my dream. May Krsna bless you on and on for being engaged in such exalted work. In the Bhagavad-gita, last portion of eighteenth chapter, it is said that nobody is dearer to Krsna than anybody on the earth except the person who is engaged in preaching the most confidential philosophy of life, namely surrendering unto Krsna, leaving aside everything material or spiritual.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoHayagrivaLosAngeles9March1970_6" class="quote" parent="1970_Correspondence" book="Let" index="157" link="Letter to Hayagriva -- Los Angeles 9 March, 1970" link_text="Letter to Hayagriva -- Los Angeles 9 March, 1970">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Hayagriva -- Los Angeles 9 March, 1970|Letter to Hayagriva -- Los Angeles 9 March, 1970]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Mayapur is the birth-site of Lord Caitanya. It is a small village You cannot find it on the map, but near Calcutta you may find the place "Navadvipa," and Mayapur is part of this Navadvipa district. So far your planning to go to India, not only you, but I think several others, including Kirtanananda Maharaja and other advanced students, will go to India for preaching Krsna Consciousness. That will be a lesson to our so-called "secular" government. I came here with this purpose, so you have to fulfill my desire. I think it is coming to be true by the will of Lord Caitanya.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoGurudasaLosAngeles15March1970_7" class="quote" parent="1970_Correspondence" book="Let" index="173" link="Letter to Gurudasa -- Los Angeles 15 March, 1970" link_text="Letter to Gurudasa -- Los Angeles 15 March, 1970">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Gurudasa -- Los Angeles 15 March, 1970|Letter to Gurudasa -- Los Angeles 15 March, 1970]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Please offer my blessings to all the boys and girls, and be happy. You will be pleased to know that Acyutananda is also doing very nicely in Calcutta. He is moving in very enlightened circles of Calcutta, and somebody is giving us a plot of land worth Rs. 80,000 for constructing a Temple there. When the Temple is constructed, I shall ask you to go there with your wife and preach Krishna Consciousness amongst the Indian community. Sometimes you desired to go to India, and Krishna will fulfill your desire to a greater extent. Krishna's service is so nice. Keep this faith always in mind and serve regularly—your life will be sublime.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoDinadayadriNaranarayanaLosAngeles19March1970_8" class="quote" parent="1970_Correspondence" book="Let" index="181" link="Letter to Dinadayadri, Nara-narayana -- Los Angeles 19 March, 1970" link_text="Letter to Dinadayadri, Nara-narayana -- Los Angeles 19 March, 1970">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Dinadayadri, Nara-narayana -- Los Angeles 19 March, 1970|Letter to Dinadayadri, Nara-narayana -- Los Angeles 19 March, 1970]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I am very happy to learn that you are living and working together happily as Grhasthas. Now use this opportunity of household life, not for sense gratification, but for mutually working to perfect your Krishna Consciousness. I am also glad to note that you are eager to bring up many souls in Krishna Consciousness, and that is a very encouraging and responsible program. Just one good soul fully developed and firmly convinced in preaching Krishna Consciousness can reclaim so many fallen souls for going back to home, back to Godhead. And the best way to prepare such Krishna Conscious souls is to train them to up from their birth to follow the principles of Krishna Consciousness. This is possible by good association of devotee parents, so you must keep always fit in spiritual strength by following the regulative principles faithfully and chanting the sixteen rounds of beads daily without fail, then Krishna will give you more intelligence how to engage yourselves more and more in His service, and your lives will be sublime.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoTamalaKrsnaLosAngeles14April1970_9" class="quote" parent="1970_Correspondence" book="Let" index="235" link="Letter to Tamala Krsna -- Los Angeles 14 April, 1970" link_text="Letter to Tamala Krsna -- Los Angeles 14 April, 1970">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Tamala Krsna -- Los Angeles 14 April, 1970|Letter to Tamala Krsna -- Los Angeles 14 April, 1970]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I am in due receipt of your letter dated 6th April, 1970, and I am so glad that you are now married with Madri Dasi. Please accept my blessings both of you and be happy and preach Krishna Consciousness.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoSudamaLosAngeles2June1970_10" class="quote" parent="1970_Correspondence" book="Let" index="333" link="Letter to Sudama -- Los Angeles 2 June, 1970" link_text="Letter to Sudama -- Los Angeles 2 June, 1970">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Sudama -- Los Angeles 2 June, 1970|Letter to Sudama -- Los Angeles 2 June, 1970]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Amogha Das Brahmacari and Satyavrata Das Brahmacari have already started this morning. So already you are three there, and Brahmananda and these two Brahmacaris—now you are strong six, and by preaching you will gather another six times six Japanese people and preach Krsna consciousness in as many cities of Japan as possible and distribute literature. The small books also can be translated into Japanese.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoDamodaraLosAngeles19July1970_11" class="quote" parent="1970_Correspondence" book="Let" index="438" link="Letter to Damodara -- Los Angeles 19 July, 1970" link_text="Letter to Damodara -- Los Angeles 19 July, 1970">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Damodara -- Los Angeles 19 July, 1970|Letter to Damodara -- Los Angeles 19 July, 1970]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">You were for some time feeling agitation and now Krsna has blessed you with a very nice, qualified wife who is an enthusiastic devotee as well. Please both of you husband and wife work now conjointly in full Krsna consciousness for spreading Lord Caitanya's message. You are very intelligent boy, good devotee and good preacher with good experience also. Your wife and you are good match, so take up this work of spreading Krsna consciousness very seriously and make your both lives sublime and Krsna will certainly give you all intelligence how to advance in His service. Please take advantage of this opportunity and utilize your lives for the transcendental loving service of the Lord and be happy chanting Hare Krsna mantra, dancing, distributing Prasadam and literatures, and preaching Krsna consciousness as your life and soul.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1971_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="6" parent="Correspondence" text="1971 Correspondence"><h3>1971 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoKrsnaDeviGorakhpur16February1971_0" class="quote" parent="1971_Correspondence" book="Let" index="69" link="Letter to Krsna Devi -- Gorakhpur 16 February, 1971" link_text="Letter to Krsna Devi -- Gorakhpur 16 February, 1971">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Krsna Devi -- Gorakhpur 16 February, 1971|Letter to Krsna Devi -- Gorakhpur 16 February, 1971]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Immediately you can open correspondence with one boy from Israel who has written me twice to come there and open a center. He is very eager to help. His name and address are as follows: Yacov Shames; c/o Dr. Ritchie; 79 Rehov Bait Vegan; Bait Vegan; Jerusalem, Israel. So make arrangements with the government and go there immediately. I have all blessings for this enterprise. Try and preach Krishna Consciousness in this part of the world. So you go there husband and wife with child and start a center. If you are successful in your effort, then I may stay with you a few days there before going to London.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoVaikunthanathaSaradiaBombay4April1971_1" class="quote" parent="1971_Correspondence" book="Let" index="138" link="Letter to Vaikunthanatha, Saradia -- Bombay 4 April, 1971" link_text="Letter to Vaikunthanatha, Saradia -- Bombay 4 April, 1971">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Vaikunthanatha, Saradia -- Bombay 4 April, 1971|Letter to Vaikunthanatha, Saradia -- Bombay 4 April, 1971]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I remember the days when Saradia expressed to marry you and I immediately reserved you for marriage to Saradia. Later on in Boston you were married and since then you are working so nicely. I am very pleased upon you. Simply use this marital life for spreading the glories of Lord Krishna and in this very lifetime you will be promoted to associate with Krishna in Goloka Vrindaban. So please stay on the purity platform; chant 16 rounds daily and without fail, follow all the regulative principles, and read all our books and your life is sure to be successful. Unless one is sufficiently empowered, one cannot preach Krishna Consciousness. So the fact that you are preaching so nicely is proof that you are already benedicted by Krishna. So preach Krishna Consciousness and be happy.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoKrsnakantiBombay11April1971_2" class="quote" parent="1971_Correspondence" book="Let" index="150" link="Letter to Krsnakanti -- Bombay 11 April, 1971" link_text="Letter to Krsnakanti -- Bombay 11 April, 1971">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Krsnakanti -- Bombay 11 April, 1971|Letter to Krsnakanti -- Bombay 11 April, 1971]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I beg to acknowledge receipt of your two letters dated 7th and 21st February, 1971 respectively and have noted the contents carefully. You ask that you become strong enough to fearlessly preach Krishna Consciousness. Yes, I know that you have got Krishna's blessings. Therefore you are strong enough to go on preaching and as you do so your strength will increase more and more. I am very pleased with your service from the very beginning. Please go on in this way and push on the cause of our mission.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1972_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="7" parent="Correspondence" text="1972 Correspondence"><h3>1972 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoVasudevaLosAngelesMay311972_0" class="quote" parent="1972_Correspondence" book="Let" index="298" link="Letter to Vasudeva -- Los Angeles May 31, 1972" link_text="Letter to Vasudeva -- Los Angeles May 31, 1972">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Vasudeva -- Los Angeles May 31, 1972|Letter to Vasudeva -- Los Angeles May 31, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">This Krsna Consciousness Movement is the only thing that will save them. So you yourself become very convinced of this fact and be very bold in preaching Krsna Consciousness there in Berlin. I enjoy very much your artistic work, so you can combine your presidential duties with sometimes painting, but the main thing is to always remain engaged fully in the enthusiastic service of the Supreme Lord, nevermind this activity or that activity, so long as the mind is fully absorbed at Krsna's Lotus Feet. So I am very glad to hear that you are a capable manager, you are a very very intelligent boy and gifted by Krsna in many ways, so now Krsna has given you the opportunity to make advancement by becoming also very responsible. So kindly take this responsibility to heart and be always jolly and determined. Now you must be the perfect example for others to follow.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoDanavirBombay17December1972_1" class="quote" parent="1972_Correspondence" book="Let" index="620" link="Letter to Danavir -- Bombay 17 December, 1972" link_text="Letter to Danavir -- Bombay 17 December, 1972">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Danavir -- Bombay 17 December, 1972|Letter to Danavir -- Bombay 17 December, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">They have also come to Krishna, we cannot reject them. Therefore I have advised my students to get themselves married. I was householder, my Guru Maharaja was life-long brahmacari. But we are doing the same work of preaching Krishna Consciousness, so what is the difference, grhastha and brahmacari? Actual sannyasa means that he has given everything to Krishna, so practically you are already sannyasa. But if you have got wife, and if she is very desirous to raise children, she will not be very happy if you go away. That is not our business, to create havoc, no. If wife is very strong, she will appreciate if you take sannyasa, but if there is question at all, that should be avoided.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1973_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="8" parent="Correspondence" text="1973 Correspondence"><h3>1973 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoGovindaLosAngeles20April1973_0" class="quote" parent="1973_Correspondence" book="Let" index="141" link="Letter to Govinda -- Los Angeles 20 April, 1973" link_text="Letter to Govinda -- Los Angeles 20 April, 1973">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Govinda -- Los Angeles 20 April, 1973|Letter to Govinda -- Los Angeles 20 April, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Please go on preaching Krishna Consciousness amongst the students because they are our best clients.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoJahnavaBhaktivedantaManor1August1973_1" class="quote" parent="1973_Correspondence" book="Let" index="262" link="Letter to Jahnava -- Bhaktivedanta Manor 1 August, 1973" link_text="Letter to Jahnava -- Bhaktivedanta Manor 1 August, 1973">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Jahnava -- Bhaktivedanta Manor 1 August, 1973|Letter to Jahnava -- Bhaktivedanta Manor 1 August, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">You have written so many nice things in praise of me but I think that my Guru Maharaja is great, I am not great he is great. So sometimes by association of the great one appears great. Just like the sun is great heat and light and by reflecting the greatness of the sun's light the moon in dead of night also appears great, but actually the moon is by nature dark and cold, but in association with sun it has become accepted as great, this is the real position. So I thank you very much that you are appreciating my Guru Maharaja who wanted to preach Krishna Consciousness all over the world, he is so great.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoMinisterinchargeofImmigrationBhaktivedantaManor24November1973_2" class="quote" parent="1973_Correspondence" book="Let" index="388" link="Letter to Minister in charge of Immigration -- Bhaktivedanta Manor 24 November, 1973" link_text="Letter to Minister in charge of Immigration -- Bhaktivedanta Manor 24 November, 1973">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Minister in charge of Immigration -- Bhaktivedanta Manor 24 November, 1973|Letter to Minister in charge of Immigration -- Bhaktivedanta Manor 24 November, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">According to our Vedic civilization, even if one enemy comes at somebody's door, he should be received like a friend for the time being. The enmity should be forgotten, and even though the enemy guest is there, he should be treated so nicely that both of them for the time being forget that they are enemies. I was therefore surprised that I am a sannyasi, head of a group of cultural movement, namely the Hare Krsna Movement, and I was not allowed to enter without giving any reason for this purpose. I think I am not enemy of your country. I am preaching Krsna Consciousness, or God consciousness, all over the world, therefore I have opened a regular branch at Nairobi. My society is regularly registered in Nairobi as a cultural and religious society, and we have go our own house, and before this I had been in Nairobi twice and there was no objection. Last time, there was another Hare Krsna Festival. One of the ministers of your government, most probably the education minister, was invited, and he very much appreciated our activities.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1974_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="9" parent="Correspondence" text="1974 Correspondence"><h3>1974 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoDrGhosh_0" class="quote" parent="1974_Correspondence" book="Let" index="78" link="Letter to Dr. Ghosh" link_text="Letter to Dr. Ghosh">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Dr. Ghosh|Letter to Dr. Ghosh]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">You have written to say you are 79 years old. I am also 78. You are such a learned medical man, if you preach Krsna consciousness to people it will be well received.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoDrGhosh_1" class="quote" parent="1974_Correspondence" book="Let" index="78" link="Letter to Dr. Ghosh" link_text="Letter to Dr. Ghosh">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Dr. Ghosh|Letter to Dr. Ghosh]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I wish that in the fag end of life if you and I together can preach Krsna Consciousness all over the world, people will be benefited and all problems of the world will be solved. That is my conviction. I take the opportunity of sending this letter with your cousin-brother Mr. Zazumdar. He is a nice gentleman, almost of our age. I talked with him and felt great pleasure. Sometimes I think of going to Allahabad. So whenever I shall get the opportunity I may go, as I like the place. I am obliged to you for your remembering me even after so many years passed when we were together in Prayag Pharmacy.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoHamsadutaVrindaban7September1974_2" class="quote" parent="1974_Correspondence" book="Let" index="384" link="Letter to Hamsaduta -- Vrindaban 7 September, 1974" link_text="Letter to Hamsaduta -- Vrindaban 7 September, 1974">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Hamsaduta -- Vrindaban 7 September, 1974|Letter to Hamsaduta -- Vrindaban 7 September, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">The photo you have sent is a nice picture. I am getting it framed. So in Germany when I was there I was very, very hopeful. There is good scope for preaching Krsna consciousness there. The people there are very intelligent. They are prepared to accept the real truth. Germany was always famous for its intelligent population. You are also appropriately fit to push on this cult in Germany. It will be a great success. Get the German people to take this movement seriously. Utilize the money you are collecting there for printing more and more books in German language, and profusely distribute our books in German language. I am very pleased that you are printing in German the books you have mentioned.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoBhaktaDennisCalcutta25September1974_3" class="quote" parent="1974_Correspondence" book="Let" index="434" link="Letter to Bhakta Dennis -- Calcutta 25 September, 1974" link_text="Letter to Bhakta Dennis -- Calcutta 25 September, 1974">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Bhakta Dennis -- Calcutta 25 September, 1974|Letter to Bhakta Dennis -- Calcutta 25 September, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So you have scientific mind and you want to use it in the service of Krsna. This is very good, and this I want that scientists step forward and preach Krsna consciousness. We are not preaching something fanaticism nor dry philosophy. Krsna consciousness is jnanam and vijnanam, practical knowledge. So I have given all the points in my books, and you should read them thoroughly.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoKrsnakathaBombay22November1974_4" class="quote" parent="1974_Correspondence" book="Let" index="601" link="Letter to Krsnakatha -- Bombay 22 November, 1974" link_text="Letter to Krsnakatha -- Bombay 22 November, 1974">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Krsnakatha -- Bombay 22 November, 1974|Letter to Krsnakatha -- Bombay 22 November, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">There is no hindrance of your being a householder so far as distributing books are concerned. Lord Caitanya Mahaprabhu had many householder disciples who would preach Krishna Consciousness. I understand recently in Toronto the entire temple distributed many "Isopanisads" and other books. So you can engage your self in spare time in this book distribution without any hindrance. Side by side you can also paint pictures for Krishna. In this way fully engage yourself in Krishna's service. That is what I want. Nothing else.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoMadhavanandaBombay3December1974_5" class="quote" parent="1974_Correspondence" book="Let" index="642" link="Letter to Madhavananda -- Bombay 3 December, 1974" link_text="Letter to Madhavananda -- Bombay 3 December, 1974">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Madhavananda -- Bombay 3 December, 1974|Letter to Madhavananda -- Bombay 3 December, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I am glad to understand that you are living and working peacefully with the others there. This is required. If we also fight and preach Krishna consciousness, what will people say? Therefore Lord Caitanya has stated: trnad api sunicena taror api sahisnuna. Another symptom of a sadhu or spiritually advanced man is described in Srimad-Bhagavatam by Lord Kapila: titiksavah karunikah suhrdah sarva dehinam ([[Vanisource:SB 3.25.21|SB 3.25.21]]). The symptoms of a sadhu is that he is tolerant, merciful, and friendly to all living entities.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1975_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="10" parent="Correspondence" text="1975 Correspondence"><h3>1975 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoVisnuprasadaNDecaiBombay2January1975_0" class="quote" parent="1975_Correspondence" book="Let" index="11" link="Letter to Visnuprasada N. Decai -- Bombay 2 January, 1975" link_text="Letter to Visnuprasada N. Decai -- Bombay 2 January, 1975">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Visnuprasada N. Decai -- Bombay 2 January, 1975|Letter to Visnuprasada N. Decai -- Bombay 2 January, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Therefore, I request you to give up your strip of land in front of our Hare Krishna Land for opening the road which will facilitate the traffic congestions. Our Hare Krishna Land is an international institution for preaching Krishna Consciousness all over the world. So, I am seeking your sympathy for these world-wide activities. The other day, your secretary informed me that you will construct a community hall on the road-side, but I know that the strip of land in front of our land will not be required by you. Neither it can be used for any other purpose. So, if you will kindly recommend your committee. to give for this great cause, Krishna will be very much pleased upon you without any doubt.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoPatitaUddharanaHonolulu3February1975_1" class="quote" parent="1975_Correspondence" book="Let" index="117" link="Letter to Patita Uddharana -- Honolulu 3 February, 1975" link_text="Letter to Patita Uddharana -- Honolulu 3 February, 1975">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Patita Uddharana -- Honolulu 3 February, 1975|Letter to Patita Uddharana -- Honolulu 3 February, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Your column in the Gujarat Samachar is a great way to preach Krishna Consciousness to the Indians there in London. They will become very much familiar with our ideas and goals by reading it regularly. Please continue it nicely.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoYadhavacaryaMexicoCity15February1975_2" class="quote" parent="1975_Correspondence" book="Let" index="140" link="Letter to Yadhavacarya -- Mexico City 15 February, 1975" link_text="Letter to Yadhavacarya -- Mexico City 15 February, 1975">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Yadhavacarya -- Mexico City 15 February, 1975|Letter to Yadhavacarya -- Mexico City 15 February, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I understand from your letter that you are now in prison. Anyway, you can use such a situation as an opportunity for preaching Krishna Consciousness. I am very glad to hear that you have already distributed some books in prison. Please try to keep yourself fixed in Krishna Consciousness by chanting 16 rounds daily and following the four regulative principles strictly and reading my books very carefully. These things will keep you nicely in Krishna Consciousness so that wherever you are you will remain strongly fixed in the service of the Lord.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoSatsvarupaHonolulu4June1975_3" class="quote" parent="1975_Correspondence" book="Let" index="301" link="Letter to Satsvarupa -- Honolulu 4 June, 1975" link_text="Letter to Satsvarupa -- Honolulu 4 June, 1975">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Satsvarupa -- Honolulu 4 June, 1975|Letter to Satsvarupa -- Honolulu 4 June, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So, all Vaisnavas are authorities to preach Krishna Consciousness, but still, there are degrees of authorities. On the whole, if his motive is to supress me and that is why he has come here, how we can receive him? He has already given one Professor a wrong impression. He may be treated as a guest, if he comes to our center, give him prasadam, honor him as an elder Vaisnava, but he cannot speak or lecture. If he wants to lecture, you can tell him that there is already another speaker scheduled. That's all.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoCyavanaLosAngeles23July1975_4" class="quote" parent="1975_Correspondence" book="Let" index="421" link="Letter to Cyavana -- Los Angeles 23 July, 1975" link_text="Letter to Cyavana -- Los Angeles 23 July, 1975">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Cyavana -- Los Angeles 23 July, 1975|Letter to Cyavana -- Los Angeles 23 July, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Now I have received one letter from Bhakti Mati and she has some complaint. She also says there was some physical attack against Navayogendra. This is not good. So I think they can open a separate temple in Mombassa for the Asian community. The Africans and the Asians will not like to mix. So there is no harm in opening separate temples. Both will preach Krishna consciousness and the kirtanas will go on. So do like that.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoDinanathaVrindaban7September1975_5" class="quote" parent="1975_Correspondence" book="Let" index="517" link="Letter to Dinanatha -- Vrindaban 7 September, 1975" link_text="Letter to Dinanatha -- Vrindaban 7 September, 1975">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Dinanatha -- Vrindaban 7 September, 1975|Letter to Dinanatha -- Vrindaban 7 September, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I am glad to learn that you are working very hard there and preaching Krsna consciousness amongst the Africans. If you are sincere and your motive is pure, then everything will come out all right and you will be successful. Regarding the incident with Nava Yogendra, now this can be forgotten and you go on with your work. We are not concerned for these things.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoRevatinandanaBombay7November1975_6" class="quote" parent="1975_Correspondence" book="Let" index="638" link="Letter to Revatinandana -- Bombay 7 November, 1975" link_text="Letter to Revatinandana -- Bombay 7 November, 1975">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Revatinandana -- Bombay 7 November, 1975|Letter to Revatinandana -- Bombay 7 November, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">You can preach independently as you have suggested, but do not deviate from our principles. You can start out small and then increase it if is successful. I want our men to go town to town village to village to preach Krishna consciousness.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoTripurariBombay9November1975_7" class="quote" parent="1975_Correspondence" book="Let" index="653" link="Letter to Tripurari -- Bombay 9 November, 1975" link_text="Letter to Tripurari -- Bombay 9 November, 1975">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Tripurari -- Bombay 9 November, 1975|Letter to Tripurari -- Bombay 9 November, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">This is Caitanya Mahaprabhu's blessings that everyone of us should become a sadhu and preach Krsna consciousness. So far Krsna consciousness is concerned, we have got new and sufficient number of books and if we read them carefully and reproduce the purports in our own language, that is perfect preaching.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoJanajanmadhihBombay15November1975_8" class="quote" parent="1975_Correspondence" book="Let" index="690" link="Letter to Janajanmadhih -- Bombay 15 November, 1975" link_text="Letter to Janajanmadhih -- Bombay 15 November, 1975">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Janajanmadhih -- Bombay 15 November, 1975|Letter to Janajanmadhih -- Bombay 15 November, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So, if you are strong enough to preach Krsna consciousness there, that is very good; that as long as you chant your 16 rounds and follow the four regulative principles, then you will get the strength. The process is that you should memorize the purports of my books and then speak them in your own words. Do not adulterate or change anything. Then you will be the perfect preacher. You should also distribute our books as far as possible. If you do this sincerely, then you will be successful.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoTustaKrsnaNewDelhi2December1975_9" class="quote" parent="1975_Correspondence" book="Let" index="722" link="Letter to Tusta Krsna -- New Delhi 2 December, 1975" link_text="Letter to Tusta Krsna -- New Delhi 2 December, 1975">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Tusta Krsna -- New Delhi 2 December, 1975|Letter to Tusta Krsna -- New Delhi 2 December, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So I'm very pleased that you have not deviated from the principles I have taught, and thus with power of attorney go on preaching Krishna consciousness, that will make me very happy as it is confirmed in the Guru vastakam yasya prasadat bhagavata prasadah just by satisfying your Spiritual Master who is accepted as the bona fide representative of the Lord you satisfy Krishna immediately without any doubt.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoYogescandraVrindaban7December1975_10" class="quote" parent="1975_Correspondence" book="Let" index="738" link="Letter to Yogescandra -- Vrindaban 7 December, 1975" link_text="Letter to Yogescandra -- Vrindaban 7 December, 1975">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Yogescandra -- Vrindaban 7 December, 1975|Letter to Yogescandra -- Vrindaban 7 December, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">This is the spiritual conception. If one is doing well, then the materialistic persons become envious and try to check his progress. This was actually so with Prahlada Maharaja, he was only 5 years old, he was preaching Krishna consciousness to his school friends, and the father Hiranyakasipu became so envious that he attempted to kill his 5 year old son in so many ways. Krishna consciousness is just the opposite, if someone is doing well then the attitude of the devotee is to give him all facility to go on and improve more and more.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1976_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="11" parent="Correspondence" text="1976 Correspondence"><h3>1976 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoAmbassadoroftheofUnitedStatesofAmericaDelhi27March1976_0" class="quote" parent="1976_Correspondence" book="Let" index="210" link="Letter to Ambassador of the of United States of America -- Delhi 27 March, 1976" link_text="Letter to Ambassador of the of United States of America -- Delhi 27 March, 1976">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Ambassador of the of United States of America -- Delhi 27 March, 1976|Letter to Ambassador of the of United States of America -- Delhi 27 March, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I beg to introduce myself as the founder-acharya of the above institution. Our mission is to preach Krishna Consciousness (God-Consciousness) all over the world, and in your country alone we have got about 40 branches in all the important towns of America. In all the countries, the majority of my disciples are Americans. I met Mr. Kenneth Keating, your former ambassador to India and he was a personal friend to my disciple, Sri Gurudasa Adhikari. A copy of his letter is also enclosed herein.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoGurudasaVrindaban18November1976_1" class="quote" parent="1976_Correspondence" book="Let" index="648" link="Letter to Gurudasa -- Vrindaban 18 November, 1976" link_text="Letter to Gurudasa -- Vrindaban 18 November, 1976">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Gurudasa -- Vrindaban 18 November, 1976|Letter to Gurudasa -- Vrindaban 18 November, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">If you can do something there, it is more than if you come here. Our business is to glorify Krsna as the Lord of Vrndavana and to popularize Lord Caitanya Mahaprabhu's Hare Krsna Movement. I was a resident in Vrndavana, but at the age of 70 I tried to preach Krsna consciousness a little bit and now this Institution has come out. So, I think it is more profitable to preach about the Master of Vrndavana, Krsna, outside of Vrndavana. A devotee of Krsna can create Vrndavana everywhere by preaching the glories of Krsna.</p>
</div>
</div>
</div>

Genuine (Letters)

2010-09-04T08:10:19Z

Partha-sarathi:

<div id="compilation">
<div id="facts">
{{terms|"genuine"|"genuinely"|"genuineness"}}
{{notes|}}
{{compiler|Visnu Murti|Partha-sarathi}}
{{complete|ALL}}
{{first|24Nov08}}
{{last|04Sep10}}
{{totals_by_section|BG=0|SB=0|CC=0|OB=0|Lec=0|Con=0|Let=63}}
{{total|63}}
{{toc right}}
[[Category:Genuine|1]]
[[Category:Compilations from Letters]]
</div>
<div id="Correspondence" class="section" sec_index="6" parent="compilation" text="Correspondence"><h2>Correspondence</h2>
</div>
<div id="1947_to_1965_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="0" parent="Correspondence" text="1947 to 1965 Correspondence"><h3>1947 to 1965 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoMrBaileyAllahabad14September1951_0" class="quote" parent="1947_to_1965_Correspondence" book="Let" index="11" link="Letter to Mr. Bailey -- Allahabad 14 September, 1951" link_text="Letter to Mr. Bailey -- Allahabad 14 September, 1951">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Mr. Bailey -- Allahabad 14 September, 1951|Letter to Mr. Bailey -- Allahabad 14 September, 1951]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">When we speak of Philosophy it is something higher than the attempt of combining the East and the West. The whole cosmic situation is a complete unit and unless and attempt genuine is made for harmonizing the whole disturbed system and partial attempt on our part however large in magnitude will fail to approach the ultimate goal.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoMrBaileyAllahabad7July1953_1" class="quote" parent="1947_to_1965_Correspondence" book="Let" index="15" link="Letter to Mr. Bailey -- Allahabad 7 July, 1953" link_text="Letter to Mr. Bailey -- Allahabad 7 July, 1953">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Mr. Bailey -- Allahabad 7 July, 1953|Letter to Mr. Bailey -- Allahabad 7 July, 1953]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">When we speak of philosophy it is something higher than the attempt of combining the East & West. The whole cosmic situation is a complete whole and unless an attempt genuine is made for harmonizing the whole system any partial attempt on our part however large in magnitude will fail to approach the ultimate goal.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1966_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="1" parent="Correspondence" text="1966 Correspondence"><h3>1966 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoJanisNewYork29October1966_0" class="quote" parent="1966_Correspondence" book="Let" index="26" link="Letter to Janis -- New York 29 October, 1966" link_text="Letter to Janis -- New York 29 October, 1966">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Janis -- New York 29 October, 1966|Letter to Janis -- New York 29 October, 1966]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I am glad to learn that you are chanting regularly and I hope you are gradually getting some enlightenment in Krsna Consciousness. Our path is genuine sublime and easy. So there must be an world wide organization for pushing the movement in the Human society so much afflicted by material advancement only. This is only medium to save the people from ruination.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1967_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="2" parent="Correspondence" text="1967 Correspondence"><h3>1967 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoJaduraniSanFrancisco30January1967_0" class="quote" parent="1967_Correspondence" book="Let" index="4" link="Letter to Jadurani -- San Francisco 30 January, 1967" link_text="Letter to Jadurani -- San Francisco 30 January, 1967">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Jadurani -- San Francisco 30 January, 1967|Letter to Jadurani -- San Francisco 30 January, 1967]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I am sure Krishna is pleased on you and He will bestow His blessings upon you. Better you accept Krishna as your Husband and He will never be unfaithful. Mundane husbands and wives never agree with one another. Because in the material world the relations are on the basis of body which is false basically. Under the circumstance how we can have the genuine thing on platform of false existence. Devote yourself therefore 24 hours in the service of Krishna and see how you feel happy in all respects. You are very good girl, because I have heard you chanting while working. It is very good and may Krishna give you more and more enlightenment. I always pray that you may be happy by our Lord's Grace. I shall be glad to hear from you.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoNripenBabuSanFrancisco18March1967_1" class="quote" parent="1967_Correspondence" book="Let" index="49" link="Letter to Nripen Babu -- San Francisco 18 March, 1967" link_text="Letter to Nripen Babu -- San Francisco 18 March, 1967">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Nripen Babu -- San Francisco 18 March, 1967|Letter to Nripen Babu -- San Francisco 18 March, 1967]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">You have sought my advice and I beg to submit humbly that you must stay in the temple for some time till things are not out of order. If you feel inconvenient to stay with Gauracandra Gosain, you can stay in my rooms but I think you should remain in the rooms set aside for your staying. You must keep your claim intact. As you are going to restore order in the temple I am always with you because Srila Jiva Goswami's temple is my heart and soul. I think with your cooperation I shall be able to render some genuine service to the Gosvamis Who are staying in the temple. I shall be glad to hear from you now and then specially when you reach Vrindaban during the Holi festivals. My American students are all glad to have your good blessings for them.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoRayaramaSatsvarupaSanFrancisco30March1967_2" class="quote" parent="1967_Correspondence" book="Let" index="54" link="Letter to Rayarama, Satsvarupa -- San Francisco 30 March, 1967" link_text="Letter to Rayarama, Satsvarupa -- San Francisco 30 March, 1967">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Rayarama, Satsvarupa -- San Francisco 30 March, 1967|Letter to Rayarama, Satsvarupa -- San Francisco 30 March, 1967]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Any way if on the 31st March Mr. Hill and his accomplice comes forward with second Mortgage money $20,000.00 and demands the second installment of $5000.00, do not lag behind. In case the house is actually being purchased by Mr. Hill from Mr. Taylor and if there is genuine transaction between the parties, we are prepared to pay the balance $5000.00 immediately. But I know this Mr. Hill has no money, as Mr. Lerner told me, to purchase the house on our behalf. It appears a bogus representation of Mr. Payne. Therefore it is a clear case of cheating and therefore all of them must be punished in the criminal Law court at any rate. I asked you to send me the copy of the agreement but you have not sent it.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoRayaramaSatsvarupaSanFrancisco30March1967_3" class="quote" parent="1967_Correspondence" book="Let" index="54" link="Letter to Rayarama, Satsvarupa -- San Francisco 30 March, 1967" link_text="Letter to Rayarama, Satsvarupa -- San Francisco 30 March, 1967">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Rayarama, Satsvarupa -- San Francisco 30 March, 1967|Letter to Rayarama, Satsvarupa -- San Francisco 30 March, 1967]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">If Mr. Hill has no money and on pretention of purchasing the house on our behalf he has accepted the money, then it is a clear case of cheating and Payne is the organizer of this cheating maneuver. And if this is genuine case that the house is actually going to be purchased we are prepared to pay the balance $5000.00. Let us have the house or return back the money. In default there is clear case of cheating as far as I can guess. Now you can do as you like.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoBallabhiNewYork22April1967_4" class="quote" parent="1967_Correspondence" book="Let" index="67" link="Letter to Ballabhi -- New York 22 April, 1967" link_text="Letter to Ballabhi -- New York 22 April, 1967">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Ballabhi -- New York 22 April, 1967|Letter to Ballabhi -- New York 22 April, 1967]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Only Krishna is the genuine friend of all living beings and it is He only who can give us all benediction. The more you advance in Krishna Consciousness chanting Hare Krishna Hare Krishna the more you become spiritually advanced and happy in all respects.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoDayanandaNandaraniUddhavaDelhi20September1967_5" class="quote" parent="1967_Correspondence" book="Let" index="147" link="Letter to Dayananda, Nandarani, Uddhava -- Delhi 20 September, 1967" link_text="Letter to Dayananda, Nandarani, Uddhava -- Delhi 20 September, 1967">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Dayananda, Nandarani, Uddhava -- Delhi 20 September, 1967|Letter to Dayananda, Nandarani, Uddhava -- Delhi 20 September, 1967]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Your specific duty is to chant and hear the transcendental Name of the Lord, read some passages from my English version of the Srimad-Bhagavatam and Srimad Bhagavad-gita (Gitopanisad) and explain them as far as possible you have heard from me. Any devotee who has developed genuine Love for Krishna can also explain the truth about Krishna because Krishna helps such sincere devotee seated in his heart. Every one must be frustrated who is not Krishna conscious because the eternal relationship with Krishna is so nice. That eternal relationship with Krishna can be revived simply by chanting His Holy Name in right earnest.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoBrahmanandaCalcutta11October1967_6" class="quote" parent="1967_Correspondence" book="Let" index="173" link="Letter to Brahmananda -- Calcutta 11 October, 1967" link_text="Letter to Brahmananda -- Calcutta 11 October, 1967">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Brahmananda -- Calcutta 11 October, 1967|Letter to Brahmananda -- Calcutta 11 October, 1967]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">You should have immediately utilized Mr. Nehru to give me a certificate. Lord Caitanya's movement is genuine and I am the bona fide representative in your country for this movement. Now if Mr. Nehru certifies this, then where is the difficulty to obtain the permanent Visa either from there or from here. Please see therefore immediately Mr. Hejmadi and obtain the certificate as abovementioned. I think Mr. Nehru must have already spoken to Mr. Hejmadi about this.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoRayaramaNavadvipa27October1967_7" class="quote" parent="1967_Correspondence" book="Let" index="195" link="Letter to Rayarama -- Navadvipa 27 October, 1967" link_text="Letter to Rayarama -- Navadvipa 27 October, 1967">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Rayarama -- Navadvipa 27 October, 1967|Letter to Rayarama -- Navadvipa 27 October, 1967]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">We have got experience in India that the jackals roar four times at night without any influence but the one roar of a lion drives away many elephants. The pressure Maya is elephant-like, big, but the roaring of Nrsimhadeva can drive away many elephants. Please convey my thanks to Satyavrata (Moskowitz) & inform him that I've received his letter. His humble attitude is just befitting a genuine devotee. I very much appreciate his devotional attitude.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoMadhusudanaNavadvipa2November1967_8" class="quote" parent="1967_Correspondence" book="Let" index="203" link="Letter to Madhusudana -- Navadvipa 2 November, 1967" link_text="Letter to Madhusudana -- Navadvipa 2 November, 1967">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Madhusudana -- Navadvipa 2 November, 1967|Letter to Madhusudana -- Navadvipa 2 November, 1967]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">He cannot say anything genuine any more till he has had revival of his pure consciousness in the spiritual world as mentioned above. Differentiation between spirit & matter is clear & practical experience, when a living creature is dead no amount of material advancement of science can bring back a dead body to life. The thing which is absent from a dead body is the spirit. As there is individual spirit in individual body, similarly there is the Great Spirit in the universal material form. As the individual spirit is working systematically within the individual material body, similarly, the Supreme Spirit is conscious of the universal body. The lord knows what is happening in each & every planet as much as an individual soul knows what is happening in each & every part of his body. Therefore, the individual consciousness which is limited, when dovetailed with the Supreme Consciousness of the Lord is called Krishna Consciousness. When I return some of you shall be offered Sacred Thread.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoBrahmanandaSanFrancisco21December1967_9" class="quote" parent="1967_Correspondence" book="Let" index="242" link="Letter to Brahmananda -- San Francisco 21 December, 1967" link_text="Letter to Brahmananda -- San Francisco 21 December, 1967">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Brahmananda -- San Francisco 21 December, 1967|Letter to Brahmananda -- San Francisco 21 December, 1967]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Fight Krishna's cause sincerely and you will be gloried with victory. I was glad to hear from Gargamuni that you refused to set me in the N.Y. Times columns along with the other so called Swamis or yogis. We have a distinct position that we are neither cheated nor cheaters. We are the genuine representative of Krishna who is the friend of all living creatures. We must play our part independently only on faith in Krishna and His bona fide representatives.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoSatsvarupaSanFrancisco23December1967_10" class="quote" parent="1967_Correspondence" book="Let" index="246" link="Letter to Satsvarupa -- San Francisco 23 December, 1967" link_text="Letter to Satsvarupa -- San Francisco 23 December, 1967">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Satsvarupa -- San Francisco 23 December, 1967|Letter to Satsvarupa -- San Francisco 23 December, 1967]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Regarding Boston and Harvard University Kirtana, I quite appreciate your noble activities. Our Kirtana movement is genuine, and if the unsophisticated students take it seriously, it will be a great achievement. I know that all these Bogus Yogis they are cheating the public, but at the same time your countrymen also want to be cheated.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1968_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="3" parent="Correspondence" text="1968 Correspondence"><h3>1968 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoSatsvarupaLosAngeles22January1968_0" class="quote" parent="1968_Correspondence" book="Let" index="27" link="Letter to Satsvarupa -- Los Angeles 22 January, 1968" link_text="Letter to Satsvarupa -- Los Angeles 22 January, 1968">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Satsvarupa -- Los Angeles 22 January, 1968|Letter to Satsvarupa -- Los Angeles 22 January, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">You have accepted me as father, so I have also accepted you as my dear and real son. Relationship of father & son on spiritual platform is real and eternal, on the material platform such relationship is ephemeral and temporary. Although I cannot give you anything as father, still I can pray to Krishna for your more & more advancement in K.C. Your sincerity & service mood will always help you in advancing your genuine cause.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoSivanandaLosAngeles12February1968_1" class="quote" parent="1968_Correspondence" book="Let" index="51" link="Letter to Sivananda -- Los Angeles 12 February, 1968" link_text="Letter to Sivananda -- Los Angeles 12 February, 1968">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Sivananda -- Los Angeles 12 February, 1968|Letter to Sivananda -- Los Angeles 12 February, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">We must present the genuine thing before the public, and if they are intelligent enough they will take it up and realize it. The followers of Maharishi are not intelligent class of men. If you have any advancement in the knowledge of Bhagavad-gita, you can test any follower of Maharishi, you will find he is nil.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoKirtananandaMontreal30June1968_2" class="quote" parent="1968_Correspondence" book="Let" index="219" link="Letter to Kirtanananda -- Montreal 30 June, 1968" link_text="Letter to Kirtanananda -- Montreal 30 June, 1968">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Kirtanananda -- Montreal 30 June, 1968|Letter to Kirtanananda -- Montreal 30 June, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">But still they have taken to this mantra, Mahamantra, very seriously and they are deriving good result out of it. So there is no question about its genuine presentation. We should therefore push on this movement in the same simple manner as we are doing. That everyone should come and sit together and chant this Holy Name Hare Krishna. If this system is taken as sectarian, then I am sure your attempt for organizing New Vrindaban under the care of Mr. Rose will not be successful. The best thing will be to chant Hare Krishna, call all the neighbors in that part of the state, and gradually develop their taste for it. Then try to endeavor to do something for developing New Vrindaban.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoHayagrivaSeattle22September1968_3" class="quote" parent="1968_Correspondence" book="Let" index="325" link="Letter to Hayagriva -- Seattle 22 September, 1968" link_text="Letter to Hayagriva -- Seattle 22 September, 1968">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Hayagriva -- Seattle 22 September, 1968|Letter to Hayagriva -- Seattle 22 September, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">If you can write a nice short article, inviting the hippies, to take to Krishna Consciousness, and practice it in New Vrindaban, I think many sincere hippies who are looking after something genuine, peaceful, they will come. So our movement if it is introduced amongst the hippies, because so far I can understand, they are after such thing for peace of the mind. Not only for the hippies, but for everyone. Everyone is seeking after peace and happiness, but they are seeking in the material platform.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoSatsvarupaSeattle29September1968_4" class="quote" parent="1968_Correspondence" book="Let" index="338" link="Letter to Satsvarupa -- Seattle 29 September, 1968" link_text="Letter to Satsvarupa -- Seattle 29 September, 1968">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Satsvarupa -- Seattle 29 September, 1968|Letter to Satsvarupa -- Seattle 29 September, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">If they are ready to spare such time, I am prepared to deliver lectures on the Bhagavad-gita As It Is, as well as Teachings of Lord Caitanya, once in a week in different colleges and universities. But I shall appreciate their genuine desire if I am invited directly—so that I can know they are actually eager about it. In that case, I can cancel all my engagements in the western part of your country, and may spare one to two months in Boston for executing this urgent and important work. The thing is that if they are serious, they must hear the philosophy for some time, and I am prepared to spare my time for this purpose. So I shall be glad to hear from you further in this matter, and then I shall chalk out my program.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoSatsvarupaSeattle9October1968_5" class="quote" parent="1968_Correspondence" book="Let" index="357" link="Letter to Satsvarupa -- Seattle 9 October, 1968" link_text="Letter to Satsvarupa -- Seattle 9 October, 1968">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Satsvarupa -- Seattle 9 October, 1968|Letter to Satsvarupa -- Seattle 9 October, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So their process is not very genuine. They want to make God as order supplier. So God is not order supplier. He is order giver. He orders everyone to surrender unto Him, and the fools and rascals who do not surrender unto Him, they want to order God in the form of so-called prayer, that He should ask material nature to stop her legal activities. That is not possible. So the situation is not very favorable, but if somebody agrees to hear Bhagavad-gita and the Teachings of Lord Caitanya, continually for some time, even they do not pay me anything, I am prepared to go and lecture.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoNandaraniSeattle18October1968_6" class="quote" parent="1968_Correspondence" book="Let" index="379" link="Letter to Nandarani -- Seattle 18 October, 1968" link_text="Letter to Nandarani -- Seattle 18 October, 1968">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Nandarani -- Seattle 18 October, 1968|Letter to Nandarani -- Seattle 18 October, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Actually this is a fact, because I am presenting nothing manufactured by me. I am presenting the genuine thing as it was given by Lord Krishna Himself, or Lord Caitanya Himself, approved by the Great Acaryas, so the activities which we have adopted, Krishna Consciousness, it is authorized and in the disciplic succession from Krishna directly. I am trying to live in your country permanently, and I have already applied for my permanent visa at Montreal, and they have called me for interview on the 25th Oct. 1968, so I am going there on the 23rd instant, and I will see the Consulate General there on the 25th.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoKrisLosAngeles13November1968_7" class="quote" parent="1968_Correspondence" book="Let" index="414" link="Letter to Kris -- Los Angeles 13 November, 1968" link_text="Letter to Kris -- Los Angeles 13 November, 1968">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Kris -- Los Angeles 13 November, 1968|Letter to Kris -- Los Angeles 13 November, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Regarding your question about Yogananda, you write to say that you "received the impression from his autobiography that he was a genuine saint who dedicated his life to serving God." But the thing is that you do not actually know what is a genuine saint, and what can you understand about saintly life from reading his autobiography. I may inform you that just recently I visited his so-called asrama retreat, and it was simply a hodge-podge of all nonsense.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1969_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="4" parent="Correspondence" text="1969 Correspondence"><h3>1969 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoUpendraLosAngeles6January1969_0" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="6" link="Letter to Upendra -- Los Angeles 6 January, 1969" link_text="Letter to Upendra -- Los Angeles 6 January, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Upendra -- Los Angeles 6 January, 1969|Letter to Upendra -- Los Angeles 6 January, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">This homeopathic medicine you have mentioned is not genuine and therefore is a bluff. So the first medicine which you should be concerned with is to chant Hare Krishna and to become increasingly steady in Krishna Consciousness. Study Bhagavad-gita As It Is and Srimad-Bhagavatam and continue to help your god-brothers in developing Krishna Consciousness. So develop your preaching abilities in this way, and this will be the most successful and appreciated endeavor.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoHamsadutaLosAngeles16January1969_1" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="30" link="Letter to Hamsaduta -- Los Angeles 16 January, 1969" link_text="Letter to Hamsaduta -- Los Angeles 16 January, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Hamsaduta -- Los Angeles 16 January, 1969|Letter to Hamsaduta -- Los Angeles 16 January, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So far as I know, my Guru Maharaja's position was one of the assistants of the manjaris. For the present, it is better not to discuss on these confidential things of a higher level, but you are always welcome to put your genuine questions for an answer. </p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoJanakiLosAngeles18January1969_2" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="37" link="Letter to Janaki -- Los Angeles 18 January, 1969" link_text="Letter to Janaki -- Los Angeles 18 January, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Janaki -- Los Angeles 18 January, 1969|Letter to Janaki -- Los Angeles 18 January, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Regarding competition with other so-called yoga groups, certainly we have to win the race because we represent Krishna directly, and others are all mostly impersonalists or less than that. So far as I know, our Krishna Consciousness movement is the only genuine endeavor for self-realization. I have tried to explain the genesis of this movement in my book, Bhagavad-gita As It Is, and people will learn it if they will carefully study this book. In this connection, there was a radio interview this week in Los Angeles, and the summary is being sent herewith. If possible, you can try to get it printed in the Times, as they have already printed an article about ourselves. You can make the heading as follows: Genesis of the Krishna Consciousness Movement.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoBhurijanaLosAngeles7February1969_3" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="100" link="Letter to Bhurijana -- Los Angeles 7 February, 1969" link_text="Letter to Bhurijana -- Los Angeles 7 February, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Bhurijana -- Los Angeles 7 February, 1969|Letter to Bhurijana -- Los Angeles 7 February, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Regarding the seed which you have sent, yes, they are genuine tulsi seeds. I understand from your letter that Kanupriya has not yet received his initiation beads for chanting upon, but they were sent over two weeks ago. I am enclosing a carbon of the letter which I had sent along with his beads, and if he has still not received them, please request him to send another pair of beads, and I will send these back to him duly chanted upon.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoMrJimDoodyLosAngeles8February1969_4" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="102" link="Letter to Mr. Jim Doody -- Los Angeles 8 February, 1969" link_text="Letter to Mr. Jim Doody -- Los Angeles 8 February, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Mr. Jim Doody -- Los Angeles 8 February, 1969|Letter to Mr. Jim Doody -- Los Angeles 8 February, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Please rest assured that in this movement there is no question of imperfectness. This is a solid, genuine movement for the total spiritual rejuvenation of the human society. I am requesting in this letter through you that every honest and sincere boy or girl must immediately join with us in this movement. If one is actually serious to understand the problems of life, he will surely find the right answers in this movement. Please read carefully our book, Bhagavad-gita As It Is, and you will find yourself getting enlightenment to the fullest extent. There is no doubt of this.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoMukundaLosAngeles17February1969_5" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="127" link="Letter to Mukunda -- Los Angeles 17 February, 1969" link_text="Letter to Mukunda -- Los Angeles 17 February, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Mukunda -- Los Angeles 17 February, 1969|Letter to Mukunda -- Los Angeles 17 February, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Regarding publication of Easy Journey To Other Planets, I can immediately give you a lengthy introduction essay addressed to the sympathetic nondevotee, or for that matter, even for the unsympathetic nondevotee. I shall add two or three essays like "Krishna Consciousness, the Genuine Yoga System," and "An Introduction to Krishna." In so many ways I can fill up the required necessary pages. Just today I have received from Hayagriva one nicely edited copy of Easy Journey. It is about 50 type-written pages, double-spaced. If Mr. Maschler is serious, then let me know, and I will send this manuscript along with essays to fill up the required number of extra pages. Similarly, Purusottama has learned of some big publishers in New York who may be interested in publishing some yoga cook books, so if you will immediately send him a description of the cook book you have there, he will contact these publishers to see if they are interested.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoJayagovindaColumbusOhio8May1969_6" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="272" link="Letter to Jayagovinda -- Columbus, Ohio 8 May, 1969" link_text="Letter to Jayagovinda -- Columbus, Ohio 8 May, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Jayagovinda -- Columbus, Ohio 8 May, 1969|Letter to Jayagovinda -- Columbus, Ohio 8 May, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Here in the USA, especially in Los Angeles, San Francisco, and New York, they are taking out Sankirtana Party in the streets and getting very good results. The student community in the above cities are gradually realizing our activities as very good. Yesterday evening we had very good meeting in Harvard University, and many students and professors attended. There were nice discussions and they are convinced that our activities are genuine and for the real welfare of the human society. And actually it is so. We are not adulterating the transcendental message with any mundane rubbish. If we stick to the principles of Lord Krishna, Lord Caitanya and the Goswamis, then surely they will appreciate. I hope this will meet you in good health.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoMohiniMohanaNewVrindaban22May1969_7" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="302" link="Letter to Mohini Mohana -- New Vrindaban 22 May, 1969" link_text="Letter to Mohini Mohana -- New Vrindaban 22 May, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Mohini Mohana -- New Vrindaban 22 May, 1969|Letter to Mohini Mohana -- New Vrindaban 22 May, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Because some of the intelligent boys and girls have taken this philosophy seriously, therefore I am able to push it on and on. But it is a genuine principle of life on which everyone is struggling, generally without proper direction. In the Bhagavad-gita you will find Lord Krishna says that every man is trying to follow His path, but they are proportionately understanding the goal of life to the extent that they are making progress towards perfection. It is also stated in Bhagavad-gita that when a man comes to the understanding of surrendering unto Krishna, he has come to his perfect destination.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoSyamasundaraHamburg31August1969_8" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="537" link="Letter to Syamasundara -- Hamburg 31 August, 1969" link_text="Letter to Syamasundara -- Hamburg 31 August, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Syamasundara -- Hamburg 31 August, 1969|Letter to Syamasundara -- Hamburg 31 August, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">If it was not presented before, it may be done so when George Harrison meets the Archbishop for the church. Actually our Krishna Conscious movement is genuine Christian movement. Christ means Krishna, love of Godhead, Who has His face annointed with tilak. There is a word Kristos in the Greek dictionary, and this word is supposed to be borrowed from the Sanskrit word "Krishna," and Christ is derived from Kristos. I find these things in a book known as Aquarian Gospel of Lord Jesus the Christ. Anyway, any genuine Christian will find our movement nice and perfect.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoTamalaKrsnaTittenhurst1October1969_9" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="597" link="Letter to Tamala Krsna -- Tittenhurst 1 October, 1969" link_text="Letter to Tamala Krsna -- Tittenhurst 1 October, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Tamala Krsna -- Tittenhurst 1 October, 1969|Letter to Tamala Krsna -- Tittenhurst 1 October, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Relationship between Godbrothers must be very genuine and pleasing. Otherwise, the future of our institution will not be very hopeful. After all, very soon you have to manage. As I am getting old, I wish to retire from an active part. Of course, I shall be behind the scene, but I am thinking of writing a constitutional will on my return from Europe. Enclosed please find the proclamation you have requested.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoMadhusudanaLondon23November1969_10" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="692" link="Letter to Madhusudana -- London 23 November, 1969" link_text="Letter to Madhusudana -- London 23 November, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Madhusudana -- London 23 November, 1969|Letter to Madhusudana -- London 23 November, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;"> Therefore, in any group, either in societies, or communities, or nations, or at last in the United Nations, they are all unhappy. So our movement is very genuine, scientific and benedictory. Only the first class intelligent class of men can understand the value of this movement. But Lord Caitanya has given us the Hare Krishna Mantra which makes things very easy. So go on chanting this mantra, following the regulative principles and rules and regulations. Then it will be effective without any fail. I am so glad that you are gradually appreciating the luster and beauty of Krishna and the taste of Sankirtana Movement.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1970_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="5" parent="Correspondence" text="1970 Correspondence"><h3>1970 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoJayapatakaLosAngeles2February1970_0" class="quote" parent="1970_Correspondence" book="Let" index="69" link="Letter to Jayapataka -- Los Angeles 2 February, 1970" link_text="Letter to Jayapataka -- Los Angeles 2 February, 1970">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Jayapataka -- Los Angeles 2 February, 1970|Letter to Jayapataka -- Los Angeles 2 February, 1970]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Regarding competition with Ramakrishna Mission and Yoga camps in Toronto, why should you be afraid of them? They are very insignificant organizations in the face of Krishna Consciousness Movement. Everyone says that what Ramakrishna Mission could not do in 80 years time, we have done many more times in three years time. So nobody can check this genuine movement of Krishna Consciousness by artificial means of bluff. Any sincere soul, serious in the matter of self-realization, will certainly be attracted by our Movement.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoBrahmanandaLosAngeles14April1970_1" class="quote" parent="1970_Correspondence" book="Let" index="233" link="Letter to Brahmananda -- Los Angeles 14 April, 1970" link_text="Letter to Brahmananda -- Los Angeles 14 April, 1970">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Brahmananda -- Los Angeles 14 April, 1970|Letter to Brahmananda -- Los Angeles 14 April, 1970]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Yesterday I received one newspaper, the Daily Californian, in which the whole correspondence between Dr. Staal and me is published, and they are very interesting. So if we get one small booklet printed under the caption "Krishna Consciousness Movement is Genuine Vedic Way: a cogent discussion between A.C. Bhaktivedanta Swami, Acarya: International Society for Krishna Consciousness, and Dr. J. F. Staal, Professor of Philosophy and South Asian Languages, University of California, Berkeley." This pamphlet will help us in our propaganda to convince people that we have not manufactured something new in the name of Krishna Consciousness. Anyone who will read this exchange of correspondences will be convinced that we hold authority.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoMadhudvisaLosAngeles14April1970_2" class="quote" parent="1970_Correspondence" book="Let" index="234" link="Letter to Madhudvisa -- Los Angeles 14 April, 1970" link_text="Letter to Madhudvisa -- Los Angeles 14 April, 1970">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Madhudvisa -- Los Angeles 14 April, 1970|Letter to Madhudvisa -- Los Angeles 14 April, 1970]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I beg to thank you very much for your descriptive letter dated 6th April, 1970, introducing a new chapter in the history of your country—Lord Caitanya's Birthday ceremony publicly demonstrated. Please try to serve the foretelling of Lord Caitanya in this way, and as you write to say that 5,000 people danced without being requested, this is the genuine proof about the authenticity of Krishna Consciousness movement.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoUpendraLosAngeles22April1970_3" class="quote" parent="1970_Correspondence" book="Let" index="261" link="Letter to Upendra -- Los Angeles 22 April, 1970" link_text="Letter to Upendra -- Los Angeles 22 April, 1970">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Upendra -- Los Angeles 22 April, 1970|Letter to Upendra -- Los Angeles 22 April, 1970]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">We are the best peaceful group in the world and we are trying to bestow upon the people the supermost knowledge for the humanity. Everyone should cooperate with us, but unfortunately this is the age of Kali and people are not very much eager to accept genuine things, so don't be disappointed. Do as you are doing now and Krsna will help you without fail. To face difficulty in the course of preaching work is a kind of austerity. These difficulties do not go in vain. The more we face difficulties, the more we draw the attention of Krsna. So in that way we shall be prepared to meet all kinds of difficulties in our preaching work. Such attempt gives us a lift on our progressive march in Krishna Consciousness.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoJanmanjayaTaradeviLosAngeles9July1970_4" class="quote" parent="1970_Correspondence" book="Let" index="412" link="Letter to Janmanjaya, Taradevi -- Los Angeles 9 July, 1970" link_text="Letter to Janmanjaya, Taradevi -- Los Angeles 9 July, 1970">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Janmanjaya, Taradevi -- Los Angeles 9 July, 1970|Letter to Janmanjaya, Taradevi -- Los Angeles 9 July, 1970]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Regarding your second question how to convince the young persons who are thinking that Meher Baba is an avatara. it is very difficult to deal with these misguided people. If you meet sincere people you may inform them that we are concerned with Krsna Who is historically 5,000 years old. So any other party who comes from India or any part of the world cannot claim such long history as far back as 5,000 years. There are sometimes manufactured avatara. in the history of the Vedic literature, but we don't accept them. We take the oldest one which is genuine—that is Krsna consciousness.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoSridamaLosAngeles14July1970_5" class="quote" parent="1970_Correspondence" book="Let" index="423" link="Letter to Sridama -- Los Angeles 14 July, 1970" link_text="Letter to Sridama -- Los Angeles 14 July, 1970">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Sridama -- Los Angeles 14 July, 1970|Letter to Sridama -- Los Angeles 14 July, 1970]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I have also read the newspaper cuttings in which I understand that people accept our Society as genuine and religious. So it is Krsna's grace that they are giving you permission to chant on the streets. I am sure if we work very sincerely all facilities will come from Krsna. It is stated in Bhagavad-gita that Krsna personally carries the necessities of His devotee and gives protection to his status quo.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoNevatiajiLosAngeles16July1970_6" class="quote" parent="1970_Correspondence" book="Let" index="429" link="Letter to Nevatiaji -- Los Angeles 16 July, 1970" link_text="Letter to Nevatiaji -- Los Angeles 16 July, 1970">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Nevatiaji -- Los Angeles 16 July, 1970|Letter to Nevatiaji -- Los Angeles 16 July, 1970]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">The Americans are very intelligent and qualified boys and girls so they understand the principles as genuine and thus they accept them. They understand that Krsna Consciousness Movement is neither Indian nor Hindu, but it is a cultural movement for the whole human society although of course because it is coming from India it has Indian and Hindu touch.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoKrsnakantiBombay29November1970_7" class="quote" parent="1970_Correspondence" book="Let" index="626" link="Letter to Krsnakanti -- Bombay 29 November, 1970" link_text="Letter to Krsnakanti -- Bombay 29 November, 1970">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Krsnakanti -- Bombay 29 November, 1970|Letter to Krsnakanti -- Bombay 29 November, 1970]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I have seen the pictures of your new altar and temple renovation and everything is looking gorgeous. Always be sure that the Lord is pleased and your success as His genuine servant is assured. I am glad that you have decided to give your time now fully to serving Krsna directly, but do not misunderstand the position of "outside" jobs. Any work which is performed by a devotee in Krsna Consciousness is never work on the material platform although it may appear to be so. Such a Krsna Conscious person is never associating with the materials of mundane work or with the mundane workers, he is always associating with Krsna by devotional service whatever his position may be.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1971_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="6" parent="Correspondence" text="1971 Correspondence"><h3>1971 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoJananivasaISKCONAkashGangaBldg7thfloor89WardenRoadBombay26INDIA23rdMarch1971_0" class="quote" parent="1971_Correspondence" book="Let" index="109" link="Letter to Jananivasa -- ISKCON; Akash-Ganga Bldg, 7th floor; 89 Warden Road Bombay-26 INDIA 23rd March, 1971" link_text="Letter to Jananivasa -- ISKCON; Akash-Ganga Bldg, 7th floor; 89 Warden Road Bombay-26 INDIA 23rd March, 1971">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Jananivasa -- ISKCON; Akash-Ganga Bldg, 7th floor; 89 Warden Road Bombay-26 INDIA 23rd March, 1971|Letter to Jananivasa -- ISKCON; Akash-Ganga Bldg, 7th floor; 89 Warden Road Bombay-26 INDIA 23rd March, 1971]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So the public is somewhat conservative and still there is some police harrassment, but you are "going on with work undaunted." That should be followed. Haridas Thakur was harassed even by corporal punishment. Jesus Christ was killed. Nityananda Prabhu was injured by Jagai and Madai. But still preaching never stopped. We are delivering the genuine goods to the human society on behalf of God, Krishna. If someone wants to check us, it is for the time being only and not permanent situation because no material circumstances can permanently hamper devotional service.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoAcyutanandaLondon28June1971_1" class="quote" parent="1971_Correspondence" book="Let" index="258" link="Letter to Acyutananda -- London 28 June, 1971" link_text="Letter to Acyutananda -- London 28 June, 1971">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Acyutananda -- London 28 June, 1971|Letter to Acyutananda -- London 28 June, 1971]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Paris is a very nice city, better than London. All historical buildings are here and they are very gorgeous and panoramic. So we have got a very nice center there. The address is as follows: 26 Rue Etienne d'Orves; Fontenay aux Roses; Paris 92. I stayed only one day on my way to L.A. but still they arranged some nice meetings and a press conference and the people are favorably impressed. They admitted in different papers that our movement is genuine, along with other information.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoTamalaKrsnaLondon28June1971_2" class="quote" parent="1971_Correspondence" book="Let" index="259" link="Letter to Tamala Krsna -- London 28 June, 1971" link_text="Letter to Tamala Krsna -- London 28 June, 1971">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Tamala Krsna -- London 28 June, 1971|Letter to Tamala Krsna -- London 28 June, 1971]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">From Moscow I went to Paris. Paris is a very nice city, better than London. All historic buildings are very gorgeous and panoramic. So we have got a very nice center there. The address is: 26 Rue Etienne d'Orves; Fontenay aux Roses; Paris 92. I stayed only one day on my way to L.A. but still they arranged some nice meetings and a press conference and the people were favorably impressed. They admitted in different papers that our movement is genuine, along with other information.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoMadhudvisaLosAngeles29June1971_3" class="quote" parent="1971_Correspondence" book="Let" index="260" link="Letter to Madhudvisa -- Los Angeles 29 June, 1971" link_text="Letter to Madhudvisa -- Los Angeles 29 June, 1971">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Madhudvisa -- Los Angeles 29 June, 1971|Letter to Madhudvisa -- Los Angeles 29 June, 1971]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So we have got a very nice center there. The address is as follows: 26 Rue Etienne d'Orves; Fontenay aux Roses; Paris 92. I stayed only one day on my way to L.A. but still they arranged some nice meeting and a press conference and the people were favorably impressed. They admitted in different papers that our movement is genuine along with other information.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoDayanandaDelhi5December1971_4" class="quote" parent="1971_Correspondence" book="Let" index="558" link="Letter to Dayananda -- Delhi 5 December, 1971" link_text="Letter to Dayananda -- Delhi 5 December, 1971">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Dayananda -- Delhi 5 December, 1971|Letter to Dayananda -- Delhi 5 December, 1971]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">If you can get some nice plot from the Queen for our Temple, we can build according to our own plan, that is the best plan. If it is true they have given a plot for some mosque, why they cannot give for a temple for worshiping in the genuine Indian or Vedic way?</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1972_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="7" parent="Correspondence" text="1972 Correspondence"><h3>1972 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoKrsnaBhaminiBombay4January1972_0" class="quote" parent="1972_Correspondence" book="Let" index="19" link="Letter to Krsna Bhamini -- Bombay 4 January, 1972" link_text="Letter to Krsna Bhamini -- Bombay 4 January, 1972">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Krsna Bhamini -- Bombay 4 January, 1972|Letter to Krsna Bhamini -- Bombay 4 January, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I am glad that you are appreciating so much this Krishna Consciousness Movement. Lord Krishna extends His mercy to all living entities, but He is particularly attentive to the needs of His devotees. You are blessed with an advanced devotee husband, you have now two nice devotee children, and by Krishna's grace you have taken a genuine Spiritual Master. So you are the most fortunate of women because you have been given every opportunity to attain the highest goal Krishna consciousness in this very lifetime.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1973_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="8" parent="Correspondence" text="1973 Correspondence"><h3>1973 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoPrabhavisnuBombay3January1973_0" class="quote" parent="1973_Correspondence" book="Let" index="4" link="Letter to Prabhavisnu -- Bombay 3 January, 1973" link_text="Letter to Prabhavisnu -- Bombay 3 January, 1973">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Prabhavisnu -- Bombay 3 January, 1973|Letter to Prabhavisnu -- Bombay 3 January, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">If you simply go on in this way, stopping in every village and city of England-Scotland, or if there are other places like Ireland, simply stop for some time, distribute books and hold Sankirtana procession, answer their questions, give some leaflets or small informations freely, distribute prasadam wherever possible, at least some small thing, and if there is genuine interest being shown, then request the townspeople to arrange some engagements for speaking in their schools, or in someone's home, or a hall, like that. In this way remain always without anxiety for destination and comfortable situations, always relying only on the mercy of Krishna for your plan, just go on preaching His message and selling His books, wherever there is interest.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1974_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="9" parent="Correspondence" text="1974 Correspondence"><h3>1974 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoTejiyasBombay8April1974_0" class="quote" parent="1974_Correspondence" book="Let" index="126" link="Letter to Tejiyas -- Bombay 8 April, 1974" link_text="Letter to Tejiyas -- Bombay 8 April, 1974">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Tejiyas -- Bombay 8 April, 1974|Letter to Tejiyas -- Bombay 8 April, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Regarding the offers of land in different places, you should take them. First accept them, then we shall see how to manage them. We will have to import brahmanas to man them. If our men are trained, one man can run a place. One experienced man can sit down in a hut and simply talk about Krsna and organize the local people. This is how I started in the beginning at 26 Second Avenue in New York City. If there is genuine preaching they will be attracted, so long the preacher has no self motivation, but simply chants and preaches. Anyway, take the offered land.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoRupanugaTirupati28April1974_1" class="quote" parent="1974_Correspondence" book="Let" index="158" link="Letter to Rupanuga -- Tirupati 28 April, 1974" link_text="Letter to Rupanuga -- Tirupati 28 April, 1974">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Rupanuga -- Tirupati 28 April, 1974|Letter to Rupanuga -- Tirupati 28 April, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">You are right about Sridhara Maharaja's genuineness. But in my opinion he is the best of the lot. He is my old friend, at least he executes the regulative principles of devotional service. I do not wish to discuss about activities of my Godbrothers but it is a fact they have no life for preaching work.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoYadunandanaMelbourne25June1974_2" class="quote" parent="1974_Correspondence" book="Let" index="255" link="Letter to Yadunandana -- Melbourne 25 June, 1974" link_text="Letter to Yadunandana -- Melbourne 25 June, 1974">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Yadunandana -- Melbourne 25 June, 1974|Letter to Yadunandana -- Melbourne 25 June, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">It is very encouraging that you are feeling convinced of the genuineness of the Hare Krsna movement and the disciples as at New Vrindaban. Although you feel you must leave their company sometimes you should pray to Krsna to give you the intelligence to seek out the association of genuine Vaisnavas more and more. That will insure your own genuineness, if you always engage in chanting Hare Krishna, avoid the four sinful prohibitions, then it does not matter where you are, you can attain to perfect love of Krsna.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoAlfredFordLosAngeles16July1974_3" class="quote" parent="1974_Correspondence" book="Let" index="271" link="Letter to Alfred Ford -- Los Angeles 16 July, 1974" link_text="Letter to Alfred Ford -- Los Angeles 16 July, 1974">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Alfred Ford -- Los Angeles 16 July, 1974|Letter to Alfred Ford -- Los Angeles 16 July, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Exactly like a person having received some counterfeit money is always afraid of being cheated, but this does not mean there is no good money. So unscrupulous men on account of this age of Kali yuga are taking advantage of sannyasi dress and are exploiting the people. So there is very awkward, and even a genuine sannyasi is sometimes in trouble. In the sastras therefore it is stated that unless one is perfectly detached from material things he should not be allowed to accept sannyasa order.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1975_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="10" parent="Correspondence" text="1975 Correspondence"><h3>1975 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoJagadisaHonolulu10June1975_0" class="quote" parent="1975_Correspondence" book="Let" index="323" link="Letter to Jagadisa -- Honolulu 10 June, 1975" link_text="Letter to Jagadisa -- Honolulu 10 June, 1975">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Jagadisa -- Honolulu 10 June, 1975|Letter to Jagadisa -- Honolulu 10 June, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Our movement is a genuine movement and we are being accepted as such by the higher educational circles all over the world.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1976_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="11" parent="Correspondence" text="1976 Correspondence"><h3>1976 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoYasomatinandanaBombay9January1976_0" class="quote" parent="1976_Correspondence" book="Let" index="19" link="Letter to Yasomatinandana -- Bombay 9 January, 1976" link_text="Letter to Yasomatinandana -- Bombay 9 January, 1976">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Yasomatinandana -- Bombay 9 January, 1976|Letter to Yasomatinandana -- Bombay 9 January, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Now people are seeing how genuine our movement is, they are coming forward to offer us so many places. We simply have to maintain our strict principles, keeping ourselves pure, Otherwise, there are so many bogus institutions doing business in the name of God and simply cheating the people. We have to be careful not to degenerate like these others. Our strength depends upon regular chanting the required 16 rounds and rigidly adhering to the regulative principles.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoMrRajaSajidHusainLosAngeles4June1976_1" class="quote" parent="1976_Correspondence" book="Let" index="322" link="Letter to Mr. Raja Sajid Husain -- Los Angeles 4 June, 1976" link_text="Letter to Mr. Raja Sajid Husain -- Los Angeles 4 June, 1976">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Mr. Raja Sajid Husain -- Los Angeles 4 June, 1976|Letter to Mr. Raja Sajid Husain -- Los Angeles 4 June, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">The United Nations has tried for so many years, and they will never agree. If we keep human beings in the status of cats and dogs, in the bodily concept of life, how can they live in peace? They will simply fight like cats and dogs amongst one another. However, when members of the human society come to the spiritual platform, then there is a genuine possibility of unity.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoGopalaKrsnaLosAngeles9June1976_2" class="quote" parent="1976_Correspondence" book="Let" index="342" link="Letter to Gopala Krsna -- Los Angeles 9 June, 1976" link_text="Letter to Gopala Krsna -- Los Angeles 9 June, 1976">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Gopala Krsna -- Los Angeles 9 June, 1976|Letter to Gopala Krsna -- Los Angeles 9 June, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">The quality of the big books must remain, and so they should not be printed by Yasodanandana Swami independently. So you can keep the account what is being sold, and what is the profit. But what is the wrong if Yasodanandana Swami prints the books on behalf of BBT for convenience. You are accusing him of so many bogus complaints. What is bogus? What is genuine? If all these complaints come to me it is too much taxation for me.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoJayapatakaNewVrindaban26June1976_3" class="quote" parent="1976_Correspondence" book="Let" index="371" link="Letter to Jayapataka -- New Vrindaban 26 June, 1976" link_text="Letter to Jayapataka -- New Vrindaban 26 June, 1976">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Jayapataka -- New Vrindaban 26 June, 1976|Letter to Jayapataka -- New Vrindaban 26 June, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Concerning the doubts of the commission: 1). Christians also convert. It is not conversion from Christian to Hindu. We convert atheist class of men to take God-consciousness. God is one. It is not the question of Christianity, Hindu, Muslim; any religion that teaches to love God is genuine. It has nothing to do with Hinduism, Mohammedanism, etc. 2). Sources (of funds) means we get contributions from all over the world. All of our branches will gladly contribute. Practically this institution is the real U.N. We have the co-operation from all nations, all religions, all communities, etc. It will be an international institute. To see the planetarium and how things are universally situated has nothing to do with sectarian ideas. It is a scientific presentation of spiritual life. 3). The local Mohammedans have already agreed.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoGirirajaVrindaban6November1976_4" class="quote" parent="1976_Correspondence" book="Let" index="624" link="Letter to Giriraja -- Vrindaban 6 November, 1976" link_text="Letter to Giriraja -- Vrindaban 6 November, 1976">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Giriraja -- Vrindaban 6 November, 1976|Letter to Giriraja -- Vrindaban 6 November, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">It is good that our friends are coming forward to help in Bombay. Let them present a statement that it is a genuine movement. All Indians are interested in spreading this movement. Krsna is accepted as the Supreme Lord by all Indians. His birthday ceremony, Janmastami, is observed by all Indians. In Bombay there is an embassy branch. Our Bombay friends should go there to express their protest.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoRamesvaraVrindaban24November1976_5" class="quote" parent="1976_Correspondence" book="Let" index="658" link="Letter to Ramesvara -- Vrindaban 24 November, 1976" link_text="Letter to Ramesvara -- Vrindaban 24 November, 1976">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Ramesvara -- Vrindaban 24 November, 1976|Letter to Ramesvara -- Vrindaban 24 November, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">The interview with the London reporter is very important. This should be presented in the courts. It is 95% of the evidence we require to prove that Krishna Consciousness is genuine. This is not a sentimental faith or religion, it is a great science. Everyone is changing bodies. Regardless of his so-called faith, the Christians as well as the Hindus are changing bodies. This is science.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoAdikesavaBombay26December1976_6" class="quote" parent="1976_Correspondence" book="Let" index="714" link="Letter to Adi-kesava -- Bombay 26 December, 1976" link_text="Letter to Adi-kesava -- Bombay 26 December, 1976">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Adi-kesava -- Bombay 26 December, 1976|Letter to Adi-kesava -- Bombay 26 December, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">The society of friends in support of the Hare Krsna Movement is a very good proposal. So, induce them to do that. That will be great success. If such persons organize a movement that the Hare Krsna Movement is genuine it is a very, very good success. Try to do it. All the scholars who have given certification will join. That will be great success if that corporation is formed. So our scholars, students like Svarupa Damodara and others can join with them to form this corporation. This should be organized. This is a very good proposal. Somehow or other try for that.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoAdikesavaBombay26December1976_7" class="quote" parent="1976_Correspondence" book="Let" index="714" link="Letter to Adi-kesava -- Bombay 26 December, 1976" link_text="Letter to Adi-kesava -- Bombay 26 December, 1976">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Adi-kesava -- Bombay 26 December, 1976|Letter to Adi-kesava -- Bombay 26 December, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">That you are gathering good support from the Indian community is nice. This Candra Swami has said that "In America there is no one turning Christians into Hindus except for the Hare Krsna Movement." That means his support is genuine, he's appreciating. Yes, it is dangerous to associate with such men, you should always remember that. But to take our interest, if the help is coming from such persons, we should not lose it also. But you must be very careful. If it is by his arrangement that we shall be able to see Carter, then we shall take advantage. If we can explain our philosophy that will be nice.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1977_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="12" parent="Correspondence" text="1977 Correspondence"><h3>1977 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoHarisauriMayapur18March1977_0" class="quote" parent="1977_Correspondence" book="Let" index="63" link="Letter to Hari-sauri -- Mayapur 18 March, 1977" link_text="Letter to Hari-sauri -- Mayapur 18 March, 1977">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Hari-sauri -- Mayapur 18 March, 1977|Letter to Hari-sauri -- Mayapur 18 March, 1977]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">If Krsna likes He can do anything. Now in our New York court case the judge has declared that Krsna consciousness is a genuine religion and has dismissed the case. Is it not Krsna's great blessing?</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoRamesvaraBombay2April1977_1" class="quote" parent="1977_Correspondence" book="Let" index="81" link="Letter to Ramesvara -- Bombay 2 April, 1977" link_text="Letter to Ramesvara -- Bombay 2 April, 1977">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Ramesvara -- Bombay 2 April, 1977|Letter to Ramesvara -- Bombay 2 April, 1977]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Now we are forming scientists party and we shall try with their help to establish Krishna consciousness as the genuine scientific movement of the world exposing the so-called scientists as nothing but speculators. Svarupa Damodara has received very good response here in India from the scientific community and there is good hope that many others will join him.</p>
</div>
</div>
</div>

Chairman

2010-05-28T11:10:39Z

Partha-sarathi:

<div id="compilation">
<div id="facts">
{{terms|"chairman"|"chairman's"|"chairmanship"|"chairmen"|"chairmens"}}
{{notes|}}
{{compiler|Visnu Murti|Partha-sarathi}}
{{complete|ALL}}
{{first|25May10}}
{{last|28May10}}
{{totals_by_section|BG=0|SB=1|CC=0|OB=0|Lec=0|Con=20|Let=13}}
{{total|34}}
{{toc right}}
[[Category:chairman|1]]
</div>
<div id="Srimad-Bhagavatam" class="section" sec_index="1" parent="compilation" text="Srimad-Bhagavatam"><h2>Srimad-Bhagavatam</h2>
</div>
<div id="SB_Canto_4" class="sub_section" sec_index="4" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam" text="SB Canto 4"><h3>SB Canto 4</h3>
</div>
<div id="SB4743_0" class="quote" parent="SB_Canto_4" book="SB" index="270" link="SB 4.7.43" link_text="SB 4.7.43">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:SB 4.7.43|SB 4.7.43, Purport]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="purport text"><p style="display: inline;">In the Brahma-saṁhitā it is said that Kṛṣṇa is the Supreme Personality of Godhead. There may be many gods, from Brahmā, Lord Śiva, Indra and Candra down to the rulers of the lower planetary systems, the presidents, ministers, chairmen and kings. In fact, anyone can think that he is God. That is the false, puffed-up conviction of material life. Actually Viṣṇu is the Supreme Lord, but there is even one above Viṣṇu, for Viṣṇu is also the plenary portion of a part of Kṛṣṇa.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="section" sec_index="5" parent="compilation" text="Conversations and Morning Walks"><h2>Conversations and Morning Walks</h2>
</div>
<div id="1972_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="sub_section" sec_index="5" parent="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" text="1972 Conversations and Morning Walks"><h3>1972 Conversations and Morning Walks</h3>
</div>
<div id="RoomConversationwithDaiNipponApril221972Tokyo_0" class="quote" parent="1972_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="16" link="Room Conversation with Dai Nippon -- April 22, 1972, Tokyo" link_text="Room Conversation with Dai Nippon -- April 22, 1972, Tokyo">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Room Conversation with Dai Nippon -- April 22, 1972, Tokyo|Room Conversation with Dai Nippon -- April 22, 1972, Tokyo]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Dai Nippon representative: Divine Grace, please allow that we are, we getting to the businesslike (laughter) conversation but...</p>
<p>Prabhupāda: One thing I shall request you, that our missionary activities, we are not exactly businessmen. You see? Our only idea is these books are published for missionary activities. So exactly we are not business power. So I will request your chairman that even sometimes you find something, discrepancies, you don't mind it, because we are not strictly businessmen. Yes. But we are very sincere. We shall reciprocate very sincerely. But sometimes we are not strictly like businessmen.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="RoomConversationOctober251972Vrndavana_1" class="quote" parent="1972_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="45" link="Room Conversation -- October 25, 1972, Vrndavana" link_text="Room Conversation -- October 25, 1972, Vrndavana">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Room Conversation -- October 25, 1972, Vrndavana|Room Conversation -- October 25, 1972, Vrndavana]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Gurudāsa: (indistinct) also knows it, because he announced to this chairman of the council that he will become the gardener and they will become the pūjārīs. So he is for that.</p>
<p>Prabhupāda: The poor man, unless he gets some income, he becomes (indistinct).</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1973_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="sub_section" sec_index="6" parent="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" text="1973 Conversations and Morning Walks"><h3>1973 Conversations and Morning Walks</h3>
</div>
<div id="MorningWalkMay21973LosAngeles_0" class="quote" parent="1973_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="21" link="Morning Walk -- May 2, 1973, Los Angeles" link_text="Morning Walk -- May 2, 1973, Los Angeles">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Morning Walk -- May 2, 1973, Los Angeles|Morning Walk -- May 2, 1973, Los Angeles]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Svarūpa Dāmodara: No, the chairman of the department, he was telling later on that "About theology let us talk later on." So he dispersed the meeting after that. Theology, they thought, that I was talking on theology.</p>
<p>Prabhupāda: It is not theology, it is science.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="RoomConversationwithBankerSeptember211973Bombay_1" class="quote" parent="1973_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="77" link="Room Conversation with Banker -- September 21, 1973, Bombay" link_text="Room Conversation with Banker -- September 21, 1973, Bombay">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Room Conversation with Banker -- September 21, 1973, Bombay|Room Conversation with Banker -- September 21, 1973, Bombay]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Gopāla Kṛṣṇa: She's a staunch Arya-samaji. She's the chairman of the Santa Cruz Arya-samaj.</p>
<p>Prabhupāda: Ācchā? Oh. What is the philosophy Arya-samaj?</p>
<p>Gopāla Kṛṣṇa: I don't know. But she's pleased, she likes Kṛṣṇa, she likes our movement very much, but she still believes in Arya-samaj very strongly.</p>
<p>Prabhupāda: Because she is president, how she can speak against them? (laughs) Arya-samajis are strictly forbidden to go to the temple.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1975_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="sub_section" sec_index="8" parent="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" text="1975 Conversations and Morning Walks"><h3>1975 Conversations and Morning Walks</h3>
</div>
<div id="ConversationwiththeGBCMarch271975Mayapur_0" class="quote" parent="1975_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="36" link="Conversation with the GBC -- March 27, 1975, Mayapur" link_text="Conversation with the GBC -- March 27, 1975, Mayapur">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Conversation with the GBC -- March 27, 1975, Mayapur|Conversation with the GBC -- March 27, 1975, Mayapur]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: Yes. I want to see, as the chairman of the BBT, that fifty percent is spent on printing and fifty percent is for constructing temples. That's all.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="MorningWalkJune211975LosAngeles_1" class="quote" parent="1975_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="104" link="Morning Walk -- June 21, 1975, Los Angeles" link_text="Morning Walk -- June 21, 1975, Los Angeles">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Morning Walk -- June 21, 1975, Los Angeles|Morning Walk -- June 21, 1975, Los Angeles]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Bahulāśva: Well, when we tell them your philosophy, Śrīla Prabhupāda, he became silent. The one... We were having a debate, and the one chairman of the debate, he then he turned to Mr. Stahl. He said, "So what do you think of this answer, Mr. Philosopher?" And Mr. Stahl just sat there very quiet. He couldn't say anything.</p>
<p>Prabhupāda: (chuckles) Everyone is trying to live. That is Darwin's theory also, "struggle for existence." So why you are trying to exist if there is no such thing?</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="MorningWalkJune221975LosAngeles_2" class="quote" parent="1975_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="106" link="Morning Walk -- June 22, 1975, Los Angeles" link_text="Morning Walk -- June 22, 1975, Los Angeles">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Morning Walk -- June 22, 1975, Los Angeles|Morning Walk -- June 22, 1975, Los Angeles]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Dharmādhyakṣa: Actually at the University of Southern California around three or four members of the religion department want to come, including the chairman.</p>
<p>Prabhupāda: So let them come. (break)</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="MorningWalkJune251975LosAngeles_3" class="quote" parent="1975_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="112" link="Morning Walk -- June 25, 1975, Los Angeles" link_text="Morning Walk -- June 25, 1975, Los Angeles">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Morning Walk -- June 25, 1975, Los Angeles|Morning Walk -- June 25, 1975, Los Angeles]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: No, you have got that mentality, I know that. But because you are president or chairman of that center... What is that? Union.</p>
<p>Dr. Judah: I'm chairman of the department of the history and phenomenology of religion.</p>
<p>Prabhupāda: So who is the chairman of this union?</p>
<p>Dr. Judah: I'm just the chairman of this one department of the history and phenomenology of religion.</p>
<p>Prabhupāda: That's... Then you are also important officer. So you can induce them, that "Here is God."</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1976_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="sub_section" sec_index="9" parent="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" text="1976 Conversations and Morning Walks"><h3>1976 Conversations and Morning Walks</h3>
</div>
<div id="EveningDarsanaAugust141976Bombay_0" class="quote" parent="1976_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="263" link="Evening Darsana -- August 14, 1976, Bombay" link_text="Evening Darsana -- August 14, 1976, Bombay">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Evening Darsana -- August 14, 1976, Bombay|Evening Darsana -- August 14, 1976, Bombay]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Kartikeya Mahadevia: Very devoted. Her father is my father's friend, Mr. Pota. He was chairman of the Gold Control Board in India. Handlooms are working very nicely. That side of textile, which are made by hand, they are prospering like anything because...</p>
<p>Prabhupāda: They have to remain naked.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="RoomConversationAugust201976Hyderabad_1" class="quote" parent="1976_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="274" link="Room Conversation -- August 20, 1976, Hyderabad" link_text="Room Conversation -- August 20, 1976, Hyderabad">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Room Conversation -- August 20, 1976, Hyderabad|Room Conversation -- August 20, 1976, Hyderabad]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Gopāla Kṛṣṇa: I think Mahabaleswar is also the summer capital of Mahara... All the government ministers have been meeting there. And this Bhogilal Patel's son, he was saying that he knows all the big people there. Sītā, Rāma, (indistinct) he's the chairman of the local municipality...</p>
<p>Prabhupāda: So we must have a big temple there.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="PressConferenceDecember161976Hyderabad_2" class="quote" parent="1976_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="347" link="Press Conference -- December 16, 1976, Hyderabad" link_text="Press Conference -- December 16, 1976, Hyderabad">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Press Conference -- December 16, 1976, Hyderabad|Press Conference -- December 16, 1976, Hyderabad]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Mahāṁśa: Kanaipali. And the lands were originally in the Venkateshvara Gorakshini Trust, and they have transferred these lands to ISKCON Venkateshvara Trust under the chairmanship of His Divine Grace A.C. Bhaktivedanta Swami Prabhupāda. So our interest here is to... This area, the whole area here, is very dry. Although there is potency of..., there is potential for tapping water, it has been left dry and unused just like so much land all over. You can see. There is so much land which is unused, vacant, just like this. So we have been given this piece of land. We want to set an example of how such wasted land can be, with proper management and organization, it can be made usable to grow food, abundant food grains and fruits and to feed unlimited...</p>
<p>Prabhupāda: And offer them to Kṛṣṇa and distribute prasādam.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1977_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="sub_section" sec_index="10" parent="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" text="1977 Conversations and Morning Walks"><h3>1977 Conversations and Morning Walks</h3>
</div>
<div id="RoomConversationwithSvarupaDamodaraJanuary301977Bhuvanesvara_0" class="quote" parent="1977_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="68" link="Room Conversation with Svarupa Damodara -- January 30, 1977, Bhuvanesvara" link_text="Room Conversation with Svarupa Damodara -- January 30, 1977, Bhuvanesvara">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Room Conversation with Svarupa Damodara -- January 30, 1977, Bhuvanesvara|Room Conversation with Svarupa Damodara -- January 30, 1977, Bhuvanesvara]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: We are presenting śāstric version in modern scientific symbolic representative. So the chairman said that he never...?</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="RoomConversationMarch11977Mayapura_1" class="quote" parent="1977_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="113" link="Room Conversation -- March 1, 1977, Mayapura" link_text="Room Conversation -- March 1, 1977, Mayapura">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Room Conversation -- March 1, 1977, Mayapura|Room Conversation -- March 1, 1977, Mayapura]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Hṛdayānanda: No. There's no more personal animosity. A chairman was elected, Kīrtanānanda Swami, and vice chairman, Jayatīrtha, and secretary, again Satsvarūpa.</p>
<p>Prabhupāda: That's nice. Who is chairman?</p>
<p>Hṛdayānanda: Kīrtanānanda Swami.</p>
<p>Prabhupāda: He's senior.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="RoomConversationGBCResolutionsMarch11977Mayapura_2" class="quote" parent="1977_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="114" link="Room Conversation 'GBC Resolutions' -- March 1, 1977, Mayapura" link_text="Room Conversation 'GBC Resolutions' -- March 1, 1977, Mayapura">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Room Conversation 'GBC Resolutions' -- March 1, 1977, Mayapura|Room Conversation 'GBC Resolutions' -- March 1, 1977, Mayapura]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Satsvarūpa: So this is the election of the officers: Kīrtanānanda Swami, chairman; Jayatīrtha, vice chairman; Satsvarūpa, secretary.</p>
<p>Prabhupāda: Kīrtanānanda, president, er, chairman. Eh?</p>
<p>Satsvarūpa: Chairman. Jayatīrtha, vice chairman. Satsvarūpa, secretary. And then, in that regard, we passed a resolution that the position of chairman can only be held one year consecutively, every year changed, whereas vice president, secretary, may be held three years consecutively.</p>
<p>Prabhupāda: Why? That should be also one year.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="RoomConversationGBCResolutionsMarch11977Mayapura_3" class="quote" parent="1977_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="114" link="Room Conversation 'GBC Resolutions' -- March 1, 1977, Mayapura" link_text="Room Conversation 'GBC Resolutions' -- March 1, 1977, Mayapura">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Room Conversation 'GBC Resolutions' -- March 1, 1977, Mayapura|Room Conversation 'GBC Resolutions' -- March 1, 1977, Mayapura]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: Yes. The persons are the same, twenty men. Now, by this selection of the majority persons, one becomes chairman for one year. Then everyone has the chance. That is the way. So that is... So secretaries and vice chairman also should be for one year.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="RoomConversationApril21977Bombay_4" class="quote" parent="1977_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="129" link="Room Conversation -- April 2, 1977, Bombay" link_text="Room Conversation -- April 2, 1977, Bombay">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Room Conversation -- April 2, 1977, Bombay|Room Conversation -- April 2, 1977, Bombay]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: Some of them should be sent to the municipal chairman, Vṛndāvana.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="MorningConversationApril111977Bombay_5" class="quote" parent="1977_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="136" link="Morning Conversation -- April 11, 1977, Bombay" link_text="Morning Conversation -- April 11, 1977, Bombay">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Morning Conversation -- April 11, 1977, Bombay|Morning Conversation -- April 11, 1977, Bombay]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Tamāla Kṛṣṇa: (reading:) "Hoxar pleads for healthy land-man relationship. Mr. P. N. Hoxar, deputy chairman of the Planning Commission, yesterday pleaded for developing a healthy and rational land-man relationship as the foundation to build the socio-economic superstructure. Unless such relationship is developed through proper land reforms, it is useless to talk about science and technology in employment-oriented planning, he added. Eighty percent of the people live in the villages and till the land which they do not own. The holdings were fragmented and the tenant was uncertain. They were burdened with debt to such an extent that they could not pay them back and fell into bondage of one sort or another."</p>
<p>Prabhupāda: Another rascal.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="TalkwithSvarupaDamodaraApril181977Bombay_6" class="quote" parent="1977_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="143" link="Talk with Svarupa Damodara -- April 18, 1977, Bombay" link_text="Talk with Svarupa Damodara -- April 18, 1977, Bombay">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Talk with Svarupa Damodara -- April 18, 1977, Bombay|Talk with Svarupa Damodara -- April 18, 1977, Bombay]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Svarūpa Dāmodara: Yes. And he expressed very frankly and very honestly... In fact, Girirāja was talking to (indistinct) yesterday, Girirāja and myself, and every moment, every word, every mood that he expressed was a genuine example of how this material world, we are suffering so much. He said that he had everything in life that he wanted to, in material possession. He has all the qualifications, and he represented national and international levels, the different planning commissions, the chairman of so many organizations, but he said...</p>
<p>Prabhupāda: What is his age?</p>
<p>Svarūpa Dāmodara: He's seventy-three years old. He's very old, but still, he's very active, in good health. And he expressed that he's missing something. So we told that it is ripe time for to be in Kṛṣṇa consciousness. And he comes to a point that he wanted to come and stay in the temple for a week just to learn more and try to get away from all the...</p>
<p>Prabhupāda: So this is very nice. Bring him and give him a nice accommodation.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="ConversationPiecesMay271977Vrndavana_7" class="quote" parent="1977_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="177" link="Conversation Pieces -- May 27, 1977, Vrndavana" link_text="Conversation Pieces -- May 27, 1977, Vrndavana">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Conversation Pieces -- May 27, 1977, Vrndavana|Conversation Pieces -- May 27, 1977, Vrndavana]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Rāmeśvara: The last section is called "The Term of the Trust." "This trust shall be irrevocable. In the advent of an inadvertent disqualification of this trust under the laws as they may exist from time to time, which may require a dissolution of the trust, the entire trust holdings shall in that event be distributed to the International Society for Krishna Consciousness." Then, following that, there's a page which says, "In witness whereof, we have executed this trust on this day," and it has a place for your signature as Founder-Ācārya of ISKCON, then another signature of Your Divine Grace as the chairman of the Bureau of ISKCON, and then a signature of Girirāja as a member of the Bureau of ISKCON. Then, on the last page, the acceptance of the trust. And it says, "The trustees hereby accept this trust and the obligations imposed thereby and undertake to hold, manage and administer the trust in accordance with the terms of this agreement." And it has a place for the three signatures of the three trustees.</p>
<p>Prabhupāda: I think it is all right. It is all right. Bring this typed. Make everything. That's all right.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LetterfromYugoslaviaBooksJune301977Vrndavana_8" class="quote" parent="1977_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="203" link="Letter from Yugoslavia--'Books!' -- June 30, 1977, Vrndavana" link_text="Letter from Yugoslavia--'Books!' -- June 30, 1977, Vrndavana">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter from Yugoslavia--'Books!' -- June 30, 1977, Vrndavana|Letter from Yugoslavia--'Books!' -- June 30, 1977, Vrndavana]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Tamāla Kṛṣṇa: "Even more pleasing was my conversation with the chairman of the Comparative Literature program. He bought both standing orders for the department library, and he wants to speak with his colleagues, who are interested in India. He feels both or one of them..."</p>
<p>Prabhupāda: This will increase India's cultural program. And the government is not... You have to show to the government.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Correspondence" class="section" sec_index="6" parent="compilation" text="Correspondence"><h2>Correspondence</h2>
</div>
<div id="1967_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="2" parent="Correspondence" text="1967 Correspondence"><h3>1967 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoMukundaNewYork5May1967_0" class="quote" parent="1967_Correspondence" book="Let" index="77" link="Letter to Mukunda -- New York 5 May, 1967" link_text="Letter to Mukunda -- New York 5 May, 1967">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Mukunda -- New York 5 May, 1967|Letter to Mukunda -- New York 5 May, 1967]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">There were about 200 students present, and at the last kirtana they all danced and sung with me, and there were 20 minutes of answers and questions. This meeting was arranged by the Philosophy Dept. Chairman, so it was very nice and successful. Regarding your inquiry about the individual soul present, I think you will remember that I have several times explained that throughout the whole cosmic creation, not only in the cosmic creation, in the Spiritual World also, the individual is full everywhere, they are numberless. In the material world, the number of souls are very small. In the Spiritual World the number of individual souls are far far greater than what they are here. The conditioned souls are just like prisoners, as we have got less population in the prison house, similarly, in the material world the number of individual souls are very small. So you may understand from me that the individual souls are everywhere, means, anywhere you go within this material world there are individual living entities, in all planets in the outer space, in the water, on the land everywhere.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1971_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="6" parent="Correspondence" text="1971 Correspondence"><h3>1971 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoGargamuniBombay22December1971_0" class="quote" parent="1971_Correspondence" book="Let" index="584" link="Letter to Gargamuni -- Bombay 22 December, 1971" link_text="Letter to Gargamuni -- Bombay 22 December, 1971">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Gargamuni -- Bombay 22 December, 1971|Letter to Gargamuni -- Bombay 22 December, 1971]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">As for municipal land, see the municipal chairman personally. We wanted land within the city. In the meantime, you can show the chairman the enclosed pictures from "Dharma Yug" magazine, latest issue, how we are a worldwide organization, as well as other clippings from Toronto, etc.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoKsirodakasayiBombay26December1971_1" class="quote" parent="1971_Correspondence" book="Let" index="596" link="Letter to Ksirodakasayi -- Bombay 26 December, 1971" link_text="Letter to Ksirodakasayi -- Bombay 26 December, 1971">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Ksirodakasayi -- Bombay 26 December, 1971|Letter to Ksirodakasayi -- Bombay 26 December, 1971]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So far the Vrindaban land, if possible you should go there and induce the Chairman to give us the promised land. Gargamuni has written me letter that because you said to the chairman that Mr. Saraf is going to give us his land, therefore he was reluctant. So you go there and inform him that Mr. Saraf is not giving us the land, although he promised, and persuade him to give us the municipal land some way or other. Go there immediately, and inform me the result. Gargamuni is there to raise funds, so he will help you.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoMadanMohanGoswamiBombay30December1971_2" class="quote" parent="1971_Correspondence" book="Let" index="608" link="Letter to Madan Mohan Goswami -- Bombay 30 December, 1971" link_text="Letter to Madan Mohan Goswami -- Bombay 30 December, 1971">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Madan Mohan Goswami -- Bombay 30 December, 1971|Letter to Madan Mohan Goswami -- Bombay 30 December, 1971]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Therefore, I am legally in possession of the two rooms and the verandah. Everyone in Vrindaban including the Chairman of the Municipal Board and most probably Sri Panchanan Goswami and all the others know that I am in possession of the two rooms and the verandah in Radha Damodara Temple.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1972_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="7" parent="Correspondence" text="1972 Correspondence"><h3>1972 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoVisvanathaBabuBombay3January1972_0" class="quote" parent="1972_Correspondence" book="Let" index="10" link="Letter to Visvanatha Babu -- Bombay 3 January, 1972" link_text="Letter to Visvanatha Babu -- Bombay 3 January, 1972">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Visvanatha Babu -- Bombay 3 January, 1972|Letter to Visvanatha Babu -- Bombay 3 January, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Recently I had been in Vrindaban and the whole Vrindaban city appreciated my service in the foreign countries. Both the Municipality Chairman officially as well as the Vrajavasi public gave me address of welcome in great meetings. But I had some difficulty in staying in my rooms at Radha Damodara Temple. They want me to go away and are now picking up some quarrel with me to get me out of my possession. A copy of a registered letter from one of the Sevaits Madan Mohan Goswami is enclosed and he has already taken possession in my absence of the verandah of my entrance door. You know very well and all residents of Vrindaban know it that my residence is there at Radha Damodara Temple but they are now trying to get me out, although I am paying the rent regularly and there is some advance payment also.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoKsirodakasayiBombay7February1972_1" class="quote" parent="1972_Correspondence" book="Let" index="82" link="Letter to Ksirodakasayi -- Bombay 7 February, 1972" link_text="Letter to Ksirodakasayi -- Bombay 7 February, 1972">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Ksirodakasayi -- Bombay 7 February, 1972|Letter to Ksirodakasayi -- Bombay 7 February, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I would further request you to secure the Vrindaban Land, either from Mr. Saraf or from the Municipal Chairman as they have promised and I wish also that this Hindi department, as well as Vrindaban department may be managed by you and Ramananda cooperatively.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoManagerofPunjabNationalBankVrindaban14March1972_2" class="quote" parent="1972_Correspondence" book="Let" index="139" link="Letter to Manager of Punjab National Bank -- Vrindaban 14 March, 1972" link_text="Letter to Manager of Punjab National Bank -- Vrindaban 14 March, 1972">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Manager of Punjab National Bank -- Vrindaban 14 March, 1972|Letter to Manager of Punjab National Bank -- Vrindaban 14 March, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">That the bank be furnished with a list of the names of the members/directors constituting the Governing Body for the time being and a copy of the rules and regulations/Memorandum and Articles of Association of the International Society for Krishna Consciousness and be from time to time informed by notice in writing under the hand of the Chairman of any changes which may take place therein. The Bank shall be entitled to act upon any such notice until the receipt of further notice under the hand of the Chairman.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoManagerofPunjabNationalBankVrindaban14March1972_3" class="quote" parent="1972_Correspondence" book="Let" index="139" link="Letter to Manager of Punjab National Bank -- Vrindaban 14 March, 1972" link_text="Letter to Manager of Punjab National Bank -- Vrindaban 14 March, 1972">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Manager of Punjab National Bank -- Vrindaban 14 March, 1972|Letter to Manager of Punjab National Bank -- Vrindaban 14 March, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">That this Resolution be communicated to the Bank, and remain in force until notice in writing is given to the Bank by the Chairman.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1973_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="8" parent="Correspondence" text="1973 Correspondence"><h3>1973 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoGirirajaLosAngeles27April1973_0" class="quote" parent="1973_Correspondence" book="Let" index="151" link="Letter to Giriraja -- Los Angeles 27 April, 1973" link_text="Letter to Giriraja -- Los Angeles 27 April, 1973">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Giriraja -- Los Angeles 27 April, 1973|Letter to Giriraja -- Los Angeles 27 April, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Regarding Grand Pardi land, try your level best to secure at least one acre of land, and Mr. S.K. Thirani Chairman of Kores Ltd. is prepared to contribute 7 lacs for the temple. So in case we have to part with the Juhu land, we shall construct a very nice temple in the city at Grand Pardi, and if we do not lose the land we shall construct two temples in Bombay: one in the city and one in Juhu. So we shall try for both of them.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1976_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="11" parent="Correspondence" text="1976 Correspondence"><h3>1976 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoVasudeva_0" class="quote" parent="1976_Correspondence" book="Let" index="424" link="Letter to Vasudeva" link_text="Letter to Vasudeva">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Vasudeva|Letter to Vasudeva]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Regarding the situation in Fiji, it is necessary that we come to a proper understanding as to the status of the land and the organization of ISKCON Fiji itself. The first point is that the governing board of ISKCON may have yourself and your brother as members, but must also have the GBC for the zone, Gurukrpa Swami, the GBC Chairman, Tamala Krsna Goswami , and Upendra das as members. The second point is that after ISKCON has been organized in the above way the land which the temple is being constructed on must be leased to ISKCON Fiji with a 99 year unconditional lease with option to renew which I shall approve.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoDavidBRicheterHughesVrndavana8September1976_1" class="quote" parent="1976_Correspondence" book="Let" index="493" link="Letter to David B. Richeter Hughes -- Vrndavana 8 September, 1976" link_text="Letter to David B. Richeter Hughes -- Vrndavana 8 September, 1976">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to David B. Richeter Hughes -- Vrndavana 8 September, 1976|Letter to David B. Richeter Hughes -- Vrndavana 8 September, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Thank you very much for your kind offer to have me as your Permanent Acarya and Honorary Chairman. I will accept this if your organization and members are agreed to follow the four regulative principles which discriminate animal life from human life, i.e. no eating of meat fish or eggs; no illicit sex life outside of marriage and then only for the begetting of God conscious children; no intoxicants, including coffee, tea, or cigarettes; no gambling, not even bingo. Unless one follows these principles, spiritual life is not possible.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoTamalaKrsnaVrindaban5October1976_2" class="quote" parent="1976_Correspondence" book="Let" index="555" link="Letter to Tamala Krsna -- Vrindaban 5 October, 1976" link_text="Letter to Tamala Krsna -- Vrindaban 5 October, 1976">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Tamala Krsna -- Vrindaban 5 October, 1976|Letter to Tamala Krsna -- Vrindaban 5 October, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Yes, the GBCs should move and visit other other zones, and I quite approve that the GBC chairman can do this.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoYasomatinandanaVrindaban28November1976_3" class="quote" parent="1976_Correspondence" book="Let" index="666" link="Letter to Yasomatinandana -- Vrindaban 28 November, 1976" link_text="Letter to Yasomatinandana -- Vrindaban 28 November, 1976">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Yasomatinandana -- Vrindaban 28 November, 1976|Letter to Yasomatinandana -- Vrindaban 28 November, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">You may call the gosala: ISKCON Gosala and Farm Project Trust. The trustees shall be; myself as chairman, Pranlal Bhogilal, yourself, Gopala Krsna, Mahamsa, Hamsaduta, Karatieya Mahadevia, Aksayananda, and the life member you have mentioned in your letter (You haven't mentioned his name, but you say that he is an actor and has a farm of his own).</p>
</div>
</div>
</div>

Tangible (Letters)

2010-05-27T06:28:52Z

Partha-sarathi:

<div id="compilation">
<div id="facts">
{{terms|"tangibility"|"tangible"|"tangibly"}}
{{notes|}}
{{compiler|Visnu Murti|Partha-sarathi}}
{{complete|ALL}}
{{first|27May10}}
{{last|27May10}}
{{totals_by_section|BG=0|SB=0|CC=0|OB=0|Lec=0|Con=0|Let=60}}
{{total|60}}
{{toc right}}
[[Category:Tangible|1]]
[[Category:Compilations from Letters]]
</div>
<div id="Correspondence" class="section" sec_index="6" parent="compilation" text="Correspondence"><h2>Correspondence</h2>
</div>
<div id="1947_to_1965_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="0" parent="Correspondence" text="1947 to 1965 Correspondence"><h3>1947 to 1965 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoChiefJusticeSriMCChaglaBombay20February1957_0" class="quote" parent="1947_to_1965_Correspondence" book="Let" index="31" link="Letter to Chief-Justice Sri M.C. Chagla -- Bombay 20 February, 1957" link_text="Letter to Chief-Justice Sri M.C. Chagla -- Bombay 20 February, 1957">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Chief-Justice Sri M.C. Chagla -- Bombay 20 February, 1957|Letter to Chief-Justice Sri M.C. Chagla -- Bombay 20 February, 1957]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">The Bhagavad-gita is the standard book in this matter. Sri Munshi is trying to utilize this philosophy for the good of the people in general. He is spending establishment charges to the extent of Rs. 40,000/- per month for the last twenty years—but actually no tangible benefit is derived out of it up till now. I saw Sri Munshi with a view to cooperate with him for implementing the transcendental ideas of the Bhagavad-gita. But I did not receive any encouragement from him so far. I am, therefore, seeking an interview with your Lordship to discuss for a few minutes about this standard idea of solving the problems.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoKMMunshiBombay21February1957_1" class="quote" parent="1947_to_1965_Correspondence" book="Let" index="32" link="Letter to K. M. Munshi -- Bombay 21 February, 1957" link_text="Letter to K. M. Munshi -- Bombay 21 February, 1957">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to K. M. Munshi -- Bombay 21 February, 1957|Letter to K. M. Munshi -- Bombay 21 February, 1957]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So simple criticism of cinema houses will not fulfill the purpose. We have to create tangible interest in the temples for spiritual advancement of knowledge. With that purpose in view, it is necessary that the priests and pujaris must be enlightened men both in Theism and Sanskrit language also. They shall be primary teachers of the Bhagavad-gita in different temples. Both these temples and their management have to be reformed in the present context. We shall have to accommodate the process of temple entry by all classes of people but they may be so admitted for proper qualification and not for the purpose of a mere show.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoSethMangumalAmarsinghBombay24July1958_2" class="quote" parent="1947_to_1965_Correspondence" book="Let" index="34" link="Letter to Seth Mangumal Amarsingh -- Bombay 24 July, 1958" link_text="Letter to Seth Mangumal Amarsingh -- Bombay 24 July, 1958">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Seth Mangumal Amarsingh -- Bombay 24 July, 1958|Letter to Seth Mangumal Amarsingh -- Bombay 24 July, 1958]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Apart from his various uncommon activities in the line, He was kind enough to order me to propage the same cult in English language to preach the cult in the foreign countries and in obedience to His order I am trying to do my bit. What I have done so far will be spoken by the enclosed papers. But I am practically struggling very hard for this job without any tangible success till Sri Sanjib Banerji has told me that you are the right person to co-operate with me in this noble task for propagating the Bhakti cult and combined in the message of Sri Caitanya Caritamrta.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoTirthaMaharajaNewYork8November1965_3" class="quote" parent="1947_to_1965_Correspondence" book="Let" index="67" link="Letter to Tirtha Maharaja -- New York 8 November, 1965" link_text="Letter to Tirtha Maharaja -- New York 8 November, 1965">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Tirtha Maharaja -- New York 8 November, 1965|Letter to Tirtha Maharaja -- New York 8 November, 1965]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Now here is a second chance and without undergoing a long series of correspondence with Govinda Maharaja, I am directly writing you about my intention. Srila Prabhupada had a strong desire to open our preaching centres in the Western countries and both Bon Maharaja and Goswami Maharaja were deputed for this purpose without any tangible result.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoTirthaMaharajaNewYork8November1965_4" class="quote" parent="1947_to_1965_Correspondence" book="Let" index="67" link="Letter to Tirtha Maharaja -- New York 8 November, 1965" link_text="Letter to Tirtha Maharaja -- New York 8 November, 1965">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Tirtha Maharaja -- New York 8 November, 1965|Letter to Tirtha Maharaja -- New York 8 November, 1965]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Otherwise I shall not extend my visa period but I shall return to India without being able to do anything tangible at my first tour. Hope you will take this matter as very urgent and let me know your decision by immediate return of post or by wire to my above address and oblige. Hope you are all well and thanking you in anticipation.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoSumatiMorarjeeNewYork10November1965_5" class="quote" parent="1947_to_1965_Correspondence" book="Let" index="68" link="Letter to Sumati Morarjee -- New York 10 November, 1965" link_text="Letter to Sumati Morarjee -- New York 10 November, 1965">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Sumati Morarjee -- New York 10 November, 1965|Letter to Sumati Morarjee -- New York 10 November, 1965]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Simply by casual lectures there is no possibility of any tangible work but the abovementioned standard work will do impress the people what actually the Hindu culture is. I have already seen a nice house for this purpose and if you purchase that house for this purpose as your personal property and give the facility of working then you will see how the mission of Bhagavati cult is being preached here in America beginning from New York. I do not wish to disclose the names of the Hiranyakasipus here in America who are against this Bhagavata preaching. There are so many Indian missionaries like the Ramakrishna Mission, Sivananda Mission etc and all of them are against Bhagavatam culture and every one of them has refused to give facility to speak on the Bhagavati culture. Each of them have their own house but instead of worshiping the Supreme Lord they have created their own God and they try to put such manufactured gods to compete with Lord Krishna. So unless there is a place for me and facility to work systematically, my Bhagavati Mission will not be workable in this place. I have no ambition to become the proprietor of any temple or house in America because what shall I do with them after becoming a Sannyasi but for the facility of work our own house is absolutely required.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1966_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="1" parent="Correspondence" text="1966 Correspondence"><h3>1966 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoMangalaniloyBrahmacariNewYork16May1966_0" class="quote" parent="1966_Correspondence" book="Let" index="13" link="Letter to Mangalaniloy Brahmacari -- New York 16 May, 1966" link_text="Letter to Mangalaniloy Brahmacari -- New York 16 May, 1966">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Mangalaniloy Brahmacari -- New York 16 May, 1966|Letter to Mangalaniloy Brahmacari -- New York 16 May, 1966]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I know you well and I think once we met at Vrindaban some 8 to 9 years before and I took Prasadam in your then Matha behind the Ranganatha Temple. Perhaps you saw my paper also Back to Godhead. I think if you come at all you should come here with a tangible programme and it is encouraging to note that you wish to work under me by full cooperation. You will be glad to learn that Sir Padampat Singhania of Kanpur was approached by me in correspondence, as he was known to me before, to erect a Radhakrishna Temple in New York and he has agreed to take up the work very nicely provided there is sanction of Indian exchange. Srila Tirtha Maharaja promised me all help to get this exchange sanctioned by seeing the President and the Finance Minister as he is supposed to have some influence over them.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoMangalaniloyBrahmacariNewYork16May1966_1" class="quote" parent="1966_Correspondence" book="Let" index="13" link="Letter to Mangalaniloy Brahmacari -- New York 16 May, 1966" link_text="Letter to Mangalaniloy Brahmacari -- New York 16 May, 1966">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Mangalaniloy Brahmacari -- New York 16 May, 1966|Letter to Mangalaniloy Brahmacari -- New York 16 May, 1966]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I think he can also help me in this connection. Anyway let us cooperate in this connection for some tangible work. Not only your good self but also many others from India are prepared to come here to assist me but I think casual visit to this country will not do.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1967_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="2" parent="Correspondence" text="1967 Correspondence"><h3>1967 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoCarlEMaxwellPayneSanFrancisco17February1967_0" class="quote" parent="1967_Correspondence" book="Let" index="25" link="Letter to Carl E. Maxwell-Payne -- San Francisco 17 February, 1967" link_text="Letter to Carl E. Maxwell-Payne -- San Francisco 17 February, 1967">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Carl E. Maxwell-Payne -- San Francisco 17 February, 1967|Letter to Carl E. Maxwell-Payne -- San Francisco 17 February, 1967]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I can also understand from your letter and other sources that so far you have not been able to secure any financial assistance with any tangible hope.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoRayaramaCalcutta15November1967_1" class="quote" parent="1967_Correspondence" book="Let" index="217" link="Letter to Rayarama -- Calcutta 15 November, 1967" link_text="Letter to Rayarama -- Calcutta 15 November, 1967">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Rayarama -- Calcutta 15 November, 1967|Letter to Rayarama -- Calcutta 15 November, 1967]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">If I can leave behind me the Srimad-Bhagavatam, Gita Upanisad, and Lord Caitanya's Teachings, & if you continue to work in the spirit of pure Krishna Consciousness, surely we shall be able to do some tangible service to Humanity at large. Hope you are well</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoBrahmanandaCalcutta7December1967_2" class="quote" parent="1967_Correspondence" book="Let" index="228" link="Letter to Brahmananda -- Calcutta 7 December, 1967" link_text="Letter to Brahmananda -- Calcutta 7 December, 1967">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Brahmananda -- Calcutta 7 December, 1967|Letter to Brahmananda -- Calcutta 7 December, 1967]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Similarly I've arranged for sending spices and frankincense. The contact with MacMillan should be finished before you leave. Your journey, as you have suggested is important for your touring in Europe. We cannot expect any tangible help from Miss Bowtell. She is not my godsister but a disciple of my godbrother. The best thing will be to start a center independently.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoKrsnaDeviSanFrancisco21December1967_3" class="quote" parent="1967_Correspondence" book="Let" index="243" link="Letter to Krsna Devi -- San Francisco 21 December, 1967" link_text="Letter to Krsna Devi -- San Francisco 21 December, 1967">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Krsna Devi -- San Francisco 21 December, 1967|Letter to Krsna Devi -- San Francisco 21 December, 1967]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">The more you see like that you know you are making tangible advancement in Krishna Consciousness. Actually, there is nothing but Krishna all around us. This is explained in the Gita. He is the taste of water, light of the moon, the fragrance of the flower, light of the sun, sound of the sky, the power of the strong and so on. so one who is actually making progress in Krishna Consciousness, he can see Krishna everywhere. At every stage of life, who can avoid the sunlight, the moonlight, the fragrance of the flower, the taste of the water, the sound of the sky, and so on; but one has to learn it, that there is Krishna in all these varieties of existence. Without Krishna there is nothing. It is simply by the influence of Maya that we forget the relationship of Krishna with everything that be.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1968_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="3" parent="Correspondence" text="1968 Correspondence"><h3>1968 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoHarikrishnadasAggarwalLosAngeles3March1968_0" class="quote" parent="1968_Correspondence" book="Let" index="101" link="Letter to Harikrishnadas Aggarwal -- Los Angeles 3 March, 1968" link_text="Letter to Harikrishnadas Aggarwal -- Los Angeles 3 March, 1968">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Harikrishnadas Aggarwal -- Los Angeles 3 March, 1968|Letter to Harikrishnadas Aggarwal -- Los Angeles 3 March, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Akama means the devotees, sarvakama means the fruitive workers or Karmis, and Moksakama means the salvationist who wants to merge in the formless Brahman. So there are three classes of men and all are recommended to worship the Supreme Person Krishna with great energy of devotional service. So we invite everyone to join this movement, accepting Krishna as the tangible God for all practical purposes, and the worship of God is made easy by chanting the Mantra Hare Krishna, which is accepted even in far Western countries. You will be pleased to know that Hare Krishna Mantra is being chanted not only in America, but also in Europe by my record albums, and followers. I have got already invitations from many parts of Europe and they are appreciating my movement. Nobody feels reluctance in joining the chanting of Hare Krishna Mantra.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoGurudasaMontreal7June1968_1" class="quote" parent="1968_Correspondence" book="Let" index="188" link="Letter to Gurudasa -- Montreal 7 June, 1968" link_text="Letter to Gurudasa -- Montreal 7 June, 1968">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Gurudasa -- Montreal 7 June, 1968|Letter to Gurudasa -- Montreal 7 June, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Our London program is gradually becoming a tangible fact. And I am receiving letters from California devotees which are very encouraging. I think I shall be starting for London in the month of August. Certainly, your conclusion is very nice; we should always depend on Krishna. But for service, we can make our plan, and Krishna will help us.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoSacisutaMontreal17June1968_2" class="quote" parent="1968_Correspondence" book="Let" index="205" link="Letter to Sacisuta -- Montreal 17 June, 1968" link_text="Letter to Sacisuta -- Montreal 17 June, 1968">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Sacisuta -- Montreal 17 June, 1968|Letter to Sacisuta -- Montreal 17 June, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Visnu's wife, Laksmi, was present there. She was just massaging the Lord's leg, and the Lord avoided her and produced a child. Here in the material world, without the assistance of the wife, nobody can produce a child. But there is the tangible example, that Visnu, without any sex life with wife He produced a child. In the material sense, we cannot conceive how a child can take birth without being born through the abdomen of one woman. Therefore, Krishna being both father and mother, He can be addressed also as mother. That is His all-powerful strength. He is full in Himself. He does not require anyone's help, therefore, He is both father and mother. I think this will clear your idea.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoJagannathamPrabhuMontreal22June1968_3" class="quote" parent="1968_Correspondence" book="Let" index="214" link="Letter to Jagannatham Prabhu -- Montreal 22 June, 1968" link_text="Letter to Jagannatham Prabhu -- Montreal 22 June, 1968">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Jagannatham Prabhu -- Montreal 22 June, 1968|Letter to Jagannatham Prabhu -- Montreal 22 June, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Unfortunately the present workers in the Bombay Gaudiya Math are not at all competent to do any tangible work. They are staying there for the last 35 years, but they have not done any appreciable work. it is simply a place "khabadavar addakhama." Srila Prabhupada used this word many times in connection with inactive centers. And when one was too much engaged in buildings, He always warned that our business is not for becoming mason workers, or becoming carpenters, neither to create a place for eating and sleeping. So these people are collecting funds and eating and sleeping. The reason is that they deviated from the disciplic succession from Srila Prabhupada. So, I don't wish to discuss on this point, because you know better than me; but I think you are also old enough, and I am also old enough. At any time we may pass away from this world, but I wish that we may try to do some service to Srila Prabhupada until the last moment of our life.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoVinodePatelMontreal6July1968_4" class="quote" parent="1968_Correspondence" book="Let" index="225" link="Letter to Vinode Patel -- Montreal 6 July, 1968" link_text="Letter to Vinode Patel -- Montreal 6 July, 1968">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Vinode Patel -- Montreal 6 July, 1968|Letter to Vinode Patel -- Montreal 6 July, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">But you do not wish to prosecute your studies any more, but want to do some business. I know also that you are a family man, and in India you have got your wife and 2 daughters. The first thing is that you may remain in the temple with the permission of Jayananda Brahmacari, the president of the temple, and as you are rendering some service to the temple, I think he will be very glad to accept you as one of the inmates. Your desire to do something tangible for the temple and it is a very welcome suggestion. There are many things to be done in the matter of the temple. Perhaps you will appreciate that this Radha Krishna temple is the one only in San Francisco.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoHarivilasaMontreal25July1968_5" class="quote" parent="1968_Correspondence" book="Let" index="247" link="Letter to Harivilasa -- Montreal 25 July, 1968" link_text="Letter to Harivilasa -- Montreal 25 July, 1968">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Harivilasa -- Montreal 25 July, 1968|Letter to Harivilasa -- Montreal 25 July, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">And I think if you want to do some real service to Krishna, and to the society, you should now fix up your mind to follow my instructions and do some tangible work. Unless you fix up your mind to serve your Spiritual Master, Who is direct representative of Krishna, it is not possible to approach Krishna. Krishna is approached through the transparent via media, of Spiritual Master. Anyway, the letter which you sent me 3 weeks prior was duly received by me and I have duly replied them point to point, and if you have not received that letter, I am enclosing a true copy of the reply which will clear all the points raised by you. Regarding the Murtis, the letter will explain.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoBrahmanandaSeattle6October1968_6" class="quote" parent="1968_Correspondence" book="Let" index="350" link="Letter to Brahmananda -- Seattle 6 October, 1968" link_text="Letter to Brahmananda -- Seattle 6 October, 1968">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Brahmananda -- Seattle 6 October, 1968|Letter to Brahmananda -- Seattle 6 October, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">The next point is what about Acyutananda and Jaya Govinda? I have not heard from them since a very long time. You should immediately write to them why they have become silent all of a sudden. It is not good for them to remain in India as guests of this person or that person, without doing something tangible for our society. Acyutananda wanted to come back, so it was very welcome suggestion. But I think he might have changed his decision again. I do not know what to do with this boy. And if they want to remain in India, they must do something tangible work for our society. If not, they may come back. There is vast work here. And recently I have received letter from Mukunda that from South America, Guyana, it was under the possession of British, one Mr. Dindayal is very much anxious to get us there. So we have to open so many branches all over the world. So why they are sitting idly in India? Please write to them also.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoRayaramaBrahmanandaLosAngeles17November1968_7" class="quote" parent="1968_Correspondence" book="Let" index="424" link="Letter to Rayarama, Brahmananda -- Los Angeles 17 November, 1968" link_text="Letter to Rayarama, Brahmananda -- Los Angeles 17 November, 1968">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Rayarama, Brahmananda -- Los Angeles 17 November, 1968|Letter to Rayarama, Brahmananda -- Los Angeles 17 November, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">The current issue of Back to Godhead is better than all previous ones. So you are tangibly improving the quality of BTG. May Krishna bless you improve it more & more. Tamala sold yesterday 87 copies at a length. He is very much satisfied with this issue. Hayagriva is also doing nicely at Columbus fighting against Frog Philosophy.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1969_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="4" parent="Correspondence" text="1969 Correspondence"><h3>1969 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoHayagrivaLosAngeles31January1969_0" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="74" link="Letter to Hayagriva -- Los Angeles 31 January, 1969" link_text="Letter to Hayagriva -- Los Angeles 31 January, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Hayagriva -- Los Angeles 31 January, 1969|Letter to Hayagriva -- Los Angeles 31 January, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">In comparison to that situation, our 6 young boys and girls are neither very much advanced in their study of Vedanta nor any other Vedic literature, neither are they sannyasis. But still they are doing more tangible work than what Bon Maharaja could do there 35 years ago. This very fact confirms the statement of Lord Caitanya that a preacher or teacher may be a householder, a sannyasi, a brahmana, a sudra, or anyone, provided he knows the science of Krishna.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoHamsadutaNewVrindaban8June1969_1" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="352" link="Letter to Hamsaduta -- New Vrindaban 8 June, 1969" link_text="Letter to Hamsaduta -- New Vrindaban 8 June, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Hamsaduta -- New Vrindaban 8 June, 1969|Letter to Hamsaduta -- New Vrindaban 8 June, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Similarly, in the materialistic way of life everyone is blind, and in spite of thousands of big blind leaders, the followers who are also blind cannot get any tangible benefit.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoDineshNewVrindaban10June1969_2" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="355" link="Letter to Dinesh -- New Vrindaban 10 June, 1969" link_text="Letter to Dinesh -- New Vrindaban 10 June, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Dinesh -- New Vrindaban 10 June, 1969|Letter to Dinesh -- New Vrindaban 10 June, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">There are some points in the contract which are not very clear, so you may explain them to me further by post. The points are as follows: "ISKCON shall have the sole and exclusive right and authority to collect preserve and distribute all tangible expressions of said sound vibrations." "Said sound vibrations shall be fixed in a tangible form solely by ISKCON" "ISKCON shall have the exclusive right to any existing sound recordings contained in any medium of fixation that have been previously recorded by the SWAMI" "ISKCON shall have the sole and exclusive right to use the name and likeness of the SWAMI for all purposes and activities encompassed by this agreement."</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoTamalaKrsnaNewVrindaban12June1969_3" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="360" link="Letter to Tamala Krsna -- New Vrindaban 12 June, 1969" link_text="Letter to Tamala Krsna -- New Vrindaban 12 June, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Tamala Krsna -- New Vrindaban 12 June, 1969|Letter to Tamala Krsna -- New Vrindaban 12 June, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So I shall be glad to know if you can spare some brahmacaris for London. They are of course planning something very gorgeous, but till now it has not been tangible. But because they are working very seriously and sincerely it will be successful. At present my plan is that by the 10th of July either I go to London or to Los Angeles. That is certain. So even if I do not go to Los Angeles, the Festival will be nicely performed there. If I go to London I shall see that the Rathayatra Festival is also performed there, and I have written to Syamasundara. expressing my great desire like this. But everything depends on Krishna's disposal.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoKrsnaDeviNewVrindaban15June1969_4" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="365" link="Letter to Krsna Devi -- New Vrindaban 15 June, 1969" link_text="Letter to Krsna Devi -- New Vrindaban 15 June, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Krsna Devi -- New Vrindaban 15 June, 1969|Letter to Krsna Devi -- New Vrindaban 15 June, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I am pleased to learn that you are thinking of putting together a cookbook of our Krishna prasadam recipes. I understand that in London, Yamuna Dasi has already done some work on this same project, so you may correspond with her in this connection. I know that at our feasts especially many persons become interested in preparing foodstuffs in this way, so this cookbook is a nice thing to instruct such persons in preparing and offering nice prasadam for the Lord. So when there is some tangible book ready for publication, please inform me, and we shall try to arrange for its publication. I am pleased to note your description of the increasing interest in vegetarian diet in this country. Actually, the practice of meat-eating is very detrimental to spiritual life, because in spiritual life the goal is to become free from all sinful reactions, and meat-eating means simply to force oneself to suffer the sinful reactions of killing our fellow living entities.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoMukundaLosAngeles2July1969_5" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="410" link="Letter to Mukunda -- Los Angeles 2 July, 1969" link_text="Letter to Mukunda -- Los Angeles 2 July, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Mukunda -- Los Angeles 2 July, 1969|Letter to Mukunda -- Los Angeles 2 July, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Regarding Mataji Syamadevi, she cannot live there at any circumstance. The first thing is that she does not know English, so what help will she be? She cannot speak to an audience, neither she has any knowledge of Krishna Consciousness philosophy. So why she should live with us? We should utilize all of our facilities for our own men. Besides that, she has got her ideas of Hindu sentiment, and she cannot be used for international Krishna Consciousness. She is interested in Hindus only, and otherwise she is useless. If she will donate money or Murtis, that is welcome, but she cannot live in the temple. We require space for so many other purposes. So don't commit any word that she may live there. If in the future, some tangible arrangements of cooperation can be adjusted, then she may live there; but I do not think this is going to be.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoJayagovindaLosAngeles4July1969_6" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="415" link="Letter to Jayagovinda -- Los Angeles 4 July, 1969" link_text="Letter to Jayagovinda -- Los Angeles 4 July, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Jayagovinda -- Los Angeles 4 July, 1969|Letter to Jayagovinda -- Los Angeles 4 July, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Your Zuruck Zur Gottheit is certainly a unique gift to me, and I shall ever remember it. It is all your credit that as soon as you arrived in Germany you have done some tangible service to the mission. May Krishna bless you more and more. And as you wish that this service may continue throughout all your life and the next, so it gives me more pleasure about your sincerity of service.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoSwamiBSBhagavataMaharajaLosAngeles21August1969_7" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="528" link="Letter to Swami B. S. Bhagavata Maharaja -- Los Angeles 21 August, 1969" link_text="Letter to Swami B. S. Bhagavata Maharaja -- Los Angeles 21 August, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Swami B. S. Bhagavata Maharaja -- Los Angeles 21 August, 1969|Letter to Swami B. S. Bhagavata Maharaja -- Los Angeles 21 August, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">But when I first met His Divine Grace Srila Prabhupada, He instructed me to preach in the foreign countries, but I could not do anything tangible on account of my family attachment. So after taking sannyasa in 1959 I prepared myself for coming to the foreign countries. As soon as three books were ready, Srimad-Bhagavatam, I started for New York in 1965. This was out of my inspiration in receipt from Srila Prabhupada, and it appears that my attempt in the foreign countries has become successful to a great extent. By my personal attempt I have established preaching centers numbering about two dozen, beginning from Hamburg to Tokyo. I think if my Godbrothers would have attempted similarly, preaching centers would have been established all over the world by this time. Therefore, I wish that Gaudiya Mission should send their preachers and establish different centers in different parts of the world. That will fulfill the Mission of Srila Bhaktisiddhanta Sarasvati Goswami Maharaja.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoSwamiBSBhagavataMaharajaLosAngeles21August1969_8" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="528" link="Letter to Swami B. S. Bhagavata Maharaja -- Los Angeles 21 August, 1969" link_text="Letter to Swami B. S. Bhagavata Maharaja -- Los Angeles 21 August, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Swami B. S. Bhagavata Maharaja -- Los Angeles 21 August, 1969|Letter to Swami B. S. Bhagavata Maharaja -- Los Angeles 21 August, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I thank you very much for inviting me to your head office in Calcutta for heart-to-heart talk and discussion. I shall be always glad to abide by this suggestion, but the thing is if I go to India, it will cost me at least Rs. 25,000 to go and come back. In this old age, wherever I go I take with me one personal assistant. This means if I go to India, I will have to take my secretary, and that means two return tickets also, as well as other expenses. But if something is tangibly understood on the line of cooperation, it will be not difficult for me to go and see the acharya of the Mission for the final decision.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoJayagovindaTittenhurst15October1969_9" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="614" link="Letter to Jayagovinda -- Tittenhurst 15 October, 1969" link_text="Letter to Jayagovinda -- Tittenhurst 15 October, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Jayagovinda -- Tittenhurst 15 October, 1969|Letter to Jayagovinda -- Tittenhurst 15 October, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">There is a proveb in Sanskrit literature that enthusiastic persons achieve the favor of the Goddess of Fortune. In the Western part of the world there is tangible example of this slogan. People in this part of the world are very much enthusiastic in material advancement and they have got it. Similarly, according to the instructions of Srila Rupa Goswami, if we become enthusiastic in spiritual matters, then we also get success in that way. Take for example, I came to your country in ripe old age, but I had one asset: enthusiasm and faith in my Spiritual Master. I think these assets only are giving me some lights of hope, whatever I have achieved so far with your cooperation. I hope this will meet you in good health.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1970_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="5" parent="Correspondence" text="1970 Correspondence"><h3>1970 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoLilavatiLosAngeles1April1970_0" class="quote" parent="1970_Correspondence" book="Let" index="213" link="Letter to Lilavati -- Los Angeles 1 April, 1970" link_text="Letter to Lilavati -- Los Angeles 1 April, 1970">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Lilavati -- Los Angeles 1 April, 1970|Letter to Lilavati -- Los Angeles 1 April, 1970]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So far George's house is concerned, it was formerly learned through Syamasundara. that he also wants to have a Krsna Consciousness center there. If he gives us a place there, just like Lennon gave a place in his garden, then you can start a similar temple there under your supervision. But unless there is some tangible program there, I think you should not divert attention in starting a new center there.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoMadhudvisaLosAngeles11November1970_1" class="quote" parent="1970_Correspondence" book="Let" index="583" link="Letter to Madhudvisa -- Los Angeles 11 November, 1970" link_text="Letter to Madhudvisa -- Los Angeles 11 November, 1970">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Madhudvisa -- Los Angeles 11 November, 1970|Letter to Madhudvisa -- Los Angeles 11 November, 1970]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">People should say that these Americans have come here and they have built this wonderful temple. We must do something tangible.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoJaduraniBombay16November1970_2" class="quote" parent="1970_Correspondence" book="Let" index="597" link="Letter to Jadurani -- Bombay 16 November, 1970" link_text="Letter to Jadurani -- Bombay 16 November, 1970">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Jadurani -- Bombay 16 November, 1970|Letter to Jadurani -- Bombay 16 November, 1970]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;"> I am getting such happy reports from all our centers and actually that is the way of advancing in spiritual life. Without being jolly, one cannot make any tangible progress in Krsna Consciousness and without strictly following the regulative principles and chanting the prescribed number of rounds on the beads, nobody can become free from the unhappiness of this material world. So it is imperative that all our students be exemplary in their execution of devotional service and naturally Krsna will bless you all more and more.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoJayapatakaIndore13December1970_3" class="quote" parent="1970_Correspondence" book="Let" index="637" link="Letter to Jayapataka -- Indore 13 December, 1970" link_text="Letter to Jayapataka -- Indore 13 December, 1970">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Jayapataka -- Indore 13 December, 1970|Letter to Jayapataka -- Indore 13 December, 1970]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Please do the needful. Keep yourself brave and fit to face the situation with faith in Krsna and Spiritual Master. Let us do something tangible in Calcutta.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1971_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="6" parent="Correspondence" text="1971 Correspondence"><h3>1971 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoTamalaKrsnaLondon28June1971_0" class="quote" parent="1971_Correspondence" book="Let" index="259" link="Letter to Tamala Krsna -- London 28 June, 1971" link_text="Letter to Tamala Krsna -- London 28 June, 1971">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Tamala Krsna -- London 28 June, 1971|Letter to Tamala Krsna -- London 28 June, 1971]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Regarding the fencing, I have instructed Acyutananda not to spend too much for boundary fencing, but it must be done immediately so that during the ceremony we may fix up many different tents to accommodate guests who come during the ceremony. In yesterday's meeting of the temple presidents in Berkeley, I have asked them to send at least one man from each center and they are accepting. So very soon 60 men will come to India with some good leaders. We have to do some tangible work in India and so do everything cautiously and carefully.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoHamsadutaLondon7August1971_1" class="quote" parent="1971_Correspondence" book="Let" index="342" link="Letter to Hamsaduta -- London 7 August, 1971" link_text="Letter to Hamsaduta -- London 7 August, 1971">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Hamsaduta -- London 7 August, 1971|Letter to Hamsaduta -- London 7 August, 1971]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Brahmananda has already gone to Kenya and the response has been very favorable. I hope he will do something tangible there.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoBalimardanaLondonAugust201971_2" class="quote" parent="1971_Correspondence" book="Let" index="394" link="Letter to Bali-mardana -- London August 20, 1971" link_text="Letter to Bali-mardana -- London August 20, 1971">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Bali-mardana -- London August 20, 1971|Letter to Bali-mardana -- London August 20, 1971]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">There is so much new information in our books and the Hindi reading public will appreciate it, because our subject matter is new to everyone. God has always been a vague idea. So most people are impersonalists or voidists. Perhaps for the first time in the world we are giving the people a clear idea of what is God. Although God, or Krsna, was existing in the world, but demons like Kamsa wanted to kill Him. Therefore people have no clear idea. So this is the first time we are placing Krsna in tangible form with a clear idea of His name, fame, qualities, pastimes, etc.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1972_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="7" parent="Correspondence" text="1972 Correspondence"><h3>1972 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoHamsadutaMadras14February1972_0" class="quote" parent="1972_Correspondence" book="Let" index="86" link="Letter to Hamsaduta -- Madras 14 February, 1972" link_text="Letter to Hamsaduta -- Madras 14 February, 1972">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Hamsaduta -- Madras 14 February, 1972|Letter to Hamsaduta -- Madras 14 February, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Regarding Krishna Das, I have heard that Sweden is a very good field, so if he is doing something tangible there, that is to his credit and why not he should remain there for some time—but why he does not write me letters and send his address? I do not know if he is taking active part of if he is not doing anything.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoGurudasaHonolulu13May1972_1" class="quote" parent="1972_Correspondence" book="Let" index="247" link="Letter to Gurudasa -- Honolulu 13 May, 1972" link_text="Letter to Gurudasa -- Honolulu 13 May, 1972">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Gurudasa -- Honolulu 13 May, 1972|Letter to Gurudasa -- Honolulu 13 May, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">You must construct something wonderful. Otherwise, it will be a discredit to you American boys. That will exalt the position of America in India. And in every temple food distribution must go on profusely with American food supplies. Have the Americans given us the food supplies, is there any tangible donation? Or is it simply promises? If we can supply some proof they have given us such and such amount of foodstuffs, some document, that will help us in all parts of the world as propaganda and for approaching your country's government in other places for supplying us. So if you have got such document, kindly send me one copy.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoJayapatakaLosAngeles16June1972_2" class="quote" parent="1972_Correspondence" book="Let" index="328" link="Letter to Jayapataka -- Los Angeles 16 June, 1972" link_text="Letter to Jayapataka -- Los Angeles 16 June, 1972">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Jayapataka -- Los Angeles 16 June, 1972|Letter to Jayapataka -- Los Angeles 16 June, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">If Tamala Krsna can do some tangible work in Bangledesh it will be advertised all over India and we shall be respected by all classes of men. So it is a crucial point in our progress, so make this Bangledesh program very nicely. My godbrother in Jessore will help him in every respect. His address is known to him.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoSriJoshijiNewYork7July1972_3" class="quote" parent="1972_Correspondence" book="Let" index="351" link="Letter to Sri Joshiji -- New York 7 July, 1972" link_text="Letter to Sri Joshiji -- New York 7 July, 1972">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Sri Joshiji -- New York 7 July, 1972|Letter to Sri Joshiji -- New York 7 July, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Your proposal to cooperate with this movement is very magnanimous, and I thank you for your suggestion. But before doing anything tangible, I wish to discuss with you in detail. I wanted to see you in Los Angeles, but I could not get up to San Francisco, neither you could come to L.A. Now I shall be away from California for about one month, but when I shall return we shall discuss further this matter. I welcome your suggestions for voluntary service. Thank you very much.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoSriJoshijiParis25July1972_4" class="quote" parent="1972_Correspondence" book="Let" index="393" link="Letter to Sri Joshiji -- Paris 25 July, 1972" link_text="Letter to Sri Joshiji -- Paris 25 July, 1972">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Sri Joshiji -- Paris 25 July, 1972|Letter to Sri Joshiji -- Paris 25 July, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">The same position is in America also, but still a section of persons there are interested in church. But in Europe especially I see they have lost all respect for religious life. The same thing is there in India also. I therefore suggest that when you return to India next time, that you take sannyasa in your ripe old age without any family responsibility, and let us together do something tangible in India. In 1970 I went to Amritsar, invited by Swami Nirmalananda, and I saw the people of Amritsar are greatly devoted. We were invited by many temples and private persons, and we were made very much welcome, and somebody wanted to give me some land also. Anyway land is not very difficult to gain, but we require some men to work for this great mission. The educated younger sections are required to join this great movement.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoSriJoshijiParis25July1972_5" class="quote" parent="1972_Correspondence" book="Let" index="393" link="Letter to Sri Joshiji -- Paris 25 July, 1972" link_text="Letter to Sri Joshiji -- Paris 25 July, 1972">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Sri Joshiji -- Paris 25 July, 1972|Letter to Sri Joshiji -- Paris 25 July, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">We have already got our land in Bombay, in Vrindaban, as well as in Navadvipa. Gradually, we can open a centre in each and every important city of India. I shall request you to think over this proposition very seriously and make some tangible program, then when you return to India in October, by that time I shall be there also, and jointly we can do something tangible in India also. I shall be very glad to hear from you your reaction on this proposition. Thank you very much.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoTamalaKrsnaLondon1August1972_6" class="quote" parent="1972_Correspondence" book="Let" index="411" link="Letter to Tamala Krsna -- London 1 August, 1972" link_text="Letter to Tamala Krsna -- London 1 August, 1972">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Tamala Krsna -- London 1 August, 1972|Letter to Tamala Krsna -- London 1 August, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Now there is a very important job for you to do. I have just now understood from Gurudasa that practically no one is able to carry on the construction work at Vrindaban with good results. So many months they have been there but there is nothing tangible begun. Practically you are the best man for giving them a good start. Now the Bangladesh business is postponed, and you have trained Yasodanandana Maharaja in leading the sankirtana party, so you will be free for a few weeks to help me in this way by taking one qualified engineer from Calcutta who has agreed to work with us and live with us without consideration of remuneration and go to Vrindaban and do some solid work.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoAcyutanandaLondon5August1972_7" class="quote" parent="1972_Correspondence" book="Let" index="419" link="Letter to Acyutananda -- London 5 August, 1972" link_text="Letter to Acyutananda -- London 5 August, 1972">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Acyutananda -- London 5 August, 1972|Letter to Acyutananda -- London 5 August, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So I have asked Tamala Krishna Goswami to come there with one engineer and begin the work vigorously. Now you give him all assistance and help me get started on this great project immediately. I shall be coming to India sometimes in October and I expect to see some tangible progress there in Vrindaban. That is our real business. If we are there so many months and we cannot do anything, simply eat and sleep and fight amongst ourselves, then where is our credit? Our credit will be when the people see our nice building rising daily, just like in Mayapur, with 100 men working day and night. That is the American style. If you want to honor me, you will do like this and then I can truly be called the guru of the Americans. Otherwise, it is simply a dishonor to me.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoTamalaKrsnaBhavanandaJayapatakaLondon9August1972_8" class="quote" parent="1972_Correspondence" book="Let" index="430" link="Letter to Tamala Krsna, Bhavananda, Jayapataka -- London 9 August, 1972" link_text="Letter to Tamala Krsna, Bhavananda, Jayapataka -- London 9 August, 1972">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Tamala Krsna, Bhavananda, Jayapataka -- London 9 August, 1972|Letter to Tamala Krsna, Bhavananda, Jayapataka -- London 9 August, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">These things like steel, cement—you take donation from the biggest men in Calcutta. If you go on Sankirtana to the big steel-making city in India and you do not take donation of steel from the citizens, only some letters, then where is your credit? Chanting and dancing, that's all right, but there must be some tangible results.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoGurudasaYamunaLondon11August1972_9" class="quote" parent="1972_Correspondence" book="Let" index="435" link="Letter to Gurudasa, Yamuna -- London 11 August, 1972" link_text="Letter to Gurudasa, Yamuna -- London 11 August, 1972">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Gurudasa, Yamuna -- London 11 August, 1972|Letter to Gurudasa, Yamuna -- London 11 August, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Now do everything in Vrndavana very peacefully, and always cooperate with each other at all times. There is some trouble with Satchitananda, he informs me you are trying to drive him away because he has written that letter about Yamuna, so that should not be the case. Better to cooperate all of you and do something tangible for Krsna. Stop this fighting. Have a European preaching center and try to enlist all the hippies and tourists who come to Vrndavana. Give them nice prasadam, engage them in chanting, cleaning the temple, reading our books, and give them all facilities for becoming devotees.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoSureshCandraLondon11August1972_10" class="quote" parent="1972_Correspondence" book="Let" index="437" link="Letter to Suresh Candra -- London 11 August, 1972" link_text="Letter to Suresh Candra -- London 11 August, 1972">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Suresh Candra -- London 11 August, 1972|Letter to Suresh Candra -- London 11 August, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Regarding the visa problem for our devotees coming there, I shall very much appreciate if you can arrange something with the government so they shall have no problem remaining there for some time to do some tangible work in Guyana. I am returning myself to Los Angeles in a few days from London, so you may reply at the Los Angeles address as above.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoTejiyasGurudasaLosAngeles16August1972_11" class="quote" parent="1972_Correspondence" book="Let" index="442" link="Letter to Tejiyas, Gurudasa -- Los Angeles 16 August, 1972" link_text="Letter to Tejiyas, Gurudasa -- Los Angeles 16 August, 1972">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Tejiyas, Gurudasa -- Los Angeles 16 August, 1972|Letter to Tejiyas, Gurudasa -- Los Angeles 16 August, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I have sent you the plans approved by me, and you may submit them to the municipality and request them to very quickly approve so we may start as soon as possible. When they have approved, Saurabha may come there to give you some help in the beginning, and I think by now Tamala Krishna may be there with one engineer for getting the work started. There must be some tangible progress made by the time of my arrival so that I may see the work being done.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoYamunaDallas10September1972_12" class="quote" parent="1972_Correspondence" book="Let" index="488" link="Letter to Yamuna -- Dallas 10 September, 1972" link_text="Letter to Yamuna -- Dallas 10 September, 1972">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Yamuna -- Dallas 10 September, 1972|Letter to Yamuna -- Dallas 10 September, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I have sent up two sets of Saurabha's plans to Gurudasa in Vrindaban. Did he get them? Either one of these plans is just suitable for our purpose, so you may get them approved immediately and begin the work. I want to see something tangible by the time I reach.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoKurusresthaHyderabad23November1972_13" class="quote" parent="1972_Correspondence" book="Let" index="591" link="Letter to Kurusrestha -- Hyderabad 23 November, 1972" link_text="Letter to Kurusrestha -- Hyderabad 23 November, 1972">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Kurusrestha -- Hyderabad 23 November, 1972|Letter to Kurusrestha -- Hyderabad 23 November, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I am very glad to hear all the good news, especially that you want to sell books more and more. That is the best preaching work; each book sold means there is some practical effect of preaching, there is some tangible progress. So try to sell books as many as possible in your country, and in this way, so long you remain active but not for your personal sense-gratification, so long you remain active only satisfying Krishna's senses, then this movement will be successful without any doubt. As soon as someone wants to satisfy his own senses, then he fails at everything. We are the only movement in the world which is preaching the real fact or secret to success, and outside our movement everything else will fail.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoNityanandaBombay25November1972_14" class="quote" parent="1972_Correspondence" book="Let" index="594" link="Letter to Nityananda -- Bombay 25 November, 1972" link_text="Letter to Nityananda -- Bombay 25 November, 1972">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Nityananda -- Bombay 25 November, 1972|Letter to Nityananda -- Bombay 25 November, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">We are Vaisnava devotees, not politicians. So these things must be stopped, plotting. Your merit stands far above theirs, you have done some tangible work to please me by spreading this Krishna Consciousness message in New Orleans, that is the test. Let them do something first, then we shall see what is their criticism. Simply criticizing and no work, that is the business of inferior men. So do not be disturbed by them, go on with your work, increasing more and more. Never mind the jackals howl.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1973_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="8" parent="Correspondence" text="1973 Correspondence"><h3>1973 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoHamsadutaBombay2January1973_0" class="quote" parent="1973_Correspondence" book="Let" index="1" link="Letter to Hamsaduta -- Bombay 2 January, 1973" link_text="Letter to Hamsaduta -- Bombay 2 January, 1973">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Hamsaduta -- Bombay 2 January, 1973|Letter to Hamsaduta -- Bombay 2 January, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">The GBC men are there, the world is divided into 12 zones for gradual development by these, my chosen right hand men. So however you manage it, that you know best, my only point is that I do not like to see you become discouraged as you are indicating, because there is no actual cause for such discouragement.* Rather there is all encouraging prospects ahead. Now you have started something tangible and solid in German-speaking countries, you are printing books, magazines, and distributing them widely, collecting huge funds, now the work is just beginning.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoDrAggarwalCalcutta7March1973_1" class="quote" parent="1973_Correspondence" book="Let" index="94" link="Letter to Dr. Aggarwal -- Calcutta 7 March, 1973" link_text="Letter to Dr. Aggarwal -- Calcutta 7 March, 1973">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Dr. Aggarwal -- Calcutta 7 March, 1973|Letter to Dr. Aggarwal -- Calcutta 7 March, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Actually one can be perfectly Krishna-Conscious without being literate. Education is not necessary. Simply it is required to accept the fact, that we are the eternal servants of Krishna, and engage in some tangible service.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoNiranjanaBrooklyn21May1973_2" class="quote" parent="1973_Correspondence" book="Let" index="197" link="Letter to Niranjana -- Brooklyn 21 May, 1973" link_text="Letter to Niranjana -- Brooklyn 21 May, 1973">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Niranjana -- Brooklyn 21 May, 1973|Letter to Niranjana -- Brooklyn 21 May, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">You mention that they have not even heard of Lord Gauranga. So that is their misfortune, and our misfortune also. Our big, big godbrothers in India, they could not preach Lord Gauranga's name all over India. They are simply inclined to criticize me, that my students call me Prabhupada. They could not do anything practical and tangible. They are satisfied with a temple and a few disciples begging alms for the maintenance of the temple.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoBhagavanVrindaban19November1973_3" class="quote" parent="1973_Correspondence" book="Let" index="387" link="Letter to Bhagavan -- Vrindaban 19 November, 1973" link_text="Letter to Bhagavan -- Vrindaban 19 November, 1973">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Bhagavan -- Vrindaban 19 November, 1973|Letter to Bhagavan -- Vrindaban 19 November, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">These are tangible services that you are doing, recognized by my Guru Maharaja and Krsna. Brahmananda was saying that two years ago when he was in Paris they were collecting 40 francs on Sankirtana, now you are collecting 1500 dollars. So has the time changed, or is it because you are there? Krsna will surely bless you.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1974_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="9" parent="Correspondence" text="1974 Correspondence"><h3>1974 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoSubalaBombay13November1974_0" class="quote" parent="1974_Correspondence" book="Let" index="562" link="Letter to Subala -- Bombay 13 November, 1974" link_text="Letter to Subala -- Bombay 13 November, 1974">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Subala -- Bombay 13 November, 1974|Letter to Subala -- Bombay 13 November, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">You have done something tangible, and I am pleased that you are simply carrying out my order without any consideration of your self-interest. This is wanted for progress in spiritual life. So as you have pleased me, you should take it that you have pleased Krsna, the Supreme Personality of Godhead. It is for this I have given you sannyasa, to be prepared to go anywhere on my order and preach sincerely and purely without any other consideration. So I thank you very much in this regard.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoRevatinandanaBombay15December1974_1" class="quote" parent="1974_Correspondence" book="Let" index="676" link="Letter to Revatinandana -- Bombay 15 December, 1974" link_text="Letter to Revatinandana -- Bombay 15 December, 1974">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Revatinandana -- Bombay 15 December, 1974|Letter to Revatinandana -- Bombay 15 December, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Everyone is hoping that Syamasundara. will be able to reestablish himself in Krsna Consciousness again. I do not understand why he is engaged in this business of his if there is not any tangible profit. He says that there is big, big money but still he has not yet paid ISKCON the debt that he has. Therefore what is this business.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1976_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="11" parent="Correspondence" text="1976 Correspondence"><h3>1976 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoBRSridharaMaharajaLosAngeles6June1976_0" class="quote" parent="1976_Correspondence" book="Let" index="334" link="Letter to B.R. Sridhara Maharaja -- Los Angeles 6 June, 1976" link_text="Letter to B.R. Sridhara Maharaja -- Los Angeles 6 June, 1976">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to B.R. Sridhara Maharaja -- Los Angeles 6 June, 1976|Letter to B.R. Sridhara Maharaja -- Los Angeles 6 June, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So what is their tangible objection? Of course, they cannot do all these things, it is beyond their power, but if somebody else does it, why should they be envious and obstructive to this plan?</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoBhagavanNewYork14July1976_1" class="quote" parent="1976_Correspondence" book="Let" index="398" link="Letter to Bhagavan -- New York 14 July, 1976" link_text="Letter to Bhagavan -- New York 14 July, 1976">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Bhagavan -- New York 14 July, 1976|Letter to Bhagavan -- New York 14 July, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Ours is a tangible connection with God. We know who is God and how to serve Him. Everything is fact.</p>
</div>
</div>
</div>

Trained in (Letters)

2010-05-19T07:50:26Z

Partha-sarathi:

<div id="compilation">
<div id="facts">
{{terms|"train in"|"trained in"|"training in"}}
{{notes|}}
{{compiler|Visnu Murti|Partha-sarathi}}
{{complete|ALL}}
{{first|19May10}}
{{last|19May10}}
{{totals_by_section|BG=0|SB=0|CC=0|OB=0|Lec=0|Con=0|Let=27}}
{{total|27}}
{{toc right}}
[[Category:Trained In|1]]
[[Category:Compilations from Letters]]
</div>
<div id="Correspondence" class="section" sec_index="6" parent="compilation" text="Correspondence"><h2>Correspondence</h2>
</div>
<div id="1968_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="3" parent="Correspondence" text="1968 Correspondence"><h3>1968 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoHarikrishnadasAggarwalLosAngeles3March1968_0" class="quote" parent="1968_Correspondence" book="Let" index="101" link="Letter to Harikrishnadas Aggarwal -- Los Angeles 3 March, 1968" link_text="Letter to Harikrishnadas Aggarwal -- Los Angeles 3 March, 1968">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Harikrishnadas Aggarwal -- Los Angeles 3 March, 1968|Letter to Harikrishnadas Aggarwal -- Los Angeles 3 March, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Some years before, when I was staying in your Prem Kutir you expressed your desire to organize a SANKIRTAN party, and I wish that it may be done now to help me in my mission. If you have got opportunity to purchase one copy of Life Magazine, published Feb. 9, 1968, you will find there on page 56, how nicely the American boys and girls are dancing and chanting the Holy Name of the Lord. A Sankirtana party as they can be organized in India is not possible here. Here the boys and girls, they are very serious about chanting, but they are not trained singers, or singers in the tune we chant in India. Therefore, I wish that if you organize a Sankirtana party there, completely trained in spiritual ways, and the American students combine with them, I think a very nice Sankirtana party can be organized to travel all over the world. I have tested it definitely that melodious vibration of Sankirtana, if they are performed by serious devotees, can attract people from the very spiritual platform, and it at once makes the spiritual background very smooth, when a spiritual instruction from the Bhagavad-gita can be implemented very nicely.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoBalaiMontreal4July1968_1" class="quote" parent="1968_Correspondence" book="Let" index="223" link="Letter to Balai -- Montreal 4 July, 1968" link_text="Letter to Balai -- Montreal 4 July, 1968">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Balai -- Montreal 4 July, 1968|Letter to Balai -- Montreal 4 July, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Yes, this is very nice sentiments. All parents should think like that. Maharaja Prahlada, Dhruva Maharaja, they are ideal child devotees and everyone's children should be trained in the ideal of such great personalities.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoTamalaKrsnaMontreal19August1968_2" class="quote" parent="1968_Correspondence" book="Let" index="269" link="Letter to Tamala Krsna -- Montreal 19 August, 1968" link_text="Letter to Tamala Krsna -- Montreal 19 August, 1968">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Tamala Krsna -- Montreal 19 August, 1968|Letter to Tamala Krsna -- Montreal 19 August, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Regarding the devotees headed by Mukunda and Syamasundara., who are going to London, they are starting today for New York, and from there they will go to London. One boy from here, Sivananda, he has already gone to Europe, probably Krishna has desired that we should introduce this movement in Europe also, maybe we may require many hands, devotees who are being trained in USA, to go to all other parts of European countries. Your appreciation for the service of your God-brothers is very much laudable.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoSivanandaLosAngeles11November1968_3" class="quote" parent="1968_Correspondence" book="Let" index="408" link="Letter to Sivananda -- Los Angeles 11 November, 1968" link_text="Letter to Sivananda -- Los Angeles 11 November, 1968">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Sivananda -- Los Angeles 11 November, 1968|Letter to Sivananda -- Los Angeles 11 November, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">You have the tendency for botany, you can grow nice flowers and fruits for Krishna, that is the utilization of your natural tendency. If you have got specific training in this connection, then after establishing this center in Hamburg you can come to our New Vrindaban and grow things, or you can grow things in Hamburg also. Fruits and flowers can be produced anywhere.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoAnandaLosAngeles17December1968_4" class="quote" parent="1968_Correspondence" book="Let" index="496" link="Letter to Ananda -- Los Angeles 17 December, 1968" link_text="Letter to Ananda -- Los Angeles 17 December, 1968">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Ananda -- Los Angeles 17 December, 1968|Letter to Ananda -- Los Angeles 17 December, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I am glad that you have already started a center in small scale and please try to improve it as far as possible. There is no question of doing anything very hastily so please try to make steady, even if slow, progress. So far as the Indian population is concerned, I think that the Sikh are useless for our purpose. They do not understand our philosophy nor are they interested in spiritual advancement of life. We have no such discretion that we have to pick our members from a particular group of people. Everyone is Krishna's part and parcel and wherever we find it convenient we will pick up a person to be trained in Krishna Consciousness who is interested in going back to Home, back to Godhead.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1969_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="4" parent="Correspondence" text="1969 Correspondence"><h3>1969 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoKrsnadasaHawaii15March1969_0" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="176" link="Letter to Krsna dasa -- Hawaii 15 March, 1969" link_text="Letter to Krsna dasa -- Hawaii 15 March, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Krsna dasa -- Hawaii 15 March, 1969|Letter to Krsna dasa -- Hawaii 15 March, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Jaya Govinda is very much anxious for the press work at your end because he writes like this: "I think of the printing press lying idle (as far as I know) in Germany, and as printing and the graphic arts field is what I have the greatest amount of experience and training in, that seems to be the place for me to go." This means he is very anxious to come to Germany and I am glad to learn from your letter also that you are trying to get him in Germany by the end of this week. This means perhaps you have already arranged for his come back to Germany. If not, please do it immediately because it will be a great help to our German center, and I am sure you will be able to start BTG in our press there in the German language immediately on his arrival.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoPradyumnaNewYork10April1969_1" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="230" link="Letter to Pradyumna -- New York 10 April, 1969" link_text="Letter to Pradyumna -- New York 10 April, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Pradyumna -- New York 10 April, 1969|Letter to Pradyumna -- New York 10 April, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I shall also give you one very nice brahmacari from Los Angeles, Jaya Gopala. He is trained in Sankirtana Party and in cooking, so you can leave him for taking care of the temple affairs when you go to work. Besides that, if you have learned Sanskrit, I can give you one brahmacari, 12 years old, named Birbhadra, whom I want you should teach Sanskrit from the very beginning. We want a few students who know Sanskrit and Bengali, or at least Sanskrit. Most probably the boy will go with me there, and if you think you can take charge, he can also remain there.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoArundhatiLosAngeles10July1969_2" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="430" link="Letter to Arundhati -- Los Angeles 10 July, 1969" link_text="Letter to Arundhati -- Los Angeles 10 July, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Arundhati -- Los Angeles 10 July, 1969|Letter to Arundhati -- Los Angeles 10 July, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">At present your most important duty is to compose books with the help of your husband. I am very much anxious to see that you begin this work as soon as possible. You have written nothing about your training in working the composer machine. I hope this will meet you in good health. Please offer my blessings to your husband and the others.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoBhagavanKrsnaBhaminiLosAngeles13July1969_3" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="446" link="Letter to Bhagavan, Krsna Bhamini -- Los Angeles 13 July, 1969" link_text="Letter to Bhagavan, Krsna Bhamini -- Los Angeles 13 July, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Bhagavan, Krsna Bhamini -- Los Angeles 13 July, 1969|Letter to Bhagavan, Krsna Bhamini -- Los Angeles 13 July, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">As you have requested to be sent a nice householder couple to come and help you, I am going to arrange with Hamsaduta and Himavati that they may go there soon to join you in Detroit. They are both very exemplary devotees, and they are already trained in managing all areas of Sankirtana Party and temple affairs. So their presence will be a great help to you. I understand that Hamsaduta works best when he can be in charge of the situation, so when he arrives he may act as the temple president and you shall be his assistants. When I speak with Hamsaduta and Himavati in San Francisco during Rathayatra Festival we shall make definite arrangements as to when they shall arrive. In the meantime, I am very pleased with both of your nice attitudes and endeavors, and may Krishna bless you for this.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1970_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="5" parent="Correspondence" text="1970 Correspondence"><h3>1970 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoJanardanaLosAngeles16January1970_0" class="quote" parent="1970_Correspondence" book="Let" index="29" link="Letter to Janardana -- Los Angeles 16 January, 1970" link_text="Letter to Janardana -- Los Angeles 16 January, 1970">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Janardana -- Los Angeles 16 January, 1970|Letter to Janardana -- Los Angeles 16 January, 1970]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So Narada Muni says that men should be judged by his tendencies, not by his birth, and this is also confirmed in Bhagavad-gita by Lord Krishna that the four divisions of human society should be judged by the qualities in actual work. Therefore with reference to all Vedic Scriptures our members are all Brahmanas and therefore we offer them the sacred thread although they are born, according to Vedic culture, in the families of other than Brahmanas or even than the Sudras. But that does not mean they cannot be purified. Actually they are being trained in such a way, their hearts are being purified by chanting the Mahamantra. And after some days when the Spiritual Master sees that one has followed the regulative principles faithfully and has abstained himself from the restricted items like illicit sex life, etc. and has chanted regularly 16 rounds then say after a year or six months when he appears to be purified in the judgment of the Spiritual Master he is offered the sacred thread, and he is given the chance of Deity worship in the Temple. These Smarta Brahmanas contest that unless one is born in a Brahmana family one cannot be given these facilities. But Narada Muni says no; a man should be judged by the symptoms of his character. And Srimad-Bhagavatam says that the Kiratas, etc. can be purified by a pure devotee because the influence of Lord Visnu is so strong. Prabha Vishnave means the powerful Lord Visnu; prabha means that the light or heat of Visnu is so strong that it is possible to melt them. Only the devotees of Lord Visnu or Krishna can be purified, not the devotees of any demigod. They will have to wait for their next birth according to their own karma.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoLalitaKumarLosAngeles2February1970_1" class="quote" parent="1970_Correspondence" book="Let" index="70" link="Letter to Lalita Kumar -- Los Angeles 2 February, 1970" link_text="Letter to Lalita Kumar -- Los Angeles 2 February, 1970">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Lalita Kumar -- Los Angeles 2 February, 1970|Letter to Lalita Kumar -- Los Angeles 2 February, 1970]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Yes, opening a center in Florida is our long contemplation, and I remember the letter when you and Sridhama wrote me about this. Where is Sridhama now? I am very much anxious to know about his health. If he is there, please ask him to write me. Now, if it is possible to open a center in Florida, then you can think of it because now you will have the support of your good wife. But I think for a few days more you should take training in Philadelphia before you think of opening another center. That will be nice.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoHladiniLindaLosAngeles29March1970_2" class="quote" parent="1970_Correspondence" book="Let" index="202" link="Letter to Hladini (Linda) -- Los Angeles 29 March, 1970" link_text="Letter to Hladini (Linda) -- Los Angeles 29 March, 1970">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Hladini (Linda) -- Los Angeles 29 March, 1970|Letter to Hladini (Linda) -- Los Angeles 29 March, 1970]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I have written to Mahananda that my suggestion is that after some time training in Detroit with Bhagavan das you can try to expand our activities by opening a branch in some suitable place. That will be very nice. So please chant Hare Krsna and be happy, that is my desire.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoMurari74MarineDriveBombay20Nov171970_3" class="quote" parent="1970_Correspondence" book="Let" index="600" link="Letter to Murari -- 74, Marine Drive, Bombay 20 Nov. 17, 1970" link_text="Letter to Murari -- 74, Marine Drive, Bombay 20 Nov. 17, 1970">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Murari -- 74, Marine Drive, Bombay 20 Nov. 17, 1970|Letter to Murari -- 74, Marine Drive, Bombay 20 Nov. 17, 1970]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Here in India we are very encouraged by the favorable response of the Indian public, especially in Bombay. We shall begin on December 2nd a tour to Indore, Surat, and other places. Still, Guru Maharaja has instructed me to take this movement to the western countries, and especially he was favorably disposed toward London, so the West must be our first order of business, and I am most pleased that my disciples are opening many new centers there. Why don’t you open some more centers in the British Isles? If you can do this, in cooperation with your zonal secretary Shyamsunder, it will be to your great credit. New centers must be managed by strong men, trained in philosophy, samkirtan, deity worship, cooking and temple business. With these qualifications there is every chance for a successful program in any city of the world. So kindly train up men in your London center to open many centers in England.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1971_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="6" parent="Correspondence" text="1971 Correspondence"><h3>1971 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoBhagavanLosAngeles7July1971_0" class="quote" parent="1971_Correspondence" book="Let" index="283" link="Letter to Bhagavan -- Los Angeles 7 July, 1971" link_text="Letter to Bhagavan -- Los Angeles 7 July, 1971">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Bhagavan -- Los Angeles 7 July, 1971|Letter to Bhagavan -- Los Angeles 7 July, 1971]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Then just see the result. We can send our men to all schools and colleges for lecturing. So let us cooperate. America, by the grace of God, is got everything sufficiently and if they are trained in this Krishna Consciousness, they will be first-class country in the world with all riches, beauty, rich philosophy, so many things. So why the government is callous to our movement? There is no good reason. So let them come forward and cooperate with us.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoGauraHariLosAngeles9July1971_1" class="quote" parent="1971_Correspondence" book="Let" index="291" link="Letter to Gaura Hari -- Los Angeles 9 July, 1971" link_text="Letter to Gaura Hari -- Los Angeles 9 July, 1971">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Gaura Hari -- Los Angeles 9 July, 1971|Letter to Gaura Hari -- Los Angeles 9 July, 1971]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">And it is very encouraging to hear that so many new devotees are coming. That is an indication of your sincerity. The more sincere you are in pushing this movement forward, so Krishna will reciprocate and send you many new devotees. Thank you very much. So give them protection and instruct them so that they may not go away. We recruit devotees with great difficulty. So they must be well-treated. New men may not always behave so nicely but we must be tolerant. To train a new man is like training a wild animal to be a pet. Just like the tiger is trained in the circus and later on they are dancing to the tune of the master. So the point being stressed is training. A preacher should always be tolerant.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoSatsvarupaDelhi21November1971_2" class="quote" parent="1971_Correspondence" book="Let" index="537" link="Letter to Satsvarupa -- Delhi 21 November, 1971" link_text="Letter to Satsvarupa -- Delhi 21 November, 1971">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Satsvarupa -- Delhi 21 November, 1971|Letter to Satsvarupa -- Delhi 21 November, 1971]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">What is the use of their skyscraper buildings if their sons will not maintain them? The old system of gurukula should be revived as the perfect example of a system designed to produce great men, sober and responsible leaders, who know what is the real welfare of the citizens. Just as in former days, all big big personalities were trained in this way. Now you have got the responsib</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoSatsvarupaDelhi25November1971_3" class="quote" parent="1971_Correspondence" book="Let" index="544" link="Letter to Satsvarupa -- Delhi 25 November, 1971" link_text="Letter to Satsvarupa -- Delhi 25 November, 1971">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Satsvarupa -- Delhi 25 November, 1971|Letter to Satsvarupa -- Delhi 25 November, 1971]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">They will go out in early morning and beg all day on the order of the guru. At night they will come home with a little rice and sleep without cover on the floor. And they think this work is very pleasant. If they are not spoiled by an artificial standard of sense gratification at an early age, children will turn out very nicely as sober citizens, because they have learned the real meaning of life. If they are trained to accept that austerity is very enjoyable then they will not be spoiled. So you organize everything in such a way that we can deliver these souls back to Krishna—this is our real work. Some of our girls may be trained in colleges and take teacher exams, and their husbands also. As you develop our program there I shall give you more hints.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1972_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="7" parent="Correspondence" text="1972 Correspondence"><h3>1972 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoKsirodakasayiBombay3January1972_0" class="quote" parent="1972_Correspondence" book="Let" index="12" link="Letter to Ksirodakasayi -- Bombay 3 January, 1972" link_text="Letter to Ksirodakasayi -- Bombay 3 January, 1972">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Ksirodakasayi -- Bombay 3 January, 1972|Letter to Ksirodakasayi -- Bombay 3 January, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I have got full faith in you, I know you are sincere and a hard worker, so I have got confidence in you to do this. Ramananda is our Hindi editor, one man here, Mr. Chakravorty, I am training in Bengali translation and he may be the Bengali editor, you are in charge of publication, and Rohininandan and Sunil can assist in the Hindi and Bengali work respectively. So with full faith in Krishna and Spiritual Master, push on this work with full force. We have got a great mission to fulfill, and these books and magazines are the torchbearers of Truth which can save the world. If you can find a suitable place, then I have no objection to Rohininandan coming to assist you.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoAniruddhaBombay10January1972_1" class="quote" parent="1972_Correspondence" book="Let" index="33" link="Letter to Aniruddha -- Bombay 10 January, 1972" link_text="Letter to Aniruddha -- Bombay 10 January, 1972">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Aniruddha -- Bombay 10 January, 1972|Letter to Aniruddha -- Bombay 10 January, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">The children should be trained in early rising, attending mangal arati, some elementary education: arithmetic, alphabet, some of our books, like that. They should go to bed by 8 p.m. and rise by 4 a.m. for mangal arati, getting 8 hours sleep. If they take 8 hours sleep, they will not fall asleep during arati. When they get up they should wash with a little warm water, at least three times wash face. They may sleep one hour in the afternoon and there is no harm. Encourage them to chant as much japa as possible, but there is no question of force or punishment. If there is need you may shake your finger at them but never physical punishment is allowed.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoSatsvarupaCalcutta16February1972_2" class="quote" parent="1972_Correspondence" book="Let" index="94" link="Letter to Satsvarupa -- Calcutta 16 February, 1972" link_text="Letter to Satsvarupa -- Calcutta 16 February, 1972">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Satsvarupa -- Calcutta 16 February, 1972|Letter to Satsvarupa -- Calcutta 16 February, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I am enclosing one letter to Chaya dasi in this respect, to clear up a few points, namely, that we should concentrate on training these children up in Krishna Consciousness, not so much by formal, academic education—a little reading, writing, mathematics, that's all—but more by giving them facility to follow the examples of the older devotees in the regular KC program, namely, rising early, arati, chanting, reading, street Sankirtana, preaching, distributing literature—like that. These children can be trained in that way, by participating in all of these activities throughout the day, and always the focus of attention will be on Krishna. So you kindly see that these programs are carried on nicely, that is, in the matter of our routine KC program, and let the children learn in that way. Not much time should be wasted giving so much academic knowledge, a little reading and writing, that's all. Let them be able to read our books very nicely, and that will be their higher education. Keep them always happy in Krishna Consciousness, and do not try to force or punish or they will get the wrong idea. By and by, if they are satisfied in this way, they will all grow up to be first-class preachers and devotees.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoPrajapatiMayapur25February1972_3" class="quote" parent="1972_Correspondence" book="Let" index="114" link="Letter to Prajapati -- Mayapur 25 February, 1972" link_text="Letter to Prajapati -- Mayapur 25 February, 1972">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Prajapati -- Mayapur 25 February, 1972|Letter to Prajapati -- Mayapur 25 February, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">As for your training in theology, if you simply present some of the popular western points of view of theology and then point by point you may defeat them or expose them as speculators who are simply misleading the innocent public, and that will be a very nice service, because when intelligent people begin to understand our philosophy and theology, that it is the Absolute Truth and that if anyone become Krishna Conscious, that is the highest perfection of understanding philosophy, then our Krishna Consciousness Movement will advance very quickly because everyone like the common people respect the opinions of intelligent scholars. So if you work in this way to convince the intelligent class of men, that will be very great service and also the proper use of your educational training. Thank you very much for helping me in this way.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoBhavanandaLondon1August1972_4" class="quote" parent="1972_Correspondence" book="Let" index="406" link="Letter to Bhavananda -- London 1 August, 1972" link_text="Letter to Bhavananda -- London 1 August, 1972">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Bhavananda -- London 1 August, 1972|Letter to Bhavananda -- London 1 August, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">We have seen your note regarding Sarasvati Maharaja, and you may engage one Sanskrit teacher for Sarasvati so she shall become a very great scholar, just like Jiva Goswami was trained in Sanskrit language from early childhood and no one could surpass him in all of India.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1973_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="8" parent="Correspondence" text="1973 Correspondence"><h3>1973 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoNaiskarmiBhaktivedantaManor28July1973_0" class="quote" parent="1973_Correspondence" book="Let" index="258" link="Letter to Naiskarmi -- Bhaktivedanta Manor 28 July, 1973" link_text="Letter to Naiskarmi -- Bhaktivedanta Manor 28 July, 1973">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Naiskarmi -- Bhaktivedanta Manor 28 July, 1973|Letter to Naiskarmi -- Bhaktivedanta Manor 28 July, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">But although a girl was married early she did not stay with her husband immediately, but was gradually trained in so many ways how to cook, clean and serve her husband in so many ways—up until the time of her puberty. So all the time there was no anxiety because a girl would know—I have got a husband, and the boy would know I have got this girl as my wife. Therefore when the boy and girl would come of age there was no chance of illicit sex-life. And the pychology is the first boy that a girl accepts in marriage, that girl will completely give her heart to, and this attachment on the girls side for her husband becomes more and more strong, thus if a girls gets a good husband—one who has accepted a bona fide spiritual master and is firmly fixed up in his service, automatically the wife of such a good husband inherits all the benefits of his spiritual advancement. So you are fortunate. Go on in this present attitude, serve you husband always and in this way your life will be perfect, and together husband and wife go back home—Back to Godhead.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoHamsadutaBombay12October1973_1" class="quote" parent="1973_Correspondence" book="Let" index="332" link="Letter to Hamsaduta -- Bombay 12 October, 1973" link_text="Letter to Hamsaduta -- Bombay 12 October, 1973">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Hamsaduta -- Bombay 12 October, 1973|Letter to Hamsaduta -- Bombay 12 October, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So you are doing excellent preaching, while I am here fighting with Mrs. Nair. I want that when this business is finished to return for Europe or America, perhaps via Africa. You will be pleased to know that the London devotees that you have trained in Sankirtana and book distribution are doing very nicely. This past month they have sent dollars 10,000 to Los Angeles against their debts. Mukunda is there in charge, and Syamasundara. is here in India.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1975_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="10" parent="Correspondence" text="1975 Correspondence"><h3>1975 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoKrsnaDeviTehran14March1975_0" class="quote" parent="1975_Correspondence" book="Let" index="162" link="Letter to Krsna Devi -- Tehran 14 March, 1975" link_text="Letter to Krsna Devi -- Tehran 14 March, 1975">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Krsna Devi -- Tehran 14 March, 1975|Letter to Krsna Devi -- Tehran 14 March, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I was very happy to see all of you bright-faced children at Gurukula. And I am already thinking of when I can come and visit there again. You are so fortunate to have such training in Krishna Consciousness from the very beginning of childhood. So, take full advantage of it and follow very obediently what your older Godbrothers and Godsisters ask you to do. Chant Hare Krishna all day and dance nicely. Eat nice Krishna Prasadam and go back to Godhead, back to home.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoBhagavataPerthAustralia11May1975_1" class="quote" parent="1975_Correspondence" book="Let" index="239" link="Letter to Bhagavata -- Perth, Australia 11 May, 1975" link_text="Letter to Bhagavata -- Perth, Australia 11 May, 1975">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Bhagavata -- Perth, Australia 11 May, 1975|Letter to Bhagavata -- Perth, Australia 11 May, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Anyway, please admit him to be trained up to be a devotee. He appears to be educated. Let him read our books, follow the regulative principle, and be trained in our line. Then, when I go to Calcutta, I shall see how much he has advanced and then we shall give him some definite engagement.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1976_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="11" parent="Correspondence" text="1976 Correspondence"><h3>1976 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoJayatirthaMayapur20January1976_0" class="quote" parent="1976_Correspondence" book="Let" index="56" link="Letter to Jayatirtha -- Mayapur 20 January, 1976" link_text="Letter to Jayatirtha -- Mayapur 20 January, 1976">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Jayatirtha -- Mayapur 20 January, 1976|Letter to Jayatirtha -- Mayapur 20 January, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Therefore our young men must be trained at the earliest age to not be attached to so many things like the home, family, friendship, society, and nation. To train the innocent boy to be a sense gratifier at the early age when the child is actually happy in any circumstance is the greatest violence. Therefore; brahmacari gurukulae vasan danto guror hitam ([[Vanisource:SB 7.12.1|SB 7.12.1]]). The brahmacari lives at the place of the spiritual master and works for the benefit of the spiritual master by begging for his maintenance, by cleaning, learning the principles of Krsna consciousness, and engaging in the process of bhagavata dharma, whereby his life will have a firm, sane foundation with which he can overcome the forces of maya by strong training in the beginning.</p>
</div>
</div>
</div>

Trained To (Letters)

2010-05-19T07:43:15Z

Partha-sarathi:

<div id="compilation">
<div id="facts">
{{terms|"train to"|"trained to"|"training to"|"trains to"}}
{{notes|}}
{{compiler|Visnu Murti|Partha-sarathi}}
{{complete|ALL}}
{{first|19May10}}
{{last|19May10}}
{{totals_by_section|BG=0|SB=0|CC=0|OB=0|Lec=0|Con=0|Let=22}}
{{total|22}}
{{toc right}}
[[Category:Trained To|1]]
[[Category:Compilations from Letters]]
</div>
<div id="Correspondence" class="section" sec_index="6" parent="compilation" text="Correspondence"><h2>Correspondence</h2>
</div>
<div id="1947_to_1965_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="0" parent="Correspondence" text="1947 to 1965 Correspondence"><h3>1947 to 1965 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoSirsDelhi25December1955_0" class="quote" parent="1947_to_1965_Correspondence" book="Let" index="23" link="Letter to Sirs -- Delhi 25 December, 1955" link_text="Letter to Sirs -- Delhi 25 December, 1955">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Sirs -- Delhi 25 December, 1955|Letter to Sirs -- Delhi 25 December, 1955]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">(2) To give training to at least 7 to 10 educated young men in the "parampara lessons of Bhagavad-gita" and then to "Brahma Sutra," Bhagavata & Caitanya Caritamrta</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoRatanshiMorarjiKhatauBombay5August1958_1" class="quote" parent="1947_to_1965_Correspondence" book="Let" index="39" link="Letter to Ratanshi Morarji Khatau -- Bombay 5 August, 1958" link_text="Letter to Ratanshi Morarji Khatau -- Bombay 5 August, 1958">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Ratanshi Morarji Khatau -- Bombay 5 August, 1958|Letter to Ratanshi Morarji Khatau -- Bombay 5 August, 1958]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">The transcendental nature of Rasa Lila does not require to be apologised by any Mayavadi or mundane moralist. The Lila is what it is. Srila Vyasadeva never desired that in future the real purpose of the Rasa Lila had to be explained by some mundane scholar with poor fund of knowledge. It does not require to be changed a bit but the only thing required in this connection is to qualify oneself in the matter of undergoing a strict spiritual training to realize the same transcendentally from the right sources. In order to keep the Rasalila activities of the Lord intact Srila Sukadeva Goswami has already explained the matter in the Bhagavata 10th canto chapter 33 and slokas 29 to 39. I shall request you to go through them with special reference to the slokas Nos. 30,34 and 39.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1968_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="3" parent="Correspondence" text="1968 Correspondence"><h3>1968 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoBrahmanandaSanFrancisco21March1968_0" class="quote" parent="1968_Correspondence" book="Let" index="118" link="Letter to Brahmananda -- San Francisco 21 March, 1968" link_text="Letter to Brahmananda -- San Francisco 21 March, 1968">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Brahmananda -- San Francisco 21 March, 1968|Letter to Brahmananda -- San Francisco 21 March, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">By Grace of Krishna, Advaita is being transferred to Bellevue; now try to get him out with the help of the psychiatrist who helped to get out Kirtanananda. That will finalize the matter, but we must find out a way to take permission from the draft board that our institution is a recognized religious institution of Hindu Vedic origin, and we are training students for preaching God-consciousness, and building up their character by strict moral principles. Therefore, these students cannot be called for fighting. By temperament they are unfit for fighting, because they are being trained to become perfect Brahmins.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoPopePaulVIMontreal3August1968_1" class="quote" parent="1968_Correspondence" book="Let" index="253" link="Letter to Pope Paul VI -- Montreal 3 August, 1968" link_text="Letter to Pope Paul VI -- Montreal 3 August, 1968">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Pope Paul VI -- Montreal 3 August, 1968|Letter to Pope Paul VI -- Montreal 3 August, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">The Krishna Consciousness movement is meant for overhauling the whole situation. We are creating men of character, and we are training our disciples to become Lovers of God, or Krishna. From the very beginning, they are trained to refrain from the following four principles of degradation: 1) Sex life outside of marriage, 2) Meat eating, or eating of any animal food, 3) All forms of intoxication, 4) Gambling and idle sports. The teachings are based on authorized movement of Lord Caitanya, on the principles of Bhagavad-gita, as the beginning, and Srimad-Bhagavatam as the graduation.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1969_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="4" parent="Correspondence" text="1969 Correspondence"><h3>1969 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoArchbishopofCanterburyLosAngeles1969_0" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="1" link="Letter to Archbishop of Canterbury -- Los Angeles 1969" link_text="Letter to Archbishop of Canterbury -- Los Angeles 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Archbishop of Canterbury -- Los Angeles 1969|Letter to Archbishop of Canterbury -- Los Angeles 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">The human society should not be allowed to continue in its present path at the risk of decreasing truthfulness, hygienic principles, forgiveness, and mercifulness. Without proper instruction on these principles, the human society is gradually degrading in the matter of religiosity and justice. At present, "Might makes right" is gradually taking the place of morality and justice. There is practically no more family life, and the union of man and woman is gradually degrading to the standard of mere sexuality. Our Krishna Consciousness Movement is meant for overhauling the whole situation. We are creating man of character, and we are training our disciples to become lovers of God, or Krishna. From the very beginning, they are trained to refrain from the following four principles of degradation: 1) sex life outside marriage, 2) intoxication, 3) meat eating, and 4) gambling and idle sports. Our teaching are based on the authorized movement of Lord Caitanya, the teaching of the Bhagavad-gita as the beginning, and the teaching of Srimad-Bhagavatam as the graduate study.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoSumatiMorarjeeUnknownPlace1969_1" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="2" link="Letter to Sumati Morarjee -- Unknown Place 1969" link_text="Letter to Sumati Morarjee -- Unknown Place 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Sumati Morarjee -- Unknown Place 1969|Letter to Sumati Morarjee -- Unknown Place 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Regarding your foundation: I am very glad that you have registered the Sumati Morarji Foundation with the aims and objects of imparting educational as well as cultural training to younger generation, but in this line of activities also I will suggest that you should impart transcendental training for their becoming Krishna Conscious on the basis of the principles of Srimad Bhagavad-gita, Srimad-Bhagavatam, Vedanta Sutra, and alloyed literatures, as I am trying to do here. You will be surprised to know that my humble service in this country is being highly appreciated by the younger section of the country, so if the younger section of all countries combine together on this cultural training of Krishna Consciousness, there will be great change on the present situation of the world. Music and dance and distribution of prasadam are the main items of my Krishna Consciousness propagation, and they are acting so nicely. Perhaps you know that I am organizing here a community center in West Virginia on a land of about 200 acres, and it will be a replica of Vrindaban.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoMukundaLosAngeles17February1969_2" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="127" link="Letter to Mukunda -- Los Angeles 17 February, 1969" link_text="Letter to Mukunda -- Los Angeles 17 February, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Mukunda -- Los Angeles 17 February, 1969|Letter to Mukunda -- Los Angeles 17 February, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Please let me know what is the result of the Camden Borough Council negotiations. Regarding the picture you have sent, I am so pleased to see it, because our little Sarasvati is also taking part in our transcendental movement. That is the practical proof how great is this movement. In any other movement, one has to learn something, one has to be trained to do something, but here is a movement where there is no necessity of any previous qualifications.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoSwamiBhaktivedantaHawaii14March1969_3" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="171" link="Letter to Swami Bhaktivedanta -- Hawaii 14 March, 1969" link_text="Letter to Swami Bhaktivedanta -- Hawaii 14 March, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Swami Bhaktivedanta -- Hawaii 14 March, 1969|Letter to Swami Bhaktivedanta -- Hawaii 14 March, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">The living entity is evolving different kinds of material body numbering 8,400,000 different forms. The human form is a great opportunity for the living entity to understand God, the living entity, time, nature, and different activities. The material activities are temporary, therefore if the living entities are trained to transform his activities from material to spiritual he regains his original spiritual nature. And after such achievements he is promoted to the spiritual world, which is far beyond this visible material sky. All these understandings are based on authentic Vedic knowledge.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoMukundaLosAngeles28July1969_4" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="475" link="Letter to Mukunda -- Los Angeles 28 July, 1969" link_text="Letter to Mukunda -- Los Angeles 28 July, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Mukunda -- Los Angeles 28 July, 1969|Letter to Mukunda -- Los Angeles 28 July, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Krishna das is asking me to go to Hamburg repeatedly, and he sent a ticket also from New York to Luxembourg, but I cancelled it because I was expected at the Rathayatra Ceremony. Now again he says to go there sometimes in the month of August, so I am asking your opinion about this. I think if you both cooperate to receive me in Europe, that will be financially easier. And Purusottama's accompanying me is also necessary because my travelling alone is not very advisable. Besides that, he is now trained to look after me in every way, so I think when I go to Europe he must accompany me. So if you jointly make a program, that will be good for both of you, and I am also very much eager to make some propaganda work of Krishna Consciousness in Europe now.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoRaktakaHamburg6September1969_5" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="547" link="Letter to Raktaka -- Hamburg 6 September, 1969" link_text="Letter to Raktaka -- Hamburg 6 September, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Raktaka -- Hamburg 6 September, 1969|Letter to Raktaka -- Hamburg 6 September, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Please accept my blessings. I am in due receipt of your letter of September 1st, 1969, and I have noted the contents. For the time being there is no need of going to India. The first thing is that you do not know the Indian language. If you want to be really helpful to the society, at least for the time being you should remain in a place to take training to assist our society's work. I do not know what is the disadvantage for you in Montreal. If you feel some disadvantage, then come to Boston or Los Angeles for some time. In the meantime I am corresponding with Acyutananda in India. If he actually requires some assistance, I shall advise you later on. If you have got money, keep it carefully as it may be required later.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoSatsvarupaLondon3November1969_6" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="652" link="Letter to Satsvarupa -- London 3 November, 1969" link_text="Letter to Satsvarupa -- London 3 November, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Satsvarupa -- London 3 November, 1969|Letter to Satsvarupa -- London 3 November, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I thank you for your letter dated November 18, 1969 and have noted all the points carefully. I can understand that the composing program is not going as planned. Therefore, I think Palika Dasi may immediately be trained to help with this task. For layout work I have already asked Aravinda to come to Boston to do that work. So these two devotees will be posted in Boston for the time being to centralize the activities. Then we shall see how to pick up further men. For editing the Sanskrit words you can send me a list of the words, and I shall send you the correct diacritic marks. You write that you shall send me your changes for the Krsna manuscript pages here with me, and upon receipt of them I shall do the needful. Please also send carbon copies of the tapes you have edited in the past few months. By separate post a new tape is being sent to you.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoBrahmanandaLondon15November1969_7" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="678" link="Letter to Brahmananda -- London 15 November, 1969" link_text="Letter to Brahmananda -- London 15 November, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Brahmananda -- London 15 November, 1969|Letter to Brahmananda -- London 15 November, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">The competition is that one devotee thinks of other devotees how nicely they are serving the Lord. In the material world the attitude is that everyone likes to think that I am doing better than others. This is material conception. In the Spiritual Sky it is just the opposite: Everyone thinks that my contemporary devotees are doing better than me. We are trained to address Godbrothers as Prabhu, which means Master. This means we shall try to find out always the serving side of our Godbrothers. Sometimes there are misgivings, but that we should try to overlook.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoHamsadutaLondon7December1969_8" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="715" link="Letter to Hamsaduta -- London 7 December, 1969" link_text="Letter to Hamsaduta -- London 7 December, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Hamsaduta -- London 7 December, 1969|Letter to Hamsaduta -- London 7 December, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Regarding Citsukhananda, he needn't bother at present to translate into Spanish. Unless we have got branches in some country where the Spanish language is important, he should not divert his attention. Regarding the little boy named Jimmy and his mother, the mother may do work; just like sweeping, cleansing the temple, collecting flowers, making garlands, washing dishes, etc. The boy should be trained to be a nice brahmacari, but it is risky to keep a boy of this age away from the public schools. In your country the law is very strict to send such minor children to school. The best thing will be to send him to New Vrindaban to be taken taken care of by Kirtanananda, Ranadhira, Satyabhama, Syama Dasi and Paramananda. They are already taking care of some young boys who are there. They are trying to develop a school of our ideal in that place. So after some time, if the mother sticks to our principles, the child may be sent to New Vrindaban and she can remain in the temple and gradually be initiated. In the meantime, encourage her to read our literature and books, and be engaged in some service as above mentioned.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1970_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="5" parent="Correspondence" text="1970 Correspondence"><h3>1970 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoProfessorJFStaalLosAngeles30January1970_0" class="quote" parent="1970_Correspondence" book="Let" index="65" link="Letter to Professor J. F. Staal -- Los Angeles 30 January, 1970" link_text="Letter to Professor J. F. Staal -- Los Angeles 30 January, 1970">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Professor J. F. Staal -- Los Angeles 30 January, 1970|Letter to Professor J. F. Staal -- Los Angeles 30 January, 1970]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Western culture is monotheistic, but they are being misled by the impersonal Indian speculation. The young people of the West are frustrated because they are not dilligently taught about monotheism. They are not satisfied with this process of teaching and understanding. This Krishna Consciousness Movement is a boon to them because they are being really trained to understand Western Monotheism under authoritative Vedic system. We do not simply theoretically discuss, but we learn by the prescribed method of Vedic regulations.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoGurudasaLosAngeles11February1970_1" class="quote" parent="1970_Correspondence" book="Let" index="89" link="Letter to Gurudasa -- Los Angeles 11 February, 1970" link_text="Letter to Gurudasa -- Los Angeles 11 February, 1970">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Gurudasa -- Los Angeles 11 February, 1970|Letter to Gurudasa -- Los Angeles 11 February, 1970]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Otherwise he will go to Germany. I can follow that Visnujana's service is very much needed in London but he is as much needed in Los Angeles also. So how he can be spared for London at the cost of Los Angeles business? So far brahmacaris are concerned, majorities of advanced students are in London, so why they should be lacking in training to enthuse these new brahmacaris?</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoYamunaLosAngeles2March1970_2" class="quote" parent="1970_Correspondence" book="Let" index="141" link="Letter to Yamuna -- Los Angeles 2 March, 1970" link_text="Letter to Yamuna -- Los Angeles 2 March, 1970">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Yamuna -- Los Angeles 2 March, 1970|Letter to Yamuna -- Los Angeles 2 March, 1970]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Regarding an assistant Pujari, Ilavati may be trained to assist you, but she may not conduct Arcana without being dvija. The system is that only one who is qualified with Gayatri initiation may directly worship the Deities (i.e. bathing, offering bhoga and aratrik, cooking for the Deities, etc.). But she may assist you by helping in all other respects. If for some reason you are unable to perform aratrik, there are other devotees, initiated brahmanas, who can make the offerings there.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoKsirodakasayiLosAngeles29June1970_3" class="quote" parent="1970_Correspondence" book="Let" index="389" link="Letter to Ksirodakasayi -- Los Angeles 29 June, 1970" link_text="Letter to Ksirodakasayi -- Los Angeles 29 June, 1970">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Ksirodakasayi -- Los Angeles 29 June, 1970|Letter to Ksirodakasayi -- Los Angeles 29 June, 1970]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Regarding our prospective Indian tour in February of 1971, we must now settle up the things during the Rathayatra festival because all important European devotees will collect together in London. The program is to go to India with forty heads, male and female. One local Indian chemist, Dr. Ravidra Pratap Rao, is here and most probably he is going to be our disciple. He is ready to receive our party at Gorakhpur and arrange for our visiting different important places. So the best thing will be to purchase our ticket up to Lucknow if it is possible and then from Lucknow they will receive us by train to Gorakhpur. This is the idea here. Now you should consider what is to be done. So on hearing from you definitely I shall ask Dr. Rao for our proper reception in India. The itinerary is not yet fixed up, but on hearing from you definitely I shall send you.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoJananivasaLosAngeles7July1970_4" class="quote" parent="1970_Correspondence" book="Let" index="405" link="Letter to Jananivasa -- Los Angeles 7 July, 1970" link_text="Letter to Jananivasa -- Los Angeles 7 July, 1970">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Jananivasa -- Los Angeles 7 July, 1970|Letter to Jananivasa -- Los Angeles 7 July, 1970]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I am very glad also to know that you are managing the schedule of your center very capably. Of course Sankirtana is our most important engagement, but all the temple activities must go on regularly without any pause. This following of the daily duties will carry us to the spiritual platform very rapidly. I have looked over the sample of test paper from Srimati Joanne and it is very nice. This question and answer practice should be encouraged amongst the devotees. Then they will become trained to reply questions from outsiders.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1971_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="6" parent="Correspondence" text="1971 Correspondence"><h3>1971 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoSatsvarupaDelhi25November1971_0" class="quote" parent="1971_Correspondence" book="Let" index="544" link="Letter to Satsvarupa -- Delhi 25 November, 1971" link_text="Letter to Satsvarupa -- Delhi 25 November, 1971">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Satsvarupa -- Delhi 25 November, 1971|Letter to Satsvarupa -- Delhi 25 November, 1971]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">And they think this work is very pleasant. If they are not spoiled by an artificial standard of sense gratification at an early age, children will turn out very nicely as sober citizens, because they have learned the real meaning of life. If they are trained to accept that austerity is very enjoyable then they will not be spoiled. So you organize everything in such a way that we can deliver these souls back to Krishna—this is our real work. Some of our girls may be trained in colleges and take teacher exams, and their husbands also. As you develop our program there I shall give you more hints.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1972_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="7" parent="Correspondence" text="1972 Correspondence"><h3>1972 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoChayaCalcutta16February1972_0" class="quote" parent="1972_Correspondence" book="Let" index="91" link="Letter to Chaya -- Calcutta 16 February, 1972" link_text="Letter to Chaya -- Calcutta 16 February, 1972">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Chaya -- Calcutta 16 February, 1972|Letter to Chaya -- Calcutta 16 February, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">You ask about marriage, yes, actually I want that every woman in the Society should be married. But what is this training to become wives and mothers? No school is required for that, simply association. And it is not necessary to say that women only can instruct the girls and men only can instruct the boys, not when they are so young. At 12 years, they may be initiated.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1975_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="10" parent="Correspondence" text="1975 Correspondence"><h3>1975 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoKirtirajaJohannesburg16October1975_0" class="quote" parent="1975_Correspondence" book="Let" index="594" link="Letter to Kirtiraja -- Johannesburg 16 October, 1975" link_text="Letter to Kirtiraja -- Johannesburg 16 October, 1975">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Kirtiraja -- Johannesburg 16 October, 1975|Letter to Kirtiraja -- Johannesburg 16 October, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">As soon as someone is trained then go to preach very nicely in Poland. Try to make some literature in Polish and Russian. Anyone can be trained to execute orders in sending out the books but preaching requires special qualification. So you have this good qualification for preaching and now do it very nicely.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1976_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="11" parent="Correspondence" text="1976 Correspondence"><h3>1976 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoJayatirthaMayapur20January1976_0" class="quote" parent="1976_Correspondence" book="Let" index="56" link="Letter to Jayatirtha -- Mayapur 20 January, 1976" link_text="Letter to Jayatirtha -- Mayapur 20 January, 1976">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Jayatirtha -- Mayapur 20 January, 1976|Letter to Jayatirtha -- Mayapur 20 January, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Regarding the ISKCON Gurukula presently situated in Dallas—The Gurukula must be based on the principle of renunciation; vairagya vidya nija bhakti yogam ([[Vanisource:CC Madhya 6.254|CC Madhya 6.254]]). Bhakti is based on the principle of the renunciation of material desires beginning from the earliest age; kaumaram acaret prajna dharman bhagavatan iha ([[Vanisource:SB 7.6.1|SB 7.6.1]]). From the very beginning, a boy must be trained to perform devotional service to the Supreme Personality of Godhead, and not to be attached as the fruitive workers, the karmis, to the so-called fallible soldiers; dehapatya kalatradisu atma-sainyesu asatsv api tesam prammato nidhanam pasyanapi na pasyati ([[Vanisource:SB 2.1.4|SB 2.1.4]]). The karmis are attached too much to their bodies, children and wives, who are like fallible fighting soldiers who must ultimately be destroyed. Although they are sufficiently experienced, they still cannot see this.</p>
</div>
</div>
</div>

Janmastami (Letters)

2010-05-10T09:14:50Z

Partha-sarathi:

<div id="compilation">
<div id="facts">
{{terms|"janmastami"}}
{{notes|}}
{{compiler|Visnu Murti|Partha-sarathi}}
{{complete|ALL}}
{{first|24Nov08}}
{{last|10May10}}
{{totals_by_section|BG=0|SB=0|CC=0|OB=0|Lec=0|Con=0|Let=113}}
{{total|113}}
{{toc right}}
[[Category:Janmastami|1]]
[[Category:Compilations from Letters]]
</div>
<div id="Correspondence" class="section" sec_index="6" parent="compilation" text="Correspondence"><h2>Correspondence</h2>
</div>
<div id="1967_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="2" parent="Correspondence" text="1967 Correspondence"><h3>1967 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoNripenBabuSanFrancisco18March1967_0" class="quote" parent="1967_Correspondence" book="Let" index="49" link="Letter to Nripen Babu -- San Francisco 18 March, 1967" link_text="Letter to Nripen Babu -- San Francisco 18 March, 1967">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Nripen Babu -- San Francisco 18 March, 1967|Letter to Nripen Babu -- San Francisco 18 March, 1967]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I think Governor Visvanatha Das is already aware of the condition of the temple. Many people at Vrindaban has complained against the Gosain of Radha Damodara Temple and consequently the Governor withdrew his promise to pay yearly Rs 500/- for Kirtana in the Temple on Janmastami day. He publicly promised this in the temple while meeting was going on Janmastami day organized by me. Unfortunately a demonstration was made by one woman who made a great show by crying that Panchu has cheated her by Rs 800/-. This show of the woman and subsequent adverse letters by other envious persons marred the whole project.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoNripenBabuSanFrancisco18March1967_1" class="quote" parent="1967_Correspondence" book="Let" index="49" link="Letter to Nripen Babu -- San Francisco 18 March, 1967" link_text="Letter to Nripen Babu -- San Francisco 18 March, 1967">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Nripen Babu -- San Francisco 18 March, 1967|Letter to Nripen Babu -- San Francisco 18 March, 1967]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I think Governor Visvanatha Das is already aware of the condition of the temple. Many people at Vrindaban has complained against the Gosain of Radha Damodara Temple and consequently the Governor withdrew his promise to pay yearly Rs 500/- for Kirtana in the Temple on Janmastami day. He publicly promised this in the temple while meeting was going on Janmastami day organized by me. Unfortunately a demonstration was made by one woman who made a great show by crying that Panchu has cheated her by Rs 800/-. This show of the woman and subsequent adverse letters by other envious persons marred the whole project. Since then I could understand that no improvement in the Radha Damodara Temple can be made under such condition. The cheating of Panchu by 800/ rupees was subsequently confirmed before me by one woman disciple of Gauracandra Gosain. I remained silent and this the first time I am disclosing the fact before you.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoRayaramaVrindaban22August1967_2" class="quote" parent="1967_Correspondence" book="Let" index="128" link="Letter to Rayarama -- Vrindaban 22 August, 1967" link_text="Letter to Rayarama -- Vrindaban 22 August, 1967">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Rayarama -- Vrindaban 22 August, 1967|Letter to Rayarama -- Vrindaban 22 August, 1967]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I am so glad to receive your letter of 8/17/67, and have noted the contents. Krishna's Janmastami ceremony may be celebrated in the same way as last year. I understand that Acyutananda is coming here on Janmastami Day, but I have received no word from him. Anyway, if he comes it will be a great joy for us. You will see in the letter to Brahmananda that any student who comes here for studying further in K.C. will have no difficulty for room, board, and tuition. It is a good opportunity for our students, and I shall be very glad to learn how many of you desire to come. In the meantime, I am trying to get other facilities for passage. Please give your primary attention for improving BTG, the backbone of our movement. Kirtanananda is going to be the first sannyasa among my disciples. I am improving gradually. Hope you are all well.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoPradyumnaVrindaban25August1967_3" class="quote" parent="1967_Correspondence" book="Let" index="130" link="Letter to Pradyumna -- Vrindaban 25 August, 1967" link_text="Letter to Pradyumna -- Vrindaban 25 August, 1967">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Pradyumna -- Vrindaban 25 August, 1967|Letter to Pradyumna -- Vrindaban 25 August, 1967]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I am in due receipt of your letters of the 15 and 16th inst., as well as the Janmastami day circular. I am so much pleased that everything is going on so nicely in Montreal, and that you are ever more actively engaged for Krishna, even in the absence of myself and Kirtanananda, It is a great credit to you, and I thank you for it. You should know that it is all due to your sincerity of heart; when we are sincere, Krishna will always help us, either in external direction by the Spiritual Master, or internally by His Paramatma expansion. The program you have decided on for the Lord's Advent Day is nice. I also very much appreciate the work you are doing in trying to promote my books and record, and I am very glad to know that the new BTG is selling well. These publication are the backbone of our movement, and if we can distribute them successfully. then everything will be all right.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoSatsvarupaVrindaban29August1967_4" class="quote" parent="1967_Correspondence" book="Let" index="135" link="Letter to Satsvarupa -- Vrindaban 29 August, 1967" link_text="Letter to Satsvarupa -- Vrindaban 29 August, 1967">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Satsvarupa -- Vrindaban 29 August, 1967|Letter to Satsvarupa -- Vrindaban 29 August, 1967]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">You will be glad to know the Kirtanananda is now Tridandi Swami Kirtanananda. I have made him a sannyasi yesterday on the birthday of Lord Krishna, and it was unexpectedly a very successful ceremony. The moment he was being offered sannyasa there was some ceremony of Janmastami in the temple, and hundreds of men and women congratulated the young sannyasi. Somebody remarked that he looked like Lord Caitanya. He will be going back to the States very soon; in the meantime I shall try to utilize this "white sannyasi" for recruiting some members in India, and then he will go back. He field of work is certainly there; but if he can be used here also, I will try for it.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoJanardanaDelhi30September1967_5" class="quote" parent="1967_Correspondence" book="Let" index="160" link="Letter to Janardana -- Delhi 30 September, 1967" link_text="Letter to Janardana -- Delhi 30 September, 1967">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Janardana -- Delhi 30 September, 1967|Letter to Janardana -- Delhi 30 September, 1967]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Regarding the incidence that took place on Janmastami day immediately send the following gentleman a copy of your grievance.* (see next page)</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1968_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="3" parent="Correspondence" text="1968 Correspondence"><h3>1968 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoJagannathamPrabhuMontreal22June1968_0" class="quote" parent="1968_Correspondence" book="Let" index="214" link="Letter to Jagannatham Prabhu -- Montreal 22 June, 1968" link_text="Letter to Jagannatham Prabhu -- Montreal 22 June, 1968">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Jagannatham Prabhu -- Montreal 22 June, 1968|Letter to Jagannatham Prabhu -- Montreal 22 June, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I am so glad to receive your letter after a long time. I think I met you sometimes in the year of 1950, in Madras Gaudiya Math, when I went with Tirtha Maharaja to attend the Janmastami Festival. I know you are a sincere servant of Srila Prabhupada and you have done excellent service while He was present before us, and you have done similarly even after His Disappearance. I am very glad to learn that your children are well situated, but you are very much anxious to get them in touch with Krishna Consciousness. You know very well that jadavidya is the opulence of maya. So naturally, your children being well educated in jadavidya, are reluctant to receive enlightenment in Krishna Consciousness. But there is nothing to be disappointed, because they are your children; they have got the initiative seeds in them, and someday it will fructify. Don't worry about them; Krishna will put them in right line in due course.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoSatsvarupaMontreal8August1968_1" class="quote" parent="1968_Correspondence" book="Let" index="256" link="Letter to Satsvarupa -- Montreal 8 August, 1968" link_text="Letter to Satsvarupa -- Montreal 8 August, 1968">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Satsvarupa -- Montreal 8 August, 1968|Letter to Satsvarupa -- Montreal 8 August, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I am in due receipt of your letter dated July 16, as well as July 30, 1968, together through Vaikunthanatha dasa. The press cuttings were nice. Pictures appeared to be very attractive, and it is learned that it is the biggest daily paper in New England. So it is good publicity. Janmastami is to be performed on the 16th of August, and the next day is my Birthday. The feasting should be held on the 17th, so that you can finish two festivals in one—namely, Nandotsava and Vyasapuja (Spiritual Master's Birthday).</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoHayagrivaMontreal17August1968_2" class="quote" parent="1968_Correspondence" book="Let" index="261" link="Letter to Hayagriva -- Montreal 17 August, 1968" link_text="Letter to Hayagriva -- Montreal 17 August, 1968">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Hayagriva -- Montreal 17 August, 1968|Letter to Hayagriva -- Montreal 17 August, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Last night we celebrated here Janmastami festival very gorgeously, and many Indians in large number attended and they contributed also very liberally. One Madrasi gentleman demonstrated a Krishna dance by his two young daughters, and it was nice. At the present moment, many devotees from San Francisco, New York (specifically your intimate friend Umapati, is present here) have come here. Today they will observe Vyasa Puja ceremony (my Birthday Anniversary), so from this day, I will be stepping on the 73rd year. I hope the remaining days of my life may be utilized to serve you all Western devotees of Krishna. Please pray to Krishna that he may give me the necessary strength to discharge the duty entrusted by my Spiritual Master. Convey my blessings to Kirtanananda, and I hope you are all doing well.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoJayanandaMontreal17August1968_3" class="quote" parent="1968_Correspondence" book="Let" index="262" link="Letter to Jayananda -- Montreal 17 August, 1968" link_text="Letter to Jayananda -- Montreal 17 August, 1968">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Jayananda -- Montreal 17 August, 1968|Letter to Jayananda -- Montreal 17 August, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Last night we had very nice performance of Janmastami ceremony and all the San Francisco devotees and some of the New York devotees including Uddhava are all now present here. The Indian public here also took great interest in this program this year. And today they are performing both the Vyasa Puja and Nandotsav ceremony.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoBrahmanandaMontreal19August1968_4" class="quote" parent="1968_Correspondence" book="Let" index="264" link="Letter to Brahmananda -- Montreal 19 August, 1968" link_text="Letter to Brahmananda -- Montreal 19 August, 1968">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Brahmananda -- Montreal 19 August, 1968|Letter to Brahmananda -- Montreal 19 August, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">The other day there was nice Janmastami festival, and many Indians participated in the ceremony and they had very good collection. The meeting was very successful. The next day also they held Nandotsav and Vyasa Puja ceremony. That was also very nice. Last night, on Sunday, there was marriage ceremony of Satyabhama and Paramananda. Their parents also came, and it was very nice ceremony.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoBalaiAdvaitaMontreal19August1968_5" class="quote" parent="1968_Correspondence" book="Let" index="265" link="Letter to Balai, Advaita -- Montreal 19 August, 1968" link_text="Letter to Balai, Advaita -- Montreal 19 August, 1968">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Balai, Advaita -- Montreal 19 August, 1968|Letter to Balai, Advaita -- Montreal 19 August, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">It was so kind of you that you have sent me a Birthday cake, and you will be pleased to know that Govinda dasi and her husband Gaurasundara, decorated the bread with nice different kinds of candles, and it was offered to Krishna and then I enjoyed the bread, part of it, and the rest was distributed to the devotees. It was very nice. The other day they performed my Birthday Anniversary, very decently, there were good gathering and people appreciated. And before that, there was Janmastami, at night all the Indians here, they joined and they contributed also liberally. So here the news are very good, as you have in NY and the London party they are proceeding to NY today and will reach there and stay for a few days, and then will go to London. Give them hearty send-off and good wishes.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1969_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="4" parent="Correspondence" text="1969 Correspondence"><h3>1969 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoSyamasundaraLosAngeles29June1969_0" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="403" link="Letter to Syamasundara -- Los Angeles 29 June, 1969" link_text="Letter to Syamasundara -- Los Angeles 29 June, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Syamasundara -- Los Angeles 29 June, 1969|Letter to Syamasundara -- Los Angeles 29 June, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">It doesn't matter when I go there. In the meantime, you give your full attention to decorating the temple, and I am very glad to learn you are making the throne and altar according the the design I sent to you. I learned that Mataji has arranged for the Radha-Krishna Deities for our temple. Is this a fact? If not, let me know, I have already one pair of 24" Deities from Vrindaban that will be dispatched, and as suggested by you, by Janmastami the Deities may be installed.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoYamunaLosAngeles3July1969_1" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="411" link="Letter to Yamuna -- Los Angeles 3 July, 1969" link_text="Letter to Yamuna -- Los Angeles 3 July, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Yamuna -- Los Angeles 3 July, 1969|Letter to Yamuna -- Los Angeles 3 July, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So now we have got very great responsibility to spread this message all over the world, and in London you have got now a good chance to preach in the most important city of the world. Decorate the place very nicely, as far as possible. Your idea for holding the Vyasa Puja Ceremony in London on the 5th of September is very much encouraging. On the 4th September is Janmastami Day, and I have received one letter from Syamasundara. in which he suggested that we should have our installation on that day. This is a good idea. On the 4th we open formally the temple, and on the 5th is my birthday, or your Vyasa Puja ceremony. So this idea is welcome. A special Vyasa Puja issue of BTG may be done, and you may open correspondence with Brahmananda, because publication of BTG will now be conducted by Iskcon Book Dept., and BTG will be under the supervision of Brahmananda and Hayagriva. Rayarama das Brahmacari is called by me to live with me here to engage in editorial work, so you may correspond with Brahmananda in this connection.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoYamunaGurudasaLosAngeles15July1969_2" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="448" link="Letter to Yamuna, Gurudasa -- Los Angeles 15 July, 1969" link_text="Letter to Yamuna, Gurudasa -- Los Angeles 15 July, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Yamuna, Gurudasa -- Los Angeles 15 July, 1969|Letter to Yamuna, Gurudasa -- Los Angeles 15 July, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">As you are all sincere devotees, I am sure you are feeling the great assistance of Krishna through your activities, and the more you serve the more you will know how you are making progress in Krishna Consciousness. The same example has to be repeated how when a hungry man is given foodstuffs to eat, automatically he feels three kinds of symptoms: satisfaction of hunger, strength and pleasure. So this Krishna Consciousness Movement is based on sincere service to the Lord. We shall always remember this, and then success is assured. I am glad that you are expecting me there during Janmastami Day, and this is a very nice proposal. Even if I go to Germany in the meantime, it will not be difficult for me to come to London during Janmastami Festival, which takes place on the 4th of September.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoGurudasaLosAngeles31July1969_3" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="485" link="Letter to Gurudasa -- Los Angeles 31 July, 1969" link_text="Letter to Gurudasa -- Los Angeles 31 July, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Gurudasa -- Los Angeles 31 July, 1969|Letter to Gurudasa -- Los Angeles 31 July, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">As in the material world sometimes failure is considered as a pillar of success, similarly in the spiritual order also the same principle can be applied. So don't be disappointed. Maybe Krishna's desire is something higher in this connection. If the Rathayatra has not been performed, you can postpone it to be performed on the Janmastami Festival. There is no harm if you postpone the function to a later date, and the public will appreciate it. You consult amongst yourselves without being discouraged and patiently work for its being performed one month later. There is no harm.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoGurudasaLosAngeles31July1969_4" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="485" link="Letter to Gurudasa -- Los Angeles 31 July, 1969" link_text="Letter to Gurudasa -- Los Angeles 31 July, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Gurudasa -- Los Angeles 31 July, 1969|Letter to Gurudasa -- Los Angeles 31 July, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Jagannatha and Krishna are the same Supreme Personality. If it is Krishna's desire that He should enjoy the function on Janmastami Day, it might be He put some hindrance on the Rathayatra Day plans. So if you decide to hold the function on Janmastami Day, September 4, 1969, then on hearing from you I shall give you further instructions in this connection. But in any case don't be disappointed. Keep your enthusiasm. Be patient, and Krishna will reward your attempts with success.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoGurudasaLosAngeles31July1969_5" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="485" link="Letter to Gurudasa -- Los Angeles 31 July, 1969" link_text="Letter to Gurudasa -- Los Angeles 31 July, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Gurudasa -- Los Angeles 31 July, 1969|Letter to Gurudasa -- Los Angeles 31 July, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So far as San Francisco Rathayatra Festival, it was very pompously and successfully executed in my presence. There were about 10,000 people attending the function. The procession was led from our temple through Golden Gate Park and some other streets. We started at about 12:30 and reached on the beach about 5:00 or 5:30. Then we held a meeting in a big hall up till 6:00 o'clock, and they performed a puppet show and distributed Prasadam. Then Kirtana continued up till about 10:00 o'clock at night. The function was reported in the local papers, and I will send you a copy when it is printed up. So if possible, you just postpone the function till Janmastami Day, and do the needful. But don't be confused and disappointed. I hope you are well.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoSyamasundaraLosAngeles31July1969_6" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="487" link="Letter to Syamasundara -- Los Angeles 31 July, 1969" link_text="Letter to Syamasundara -- Los Angeles 31 July, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Syamasundara -- Los Angeles 31 July, 1969|Letter to Syamasundara -- Los Angeles 31 July, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I thank you very much for your letter dated July 25, 1969 and noted the contents with great encouragement, but at the same time I received one letter from Gurudasa which was not very encouraging. He told me about the difficulty that was had in performing the Rathayatra Festival, and I am enclosing a copy of the letter to you which I replied to Gurudasa. The purport of my letter is that there is no cause for any disappointment, and you can perform this ceremony on Janmastami Day if you are able. From the description of your letter it appears that the structure of the Ratha was too heavy for the wheels to carry the load. From Gurudasa' letter it was not clear to me if you at all held a ceremony on a smaller scale. But in any event, I think we may take it as Krishna's Grace that the difficulty took place at the very beginning of the procession and not later on when the Ratha was in a more populated area. So do not feel discouraged at all. By Krishna's Plan everything will come out for the best. We have only to work very sincerely, depending fully on the Mercy of the Lord, and in this consciousness we can make very quick advancement in Krishna Consciousness. If you think you will be able to perform the ceremony on Janmastami Day, then I shall give you further instructions on how this is to be done.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoSyamasundaraLosAngeles31July1969_7" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="487" link="Letter to Syamasundara -- Los Angeles 31 July, 1969" link_text="Letter to Syamasundara -- Los Angeles 31 July, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Syamasundara -- Los Angeles 31 July, 1969|Letter to Syamasundara -- Los Angeles 31 July, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I have written to Krishna das in Germany, and I am expecting their reply as to when they will be able to receive me there. So after I complete my business in Germany, surely I shall come to your temple in London, perhaps by Janmastami Day, and then it will be so nice to see all of you again. Please convey my blessings to your good wife, Malati, and your little daughter, Sarasvati. I hope this will meet you all in good health.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoGaurasundaraLosAngeles2August1969_8" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="491" link="Letter to Gaurasundara -- Los Angeles 2 August, 1969" link_text="Letter to Gaurasundara -- Los Angeles 2 August, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Gaurasundara -- Los Angeles 2 August, 1969|Letter to Gaurasundara -- Los Angeles 2 August, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I am glad to learn that you have performed the Guru Purnima Ceremony by Kirtana that is all right. But this Guru Purnima is generally performed by the Mayavadi sects. The idea of Guru Purnima is to offer gratitude to the Spiritual Master by the disciple once in a year. That is called Guru Purnima. So far as we are concerned, Gaudiya Vaisnavas, we offer all our gratefulness to the Spiritual Master on His Appearance Day Ceremony, called Vyasa Puja. So kirtana is our daily function; whatever you have done is all right, but actual worship of the Spiritual Master will be done by all of my disciples on the fifth day of September, just one day after Janmastami.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoYamunaLosAngeles12August1969_9" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="510" link="Letter to Yamuna -- Los Angeles 12 August, 1969" link_text="Letter to Yamuna -- Los Angeles 12 August, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Yamuna -- Los Angeles 12 August, 1969|Letter to Yamuna -- Los Angeles 12 August, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Regarding the collapsing of the wheels during Ratha Yatra Ceremony, that doesn't matter. If possible, you may organize another procession on Janmastami Day. Regarding the footprint on Krishna's chest which you say is Radharani's, that is not correct. That footprint is of Bhrgu Muni.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoGovindaLosAngeles17August1969_10" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="521" link="Letter to Govinda -- Los Angeles 17 August, 1969" link_text="Letter to Govinda -- Los Angeles 17 August, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Govinda -- Los Angeles 17 August, 1969|Letter to Govinda -- Los Angeles 17 August, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So try to preach this Krishna Consciousness Movement amongst the hippies there, and simply induce them to chant Hare Krishna. If they kindly join in chanting Hare Krishna, that will make our movement successful. Then gradually make them more and more advanced by participating in Love Feasts and ceremonies, like Janmastami and Rathayatra. Then everything will go smoothly. The only thing wanted is that we should work very sincerely, with full faith in Krishna and the Spiritual Master. Then all help will come automatically.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoRaktakaHamburg6September1969_11" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="547" link="Letter to Raktaka -- Hamburg 6 September, 1969" link_text="Letter to Raktaka -- Hamburg 6 September, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Raktaka -- Hamburg 6 September, 1969|Letter to Raktaka -- Hamburg 6 September, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Regarding the two books you have mentioned, Sri Ramacharitamanasa by Goswami Tulasi das is not very authorized, and Ramayana is authorized. One thing is though, you have got enough other books to study. Did you appear in the examination held on Janmastami Day? Why should you go to Ramayana when you have got Bhagavad-gita, Srimad-Bhagavatam and Teachings of Lord Caitanya? Don't divert your attention in that way. The author of Ramacharitamanasa, Goswami Tulasi das, has a tint of Mayavadi philosophy. He belongs to the Ramananda Sampradaya. They are mixed up combination of personalist and impersonalist. Therefore, the author is not considered as pure Vaisnava. Pure Vaisnava is free from all material contamination of fruitive activities and mental speculation. The pure Vaisnava is simply, purely disposed to transcendental loving service to Krishna. The pure Vaisnava rejects anything which has no pure idea of serving the Personality of Godhead.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoJagadisaHamburg7September1969_12" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="552" link="Letter to Jagadisa -- Hamburg 7 September, 1969" link_text="Letter to Jagadisa -- Hamburg 7 September, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Jagadisa -- Hamburg 7 September, 1969|Letter to Jagadisa -- Hamburg 7 September, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I have received the Janmastami Day examinations from your center but there were no fees enclosed. I assume they are coming by separate post.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoBrahmanandaHamburg9September1969_13" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="558" link="Letter to Brahmananda -- Hamburg 9 September, 1969" link_text="Letter to Brahmananda -- Hamburg 9 September, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Brahmananda -- Hamburg 9 September, 1969|Letter to Brahmananda -- Hamburg 9 September, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I beg to acknowledge receipt of your letter dated September 6, 1969 and the new issue of BTG. I am pleased to learn that the house transaction is finished, and I shall be glad if you send a copy of the conveyance deed to the London address, where I am going the day after tomorrow. The purchasing transaction has been done on Janmastami Day, and this is also a great occasion. Regarding your anxieties how to pay the rent, etc., in the winter season, I think Krishna will provide with sufficient press work and some of the boys may work also. In this way we have to manage.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoBrahmanandaHamburg9September1969_14" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="558" link="Letter to Brahmananda -- Hamburg 9 September, 1969" link_text="Letter to Brahmananda -- Hamburg 9 September, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Brahmananda -- Hamburg 9 September, 1969|Letter to Brahmananda -- Hamburg 9 September, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I thank you very much for your appreciation of my book, Krishna, and you all enjoyed it on Janmastami Day. You write to say that each book I write is greater than anything written previously, but I must also inform you that each book you print is nicer than the previous printing. Two books, Bhagavad-gita As It Is and TLC, both are practically done by you, and the TLC has come out in printing art better than Bhagavad-gita As It Is.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoUpendraTittenhurst15September1969_15" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="564" link="Letter to Upendra -- Tittenhurst 15 September, 1969" link_text="Letter to Upendra -- Tittenhurst 15 September, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Upendra -- Tittenhurst 15 September, 1969|Letter to Upendra -- Tittenhurst 15 September, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I am in due receipt of your letter dated September 10th, 1969 and I have also duly received the Bhakti-sastri examinations from Seattle temple on the same day. I was very pleased to learn of the elaborate way in which you celebrated the Janmastami Day and Vyasa Puja Day ceremonies. The articles in the local papers which you have forwarded to me describing the event are also nice. Last Thursday, when I arrived in London there were more than one dozen reporters to take pictures immediately as we got off of the plane, and then we were led by a special airport attendant to a room where there was nice kirtana and some questions from the pressmen. The next day several articles appeared in the London papers, and I am enclosing one such article for your reference. Regarding the Mayapur center, I am not giving attention just now to Mayapur.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoMadhudvisaEngland30September1969_16" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="589" link="Letter to Madhudvisa -- England 30 September, 1969" link_text="Letter to Madhudvisa -- England 30 September, 1969">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Madhudvisa -- England 30 September, 1969|Letter to Madhudvisa -- England 30 September, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Regarding you first question, we observe Ekadasi from sunrise to sunrise. The 12 midnight is western astronomical calculation, but the Vedic astronomical calculation begins either from the sunrise or the moonrise. Generally it is sunrise. Our calculation is like this: when the sunrise is there, Ekadasi tithi (date) must be there. If Ekadasi tithi is not in the sunrise and the tithi begins, say after a few minutes after the sunrise, then we accept that day as previous to Ekadasi. All our ceremonies are calculated in that way. This means we must see the tithi during sunrise. Therefore, sometimes our dates of ceremonies do not exactly coincide like the western calculations. Just like Christmas Day they have fixed up on the 25th December, but our Janmastami tithi is not fixed up like that. My birthday is on the 1st September, 1896, but this year the tithi of my birthday was fixed for the 4th September. So it is very difficult to calculate, therefore we have to take help from the Indian expert almanac astronomers.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1970_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="5" parent="Correspondence" text="1970 Correspondence"><h3>1970 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoRanadhiraLosAngeles24January1970_0" class="quote" parent="1970_Correspondence" book="Let" index="49" link="Letter to Ranadhira -- Los Angeles 24 January, 1970" link_text="Letter to Ranadhira -- Los Angeles 24 January, 1970">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Ranadhira -- Los Angeles 24 January, 1970|Letter to Ranadhira -- Los Angeles 24 January, 1970]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I thank you for sending me back the small book in Bengali which I was missing. Now you have this truck, and your activities will surely improve the expansion of our Vrndavana scheme. We shall hold our Janmastami ceremony in great pomp, and if by Krishna's Grace it is possible, I shall also go there. The cancelled check has no use for me, it was returned by the bank. Please do the preaching work more vigorously as Krishna has given you all facility.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoMadhudvisaLosAngeles14February1970_1" class="quote" parent="1970_Correspondence" book="Let" index="94" link="Letter to Madhudvisa -- Los Angeles 14 February, 1970" link_text="Letter to Madhudvisa -- Los Angeles 14 February, 1970">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Madhudvisa -- Los Angeles 14 February, 1970|Letter to Madhudvisa -- Los Angeles 14 February, 1970]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">In the spring you may lead a very big procession on Lord Caitanya's birthday. This is a good plan to celebrate this great spring festival out of doors. So make this a very opulent procession with large Sankirtana Party and you may also celebrate in this way again with a procession on Janmastami day. These two important subjects may be observed in this way by all the three areas and similarly in other centers also.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoKirtananandaLosAngeles18February1970_2" class="quote" parent="1970_Correspondence" book="Let" index="104" link="Letter to Kirtanananda -- Los Angeles 18 February, 1970" link_text="Letter to Kirtanananda -- Los Angeles 18 February, 1970">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Kirtanananda -- Los Angeles 18 February, 1970|Letter to Kirtanananda -- Los Angeles 18 February, 1970]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">By the by, I may inform you that you desire me to go to New Vrindaban during Janmastami days, and I suggested to organize a fair within our campus. Do you think it is possible to do so within such short period? But if you can do so, either this year or next, I am sure many people will come to see such fair, and that will be a great impetus for developing the land. The most important thing is easy transport.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoSyamaLosAngeles23February1970_3" class="quote" parent="1970_Correspondence" book="Let" index="121" link="Letter to Syama -- Los Angeles 23 February, 1970" link_text="Letter to Syama -- Los Angeles 23 February, 1970">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Syama -- Los Angeles 23 February, 1970|Letter to Syama -- Los Angeles 23 February, 1970]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I am very much pleased to note that you are feeling happiness in Krsna Consciousness activities along with your good husband. Please remain in that spirit and chant Hare Krsna sixteen rounds regularly, both husband and wife, and develop New Vrindaban. Next summer if you hold Janmastami gorgeously, as I have already suggested to Kirtanananda Maharaja, surely I shall go there.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoHayagrivaLosAngeles22May1970_4" class="quote" parent="1970_Correspondence" book="Let" index="318" link="Letter to Hayagriva -- Los Angeles 22 May, 1970" link_text="Letter to Hayagriva -- Los Angeles 22 May, 1970">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Hayagriva -- Los Angeles 22 May, 1970|Letter to Hayagriva -- Los Angeles 22 May, 1970]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">If I go to Vrndavana, I will go during Janmastami festival there to see how Kirtanananda Maharaja has arranged. We have to make program that the Janmastami ceremony is held in New Vrndavana with great pomp—as much as the Rathayatra festival is to be performed in San Francisco. Similarly I propose to have great festival in Honolulu which is now New Navadvipa. This festival is to be observed during the Advent of Lord Caitanya's birthday. In this way the students should meet in these different important places at least 3 to 4 times in a year so that the work in different centers may go on uniformly.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoVrndavanaCandraLosAngeles5June1970_5" class="quote" parent="1970_Correspondence" book="Let" index="346" link="Letter to Vrndavana Candra -- Los Angeles 5 June, 1970" link_text="Letter to Vrndavana Candra -- Los Angeles 5 June, 1970">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Vrndavana Candra -- Los Angeles 5 June, 1970|Letter to Vrndavana Candra -- Los Angeles 5 June, 1970]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">The house which you have described sounds very good for our purpose. So continue to develop this building for our Baltimore temple. Please also continue to cooperatively join with Philadelphia temple and the other temples for spreading Krsna consciousness by Maha sankirtana, festivals like Janmastami festival to be celebrated at New Vrndavana. I want that all my students will cooperate fully for expanding our movement, and in this way every center will be benefited.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoGovindaLosAngeles13June1970_6" class="quote" parent="1970_Correspondence" book="Let" index="351" link="Letter to Govinda -- Los Angeles 13 June, 1970" link_text="Letter to Govinda -- Los Angeles 13 June, 1970">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Govinda -- Los Angeles 13 June, 1970|Letter to Govinda -- Los Angeles 13 June, 1970]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So you come to San Francisco, both husband and wife, and meet me there because I want to see you both since a long time. And after coming there, if you still insist, then I may go to Hawaii for a week only. I think this is not advisable. The best thing would be that you come to San Francisco and I give you instruction for developing New Navadvipa, so that next march when there will be Lord Caitanya's Birthday I must go there. It is my desire that three places at the present moment namely San Francisco (New Puri), New Vrndavana and New Navadvipa should be especially organized for three great festivals; namely Janmastami, Rathayatra and Phalguni Purnima or Lord Caitanya's Birthday. On these occasions not only myself but all the devotees should assemble in these places and we shall meet together for the mutual advancement of our centers. So by all means you, husband and wife, come to San Francisco during Rathayatra festival.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoVamanadevaLosAngeles22June1970_7" class="quote" parent="1970_Correspondence" book="Let" index="375" link="Letter to Vamanadeva -- Los Angeles 22 June, 1970" link_text="Letter to Vamanadeva -- Los Angeles 22 June, 1970">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Vamanadeva -- Los Angeles 22 June, 1970|Letter to Vamanadeva -- Los Angeles 22 June, 1970]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Regarding my stay in New Vrndavana, I will be there at the time of Janmastami celebration, and at that time all the members of the Eastern temples are invited to gather to celebrate this Holy occasion together. This will also provide an opportunity for me to visit you all. So when you come there we shall discuss our further programs together.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoNevatiajiLosAngeles16July1970_8" class="quote" parent="1970_Correspondence" book="Let" index="429" link="Letter to Nevatiaji -- Los Angeles 16 July, 1970" link_text="Letter to Nevatiaji -- Los Angeles 16 July, 1970">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Nevatiaji -- Los Angeles 16 July, 1970|Letter to Nevatiaji -- Los Angeles 16 July, 1970]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Other major celebrations are Janmastami and Lord Caitanya's Abhirbhava on Phalguni Purnima. These are especially celebrated gorgeously at New Vrndavana and New Navadvipa respectively. For its lavish Rathayatras yearly for the last four years San Francisco is now commonly known as New Jagannatha Puri. We are gradually increasing the size of major festivals and eventually there will be twenty-four or two each month. The public response is always very encouraging.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoSatsvarupaLosAngeles19July1970_9" class="quote" parent="1970_Correspondence" book="Let" index="437" link="Letter to Satsvarupa -- Los Angeles 19 July, 1970" link_text="Letter to Satsvarupa -- Los Angeles 19 July, 1970">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Satsvarupa -- Los Angeles 19 July, 1970|Letter to Satsvarupa -- Los Angeles 19 July, 1970]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So far it is fixed up that I go to New Vrindaban for Janmastami day by the 20th August. So if you like I can go for a few days before to Boston to see your temple and press. You can fix up this program by talking with Hayagriva and let me know. I think everything is going nicely in Boston.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoTamalaKrsnaLosAngeles19July1970_10" class="quote" parent="1970_Correspondence" book="Let" index="440" link="Letter to Tamala Krsna -- Los Angeles 19 July, 1970" link_text="Letter to Tamala Krsna -- Los Angeles 19 July, 1970">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Tamala Krsna -- Los Angeles 19 July, 1970|Letter to Tamala Krsna -- Los Angeles 19 July, 1970]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I learn from Brahmananda that you are planning to come here and attend the meeting during Janmastami days at New Vrndavana and I am very glad that you are coming.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoYamunaCalcutta16September1970_11" class="quote" parent="1970_Correspondence" book="Let" index="514" link="Letter to Yamuna -- Calcutta 16 September, 1970" link_text="Letter to Yamuna -- Calcutta 16 September, 1970">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Yamuna -- Calcutta 16 September, 1970|Letter to Yamuna -- Calcutta 16 September, 1970]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">The program executed by you on Janmastami and Nandotsava Days appears to be very nice and I am so glad that you remember my childhood name "Nandu" given by one of my uncles.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoGovindaMaharajaCalcutta22September1970_12" class="quote" parent="1970_Correspondence" book="Let" index="526" link="Letter to Govinda Maharaja -- Calcutta 22 September, 1970" link_text="Letter to Govinda Maharaja -- Calcutta 22 September, 1970">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Govinda Maharaja -- Calcutta 22 September, 1970|Letter to Govinda Maharaja -- Calcutta 22 September, 1970]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">You have reminded me of the Janmastami Day and it was pompously observed at our New Vrndavana. We were expecting some guests from India; unfortunately nobody came.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1971_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="6" parent="Correspondence" text="1971 Correspondence"><h3>1971 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoTradhisNagapatniGorakhpur11February1971_0" class="quote" parent="1971_Correspondence" book="Let" index="55" link="Letter to Tradhis, Nagapatni -- Gorakhpur 11 February, 1971" link_text="Letter to Tradhis, Nagapatni -- Gorakhpur 11 February, 1971">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Tradhis, Nagapatni -- Gorakhpur 11 February, 1971|Letter to Tradhis, Nagapatni -- Gorakhpur 11 February, 1971]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I am very glad to accept you both, husband and wife, as my initiated disciples. I have chanted your beads duly and they are returned to you herewith. Your spiritual names are Tradhis Das Adhikari and Srimati Nagapatni Devi Dasi. Your daughter may remain called as Janmastami devi and when she is initiated she shall receive a new name. I am just requesting you to become ideal example of Krsna consciousness in householder life and thus you will encourage so many others who come in your contact to adjust their lives to this sublime process. That in itself will be the greatest service. So please stay strong and stronger in devotional service to Krsna by chanting daily sixteen rounds of beads, following the regulative principles strictly and avoiding the ten offenses in the matter of chanting the Holy Names of the Lord. If you follow this simple process faithfully under the direction of your Spiritual Master and try to understand our philosophy by regular study, you will continue to progress your lives in Krsna Consciousness and Krsna will simultaneously protect you from the attacks of Maya and provide you with all necessary facilities for rendering service unto Him. Please take encouragement and guidance from your elder Godbrothers and sisters and happy in Krsna Consciousness.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoGovindaCalcutta28May1971_1" class="quote" parent="1971_Correspondence" book="Let" index="225" link="Letter to Govinda -- Calcutta 28 May, 1971" link_text="Letter to Govinda -- Calcutta 28 May, 1971">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Govinda -- Calcutta 28 May, 1971|Letter to Govinda -- Calcutta 28 May, 1971]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">From Bombay I may go to Russia (Moscow) and then to London and then N.Y. and then I will be coming to L.A. You will be glad to learn that we have purchased about five acres of land in Mayapur, the birthsite of Lord Caitanya and we have proposed to hold a nice festival there from Janmastami day for two weeks. At that time the foundation stone will be set down. I wish that all our leading disciples come to India at that time. There are 50 branches, so at least one from each branch should attend the function and Sai also may come at that time. From L.A. while coming to India I must come to Hawaii as I did last year and then after the foundation stone function I will come again back to U.S.A. The contemplation of sitting at Hawaii for my translating work is still alive. Now it depends on Krishna what I have to do in the future.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoKarandharaLondon5August1971_2" class="quote" parent="1971_Correspondence" book="Let" index="338" link="Letter to Karandhara -- London 5 August, 1971" link_text="Letter to Karandhara -- London 5 August, 1971">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Karandhara -- London 5 August, 1971|Letter to Karandhara -- London 5 August, 1971]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I am in due receipt of your letter dated 2nd August, 1971 and have noted the contents carefully. I am so glad to hear that you have brought the big Deities from San Francisco. You can install the Dieties according to the ceremonial functions you have already seen in Boston. Do it nicely with cleanliness, love and affection. That is required. I don't think I shall be able to return to L.A. by Janmastami day so I am authorizing you to do the function.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoTamalaKrsnaLondon20August1971_3" class="quote" parent="1971_Correspondence" book="Let" index="401" link="Letter to Tamala Krsna -- London 20 August, 1971" link_text="Letter to Tamala Krsna -- London 20 August, 1971">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Tamala Krsna -- London 20 August, 1971|Letter to Tamala Krsna -- London 20 August, 1971]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I beg to acknowledge receipt of your letter dated Janmastami day and have noted the contents carefully. Renovation means for old buildings donated to the society. Such buildings can be renovated from the building fund but not to maintain already purchased or rented buildings. That is to be done as individual expenditure of the temple concerned.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoKirtananandaLondon22August1971_4" class="quote" parent="1971_Correspondence" book="Let" index="406" link="Letter to Kirtanananda -- London 22 August, 1971" link_text="Letter to Kirtanananda -- London 22 August, 1971">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Kirtanananda -- London 22 August, 1971|Letter to Kirtanananda -- London 22 August, 1971]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I beg to acknowledge receipt of your letter dated 16th August, 1971 as well as your kind contribution of $100.00 check and I thank you very much for the same. I am so glad to hear how Janmastami and Vyasa Puja were celebrated so successfully there in New Vrindaban and devotees were coming from all the centers. We had a nice program here in London also and many outsiders were coming.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1972_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="7" parent="Correspondence" text="1972 Correspondence"><h3>1972 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoBibhuLosAngeles21May1972_0" class="quote" parent="1972_Correspondence" book="Let" index="267" link="Letter to Bibhu -- Los Angeles 21 May, 1972" link_text="Letter to Bibhu -- Los Angeles 21 May, 1972">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Bibhu -- Los Angeles 21 May, 1972|Letter to Bibhu -- Los Angeles 21 May, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I beg to acknowledge receipt of your letter dated May 18, 1972 and I have noted the contents carefully. I have considered coming to New Vrndavana and Pittsburgh for Janmastami and I think that I shall be able to come after all. I am going to London for Rathayatra this year but I think I can fly from London to Pittsburgh without any difficulty. So you can accept that engagement on September 8th and I shall be there. And the national TV show sounds very nice.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoRanadhiraLosAngeles21May1972_1" class="quote" parent="1972_Correspondence" book="Let" index="269" link="Letter to Ranadhira -- Los Angeles 21 May, 1972" link_text="Letter to Ranadhira -- Los Angeles 21 May, 1972">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Ranadhira -- Los Angeles 21 May, 1972|Letter to Ranadhira -- Los Angeles 21 May, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I have already written to Bibhu that I shall be very glad to attend your Janmastami at New Vrndavana and I shall also visit the Pittsburgh temple at that time. You may arrange the engagement on September 8th, that is all right. Prior to my coming to New Vrndavana and Pittsburgh I shall be in London and Paris, so I can fly directly from Paris to Pittsburgh. I am very much pleased that you have consented to give me the 50% of your profits on that night. But I will have no objection if you consider giving me 100%.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoGirirajaLosAngeles8June1972_2" class="quote" parent="1972_Correspondence" book="Let" index="305" link="Letter to Giriraja -- Los Angeles 8 June, 1972" link_text="Letter to Giriraja -- Los Angeles 8 June, 1972">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Giriraja -- Los Angeles 8 June, 1972|Letter to Giriraja -- Los Angeles 8 June, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">The deity program must be improved very gorgeously. Flower garlands should be expanded, and all expenditures for the deities must be expanded without any miserly contemplation. Our temple should be so gorgeously decorated that we shall excel all Bombay temples. This is my idea. Try to fulfill it. When they hear that we decorate our deities so gorgeously, people will throng, and on festival days especially, like Janmastami, Jhulana Yatra, etc. So four or five devotees should be always engaged in deity worship.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoSurasresthaLosAngeles14June1972_3" class="quote" parent="1972_Correspondence" book="Let" index="320" link="Letter to Surasrestha -- Los Angeles 14 June, 1972" link_text="Letter to Surasrestha -- Los Angeles 14 June, 1972">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Surasrestha -- Los Angeles 14 June, 1972|Letter to Surasrestha -- Los Angeles 14 June, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I am leaving for London on July the 4th and am returning to New Vrndavana for Janmastami celebration and at that time we can make further plans on my coming to Trinadad. In the meantime, continue to distribute this great message of Krsna Consciousness to all the people there and work hard to make the whole country into devotees. Hoping this will meet you in good health.</p>
<p>Your ever well wisher,</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoRupanugaLosAngeles1July1970_4" class="quote" parent="1972_Correspondence" book="Let" index="346" link="Letter to Rupanuga -- Los Angeles 1 July, 1970" link_text="Letter to Rupanuga -- Los Angeles 1 July, 1970">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Rupanuga -- Los Angeles 1 July, 1970|Letter to Rupanuga -- Los Angeles 1 July, 1970]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">In San Diego, I spoke at one such seminar on "Hinduism" which attracted many scholarly persons from all over the United States. So I am thinking that if we arrange similar seminar programs in the future, wherever I am speaking at the time, that will be a great success. So I am coming to New Vrindaban for the Janmastami celebration by end of August from Europe, so if you can arrange and advertise widely for such Bhagavata Dharma seminar or festival, I shall speak for minimum 7 days on the subject matter of Bhagavata Dharma. You may invite all the intelligent class of men, like students, professors, philosophers, scientists, educationists, like that, and they can pay some fee and we shall give them all facilities for living, and they shall attend our classes daily for some set period and take away immense benefit. I am enclosing the copy of one sample advertisement for the seminar in San Diego. Similarly, we can arrange such seminar at New Vrindaban. What do you think?</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoJagadisaLondon11August1972_5" class="quote" parent="1972_Correspondence" book="Let" index="436" link="Letter to Jagadisa -- London 11 August, 1972" link_text="Letter to Jagadisa -- London 11 August, 1972">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Jagadisa -- London 11 August, 1972|Letter to Jagadisa -- London 11 August, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I have received your letter dated August 7th, 1972, and noted the contents thereof. I shall be returning to Los Angeles in a few days from London, and I shall probably go to New Vrndavana for Janmastami as planned. I do not know if I will be able to come to Toronto after that, as I have been traveling all over the world over the past few months and it is a bit straining. Now I am thinking to sit down for a while in Los Angeles for translating work, but if I get opportunity I shall certainly come there as you have invited me.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoBatuGopalaLosAngeles22August1972_6" class="quote" parent="1972_Correspondence" book="Let" index="448" link="Letter to Batu Gopala -- Los Angeles 22 August, 1972" link_text="Letter to Batu Gopala -- Los Angeles 22 August, 1972">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Batu Gopala -- Los Angeles 22 August, 1972|Letter to Batu Gopala -- Los Angeles 22 August, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I beg to acknowledge receipt of your letter dated August 18, 1972 and I have noted the contents. So far the fire yajna is concerned, you can wait until Janmastami celebrations in New Vrindaban, and they can take part in that yajna. I am very much pleased to hear how nicely you are presenting Krishna consciousness through your radio program, and I think if you just carry on as you are it will be very successful.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoTamalaKrsnaNewVrindaban7September1972_7" class="quote" parent="1972_Correspondence" book="Let" index="475" link="Letter to Tamala Krsna -- New Vrindaban 7 September, 1972" link_text="Letter to Tamala Krsna -- New Vrindaban 7 September, 1972">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Tamala Krsna -- New Vrindaban 7 September, 1972|Letter to Tamala Krsna -- New Vrindaban 7 September, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Anyway, let us work very diligently for Krishna all over the world, and our advancement will depend on our sincerity. Here in New Vrindaban, the Janmastami Festival continually from September 1 is going on very gorgeously. There are more than 500 guests and they are listening to Bhagavat Discourses with rapt attention, chanting and dancing. Many respectable Indians are coming. One Dr. Srivastava, professor of statistics at Colorado University, is interested in developing this scheme. Sriman Kirtanananda Maharaja has arranged very nicely. Everything is very satisfactory. Similarly, every one of us in charge of some activity may execute his responsibility in good Krishna Consciousness, and certainly things will come.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoGurudasaYamunaBombay19December1972_8" class="quote" parent="1972_Correspondence" book="Let" index="623" link="Letter to Gurudasa, Yamuna -- Bombay 19 December, 1972" link_text="Letter to Gurudasa, Yamuna -- Bombay 19 December, 1972">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Gurudasa, Yamuna -- Bombay 19 December, 1972|Letter to Gurudasa, Yamuna -- Bombay 19 December, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">If you can finish the work by Janmastami next, that will be a very great credit for you, and I shall come there from any part of the world just to install the deity. But now you must work very, very hard to make good your promise to me, otherwise I shall be very disappointed and become very, very angry upon you. You may purchase deity from Mayapur-Vrindaban Trust Fund, about that I shall inform you later. One thing is, I have received report that Tejiyas is having difficulty in Delhi because no men are there to assist him. Delhi is the cultural capital of India, but we have not yet done very much to develop in Delhi.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoGurudasaYamunaBombay31December1972_9" class="quote" parent="1972_Correspondence" book="Let" index="654" link="Letter to Gurudasa, Yamuna -- Bombay 31 December, 1972" link_text="Letter to Gurudasa, Yamuna -- Bombay 31 December, 1972">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Gurudasa, Yamuna -- Bombay 31 December, 1972|Letter to Gurudasa, Yamuna -- Bombay 31 December, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Your letters of December 23, 1972, are in hand, along with the very nice photos of the Vrndaban work, as well as the balance sheet and account of materials and supplies. I am very very pleased to see the photos how the construction is progressing very rapidly under your expert supervision. It appears that at last something is being done solid work. Now you have promised me that it will be completed by Janmastami next, therefore I am completely relying upon you to fulfill your promise to me. Of course you will have to go quickly before the monsoon by June, but I think by that time there will be sufficient roof to keep everything dry from the rains. If you can construct nice temple in Vrndaban for me in this way, I shall be eternally grateful. Because we are world wide movement of Krsna, and if we do not have any nice place at Vrndaban, then what will be the use? Vrndaban is Krsna's land, and in future so many of our disciples will go there just to see, along with many tourists and other friends, so therefore we must have sufficient place for them. That will be our great contribution.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1973_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="8" parent="Correspondence" text="1973 Correspondence"><h3>1973 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoKirtananandaMayapur22June1973_0" class="quote" parent="1973_Correspondence" book="Let" index="218" link="Letter to Kirtanananda -- Mayapur 22 June, 1973" link_text="Letter to Kirtanananda -- Mayapur 22 June, 1973">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Kirtanananda -- Mayapur 22 June, 1973|Letter to Kirtanananda -- Mayapur 22 June, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Syamasundara came here and he also wants me to come to London for talking with some important men. I am thinking of going there by the first week of July but wondering what shall I do if some new symptom of my bad health threatens me in so many ways. But on the whole, if I go to London I think it will not be difficult for me to go to New Vrindaban. Sometimes by the 20th of August I could arrive because Janmastami will take place on the 21st. Just now I cannot promise taking consideration of my bad health. But if I at all go to London there is 90% chance of my going to New Vrindaban.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoKarandharaBhaktivedantaManor19July1973_1" class="quote" parent="1973_Correspondence" book="Let" index="236" link="Letter to Karandhara -- Bhaktivedanta Manor 19 July, 1973" link_text="Letter to Karandhara -- Bhaktivedanta Manor 19 July, 1973">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Karandhara -- Bhaktivedanta Manor 19 July, 1973|Letter to Karandhara -- Bhaktivedanta Manor 19 July, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Here at Bhaktivedanta Manor the place is the nicest possible. It is calm and quiet and the village is neat and clean. I am daily walking in the morning with all devotees and I am taking the usual class from 7-8 A.M. Very respectable gentlemen are coming in the evening. Last night George Harrison came. He has become a great supporter of our movement. He may spend more for expanding our activities. He told me smilingly yesterday, "I shall try to help you for expanding many temples." So arrangement is going on here for installing the deity on Janmastami: Many Indians are also coming and we are proposing to start a Gurukula here in London so that Indian children may be admitted. Indian gentlemen are perplexed because there is no institution to admit children to keep intact the Indian cult. So our idea of teaching sanskrit and English and our books they appreciate very much. If we start another Gurukula here I think it will be not an unprofitable activity.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoBalimardanaBhaktivedantaManorJuly201973_2" class="quote" parent="1973_Correspondence" book="Let" index="237" link="Letter to Bali-mardana -- Bhaktivedanta Manor July 20, 1973" link_text="Letter to Bali-mardana -- Bhaktivedanta Manor July 20, 1973">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Bali-mardana -- Bhaktivedanta Manor July 20, 1973|Letter to Bali-mardana -- Bhaktivedanta Manor July 20, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Now we are going to install nice Radha-Krsna Deities here in our new Letchmore Heath Temple on Janmastami Day, August 22nd 1973. The thing is there are no nice paintings immediately available for the Temple room here. So I want you to remove all of the paintings that are presently hanging in my rooms at Brooklyn Temple and dispatch them to Letchmore Heath or London immediately by air mail. The temple room is very large, I think about 70 feet by 30 feet, so many paintings are required to decorate it nicely. Therefore all of those paintings in my rooms are required and if you can send me besides additional of the newer paintings that will be your great contribution.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoTamalaKrsnaBhaktivedantaManor20July1973_3" class="quote" parent="1973_Correspondence" book="Let" index="240" link="Letter to Tamala Krsna -- Bhaktivedanta Manor 20 July, 1973" link_text="Letter to Tamala Krsna -- Bhaktivedanta Manor 20 July, 1973">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Tamala Krsna -- Bhaktivedanta Manor 20 July, 1973|Letter to Tamala Krsna -- Bhaktivedanta Manor 20 July, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">There will not be a GBC meeting in Janmastami, New Vrindaban. The important thing now for GBC members is that they go on working. It is not important to hold a meeting for passing resolutions etc. The best time and place is Mayapur on Lord Caitanya's Appearance Day. That is not only the best for me but for everyone. Mayapur is meant for that. If possible all devotees from all our centers should go for 8 days at that time. There is no need for the Janmastami meeting. Go on working and send me regular reports. Besides, I will not be going to New Vrindaban for Janmastami. They are having a deity installation here in London and they are making huge arrangements for many important men to attend this ceremony.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoKirtananandaBhaktivedantaManor27July1973_4" class="quote" parent="1973_Correspondence" book="Let" index="253" link="Letter to Kirtanananda -- Bhaktivedanta Manor 27 July, 1973" link_text="Letter to Kirtanananda -- Bhaktivedanta Manor 27 July, 1973">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Kirtanananda -- Bhaktivedanta Manor 27 July, 1973|Letter to Kirtanananda -- Bhaktivedanta Manor 27 July, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Regarding Janmastami. Why not continue your festival up to the end of the month as I have suggested. I will be finished here 22nd August. So on 23rd I can start for New Vrindaban.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoBalimardanaBhaktivedantaManorAugust81973_5" class="quote" parent="1973_Correspondence" book="Let" index="271" link="Letter to Bali-mardana -- Bhaktivedanta Manor August 8, 1973" link_text="Letter to Bali-mardana -- Bhaktivedanta Manor August 8, 1973">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Bali-mardana -- Bhaktivedanta Manor August 8, 1973|Letter to Bali-mardana -- Bhaktivedanta Manor August 8, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Has Mukunda done any business? If not then this business has no ready buyer and thus it has no prospect, that is my opinion. I understand that you are coming during the Janmastami Festival here at this place.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoShriKhilnaniNewDelhi29September1973_6" class="quote" parent="1973_Correspondence" book="Let" index="317" link="Letter to Shri Khilnani -- New Delhi 29 September, 1973" link_text="Letter to Shri Khilnani -- New Delhi 29 September, 1973">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Shri Khilnani -- New Delhi 29 September, 1973|Letter to Shri Khilnani -- New Delhi 29 September, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">At a meeting for Janmastami in London I was present, and the Indian High Commissioner His Excellency Shri Rasagotra came to our temple amongst many thousands of Indians and Englishmen. If required you can inquire from him how this movement is going on in the Western countries.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1974_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="9" parent="Correspondence" text="1974 Correspondence"><h3>1974 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoTejiyasLosAngeles2January1974_0" class="quote" parent="1974_Correspondence" book="Let" index="4" link="Letter to Tejiyas -- Los Angeles 2 January, 1974" link_text="Letter to Tejiyas -- Los Angeles 2 January, 1974">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Tejiyas -- Los Angeles 2 January, 1974|Letter to Tejiyas -- Los Angeles 2 January, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Regarding Vrndavana, I am glad you have already made a contribution. You can now make a full estimate of the ingredients needed for finishing the Vrndavana Temple by next Janmastami festival. The ingredients should be immediately acquired and whatever money is collected there in India that is all to the good and the balance I shall pay from here. I will come to India by the end of January so the money will be ready. You go ahead now and purchase the ingredients immediately. Do the needful in consultation with Guru das. In Bombay Mr. Birla has promised to help us. That money should be used for Vrndavana. The balance will come from the U.S.A. This way we must finish Vrndavana and open the Temple by Janmastami 1974 so please make arrangements like that.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoGurudasaLosAngeles4January1974_1" class="quote" parent="1974_Correspondence" book="Let" index="8" link="Letter to Gurudasa -- Los Angeles 4 January, 1974" link_text="Letter to Gurudasa -- Los Angeles 4 January, 1974">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Gurudasa -- Los Angeles 4 January, 1974|Letter to Gurudasa -- Los Angeles 4 January, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I am coming soon to see that the Vrindaban construction is finished by Janmastami. I will take care of the necessary funds. In the meantime, do the needful now to purchase all the materials.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoTejiyasLosAngeles6January1974_2" class="quote" parent="1974_Correspondence" book="Let" index="13" link="Letter to Tejiyas -- Los Angeles 6 January, 1974" link_text="Letter to Tejiyas -- Los Angeles 6 January, 1974">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Tejiyas -- Los Angeles 6 January, 1974|Letter to Tejiyas -- Los Angeles 6 January, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">As informed to you in my letter last, I beg to inform you further that I plan to send to India $100,000 for completing our Vrndavana scheme as soon as possible, before Janmastami ceremony. Out of this $100,000 our two sannyasis, Gurukrpa Maharaja and Yasodanandana Maharaja have collected $40,000 and the balance Karandhara will arrange to supply even by taking a loan from the bank. The idea is we must finish Vrndavana temple construction work on or before Janmastami ceremony. There is another three lacs promised by Asoka Birla of Bombay.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoJagadisaLosAngeles8January1974_3" class="quote" parent="1974_Correspondence" book="Let" index="18" link="Letter to Jagadisa -- Los Angeles 8 January, 1974" link_text="Letter to Jagadisa -- Los Angeles 8 January, 1974">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Jagadisa -- Los Angeles 8 January, 1974|Letter to Jagadisa -- Los Angeles 8 January, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">My present itinerary is to leave for Hawaii on January 14 and then reach New Delhi, India by the first week in February. I am very concerned that our temple in Vrindaban be completely constructed by Janmastami next, and I am going to personally see to the progress of that project. I hope to see you in Mayapur for the celebration of the Appearance Day of Lord Caitanya when all GBC shall sit down and chalk out the next years program. Hope this finds you in good health.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoGurudasaLosAngeles9January1974_4" class="quote" parent="1974_Correspondence" book="Let" index="20" link="Letter to Gurudasa -- Los Angeles 9 January, 1974" link_text="Letter to Gurudasa -- Los Angeles 9 January, 1974">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Gurudasa -- Los Angeles 9 January, 1974|Letter to Gurudasa -- Los Angeles 9 January, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Temple construction must be finished by or before Janmastami. If you can finish my portion on or before my reaching India then I can personally go to Vrindaban and see what is the situation and how to manage. I can remain at Vrindaban through the month of February to estimate and supervise temple construction and then by the 1st of March I may go to Mayapur.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoTamalaKrsnaLosAngeles11January1974_5" class="quote" parent="1974_Correspondence" book="Let" index="24" link="Letter to Tamala Krsna -- Los Angeles 11 January, 1974" link_text="Letter to Tamala Krsna -- Los Angeles 11 January, 1974">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Tamala Krsna -- Los Angeles 11 January, 1974|Letter to Tamala Krsna -- Los Angeles 11 January, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">The completion of Vrindaban temple by Janmastami is my whole hearted desire. Please do it by all means. The 3 lacs from Ashok Birla plus the $100,000 from here will I think be sufficient to finish the temple. It will please me very much to see it completed timely.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoBhagavanBombay6April1974_6" class="quote" parent="1974_Correspondence" book="Let" index="116" link="Letter to Bhagavan -- Bombay 6 April, 1974" link_text="Letter to Bhagavan -- Bombay 6 April, 1974">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Bhagavan -- Bombay 6 April, 1974|Letter to Bhagavan -- Bombay 6 April, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I will be glad to come to Paris on your invitation for the second week of May. I will also be able to visit Geneva, Sweden and Rome if you will arrange programs for me. As you know, I must return to India for the Janmastami celebration in August. So if I fly from India to Paris and arrive the second week of May, then I may stay no more than 4 or 5 days each in Paris, Geneva, Stockholm and Rome, and then go to Germany and stop at three or four centers there also. Then in late June I may go to Australia. Satsvarupa can write you further concerning the fixing up of visas, arrival dates etc.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoBalimardanaBombay13April1974_7" class="quote" parent="1974_Correspondence" book="Let" index="134" link="Letter to Bali-mardana -- Bombay 13 April, 1974" link_text="Letter to Bali-mardana -- Bombay 13 April, 1974">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Bali-mardana -- Bombay 13 April, 1974|Letter to Bali-mardana -- Bombay 13 April, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">As for my own activities as you have requested, my schedule is: leave for Hyderabad April 18; after one week in Hyderabad I will travel one week in southern India; by middle of May I will leave India for Paris, and will travel 4 or 5 days in each place to Geneva, Rome, Sweden, then 3 or 4 cities in Germany. Then I may go to Rathayatra in Australia and back to India by Janmastami. After that I will go to England and then the U.S.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoHaribasaraHyderabad20April1974_8" class="quote" parent="1974_Correspondence" book="Let" index="143" link="Letter to Hari basara -- Hyderabad 20 April, 1974" link_text="Letter to Hari basara -- Hyderabad 20 April, 1974">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Hari basara -- Hyderabad 20 April, 1974|Letter to Hari basara -- Hyderabad 20 April, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">According to your letter you suggest I come and speak in the middle of August. But in order to insure good attendance at the event in order to sell the tickets and make profit you think it best if I appear with a popular music group. These arrangements make us too dependent on other parties. We should not be dependent on others but should present our own program. Since there are so many conditions and risks involved, better you yourselves do as much as possible to spread Krsna Consciousness there by distribution of literature, kirtana and prasadam, and that will be as effective as my personally coming. Besides, I must be in Vrindaban for Janmastami so my schedule makes it difficult for me to be in Spokane, Washington.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoHamsadutaBombay15May1974_9" class="quote" parent="1974_Correspondence" book="Let" index="202" link="Letter to Hamsaduta -- Bombay 15 May, 1974" link_text="Letter to Hamsaduta -- Bombay 15 May, 1974">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Hamsaduta -- Bombay 15 May, 1974|Letter to Hamsaduta -- Bombay 15 May, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">That means I will not visit London on this tour. After San Francisco, I will travel to visit Australia, stopping at Hawaii. And after Australia I will return to India in time for the Janmastami celebration which is on August 9th. After the celebrations in Vrindaban, I will be free to visit England and the U.S. So these are my elaborate travel plans, and we shall see what Krsna desires.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoSriPannalaljiBombay16May1974_10" class="quote" parent="1974_Correspondence" book="Let" index="204" link="Letter to Sri Pannalalji -- Bombay 16 May, 1974" link_text="Letter to Sri Pannalalji -- Bombay 16 May, 1974">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Sri Pannalalji -- Bombay 16 May, 1974|Letter to Sri Pannalalji -- Bombay 16 May, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I am going the day after tomorrow to Vrndaban, and from there I shall go to foreign countries, Rome, Geneva, etc. I am coming back before Vrindaban will celebrate Janmastami and I invite you cordially to our opening ceremony. When I go to the USA I shall try to send you Articles of our Society, but we have different memorandum in different countries, they are not one and the same.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoJayaHariFrankfurt17June1974_11" class="quote" parent="1974_Correspondence" book="Let" index="249" link="Letter to Jaya Hari -- Frankfurt 17 June, 1974" link_text="Letter to Jaya Hari -- Frankfurt 17 June, 1974">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Jaya Hari -- Frankfurt 17 June, 1974|Letter to Jaya Hari -- Frankfurt 17 June, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I am presently travelling through Europe and in the past weeks have held many programs in Rome, Geneva, Paris and now Germany. I, therefore, have no time to carefully study and decide on your proposals. The best thing is if you can come and meet with me personally after I have finished this present tour. I am planning to go to Vrindaban for Janmastami, for the opening installation ceremonies of our Krsna Balarama Temple. If you can come to see me in Vrindaban I would be glad to discuss and plan with you what is best for your devotional service engagement.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoGurudasaMelbourne1July1974_12" class="quote" parent="1974_Correspondence" book="Let" index="260" link="Letter to Gurudasa -- Melbourne 1 July, 1974" link_text="Letter to Gurudasa -- Melbourne 1 July, 1974">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Gurudasa -- Melbourne 1 July, 1974|Letter to Gurudasa -- Melbourne 1 July, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I am spending my last two days in Australia and after this I shall go to the U.S.A. In the meantime, I wish to give you some instructions regarding our Janmastami installation in Vrindaban. The main thing is the ceremony shall be conducted by our own men. We do not have to be dependent on taking help from persons who will not even eat with us, thinking us inferior. All over the world, in Paris, New York, Australia etc., our men and women are worshiping the deity very nicely and I am very proud of their worship. There is no reason why we have to think we are dependent on any Indian goswami in order to conduct our ceremony in Vrindaban. So you understand this and be convinced of it, and let them come as invited but we shall conduct the affair ourselves.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoCyavanaMelbourne3July1974_13" class="quote" parent="1974_Correspondence" book="Let" index="261" link="Letter to Cyavana -- Melbourne 3 July, 1974" link_text="Letter to Cyavana -- Melbourne 3 July, 1974">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Cyavana -- Melbourne 3 July, 1974|Letter to Cyavana -- Melbourne 3 July, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I am relieved to know your whereabouts again after not hearing from you for some time. You want to see me and I also have some important things to discuss with you, so the best thing is if we meet at the end of July in Vrindaban, India. Today I am leaving for the United States to attend Rathayatra in Chicago and San Francisco but at the end of July I will reach Vrindaban. We are having a very big festival there on Janmastami when we will open our Krsna Balarama temple by installing the deities. So you must also attend to help in conducting the ceremonies. I will therefore see you in Vrindaban by the end of July. If you wish to correspond with me before then you can write to the Los Angeles address.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoMadhavanandaVrindaban6August1974_14" class="quote" parent="1974_Correspondence" book="Let" index="298" link="Letter to Madhavananda -- Vrindaban 6 August, 1974" link_text="Letter to Madhavananda -- Vrindaban 6 August, 1974">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Madhavananda -- Vrindaban 6 August, 1974|Letter to Madhavananda -- Vrindaban 6 August, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I beg to acknowledge receipt of your letter dated August 3, 1974 and also the juicer. Regarding the meeting you propose, you may arrange it, and I shall come. For Janmastami I am already engaged here, but your proposed meeting is very encouraging. So when you expect me, let me know, and I shall make my program. The Indians there have been cheated by so many rascal swamis who have come simply to collect money and then leave. So our work will be done locally.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoGirirajaVrindaban8August1974_15" class="quote" parent="1974_Correspondence" book="Let" index="302" link="Letter to Giriraja -- Vrindaban 8 August, 1974" link_text="Letter to Giriraja -- Vrindaban 8 August, 1974">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Giriraja -- Vrindaban 8 August, 1974|Letter to Giriraja -- Vrindaban 8 August, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I beg to acknowledge receipt of your letter dated August 7, 1974 hand delivered by Panca Dravida Swami. Regarding the installation ceremony here at Vrindaban, it will be done before next Janmastami, and if the cement can be obtained, it will be done after three months. It is good that you have almost completed the new cement godown and the cowshed. I am very glad that people have offered to donate cows. Regarding your Janmastami program expectation of 10,000 people, it is very good. Thank you very much. I am very much pleased what you are doing. Give the people nice prasadam. This is what is temple—life. Chanting, dancing, prasadam, this is what I want.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoGirirajaVrindaban16August1974_16" class="quote" parent="1974_Correspondence" book="Let" index="320" link="Letter to Giriraja -- Vrindaban 16 August, 1974" link_text="Letter to Giriraja -- Vrindaban 16 August, 1974">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Giriraja -- Vrindaban 16 August, 1974|Letter to Giriraja -- Vrindaban 16 August, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I beg to acknowledge receipt of your letter dated August 14, 1974 and have noted the contents. I was very glad to learn that you had such a nice Janmastami celebration and that even our Mr. Setti was dancing during the kirtana. Actually it is due only to him that the plans for the residence quarters were approved by the Municipality. I have today received in the mail a receipt from the Municipality for the amount of Rs. 4,230/- as fees for cultural center.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoMadhavanandaVrindaban16August1974_17" class="quote" parent="1974_Correspondence" book="Let" index="322" link="Letter to Madhavananda -- Vrindaban 16 August, 1974" link_text="Letter to Madhavananda -- Vrindaban 16 August, 1974">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Madhavananda -- Vrindaban 16 August, 1974|Letter to Madhavananda -- Vrindaban 16 August, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I am in due receipt of your telegram dated August 14, 1974 and am very glad to learn that you had a very successful Janmastami celebration. This is Krishna's special mercy upon you. I think our next big upcoming project will be in London. You are a fortunate boy, both you and your wife. Wherever you go, you are successful in your devotional service. So I am looking forward to ever-growing success there in London. The Indians there are now coming to realize that they have been simply cheated by all the rascal swamis and yogis. So you must be sincere, always strictly following the principles and work with determination and patience. The secret of success in spiritual life is to please your spiritual master. Then, and only then can you be sure that Krsna is pleased.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoAtreyaRsiVrindaban19August1974_18" class="quote" parent="1974_Correspondence" book="Let" index="332" link="Letter to Atreya Rsi -- Vrindaban 19 August, 1974" link_text="Letter to Atreya Rsi -- Vrindaban 19 August, 1974">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Atreya Rsi -- Vrindaban 19 August, 1974|Letter to Atreya Rsi -- Vrindaban 19 August, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I beg to acknowledge receipt of your letter dated July 28th 1974. I am glad to note that you had nice Rathayatra festival for the Indian community there. I am especially pleased to note that for Vyasa Puja and Janmastami you have so many Iranian devotees there. This is your real success if you can convince the local men to become Krishna Conscious. This is preaching. You know that I went to your country America alone. None of my godbrothers helped me. But, I was able to convince you to become Krishna Conscious. Now you can convince others. This is Krishna Consciousness.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoSriBadrukaVrindaban20August1974_19" class="quote" parent="1974_Correspondence" book="Let" index="343" link="Letter to Sri Badruka -- Vrindaban 20 August, 1974" link_text="Letter to Sri Badruka -- Vrindaban 20 August, 1974">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Sri Badruka -- Vrindaban 20 August, 1974|Letter to Sri Badruka -- Vrindaban 20 August, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">If the temple is completed by next Janmastami, I will be pleased to come to inaugurate the opening.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoMrRameshchandraLalidjiVrindaban20August1974_20" class="quote" parent="1974_Correspondence" book="Let" index="351" link="Letter to Mr. Rameshchandra Lalidji -- Vrindaban 20 August, 1974" link_text="Letter to Mr. Rameshchandra Lalidji -- Vrindaban 20 August, 1974">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Mr. Rameshchandra Lalidji -- Vrindaban 20 August, 1974|Letter to Mr. Rameshchandra Lalidji -- Vrindaban 20 August, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I am pleased that the work is proceeding now at good speed and request that you assist in completing the temple by next Janmastami, and I will come to inaugurate the opening ceremony.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoRamesvaraMayapur1October1974_21" class="quote" parent="1974_Correspondence" book="Let" index="448" link="Letter to Ramesvara -- Mayapur 1 October, 1974" link_text="Letter to Ramesvara -- Mayapur 1 October, 1974">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Ramesvara -- Mayapur 1 October, 1974|Letter to Ramesvara -- Mayapur 1 October, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Regarding the Dollars 10,000 already sent, Rs. 55,000/- is now in Calcutta and they are planning to purchase the grains necessary. The balance of the money was spent on the Vrindaban Janmastami Festival as a loan, of which Rs. 10,000 has been repaid. Bhagavan Prabhu has more complete details on how this was done.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1975_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="10" parent="Correspondence" text="1975 Correspondence"><h3>1975 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoMadhavaMaharajaBombay14January1975_0" class="quote" parent="1975_Correspondence" book="Let" index="49" link="Letter to Madhava Maharaja -- Bombay 14 January, 1975" link_text="Letter to Madhava Maharaja -- Bombay 14 January, 1975">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Madhava Maharaja -- Bombay 14 January, 1975|Letter to Madhava Maharaja -- Bombay 14 January, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">By the by, I beg to inform you that I have arranged for the opening of the temple in Vrndavana on Sri Ram Navami day by the 20th of April, 1975. Perhaps you know it that the ceremony was to take place on last Janmastami, but as the temple was not finished at that time, it could not be. Therefore, it was postponed. I wish to know whether your Holiness will kindly participate in this ceremony during that time to install the deity properly according to the Hari-bhakti-Vilasa regulations.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoSridharaMaharajaBombay15January1975_1" class="quote" parent="1975_Correspondence" book="Let" index="51" link="Letter to Sridhara Maharaja -- Bombay 15 January, 1975" link_text="Letter to Sridhara Maharaja -- Bombay 15 January, 1975">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Sridhara Maharaja -- Bombay 15 January, 1975|Letter to Sridhara Maharaja -- Bombay 15 January, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I beg to inform you that I have arranged for the opening of the temple in Vrndavana on Sri Ram Navami day by the 20th of April 1975. Perhaps you know it that the ceremony was to take place on last Janmastami, but as the temple was not finished at that time, it could not be. Therefore, it was postponed. I wish to know whether your Holiness will kindly participate in this ceremony during that time to install the deity properly according to the Hari-bhakti-Vilasa regulations.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoMahamsaPerthAustralia10May1975_2" class="quote" parent="1975_Correspondence" book="Let" index="235" link="Letter to Mahamsa -- Perth, Australia 10 May, 1975" link_text="Letter to Mahamsa -- Perth, Australia 10 May, 1975">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Mahamsa -- Perth, Australia 10 May, 1975|Letter to Mahamsa -- Perth, Australia 10 May, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Regarding the money, rs. 30,000, of course, if need be, it must be paid, but one thing is that you must be very careful that our temple portion must be completed by Janmastami so that the Deity can be moved there. This is very important that the temple portion be completed by Janmastami. Whatever money was available, I have given 1-1/2 lakhs to Jayapataka Swami and 2 lakhs to Giriraja. So, you have to take this money from Giriraja. Please arrange like that and let me know what is the progress of Hyderabad activities at my Honolulu address: 51 Coelho Way, Honolulu, Hawaii, USA.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoTejiyasPerthAustralia12May1975_3" class="quote" parent="1975_Correspondence" book="Let" index="250" link="Letter to Tejiyas -- Perth, Australia 12 May, 1975" link_text="Letter to Tejiyas -- Perth, Australia 12 May, 1975">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Tejiyas -- Perth, Australia 12 May, 1975|Letter to Tejiyas -- Perth, Australia 12 May, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Also keep in constant contact with that Oriya Minister of Defense. I forget his name. Try to get some acres of land near the Buddha Jayanti Park. I wish to develop a Janmastami Park there and invite all the residents of New Delhi there to observe a grand festival on Janmastami day. I wish to construct a grand temple of Krishna Balarama and keep many cows in this park. The residents of New Delhi will be very much encouraged to visit this park. That is my ambition. Both the Deputy Minister of Defense (the Oriya Minister) as well as Mr. Agarwal can give us substantial help in this progress.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoKirtananandaHonolulu9June1975_4" class="quote" parent="1975_Correspondence" book="Let" index="314" link="Letter to Kirtanananda -- Honolulu 9 June, 1975" link_text="Letter to Kirtanananda -- Honolulu 9 June, 1975">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Kirtanananda -- Honolulu 9 June, 1975|Letter to Kirtanananda -- Honolulu 9 June, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I am in due receipt of your letter dated June 6, 1975 and have noted the contents. Your report is very nice. It is wonderful to hear that you are distributing 1000 magazines and collecting $1,000 daily. Now, you have plenty of money, milk, fruits, flowers, grains, everything, and you are living in the jungle. What more could you want? I may be coming there immediately after the Philadelphia Rathayatra, and I shall stay until after Janmastami.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoSusanNewmanBerkeley18July1975_5" class="quote" parent="1975_Correspondence" book="Let" index="417" link="Letter to Susan Newman -- Berkeley 18 July, 1975" link_text="Letter to Susan Newman -- Berkeley 18 July, 1975">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Susan Newman -- Berkeley 18 July, 1975|Letter to Susan Newman -- Berkeley 18 July, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Chant Hare Krishna and read our books very carefully. I am going to New Vrindaban at Janmastami, so you can come there for the celebrations.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoHamsadutaDallas29July1975_6" class="quote" parent="1975_Correspondence" book="Let" index="438" link="Letter to Hamsaduta -- Dallas 29 July, 1975" link_text="Letter to Hamsaduta -- Dallas 29 July, 1975">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Hamsaduta -- Dallas 29 July, 1975|Letter to Hamsaduta -- Dallas 29 July, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Regarding my coming to London, yes I will come immediately after Janmastami and Vyasa Puja from New Vrindaban. So it will be in the very beginning of September.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoDrYGNaikToronto7August1975_7" class="quote" parent="1975_Correspondence" book="Let" index="453" link="Letter to Dr. Y. G. Naik -- Toronto 7 August, 1975" link_text="Letter to Dr. Y. G. Naik -- Toronto 7 August, 1975">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Dr. Y. G. Naik -- Toronto 7 August, 1975|Letter to Dr. Y. G. Naik -- Toronto 7 August, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">We have already organized the Ratha Yatra ceremony, and we hold a great Love Feast festival every Sunday in everyone of our branches. Now I advised to organize more festivals during Janmastami, Lord Ramacandra's Appearance Day, and Gaura Purnima, the Appearance of Lord Caitanya Mahaprabhu.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoGirirajaVrindaban26August1975_8" class="quote" parent="1975_Correspondence" book="Let" index="479" link="Letter to Giriraja -- Vrindaban 26 August, 1975" link_text="Letter to Giriraja -- Vrindaban 26 August, 1975">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Giriraja -- Vrindaban 26 August, 1975|Letter to Giriraja -- Vrindaban 26 August, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I am enclosing a copy of the latest "Back to Godhead", and I am requesting that in your Janmastami Festival meeting you read the article under "ISKCON NEWS" about the Ratha Yatra Festival. The point is that in the foreign countries they are accepting this a bona fide religion and making holidays and our Ratha Yatra is regularly established. But, in our own country they are giving so many hindrances. Anyway, after all we have got the permission. I am also sending you a copy of the corrspondence with Raj Kapoor. This should also be discussed in your meeting how prominent people are giving us respect, why are others making false propaganda? This correspondence can be published by you along with his photograph. I think you have one publication of Member Lists. It can go in there.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoSriRajKapoorVrindaban26August1975_9" class="quote" parent="1975_Correspondence" book="Let" index="480" link="Letter to Sri Raj Kapoor -- Vrindaban 26 August, 1975" link_text="Letter to Sri Raj Kapoor -- Vrindaban 26 August, 1975">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Sri Raj Kapoor -- Vrindaban 26 August, 1975|Letter to Sri Raj Kapoor -- Vrindaban 26 August, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Please visit our Hare Krishna Land Juhu for Janmastami and Vyasa Puja Day on the 30th instant. I think the Mayor of Bombay will preside over the meeting.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoBonMaharajaVrindaban28August1975_10" class="quote" parent="1975_Correspondence" book="Let" index="483" link="Letter to Bon Maharaja -- Vrindaban 28 August, 1975" link_text="Letter to Bon Maharaja -- Vrindaban 28 August, 1975">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Bon Maharaja -- Vrindaban 28 August, 1975|Letter to Bon Maharaja -- Vrindaban 28 August, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Your letter dated August 7, 1975 addressed to my Los Angeles address is just now received having been redirected from there. Please take our invitation card for the Janmastami and Vyasa Puja Day. Kindly attend if possible because I understand that you are sick. The other day Sripada Brahmananda Swami and Sriman Gopala Krishna das Adhikari and Sriman Dhananjaya das Adhikari went to see you, but they were not allowed to disturb you on account of your sickness.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoBonMaharajaVrindaban28August1975_11" class="quote" parent="1975_Correspondence" book="Let" index="483" link="Letter to Bon Maharaja -- Vrindaban 28 August, 1975" link_text="Letter to Bon Maharaja -- Vrindaban 28 August, 1975">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Bon Maharaja -- Vrindaban 28 August, 1975|Letter to Bon Maharaja -- Vrindaban 28 August, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">The other day while taking my morning walk from the backside of your land I reached on the main road. So much land is still vacant without any utility. If you can spare all these lands on lease terms we can immediately use them properly. Now when you lease out the lands for some income, I don't think there is any objection by the Trustees. So if you come on Janmastami or Vyasa Puja Day we can talk on this matter, or if you are sick, if you give me some appointment I can go and see you.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoAcaryaPrabhakarMishraVrindaban28August1975_12" class="quote" parent="1975_Correspondence" book="Let" index="484" link="Letter to Acarya Prabhakar Mishra -- Vrindaban 28 August, 1975" link_text="Letter to Acarya Prabhakar Mishra -- Vrindaban 28 August, 1975">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Acarya Prabhakar Mishra -- Vrindaban 28 August, 1975|Letter to Acarya Prabhakar Mishra -- Vrindaban 28 August, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Please accept my blessings. I am in due receipt of your letter dated August 6, 1975 addressed to my Los Angeles address and redirected from there just now. I am enclosing herewith one invitation card to our Janmastami and Vyasa Puja Day celebration. So if you come we can discuss further the points.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoBhaktiBallabhTirthaVrindaban2September1975_13" class="quote" parent="1975_Correspondence" book="Let" index="496" link="Letter to Bhakti Ballabh Tirtha -- Vrindaban 2 September, 1975" link_text="Letter to Bhakti Ballabh Tirtha -- Vrindaban 2 September, 1975">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Bhakti Ballabh Tirtha -- Vrindaban 2 September, 1975|Letter to Bhakti Ballabh Tirtha -- Vrindaban 2 September, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I am in due receipt of your invitation card for the Annual Sri Krishna Janmastami Celebration and I thank you very much for it. I am here in Vrindaban where we are holding our Janmastami and Vyasa Puja ceremony at our Krishna Balarama Mandir.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoHamsadutaVrindaban9September1975_14" class="quote" parent="1975_Correspondence" book="Let" index="525" link="Letter to Hamsaduta -- Vrindaban 9 September, 1975" link_text="Letter to Hamsaduta -- Vrindaban 9 September, 1975">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Hamsaduta -- Vrindaban 9 September, 1975|Letter to Hamsaduta -- Vrindaban 9 September, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">This time that there were 10,000 Indians for Janmastami is very encouraging. Yes, they are good supporters. Yes, I approve of your program. We work where there is a good field. Do it nicely. You have noted that is the secret of success. Please continue this policy of straight forward dealings. Regarding Bury Place yes, for raising money to purchase there will be no difficulty. Try to keep our temple there. Purchase it and then repair it nicely and it will be a permanent establishment. We are staying there for the last two years. How we can be moved from there? You can hold the day after Diwali the Anakut Govardhana ceremony. There should be heaps of prasadam.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoHamsadutaVrindaban9September1975_15" class="quote" parent="1975_Correspondence" book="Let" index="525" link="Letter to Hamsaduta -- Vrindaban 9 September, 1975" link_text="Letter to Hamsaduta -- Vrindaban 9 September, 1975">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Hamsaduta -- Vrindaban 9 September, 1975|Letter to Hamsaduta -- Vrindaban 9 September, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">The clipping on the Janmastami day mentions specifically that the Manor was purchased by George for us. Keep this article for future if there is some trouble. Actually he purchased for this purpose. Encourage Alanatha in his publishing, and also in German language publish as many books as possible. Enclosed are letters about Hyderabad.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoGirirajaVrindaban15September1975_16" class="quote" parent="1975_Correspondence" book="Let" index="538" link="Letter to Giriraja -- Vrindaban 15 September, 1975" link_text="Letter to Giriraja -- Vrindaban 15 September, 1975">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Giriraja -- Vrindaban 15 September, 1975|Letter to Giriraja -- Vrindaban 15 September, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I am glad that you had a nice Janmastami celebration in Bombay. Continue your dilligent work, and Krishna will give you all success.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1976_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="11" parent="Correspondence" text="1976 Correspondence"><h3>1976 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoBhagavanLosAngeles4June1976_0" class="quote" parent="1976_Correspondence" book="Let" index="319" link="Letter to Bhagavan -- Los Angeles 4 June, 1976" link_text="Letter to Bhagavan -- Los Angeles 4 June, 1976">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Bhagavan -- Los Angeles 4 June, 1976|Letter to Bhagavan -- Los Angeles 4 June, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Your plan to compose the French books in Los Angeles is approved by me. The composition arrangements are very good here. They should always busy composing books. The article from the French-Soir I have given to Ramesvara Maharaja for possible use in connection with Back to Godhead magazine. Try to introduce Rathayatra and Janmastami, at least 4-5 ceremonies and festivals annually. I recall how in the London newspaper, The Guardian, that when our Rathayatra ceremony was taking place in Trafalgar Square, they commented that Rathayatra was rivalling to Nelson, as there is a statue of Lord Nelson in Trafalgar Square. So in this way they thought that if Rathayatra goes on, Nelson will be killed.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoGBCSecretariesToronto18June1976_1" class="quote" parent="1976_Correspondence" book="Let" index="352" link="Letter to GBC Secretaries -- Toronto 18 June, 1976" link_text="Letter to GBC Secretaries -- Toronto 18 June, 1976">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to GBC Secretaries -- Toronto 18 June, 1976|Letter to GBC Secretaries -- Toronto 18 June, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I have received messages that Mahamsa Swami requires 2 more lacs to complete the Hyderabad construction by Janmastami, 1976. Already I have given about 5 lacs of Rupees, and I believe that Hamsaduta Maharaja hs also given a sum of money towards Hyderabad construction. So the total amount of the Hyderabad construction was estimated at about 10 lacs, and if I give this 2 lacs then I have given 7 lacs towards the construction so what is the collection in Hyderabad? It is not good that they are always asking me for money. The money is coming from the BBT in Bombay and it will have to be paid back in due course of time.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoGBCSecretariesToronto18June1976_2" class="quote" parent="1976_Correspondence" book="Let" index="352" link="Letter to GBC Secretaries -- Toronto 18 June, 1976" link_text="Letter to GBC Secretaries -- Toronto 18 June, 1976">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to GBC Secretaries -- Toronto 18 June, 1976|Letter to GBC Secretaries -- Toronto 18 June, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So I am sending advice to Bank of America to transfer 2 lacs of Rupees to the Bombay construction account at the State Bank of Hyderabad, Juhu Beach Branch, Bombay, and I want that the 3 GBC secretaries for India should discuss together whether or not to give this 2 lacs to Hyderabad centre for completing their construction. If you think that Mahamsa Maharaja will be able to repay the BBT this money then you can go ahead and give the money to Hyderabad. Otherwise, there is no rush to open the Hyderabad temple by Janmastami, 1976, it can be postponed until a later date when the Hyderabad temple can be completed by collections in South India. So if you are confident that he will pay back the BBT then it is alright, otherwise you can use the 2 lacs for Bombay construction and the Hyderabad temple can be finished with local collections.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoGopalaKrsnaNewYork11July1976_3" class="quote" parent="1976_Correspondence" book="Let" index="394" link="Letter to Gopala Krsna -- New York 11 July, 1976" link_text="Letter to Gopala Krsna -- New York 11 July, 1976">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Gopala Krsna -- New York 11 July, 1976|Letter to Gopala Krsna -- New York 11 July, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">The Rs. 11-membership is imagination. What is that membership card? And how will you regularly collect such a small sum from the members? It will engage so much money just to collect this. In any case, this is to be discussed with the GBC. Don't discuss anything new haphazardly. I have no experience of the idea. So far I know, retail business is not good in comparison to wholesale business. The Hyderabad Deity is already installed. Simply they are moving Them to their new temple. The installation ceremony (bathing ceremony) can be at noon. Then again there can be the regular Janmastami function at midnight. Concerning my going to Madras, Delhi, etc. there is first priority engagement contemplated with Mr. Bajaj's group in Poona. Giriraja can consult with Mr. Bajaj and get date fixed up then you can make the program. I have no objection however to the pandal in Madras.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoBrahmanandaNewDelhi26August1976_4" class="quote" parent="1976_Correspondence" book="Let" index="466" link="Letter to Brahmananda -- New Delhi 26 August, 1976" link_text="Letter to Brahmananda -- New Delhi 26 August, 1976">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Brahmananda -- New Delhi 26 August, 1976|Letter to Brahmananda -- New Delhi 26 August, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I am in due receipt of your Janmastami 1976 invitation sheet, but there is no mention of the Vyasa Puja ceremony. Generally in our centers they issue Janmastami invitations along with Vyasa Puja invitations.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoNavayogendraNewDelhi31August1976_5" class="quote" parent="1976_Correspondence" book="Let" index="474" link="Letter to Navayogendra -- New Delhi 31 August, 1976" link_text="Letter to Navayogendra -- New Delhi 31 August, 1976">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Navayogendra -- New Delhi 31 August, 1976|Letter to Navayogendra -- New Delhi 31 August, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I am in due receipt of your Vyasa Puja and Janmastami cards and I thank you very much for them. Please continue to render very nice service and certainly Krishna will be pleased upon you.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoSriRadhaKrishnaDhawanVrindaban6September1976_6" class="quote" parent="1976_Correspondence" book="Let" index="480" link="Letter to Sri Radha Krishna Dhawan -- Vrindaban 6 September, 1976" link_text="Letter to Sri Radha Krishna Dhawan -- Vrindaban 6 September, 1976">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Sri Radha Krishna Dhawan -- Vrindaban 6 September, 1976|Letter to Sri Radha Krishna Dhawan -- Vrindaban 6 September, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">The Hyderabad temple has been completed on Janmastami August 18, and the temple is called the Sri Sri Radha Madana Mohana Mandir. You can come and see me here in Vrndavana if you like, or perhaps we will come to Chandigarh by the first week in October for programs there.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoGirirajaVrindaban6November1976_7" class="quote" parent="1976_Correspondence" book="Let" index="624" link="Letter to Giriraja -- Vrindaban 6 November, 1976" link_text="Letter to Giriraja -- Vrindaban 6 November, 1976">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Giriraja -- Vrindaban 6 November, 1976|Letter to Giriraja -- Vrindaban 6 November, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">t is good that our friends are coming forward to help in Bombay. Let them present a statement that it is a genuine movement. All Indians are interested in spreading this movement. Krsna is accepted as the Supreme Lord by all Indians. His birthday ceremony, Janmastami, is observed by all Indians. In Bombay there is an embassy branch. Our Bombay friends should go there to express their protest.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1977_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="12" parent="Correspondence" text="1977 Correspondence"><h3>1977 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoRamesvaraBombay2April1977_0" class="quote" parent="1977_Correspondence" book="Let" index="81" link="Letter to Ramesvara -- Bombay 2 April, 1977" link_text="Letter to Ramesvara -- Bombay 2 April, 1977">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Ramesvara -- Bombay 2 April, 1977|Letter to Ramesvara -- Bombay 2 April, 1977]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Svarupa Damodara has requested that Dravida das may come and help him with editing work. The scientists are publishing some booklets to be completed by their return here on Janmastami. If possible please arrange for Dravida das to join them</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LettertoRamesvaraIndia17April1977_1" class="quote" parent="1977_Correspondence" book="Let" index="91" link="Letter to Ramesvara -- India 17 April, 1977" link_text="Letter to Ramesvara -- India 17 April, 1977">
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Ramesvara -- India 17 April, 1977|Letter to Ramesvara -- India 17 April, 1977]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Why not hold the Rathayatra on Janmastami? It comes at about the same time as you are planning and it will be very much appreciated. For Gaura-Nitai alone, Rathayatra is not at all recommended because They are playing the part of devotees. But as you are having three large carts you may arrange the following: Sri Sri Gaura-Nitai in the first ratha, Sri Sri Radha-Krsna in the second ratha and Sri Jagannatha, Balarama and Subhadra in the third ratha. I have received a letter from Caru dasa from Berkeley. He is worried that due to your Rathayatra no devotees will attend the San Francisco Jagannatha festival. This must not happen. Due to competition one program should not be diminished for another. San Francisco Jagannatha festival is established for many years, and it must be maintained and increased in the same grand style. As far as possible all of the devotees should attend it, as has been done in the previous years. You may also hold Rathayatra as described above in Los Angeles. In this way both festivals can be performed very grandly.</p>
</div>
</div>
</div>

Krishna Consciousness Movement is for training men to be independently thoughtful and competent in all types of departments of knowledge and action, not for making bureaucracy

2010-04-27T07:43:25Z

Partha-sarathi: Created page with '<div id="compilation"> <div id="facts"> {{terms|"independently thoughtful"}} {{notes|}} {{compiler|Partha-sarathi}} {{complete|ALL}} {{first|27Apr10}} {{last|27Apr10}} {{totals_b…'

<div id="compilation">
<div id="facts">
{{terms|"independently thoughtful"}}
{{notes|}}
{{compiler|Partha-sarathi}}
{{complete|ALL}}
{{first|27Apr10}}
{{last|27Apr10}}
{{totals_by_section|BG=0|SB=0|CC=0|OB=0|Lec=0|Con=0|Let=1}}
{{total|1}}
{{toc right}}
[[Category:Independent]]
[[Category:Thoughtful]]
</div>
<div id="Correspondence" class="section" sec_index="6" parent="compilation" text="Correspondence"><h2>Correspondence</h2>
</div>
<div id="1972_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="7" parent="Correspondence" text="1972 Correspondence"><h3>1972 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoKarandharaBombay22December1972_0" class="quote" parent="1972_Correspondence" book="Let" index="630" link="Letter to Karandhara -- Bombay 22 December, 1972" link_text="Letter to Karandhara -- Bombay 22 December, 1972">
<div class="heading">Only thing I wanted was that books printing and distribution should be centralized, therefore I appointed you and Bali Mardan to do it. Otherwise, management, everything, should be done locally by local men. Accounts must be kept, things must be in order and lawfully done, but that should be each temple's concern, not yours. Krishna Consciousness Movement is for training men to be independently thoughtful and competent in all types of departments of knowledge and action, not for making bureaucracy. Once there is bureaucracy the whole thing will be spoiled. There must be always individual striving and work and responsibility, competitive spirit, not that one shall dominate and distribute benefits to the others and they do nothing but beg from you and you provide. No. Never mind ther.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Karandhara -- Bombay 22 December, 1972|Letter to Karandhara -- Bombay 22 December, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Regarding your points about taxation, corporate status, etc., I have heard from Jayatirtha you want to make big plan for centralization of management, taxes, monies, corporate status, bookkeeping, credit, like that. I do not at all approve of such plan. Do not centralize anything. Each temple must remain independent and self-sufficient. That was my plan from the very beginning, why you are thinking otherwise? Once before you wanted to do something centralizing with your GBC meeting, and if I did not interfere the whole thing would have been killed. Do not think in this way of big corporation, big credits, centralization—these are all nonsense proposals. Only thing I wanted was that books printing and distribution should be centralized, therefore I appointed you and Bali Mardan to do it. Otherwise, management, everything, should be done locally by local men. Accounts must be kept, things must be in order and lawfully done, but that should be each temple's concern, not yours. Krishna Consciousness Movement is for training men to be independently thoughtful and competent in all types of departments of knowledge and action, not for making bureaucracy. Once there is bureaucracy the whole thing will be spoiled. There must be always individual striving and work and responsibility, competitive spirit, not that one shall dominate and distribute benefits to the others and they do nothing but beg from you and you provide. No. Never mind there may be botheration to register each centre, take tax certificate each, become separate corporations in each state. That will train men how to do these things, and they shall develop reliability and responsibility, that is the point. I am little observing now, especially in your country, that our men are losing their enthusiasm for spreading on our programmes of Krishna Consciousness movement. Otherwise, why so many letters of problems are coming, dissatisfied? That is not a very good sign. The whole problem is they are not following the regulative principles, that I can detect. Without this, enthusiasm will be lacking. Even mechanically following, and if he gets gradually understanding from the class, he will come to the point of spontaneous enthusiasm. This spontaneous loving devotional service is not so easy matter, but if one simply sticks strictly to the rules and regulations, like rising early, chanting 16 rounds, chanting gayatri, keeping always clean—then his enthusiasm will grow more and more, and if there is also patience and determination, one day he will come to the platform of spontaneous devotion, then his life will be perfect. All of this I have told you in Nectar of Devotion. So I do not think the leaders are themselves following, nor they are seeing the others are following strictly. That must be rectified at once.</p>
</div>
</div>
</div>

Maha means

2010-04-10T10:44:07Z

Partha-sarathi: Created page with '<div id="compilation"> <div id="facts"> {{terms|"maha means"}} {{notes|}} {{compiler|Partha-sarathi}} {{complete|ALL}} {{first|10Apr10}} {{last|10Apr10}} {{totals_by_section|BG=0…'

<div id="compilation">
<div id="facts">
{{terms|"maha means"}}
{{notes|}}
{{compiler|Partha-sarathi}}
{{complete|ALL}}
{{first|10Apr10}}
{{last|10Apr10}}
{{totals_by_section|BG=0|SB=1|CC=0|OB=0|Lec=27|Con=5|Let=1}}
{{total|34}}
{{toc right}}
[[Category:Meaning of Sanskrit Words]]
</div>
<div id="Srimad-Bhagavatam" class="section" sec_index="1" parent="compilation" text="Srimad-Bhagavatam"><h2>Srimad-Bhagavatam</h2>
</div>
<div id="SB_Canto_6" class="sub_section" sec_index="6" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam" text="SB Canto 6"><h3>SB Canto 6</h3>
</div>
<div id="SB6151819_0" class="quote" parent="SB_Canto_6" book="SB" index="571" link="SB 6.15.18-19" link_text="SB 6.15.18-19">
<div class="heading">Several words in this verse are very important. The word mahā-puruṣa refers to advanced devotees and also to the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Mahā means "the supreme," and puruṣa means "person."
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:SB 6.15.18-19|SB 6.15.18-19, Purport]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="purport text"><p style="display: inline;">Several words in this verse are very important. The word mahā-puruṣa refers to advanced devotees and also to the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Mahā means "the supreme," and puruṣa means "person." One who always engages in the service of the Supreme Lord is called mahā-pauruṣika. Śukadeva Gosvāmī and Mahārāja Parīkṣit are sometimes addressed as mahā-pauruṣika. A devotee should always aspire to engage in the service of advanced devotees.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Lectures" class="section" sec_index="4" parent="compilation" text="Lectures"><h2>Lectures</h2>
</div>
<div id="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="0" parent="Lectures" text="Bhagavad-gita As It Is Lectures"><h3>Bhagavad-gita As It Is Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG145LondonJuly101973_0" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="6" link="Lecture on BG 1.4-5 -- London, July 10, 1973" link_text="Lecture on BG 1.4-5 -- London, July 10, 1973">
<div class="heading">There is a book, The Personalities of Mahābhārata. Bhagavad-gītā is part of Mahābhārata. Mahābhārata means greater India. Mahā means greater, and bhārata means India. So this whole planet was Bhārata-varṣa. There was only one flag. The whole planet was being ruled by one king.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 1.4-5 -- London, July 10, 1973|Lecture on BG 1.4-5 -- London, July 10, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Practically in the Battle of Kurukṣetra great personalities, warriors, from all parts of the world they came and joined. Some of them joined with this party and others joined with the other party. So far we have studied... just like Śaibya, he belonged to Śibya. So all these personalities, we did not get their full description, it would enhance the pages. But these big personalities, we have got their information. There is a book, The Personalities of Mahābhārata. Bhagavad-gītā is part of Mahābhārata. Mahābhārata means greater India. Mahā means greater, and bhārata means India. So this whole planet was Bhārata-varṣa. There was only one flag. The whole planet was being ruled by one king. That is the king of this Hastināpura. The fight is that, that who would be the king, Mahārāja Yudhiṣṭhira or Duryodhana. But a king... It is not a democratic; it is monarchy. So Kṛṣṇa is deciding, "No, Duryodhana is unfit. Mahārāja Yudhiṣṭhira is fit." This is Kṛṣṇa's desire. Therefore this fight is there. Kurukṣetra. Kṛṣṇa wanted to wipe out all unwanted demons from the face of the world and enthrone Mahārāja Yudhiṣṭhira because he is the exact representative of Kṛṣṇa.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG29LondonAugust151973_1" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="44" link="Lecture on BG 2.9 -- London, August 15, 1973" link_text="Lecture on BG 2.9 -- London, August 15, 1973">
<div class="heading">Mahā means great. We can claim īśvaram, controller, but Kṛṣṇa is described as mahā-īśvaram "controller of the controller." That is Kṛṣṇa. Nobody is independently controller.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 2.9 -- London, August 15, 1973|Lecture on BG 2.9 -- London, August 15, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Everything belongs to Kṛṣṇa, but we are thinking, "Everything belongs to me." This is illusion. Ahaṁ mameti ([[Vanisource:SB 5.5.8|SB 5.5.8]]). Ahaṁ mameti. Janasya moho 'yam ahaṁ mameti. This is illusion. Everyone is thinking, "I am this body, and everything, whatever we find in this world, that is to be enjoyed by me." This is the mistake of civilization. The knowledge is: "Everything belongs to God. I can take only whatever He gives me, kindly allows." Tena tyaktena bhuñjīthā. This is not Vaiṣṇava philosophy; this is the fact. Nobody is proprietor. Īśāvāsyam idaṁ sarvam. Every... Kṛṣṇa says, "I am enjoyer. I am the proprietor." Sarva-loka-maheśvaram ([[Vanisource:BG 5.29|BG 5.29]]). Mahā-īśvaram. Mahā means great. We can claim īśvaram, controller, but Kṛṣṇa is described as mahā-īśvaram "controller of the controller." That is Kṛṣṇa. Nobody is independently controller.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG211RotaryClubAddressHotelImperialDelhiMarch251976_2" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="51" link="Lecture on BG 2.11 -- Rotary Club Address -- Hotel Imperial, Delhi, March 25, 1976" link_text="Lecture on BG 2.11 -- Rotary Club Address -- Hotel Imperial, Delhi, March 25, 1976">
<div class="heading">Mahā means greater, and bhārata means India. Mahābhārata. So there was trouble, who will occupy the throne. So there was fight.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 2.11 -- Rotary Club Address -- Hotel Imperial, Delhi, March 25, 1976|Lecture on BG 2.11 -- Rotary Club Address -- Hotel Imperial, Delhi, March 25, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">That lesson, instruction, is given in the Bhagavad-gītā. And it is very easy to understand. The perplexity which Arjuna met at the Battle, in the Battlefield of Kurukṣetra... The fight was between two sector of family members. They're cousin-brothers, one family, but there was some trouble, who would occupy the throne. From Mahābhārata we understand that the Pāṇḍavas, at least up to Mahārāja Parīkṣit, he ruled over the whole world. Bhāratavarṣa means the whole world, and the capital was here, Hastināpura. This information we get, Mahābhārata. Mahā means greater, and bhārata means India. Mahābhārata. So there was trouble, who will occupy the throne. So there was fight. So when fight was arranged, then Arjuna... He was a devotee of Kṛṣṇa. (aside to someone talking:) Please stop. He declined fight. He said to Kṛṣṇa, "My dear Kṛṣṇa"—Kṛṣṇa was his friend—"I don't like this fight because they are my cousin-brothers.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG24045LosAngelesDecember131968_3" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="103" link="Lecture on BG 2.40-45 -- Los Angeles, December 13, 1968" link_text="Lecture on BG 2.40-45 -- Los Angeles, December 13, 1968">
<div class="heading">Mahā means great, and bhārata means India.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 2.40-45 -- Los Angeles, December 13, 1968|Lecture on BG 2.40-45 -- Los Angeles, December 13, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So the reference of Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam... Attention diverted. (aside:) Yes. Yes. Keep it open. Let them come. Yes. There is a verse in Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam in connection with instruction of Nārada Muni to Vyāsadeva. And Vyāsadeva was disciple of Nārada Muni, and Vyāsadeva compiled so many Vedic literatures, Mahābhārata, Purāṇas, Vedānta-sūtra, Upaniṣads, various types of... Not types. Practically the same Vedas, divided into departmental knowledge for understanding of the common people. Just like Mahābhārata. Mahābhārata is the history of India. Mahā means great, and bhārata means India.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG31617NewYorkMay251966_4" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="122" link="Lecture on BG 3.16-17 -- New York, May 25, 1966" link_text="Lecture on BG 3.16-17 -- New York, May 25, 1966">
<div class="heading">That is called bhava. And that is a kind of mahā-dāvāgni. Mahā means great, and dāvāgni means forest fire. Forest fire. Forest fire, have you seen, any of you?
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 3.16-17 -- New York, May 25, 1966|Lecture on BG 3.16-17 -- New York, May 25, 1966]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">As soon as you come to the real point of understanding that "I am not this body," then the whole misunderstanding of material existence, bhava-mahā-dāvāgni... Bhava-mahā-dāvāgni means... Each and every word is very carefully selected in Sanskrit, and they have got immense meaning, full of meaning. Now, this, why this bhava-mahā-dāvāgni, this very word, I will try to explain. Bhava. Bhava means the situation in which we have to take repeated birth and we accept repeated death. That is called bhava. And that is a kind of mahā-dāvāgni. Mahā means great, and dāvāgni means forest fire. Forest fire. Forest fire, have you seen, any of you? Here you have got many forests, but I don't think you have seen any forest fire. I have seen. Forest fire takes automatically. Nobody goes to set fire in the forest, but by, I mean to say, cohesion of different dry bamboos or woods, fire takes, by electricity fire takes place, and the whole forest is ablaze. That is called dāvāgni. So this material world, nobody wants. Everyone wants peaceful life. But the nature of the material world is that automatically there is fire. Automatically there is.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG411GenevaJune11974_5" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="160" link="Lecture on BG 4.11 -- Geneva, June 1, 1974" link_text="Lecture on BG 4.11 -- Geneva, June 1, 1974">
<div class="heading">Mahā means great.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 4.11 -- Geneva, June 1, 1974|Lecture on BG 4.11 -- Geneva, June 1, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">The next line is, vāsudevaḥ sarvam iti sa mahātmā sudurlabhaḥ ([[Vanisource:BG 7.19|BG 7.19]]). One who can understand Kṛṣṇa, whose another name is Vāsudeva, so He is everything, He is the origin of everything, one who can understand, He is supposed to be mahātmā, the liberated soul, or the great soul. Mahātmā. Mahā means great. Ātmā means soul. But sa mahātmā sudurlabhaḥ. It is very difficult to find out such mahātmā. So the Kṛṣṇa devotees who are engaged in these missionary activities, Kṛṣṇa consciousness movement, they are not ordinary persons. They are mahātmā, but very rarely to be found. Sa mahātmā sudurlabhaḥ.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG101NewYorkDecember301966_6" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="329" link="Lecture on BG 10.1 -- New York, December 30, 1966" link_text="Lecture on BG 10.1 -- New York, December 30, 1966">
<div class="heading">Mahā means great. Ṛṣi means sages. They also do not know. What they do not know? Now ahaṁ hi, aham ādir hi devānām (BG 10.2). "I am the original person of all demigods and maharṣīṇāṁ ca sarvaśaḥ, I am the original person of all the ṛṣis."
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 10.1 -- New York, December 30, 1966|Lecture on BG 10.1 -- New York, December 30, 1966]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Now He says that, "Nobody knows Me." Lord says, Lord Kṛṣṇa says, "Nobody knows Me." Na me viduḥ sura-gaṇāḥ. Sura-gaṇāḥ means the demigods, those who are in the higher planets, they are called demigods. Sura-gaṇāḥ. Na me viduḥ sura-gaṇāḥ prabhavam ([[Vanisource:BG 10.2|BG 10.2]]). "My influence, or My activities, My power, My extensions, everything, prabhavam, na maharṣayaḥ." Maharṣayaḥ means great sages. Mahā-ṛṣayaḥ. Mahā means great. Ṛṣi means sages. They also do not know. What they do not know? Now ahaṁ hi, aham ādir hi devānām ([[Vanisource:BG 10.2|BG 10.2]]). "I am the original person of all demigods and maharṣīṇāṁ ca sarvaśaḥ, I am the original person of all the ṛṣis."</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG1323BombayOctober221973_7" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="373" link="Lecture on BG 13.23 -- Bombay, October 22, 1973" link_text="Lecture on BG 13.23 -- Bombay, October 22, 1973">
<div class="heading">The same word again, maheśvara. Mahā īśvara. Mahā means great. Īśvara means controller. So we can controller a few men, but Maheśvara means He controls all living entities. Nityo nityānāṁ cetanaś cetanānām (Kaṭha Upaniṣad 2.2.13).
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 13.23 -- Bombay, October 22, 1973|Lecture on BG 13.23 -- Bombay, October 22, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">The same word again, maheśvara. Mahā īśvara. Mahā means great. Īśvara means controller. So we can controller a few men, but Maheśvara means He controls all living entities. Nityo nityānāṁ cetanaś cetanānām (Kaṭha Upaniṣad 2.2.13). We may be very proud of controlling a factory, a few thousands of workers, but we are not Maheśvara. The Maheśvara is Kṛṣṇa, Supreme Personality of Godhead, who is in His Paramātmā feature, is situated in every body. Paramātmeti ca apy ukto dehe 'smin, asmin dehe, within this body. It is also discussed that... What is that? Sarva-kṣetreṣu bhārata. What is that? No. There is a... All right.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="1" parent="Lectures" text="Srimad-Bhagavatam Lectures"><h3>Srimad-Bhagavatam Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB1156LondonAugust231971_0" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="16" link="Lecture on SB 1.1.5-6 -- London, August 23, 1971" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.1.5-6 -- London, August 23, 1971">
<div class="heading">Now, this Mahābhārata is especially written... Mahābhārata. Mahābhārata means the history of greater India. Mahā. Mahā means greater. Bhārata.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.1.5-6 -- London, August 23, 1971|Lecture on SB 1.1.5-6 -- London, August 23, 1971]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Now, this Mahābhārata is especially written... Mahābhārata. Mahābhārata means the history of greater India. Mahā. Mahā means greater. Bhārata. Bhārata means India, Bhārata-varṣa. Mahābhārata, greater India. Or at that time the whole world was Bhārata-varṣa. Therefore greater India, history in Mahābhārata is there. So Mahābhārata especially was written for three classes of men. What are those? Strī, śūdra, dvija-bandhu. Strī means woman, śūdra means worker class, and dvija-bandhu means persons who have taken their birth in higher caste, brāhmaṇa, kṣatriya, vaiśya, but they're degraded. They could not keep up their standard of culture. Just like at the present moment. They are introducing themself as brāhmaṇa, but degraded. Actually, they are not brāhmaṇa-degraded. Dvija-bandhu, friends of brāhmaṇa. Just like if I am son of a high-court judge, unless I am qualified to become a high-court judge I cannot say myself, "I am high-court judge." No. Simply by becoming the son of high-court judge, one does not become a high-court judge. He must have the qualification. So when one is simply proud of his high parentage, he is called dvija-bandhu.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB152LosAngelesJanuary101968_1" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="131" link="Lecture on SB 1.5.2 -- Los Angeles, January 10, 1968" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.5.2 -- Los Angeles, January 10, 1968">
<div class="heading">You are not ordinary scholar. You have produced Mahābhārata. Mahābhārata." The other day I explained what is Mahābhārata. Mahābhārata is the... The real meaning of Mahābhārata is "History of India." History of... Mahā, mahā means great, and great history of India.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.5.2 -- Los Angeles, January 10, 1968|Lecture on SB 1.5.2 -- Los Angeles, January 10, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">You are not ordinary scholar. You have produced Mahābhārata. Mahābhārata." The other day I explained what is Mahābhārata. Mahābhārata is the... The real meaning of Mahābhārata is "History of India." History of... Mahā, mahā means great, and great history of India. Bhārata means India. India's real name is Bhāratavarṣa. Perhaps you know. Bhāratavarṣa. This whole planet was known in the beginning as Ilāvṛtavarṣa. Then there was a king, Mahārāja Bharata. So according to his name the whole planet became Bhāratavarṣa. This whole planet is called Bhāratavarṣa according to Vedic literature. But now it is now divided. There is a long history, how the human society was distributed all over this planet. So far Mahābhārata is concerned, you Americans or Europeans, you also originally belonged to India, according to Mahābhārata. Turkish civilization and Greece civilization was originally from India. Two sons of Mahārāja Yayāti, they were given kingdom of Turkey and Greece, and from Turkey and Greece the European civilization or population has increased and from Europe, the Americans, they have come here. Of course, that is historical point.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB1535VrndavanaAugust161974_2" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="154" link="Lecture on SB 1.5.35 -- Vrndavana, August 16, 1974" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.5.35 -- Vrndavana, August 16, 1974">
<div class="heading">Kṛṣṇas tu bhagavān svayam (SB 1.3.28). How do you know that Kṛṣṇa is the Supreme Personality of Godhead? Yes, by history, by authority, by His action, everything complete. We know historical, from historical point of view, Kṛṣṇa is there in the Mahābhārata. Mahābhārata means "The history of great India." Mahā means great.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.5.35 -- Vrndavana, August 16, 1974|Lecture on SB 1.5.35 -- Vrndavana, August 16, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Kṛṣṇas tu bhagavān svayam ([[Vanisource:SB 1.3.28|SB 1.3.28]]). How do you know that Kṛṣṇa is the Supreme Personality of Godhead? Yes, by history, by authority, by His action, everything complete. We know historical, from historical point of view, Kṛṣṇa is there in the Mahābhārata. Mahābhārata means "The history of great India." Mahā means great. So greater India. Greater India, this is history. Itihāsa. Itihāsa means history. So there is Kṛṣṇa, in the itihāsa, in the history. In the Vedas also, there is name of Kṛṣṇa. In the Yajur Veda, there is name of Kṛṣṇa and His father's name, Vasudeva. Everything is there. And besides that, Kṛṣṇa appeared as He is five thousand years ago and He acted as the Supreme Personality of Godhead. So where is the difficulty to understand Kṛṣṇa?</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB1711VrndavanaSeptember101976_3" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="169" link="Lecture on SB 1.7.11 -- Vrndavana, September 10, 1976" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.7.11 -- Vrndavana, September 10, 1976">
<div class="heading">Dhruva Mahārāja, Prahlāda Mahārāja, Ambarīṣa Mahārāja... Many, many devotees and their activities, their history. It is not mythology. The rascals, they say mythology. No. It is history. Mahābhārata. Mahā means greater and bhārata means this planet. So Mahābhārata means the history of this planet. Now it is minimized, "India."
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.7.11 -- Vrndavana, September 10, 1976|Lecture on SB 1.7.11 -- Vrndavana, September 10, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">This Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam, mahā-purāṇam, it is called mahā-purāṇam. Mahad ākhyānam. Ākhyānam, narration, history. It is not fictitious; it is history. The activities of the Kauravas, Pāṇḍavas, many other activities mentioned here. Dhruva Mahārāja, Prahlāda Mahārāja, Ambarīṣa Mahārāja... Many, many devotees and their activities, their history. It is not mythology. The rascals, they say mythology. No. It is history. Mahābhārata. Mahā means greater and bhārata means this planet. So Mahābhārata means the history of this planet. Now it is minimized, "India." India is given the name given by the Britishers or the Europeans. Real name is Bhārata, Bhārata-varṣa, according to the name of Mahārāja Bharata. So this greater India, Mahābhārata, this is also history. Itihāsa. Itihāsa-purāṇa. Purāṇa means old history. Purāṇa means old. It is not mythology. Purāṇa.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB1824LosAngelesApril161973_4" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="211" link="Lecture on SB 1.8.24 -- Los Angeles, April 16, 1973" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.8.24 -- Los Angeles, April 16, 1973">
<div class="heading">So these things are there described in the Mahābhārata. Mahābhārata means... Mahā means great, greater, and bhārata means India. It is the history, history of greater India, Mahābhārata. They take it as stories, as mythology. That is nonsense. It is history. Mahābhārata is the history. So we take it as history.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.8.24 -- Los Angeles, April 16, 1973|Lecture on SB 1.8.24 -- Los Angeles, April 16, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">And the condition was: after twelve years, one year they should remain incognito. If they are detected that "They are living in such and such place," then again twelve years. So hard condition. And that also performed. In that incognito condition they married Draupadī. Arjuna was at that time in a incognito. He went there as a brāhmaṇa, in the dress of a brāhmaṇa. Because if he went there in the dress of a kṣatriya they would be detected again. "Oh, here is Arjuna." Then again they will have to go again for twelve years.</p>
<p>So these things are there described in the Mahābhārata. Mahābhārata means... Mahā means great, greater, and bhārata means India. It is the history, history of greater India, Mahābhārata. They take it as stories, as mythology. That is nonsense. It is history. Mahābhārata is the history. So we take it as history. All these Purāṇas, Mahābhārata, they are history. But not this chronological history. Chronological history, if you keep, then how many pages you have to keep, so many things? Simply selected incidences, they are described there, select, most important incidences. But that is history. So these very important incidents, they are described in the Mahābhārata.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB11538LosAngelesDecember161973_5" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="306" link="Lecture on SB 1.15.38 -- Los Angeles, December 16, 1973" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.15.38 -- Los Angeles, December 16, 1973">
<div class="heading">Mahā means greater. Mahābhārata. The history. Mahābhārata is history. They call it epic. No. It is history.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.15.38 -- Los Angeles, December 16, 1973|Lecture on SB 1.15.38 -- Los Angeles, December 16, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">O it appear that five thousand years ago, all the lands of this globe were known. It is a mistake that "America was discovered." (laughter) It was known. Otherwise how it is said that "the land encircled by water" unless it is known? So our so-called Hindus, they say that if somebody goes on the other side of the sea, he becomes fallen. Does it mean that the emperor did not go outside? The capital was Hastināpura, which is now near New Delhi. They say... The Pāṇḍava fort is there. Anyway, so the whole world was being governed by the emperor situated in Hastināpura. One state. There are many evidences. Therefore the history of the whole world is called Mahābhārata. Mahā means greater. Mahābhārata. The history. Mahābhārata is history. They call it epic. No. It is history.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB32537BombayDecember61974_6" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="458" link="Lecture on SB 3.25.37 -- Bombay, December 6, 1974" link_text="Lecture on SB 3.25.37 -- Bombay, December 6, 1974">
<div class="heading">Nobody can conquer over. You find from the history Mahābhārata. Mahābhārata means the greater history of India. Mahā, mahā means greater.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 3.25.37 -- Bombay, December 6, 1974|Lecture on SB 3.25.37 -- Bombay, December 6, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So this is intelligence. You just capture Kṛṣṇa. And Kṛṣṇa, how He can be captured? Kṛṣṇa can be captured by your bhakti. Otherwise, He's very, very, crafty. You cannot capture Him. It is not possible. Ajita. If anyone wants to conquer over Kṛṣṇa, that is not possible. That is... Therefore Kṛṣṇa's name is Ajita. Nobody can conquer over. You find from the history Mahābhārata. Mahābhārata means the greater history of India. Mahā, mahā means greater. As you like "Greater Bombay," similarly, Mahābhārata means "Greater Bhārata." Don't think of this Bhārata, three-feet Bhārata. No. The whole planet was Bhāratavarṣa. That is called Mahābhārata, Greater Bhārata. Everyone was being controlled by the emperor in Hastināpura, the Pāṇḍavas. So in that history you find Kṛṣṇa has so many dealings in Mahābhārata, but He was never conquered by anyone. Therefore His name is Ajita. But you can conquer over this Ajita. Ajita jito 'py asi tais tri-lokyām. By whom? Sthāne sthitāḥ śruti-gatāṁ tanu-vāṅ-manobhiḥ. Namanta. Namanta eva.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB616HonoluluMay71976_7" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="587" link="Lecture on SB 6.1.6 -- Honolulu, May 7, 1976" link_text="Lecture on SB 6.1.6 -- Honolulu, May 7, 1976">
<div class="heading">Adhuna—"just now"; mahā-bhāga—"O the most fortunate." Parīkṣit Mahārāja is addressed as mahā-bhāga. Mahā means great, and bhāga, the same bhāga from the word bhaga, bhāga. Bhagavān and bhāgyavān, mahā-bhāga—these terms are applicable to the very, very great fortunate, opulent.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 6.1.6 -- Honolulu, May 7, 1976|Lecture on SB 6.1.6 -- Honolulu, May 7, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Adhuna—"just now"; mahā-bhāga—"O the most fortunate." Parīkṣit Mahārāja is addressed as mahā-bhāga. Mahā means great, and bhāga, the same bhāga from the word bhaga, bhāga. Bhagavān and bhāgyavān, mahā-bhāga—these terms are applicable to the very, very great fortunate, opulent. Actually Bhagavān, this word, is applicable to Kṛṣṇa. Therefore in the Bhagavad-gītā, you will find, whenever Kṛṣṇa is speaking, Vyāsadeva has written, śrī bhagavān uvāca. Real Bhagavān is Kṛṣṇa.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB616HonoluluMay71976_8" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="587" link="Lecture on SB 6.1.6 -- Honolulu, May 7, 1976" link_text="Lecture on SB 6.1.6 -- Honolulu, May 7, 1976">
<div class="heading">So here Śukadeva Gosvāmī is addressed as mahā-bhāga. Mahā means great, and bhāga means fortunate. Because he is very fortunate, he is describing Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam. Again Bhāgavatam, the same word bhaga comes. Bhagavat. Bhagavat. Vat, this word, is used when the meaning is "possessing."
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 6.1.6 -- Honolulu, May 7, 1976|Lecture on SB 6.1.6 -- Honolulu, May 7, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So here Śukadeva Gosvāmī is addressed as mahā-bhāga. Mahā means great, and bhāga means fortunate. Because he is very fortunate, he is describing Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam. Again Bhāgavatam, the same word bhaga comes. Bhagavat. Bhagavat. Vat, this word, is used when the meaning is "possessing." Asty arthe vatup. Bhagavān, bhāgyavān and bhagavat. Bhāgavat means one who has power to possess the Supreme Lord. He is called bhāgavata. There are two kinds of bhāgavata: one is grantha-bhāgavata and one is person bhāgavata. A devotee, he is called bhāgavata, and the book in which the pastimes or characteristics of Bhagavān is described, that is called Bhāgavata. So this Śrīmad-Bhāgavata... Śrī means beauty. Again vat. Bhagavat, Śrīvat. Śrī means very beautiful.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB6120ChicagoJuly41975_9" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="627" link="Lecture on SB 6.1.20 -- Chicago, July 4, 1975" link_text="Lecture on SB 6.1.20 -- Chicago, July 4, 1975">
<div class="heading">Just like Mahābhārata. Mahābhārata is the history. Bhārata means India, and Mahā means greater. Greater India. Just like modern age they use "Greater Britain," "Greater this," so many, same thing. Mahābhārata means "Greater..." Mahā means great, and Bhārata means India.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 6.1.20 -- Chicago, July 4, 1975|Lecture on SB 6.1.20 -- Chicago, July 4, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So Śukadeva Gosvāmī is explaining to Parīkṣit Mahārāja how important is Kṛṣṇa consciousness. Now he is giving one incidence of history—example is better than precept—how Ajāmila was saved simply by chanting once..., not once, many times, Nārāyaṇa. That is the itihāsaṁ purātanam. In the Vedic literatures there are itihāsas, or histories. Just like Mahābhārata. Mahābhārata is the history. Bhārata means India, and Mahā means greater. Greater India. Just like modern age they use "Greater Britain," "Greater this," so many, same thing. Mahābhārata means "Greater..." Mahā means great, and Bhārata means India. "The history of Greater India." Although India is very small now in comparison to... Although it is called subcontinent, still, in comparison to your America or Africa, it is very small.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB6120ChicagoJuly41975_10" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="627" link="Lecture on SB 6.1.20 -- Chicago, July 4, 1975" link_text="Lecture on SB 6.1.20 -- Chicago, July 4, 1975">
<div class="heading">Sāraṁ sāram, only the important, essence, that are to be recorded. This is called Indian history. Mahābhārata... Mahā means Greater India. Greater India, there were so many incidences were there, but the most important incidence, the Battle of Kurukṣetra, is there. Not that all the battles should be recorded.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 6.1.20 -- Chicago, July 4, 1975|Lecture on SB 6.1.20 -- Chicago, July 4, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Therefore, according to Vedic system, the only important incidences are recorded in the history. Therefore it is called Purāṇa. Purāṇa means old history. Purātanam. Purātanam means very, very old. That are recorded. So this Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam is the collection of very old history, historical incidence. Itihāsa purāṇānāṁ sāraṁ sāraṁ samuddhṛtya(?). Sāram means essence. Not that all nonsense records have to be taken. No. Sāraṁ sāram, only the important, essence, that are to be recorded. This is called Indian history. Mahābhārata... Mahā means Greater India. Greater India, there were so many incidences were there, but the most important incidence, the Battle of Kurukṣetra, is there. Not that all the battles should be recorded.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Nectar_of_Devotion_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="2" parent="Lectures" text="Nectar of Devotion Lectures"><h3>Nectar of Devotion Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="TheNectarofDevotionCalcuttaJanuary291973_0" class="quote" parent="Nectar_of_Devotion_Lectures" book="Lec" index="46" link="The Nectar of Devotion -- Calcutta, January 29, 1973" link_text="The Nectar of Devotion -- Calcutta, January 29, 1973">
<div class="heading">So everyone, īśvara, but nobody is Mahā-īśvara or Parameśvara. Mahā-īśvara is Kṛṣṇa. Sarva-loka-maheśvaram. Mahā-īśvara. Mahā means the great.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:The Nectar of Devotion -- Calcutta, January 29, 1973|The Nectar of Devotion -- Calcutta, January 29, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So everything belongs to Kṛṣṇa. Kṛṣṇa says, bhoktāraṁ yajña-tapasāṁ sarva-loka-maheśvaram: ([[Vanisource:BG 5.29|BG 5.29]]) "I am the supreme proprietor, Mahā-īśvara." Mahā īśaṁ parameśvaram. So everyone, īśvara, but nobody is Mahā-īśvara or Parameśvara. Mahā-īśvara is Kṛṣṇa. Sarva-loka-maheśvaram. Mahā-īśvara. Mahā means the great. So everything belongs to Kṛṣṇa. This is unknown to the nondevotees. The karmīs also do not know. The karmīs think that the resources of the world, that is given by nature for our enjoyment. This is the modern theory of economic development. Everyone is thinking like that, that by nature we have got the gold mine, so we shall take it and use it and enjoy. This is karmī's view. And... But there are many karmīs. Everyone is... Just like what is that land where there is too much gold, in South America?</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Sri_Caitanya-caritamrta_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="3" parent="Lectures" text="Sri Caitanya-caritamrta Lectures"><h3>Sri Caitanya-caritamrta Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonCCAdilila115MayapurApril81975_0" class="quote" parent="Sri_Caitanya-caritamrta_Lectures" book="Lec" index="16" link="Lecture on CC Adi-lila 1.15 -- Mayapur, April 8, 1975" link_text="Lecture on CC Adi-lila 1.15 -- Mayapur, April 8, 1975">
<div class="heading">Purāṇa means old history. It is not mythology. The foolish people, they say like that, "Mythology means something created." No. Don't take it that way. It is the essence of important historical incidences, record. Mahābhārata is also history. Mahā means great, and bhārata means this land. Actually it is a history.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on CC Adi-lila 1.15 -- Mayapur, April 8, 1975|Lecture on CC Adi-lila 1.15 -- Mayapur, April 8, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">That kurukṣetre is still existing. It is not a myth or mythology. The nonsense people, they may say like that, but Kṛṣṇa is the supermost person both in history... Purāṇa means history, itihāsa purāṇa. Saraṁ saraṁ samuddhṛtam. Vyāsadeva compiled the Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam by collecting the most important news from history. Purāṇa means old history. It is not mythology. The foolish people, they say like that, "Mythology means something created." No. Don't take it that way. It is the essence of important historical incidences, record. Mahābhārata is also history. Mahā means great, and bhārata means this land. Actually it is a history. But foolish people, without understanding through the guru-paramparā system, they manufacture their own way of understanding; therefore they are misled. They cannot take full advantage of this Vedic literature because they are misled. We should not be misled. We should know always that we are lame, paṅgoḥ. Just like a lame man cannot go very fast. But by the grace of Kṛṣṇa, even a lame man can go fast—not only go fast, but cross over the mountain.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonCCAdilila7108SanFranciscoFebruary181967_1" class="quote" parent="Sri_Caitanya-caritamrta_Lectures" book="Lec" index="35" link="Lecture on CC Adi-lila 7.108 -- San Francisco, February 18, 1967" link_text="Lecture on CC Adi-lila 7.108 -- San Francisco, February 18, 1967">
<div class="heading">Antam means the last, and mahā means great. We have got idea of great, great, greater, greater, greatness, greatness.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on CC Adi-lila 7.108 -- San Francisco, February 18, 1967|Lecture on CC Adi-lila 7.108 -- San Francisco, February 18, 1967]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Now, again, patiṁ patīnāṁ paramaṁ parastād. That, that puruṣa, that... (break) ...mahāntam, the greatest, mahāntam. Mahāntam means the last word of the greatest. Antam means the last, and mahā means great. We have got idea of great, great, greater, greater, greatness, greatness. Where we finish all greatness, He's mahāntam. Mahāntam āditya-varṇam. Āditya-varṇam. Āditya means the sun. Just like sun. Wherever the sun planet is there, oh, there is sunshine, always shining. So where the sun planet... Wherefrom... The sun planet is also a material thing like this earth. Wherefrom the... (break) ...inhabitants, they're all fiery.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Festival_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="6" parent="Lectures" text="Festival Lectures"><h3>Festival Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="SixGosvamisLectureSriSriSadgovamyastakaLosAngelesNovember181968_0" class="quote" parent="Festival_Lectures" book="Lec" index="52" link="Six Gosvamis Lecture, Sri Sri Sad-govamy-astaka -- Los Angeles, November 18, 1968" link_text="Six Gosvamis Lecture, Sri Sri Sad-govamy-astaka -- Los Angeles, November 18, 1968">
<div class="heading">Mahātmās, those who are mahātmā, they take shelter of the spiritual nature, and those who are durātmā or kśūdrātmā... Mahā means great, and just opposite to mahā means, opposite to mahā is kśūdra, small.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Six Gosvamis Lecture, Sri Sri Sad-govamy-astaka -- Los Angeles, November 18, 1968|Six Gosvamis Lecture, Sri Sri Sad-govamy-astaka -- Los Angeles, November 18, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So mahātmā means, mahātmānas tu māṁ pārtha daivīṁ prakṛtim āśritaḥ ([[Vanisource:BG 9.13|BG 9.13]]). Mahātmās, those who are mahātmā, they take shelter of the spiritual nature, and those who are durātmā or kśūdrātmā... Mahā means great, and just opposite to mahā means, opposite to mahā is kśūdra, small. Just like somebody is very liberal and somebody is very miser. So mahātmā is broad, broader-minded, broader soul, whose soul has become broader. How you can become broader? If you dovetail yourself with the supreme broadest, then you become broader. Otherwise you become smaller. So this is the difference between mahātmā and kśūdrātmā. People are generally, they are doing something for his own body, something for his society, something for his family, something for his country. So you can expand your activities, but unless you expand your activities to Kṛṣṇa consciousness, you become the smaller.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Initiation_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="8" parent="Lectures" text="Initiation Lectures"><h3>Initiation Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="DetroitInitiationsDetroitJuly181971_0" class="quote" parent="Initiation_Lectures" book="Lec" index="30" link="Detroit Initiations -- Detroit, July 18, 1971" link_text="Detroit Initiations -- Detroit, July 18, 1971">
<div class="heading">Mahā means great, and vīra means hero.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Detroit Initiations -- Detroit, July 18, 1971|Detroit Initiations -- Detroit, July 18, 1971]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Come on. Next. You arranged for offering this sacrifice? You arranged? What is name? Mahā? Mahāvīra. Eh? M, h, r. Mahāvīra. Mahāvīra is the name of Hanumān, the servant of Lord Rāmacandra. He was very strong. He could raise even the hills for service of the Lord. Mahāvīra. Mahā means great, and vīra means hero.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="General_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="11" parent="Lectures" text="General Lectures"><h3>General Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureSeattleOctober91968_0" class="quote" parent="General_Lectures" book="Lec" index="23" link="Lecture -- Seattle, October 9, 1968" link_text="Lecture -- Seattle, October 9, 1968">
<div class="heading">Then? So similarly, this Bhagavad-gītā is described in the history of India, Mahābhārata. So how you can take it symbolism? Mahābhārata is the history. Mahā means great; great history of India, Mahābhārata.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture -- Seattle, October 9, 1968|Lecture -- Seattle, October 9, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Then? So similarly, this Bhagavad-gītā is described in the history of India, Mahābhārata. So how you can take it symbolism? Mahābhārata is the history. Mahā means great; great history of India, Mahābhārata. It is historical fact. How you can take a symbolism? Just like in the Bhagavad-gītā... (break) ...verse is dharma-kṣetre kuru-kṣetre ([[Vanisource:BG 1.1|BG 1.1]]). (break) ...in the battlefield. That Kurukṣetra is still lying in India from very old time. So how you call it symbolism? And it is dharma-kṣetra. In the Vedic literature the injunction is kuru-kṣetre dharmam ācaret. And still people go to Kurukṣetra for religious, performing religious rituals. Still they go. That Kurukṣetra battlefield is there. It is being treated as the place of pilgrimage. How you can say that it is symbolic? This is all nonsense. Historical facts is still being, I mean to say, followed. The Pāṇḍavas, that is historical. Still there is one old fort. People say this fort belonged to the Pāṇḍavas. The Indraprastha, New Delhi is called Indraprastha. Everything is historical. How you take symbolical?</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LecturetoInternationalStudentSocietyBostonDecember281969_1" class="quote" parent="General_Lectures" book="Lec" index="67" link="Lecture to International Student Society -- Boston, December 28, 1969" link_text="Lecture to International Student Society -- Boston, December 28, 1969">
<div class="heading">He is called mahātmā. Mahā means big or great, and ātmā, ātmā means soul. Who has expanded his soul very wide, he is called mahātmā. So this Bhagavad-gītā gives the definition of the person who has expanded his feeling very wide.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture to International Student Society -- Boston, December 28, 1969|Lecture to International Student Society -- Boston, December 28, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">You have heard the word mahātmā. That is a Sanskrit word, or Indian word, which is applied to a person whose mind is expanded, whose feelings, the circle of his feelings, is very expanded. He is called mahātmā. Mahā means big or great, and ātmā, ātmā means soul. Who has expanded his soul very wide, he is called mahātmā. So this Bhagavad-gītā gives the definition of the person who has expanded his feeling very wide. Who is that? It is said there, bahūnāṁ janmanām ante ([[Vanisource:BG 7.19|BG 7.19]]). We are trying to expand our feeling socially, communally or nationally or internationally or universally or some way or other. This is going on. We try to do it. That is our natural function, especially in the human form of life—expanded consciousness, broader consciousness. We try, we try to do some service to the whole humanity, to society, to the country. That is expanded consciousness. But Bhagavad-gītā says that bahūnāṁ janmanām ante. Bahu means many, and janma means birth. Bahūnāṁ janmanām ante: at the end of. At the end of many, many births.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureSanFranciscoJune281971_2" class="quote" parent="General_Lectures" book="Lec" index="88" link="Lecture -- San Francisco, June 28, 1971" link_text="Lecture -- San Francisco, June 28, 1971">
<div class="heading">Then there is, there are Mahābhārata, "The Great History of India." Bhārata means India, and Mahā means greater, greater India.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture -- San Francisco, June 28, 1971|Lecture -- San Francisco, June 28, 1971]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">There are hundreds and thousands of Vedic literature—primarily four Vedas, Sama, Yajur, Atharva, Ṛg, Atharva. Then from the Vedas, there are supplementary Vedas, which are called Purāṇas, eighteen Purāṇas. Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam is one of the Purāṇas, Mahā-Purāṇa. Then there is, there are Mahābhārata, "The Great History of India." Bhārata means India, and Mahā means greater, greater India. The greater India was the whole planet. The whole planet was Bhārata-varṣa. Now it is crippled. It has become a small tract of land. But originally everywhere, this portion of the world, America, it was also Bhārata-varṣa. Sapta-dvīpa, seven islands. Seven islands. Actually the whole planet is full of water—Pacific Ocean, Atlantic Ocean, Indian Ocean. Full of water. And these are islands only—Asia, Europe, America. There are seven islands, sapta-dvīpa. The planet is sapta-dvīpa, seven full, comprising of seven islands. That is Bhārata-varṣa.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="section" sec_index="5" parent="compilation" text="Conversations and Morning Walks"><h2>Conversations and Morning Walks</h2>
</div>
<div id="1971_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="sub_section" sec_index="4" parent="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" text="1971 Conversations and Morning Walks"><h3>1971 Conversations and Morning Walks</h3>
</div>
<div id="RoomConversationwithDrWeiroftheMensaSocietySeptember51971London_0" class="quote" parent="1971_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="25" link="Room Conversation with Dr. Weir of the Mensa Society -- September 5, 1971, London" link_text="Room Conversation with Dr. Weir of the Mensa Society -- September 5, 1971, London">
<div class="heading">This Mahābhārata means, mahā means greater. Formerly 5,000 years ago, the whole planet was called Bhārata, India. India it is now called.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Room Conversation with Dr. Weir of the Mensa Society -- September 5, 1971, London|Room Conversation with Dr. Weir of the Mensa Society -- September 5, 1971, London]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Dr. Weir: Mahābhārata.</p>
<p>Prabhupāda: This Mahābhārata means, mahā means greater. Formerly 5,000 years ago, the whole planet was called Bhārata, India. India it is now called. Actually the name is Bhārata. Bhārata is the name given after the reign of Mahārāja, one King Bhārata. He was the ruler, emperor, of the whole world. After his reign this planet is called Bhārata, this whole planet, Mahābhārata. Mahābhārata is Greater India or Greater Bhārata. The headquarter was in India but it was greater, according to Mahābhārata history and this Bhagavad-gītā is given there in the Mahābhārata. Therefore it is history. And actually it is historical because the battlefield is still existing...</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1973_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="sub_section" sec_index="6" parent="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" text="1973 Conversations and Morning Walks"><h3>1973 Conversations and Morning Walks</h3>
</div>
<div id="RoomConversationwithIndianGuestsJuly111973London_0" class="quote" parent="1973_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="37" link="Room Conversation with Indian Guests -- July 11, 1973, London" link_text="Room Conversation with Indian Guests -- July 11, 1973, London">
<div class="heading">Mahābhārata means "The History of Greater India." Mahābhārata. Mahā means "greater."
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Room Conversation with Indian Guests -- July 11, 1973, London|Room Conversation with Indian Guests -- July 11, 1973, London]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: Vidura was neutral. He left home when he understood that "Fighting is now inevitable. They'll fight. Why shall I remain here?" He left home. And Kṛṣṇa also said that "I will not fight. I'll not fight because this is family quarrel. I am known to every one of you. We are related. So I cannot take this side or that side. I may be..." He divided... He, by tricks... His soldiers one side, and He Himself one side. So Duryodhana preferred, Duryodhana preferred His soldiers, that "Why shall I take this one man. I'll take His soldiers." And Arjuna said, "No, I want Kṛṣṇa." So Kṛṣṇa said, "Although I'm going to your side, but I'll not fight. Mind that." And, "Never mind, You don't fight." Mahābhārata is very nice. "Greater India." Mahābhārata means "The History of Greater India." Mahābhārata. Mahā means "greater."</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1975_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="sub_section" sec_index="8" parent="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" text="1975 Conversations and Morning Walks"><h3>1975 Conversations and Morning Walks</h3>
</div>
<div id="RoomConversationwithYogiBhajanJune71975Honolulu_0" class="quote" parent="1975_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="98" link="Room Conversation with Yogi Bhajan -- June 7, 1975, Honolulu" link_text="Room Conversation with Yogi Bhajan -- June 7, 1975, Honolulu">
<div class="heading">Mahā means very great. So unless one has very big understanding, he cannot understand God. God is unlimited. So you have (to) come to that platform to understand.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Room Conversation with Yogi Bhajan -- June 7, 1975, Honolulu|Room Conversation with Yogi Bhajan -- June 7, 1975, Honolulu]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: Mahā. Mahā means very great. So unless one has very big understanding, he cannot understand God. God is unlimited. So you have (to) come to that platform to understand. Those who are limited, they cannot understand God. That is not possible. Manuṣyāṇāṁ sahasreṣu kaścid yatati siddhaye, yatatām api siddhānām ([[Vanisource:BG 7.3|BG 7.3]]). Siddha. Siddha means one who has become unlimited, Brahman, ahaṁ brahmāsmi, Brahman realization. So Kṛṣṇa says, manuṣyāṇāṁ sahasreṣu: "Out of many millions of person," kaścid yatati siddhaye, "somebody is trying to become unlimited." And yatatām api siddhānāṁ: ([[Vanisource:BG 7.3|BG 7.3]]) "Those who have become unlimited, out of millions of them, one can understand Me, Kṛṣṇa." So Kṛṣṇa understanding, God understanding.... When I say Kṛṣṇa, God. God understanding is for the perfect unlimited, not for common man. Common man should accept the ācāryas. They must follow. Ācāryopāsanam. Just like in India the Sikhs, they follow Guru Nanak. So Guru Nanak says, "Yes, Kṛṣṇa, incarnation of God."</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1976_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="sub_section" sec_index="9" parent="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" text="1976 Conversations and Morning Walks"><h3>1976 Conversations and Morning Walks</h3>
</div>
<div id="MeetingwithEndowmentsCommissionerAugust241976Hyderabad_0" class="quote" parent="1976_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="284" link="Meeting with Endowments Commissioner -- August 24, 1976, Hyderabad" link_text="Meeting with Endowments Commissioner -- August 24, 1976, Hyderabad">
<div class="heading">That very name suggests history. Bigger India. Mahā means bigger, and Bhārata means India. Where is Mahāṁsa?
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Meeting with Endowments Commissioner -- August 24, 1976, Hyderabad|Meeting with Endowments Commissioner -- August 24, 1976, Hyderabad]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: Duplicity. Duplicity.</p>
<p>Prabhaviṣṇu: Yes. But there are some of them that are trying to prove also that the Mahābhārata was historical.</p>
<p>Prabhupāda: Mahābhārata. That very name suggests history. Bigger India. Mahā means bigger, and Bhārata means India. Where is Mahāṁsa?</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1977_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="sub_section" sec_index="10" parent="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" text="1977 Conversations and Morning Walks"><h3>1977 Conversations and Morning Walks</h3>
</div>
<div id="RoomConversationMarch241977Bombay_0" class="quote" parent="1977_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="118" link="Room Conversation -- March 24, 1977, Bombay" link_text="Room Conversation -- March 24, 1977, Bombay">
<div class="heading">In the history of India there is no woman leader. Throughout Mahābhārata you'll find... Mahābhārata is the greater history, history of greater India. Mahā means greater, and bhārata.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Room Conversation -- March 24, 1977, Bombay|Room Conversation -- March 24, 1977, Bombay]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Bali-mardana: The March 28th issue.</p>
<p>Pañcadraviḍa: We're planning on showing these things to Argentine government also.</p>
<p>Hṛdayānanda: These women leaders are not doing so well. Also, in South America there was a woman leader, and she also was put in jail.</p>
<p>Prabhupāda: In the history of India there is no woman leader. Throughout Mahābhārata you'll find... Mahābhārata is the greater history, history of greater India. Mahā means greater, and bhārata. So "Greater Bhārata." That means this whole planet. So you won't find woman leader</p>
<p>Tamāla Kṛṣṇa: These are... Some letters have come from some prominent personalities. Here is one from Mr. S. P. Mondalia. Surya Prakash Mondalia. "Your Holiness..." It's from Industry House, Real(?) House. "Your Holiness, I was indeed happy to know from yesterday's newspapers that the suit filed against ISKCON has been decided in favor of ISKCON by the New York High-Court. Admittedly this is a clear vindication of the dharmic way of life chosen by ISKCON. I have great pleasure in extending my heartiest congratulations, and I hope that the ISKCON will progress from strength to strength in the service of the Lord. With respectful regards. Yours sincerely, Surya Prakash Mondalia."</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Correspondence" class="section" sec_index="6" parent="compilation" text="Correspondence"><h2>Correspondence</h2>
</div>
<div id="1970_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="5" parent="Correspondence" text="1970 Correspondence"><h3>1970 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoBalimardanaTokyo25August1970_0" class="quote" parent="1970_Correspondence" book="Let" index="502" link="Letter to Bali-mardana -- Tokyo 25 August, 1970" link_text="Letter to Bali-mardana -- Tokyo 25 August, 1970">
<div class="heading">Muni means thoughtful or great thinker or great poet and Maha means still greater. So there is no comparison with Vyasadeva with any writer or thinker or philosopher.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Bali-mardana -- Tokyo 25 August, 1970|Letter to Bali-mardana -- Tokyo 25 August, 1970]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Of course that time was just the moment when Kali, the predominating Deity of the present age, was peeping to infiltrate in the worldly affairs and later on it was complete through the exigency of an upstart brahmana boy. So Vyasadeva was a real person accepted by all authorities and any one can judge how wonderful he was to compile the Vedic literatures. He is therefore known as Mahamuni. Muni means thoughtful or great thinker or great poet and Maha means still greater. So there is no comparison with Vyasadeva with any writer or thinker or philosopher. Nobody can estimate the scholarly importance of Srila Vyasadeva. He composed many millions of Sanskrit verses and we are just trying to receive a fragmental knowledge out of them by our tiny efforts only. Srila Vyasadeva therefore summarized the whole Vedic knowledge in the shape of Srimad-Bhagavatam which is known as the ripened fruit of the desire tree known as Vedic knowledge. The ripened fruit is received hand to hand through disciplic succession and anyone who does this work in disciplic succession from Srila Vyasadeva is considered as representative of Vyasadeva and as such the bona fide Spiritual Master's Appearance Day is worshiped as Vyasa Puja. Not only that, the exalted seat on which the Spiritual Master sits is also called Vyasasana.</p>
</div>
</div>
</div>

Durlabha means

2010-04-09T14:01:10Z

Partha-sarathi: Created page with '<div id="compilation"> <div id="facts"> {{terms|"durlabha means"}} {{notes|}} {{compiler|Partha-sarathi}} {{complete|ALL}} {{first|09Apr10}} {{last|09Apr10}} {{totals_by_section|…'

<div id="compilation">
<div id="facts">
{{terms|"durlabha means"}}
{{notes|}}
{{compiler|Partha-sarathi}}
{{complete|ALL}}
{{first|09Apr10}}
{{last|09Apr10}}
{{totals_by_section|BG=0|SB=0|CC=0|OB=0|Lec=9|Con=0|Let=0}}
{{total|9}}
{{toc right}}
[[Category:Meaning of Sanskrit Words]]
</div>
<div id="Lectures" class="section" sec_index="4" parent="compilation" text="Lectures"><h2>Lectures</h2>
</div>
<div id="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="1" parent="Lectures" text="Srimad-Bhagavatam Lectures"><h3>Srimad-Bhagavatam Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB1845LosAngelesMay71973_0" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="250" link="Lecture on SB 1.8.45 -- Los Angeles, May 7, 1973" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.8.45 -- Los Angeles, May 7, 1973">
<div class="heading">Durlabha means very difficult to obtain.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.8.45 -- Los Angeles, May 7, 1973|Lecture on SB 1.8.45 -- Los Angeles, May 7, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So if we can purchase Kṛṣṇa by love... That is stated in the Brahma-saṁhitā: durlabha, vedeṣu durlabham, vedeṣu durlabham adurlabham ātma-bhaktau (Bs. 5.33). God is adurlabha, vedeṣu durlabha, not adurlabha. I am sorry. Vedeṣu durlabham adurlabham ātma-bhaktau (Bs. 5.33). Durlabha means very difficult to obtain. Dur. Dur means with difficulty. And labha means getting. So Brahmā says that officially if you study Vedic literature to find out God, to know about God, it is very difficult. It is very difficult. Therefore those who are depending on personal studies, speculation, personal knowledge to understand God, for them, Kṛṣṇa is durlabha, very difficult to find out. It is not possible. Nāhaṁ prakāśaḥ sarvasya yoga-māyā-samāvṛtaḥ ([[Vanisource:BG 7.25|BG 7.25]]). In the Bhagavad-gītā also it is said that "I do not expose Myself." Kṛṣṇa reserves the right of being exposed to anyone and everyone. No. That is not possible. Although the Vedic literature is meant for to find out Kṛṣṇa, vedaiś ca sarvair aham eva vedyaḥ... ([[Vanisource:BG 15.15|BG 15.15]]).</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB761SanFranciscoMarch31967_1" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="733" link="Lecture on SB 7.6.1 -- San Francisco, March 3, 1967" link_text="Lecture on SB 7.6.1 -- San Francisco, March 3, 1967">
<div class="heading">Durlabha means very rarely obtained, after many, many evolutionary process, either you take the anthropologists' theory how human body has developed or you take from Vedic literature.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 7.6.1 -- San Francisco, March 3, 1967|Lecture on SB 7.6.1 -- San Francisco, March 3, 1967]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">But Prahlāda Mahārāja said, "No." Kaumāra. Why kaumāraṁ? Now, durlabhaṁ mānuṣaṁ janma. You are calculating that when you'll get old, at that time you shall try to understand what is Kṛṣṇa consciousness. But what is the guarantee that you are not already old enough? Who can say? The next moment I can die. Old age means nearing death, but there is no such guarantee that one shall die at eighty years old or hundred years old. Death can take place at any moment. Therefore a sane man will understand that we are always old enough because there is no guarantee. Durlabhaṁ. And this mānuṣaṁ janma, this human form of life is called durlabha. Durlabha means very rarely obtained, after many, many evolutionary process, either you take the anthropologists' theory how human body has developed or you take from Vedic literature. But the difference is that anthropologists, they say, "There is no soul. The organic matter is developing in different ways." But Vedic literature says it is not the organic matter, but it is the soul. The soul is a person, is individual, and he is transforming different types of bodies from one body to another, transmigrating. This we have explained several times.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB799MontrealJuly41968_2" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="802" link="Lecture on SB 7.9.9 -- Montreal, July 4, 1968" link_text="Lecture on SB 7.9.9 -- Montreal, July 4, 1968">
<div class="heading">Here is also. In the Brahma-saṁhitā it is said that adurlabham ātma-bhaktau. Adurlabha means very easily obtained. Durlabha means very difficult to obtain, and adurlabha, just the opposite: very easily obtained. How? Now, ātma-bhaktau: "Those who are devotees of the Lord, for them He is very easily available."
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 7.9.9 -- Montreal, July 4, 1968|Lecture on SB 7.9.9 -- Montreal, July 4, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Here is also. In the Brahma-saṁhitā it is said that adurlabham ātma-bhaktau. Adurlabha means very easily obtained. Durlabha means very difficult to obtain, and adurlabha, just the opposite: very easily obtained. How? Now, ātma-bhaktau: "Those who are devotees of the Lord, for them He is very easily available." So affection is so nice thing. So try to develop your affection. That affection is already there. Don't think that Kṛṣṇa affection is being artificially propagated. Perhaps in this meeting I am the only Indian, but all my students here, they are all Americans. They belong to different faith. How they are developing Kṛṣṇa consciousness? I am not bribing them, I have no money. But still, why they are so much affectionate? This is the proof that everyone has got dormant Kṛṣṇa consciousness within himself. It is not an artificial thing. Simply you have to develop it. It is not taught actually.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Sri_Caitanya-caritamrta_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="3" parent="Lectures" text="Sri Caitanya-caritamrta Lectures"><h3>Sri Caitanya-caritamrta Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonCCMadhyalila6151154GorakhpurFebruary141971_0" class="quote" parent="Sri_Caitanya-caritamrta_Lectures" book="Lec" index="42" link="Lecture on CC Madhya-lila 6.151-154 -- Gorakhpur, February 14, 1971" link_text="Lecture on CC Madhya-lila 6.151-154 -- Gorakhpur, February 14, 1971">
<div class="heading">Durlabha means very difficult to approach. Adurlabha ātma-bhaktau. But ātma-bhaktau, those who are devotees, for them He is very easily accepted.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on CC Madhya-lila 6.151-154 -- Gorakhpur, February 14, 1971|Lecture on CC Madhya-lila 6.151-154 -- Gorakhpur, February 14, 1971]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So because they are not going through the proper channels, they are... Still, vedeṣu durlabham adurlabham ātma-bhaktau (Bs. 5.33). Simply by trying to understand the Vedic literature, one cannot understand the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Vedeṣu durlabha. Durlabha means very difficult to approach. Adurlabha ātma-bhaktau. But ātma-bhaktau, those who are devotees, for them He is very easily accepted. Take for example... Now, you have gone to see a very high officer, say, the secretary of the government. You are waiting. You have sent your card, you are waiting. But you cannot enter the room without being permitted. But an ordinary orderly, his servant, he's thousand times going and coming.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonCCMadhyalila20105NewYorkJuly111976_1" class="quote" parent="Sri_Caitanya-caritamrta_Lectures" book="Lec" index="59" link="Lecture on CC Madhya-lila 20.105 -- New York, July 11, 1976" link_text="Lecture on CC Madhya-lila 20.105 -- New York, July 11, 1976">
<div class="heading">Durlabha means it is not possible. Athāpi te deva padāmbuja-dvaya-prasāda-leśānugṛhīta eva hi, jānāti tattvam (SB 10.14.29). Prasāda-leśa. Prasāda-leśa. One who has got little favor of Kṛṣṇa, he knows Kṛṣṇa-tattva. Yat-kāruṇya-kaṭākṣa-vaibhavavatāṁ gauram eva stumaḥ.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on CC Madhya-lila 20.105 -- New York, July 11, 1976|Lecture on CC Madhya-lila 20.105 -- New York, July 11, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Kṛṣṇa-prāpti hoy yāhā haite. That is spiritual master, one who can give you Kṛṣṇa. Kṛṣṇa se tomāre, kṛṣṇa dite pāra, dhāi tava pāche pāche-Bhaktivinoda Ṭhākura. "Kṛṣṇa... I am seeking after Kṛṣṇa, Vaiṣṇava Ṭhākura, my spiritual master. So Kṛṣṇa is your property." Kṛṣṇa is not independent. He is the property of the devotee. Kṛṣṇa se tomāra, kṛṣṇa dite pāra, dhāi tava pāche pāche: "I am just following you, sir. Because Kṛṣṇa is your property, if you like, you can deliver: 'Take it immediately.' " So it is not flattering; it is in the śāstras. Vedeṣu durlabha adurlabha ātmā-bhaktau. You cannot get Kṛṣṇa by studying all the Vedas. Vedeṣu durlabha. Durlabha means it is not possible. Athāpi te deva padāmbuja-dvaya-prasāda-leśānugṛhīta eva hi, jānāti tattvam ([[Vanisource:SB 10.14.29|SB 10.14.29]]). Prasāda-leśa. Prasāda-leśa. One who has got little favor of Kṛṣṇa, he knows Kṛṣṇa-tattva. Yat-kāruṇya-kaṭākṣa-vaibhavavatāṁ gauram eva stumaḥ.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonCCMadhyalila20120BombayNovember121975_2" class="quote" parent="Sri_Caitanya-caritamrta_Lectures" book="Lec" index="71" link="Lecture on CC Madhya-lila 20.120 -- Bombay, November 12, 1975" link_text="Lecture on CC Madhya-lila 20.120 -- Bombay, November 12, 1975">
<div class="heading">So mahātmā, su-durlabha mahātmā, means who is liberated, not trying for liberation. There are two kinds of mahātmās. One mahātmā is trying for liberation, mukti, and the su-durlabha means... Those who are trying for mukti, out of millions of such persons, one becomes mukta.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on CC Madhya-lila 20.120 -- Bombay, November 12, 1975|Lecture on CC Madhya-lila 20.120 -- Bombay, November 12, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So mahātmā, su-durlabha mahātmā, means who is liberated, not trying for liberation. There are two kinds of mahātmās. One mahātmā is trying for liberation, mukti, and the su-durlabha means... Those who are trying for mukti, out of millions of such persons, one becomes mukta. That is the instruction of Caitanya Mahāprabhu. Out of millions of karmīs, one becomes jñānī. And out of millions of jñānī, one becomes mukta. And out of millions of mukta, one becomes bhakta. This is the description given by Caitanya Mahāprabhu.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Arrival_Addresses_and_Talks" class="sub_section" sec_index="7" parent="Lectures" text="Arrival Addresses and Talks"><h3>Arrival Addresses and Talks</h3>
</div>
<div id="ArrivalAddressLondonJuly71973_0" class="quote" parent="Arrival_Addresses_and_Talks" book="Lec" index="10" link="Arrival Address -- London, July 7, 1973" link_text="Arrival Address -- London, July 7, 1973">
<div class="heading">So Kṛṣṇa is not so easy to approach by the nondevotees. Vedeṣu durlabha. Or even by studying Vedas, durlabha. Durlabha means not approachable, not approachable.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Arrival Address -- London, July 7, 1973|Arrival Address -- London, July 7, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So Kṛṣṇa is not so easy to approach by the nondevotees. Vedeṣu durlabha. Or even by studying Vedas, durlabha. Durlabha means not approachable, not approachable. Vedeṣu durlabha adurlabha ātma-bhaktau. But to His devotees He's very easy. He's very easy. Just like the gopīs. Gopīs, they are village girls, not educated, not brāhmaṇa, not Vedantist. But Kṛṣṇa is within their palms, within their hands. So this bhakti-yoga is so nice that Kṛṣṇa, or God, who is unapproachable by any other method-however efficient it may be, it is not possible—only by love and devotion in service He can be approached. It is clearly stated in the Bhagavad-gītā: bhaktyā mām abhijānāti ([[Vanisource:BG 18.55|BG 18.55]]). Kṛṣṇa has explained in the Bhagavad-gītā all systems-jñāna-yoga system, haṭha-yoga system, karma-yoga system, rāja-yoga system.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Purports_to_Songs" class="sub_section" sec_index="14" parent="Lectures" text="Purports to Songs"><h3>Purports to Songs</h3>
</div>
<div id="PurporttoBhajahuReManaNewYorkMarch301966_0" class="quote" parent="Purports_to_Songs" book="Lec" index="1" link="Purport to Bhajahu Re Mana -- New York, March 30, 1966" link_text="Purport to Bhajahu Re Mana -- New York, March 30, 1966">
<div class="heading">Now, then the devotee says that durlabha mānava-janama sat-saṅge taroho e bhava-sindhu re. Now, this body, this human body, is durlabha. Durlabha means very valuable.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Purport to Bhajahu Re Mana -- New York, March 30, 1966|Purport to Bhajahu Re Mana -- New York, March 30, 1966]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Now, then the devotee says that durlabha mānava-janama sat-saṅge taroho e bhava-sindhu re. Now, this body, this human body, is durlabha. Durlabha means very valuable. It is obtained with, after a great struggle of existence. We have to come through so many species of life: aquatics, birds, then trees, then reptiles, then beasts... There are so many, so many. There are eighty-four lakhs, means 8,400,000 species of life, and we had to pass through by gradual evolution. This theory is accepted by Darwin also, evolutionary theory. So this human body is very valuable. So he requests, "My dear mind,..." Mind, of course, in the lower animal life the mind is there also. Also mind is not developed, but they have got mind.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="PurporttoBhajahuReManaSanFranciscoMarch161967_1" class="quote" parent="Purports_to_Songs" book="Lec" index="3" link="Purport to Bhajahu Re Mana -- San Francisco, March 16, 1967" link_text="Purport to Bhajahu Re Mana -- San Francisco, March 16, 1967">
<div class="heading">And he says also that durlabha mānava-janama. Durlabha means very rare to obtain. Mānava-janma means this human form of life.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Purport to Bhajahu Re Mana -- San Francisco, March 16, 1967|Purport to Bhajahu Re Mana -- San Francisco, March 16, 1967]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">And he says also that durlabha mānava-janama. Durlabha means very rare to obtain. Mānava-janma means this human form of life. It comes after a very long rotation. Once chance is given to become Kṛṣṇa conscious so that one may get out of the cycle of birth and death. Therefore he advises that this life, this human form of life, is very important, durlabha. Durlabha means... Duḥ means with great difficulty, and labha means obtainable. So foolish people, they do not know what, how much important this human form of life. They are simply wasting in sense gratification like animals. So this is very instructing, that he is training his mind that "You engage your mind in the worship of Lord Kṛṣṇa." Durlabha mānava-janama sat-saṅge.</p>
</div>
</div>
</div>

Dasa means

2010-04-09T13:49:09Z

Partha-sarathi: Created page with '<div id="compilation"> <div id="facts"> {{terms|"dasa means"}} {{notes|}} {{compiler|Partha-sarathi}} {{complete|ALL}} {{first|09Apr10}} {{last|09Apr10}} {{totals_by_section|BG=0…'

<div id="compilation">
<div id="facts">
{{terms|"dasa means"}}
{{notes|}}
{{compiler|Partha-sarathi}}
{{complete|ALL}}
{{first|09Apr10}}
{{last|09Apr10}}
{{totals_by_section|BG=0|SB=1|CC=0|OB=0|Lec=19|Con=0|Let=0}}
{{total|20}}
{{toc right}}
[[Category:Meaning of Sanskrit Words]]
</div>
<div id="Srimad-Bhagavatam" class="section" sec_index="1" parent="compilation" text="Srimad-Bhagavatam"><h2>Srimad-Bhagavatam</h2>
</div>
<div id="SB_Canto_8" class="sub_section" sec_index="8" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam" text="SB Canto 8"><h3>SB Canto 8</h3>
</div>
<div id="SB8144_0" class="quote" parent="SB_Canto_8" book="SB" index="481" link="SB 8.14.4" link_text="SB 8.14.4">
<div class="heading">Sanātana means nitya, or "eternal," and kṛṣṇa-dāsa means "servant of Kṛṣṇa." The eternal occupational duty of the human being is to serve Kṛṣṇa. This is the sum and substance of the Kṛṣṇa consciousness movement.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:SB 8.14.4|SB 8.14.4, Purport]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="purport text"><p style="display: inline;">Now, if the inaugurators of this movement strictly follow the regulative principles and spread this movement for the benefit of all human society, they will certainly usher in a new way of life by reestablishing sanātana-dharma, the eternal occupational duties of humanity. The eternal occupational duty of the human being is to serve Kṛṣṇa. Jīvera 'svarūpa' haya-kṛṣṇera 'nitya-dāsa.' ([[Vanisource:CC Madhya 20.108|CC Madhya 20.108]]). This is the purport of sanātana-dharma. Sanātana means nitya, or "eternal," and kṛṣṇa-dāsa means "servant of Kṛṣṇa." The eternal occupational duty of the human being is to serve Kṛṣṇa. This is the sum and substance of the Kṛṣṇa consciousness movement.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Lectures" class="section" sec_index="4" parent="compilation" text="Lectures"><h2>Lectures</h2>
</div>
<div id="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="0" parent="Lectures" text="Bhagavad-gita As It Is Lectures"><h3>Bhagavad-gita As It Is Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG23LondonAugust41973_0" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="36" link="Lecture on BG 2.3 -- London, August 4, 1973" link_text="Lecture on BG 2.3 -- London, August 4, 1973">
<div class="heading">Tri means three, and daśa means ten. So thirty-three or thirty. Anyway, tri-daśa-pūr ākāśa-puṣpāyate. Ākāśa-puṣpa means something imaginary something imaginary.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 2.3 -- London, August 4, 1973|Lecture on BG 2.3 -- London, August 4, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So heaven is described in the Vedic literature as tri-daśa-pūr. Tri-daśa-pūr. Tri-daśa-pūr means there are 33,000,000's of demigods, and they have got their separate planets. This is called tri-daśa-pūr. Tri means three, and daśa means ten. So thirty-three or thirty. Anyway, tri-daśa-pūr ākāśa-puṣpāyate. Ākāśa-puṣpa means something imaginary something imaginary. A flower in the sky. A flower should be in the garden, but if somebody imagines the flower in the sky, it is something imaginary.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG62529LosAngelesFebruary181969_1" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="217" link="Lecture on BG 6.25-29 -- Los Angeles, February 18, 1969" link_text="Lecture on BG 6.25-29 -- Los Angeles, February 18, 1969">
<div class="heading">So one who is under the control of the senses, he is go-dāsa. Go means senses and dāsa means servant. And one who is master of the senses, he's gosvāmī.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 6.25-29 -- Los Angeles, February 18, 1969|Lecture on BG 6.25-29 -- Los Angeles, February 18, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So one who is under the control of the senses, he is go-dāsa. Go means senses and dāsa means servant. And one who is master of the senses, he's gosvāmī. Svāmī means master and go means senses. You have seen the gosvāmī title. Gosvāmī title means one who is the master of the sense. One who is not the servant of the sense, so long one is servant of the senses, he cannot be called a gosvāmī or svāmī. Svāmī or gosvāmī, the same thing, means one who is the master of the senses. So unless one is not master of the senses, his accepting this title of svāmī and gosvāmī is cheating. One must be master of the senses. That is defined by Rūpa Gosvāmī. Gosvāmī, Rūpa Gosvāmī. They were ministers. When they were ministers they were not gosvāmī. But when they became disciples of Lord Caitanya, Sanātana Gosvāmī and Rūpa Gosvāmī, and was trained by Him, they became gosvāmī.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG165HawaiiJanuary311975_2" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="385" link="Lecture on BG 16.5 -- Hawaii, January 31, 1975" link_text="Lecture on BG 16.5 -- Hawaii, January 31, 1975">
<div class="heading">That is false, hypocrisy. If you are servant of the senses, then you are go-dāsa. Dāsa means servant, and go means senses. And if you are master of the senses, then you are gosvāmī. Every word has meaning. So without being fit, we should not use this word as personal designation. That is not good.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 16.5 -- Hawaii, January 31, 1975|Lecture on BG 16.5 -- Hawaii, January 31, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">The demands of the body, eating, sleeping, sex life and defense, this is the demands of the body. But if I am situated in self-realization, then these demands will not bother me. There are many persons who are not agitated by hunger, who are not agitated, not having opportunity of sleeping. They don't sleep. Nidrāhāra-vihārakādi-vijitau **. About the Gosvāmīs it is said that these things, material demands of the body, sleeping, eating, sex and defense... They are the demands of the body. But how they became gosvāmī or svāmī? Because they were not affected by these demands. That is gosvāmī; that is svāmī. Svāmī means master. Gosvāmī means master of the senses. So if I am servant of the senses, how I can become gosvāmī, how I can become svāmī? That is false, hypocrisy. If you are servant of the senses, then you are go-dāsa. Dāsa means servant, and go means senses. And if you are master of the senses, then you are gosvāmī. Every word has meaning. So without being fit, we should not use this word as personal designation. That is not good.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="1" parent="Lectures" text="Srimad-Bhagavatam Lectures"><h3>Srimad-Bhagavatam Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB126NewVrindabanSeptember51972_0" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="36" link="Lecture on SB 1.2.6 -- New Vrindaban, September 5, 1972" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.2.6 -- New Vrindaban, September 5, 1972">
<div class="heading">Go means indriya or senses. Materialistic persons, they cannot control their senses. They are servant of the senses, godāsa. Go means indriya, and dāsa means servant.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.2.6 -- New Vrindaban, September 5, 1972|Lecture on SB 1.2.6 -- New Vrindaban, September 5, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Adānta-gobhir viśatāṁ tamisram ([[Vanisource:SB 7.5.30|SB 7.5.30]]). Everything is discussed in Bhāgavatam. For the materialist person, adānta-gobhi. Adānta means unbridled, uncontrolled. Go means indriya or senses. Materialistic persons, they cannot control their senses. They are servant of the senses, godāsa. Go means indriya, and dāsa means servant. So when you come to the position of controlling the senses, then you'll be gosvāmī. That is gosvāmī. Gosvāmī means controlling the senses, who has completely controlled the senses. Svāmī or gosvāmī. Svāmī also means that and gosvāmī also means the same thing. Generally adānta-gobhir viśatāṁ tamiśram. Uncontrolled senses, they are going. It is not that Kṛṣṇa is sending them. He is making his own path clear, either back to home, back to Godhead, or glide down to the darkest region of hell. Two things are there, and that opportunity is in the human form of life. You can select.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB1535VrndavanaAugust161974_1" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="154" link="Lecture on SB 1.5.35 -- Vrndavana, August 16, 1974" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.5.35 -- Vrndavana, August 16, 1974">
<div class="heading">Gosvāmīs does not mean go-dāsa. Go means senses and dāsa means servant. If we keep the title gosvāmī and become servant of the senses, it is cheating.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.5.35 -- Vrndavana, August 16, 1974|Lecture on SB 1.5.35 -- Vrndavana, August 16, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Similarly, sleeping also. Sleep, you require some rest, but don't sleep twenty-six hours. Not like that. Utmost six hours to eight hours, sufficient for any healthy man. Even the doctor says, if anyone sleeps more than eight hours, he is diseased. He must be weak. Healthy man sleeps at a stretch six hours. That is sufficient. That's all. And those who are tapasvīs, they should reduce sleeping also. Just like the Gosvāmīs did. Only one and a half hour or utmost two hours. That also sometimes not. Actually, we should reduce this. Nidrāhāra-vihārakādi-vijitau **. This is gosvāmī. Gosvāmīs does not mean go-dāsa. Go means senses and dāsa means servant. If we keep the title gosvāmī and become servant of the senses, it is cheating. You must be gosvāmī, means you must be master of the senses. Self-control. So what the Gosvāmīs did? Nidrāhāra-vihārakādi-vijitau cātyanta-dīnau ca yau. Very humble and... Nidrā means sleeping, āhāra means eating, and vihāra means sense enjoyment, vijitau, they conquered over.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB1831MayapuraOctober111974_2" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="225" link="Lecture on SB 1.8.31 -- Mayapura, October 11, 1974" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.8.31 -- Mayapura, October 11, 1974">
<div class="heading">Then gopy ādade kṛtāgasi tvam: "Because You were offender, therefore he (she) wanted to bind You." Dāma. Dāma means rope. Tāvat. "And what was Your condition at that time? The condition was yā te daśā." Daśā means condition.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.8.31 -- Mayapura, October 11, 1974|Lecture on SB 1.8.31 -- Mayapura, October 11, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Then gopy ādade kṛtāgasi tvam: "Because You were offender, therefore he (she) wanted to bind You." Dāma. Dāma means rope. Tāvat. "And what was Your condition at that time? The condition was yā te daśā." Daśā means condition. So He was crying. Lord Kṛṣṇa, out of fear of His mother—"Now Mother will bind Me"—so He was crying. And while crying, the tears washed the, what is called? Kajala? Mascara? So they were dropping, and He was fearful, crying, and He was, His head was down, flapping. This condition. Ninīya. Vaktraṁ ninīya, face. He felt culprit, that "I have done wrong." Bhaya-bhāvanayā. He was so much afraid that "Mother will bind Me. My freedom will be lost."</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB1165LosAngelesJanuary21974_3" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="322" link="Lecture on SB 1.16.5 -- Los Angeles, January 2, 1974" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.16.5 -- Los Angeles, January 2, 1974">
<div class="heading">Tri-daśa means thirty, three daśa, ten times...aḥ, three times ten. So there are thirty millions of demigods. And they have got different planets also.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.16.5 -- Los Angeles, January 2, 1974|Lecture on SB 1.16.5 -- Los Angeles, January 2, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">That is stated by Prabodhānanda Sarasvatī. He says that kaivalyaṁ narakāyate. Kaivalyam, the monism, to merge into the effulgence, the Absolute Truth, to become one, that is called kaivalyam, only spirit, that's all. So for a devotee this kaivalya perfection, monism, is as good as hellish condition of life. Kaivalyaṁ narakāyate. And tridaśa-pūr ākāśa-puṣpāyate. Tri-daśa-pūr means the higher heavenly planets where big, big demigods live. Just like people are trying to go to this planet, that planet. So tri-daśa-pūr. Tri-daśa means thirty, three daśa, ten times...aḥ, three times ten. So there are thirty millions of demigods. And they have got different planets also. So they are promised, "If you come to this demigod's planet, yānti deva-vratā devān ([[Vanisource:BG 9.25|BG 9.25]]), you will get so much happiness, you will live for so many years, you will have better standard of life, thousand times more than in the... These are... They are described in the Vedas. But a devotee says that this tri-daśa-pūr, this heavenly planet, is as good as phantasmagoria. They have no value for these things.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB212VrndavanaMarch171974_4" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="358" link="Lecture on SB 2.1.2 -- Vrndavana, March 17, 1974" link_text="Lecture on SB 2.1.2 -- Vrndavana, March 17, 1974">
<div class="heading">And at the same time, passing on as gosvāmī. What is this go...? Go-dāsa. They are go-dāsa. Go means senses, and dāsa means servant.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 2.1.2 -- Vrndavana, March 17, 1974|Lecture on SB 2.1.2 -- Vrndavana, March 17, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">They conquered over these things. What is that? Nidrāhāra, nidrā, āhāra, vihāra. Vihāra means sense enjoyment, and āhāra means eating or collecting. Generally, eating. And nidrā. Nidrāhāra-vihārakādi-vijitau. Conquered. That is Vaiṣṇava. Not that out of twenty-four hours, thirty-six hours sleeping. (laughter) And at the same time, passing on as gosvāmī. What is this go...? Go-dāsa. They are go-dāsa. Go means senses, and dāsa means servant.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB212VrndavanaMarch171974_5" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="358" link="Lecture on SB 2.1.2 -- Vrndavana, March 17, 1974" link_text="Lecture on SB 2.1.2 -- Vrndavana, March 17, 1974">
<div class="heading">Go-dāsa means the mind is dictating, "Please eat more, please sleep more, please have sexual more, please have defense fund more..." So this is materialism. Defense fund means to keep money. That is defense fund. So... So this is materialism.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 2.1.2 -- Vrndavana, March 17, 1974|Lecture on SB 2.1.2 -- Vrndavana, March 17, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So our policy should be, instead of becoming servant of the senses, we have to become servant of Kṛṣṇa. This is gosvāmī. Because unless you conquer over, senses will always ask you, "Please eat, please sleep, please have sexual intercourse. Please have this, please have this." This is material life. This is material life, subjected to the dictation of the senses. That is material life. And one has to become... (sic:) Go-dāsa means the mind is dictating, "Please eat more, please sleep more, please have sexual more, please have defense fund more..." So this is materialism. Defense fund means to keep money. That is defense fund. So... So this is materialism.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB32818NairobiOctober271975_6" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="506" link="Lecture on SB 3.28.18 -- Nairobi, October 27, 1975" link_text="Lecture on SB 3.28.18 -- Nairobi, October 27, 1975">
<div class="heading">So every devotee is subordinate. Nobody is equal to Kṛṣṇa. If we do that, then it is mistake. Devotee... A devotee never says. Dāsa. Dāsa means servant.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 3.28.18 -- Nairobi, October 27, 1975|Lecture on SB 3.28.18 -- Nairobi, October 27, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So every devotee is subordinate. Nobody is equal to Kṛṣṇa. If we do that, then it is mistake. Devotee... A devotee never says. Dāsa. Dāsa means servant. Servant is always the subordinate. Therefore Vaiṣṇava says "dāsa." He never says "master." Vaiṣṇava, dāsa, subordinate, tad-adhīna, under the..., under Kṛṣṇa. Nobody can be superior to Kṛṣṇa or equal to Kṛṣṇa. That is mistake. These Māyāvādī philosophers, they think, "Now I have become equal to Kṛṣṇa. I am also Kṛṣṇa." That is rascaldom. Kṛṣṇa, God, is never equal to anyone. Asamaurdhva. Asama means "not equal," and urdha, "always the top." Asamaurdhva. That is described in the Bhagavad... So we should remain tad-adhīna, always under Kṛṣṇa. That is our perfection.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB6150DetroitJune161976_7" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="687" link="Lecture on SB 6.1.50 -- Detroit, June 16, 1976" link_text="Lecture on SB 6.1.50 -- Detroit, June 16, 1976">
<div class="heading">Otherwise, godāsa. Dāsa means servant. Everyone in this material world, he's godāsa. Godāsa means servant of the mind, servant of the senses.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 6.1.50 -- Detroit, June 16, 1976|Lecture on SB 6.1.50 -- Detroit, June 16, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Svāmī does not mean you simply stamp over your name "Svāmī." No, svāmī means the controller of the mind. He is not controlled by the mind; he controls the mind. Then he is svāmī. Gosvāmī. Go means senses and svāmī means master. When you are able to control your senses, then you are a gosvāmī or svāmī, the same thing. Otherwise, godāsa. Dāsa means servant. Everyone in this material world, he's godāsa. Godāsa means servant of the mind, servant of the senses. Everyone, servant of the senses. He may be very big man, but he's servant of the senses.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB7121BombayApril121976_8" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="861" link="Lecture on SB 7.12.1 -- Bombay, April 12, 1976" link_text="Lecture on SB 7.12.1 -- Bombay, April 12, 1976">
<div class="heading">Dāsa means servant. Not only servant, but menial servant. Menial servant means just like the sweeper, the cobbler, like that. They are called menial servants.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 7.12.1 -- Bombay, April 12, 1976|Lecture on SB 7.12.1 -- Bombay, April 12, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Therefore brahmacārī means living under direction of guru, guror hitam. And guror hitam... How he can be simply thinking of benefiting the spiritual master? Unless that position comes, nobody can serve guru. It is not an artificial thing. The brahmacārī, the disciple, must have genuine love for guru. Then he can be under his control. Otherwise why one should be under the control of another person? Therefore it is said, ācaran dāsavat. Dāsa. Dāsa means servant. Not only servant, but menial servant. Menial servant means just like the sweeper, the cobbler, like that. They are called menial servants. So in India there is system. The sweeper class is different, the cobbler class is different, and domestic servant is different, and the barber, he is also servant, different.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Nectar_of_Devotion_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="2" parent="Lectures" text="Nectar of Devotion Lectures"><h3>Nectar of Devotion Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="TheNectarofDevotionVrndavanaNovember31972_0" class="quote" parent="Nectar_of_Devotion_Lectures" book="Lec" index="31" link="The Nectar of Devotion -- Vrndavana, November 3, 1972" link_text="The Nectar of Devotion -- Vrndavana, November 3, 1972">
<div class="heading">And the karmīs, they're aspiring after heavenly planets, tri-daśa-pūr. Tri-daśa means thirty. So there are more than thirty millions of demigods in different planetary systems. They are called heavenly planets. So they are ākāśa-puṣpa.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:The Nectar of Devotion -- Vrndavana, November 3, 1972|The Nectar of Devotion -- Vrndavana, November 3, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">They do not give very much value to such conception, to become one with the Supreme. Or liberation, mukti. And the, this is mokṣa-kāmi, those who are aspiring after... Nirbheda-brahmānu-sandhana, without any difference with the Supreme Brahman. That is called mukti, liberation. And tridaśa-pūr ākāśa-puṣpāyate. And the karmīs, they're aspiring after heavenly planets, tri-daśa-pūr. Tri-daśa means thirty. So there are more than thirty millions of demigods in different planetary systems. They are called heavenly planets. So they are ākāśa-puṣpa. Ākāśa-puṣpa means a flower does not grow in the sky; it is something imaginary, phantasmagoria. Tri-daśa-pūr ākāśa-puṣpāyate. So karmīs are interested in the ākāśa-puṣpa, heavenly planet. And the jñānīs are interested in mukti. Karmī, jñānī... And yogis are interested how to control the senses.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Initiation_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="8" parent="Lectures" text="Initiation Lectures"><h3>Initiation Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="InitiationofBalimardanaDasaMontrealJuly291968_0" class="quote" parent="Initiation_Lectures" book="Lec" index="6" link="Initiation of Bali-mardana Dasa -- Montreal, July 29, 1968" link_text="Initiation of Bali-mardana Dasa -- Montreal, July 29, 1968">
<div class="heading">And Bali-mardana dāsa means Kṛṣṇa dāsa, one who is servant of Kṛṣṇa. Is that clear? Yes. (break) (japa) So that list you have not made, offenses, ten kinds of...?
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Initiation of Bali-mardana Dasa -- Montreal, July 29, 1968|Initiation of Bali-mardana Dasa -- Montreal, July 29, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So Bali is... Bali-mardana does not mean that he was... Because he was punished by Kṛṣṇa, he is not ordinary person; he is authority. So even a person punished by Kṛṣṇa becomes authority. Kṛṣṇa is so nice. What to speak of a person who is directly loved by Kṛṣṇa, even one is punished by Kṛṣṇa, he becomes authority. So therefore Kṛṣṇa's name is Bali-mardana. And Bali-mardana dāsa means Kṛṣṇa dāsa, one who is servant of Kṛṣṇa. Is that clear? Yes. (break) (japa) So that list you have not made, offenses, ten kinds of...?</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="InitiationLectureLosAngelesDecember191968_1" class="quote" parent="Initiation_Lectures" book="Lec" index="12" link="Initiation Lecture -- Los Angeles, December 19, 1968" link_text="Initiation Lecture -- Los Angeles, December 19, 1968">
<div class="heading">So Kamalāsana dāsa means you are Viṣṇu dāsa. That is the meaning. Kamalāsana means Viṣṇu. This Viṣṇu picture, you see? This is Viṣṇu. So now we shall perform... Chant Hare Kṛṣṇa. (someone breaks stick for fire) Yes. Chant.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Initiation Lecture -- Los Angeles, December 19, 1968|Initiation Lecture -- Los Angeles, December 19, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">K-a-m-a-l-a, Kamala, s-a-n-a, āsana. Kamalāsana dāsa. Kamalāsana. Kamalāsana means Viṣṇu or Brahmā. Brahmā is also seated on the lotus sitting place. Āsana means sitting place, and kamala means lotus. You have seen Brahmā is sitting on kamala? Similarly, Viṣṇu is also sitting on kamala. So Kamalāsana dāsa means you are Viṣṇu dāsa. That is the meaning. Kamalāsana means Viṣṇu. This Viṣṇu picture, you see? This is Viṣṇu. So now we shall perform... Chant Hare Kṛṣṇa. (someone breaks stick for fire) Yes. Chant.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="InitiationsNewYorkJuly231971_2" class="quote" parent="Initiation_Lectures" book="Lec" index="33" link="Initiations -- New York, July 23, 1971" link_text="Initiations -- New York, July 23, 1971">
<div class="heading">Go-dāsa means servant of the senses. And one is gosvāmī, master of the senses. That is the difference between gosvāmī and go-dāsa. Go means senses. When we are servant of the senses, then we are in the material world. And when we are master of the senses, then we are in the spiritual world. Come on. Hare Kṛṣṇa.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Initiations -- New York, July 23, 1971|Initiations -- New York, July 23, 1971]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Puru dāsa. There was a very powerful king. His name was Puru. He was a devotee. The same thing, to become ruler of the senses. Come on. We are all ruled by the senses. Senses dictate and we follow. This is the general condition, and we have to become ruler of the senses. Then it is successful. Generally people are ruled by the senses. My sense says, "Please take me to the cinema," the eyes. I immediately go and stand there three hours for the ticket. You see? So I am ruled by the senses. And when you will be strong enough, the eyes will say, "Please take me to the cinema," and you will say, "No, you cannot go to the cinema." Then you are ruler. So one is go-dāsa. Go-dāsa means servant of the senses. And one is gosvāmī, master of the senses. That is the difference between gosvāmī and go-dāsa. Go means senses. When we are servant of the senses, then we are in the material world. And when we are master of the senses, then we are in the spiritual world. Come on. Hare Kṛṣṇa.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="General_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="11" parent="Lectures" text="General Lectures"><h3>General Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureHawaiiMarch231969_0" class="quote" parent="General_Lectures" book="Lec" index="40" link="Lecture -- Hawaii, March 23, 1969" link_text="Lecture -- Hawaii, March 23, 1969">
<div class="heading">So they are giving me chance to utter the name of the Lord. And, besides that, there is another affix: "dāsa." "Gaurasundara dāsa," "Vāmana dāsa." Dāsa means servant.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture -- Hawaii, March 23, 1969|Lecture -- Hawaii, March 23, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So they are giving me chance to utter the name of the Lord. And, besides that, there is another affix: "dāsa." "Gaurasundara dāsa," "Vāmana dāsa." Dāsa means servant. He also remembers that "I am servant of Gaura, Lord Gaurāṅga," "I am servant of Lord Vāmana," "I am maidservant of Govinda." So... And friend, Sudāmā was a friend of Kṛṣṇa. So "I am the servant of Kṛṣṇa's friend, Sudāmā dāsa." So in this way our relationship with Kṛṣṇa we always remember. That remembrance is also self-realization process. Śravaṇaṁ kīrtanaṁ viṣṇoḥ smaraṇam ([[Vanisource:SB 7.5.23|SB 7.5.23]]). Smaraṇam, memorizing, by context. As soon as I utter, "Sudāmā," I immediately remember, "Sudāmā was a friend of Kṛṣṇa." So I remember Kṛṣṇa. Reference to the context. So therefore this is offered, spiritual name.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LifeMemberHouseLectureHyderabadApril141975_1" class="quote" parent="General_Lectures" book="Lec" index="157" link="Life Member House Lecture -- Hyderabad, April 14, 1975" link_text="Life Member House Lecture -- Hyderabad, April 14, 1975">
<div class="heading">So Śrīla Bhaktivinoda Ṭhākura has sung, kīṭa janma hao yathā tuyā dāsa, bahir nā brahma janme nāhi mora āsa. Kītā janma hao yathā tuyā dāsa. Tuyā dāsa means your servant.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Life Member House Lecture -- Hyderabad, April 14, 1975|Life Member House Lecture -- Hyderabad, April 14, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So Śrīla Bhaktivinoda Ṭhākura has sung, kīṭa janma hao yathā tuyā dāsa, bahir nā brahma janme nāhi mora āsa. Kītā janma hao yathā tuyā dāsa. Tuyā dāsa means your servant. Actually we are all servants of Kṛṣṇa. Jīvera svarūpa hoy nitya kṛṣṇa dāsa. But forgetting our position, we are now acting as dāsa of māyā, māyāra-dāsa. Hoiya māyāra dāsa kori nānā abhilāṣ. The advantage of Kṛṣṇa dāsa is that he has got only one desire. Ānukūlyena kṛṣṇānu-śīlanam ([[Vanisource:CC Madhya 19.167|CC Madhya 19.167]])—to serve Kṛṣṇa purely. That's all. Kṛṣṇa is not impersonal. Kṛṣṇa is person, and whatever He orders, whatever He says, if you carry out faithfully, then our original constitutional position is regained. It can be done very quickly. Kṛṣṇa says, sarva-dharmān parityajya mām ekaṁ śaraṇaṁ vraja ([[Vanisource:BG 18.66|BG 18.66]]).</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Purports_to_Songs" class="sub_section" sec_index="14" parent="Lectures" text="Purports to Songs"><h3>Purports to Songs</h3>
</div>
<div id="PurporttoBhajahuReManaSanFranciscoMarch161967_0" class="quote" parent="Purports_to_Songs" book="Lec" index="3" link="Purport to Bhajahu Re Mana -- San Francisco, March 16, 1967" link_text="Purport to Bhajahu Re Mana -- San Francisco, March 16, 1967">
<div class="heading">Therefore Govinda dāsa, a great devotee of Lord Kṛṣṇa... His very name suggests, Govinda dāsa. Govinda, Kṛṣṇa, and dāsa means servant.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Purport to Bhajahu Re Mana -- San Francisco, March 16, 1967|Purport to Bhajahu Re Mana -- San Francisco, March 16, 1967]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Bhajahū re mana śrī-nanda-nandana-abhaya-caraṇāravinda re. Bhaja, bhaja means worship; hu, hello; mana, mind. The poet Govinda dāsa, a great philosopher and devotee of the Lord, he is praying. He is requesting his mind, because mind is the friend and mind is the enemy of everyone. If one can train his mind in Kṛṣṇa consciousness, then he is successful. If he cannot train his mind, then life is failure. Therefore Govinda dāsa, a great devotee of Lord Kṛṣṇa... His very name suggests, Govinda dāsa. Govinda, Kṛṣṇa, and dāsa means servant. This is the attitude of all devotees. They always put, affix this dāsa, means servant. So Govinda dāsa ms praying, "My dear mind, please you try to worship the son of Nanda, who is abhaya-caraṇa, whose lotus feet is secure. There is no fear." Abhaya. Abhaya means there is no fear, and caraṇa, caraṇa means lotus feet.</p>
</div>
</div>
</div>

Samskara means

2010-04-09T13:33:40Z

Partha-sarathi: Created page with '<div id="compilation"> <div id="facts"> {{terms|"samskara means"}} {{notes|}} {{compiler|Partha-sarathi}} {{complete|ALL}} {{first|09Apr10}} {{last|09Apr10}} {{totals_by_section|…'

<div id="compilation">
<div id="facts">
{{terms|"samskara means"}}
{{notes|}}
{{compiler|Partha-sarathi}}
{{complete|ALL}}
{{first|09Apr10}}
{{last|09Apr10}}
{{totals_by_section|BG=0|SB=0|CC=0|OB=0|Lec=12|Con=1|Let=0}}
{{total|13}}
{{toc right}}
[[Category:Meaning of Sanskrit Words]]
</div>
<div id="Lectures" class="section" sec_index="4" parent="compilation" text="Lectures"><h2>Lectures</h2>
</div>
<div id="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="0" parent="Lectures" text="Bhagavad-gita As It Is Lectures"><h3>Bhagavad-gita As It Is Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG140LondonJuly281973_0" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="24" link="Lecture on BG 1.40 -- London, July 28, 1973" link_text="Lecture on BG 1.40 -- London, July 28, 1973">
<div class="heading">Garbhādhāna saṁskāra means when, especially the high caste, brāhmaṇa, kṣatriya especially...Not śūdra. Śūdra has no saṁskāra.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 1.40 -- London, July 28, 1973|Lecture on BG 1.40 -- London, July 28, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So therefore chastity is very, very important thing for producing good population, nice population. So unless the population is good... If the population becomes hippies, then how there can be any peace and prosperity? Therefore, to produce children, there is saṁskāra. First saṁskāra is Garbhādhāna saṁskāra. This is called kula-dharma. Garbhādhāna saṁskāra means when, especially the high caste, brāhmaṇa, kṣatriya especially...Not śūdra. Śūdra has no saṁskāra. Only the higher class, brāhmaṇa, kṣatriya and vaiśya. Vaiśya also sometimes no saṁskāra. But brāhmaṇa, kṣatriya must have saṁskāra. Daśa-vidhā saṁskārāḥ. Ten kinds of saṁskāra</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG140LondonJuly281973_1" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="24" link="Lecture on BG 1.40 -- London, July 28, 1973" link_text="Lecture on BG 1.40 -- London, July 28, 1973">
<div class="heading">One of the saṁskāra... Saṁskāra means purificatory method. One of the saṁskāra is also marriage. One must get married. So, before the child is given birth, there is a saṁskāra, what is called? Garbhādhāna saṁskāra. It is not that the husband and wife mix without any restriction and have sex life at any time.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 1.40 -- London, July 28, 1973|Lecture on BG 1.40 -- London, July 28, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">One of the saṁskāra... Saṁskāra means purificatory method. One of the saṁskāra is also marriage. One must get married. So, before the child is given birth, there is a saṁskāra, what is called? Garbhādhāna saṁskāra. It is not that the husband and wife mix without any restriction and have sex life at any time. No. You know that, that mother of Hiraṇyakaśipu, Kaśyapa Muni, I think, father. So she, the woman became very much sexually excited and the husband replied that: "This is not time. This is very bad time, evening. Why you are insisting?" But she was too much lusty, and because the husband was obliged, Hiraṇyakaśipu was born, a demon was born. Therefore there is Garbhādhāna saṁskāra, to find out when the husband and wife should mix and give birth to a child. Therefore in the Bhagavad-gītā you'll see that sex life which is according to the principle of religious ideas, that is "I am." So sex life is not bad, provided it is executed according to the religious principles.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG41213NewYorkJuly291966_2" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="166" link="Lecture on BG 4.12-13 -- New York, July 29, 1966" link_text="Lecture on BG 4.12-13 -- New York, July 29, 1966">
<div class="heading">Saṁskāra means culture. One has to take his birth, rebirth, by culture, by education, by knowledge. That is called cultural birth.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 4.12-13 -- New York, July 29, 1966|Lecture on BG 4.12-13 -- New York, July 29, 1966]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So janmanā jāyate śūdraḥ saṁskārād bhaved dvijaḥ. Birth. Birth is not all, everything. The culture, saṁskāra. Saṁskāra means culture. One has to take his birth, rebirth, by culture, by education, by knowledge. That is called cultural birth. So unless one is in the cultural birth, he is to be considered the lower grade person, or the śūdra.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG415BombayApril41974_3" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="174" link="Lecture on BG 4.15 -- Bombay, April 4, 1974" link_text="Lecture on BG 4.15 -- Bombay, April 4, 1974">
<div class="heading">Saṁskāra means the sacred thread is the symbol. It is offered by the ācārya. It is the certificate that "This boy has been trained up as a brāhmaṇa."
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 4.15 -- Bombay, April 4, 1974|Lecture on BG 4.15 -- Bombay, April 4, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Janmanā, by birth, everyone is śūdra or caṇḍāla. Those who are satisfied that "I have taken birth in my brāhmaṇa family, so now my business is over." No. Janmanā jāyate śūdraḥ. The birth by the father and mother, that is śūdra, that is not brāhmaṇa. Saṁskāra. If a man is born brāhmaṇa, then why there is necessity of sacred thread ceremony? No. That is the saṁskāra. Saṁskāra means the sacred thread is the symbol. It is offered by the ācārya. It is the certificate that "This boy has been trained up as a brāhmaṇa."</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG71112BombayFebruary251974_4" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="280" link="Lecture on BG 7.11-12 -- Bombay, February 25, 1974" link_text="Lecture on BG 7.11-12 -- Bombay, February 25, 1974">
<div class="heading">Garbhādhāna-saṁskāra means when you are going to make your wife pregnant, there is saṁskāra, there is ceremony. And especially in the brāhmaṇa families, if there is no garbhādhāna-saṁskāra, he immediately becomes a śūdra. This is the shastric.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 7.11-12 -- Bombay, February 25, 1974|Lecture on BG 7.11-12 -- Bombay, February 25, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Therefore Kṛṣṇa says that dharmāviruddho bhūteṣu kāmo 'smi bharatarṣabha. Who is following the, strictly the regulative principles, even in sex life he can see Kṛṣṇa. Which is considered abominable, but even in sex life, if you are following the rules and regulations, you can see Kṛṣṇa. Therefore when such sons are begotten, they become devotees of Kṛṣṇa. Therefore according to Hindu principles, there is garbhādhāna-saṁskāra, ten kinds of saṁskāras, reformative measures. So the sex life should be also open to the saṁskāra. It is a saṁskāra. Garbhādhāna-saṁskāra. Garbhādhāna-saṁskāra means when you are going to make your wife pregnant, there is saṁskāra, there is ceremony. And especially in the brāhmaṇa families, if there is no garbhādhāna-saṁskāra, he immediately becomes a śūdra. This is the shastric. You must follow the saṁskāra. Saṁskārād bhaved dvijaḥ janmanā jāyate śūdraḥ. One who follows the saṁskāras, then he becomes purified. This is, this is called dharmāviruddhaḥ, "not against the religious principles."</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG167HawaiiFebruary31975_5" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="390" link="Lecture on BG 16.7 -- Hawaii, February 3, 1975" link_text="Lecture on BG 16.7 -- Hawaii, February 3, 1975">
<div class="heading">The saṁskāra means purification. That is satyaṁ śaucam. But the asuras, they do not want to be purified. They want to remain in the degraded stage of life. That is the difficulty.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 16.7 -- Hawaii, February 3, 1975|Lecture on BG 16.7 -- Hawaii, February 3, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So don't remain in the ignorant stage of life. That is called śūdra. Try to become brāhmaṇa. That is the meaning. It is not prohibited that one cannot become brāhmaṇa. No, one can become brāhmaṇa. If he gets association of a brāhmaṇa, if he agrees to be trained up by a brāhmaṇa, he can become brāhmaṇa. And brāhmaṇa means brahma jānāti iti brāhmaṇa, not by birth. Anyone who has full knowledge of the Supreme, he is brāhmaṇa. Janmanā jāyate śūdraḥ. By birth everyone is śūdra. Even if he's born in a brāhmaṇa family he is śūdra. Janmanā jāyate śūdraḥ saṁskārād bhaved dvijaḥ. The saṁskāra means purification. That is satyaṁ śaucam. But the asuras, they do not want to be purified. They want to remain in the degraded stage of life. That is the difficulty.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="1" parent="Lectures" text="Srimad-Bhagavatam Lectures"><h3>Srimad-Bhagavatam Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB122RomeMay261974_0" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="20" link="Lecture on SB 1.2.2 -- Rome, May 26, 1974" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.2.2 -- Rome, May 26, 1974">
<div class="heading">Ust like saṁskāra means educational process, to elevate one. Just like we send to school, college, for elevating a child to the higher standard of life, knowledge, similarly, these saṁskāras also like that. One must undergo the saṁskāras, the reformatory method, and act in life.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.2.2 -- Rome, May 26, 1974|Lecture on SB 1.2.2 -- Rome, May 26, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Asaṁskṛtāḥ kriyā-hīnā mlecchā rājanya-rūpiṇaḥ. That is stated in the Śrīmad... Asaṁskṛta. The present government men, they did not go any saṁskāra. Formerly, the kings, they... The higher castes, never mind he is king or not, but higher caste... Therefore they claimed higher. Not claimed. Actually they were. The brāhmaṇas and the kṣatriyas especially, and also the vaiśyas, they went the saṁskāra, reformatory. Just like saṁskāra means educational process, to elevate one. Just like we send to school, college, for elevating a child to the higher standard of life, knowledge, similarly, these saṁskāras also like that. One must undergo the saṁskāras, the reformatory method, and act in life. If I have taken the saṁskāra of brāhmaṇa, if I have accepted the sacred thread, then I must act as a brāhmaṇa. It is very practical. Just like if you have passed your examination as an engineer, then you must act as an engineer. Not that simply you have got the qualification of engineer, and now you are engaged in the business of a shopkeeper. No. You must act as engineer. That is qualification.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB138LosAngelesSeptember141972_1" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="106" link="Lecture on SB 1.3.8 -- Los Angeles, September 14, 1972" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.3.8 -- Los Angeles, September 14, 1972">
<div class="heading">Saṁskāra means by reformatory process, bhaved dvijaḥ. Dvija means second birth. Second birth means by reformatory process, when he is eligible, then he is initiated by the spiritual master.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.3.8 -- Los Angeles, September 14, 1972|Lecture on SB 1.3.8 -- Los Angeles, September 14, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So reformatory system is to make one first of all a brāhmaṇa. Janmanā jāyate śūdraḥ saṁskārād bhaved dvijaḥ. Every person is born a śūdra, a rascal. Then by reformatory process... Just like we send our children to school, college, to teachers for reforming, that is reformation. The animals, they are unable to accept this reformatory process. You cannot send a cat or a dog to the school and become educated. That is not possible. All human beings, although they are born śūdra, he can be made a brāhmaṇa by the process. Saṁskāra means by reformatory process, bhaved dvijaḥ. Dvija means second birth. Second birth means by reformatory process, when he is eligible, then he is initiated by the spiritual master. That is second birth. Then initiation means he is allowed to study Vedic literature to achieve real knowledge. Because real knowledge means Vedic knowledge, and any knowledge which is not corroborated with the Vedic version, that is not knowledge; that is imperfect knowledge.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB1161LosAngelesDecember291973_2" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="318" link="Lecture on SB 1.16.1 -- Los Angeles, December 29, 1973" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.16.1 -- Los Angeles, December 29, 1973">
<div class="heading">There are ten kinds of reformation. The first reformation is garbhādhāna-saṁskāra. Garbhādhāna-saṁskāra means when the father is going to give birth to a child, it is not a secret affair.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.16.1 -- Los Angeles, December 29, 1973|Lecture on SB 1.16.1 -- Los Angeles, December 29, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">There are ten kinds of reformation. The first reformation is garbhādhāna-saṁskāra. Garbhādhāna-saṁskāra means when the father is going to give birth to a child, it is not a secret affair. It is open affair. "Now this is the good, auspicious day, and today the father will implant the seed of the son in the womb of the mother." There is great function. That is called garbhādhāna-saṁskāra. And there are witnesses, all the brāhmaṇas, that "This day, such and such time, this king or this person has begotten this child." Just like when the child is born, it is recorded in the government book, similarly, when one is going to give birth to a child, that is also recorded. That is called garbhādhāna-saṁskāra. Not that like cats and dogs in secrecy we have sexual intercourse, and if there is pregnancy, give some contraceptive pill or kill the child. Oh, how rascal and animals have been introduced in the human society.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB6120ChicagoJuly41975_3" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="627" link="Lecture on SB 6.1.20 -- Chicago, July 4, 1975" link_text="Lecture on SB 6.1.20 -- Chicago, July 4, 1975">
<div class="heading">Saṁskārāt. Saṁskāra means reforming. You are born śūdra. You are inclined to do something, so many things—intoxication, illicit sex and drinking and gambling and meat-eating.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 6.1.20 -- Chicago, July 4, 1975|Lecture on SB 6.1.20 -- Chicago, July 4, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">This is the process. When you take your birth, that birth is not significant—a śūdra, fourth-class man. Everyone is born fourth-class man. So if you keep them fourth class and degrade them into fifth class, sixth class, then how there will be peace? How there will be peace? Therefore in your country, in America, they are now perplexed, "Crime, Why and What to Do?" Because you kept them fourth class, and they are going down to be fifth class, sixth class, how you can expect peace? It is not possible. If you do not elevate them... He is already born śūdra, janmanā jāyate śūdraḥ. Now you have to reform him. Saṁskārāt. Saṁskāra means reforming. You are born śūdra. You are inclined to do something, so many things—intoxication, illicit sex and drinking and gambling and meat-eating. These are all śūdra qualities or less than that. Śūdras also, they abide by the Vedic orders. Śūdras also do not do whimsically whatever he likes. Śūdras, they are taken among the, in the Vedic society... Because śūdras also, they are last class, fourth class, they are eager to follow the orders or the orderly things as given by the brāhmaṇas. Therefore śūdras, up to śūdras, accepted as bona fide classification. And below the śūdras, they are called caṇḍālas, caṇḍālas, fifth grade. They are also mentioned, kirāta-hūṇāndhra-pulinda-pulkaśāḥ. Everything is analyzed.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Festival_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="6" parent="Lectures" text="Festival Lectures"><h3>Festival Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="SriRamaNavamiLordRamacandrasAppearanceDayHawaiiMarch271969_0" class="quote" parent="Festival_Lectures" book="Lec" index="3" link="Sri Rama-Navami, Lord Ramacandra's Appearance Day -- Hawaii, March 27, 1969" link_text="Sri Rama-Navami, Lord Ramacandra's Appearance Day -- Hawaii, March 27, 1969">
<div class="heading">Saṁskāra means training. Everyone is accepted as śūdra by birth. Janmanā jāyate śūdraḥ. Janmanā means by birth. By birth, everyone is born a śūdra, a fourth-class man.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Sri Rama-Navami, Lord Ramacandra's Appearance Day -- Hawaii, March 27, 1969|Sri Rama-Navami, Lord Ramacandra's Appearance Day -- Hawaii, March 27, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Of course, laborer class, they do not require any training. Laborer class means one who cannot do anything, neither become brāhmaṇa, nor become kṣatriya, nor become vaiśya. That means the last balance of the population, they are called laborer class, śūdra. Śūdra means one who has no training. Śūdra has no saṁskāra. Saṁskāra means training. Everyone is accepted as śūdra by birth. Janmanā jāyate śūdraḥ. Janmanā means by birth. By birth, everyone is born a śūdra, a fourth-class man. It is to be accepted, and actually so. Just like a child, innocent child, what does he know? He has to be trained. Either you train him as a brāhmaṇa or train him as a kṣatriya or train him as a vaiśya. Or otherwise, he is śūdra already, born śūdra. Śūdra has no training.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="General_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="11" parent="Lectures" text="General Lectures"><h3>General Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="HareKrishnaFestivalAddressSanDiegoJuly11972AtBalboaParkBowl_0" class="quote" parent="General_Lectures" book="Lec" index="119" link="Hare Krishna Festival Address -- San Diego, July 1, 1972, At Balboa Park Bowl" link_text="Hare Krishna Festival Address -- San Diego, July 1, 1972, At Balboa Park Bowl">
<div class="heading">Garbhādhāna-saṁskāra means that child born out of the sex life of the father and mother must come out a very nice child, not like the cat and dog.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Hare Krishna Festival Address -- San Diego, July 1, 1972, At Balboa Park Bowl|Hare Krishna Festival Address -- San Diego, July 1, 1972, At Balboa Park Bowl]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">When the wife is in menstrual period, after five days of the menstrual period, the wife and husband can have sex life for begetting rightful children. And before be getting a child, one must go... If he is in the higher orders of society, one must accept the garbhādhāna-saṁskāra. Garbhādhāna-saṁskāra means that child born out of the sex life of the father and mother must come out a very nice child, not like the cat and dog. That is called garbhādhāna-saṁskāra. Those who are in the higher position of the society, they are obliged to observe ten kinds of purificatory processes, out of which, the first purificatory process is garbhādhāna-saṁskāra. So the parents, when they take to sex life for begetting nice children, there is garbhādhāna-saṁskāra, and if one does not observe this garbhādhāna-saṁskāra, he immediately falls down to the group of śūdra from brahminical position. These are the injunctions in the Vedic literature. Sex life is not denied, but one must take responsibility for sex life; otherwise, he becomes entangled in so many sinful activities.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="section" sec_index="5" parent="compilation" text="Conversations and Morning Walks"><h2>Conversations and Morning Walks</h2>
</div>
<div id="1972_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="sub_section" sec_index="5" parent="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" text="1972 Conversations and Morning Walks"><h3>1972 Conversations and Morning Walks</h3>
</div>
<div id="ConversationwithBajajandBhusanSeptember111972ArlingtonTexasAtTheirHome_0" class="quote" parent="1972_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="39" link="Conversation with Bajaj and Bhusan -- September 11, 1972, Arlington, Texas, At Their Home" link_text="Conversation with Bajaj and Bhusan -- September 11, 1972, Arlington, Texas, At Their Home">
<div class="heading">Saṁskāra means you did some sinful activities and you are suffering. But He gives you protection. Sarva-pāpebhyo.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Conversation with Bajaj and Bhusan -- September 11, 1972, Arlington, Texas, At Their Home|Conversation with Bajaj and Bhusan -- September 11, 1972, Arlington, Texas, At Their Home]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: Well, saṁskāra you can change in a second. Saṁskāra may be powerful. (indistinct) Kṛṣṇa assures you, ahaṁ tvāṁ sarva-pāpebhyo mokṣayiṣyāmi. He will give you protection. Saṁskāra means you did some sinful activities and you are suffering. But He gives you protection. Sarva-pāpebhyo. Then what is the meaning of saṁskāra? You can change your saṁskāra immediately by surrendering to Kṛṣṇa. Why you are so much concerned with saṁskāra? He says, sarva-dharmān parityajya mām ekaṁ śaraṇaṁ... ([[Vanisource:BG 18.66|BG 18.66]]), ahaṁ tvāṁ sarva-pāpebhyo mokṣa... The saṁskāra as effects of sinful activities, that is troublesome. So He gives you protection. Mā śucaḥ, "Don't worry." Why don't you take this? You don't want to change your saṁskāra, and who can help you? That is a different thing. You don't want to change. Otherwise Kṛṣṇa is ready to give you all help. How their saṁskāra is changed? From the very beginning of their life they are addicted to these principles: illicit sex, meat-eating, intoxication, gambling. How they have changed? They don't touch it. How it has become possible?</p>
</div>
</div>
</div>

Sanga means

2010-04-09T13:25:01Z

Partha-sarathi: Created page with '<div id="compilation"> <div id="facts"> {{terms|"sadhu-sanga"|"sanga means"|"sat-sanga means"}} {{notes|}} {{compiler|Partha-sarathi}} {{complete|ALL}} {{first|09Apr10}} {{last|0…'

<div id="compilation">
<div id="facts">
{{terms|"sadhu-sanga"|"sanga means"|"sat-sanga means"}}
{{notes|}}
{{compiler|Partha-sarathi}}
{{complete|ALL}}
{{first|09Apr10}}
{{last|09Apr10}}
{{totals_by_section|BG=0|SB=0|CC=0|OB=0|Lec=23|Con=6|Let=0}}
{{total|29}}
{{toc right}}
[[Category:Meaning of Sanskrit Words]]
</div>
<div id="Lectures" class="section" sec_index="4" parent="compilation" text="Lectures"><h2>Lectures</h2>
</div>
<div id="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="0" parent="Lectures" text="Bhagavad-gita As It Is Lectures"><h3>Bhagavad-gita As It Is Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG211LondonAugust171973_1" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="48" link="Lecture on BG 2.11 -- London, August 17, 1973" link_text="Lecture on BG 2.11 -- London, August 17, 1973">
<div class="heading">Sat-sanga means this talking of Kṛṣṇa, hearing about Kṛṣṇa. When there is, there is no business. Not like a rented reciter or a paid reciter who is earning money by reciting.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 2.11 -- London, August 17, 1973|Lecture on BG 2.11 -- London, August 17, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">S the subject matter? Kṛṣṇa. That's all.</p>
<p>So Kṛṣṇa subject matter is so nice that simply you do not do anything. Simply hear, that's all. You have got God-given ear. You can hear. Sit down. Stane sthitaḥ śrutigataṁ tanuvān manobhiḥ. Śrutigatam, śruti means this ear. Śrota-pantaḥ. This is called śrota-pantaḥ. Getting knowledge by hearing. Satāṁ prasaṅgān mama vīrya-samvido bhavanty hṛtkārṇa-rasāyana-kathāḥ, satāṁ prasaṅgāt ([[Vanisource:SB 3.25.25|SB 3.25.25]]). When there is actually sat-sanga. Sat-sanga means this talking of Kṛṣṇa, hearing about Kṛṣṇa. When there is, there is no business. Not like a rented reciter or a paid reciter who is earning money by reciting. No, no. Not to hear from him. Actually, he's self-realized, who is working for the Lord, from satām. Satām means devotees. Satāṁ prasaṅga. Therefore is called satsaṅga. Satsaṅga means the association of the devotees. Sat means devotee. Sat means God. Oṁ tat sat. Or everything is asat. Asat means temporary.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG24647NewYorkMarch281966_2" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="105" link="Lecture on BG 2.46-47 -- New York, March 28, 1966" link_text="Lecture on BG 2.46-47 -- New York, March 28, 1966">
<div class="heading">Sat-saṅga means association with good persons who are engaged, if not cent percent, at least engaged, certain portion of his life for spiritual realization.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 2.46-47 -- New York, March 28, 1966|Lecture on BG 2.46-47 -- New York, March 28, 1966]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Just like we are holding these classes. This is called sat-saṅga. We are not discussing politics, we are not discussing something for sense enjoyment. We are discussing from Bhagavad-gītā about the constitution of the soul, about the what is God, what is our relation with God. This is called sato vṛtti, sat-saṅga. Sat-saṅga means association with good persons who are engaged, if not cent percent, at least engaged, certain portion of his life for spiritual realization.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG25859NewYorkApril271966_3" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="112" link="Lecture on BG 2.58-59 -- New York, April 27, 1966" link_text="Lecture on BG 2.58-59 -- New York, April 27, 1966">
<div class="heading">Nārī-saṅga means sex life, combination of man and woman, nārī-saṅgame. He says that "Since then, that whenever I think of sex life..." Because he has experienced.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 2.58-59 -- New York, April 27, 1966|Lecture on BG 2.58-59 -- New York, April 27, 1966]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Now, after he became a great devotee, spiritually engaged, he expresses that experience in this way, that yad-avadhi mama cetaḥ kṛṣṇa-padāravinde: "Since I have engaged my heart and soul in the supreme devotional service of the Lord, since then..." What is the result? Yad-avadhi mama cetaḥ kṛṣṇa-padāravinde nava-nava-rasa-dhāmany udyataṁ rantum āsīt: "I am getting every moment a new type of transcendental pleasure. Since then..." Bata nārī-saṅgame. This is materially. Nārī-saṅga means sex life, combination of man and woman, nārī-saṅgame. He says that "Since then, that whenever I think of sex life..." Because he has experienced. He was a family man, he was a king. He said that "Whenever I think of, not to act, but whenever I think of sex life, oh, I say, now, 'Tu!' " (as if spitting) So paraṁ dṛṣṭvā nivartate. Why this life has come to him? Because he has seen something. He has experienced something which is transcendental pleasure. And in comparison to the transcendental pleasure, this material pleasure is just like spitting. You see? Very insignificant.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG41922NewYorkAugust81966_4" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="181" link="Lecture on BG 4.19-22 -- New York, August 8, 1966" link_text="Lecture on BG 4.19-22 -- New York, August 8, 1966">
<div class="heading">Jana-saṅga means to associate with persons who are not interested in Kṛṣṇa consciousness. We should avoid. We should avoid association of persons who are not interested in Kṛṣṇa consciousness. If we make more association with persons who are not interested in Kṛṣṇa consciousness, then it will go against me.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 4.19-22 -- New York, August 8, 1966|Lecture on BG 4.19-22 -- New York, August 8, 1966]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">And laulyam. Laulyam means greediness. That is against Kṛṣṇa consciousness. Laulyam, and jana-saṅgaś ca. Jana-saṅga means to associate with persons who are not interested in Kṛṣṇa consciousness. We should avoid. We should avoid association of persons who are not interested in Kṛṣṇa consciousness. If we make more association with persons who are not interested in Kṛṣṇa consciousness, then it will go against me.</p>
<p>So these are six "against" rules. Similarly, there are six favorable rules. What are they?</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG71SydneyFebruary161973_5" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="238" link="Lecture on BG 7.1 -- Sydney, February 16, 1973" link_text="Lecture on BG 7.1 -- Sydney, February 16, 1973">
<div class="heading">Sādhu-saṅga means to associate with the devotees. Adau śraddhā tato sādhu-saṅga. Sādhu. Sādhu, this word, Sanskrit word, is meant for the devotees, the lover of Kṛṣṇa. That is also explained in the Bhagavad-gītā: sādhur eva sa mantavyaḥ (BG 9.30).
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 7.1 -- Sydney, February 16, 1973|Lecture on BG 7.1 -- Sydney, February 16, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">All these boys and girls who are under my direction, they have no other interest, simply Kṛṣṇa. So we have to associate with such persons, Adau śraddhā tato sādhu-saṅga ([[Vanisource:CC Madhya 22.54|CC Madhya 22.54]]). Sādhu-saṅga means to associate with the devotees. Adau śraddhā tato sādhu-saṅga. Sādhu. Sādhu, this word, Sanskrit word, is meant for the devotees, the lover of Kṛṣṇa. That is also explained in the Bhagavad-gītā: sādhur eva sa mantavyaḥ ([[Vanisource:BG 9.30|BG 9.30]]). Api cet sudurācāro bhajate mām ananya-bhāk, sādhur eva sa mantavyaḥ. One who has unflinching faith in Kṛṣṇa, one who is cent percent engaged to render service to Kṛṣṇa, he is called sādhu. Sādhu does not mean a kind of dress or kind of beard. No. Sādhu means a devotee, perfect devotee of Kṛṣṇa.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG1610HawaiiFebruary61975_6" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="399" link="Lecture on BG 16.10 -- Hawaii, February 6, 1975" link_text="Lecture on BG 16.10 -- Hawaii, February 6, 1975">
<div class="heading">Nārī means woman, and saṅga means union. So those who are practiced, so when there is actually no union, they think of union.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 16.10 -- Hawaii, February 6, 1975|Lecture on BG 16.10 -- Hawaii, February 6, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">The spiritual life means... If one is actually situated in spiritual life he'll get spiritual pleasure, transcendental bliss, by serving more and more, new and new. That is spiritual life. So Yāmunācārya said, yad-avadhi mama cetaḥ kṛṣṇa-padāravinde nava-nava-rasa-dhāmany udyataṁ rantum āsīt: "When I am now realizing transcendental pleasure every moment by serving Kṛṣṇa's lotus feet," tad-avadhi, "since then," bata nārī-saṅgame... Sometimes we enjoy subtle pleasure, thinking of sex life. That is called nārī-saṅgame. Nārī means woman, and saṅga means union. So those who are practiced, so when there is actually no union, they think of union. So Yāmunācārya said that "Not actually union with woman, but if I think of union," tad-avadhi bata nārī-saṅgame smaryamāne, smaryamāne, "simply by thinking," bhavati mukha-vikāraḥ, "oḥ, immediately I becomes disgusted: 'Aḥ, what is this nasty thing?' " Suṣṭhu niṣṭhī... (spits) This is perfect. (chuckles) This is perfection.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="1" parent="Lectures" text="Srimad-Bhagavatam Lectures"><h3>Srimad-Bhagavatam Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB12910DelhiNovember141973_0" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="57" link="Lecture on SB 1.2.9-10 -- Delhi, November 14, 1973" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.2.9-10 -- Delhi, November 14, 1973">
<div class="heading">Sādhu-saṅga means to associate with Kṛṣṇa conscious person. This is śāstra. Ādau śraddhā tataḥ sādhu...
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.2.9-10 -- Delhi, November 14, 1973|Lecture on SB 1.2.9-10 -- Delhi, November 14, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So actually, one by one, as people are coming to the association of the society, automatically he is becoming Kṛṣṇa conscious. That is practical. Ādau śraddhā tataḥ sādhu-saṅgaḥ. This is sādhu-saṅga. Sādhu-saṅga does not mean to associate with some saffron-colored men. Sādhu-saṅga means to associate with Kṛṣṇa conscious person. This is śāstra. Ādau śraddhā tataḥ sādhu... This is Rūpa Gosvāmī's direction, that if you want to develop your love for Kṛṣṇa, this is the process. Because real purpose of life is not dharma, artha, kāma, mokṣa (SB 4.8.41, Cc. Ādi 1.90). And that will be explained here. Jīvasya tattva-jijñāsā. What is the Absolute Truth? What is the aim of life? Then this is the process. Ādau śraddhā tataḥ sādhu-saṅgo 'tha bhajana-kriyā.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB1212VrndavanaOctober231972_1" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="64" link="Lecture on SB 1.2.12 -- Vrndavana, October 23, 1972" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.2.12 -- Vrndavana, October 23, 1972">
<div class="heading">So sādhu-saṅga means: Ādau śraddhā tataḥ sādhu-saṅgaḥ (Cc. Madhya 23.14-15). Sādhu-saṅga means to associate with the devotees of Kṛṣṇa. Ādau śraddhā tataḥ sādhu-saṅgo 'tha bhajana-kriyā.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.2.12 -- Vrndavana, October 23, 1972|Lecture on SB 1.2.12 -- Vrndavana, October 23, 1972]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So sādhu-saṅga means: Ādau śraddhā tataḥ sādhu-saṅgaḥ (Cc. Madhya 23.14-15). Sādhu-saṅga means to associate with the devotees of Kṛṣṇa. Ādau śraddhā tataḥ sādhu-saṅgo 'tha bhajana-kriyā. Sādhu-saṅga. As soon as these boys... They first of all, they come out of inquisitiveness to our several centers. Gradually, they shave their head and try to understand the books and literature. They then come forward: "Swamiji, give me initiation. Make, get me the sannyāsī-āśrama." Gradually they come. So ādau śraddhā tataḥ sā... Sādhu, this is the effect of sādhu-saṅga.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB1215LosAngelesAugust181972_2" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="70" link="Lecture on SB 1.2.15 -- Los Angeles, August 18, 1972" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.2.15 -- Los Angeles, August 18, 1972">
<div class="heading">And asat-saṅga means this intoxication, illicit sex and drinking, so many things, asat-saṅga.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.2.15 -- Los Angeles, August 18, 1972|Lecture on SB 1.2.15 -- Los Angeles, August 18, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">This knot, karma-bandha-phāṅsa. Sat-saṅga, this is sat-saṅga. This is sat-saṅga. You are hearing Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam in the front of Kṛṣṇa and practicing how to become pure. This is called sat-saṅga. And asat-saṅga means this intoxication, illicit sex and drinking, so many things, asat-saṅga. The advertisement, "Come on, here is cigarette, 'Kool,' make your brain cool." (laughter) "By smoking." (laughter) Rascal. They think that "I am smoking..." How it can be cool? But they purchase Kool. This is called māyā. He's smoking fire, and he's becoming cool. (laughter) And the advertisement is going on, and the rascals are captivated by these advertisement, and they smoke, become cool. Yes.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB1218CalcuttaSeptember261974_3" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="79" link="Lecture on SB 1.2.18 -- Calcutta, September 26, 1974" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.2.18 -- Calcutta, September 26, 1974">
<div class="heading">That śraddhā, that firm faith in Kṛṣṇa, can be more and more firm by sādhu-saṅga. Sādhu-saṅga means... Who is sādhu? A sādhu means a devotee. Sādhur eva sa mantavyaḥ (BG 9.30). Who is sādhu? Sādhu means..., does not mean that having a long beard and saffron-color dress. Sādhu means, mahātmā means, who is pure devotee.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.2.18 -- Calcutta, September 26, 1974|Lecture on SB 1.2.18 -- Calcutta, September 26, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Now practically you can see. These American and European boys, they began with śraddhā. I told them that "Kṛṣṇa is the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Kṛṣṇas tu bhagavān svayam ([[Vanisource:SB 1.3.28|SB 1.3.28]])." They accepted it. They did not present so many rascals, that "Here is another God, here is another God, here is another God." No. Kṛṣṇe bhakti kaile sarva-karma... They fixed up their faith. That is their fortune. They had no hodge-podge idea. Therefore they are making progress. Ādau śraddhā. Then sādhu-saṅga ([[Vanisource:CC Madhya 22.83|CC Madhya 22.83]]). That śraddhā, that firm faith in Kṛṣṇa, can be more and more firm by sādhu-saṅga. Sādhu-saṅga means... Who is sādhu? A sādhu means a devotee. Sādhur eva sa mantavyaḥ ([[Vanisource:BG 9.30|BG 9.30]]). Who is sādhu? Sādhu means..., does not mean that having a long beard and saffron-color dress. Sādhu means, mahātmā means, who is pure devotee.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB1221VrndavanaNovember11972_4" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="86" link="Lecture on SB 1.2.21 -- Vrndavana, November 1, 1972" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.2.21 -- Vrndavana, November 1, 1972">
<div class="heading">So mukta-saṅga means no material attachment. That is mukta-saṅga. When one is actually liberated, these are the signs.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.2.21 -- Vrndavana, November 1, 1972|Lecture on SB 1.2.21 -- Vrndavana, November 1, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">This is complete liberated stage. In the previous verse it has been spoken, bhagavat-tattva-vijñānaṁ mukta-saṅgasya jāyate. The science of God, bhagavat-tattva, the science of Absolute Truth, becomes manifest to the liberated soul. We find sometimes that one man is posing to have very much advanced in spiritual understanding or a great devotee, but mukta-saṅga..., he's not mukta-saṅga; he cannot give up smoking biḍi. You see. These are the small tests. One who has actually tasted spiritual life, his unwanted things of life would at once diminish. There is no need. Anartha-nivṛttiḥ syāt. Anartha. Anartha, things which are not wanted, which has no meaning. So mukta-saṅga means no material attachment. That is mukta-saṅga. When one is actually liberated, these are the signs.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB1222VrndavanaNovember21972_5" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="88" link="Lecture on SB 1.2.22 -- Vrndavana, November 2, 1972" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.2.22 -- Vrndavana, November 2, 1972">
<div class="heading">So we have discussed how to get out of the laws of nature—mukta-saṅgasya jāyate. Mukta-saṅga means one who has become freed from the three modes of material nature. After being freed from the laws of material nature or by the three modes of material nature, then we can talk of vāsudeva-bhakti.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.2.22 -- Vrndavana, November 2, 1972|Lecture on SB 1.2.22 -- Vrndavana, November 2, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So we have discussed how to get out of the laws of nature—mukta-saṅgasya jāyate. Mukta-saṅga means one who has become freed from the three modes of material nature. After being freed from the laws of material nature or by the three modes of material nature, then we can talk of vāsudeva-bhakti. But one can become free from this bondage of material nature simply by devotional service to Vāsudeva. That is being stressed in this chapter of Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam from the very beginning.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB1101112MayapuraJune251973_6" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="278" link="Lecture on SB 1.10.11-12 -- Mayapura, June 25, 1973" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.10.11-12 -- Mayapura, June 25, 1973">
<div class="heading">So this knowledge can be attained by sat-saṅga. Sat-saṅga. Sat-saṅga means... This is sat-saṅga, associating with devotees of the Lord.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.10.11-12 -- Mayapura, June 25, 1973|Lecture on SB 1.10.11-12 -- Mayapura, June 25, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So this knowledge can be attained by sat-saṅga. Sat-saṅga. Sat-saṅga means... This is sat-saṅga, associating with devotees of the Lord. So sat-saṅga. Sat-saṅgān mukta-duḥsaṅgaḥ. You cannot make association with two parties. If you want to associate with the devotees, then you have to give up the association of the nondevotees. That will be natural. Just like our, these students, although they are very young... They are not only young, but coming of very luxurious families in America, Europe. Here, the boys, they cannot even imagine how much luxury they enjoyed. Here, they have no employment, our young men.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB1101112MayapuraJune251973_7" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="278" link="Lecture on SB 1.10.11-12 -- Mayapura, June 25, 1973" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.10.11-12 -- Mayapura, June 25, 1973">
<div class="heading">Sat-saṅga means satāṁ prasaṅgān mama vīrya-saṁvidaḥ. When actually there is sat-saṅga... Not professional Bhāgavata readers or Bhāgavata reader...
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.10.11-12 -- Mayapura, June 25, 1973|Lecture on SB 1.10.11-12 -- Mayapura, June 25, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Sat-saṅga means satāṁ prasaṅgān mama vīrya-saṁvidaḥ. When actually there is sat-saṅga... Not professional Bhāgavata readers or Bhāgavata reader... No. Really realized souls of Bhāgavata, Śrīmad Bhagavad-gītā, they are called sat. Not for earning livelihood. They are not sat. Those who are, those who are reading Bhagavad-gītā and Bhāgavata for some worldly material gain, they are not sat. They are asat. Those who are actually reading Bhagavad-gītā and Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam for the satisfaction of Bhagavān, bhāgavata, they are sat. So once associating with these sat people, he cannot make anymore association asat. Here is a vivid examples: Hṛṣīkeśa. He left our company. He associated with some asat. Asat means nondevotees. Asat, generally, we understand rogues and thieves. But those who are devotees, they're less than rogues and thieves. Those who are not devotees, they're less than rogues and thieves. So he could not associate. It was struggle. At last, he had to leave.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB3263536BombayJanuary121975_8" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="494" link="Lecture on SB 3.26.35-36 -- Bombay, January 12, 1975" link_text="Lecture on SB 3.26.35-36 -- Bombay, January 12, 1975">
<div class="heading">Mukta-saṅga means although we are in this material world, we are not in touch with it. That is called mukta-saṅga. Mukta-saṅgaḥ paraṁ vrajet. We remain untouched by the material contamination and gradually becoming perfect. Then we can be transferred to the spiritual world.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 3.26.35-36 -- Bombay, January 12, 1975|Lecture on SB 3.26.35-36 -- Bombay, January 12, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">External arrangement means illusion. We have nothing to do with it. But due to this Kali-yuga especially, we are very much affected by these external disturbances. And that disturbances sometimes make us forced to forget our relationship with the Supreme, and that is called illusion. That is called māyā. But if we become very strictly adherent to Kṛṣṇa consciousness... That is very easily done at the Kali-yuga. Kīrtanād eva kṛṣṇasya mukta-saṅgaḥ paraṁ vrajet. Kīrtanād eva kṛṣṇasya ([[Vanisource:SB 12.3.51|SB 12.3.51]]). If you strictly chant this Hare Kṛṣṇa mantra, Hare Kṛṣṇa, Hare Kṛṣṇa, Kṛṣṇa Kṛṣṇa, Hare Hare/ Hare Rāma, Hare Rāma... That... It is especially prescribed for the men in this age. Then we become mukta-saṅga. Mukta-saṅga means although we are in this material world, we are not in touch with it. That is called mukta-saṅga. Mukta-saṅgaḥ paraṁ vrajet. We remain untouched by the material contamination and gradually becoming perfect. Then we can be transferred to the spiritual world.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB3281HonoluluJune11975_9" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="504" link="Lecture on SB 3.28.1 -- Honolulu, June 1, 1975" link_text="Lecture on SB 3.28.1 -- Honolulu, June 1, 1975">
<div class="heading">Sat-saṅga means persons who are making progress towards the permanent life. They are called sat.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 3.28.1 -- Honolulu, June 1, 1975|Lecture on SB 3.28.1 -- Honolulu, June 1, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So the real purpose is that we should give up this asat-patha. You sit properly, it is not... Asat-patha and sat-patha. Here it is said sat-patham. Sat-patham means our permanent goal of life. We are now interested with nonpermanent goal of life. People are thinking, "If I get a nice car, a nice apartment, a nice wife, a nice bank balance, then I will be happy." But this is asat, because none of this will stay. The bank balance also will not stay, the wife also will not stay, and good position, that will not... As soon as the body is finished, everything is finished. Therefore they are called asat. Narottama dāsa Ṭhākura has sung, sat-saṅga chāḍi'kainu asate vilāsa, te-kāraṇe lāgila mor karma-bandha-phāṅsa. Sat-saṅga. Sat-saṅga means persons who are making progress towards the permanent life. They are called sat.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB611MelbourneMay211975_10" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="578" link="Lecture on SB 6.1.1 -- Melbourne, May 21, 1975" link_text="Lecture on SB 6.1.1 -- Melbourne, May 21, 1975">
<div class="heading">Sādhu-saṅga means you have to give up the association of nondevotees. This question was asked to Śrī Caitanya was asked to Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu by a devotee.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 6.1.1 -- Melbourne, May 21, 1975|Lecture on SB 6.1.1 -- Melbourne, May 21, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Sādhu-saṅga means you have to give up the association of nondevotees. This question was asked to Śrī Caitanya was asked to Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu by a devotee. He was householder. So he inquired, "My dear Sir, what is the real standard of behavior of a devotee?" He immediately answered that asat-saṅga tyāga ei vaiṣṇava-ācāra ([[Vanisource:CC Madhya 22.87|CC Madhya 22.87]]). "Vaiṣṇava devotee, his first behavior is he should give up unwanted association." That is first. Now, the next question will be: "What is that unwanted association?" He answered, asat eka strī-saṅgī kṛṣṇābhakta' āra: "This unwanted association means people who are too much attached to sex life, they are unwanted. And the another: nondevotee of God. They are unwanted." So you be careful not to mix with these people and come to the devotional service, then your life is perfect.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB7912MontrealAugust191968_11" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="815" link="Lecture on SB 7.9.12 -- Montreal, August 19, 1968" link_text="Lecture on SB 7.9.12 -- Montreal, August 19, 1968">
<div class="heading">Ādau śraddhā tataḥ sādhu-saṅga 'tha bhajana-kriyā. And as soon as you intimately associate with the spiritual master, he teaches you how to develop devotional service.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 7.9.12 -- Montreal, August 19, 1968|Lecture on SB 7.9.12 -- Montreal, August 19, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Gopīs' surrender is the perfection of life. That is the highest perfectional stage of surrender. So that stage is very far, far away. First of all, learn to surrender; then you... Just like let us first of all enter into the school; then talk of M.A. examination. The gopīs' love is just like M.A. examination. So people are not even schooling. So first we have to surrender by the regulative principle, by the order of the spiritual master: "You do this, you do that, you do this, you do that." Then gradually, ādau śraddhā, if you have got faith, then ādau śraddhā tataḥ sādhu-saṅga (Cc. Madhya 23.14-15). Sādhu-saṅga means to associate with the bona fide spiritual master and abide by his order. Ādau śraddhā tataḥ sādhu-saṅga 'tha bhajana-kriyā. And as soon as you intimately associate with the spiritual master, he teaches you how to develop devotional service. Bhajana-kriyā. And if you are perfectly executing devotional service, then anartha-nivṛttiḥ syāt, then all your misgivings and misunderstanding will be cleared. Then niṣṭha, then you get firm faith.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Nectar_of_Devotion_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="2" parent="Lectures" text="Nectar of Devotion Lectures"><h3>Nectar of Devotion Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="TheNectarofDevotionBombayJanuary101973_0" class="quote" parent="Nectar_of_Devotion_Lectures" book="Lec" index="24" link="The Nectar of Devotion -- Bombay, January 10, 1973" link_text="The Nectar of Devotion -- Bombay, January 10, 1973">
<div class="heading">Sat-saṅga means association of the devotees. Satāṁ prasaṅgān mama vīrya-saṁvido bhavanti hṛt-karṇa-rasāyanāḥ.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:The Nectar of Devotion -- Bombay, January 10, 1973|The Nectar of Devotion -- Bombay, January 10, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So śṛṇvatāṁ sva-kathāḥ kṛṣṇaḥ ([[Vanisource:SB 1.2.17|SB 1.2.17]]). If we are sincerely hearing about Kṛṣṇa, this very first qualification, śravaṇaṁ kīrtanaṁ viṣṇoḥ. This society, we are holding classes, just to give opportunity to the people. We are not professional, that you come here and pay, then we continue, otherwise we stop. No. Our business is to distribute the glories of the Lord. Śravaṇaṁ kīrtanaṁ viṣṇoḥ ([[Vanisource:SB 7.5.23|SB 7.5.23]]). Therefore it is recommended, satāṁ prasaṅgān mama vīrya-saṁvido ([[Vanisource:SB 3.25.25|SB 3.25.25]]). In sat-saṅga. Sat-saṅga means association of the devotees. Satāṁ prasaṅgān mama vīrya-saṁvido bhavanti hṛt-karṇa-rasāyanāḥ. Just contrary to this, avaiṣṇava mukhodgīrṇaṁ pūtaṁ hari-kathāmṛtam, śravaṇaṁ naiva kartavyam. Those who are not vaiṣṇava, those who are not devotees, one should not hear from them.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Sri_Caitanya-caritamrta_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="3" parent="Lectures" text="Sri Caitanya-caritamrta Lectures"><h3>Sri Caitanya-caritamrta Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonCCMadhyalila221115NewYorkJanuary91967_0" class="quote" parent="Sri_Caitanya-caritamrta_Lectures" book="Lec" index="109" link="Lecture on CC Madhya-lila 22.11-15 -- New York, January 9, 1967" link_text="Lecture on CC Madhya-lila 22.11-15 -- New York, January 9, 1967">
<div class="heading">If by chance we get association of a pure devotee, then by his mercy this illusion becomes over. Tāṅra upadeśa, by his instructions. Sādhu-saṅga means tasmād satsu sajjeta buddhimān. Therefore it is advised that everyone should seek association of saintly persons.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on CC Madhya-lila 22.11-15 -- New York, January 9, 1967|Lecture on CC Madhya-lila 22.11-15 -- New York, January 9, 1967]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">If by chance we get association of a pure devotee, then by his mercy this illusion becomes over. Tāṅra upadeśa, by his instructions. Sādhu-saṅga means tasmād satsu sajjeta buddhimān. Therefore it is advised that everyone should seek association of saintly persons. And by saintly person's instruction, this ghost of ignorance will be removed. Tāṅra mantre. Just like you have seen ghostly haunted persons? In India there are so many cases. So there are chanter also. What is called, enchanter or...? Those who are, if he can make treatment a ghostly...</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Initiation_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="8" parent="Lectures" text="Initiation Lectures"><h3>Initiation Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="InitiationLectureNewYorkJuly281971_0" class="quote" parent="Initiation_Lectures" book="Lec" index="39" link="Initiation Lecture -- New York, July 28, 1971" link_text="Initiation Lecture -- New York, July 28, 1971">
<div class="heading">Saṅga means association, and pra means still elevated or intimate association. Kṛṣṇa's words, Kṛṣṇa's teachings, Kṛṣṇa's topics, they become very palatable in the association of devotees. In the association of nondevotees one can not understand Kṛṣṇa, neither it becomes very palatable.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Initiation Lecture -- New York, July 28, 1971|Initiation Lecture -- New York, July 28, 1971]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So those who are initiated now, you're path is now open to Kṛṣṇa's abode. Satāṁ prasaṅga: by association of devotees. Satām, satām means devotees. Sat, sat means, that exists eternally, is called sat. Kṛṣṇa is sat, om tat sat. So devotees are also sat. So satāṁ prasaṅga, by association... Prasaṅga means very intimate association. Saṅga means association, and pra means still elevated or intimate association. Kṛṣṇa's words, Kṛṣṇa's teachings, Kṛṣṇa's topics, they become very palatable in the association of devotees. In the association of nondevotees one can not understand Kṛṣṇa, neither it becomes very palatable. Bhagavad-gītā is well known in your country, since a very long time. There are so many editions of Bhagavad-gītā in your country, Indian and foreign editions.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="General_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="11" parent="Lectures" text="General Lectures"><h3>General Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonGurvastakamatUpsalaUniversityStockholmSeptember91973_0" class="quote" parent="General_Lectures" book="Lec" index="141" link="Lecture on Gurvastakam at Upsala University -- Stockholm, September 9, 1973" link_text="Lecture on Gurvastakam at Upsala University -- Stockholm, September 9, 1973">
<div class="heading">Hari-bhakta-saṅga means association of the devotees. These things are done... Outside we cannot do it.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on Gurvastakam at Upsala University -- Stockholm, September 9, 1973|Lecture on Gurvastakam at Upsala University -- Stockholm, September 9, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">If you sincerely engage your tongue only in the service of the Lord, you realize Him. It is so simple thing. It is not very difficult. Therefore, this prasādam program is there, introduced by the guru, spiritual master. Śrī-vigra... Catur-vidha-śrī-bhagavat-prasāda-svādv-anna-tṛptān hari-bhakta-saṅghān. Hari-bhakta-saṅga means association of the devotees. These things are done... Outside we cannot do it. But if there are some devotees, we can order, "Please do it. Distribute like this. Do like this." Therefore hari-bhakta-saṅghān. Kṛtvaiva tṛptiṁ bhajataḥ sadaiva. And when he's fully satisfied that the prasāda distribution is going on, he's very much pleased and engages himself in the devotional service of the Lord by chanting and dancing. This is the fourth symptom.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Purports_to_Songs" class="sub_section" sec_index="14" parent="Lectures" text="Purports to Songs"><h3>Purports to Songs</h3>
</div>
<div id="PurporttoBhajahuReManaSanFranciscoMarch161967_0" class="quote" parent="Purports_to_Songs" book="Lec" index="3" link="Purport to Bhajahu Re Mana -- San Francisco, March 16, 1967" link_text="Purport to Bhajahu Re Mana -- San Francisco, March 16, 1967">
<div class="heading">They are simply wasting in sense gratification like animals. So this is very instructing, that he is training his mind that "You engage your mind in the worship of Lord Kṛṣṇa." Durlabha mānava-janama sat-saṅge. And this training of the mind is possible only in good association, sat-saṅga. Sat-saṅga means persons who are simply, cent percent, engaged in the service of the Lord. They are called sat.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Purport to Bhajahu Re Mana -- San Francisco, March 16, 1967|Purport to Bhajahu Re Mana -- San Francisco, March 16, 1967]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">They are simply wasting in sense gratification like animals. So this is very instructing, that he is training his mind that "You engage your mind in the worship of Lord Kṛṣṇa." Durlabha mānava-janama sat-saṅge. And this training of the mind is possible only in good association, sat-saṅga. Sat-saṅga means persons who are simply, cent percent, engaged in the service of the Lord. They are called sat. Satāṁ prasaṅgāt. Without association of devotees, it is impossible to train the mind. It is not possible by the so-called yoga system or meditation. One has to associate with devotees; otherwise it is not possible. Therefore we have formed this Kṛṣṇa consciousness society so that one may take advantage of this association. So Govinda dāsa, poet and devotee, is advising, durlabha mānava-janama sat-saṅge: "You have got this very nice, rare human body. Now associate with devotees and engage your mind on the fearless lotus feet of Kṛṣṇa." He is requesting his mind.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="section" sec_index="5" parent="compilation" text="Conversations and Morning Walks"><h2>Conversations and Morning Walks</h2>
</div>
<div id="1973_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="sub_section" sec_index="6" parent="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" text="1973 Conversations and Morning Walks"><h3>1973 Conversations and Morning Walks</h3>
</div>
<div id="RoomConversationWithDavidWynneJuly91973London_0" class="quote" parent="1973_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="34" link="Room Conversation With David Wynne -- July 9, 1973, London" link_text="Room Conversation With David Wynne -- July 9, 1973, London">
<div class="heading">Sat-saṅga means association with the devotees. That is called sat-saṅga. So the, one poet, Vaiṣṇava poet, is regretting that "I did not keep association with the devotees, and I wanted to enjoy life with the nondevotees. Therefore I'm being entangled in the fruitive activities."
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Room Conversation With David Wynne -- July 9, 1973, London|Room Conversation With David Wynne -- July 9, 1973, London]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: Therefore, our Society is association. If we keep good association, then we don't touch the darkness. What is that association? There is a song, sat-saṅga cari goinu asate vilāsa teka name lagi loma karma bandha phāṅsa.(?) Sat-saṅga. Sat-saṅga means association with the devotees. That is called sat-saṅga. So the, one poet, Vaiṣṇava poet, is regretting that "I did not keep association with the devotees, and I wanted to enjoy life with the nondevotees. Therefore I'm being entangled in the fruitive activities." Karma bandha phāṅsa. Entanglement. Here in this material world we act, and the result is there. Again we enjoy the result and act, again another result. We act, another result, another result. Because as soon as you act, there will be some result, good or bad. So, good or bad, by good result we get good birth, good money, good bodily features, good education—these are the effects of good work. And the effects of bad work, low-grade family, abominable, ugly bodily features, no education, no money, poor—these are the two effects of material good and bad work. But those who are trying to be transcendental both to the good and bad work, devotees, they are perfect. Because in this material world either you do good work or bad work, you have to suffer the material condition.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="RoomConversationwithMisterPopworthandEFSchumacherJuly261973London_1" class="quote" parent="1973_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="53" link="Room Conversation with Mister Popworth and E. F. Schumacher -- July 26, 1973, London" link_text="Room Conversation with Mister Popworth and E. F. Schumacher -- July 26, 1973, London">
<div class="heading">Sat-saṅga means spiritual association. So we have given up spiritual association, and asatye vilāsa, we have taken to material enjoyment. So sat-saṅga chāḍi kainu... There are two things, material and spiritual. So sat-saṅga chāḍi kainu asatye...
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Room Conversation with Mister Popworth and E. F. Schumacher -- July 26, 1973, London|Room Conversation with Mister Popworth and E. F. Schumacher -- July 26, 1973, London]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: Yes. Thank you very much for your coming. I have read some of your ideas. So from your writing it appears you are nice, thoughtful man. Muni, the Sanskrit word is muni. Just like Nārada Muni. They are very thoughtful. So I have read one description of, "Crisis of Increasing Motor Cars," in this paper. Actually, we are creating a crisis. This advancement of modern civilization is simply creating crisis. One Vaiṣṇava poet, he has sung: sat-saṅga chāḍi kainu asatye vilāsa. Sat-saṅga means spiritual association. So we have given up spiritual association, and asatye vilāsa, we have taken to material enjoyment. So sat-saṅga chāḍi kainu... There are two things, material and spiritual. So sat-saṅga chāḍi kainu asatye... "I have given up spiritual association, and I have taken to material association. Therefore I have become entangled." Sei karaṇe lāgilā mora karma-bandha-phāṅsā. We are becoming more and more entangled in material activities. We are trying to solve one problem, and creating another big problem. Just like I was reading the "Motor Car Crisis." We thought that with a horseless carriage it will be very convenient to travel. But against that convenience, so-called convenience, we have created so many inconveniences. It is very nicely described in that paper I was reading.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="RoomConversationNovember31973NewDelhi_2" class="quote" parent="1973_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="84" link="Room Conversation -- November 3, 1973, New Delhi" link_text="Room Conversation -- November 3, 1973, New Delhi">
<div class="heading">"In association with pure devotees." So if you are karmīs, then where is the..., What is the value of this association? Sat-saṅga. Sat-saṅga means assembly, discussion.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Room Conversation -- November 3, 1973, New Delhi|Room Conversation -- November 3, 1973, New Delhi]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: "In association with pure devotees." So if you are karmīs, then where is the..., What is the value of this association? Sat-saṅga. Sat-saṅga means assembly, discussion. Bodhayantaḥ parasparam, tuṣyanti ca ramanti ca. If you are not interested in association, discussion, then you are finished. So... karmīs, they are fools and rascals. When you have got this center, it is not that you should be engaged from morning till you go to bed for sense gratification. That is not life. That is karmī's life. You have no time for sat-saṅga, for association. You cannot make any progress by this sort of karmī's life. We have to work for organization, but not that whole day and night engaged and no sat-saṅga. That is a misguided policy, and it will spoil the whole structure. In Los Angeles, they regularly assemble during ārati and class. If this regulative principle is lost, then you are karmīs. They must come back by six o'clock, suspending all other duties, and assemble by seven o'clock. Joint mess program is not good. "You bring some money, you bring some money and spend us jointly for eating, sleeping." That is called joint mess. You know the joint mess? This word? What is that, meaning?</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1976_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="sub_section" sec_index="9" parent="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" text="1976 Conversations and Morning Walks"><h3>1976 Conversations and Morning Walks</h3>
</div>
<div id="MorningWalkApril151976Bombay_0" class="quote" parent="1976_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="76" link="Morning Walk -- April 15, 1976, Bombay" link_text="Morning Walk -- April 15, 1976, Bombay">
<div class="heading">Sat-saṅga means you have to associate with sat, devotees. Satāṁ prasaṅgān mama vīrya-saṁvido bhavanti hṛt-karṇa-rasāyanāḥ kathāḥ (SB 3.25.25). If you associate with sat-saṅga, then you'll gradually relish Kṛṣṇa consciousness. Otherwise not.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Morning Walk -- April 15, 1976, Bombay|Morning Walk -- April 15, 1976, Bombay]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Dr. Patel: There is sat-saṅga sadācāraṁ nirāvinam.(?)These three qualities come to men, sir.</p>
<p>Prabhupāda: Yes. Sat-saṅga means you have to associate with sat, devotees. Satāṁ prasaṅgān mama vīrya-saṁvido bhavanti hṛt-karṇa-rasāyanāḥ kathāḥ ([[Vanisource:SB 3.25.25|SB 3.25.25]]). If you associate with sat-saṅga, then you'll gradually relish Kṛṣṇa consciousness. Otherwise not.</p>
<p>Dr. Patel: Just like Nārada Muni.</p>
<p>Prabhupāda: Yes, anyone. Anyone. It is open to everyone. So therefore we are trying to open centers, all parts of the world, to give them chance of sat-saṅga, so that gradually they will become perfect. And that is happening actually. Caitanya Mahāprabhu never said that you find out some first-class men. No. He said, yāre dekha tāre kaha kṛṣṇa. It is not necessary that you have to find out some qualified person. Anyone. Simply instruct him what Kṛṣṇa has said, that's all. Yāre dekha tāre kaha. There is no question of selecting. Why selection? All are fallen. The so-called gentleman, he is also fallen.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1977_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="sub_section" sec_index="10" parent="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" text="1977 Conversations and Morning Walks"><h3>1977 Conversations and Morning Walks</h3>
</div>
<div id="MorningDarsanaandRoomConversationRamkrishnaBajajandfriendsJanuary91977Bombay_0" class="quote" parent="1977_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="25" link="Morning Darsana and Room Conversation Ramkrishna Bajaj and friends -- January 9, 1977, Bombay" link_text="Morning Darsana and Room Conversation Ramkrishna Bajaj and friends -- January 9, 1977, Bombay">
<div class="heading">Well, saṅga means execution. When you associate with medical association or sharebrokers' association, simply go there and sit down is not your business. You have to do something.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Morning Darsana and Room Conversation Ramkrishna Bajaj and friends -- January 9, 1977, Bombay|Morning Darsana and Room Conversation Ramkrishna Bajaj and friends -- January 9, 1977, Bombay]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: Yes. No, sat-saṅga means sat. Sat means which is true and not contaminated. That is sat. Oṁ tat sat. So sat-saṅga means to associate with spiritual knowledge. That is sat.</p>
<p>Guest (5): And execution of the discourse.</p>
<p>Prabhupāda: Well, saṅga means execution. When you associate with medical association or sharebrokers' association, simply go there and sit down is not your business. You have to do something. You have to do something. Sat-saṅga means that. Tad-yoṣanāt aśu apavarga-vartmani. Sat-saṅga means you have to take the knowledge and use it for practical purpose. That is sat-saṅga. So our this Kṛṣṇa consciousness movement is trying to give the sat-saṅga, opening centers all over the world. If people take advantage of it they'll be benefited. But if he is ahaṅkāra-vimūḍhātmā, then it is very unfortunate. Mandāḥ sumanda-matayo manda-bhāgyā hy upadrutāḥ ([[Vanisource:SB 1.1.10|SB 1.1.10]]). This is Kali-yuga. The leaders also do not associate with sat, and they create their own imagination. Sat, oṁ tat sat. Bhagavān is the supreme sat. So they do not care for Bhagavān, so there is no sat-saṅga. Asat-saṅga.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="RoomConversationJanuary271977Bhuvanesvara_1" class="quote" parent="1977_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="56" link="Room Conversation -- January 27, 1977, Bhuvanesvara" link_text="Room Conversation -- January 27, 1977, Bhuvanesvara">
<div class="heading">The sādhu-saṅga means associate with sādhu, guru. If we have śraddhā that "I shall now become Kṛṣṇa conscious"—this is śraddhā, "It is very nice"—then sādhu-saṅga: (CC Madhya 22.83) those who are actually Kṛṣṇa conscious, you associate with him. Then bhajana-kriyā. Then bhajana-kriyā...
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Room Conversation -- January 27, 1977, Bhuvanesvara|Room Conversation -- January 27, 1977, Bhuvanesvara]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: Ah. For Kṛṣṇa you have to give up sense gratification. No illicit sex, no meat-eating, no intoxication, no gambling—you have to adopt so many things, tyāga. Anartha-nivṛtti. These are anartha, unnecessary things. Do you think if you do not smoke, you die? Unnecessary. What is absolutely necessary, you accept. So bhogādi-tyāgaḥ kṛṣṇārthe. Kṛṣṇa says, sarva-dharmān parityajya: ([[Vanisource:BG 18.66|BG 18.66]]) "You have created so many unnecessary things. Give up." So that is not possible immediately, but it is possible. Ādau śraddhā tataḥ sādhu-saṅgaḥ (Cc. Madhya 23.14-15). The sādhu-saṅga means associate with sādhu, guru. If we have śraddhā that "I shall now become Kṛṣṇa conscious"—this is śraddhā, "It is very nice"—then sādhu-saṅga: ([[Vanisource:CC Madhya 22.83|CC Madhya 22.83]]) those who are actually Kṛṣṇa conscious, you associate with him. Then bhajana-kriyā. Then bhajana-kriyā... The bhajana, that rise early in the morning, chant Hare Kṛṣṇa mantra, take your bath, and so many things, bhajana-kriyā... Then anartha-nivṛttiḥ syāt. Then all these unwanted things will be finished automatically. And if you do not do these first three, the fourth will not come, fourth stage, anartha... And after anartha-nivṛttiḥ syāt, then niṣṭhā, firm faith. Then anartha, tato ruciḥ. Then taste. Then you get taste. Ādau śraddhā tataḥ..., anartha-nivṛttiḥ syāt, tato niṣṭhā tato ruciḥ (Cc. Madhya 23.14-15). Taste. Just like you have got a taste for a food. You cannot give it up. "I want this." Ruci. Athāsaktiḥ. Then you become attached. Tato bhāvaḥ. Sādhakānām ayaṁ premṇaḥ prādurbhāve bhavet kramaḥ. This is the subject there.(?)</p>
</div>
</div>
</div>

Krodha means

2010-04-09T12:52:51Z

Partha-sarathi: Created page with '<div id="compilation"> <div id="facts"> {{terms|"krodha means"}} {{notes|}} {{compiler|Partha-sarathi}} {{complete|ALL}} {{first|09Apr10}} {{last|09Apr10}} {{totals_by_section|BG…'

<div id="compilation">
<div id="facts">
{{terms|"krodha means"}}
{{notes|}}
{{compiler|Partha-sarathi}}
{{complete|ALL}}
{{first|09Apr10}}
{{last|09Apr10}}
{{totals_by_section|BG=0|SB=0|CC=1|OB=0|Lec=10|Con=0|Let=0}}
{{total|11}}
{{toc right}}
[[Category:Meaning of Sanskrit Words]]
</div>
<div id="Sri_Caitanya-caritamrta" class="section" sec_index="2" parent="compilation" text="Sri Caitanya-caritamrta"><h2>Sri Caitanya-caritamrta</h2>
</div>
<div id="CC_Madhya-lila" class="sub_section" sec_index="2" parent="Sri_Caitanya-caritamrta" text="CC Madhya-lila"><h3>CC Madhya-lila</h3>
</div>
<div id="CCMadhya155_0" class="quote" parent="CC_Madhya-lila" book="CC" index="54" link="CC Madhya 1.55" link_text="CC Madhya 1.55">
<div class="heading">The word kāma means lusty desire, bhaya means fear, and krodha means anger. If one somehow or other approaches Kṛṣṇa, his life becomes successful.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:CC Madhya 1.55|CC Madhya 1.55, Purport]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="purport text"><p style="display: inline;">The word kāma means lusty desire, bhaya means fear, and krodha means anger. If one somehow or other approaches Kṛṣṇa, his life becomes successful. The gopīs approached Kṛṣṇa with lusty desire. Kṛṣṇa was a very beautiful boy, and they wanted to meet and enjoy His company. But this lusty desire is different from that of the material world. It appears like mundane lust, but in actuality it is the highest form of attraction to Kṛṣṇa. Caitanya Mahāprabhu was a sannyāsī; He left home and everything else. He could certainly not be induced by any mundane lusty desires. So when He used the word madana-dahane ("in the fire of lusty desire"), He meant that out of pure love for Kṛṣṇa He was burning in the fire of separation from Kṛṣṇa. Whenever He met Jagannātha, either in the temple or during the Ratha-yātrā, Caitanya Mahāprabhu used to think, "Now I have gotten the Lord of My life and soul."</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Lectures" class="section" sec_index="4" parent="compilation" text="Lectures"><h2>Lectures</h2>
</div>
<div id="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="0" parent="Lectures" text="Bhagavad-gita As It Is Lectures"><h3>Bhagavad-gita As It Is Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG4911NewYorkJuly251966_0" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="152" link="Lecture on BG 4.9-11 -- New York, July 25, 1966" link_text="Lecture on BG 4.9-11 -- New York, July 25, 1966">
<div class="heading">Bhaya means fear, and krodha means anger. So these three stages are there in our life.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 4.9-11 -- New York, July 25, 1966|Lecture on BG 4.9-11 -- New York, July 25, 1966]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Kṛṣṇa says that "Arjuna, in the past there were many sages who," vīta-rāga-bhaya-krodhāḥ, "after surpassing three stages of existence, when they came to Kṛṣṇa consciousness, they were liberated." Vita-rāga-bhaya-krodhāḥ. Now, what is this rāga? Rāga-bhaya-krodhāḥ. Rāga means attachment, attachment. And vīta-rāga-bhaya. Bhaya means fear, and krodha means anger. So these three stages are there in our life.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG4911NewYorkJuly251966_1" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="152" link="Lecture on BG 4.9-11 -- New York, July 25, 1966" link_text="Lecture on BG 4.9-11 -- New York, July 25, 1966">
<div class="heading">Krodha means there are other persons who are neither impersonalists nor personalists. They are what are called more or less atheists.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 4.9-11 -- New York, July 25, 1966|Lecture on BG 4.9-11 -- New York, July 25, 1966]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Krodha means there are other persons who are neither impersonalists nor personalists. They are what are called more or less atheists. Atheist means they don't believe in any transcendental nature. Even they do not believe in the existence of the soul. They simply concern themselves with this material body. Just like Buddha philosophy. Buddha philosophy does not accept the existence of the soul. Buddha philosophy says that this material body is a combination of matter. Now, as soon as the matter is dissolved, then the feelings of happiness and distress is gone. But according to Bhagavad-gītā, the existence of soul is accepted in the Vedic literature.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG410PublicMeetingRomeMay251974_2" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="154" link="Lecture on BG 4.10 Public Meeting -- Rome, May 25, 1974" link_text="Lecture on BG 4.10 Public Meeting -- Rome, May 25, 1974">
<div class="heading">Bhaya means fearfulness, and krodha means anger. Because we are attached to the material enjoyment, we are also very much always fearful how our enjoyment may not be disturbed.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 4.10 Public Meeting -- Rome, May 25, 1974|Lecture on BG 4.10 Public Meeting -- Rome, May 25, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">The problems of life there are many, but they are pertaining to the body. Real problem is how to get the spirit soul out of this material encagement. The body has got attachment for material enjoyment. Therefore in this verse it is said, vīta-rāga, how to become detached from this material attachment. Rāga means attachment; vīta-rāga, giving up this attachment. Vīta-rāga-bhaya-krodhāḥ ([[Vanisource:BG 2.56|BG 2.56]]). Bhaya means fearfulness, and krodha means anger. Because we are attached to the material enjoyment, we are also very much always fearful how our enjoyment may not be disturbed. And if our material enjoyment is not fulfilled, we become angry. This is our position on account of this material body. Therefore spiritual culture means how to get out of this attachment, fearfulness and the position of becoming angry.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG410FestivalatMaisondeFaubourgGenevaMay311974_3" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="155" link="Lecture on BG 4.10 Festival at Maison de Faubourg -- Geneva, May 31, 1974" link_text="Lecture on BG 4.10 Festival at Maison de Faubourg -- Geneva, May 31, 1974">
<div class="heading">This is a verse in Sanskrit spoken by Lord Kṛṣṇa in the Fourth Chapter, verse number ten. Vīta-rāga means "freed from attachment." Bhaya means fearfulness, and krodha means anger. So being freed from these material qualities... In the material existence, at the present moment, we are very much attached to the material enjoyment. That is called rāga.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 4.10 Festival at Maison de Faubourg -- Geneva, May 31, 1974|Lecture on BG 4.10 Festival at Maison de Faubourg -- Geneva, May 31, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">This is a verse in Sanskrit spoken by Lord Kṛṣṇa in the Fourth Chapter, verse number ten. Vīta-rāga means "freed from attachment." Bhaya means fearfulness, and krodha means anger. So being freed from these material qualities... In the material existence, at the present moment, we are very much attached to the material enjoyment. That is called rāga. And if we cannot fulfill our desires, then there is krodha, anger. And accompanied by krodha and attachment, there is always a tendency of fearfulness. So Kṛṣṇa says... Kṛṣṇa means... When I speak Kṛṣṇa, Kṛṣṇa means the all-attractive Supreme Personality of Godhead. So man-mayā, when one becomes attached to God, giving up the attachment of this material sense pleasure, when one becomes... Attachment must be there, either this way or that way. If we do not become attached to the Supreme Being, then we must be attached to this material enjoyment.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG410CalcuttaSeptember231974_4" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="157" link="Lecture on BG 4.10 -- Calcutta, September 23, 1974" link_text="Lecture on BG 4.10 -- Calcutta, September 23, 1974">
<div class="heading">Krodha means when we cannot satisfy our senses in the... We try to satisfy our senses... Just like the jackal. He wanted to eat some grapes, but jumping, jumping, he could not get.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 4.10 -- Calcutta, September 23, 1974|Lecture on BG 4.10 -- Calcutta, September 23, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So if you take to Kṛṣṇa consciousness, then these are the result. Vīta-rāga-bhaya-krodhāḥ ([[Vanisource:BG 2.56|BG 2.56]]). Krodha means when we cannot satisfy our senses in the... We try to satisfy our senses... Just like the jackal. He wanted to eat some grapes, but jumping, jumping, he could not get. Then, in krodha, he says, "Oh, it is useless. It is sour. We don't want." So this krodha, in the absence of sense gratification, there is krodha. Kāma eṣa krodha eṣa rajo-guṇa-samudbhavaḥ.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG52229NewYorkAugust311966_5" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="206" link="Lecture on BG 5.22-29 -- New York, August 31, 1966" link_text="Lecture on BG 5.22-29 -- New York, August 31, 1966">
<div class="heading">We have to give up this lust and kāma. Kāma is lust, and krodha means anger. Now, just see... Kāma-krodha-vimuktānām.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 5.22-29 -- New York, August 31, 1966|Lecture on BG 5.22-29 -- New York, August 31, 1966]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Kāma-krodha-vimuktānām. Now, this kāma-krodha, lust, anger, it has been advised in the Fourth Chapter that they are our very great enemies, so we have to give it up. Kāma-krodha-vimuktānām. Kāma-krodha. We have to give up this lust and kāma. Kāma is lust, and krodha means anger. Now, just see... Kāma-krodha-vimuktānām. How kāma-krodha-vimukta, how one can be freed from kāma-krodha? Kāma-krodha, how one can be freed? Just see the same example we see that Arjuna, he was thinking of the welfare of his kinsmen, and Kṛṣṇa was asking that "You should fight." And he was declining. So this kind of declining is kāma, lust, his own sense gratification. As soon as he became to satisfy the senses of Kṛṣṇa, then he is freed from his own kāma, own lust.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="1" parent="Lectures" text="Srimad-Bhagavatam Lectures"><h3>Srimad-Bhagavatam Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB11620HawaiiJanuary161974_0" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="334" link="Lecture on SB 1.16.20 -- Hawaii, January 16, 1974" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.16.20 -- Hawaii, January 16, 1974">
<div class="heading">So that is the world. All foolish talking or foolish literature, it has no value. So it has to be controlled. That is called controlling the vāco vegam. Krodha-vegam. Krodha means anger.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.16.20 -- Hawaii, January 16, 1974|Lecture on SB 1.16.20 -- Hawaii, January 16, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Urge, yes. Just like I am talking some nonsense. That the vāco vegam; it has no value. We should fix something which has value. One who can control, it is better not to talk than to talk foolish. So that is the world. All foolish talking or foolish literature, it has no value. So it has to be controlled. That is called controlling the vāco vegam. Krodha-vegam. Krodha means anger. So it is also urge. Suppose I am insulted by somebody. Naturally, I'll be angry, but if I can control, "All right, let me... He's a foolish. He has done. Why shall I lose my temper?" That is called controlling krodha-vegam. Vāco vegaṁ krodha-vegam, manasa-vegam, mind. It has got so many urges. Mind is driving practically, "Let us go there, let us go there, let us do this, let us..." Never mind sinful or pious, mind is always dictating and rejecting.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB791MayapurFebruary101977_1" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="784" link="Lecture on SB 7.9.1 -- Mayapur, February 10, 1977" link_text="Lecture on SB 7.9.1 -- Mayapur, February 10, 1977">
<div class="heading">So these bad habits, kāma krodha-kāma means lust; krodha means anger—so if they are also coming from God, then how we can neglect it?
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 7.9.1 -- Mayapur, February 10, 1977|Lecture on SB 7.9.1 -- Mayapur, February 10, 1977]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So these bad habits, kāma krodha-kāma means lust; krodha means anger—so if they are also coming from God, then how we can neglect it? How we can reject it? So there is no need of rejecting. That is the Narottama dāsa Ṭhākura's... You cannot reject. That is not possible. As you are a living being, there must be kāma, krodha, lobha, moha, mātsarya. You cannot reject it. You cannot make it zero. That is impersonalism. But it has its proper use. That you have to know. Unless you know the proper use of everything, everything... Proper use means it must be used for Kṛṣṇa. Then it is proper use. Otherwise it is misused.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="General_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="11" parent="Lectures" text="General Lectures"><h3>General Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureMontrealOctober261968_0" class="quote" parent="General_Lectures" book="Lec" index="27" link="Lecture -- Montreal, October 26, 1968" link_text="Lecture -- Montreal, October 26, 1968">
<div class="heading">So kāma eṣa krodha eṣa rajo-guṇa-samudbhavaḥ. Kāma and krodha. Kāma means desire, lust. Kāma. And when the desire or lust is not fulfilled, then there is krodha. Krodha means anger.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture -- Montreal, October 26, 1968|Lecture -- Montreal, October 26, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So kāma eṣa krodha eṣa rajo-guṇa-samudbhavaḥ. Kāma and krodha. Kāma means desire, lust. Kāma. And when the desire or lust is not fulfilled, then there is krodha. Krodha means anger. There are so many cases of criminality, when the lust is not fulfilled, one commits some criminal action and he is punished and so many things happen. So kāma eṣa krodha eṣa rajo-guṇa-samudbhavaḥ. As we have discussed many times that we are in this material world controlled by the three modes of material nature. Three qualities: goodness, passion and ignorance. So goodness... Yes, passion and ignorance are the causes of our bondage. And goodness is also cause of bondage, but in that platform one can see things as they are. Goodness. Prakāśa. Just like at night we cannot see, but in daytime we see. But seeing is not all. Unless I am convinced of something, even seeing... Just the same example: one man is seeing that a criminal person is punished; still he is committing criminal act.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Departure_Talks" class="sub_section" sec_index="12" parent="Lectures" text="Departure Talks"><h3>Departure Talks</h3>
</div>
<div id="ConversationHawaiiJune201975_0" class="quote" parent="Departure_Talks" book="Lec" index="6" link="Conversation -- Hawaii, June 20, 1975" link_text="Conversation -- Hawaii, June 20, 1975">
<div class="heading">Yes. Kāma, krodha, lobha, moha, mātsarya. Kāma means lusty. Krodha means anger. If my lusty desire is not fulfilled, then I become angry. Then I have to serve anger. Kāma, krodha.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Conversation -- Hawaii, June 20, 1975|Conversation -- Hawaii, June 20, 1975]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: Yes. Kāma, krodha, lobha, moha, mātsarya. Kāma means lusty. Krodha means anger. If my lusty desire is not fulfilled, then I become angry. Then I have to serve anger. Kāma, krodha. Then I become more greedy. Kāma krodha lobha. Then I become illusioned, moha. Then I become envious. In this way I have become implicated. So this service of this material world means I become more and more implicated. Therefore a devotee says, "My Lord, now I have got sense." What is that sense? "Now I am meant for service, I have rendered service, but nobody has become happy, either the master or myself. Therefore now I have got intelligence: why not serve You? You are the supreme master. So I have come to You. Please engage me in Your service." This is full surrender. Kāmādīnāṁ kati na katidhā pālitā durnideśāḥ. By serving this material objective, there is no peace. Everyone is unhappy although they are rendering service and taking service. This is going on, but nobody is happy because this is artificial. Real service... Unless the thing comes to the real point, there is no peace. Here everyone is trying to become master, and everyone wants to avoid service. But by the nature's law, one has to become servant and render service. Going on. Conglomeration. Kāmādīnāṁ kati na katidhā pālitā durnideśās teṣāṁ mayi na karuṇā jātā na trapā nopaśāntiḥ.</p>
</div>
</div>
</div>

Sisya means

2010-04-09T11:01:44Z

Partha-sarathi: Created page with '<div id="compilation"> <div id="facts"> {{terms|"sisya means"|"sisya, means"}} {{notes|}} {{compiler|Partha-sarathi}} {{complete|ALL}} {{first|09Apr10}} {{last|09Apr10}} {{totals…'

<div id="compilation">
<div id="facts">
{{terms|"sisya means"|"sisya, means"}}
{{notes|}}
{{compiler|Partha-sarathi}}
{{complete|ALL}}
{{first|09Apr10}}
{{last|09Apr10}}
{{totals_by_section|BG=0|SB=0|CC=0|OB=0|Lec=21|Con=4|Let=0}}
{{total|25}}
{{toc right}}
[[Category:Meaning of Sanskrit Words]]
</div>
<div id="Lectures" class="section" sec_index="4" parent="compilation" text="Lectures"><h2>Lectures</h2>
</div>
<div id="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="0" parent="Lectures" text="Bhagavad-gita As It Is Lectures"><h3>Bhagavad-gita As It Is Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG27LondonAugust71973_0" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="39" link="Lecture on BG 2.7 -- London, August 7, 1973" link_text="Lecture on BG 2.7 -- London, August 7, 1973">
<div class="heading">So... "Kindly speak to me that." "So why shall I speak to you?" Here says: śiṣyas te 'ham (BG 2.7). "Now I am accepting You as my guru. I become Your śiṣya." Śiṣya means: "Whatever you'll say, I'll accept." That is śiṣya. The śiṣya word comes from śas-dhātu. Śas-dhātu. Śāstra. Śāstra. Śāsana. Śiṣya.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 2.7 -- London, August 7, 1973|Lecture on BG 2.7 -- London, August 7, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So... "Kindly speak to me that." "So why shall I speak to you?" Here says: śiṣyas te 'ham ([[Vanisource:BG 2.7|BG 2.7]]). "Now I am accepting You as my guru. I become Your śiṣya." Śiṣya means: "Whatever you'll say, I'll accept." That is śiṣya. The śiṣya word comes from śas-dhātu. Śas-dhātu. Śāstra. Śāstra. Śāsana. Śiṣya. These are from the same root. Śas-dhātu. Śas-dhātu means rule, ruling. So we can rule in various ways. We can be ruled, becoming a śiṣya of a proper guru. That is śas-dhātu. Or we can be ruled by śāstra, weapon. Just like king has got weapon. If you don't follow the king's instruction or government's instruction, then there is police force, military force. That is śāstra. And there is śāstra also. Śāstra means book, scripture. Just like Bhagavad-gītā. Everything is there. So we must be ruled, either by śāstra, śāstra or guru. Or becoming śiṣya. Therefore it is said: śiṣyas te 'ham ([[Vanisource:BG 2.7|BG 2.7]]). "I become voluntarily... I surrender unto You." "Now you become śiṣya. What is the proof that you have become My śiṣya?" Śādhi māṁ tvāṁ prapannam. "Now I am fully surrender." Prapannam.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG211RotaryClubAddressHotelImperialDelhiMarch251976_1" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="51" link="Lecture on BG 2.11 -- Rotary Club Address -- Hotel Imperial, Delhi, March 25, 1976" link_text="Lecture on BG 2.11 -- Rotary Club Address -- Hotel Imperial, Delhi, March 25, 1976">
<div class="heading">I am accepting You as my guru." Śiṣyas te 'ham. Śiṣya means who voluntarily accepts to be ruled by a person who is guru. He is called śiṣya.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 2.11 -- Rotary Club Address -- Hotel Imperial, Delhi, March 25, 1976|Lecture on BG 2.11 -- Rotary Club Address -- Hotel Imperial, Delhi, March 25, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Because Arjuna accepted that "The perplexities which I am facing is not possible to be solved except Yourself." He knew that Kṛṣṇa is the Supreme Personality of Godhead. So he surrendered himself to Kṛṣṇa, śiṣyas te 'haṁ śādhi māṁ prapannam, kārpaṇya-doṣopahata svabhāvaḥ: ([[Vanisource:BG 2.7|BG 2.7]]) "I am a kṣatriya. It is my duty to fight in right cases, and I am declining. This is my weakness. So kindly instruct me how I can give up this weakness. I am accepting You as my guru." Śiṣyas te 'ham. Śiṣya means who voluntarily accepts to be ruled by a person who is guru. He is called śiṣya.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG4911NewYorkJuly251966_2" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="152" link="Lecture on BG 4.9-11 -- New York, July 25, 1966" link_text="Lecture on BG 4.9-11 -- New York, July 25, 1966">
<div class="heading">Śiṣya means disciple. Śiṣya, this is a grammatical word. Śās-dhātu. Śās-dhātu, it is a verb from which this word śiṣya comes. Śiṣya means one who accepts voluntarily the disciplinary measures from the higher authority.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 4.9-11 -- New York, July 25, 1966|Lecture on BG 4.9-11 -- New York, July 25, 1966]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Now, just like we are trying to understand from Kṛṣṇa, Arjuna, Arjuna is trying to understand. Arjuna also said to Kṛṣṇa, śiṣyas te 'haṁ śādhi māṁ prapannam: ([[Vanisource:BG 2.7|BG 2.7]]) "Just I am surrendering unto You. Oh, accept me as Your disciple, śiṣya." Śiṣya means disciple. Śiṣya, this is a grammatical word. Śās-dhātu. Śās-dhātu, it is a verb from which this word śiṣya comes. Śiṣya means one who accepts voluntarily the disciplinary measures from the higher authority. He is called a śiṣya. So in order to acquire, in order to be situated in that higher nature, we have to approach a personality like Kṛṣṇa or His representative, and so the best thing is that... Arjuna. Arjuna, he got this instruction from Bhagavad-gītā, and he developed that higher nature. So we have to take from Arjuna as it is. So we have to keep ourself always in the higher nature. Then the result will be that at the time of death, at the end, tyaktvā deham, tyaktvā deham.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG72SanFranciscoSeptember111968_3" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="256" link="Lecture on BG 7.2 -- San Francisco, September 11, 1968" link_text="Lecture on BG 7.2 -- San Francisco, September 11, 1968">
<div class="heading">Disciple means who accepts the discipline. Śiṣya. Śiṣya. The exact Sanskrit word is śiṣya. A śiṣya means... There is a verb, Sanskrit verb, which is called śās. Śās means controlling. From śās, the "śāstra" comes. Śāstra means controlling books.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 7.2 -- San Francisco, September 11, 1968|Lecture on BG 7.2 -- San Francisco, September 11, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Actually, these discussions of scripture is not to be acted unless there is relationship between the speaker and the audience. So audience means the disciples. Disciple means who accepts the discipline. Śiṣya. Śiṣya. The exact Sanskrit word is śiṣya. A śiṣya means... There is a verb, Sanskrit verb, which is called śās. Śās means controlling. From śās, the "śāstra" comes. Śāstra means controlling books. And from śas, śastra. Śastra means weapons. When argument fails, reason fails... Just like the state controls. First of all they give you the laws. If you break the laws, if you don't follow the regulation books, means śāstra, then next step is śastra.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG72NairobiOctober281975_4" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="258" link="Lecture on BG 7.2 -- Nairobi, October 28, 1975" link_text="Lecture on BG 7.2 -- Nairobi, October 28, 1975">
<div class="heading">Therefore I am becoming Your śiṣya." Śiṣyas te 'ham. "I become Your disciple. I am not going to argue with You on equal footing." Śiṣya means he is always subordinate.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 7.2 -- Nairobi, October 28, 1975|Lecture on BG 7.2 -- Nairobi, October 28, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So this is the first business, that "Where we shall take knowledge?" Tad-vijñānārtham. Vedic lesson is that tad-vijñānārthaṁ gurum eva abhigacchet: "You should go to guru." Just like Arjuna has accepted Kṛṣṇa as guru. When Arjuna was puzzled, he surrendered to Kṛṣṇa. Śiṣyas te 'haṁ śādhi māṁ prapannam: ([[Vanisource:BG 2.7|BG 2.7]]) "I am kṣatriya. It is my duty to fight, but I am declining. Although You are requesting me to fight, still I am declining. So I am puzzled. Anyway, I can understand You can drive away my, this puzzling position. Therefore I am becoming Your śiṣya." Śiṣyas te 'ham. "I become Your disciple. I am not going to argue with You on equal footing." Śiṣya means he is always subordinate. Whatever the guru will say, he will accept. That is the guru and śiṣya. So Kṛṣṇa became guru and Arjuna became a śiṣya, disciple, not friend. Of course, he knew what is Kṛṣṇa. So śiṣyas te 'haṁ śādhi māṁ prapannam.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="1" parent="Lectures" text="Srimad-Bhagavatam Lectures"><h3>Srimad-Bhagavatam Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB3254BombayNovember41974_0" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="426" link="Lecture on SB 3.25.4 -- Bombay, November 4, 1974" link_text="Lecture on SB 3.25.4 -- Bombay, November 4, 1974">
<div class="heading">Śrīmad-Bhagavad-gītā from Him, he surrendered himself to Kṛṣṇa and said that "I am no more your friend." Of course, friend is also, a friend of Kṛṣṇa is also surrendered. That is... But specifically he said, śiṣyas te 'ham. Śiṣya means "You can rule over me now." Śās-dhātu. Śās-dhātu. From śās-dhātu, śāstra, śiṣya, śāstra, these things have come. So śiṣyas te 'ham. Śiṣya means "Now I am under Your full control.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 3.25.4 -- Bombay, November 4, 1974|Lecture on SB 3.25.4 -- Bombay, November 4, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">How one can be pleased? That is the process. Praṇipātena sevayā. You can please one simply by surrendering to himself and by rendering service, "Sir, I am your most obedient servant. Please accept me and give me instruction." Śiṣyas te 'haṁ śādhi māṁ prapannam ([[Vanisource:BG 2.7|BG 2.7]]). Even Arjuna was a very intimate friend of Kṛṣṇa, still, while learning Śrīmad-Bhagavad-gītā from Him, he surrendered himself to Kṛṣṇa and said that "I am no more your friend." Of course, friend is also, a friend of Kṛṣṇa is also surrendered. That is... But specifically he said, śiṣyas te 'ham. Śiṣya means "You can rule over me now." Śās-dhātu. Śās-dhātu. From śās-dhātu, śāstra, śiṣya, śāstra, these things have come. So śiṣyas te 'ham. Śiṣya means "Now I am under Your full control.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB32528BombayNovember281974_1" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="450" link="Lecture on SB 3.25.28 -- Bombay, November 28, 1974" link_text="Lecture on SB 3.25.28 -- Bombay, November 28, 1974">
<div class="heading">Śiṣya means voluntarily accepting his ruling. Whatever guru will say he will accept, that is called śiṣya. Śiṣya means ruling, who accept disciple, means disciplinary measure.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 3.25.28 -- Bombay, November 28, 1974|Lecture on SB 3.25.28 -- Bombay, November 28, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So this is instruction we get from Bhagavad-gītā, everyone reads Bhagavad-gītā, that we have to accept Kṛṣṇa as the guru, or Kṛṣṇa's representative as guru. Tad viddhi praṇipātena paripraśnena sevayā ([[Vanisource:BG 4.34|BG 4.34]]), and we have to give service to such guru and we have to surrender ourself. Not that I accept you guru just to know how much you are learned, how much you can talk with me, not with that spirit. (indistinct) ...that I surrender to you sir, śiṣyas te 'ham, I have become śiṣya. Śiṣya means voluntarily accepting his ruling. Whatever guru will say he will accept, that is called śiṣya. Śiṣya means ruling, who accept disciple, means disciplinary measure. Whatever guru says, one who accepts he becomes disciple. He, I don't care for my guru's order and still I am disciple, that is not accepting guru.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB551TittenhurstLondonSeptember121969_2" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="512" link="Lecture on SB 5.5.1 -- Tittenhurst, London, September 12, 1969" link_text="Lecture on SB 5.5.1 -- Tittenhurst, London, September 12, 1969">
<div class="heading">Śiṣya means who accepts the ruling of his spiritual master; and disciple means also the same thing, who becomes disciplined by the spiritual master.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 5.5.1 -- Tittenhurst, London, September 12, 1969|Lecture on SB 5.5.1 -- Tittenhurst, London, September 12, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">A spiritual master means voluntarily accepting a great personality whose rules and regulations he must abide by. This is accepting of spiritual master, voluntarily accepting somebody, "Yes, sir. Whatever you say, I'll accept." Śiṣya. Śiṣya means who abides by the rules. That is called śiṣya. Or English, "discipline." From discipline, disciplic, disciplic succession. From the discipline. So either you take English or Sanskrit, the same meaning. Śiṣya means who accepts the ruling of his spiritual master; and disciple means also the same thing, who becomes disciplined by the spiritual master.</p>
<p>So tapasya means even at the inconvenience of my personal comforts, I must abide by the orders of my spiritual master.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB5515VrndavanaNovember31976_3" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="547" link="Lecture on SB 5.5.15 -- Vrndavana, November 3, 1976" link_text="Lecture on SB 5.5.15 -- Vrndavana, November 3, 1976">
<div class="heading">So this is going on. But that is not the fact. Fact is different. Therefore, putrāṁś ca śiṣyāṁś ca. Śiṣya... The citizen, they are also śiṣya. Śiṣya means one who is controlled.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 5.5.15 -- Vrndavana, November 3, 1976|Lecture on SB 5.5.15 -- Vrndavana, November 3, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So this is going on. But that is not the fact. Fact is different. Therefore, putrāṁś ca śiṣyāṁś ca. Śiṣya... The citizen, they are also śiṣya. Śiṣya means one who is controlled. That is called śiṣya, who is disciplined, disciple. The same meaning. Disciple means one who is controlled, one who is disciplined. So controller is the teacher or spiritual master and the government. So the government rules and regulation, teacher's rules and regulations should be in such a way that the dependent, either the śiṣya or the citizen, they must know that this is not life. This material life is not life. Real life is in the spiritual world.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB61813NewYorkJuly241971_4" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="599" link="Lecture on SB 6.1.8-13 -- New York, July 24, 1971" link_text="Lecture on SB 6.1.8-13 -- New York, July 24, 1971">
<div class="heading">Śās-dhātu. Śāstra, śastra, śāsana, śiṣya comes from the same root. Śiṣya. Śiṣya also comes from the same root. Śiṣya means one agrees voluntarily to be governed by the spiritual master. He's called śiṣya. And śāsana, the government.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 6.1.8-13 -- New York, July 24, 1971|Lecture on SB 6.1.8-13 -- New York, July 24, 1971]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">This is intelligent question. He says: dṛṣṭvā, dṛṣṭa-śrutābhyāṁ yat pāpam ([[Vanisource:SB 6.1.9|SB 6.1.9]]). Dṛṣṭa means just like one man sees this man has committed murder and he's hanged. Everyone sees. And in the lawbook it is said that if a man commits murder he'll be hanged. So śruta means we have heard it from authoritative sources; lawbook is authoritative source. Just like śāstra. Śāstra and lawbook is the same. Śāstra means that which controls. Śās-dhātu. Śāstra, śastra, śāsana, śiṣya comes from the same root. Śiṣya. Śiṣya also comes from the same root. Śiṣya means one agrees voluntarily to be governed by the spiritual master. He's called śiṣya. And śāsana, the government. So śāstra means that regulates our daily activities. So here it is called... Śāstra is learned by hearing, not by licking, not by seeing. Just like here is a śāstra, bhagavat-śāstra. You cannot learn it by seeing or by touching or... You have to learn it by hearing.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB6117HonoluluMay171976_5" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="620" link="Lecture on SB 6.1.17 -- Honolulu, May 17, 1976" link_text="Lecture on SB 6.1.17 -- Honolulu, May 17, 1976">
<div class="heading">Śiṣya means śiṣyas te 'haṁ śādhi māṁ prapannam (BG 2.7). Tad viddhi praṇipātena (BG 4.34). That is śiṣya.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 6.1.17 -- Honolulu, May 17, 1976|Lecture on SB 6.1.17 -- Honolulu, May 17, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">That freedom is there always. The Kṛṣṇa or His representative, the spiritual master, he can give you good instruction, good advice, but to do it or not to do it, that is your option. That is your option. You decide yourself. That is the... Kṛṣṇa said, yathecchasi tathā kuru: ([[Vanisource:BG 18.63|BG 18.63]]) "I am not interfering with your independence. I am dealing as your spiritual master, and you accepted Me as your spiritual master." Kṛṣṇa was accepted, Arjuna, śiṣyas te 'ham: "Kṛṣṇa, no more friendly talk. I accept You as my spiritual master." Śiṣyas te 'haṁ śādhi māṁ prapannam ([[Vanisource:BG 2.7|BG 2.7]]). "What kind of disciple?" Now, prapannam, fully surrendered: "Now whatever You will say, I'll do." This is śiṣya. Śiṣya I have several times explained, śās-dhātu. Who voluntarily accepts the ruling of a person, he is śiṣya. And otherwise, "You go on talking whatever nonsense you can. I'll do my own business," that is not śiṣya. Śiṣya means śiṣyas te 'haṁ śādhi māṁ prapannam ([[Vanisource:BG 2.7|BG 2.7]]). Tad viddhi praṇipātena ([[Vanisource:BG 4.34|BG 4.34]]). That is śiṣya.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB6127HonoluluMay271976_6" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="645" link="Lecture on SB 6.1.27 -- Honolulu, May 27, 1976" link_text="Lecture on SB 6.1.27 -- Honolulu, May 27, 1976">
<div class="heading">Now I become Your disciple, śiṣya." Śiṣya means disciple. "You kindly advise me. I'm surrendering unto You." Tad viddhi praṇipātena (BG 4.34). Spiritual master means you must surrender to him. If you talk foolish, then you will not be benefited.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 6.1.27 -- Honolulu, May 27, 1976|Lecture on SB 6.1.27 -- Honolulu, May 27, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So this material civilization, they're decorating this body. So the bodily concept of life is condemned in the very beginning of the Bhagavad-gītā. This knowledge was given to Arjuna by Kṛṣṇa when he surrendered. When he was talking friendly, He did not say. When Kṛṣṇa..., Arjuna submitted that "Kṛṣṇa, I'm now perplexed. So how my intelligence can be revived? You know." Arjuna knew that Kṛṣṇa is the Supreme Personality of Godhead, so his perplexed position can be solved by Kṛṣṇa. That he knew. Therefore he said, śiṣyas te 'haṁ śādhi māṁ prapannam: ([[Vanisource:BG 2.7|BG 2.7]]) "Kṛṣṇa, no more friendly talks. We are wasting time. Now I become Your disciple, śiṣya." Śiṣya means disciple. "You kindly advise me. I'm surrendering unto You." Tad viddhi praṇipātena ([[Vanisource:BG 4.34|BG 4.34]]). Spiritual master means you must surrender to him. If you talk foolish, then you will not be benefited. You must submissively hear and accept whatever he says. So when Kṛṣṇa began to teach him as teacher, the first thing He uttered... Anyone can say what He first said?</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB614142SuratDecember231970_7" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="669" link="Lecture on SB 6.1.41-42 -- Surat, December 23, 1970" link_text="Lecture on SB 6.1.41-42 -- Surat, December 23, 1970">
<div class="heading">Daṇḍavat class(?). Surrender means you must abide strictly the orders, sad-dharma-pṛcchā, ādau gurvāśrayam. To accept a guru means... Śiṣya means one must agree to be governed by the spiritual master. That is called śiṣya. Śiṣya... Śās-dhātu.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 6.1.41-42 -- Surat, December 23, 1970|Lecture on SB 6.1.41-42 -- Surat, December 23, 1970]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Daṇḍavat class(?). Surrender means you must abide strictly the orders, sad-dharma-pṛcchā, ādau gurvāśrayam. To accept a guru means... Śiṣya means one must agree to be governed by the spiritual master. That is called śiṣya. Śiṣya... Śās-dhātu. From śās-dhātu all these terms—śāstra, śiṣya, śāsana. These are words derived from the root śās-dhātu. Śās-dhātu means śāsana, governing. The governing is done by military, governing is done by lawbooks, governing is done by personal instruction, so many things. So śiṣya means who voluntarily accepts to be guided or being governed by the representative of God. That is śiṣya. Yes.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB6215CalcuttaJanuary61971_8" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="701" link="Lecture on SB 6.2.1-5 -- Calcutta, January 6, 1971" link_text="Lecture on SB 6.2.1-5 -- Calcutta, January 6, 1971">
<div class="heading">Now Kṛṣṇa is teaching to His disciple, Arjuna. Arjuna accepted, śiṣyas te 'ham: (BG 2.7) "Just now I become Your disciple." Śiṣya means one who voluntarily accepts the ruling of a spiritual master.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 6.2.1-5 -- Calcutta, January 6, 1971|Lecture on SB 6.2.1-5 -- Calcutta, January 6, 1971]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">If you follow Arjuna, then you (are) in directly contact with Kṛṣṇa. There is no difficulty. The dictation comes through disciplic succession. Now Kṛṣṇa is teaching to His disciple, Arjuna. Arjuna accepted, śiṣyas te 'ham: ([[Vanisource:BG 2.7|BG 2.7]]) "Just now I become Your disciple." Śiṣya means one who voluntarily accepts the ruling of a spiritual master. He is called śiṣya. Nobody wants to follow the dictation of others—that is another independent nature of living entity—but when one voluntarily agrees to serve the dictation of the spiritual master..., means to follow the dictation of Kṛṣṇa... Ācāryaṁ māṁ vijānīyāt. Kṛṣṇa says, "Ācārya is My self." Nāvamanyeta karhicit: "Never disobey." Na martya-buddhyāsūyeta: "And do not think him as ordinary person and become envious of his position." Then there is fall down. Ācāryaṁ māṁ vijānīyān nāvamanyeta karhicit, na martya-buddhyāsūyeta ([[Vanisource:SB 11.17.27|SB 11.17.27]]).</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB7935MayapurMarch131976_9" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="842" link="Lecture on SB 7.9.35 -- Mayapur, March 13, 1976" link_text="Lecture on SB 7.9.35 -- Mayapur, March 13, 1976">
<div class="heading">The argument will not be ended. Now I become Your disciple." Śiṣyas te 'ham. Because as soon as one becomes a śiṣya... Śiṣya means under the order, regulation. A person cannot disobey the order of guru. Then he is śiṣya. If he argues, he's not śiṣya. He's not a śiṣya.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 7.9.35 -- Mayapur, March 13, 1976|Lecture on SB 7.9.35 -- Mayapur, March 13, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So how I can find out the real guru by whose words I'll be nicely directed and achieve?" That is not very difficult. You read Bhagavad-gītā. You'll understand. Just like Arjuna. When he was perplexed, he accepted Kṛṣṇa-guru. He said, śiṣyas te 'ham: ([[Vanisource:BG 2.7|BG 2.7]]) "I become Your (disciple) now... We are talking friendly. The argument will not be ended. Now I become Your disciple." Śiṣyas te 'ham. Because as soon as one becomes a śiṣya... Śiṣya means under the order, regulation. A person cannot disobey the order of guru. Then he is śiṣya. If he argues, he's not śiṣya. He's not a śiṣya. Therefore Arjuna says, śiṣyas te 'ham: "I surrender, voluntarily surrender to become Your disciple. Now I shall not argue." That is called śiṣya. If you argue, then you are not a śiṣya.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB7123BombayApril141976_10" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="863" link="Lecture on SB 7.12.3 -- Bombay, April 14, 1976" link_text="Lecture on SB 7.12.3 -- Bombay, April 14, 1976">
<div class="heading">The Sanskrit word is also the same, śiṣya. I have several times explained. Śiṣya, it comes from the verb śās, śāsana, ruling. So śiṣya means one who voluntarily accepts the ruling of the spiritual master. He is called śiṣya. Śiṣya, śāsana, śāstra, śāstra, śāsana—these things are the same, from the same root.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 7.12.3 -- Bombay, April 14, 1976|Lecture on SB 7.12.3 -- Bombay, April 14, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So upakrame avasāne ca caraṇau śirasā namet. Just at the lotus feet of guru the brahmacārī... So our students, they are very obedient. And if our students see the guru hundred times, he practices this process, offering obeisances while meeting and while going. These things are to be practiced. Then dānta. Brahmacārī guru-kule vasan dānta ([[Vanisource:SB 7.12.1|SB 7.12.1]]). Then he'll be controlled, self-controlled. Obedience is the first law of discipline. If there is no obedience, there cannot be any discipline. And if there is no discipline you cannot manage anything. That is not possible. Therefore this is very essential, that the students should be very disciplined. Disciple means one who follows discipline. This is disciple, śiṣya. The Sanskrit word is also the same, śiṣya. I have several times explained. Śiṣya, it comes from the verb śās, śāsana, ruling. So śiṣya means one who voluntarily accepts the ruling of the spiritual master. He is called śiṣya. Śiṣya, śāsana, śāstra, śāstra, śāsana—these things are the same, from the same root.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Sri_Caitanya-caritamrta_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="3" parent="Lectures" text="Sri Caitanya-caritamrta Lectures"><h3>Sri Caitanya-caritamrta Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonCCMadhyalila2098102April271976AucklandNewZealand_0" class="quote" parent="Sri_Caitanya-caritamrta_Lectures" book="Lec" index="50" link="Lecture on CC Madhya-lila 20.98-102 -- April 27, 1976, Auckland, New Zealand" link_text="Lecture on CC Madhya-lila 20.98-102 -- April 27, 1976, Auckland, New Zealand">
<div class="heading">Accepting guru means if you accept somebody guru, then whatever he will say, you have to accept. Śiṣya. Śiṣya means one who is ruled. So if you voluntarily accept somebody, that "I shall be ruled by you," that is guru. Not that "I shall rule over you by giving some money."
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on CC Madhya-lila 20.98-102 -- April 27, 1976, Auckland, New Zealand|Lecture on CC Madhya-lila 20.98-102 -- April 27, 1976, Auckland, New Zealand]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Dehinaḥ means the proprietor of the body. But every one of us, thinking "I am this body." They have no first lesson of Bhagavad-gītā. First lesson only, ABCD, that "You are not this body." This is the first lesson. When Arjuna was talking in bodily relationship, so, and he accepted Kṛṣṇa as guru... Śiṣyas te 'haṁ śādhi māṁ prapannam ([[Vanisource:BG 2.7|BG 2.7]]). "There is perplexity. I cannot understand, Kṛṣṇa." Kṛṣṇa was his friend, but he accepted Him guru. Accepting guru means if you accept somebody guru, then whatever he will say, you have to accept. Śiṣya. Śiṣya means one who is ruled. So if you voluntarily accept somebody, that "I shall be ruled by you," that is guru. Not that "I shall rule over you by giving some money." Then it is not accepting guru. Guru means in all circumstances. Guror hitam. Brahmacārī guru-kule vasan dānto guror hitam ([[Vanisource:SB 7.12.1|SB 7.12.1]]). Therefore the first training is to live in gurukula, to learn how to respect guru, how to abide by the orders of guru. So Kṛṣṇa is guru. So Arjuna accepted Kṛṣṇa as guru. Śiṣyas te 'ham ([[Vanisource:BG 2.7|BG 2.7]]). "I am Your now disciple. Now give, teach me." Then Bhagavad-gītā was begun. Not before that.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Festival_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="6" parent="Lectures" text="Festival Lectures"><h3>Festival Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="HisDivineGraceSrilaSaccidanandaBhaktivinodaThakurasAppearanceDayLectureLondonSeptember31971_0" class="quote" parent="Festival_Lectures" book="Lec" index="30" link="His Divine Grace Srila Sac-cid-ananda Bhaktivinoda Thakura's Appearance Day, Lecture -- London, September 3, 1971" link_text="His Divine Grace Srila Sac-cid-ananda Bhaktivinoda Thakura's Appearance Day, Lecture -- London, September 3, 1971">
<div class="heading">Śiṣya means who voluntarily accepts disciplinary measures from the spiritual master. He's ruled by the spiritual master.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:His Divine Grace Srila Sac-cid-ananda Bhaktivinoda Thakura's Appearance Day, Lecture -- London, September 3, 1971|His Divine Grace Srila Sac-cid-ananda Bhaktivinoda Thakura's Appearance Day, Lecture -- London, September 3, 1971]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">He has to do everything under the instruction of the spiritual master. That is his duty. Śiṣya. Śiṣya means who voluntarily accepts disciplinary measures from the spiritual master. He's ruled by the spiritual master.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="General_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="11" parent="Lectures" text="General Lectures"><h3>General Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureHawaiiMarch231969_0" class="quote" parent="General_Lectures" book="Lec" index="40" link="Lecture -- Hawaii, March 23, 1969" link_text="Lecture -- Hawaii, March 23, 1969">
<div class="heading">So śiṣya means one who accepts the authority of the spiritual master. He voluntarily accepts the rulings or the punishment of the spiritual master.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture -- Hawaii, March 23, 1969|Lecture -- Hawaii, March 23, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Śastra means weapons, armaments. That is called śastra. Just like sword, guns, they are called śastra. These two things are rulings. The state has got lawbooks, authoritative books, and one who does not obey the lawbooks, then the next word is gun and sword. This, these two words, means to accept authority. So śiṣya means one who accepts the authority of the spiritual master. He voluntarily accepts the rulings or the punishment of the spiritual master. That is called śiṣya. One voluntarily agrees to the spiritual master... This initiation is going on. This is the beginning of voluntary acceptance of the spiritual master. That means he agrees that he will abide by the orders of the spiritual master. This is called acceptance of spiritual master. Śiṣya. Śiṣya means voluntarily accepting the ruling. Everyone is free. If I give you some ruling, why should you accept it? Therefore this formal initiation ceremony is performed. He promises, "My dear sir, I shall abide by your order." So Kṛṣṇa was accepted by Arjuna as spiritual master just to teach him what is the actual duty in that warfield.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureLondonSeptember161969_1" class="quote" parent="General_Lectures" book="Lec" index="62" link="Lecture -- London, September 16, 1969" link_text="Lecture -- London, September 16, 1969">
<div class="heading">So because they were talking like friends in the beginning, so argument like friends, talking, that cannot give any conclusion. Here is the Vedic process. Just like Arjuna said that śādhi māṁ prapannam, śiṣyas te 'ham: "I become your śiṣya." Śiṣya means disciple. That means "Whatever disciplinary action You will ask me to follow, I shall do it." This is called śiṣya.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture -- London, September 16, 1969|Lecture -- London, September 16, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I cannot understand what is my duty at the present moment; therefore I am submitting unto You," śiṣyas te 'ham: ([[Vanisource:BG 2.7|BG 2.7]]) "I become Your disciple." Śādhi māṁ prapannam: "I am surrendered unto You. You please instruct me." So because they were talking like friends in the beginning, so argument like friends, talking, that cannot give any conclusion. Here is the Vedic process. Just like Arjuna said that śādhi māṁ prapannam, śiṣyas te 'ham: "I become your śiṣya." Śiṣya means disciple. That means "Whatever disciplinary action You will ask me to follow, I shall do it." This is called śiṣya. The word śiṣya comes from the word, Sanskrit word, sas-dhātu, means to rule over, sas-dhātu. So ruling by instruction, ruling by laws, and ruling by force, weapon. There are three kinds of ruling. If instruction fails, then evidences from lawbooks.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Philosophy_Discussions" class="sub_section" sec_index="13" parent="Lectures" text="Philosophy Discussions"><h3>Philosophy Discussions</h3>
</div>
<div id="PhilosophyDiscussiononMaoTseTung_0" class="quote" parent="Philosophy_Discussions" book="Lec" index="23" link="Philosophy Discussion on Mao Tse Tung" link_text="Philosophy Discussion on Mao Tse Tung">
<div class="heading">Śas. Śas means control. From śas-dhātu... Śiṣya means who voluntarily accepts the spiritual master's ruling. That is called śiṣya, disciple. From the same śas-dhātu. The spiritual master rules over him according to śāstra, and he accepts voluntarily. So conflict there is, but the mediator is śas.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Philosophy Discussion on Mao Tse Tung|Philosophy Discussion on Mao Tse Tung]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Śyāmasundara: What is that root?</p>
<p>Prabhupāda: Śas. Śas means control. From śas-dhātu... Śiṣya means who voluntarily accepts the spiritual master's ruling. That is called śiṣya, disciple. From the same śas-dhātu. The spiritual master rules over him according to śāstra, and he accepts voluntarily. So conflict there is, but the mediator is śas.</p>
<p>Śyāmasundara: Controller.</p>
<p>Prabhupāda: Controller. Otherwise, there is no end of struggle if you don't accept an authorized mediator.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="section" sec_index="5" parent="compilation" text="Conversations and Morning Walks"><h2>Conversations and Morning Walks</h2>
</div>
<div id="1975_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="sub_section" sec_index="8" parent="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" text="1975 Conversations and Morning Walks"><h3>1975 Conversations and Morning Walks</h3>
</div>
<div id="RoomConversationwithYogaStudentMarch141975Iran_0" class="quote" parent="1975_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="31" link="Room Conversation with Yoga Student -- March 14, 1975, Iran" link_text="Room Conversation with Yoga Student -- March 14, 1975, Iran">
<div class="heading">No, if you accept Kṛṣṇa as the teacher, authority, just like Arjuna accepted. Arjuna said, śiṣyas te 'haṁ śādhi māṁ prapannam: (BG 2.7) "Now I accept You as my teacher." Śiṣya. Śiṣya means disciple. Śiṣyas te aham: "I am Your now disciple. Don't accept me as Your friend."
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Room Conversation with Yoga Student -- March 14, 1975, Iran|Room Conversation with Yoga Student -- March 14, 1975, Iran]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Dr. Movebhed: I said I think the question you put, the clear concept of Kṛṣṇa, or God... The God for me is not a conceptual thing. It cannot be subject to concept, and to understand God, you have to identify yourself with the truth, and otherwise it's not the way to...</p>
<p>Prabhupāda: No, if you accept Kṛṣṇa as the teacher, authority, just like Arjuna accepted. Arjuna said, śiṣyas te 'haṁ śādhi māṁ prapannam: ([[Vanisource:BG 2.7|BG 2.7]]) "Now I accept You as my teacher." Śiṣya. Śiṣya means disciple. Śiṣyas te aham: "I am Your now disciple. Don't accept me as Your friend." Friend to friend talk, it is not very serious. So when one is accepted as the master, then you have to accept his statement. There is no question of argument. That is the relationship between guru and disciple. Therefore the process is: before accepting a person as guru, one must study his position. And guru also, before accepting a disciple, must study his position. In this way the relationship between guru and disciple is established. Now, Arjuna is a friend of Kṛṣṇa, so he has studied Kṛṣṇa, and therefore he submits, Arjuna, "Kṛṣṇa, although we are friends, now I accept You as my spiritual master." Śiṣyas te 'haṁ śādhi māṁ prapannam: ([[Vanisource:BG 2.7|BG 2.7]]) "I am now surrendered." "Surrendered" means "As I accept you as my teacher, I'll not argue." So first of all this is required, that before accepting somebody as teacher one must be convinced that "The person whom I am going to accept, my teacher, is perfect." Then the knowledge will be nice. If we approach a perfect person and submissively hear from him, then the knowledge is perfect. So Kṛṣṇa is accepted as the supreme authority, as Arjuna quoted. What is that?</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="MorningWalkNovember21975Nairobi_1" class="quote" parent="1975_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="231" link="Morning Walk -- November 2, 1975, Nairobi" link_text="Morning Walk -- November 2, 1975, Nairobi">
<div class="heading">Śisya means voluntarily accepting ruling. That is called śisya. The word is the same, śās. From śās, śisya. From śās, śāstra. From śās, śāstra. From śās, śāsana. These are. So sometimes by force, sometimes by voluntarily... So just like guru-śisya.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Morning Walk -- November 2, 1975, Nairobi|Morning Walk -- November 2, 1975, Nairobi]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: These people were driven away by śāstra,, by weapon, knife. That is śāstra. And śāstra is the same thing, but it is books. Therefore it is called śāstra. The original word is coming from śās. Sas means ruling, śās-dhātu. Śāstra, śāstra, śāsana, śisya. Śisya. Śisya means voluntarily accepting ruling. That is called śisya. The word is the same, śās. From śās, śisya. From śās, śāstra. From śās, śāstra. From śās, śāsana. These are. So sometimes by force, sometimes by voluntarily... So just like guru-śisya. The guru, he gives enlightenment, and śisya voluntarily accepts. That is guru-śisya. Similarly śāstra means weapon: "If you don't follow, then I shall cut your throat." Similarly śāstra. So śāstra says that "Now you must leave your family life."</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1976_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="sub_section" sec_index="9" parent="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" text="1976 Conversations and Morning Walks"><h3>1976 Conversations and Morning Walks</h3>
</div>
<div id="RoomConversationwithSiddhasvarupaMay31976Honolulu_0" class="quote" parent="1976_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="95" link="Room Conversation with Siddha-svarupa -- May 3, 1976, Honolulu" link_text="Room Conversation with Siddha-svarupa -- May 3, 1976, Honolulu">
<div class="heading">Śiṣya means voluntarily accepting the rules offered by the spiritual master. That is śiṣya: "Ah, yes, I agree to abide by your order." Then he becomes śiṣya.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Room Conversation with Siddha-svarupa -- May 3, 1976, Honolulu|Room Conversation with Siddha-svarupa -- May 3, 1976, Honolulu]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Hari-śauri: "Just try to learn the truth by approaching a spiritual master. Enquire from him submissively and render service unto him. The self-realized soul can impart knowledge unto you because he has seen the truth."</p>
<p>Prabhupāda: You have to submit. You cannot remain independent. That is the first condition. Śiṣyas te 'haṁ, śiṣya. Śiṣya means voluntarily accepting the rules offered by the spiritual master. That is śiṣya: "Ah, yes, I agree to abide by your order." Then he becomes śiṣya. Otherwise where is the question... "I am thinking like this, I am thinking..." So long you are thinking otherwise, you don't try to become a śiṣya. You remain outside and you are welcome: chant, dance, take prasādam, and remain independent. There is no objection. But when you become śiṣya, then you cannot remain independent. These things convince him. Then you don't become śiṣya. Remain as friend, there is no harm. Just like so many people, they come. So if these things (indistinct). One thousand twenty, checks (indistinct). This way. What is the wrong there?</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1977_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="sub_section" sec_index="10" parent="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" text="1977 Conversations and Morning Walks"><h3>1977 Conversations and Morning Walks</h3>
</div>
<div id="RoofConversationJanuary51977Bombay_0" class="quote" parent="1977_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="10" link="Roof Conversation -- January 5, 1977, Bombay" link_text="Roof Conversation -- January 5, 1977, Bombay">
<div class="heading">Śiṣya means who has voluntarily accepted to be chastised and ruled by the spiritual master.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Roof Conversation -- January 5, 1977, Bombay|Roof Conversation -- January 5, 1977, Bombay]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Indian (4): Actually we were so rapt, we wish to be beaten by your stick on our head.</p>
<p>Prabhupāda: Śiṣya, this word, very word, means voluntarily accepting the chastisement. This word, śiṣ, śās, śās-dhātu... From śās-dhātu comes śāstra. Śastra means weapon. So weapon is meant for maintaining peace and order. And śāstra. Śāsana. These are the derivation from original root... Śiṣya. Śiṣya means who has voluntarily accepted to be chastised and ruled by the spiritual master.</p>
<p>Dr. Patel: Śikṣā means instruction. So the one who takes the instruction in śiṣya. Śikṣā.</p>
<p>Prabhupāda: To obey. Śiṣya means to obey, discipline.</p>
</div>
</div>
</div>

Sastra means

2010-04-09T10:45:56Z

Partha-sarathi: Created page with '<div id="compilation"> <div id="facts"> {{terms|"sastra means"|"sastra, means"}} {{notes|}} {{compiler|Partha-sarathi}} {{complete|ALL}} {{first|09Apr10}} {{last|09Apr10}} {{tota…'

<div id="compilation">
<div id="facts">
{{terms|"sastra means"|"sastra, means"}}
{{notes|}}
{{compiler|Partha-sarathi}}
{{complete|ALL}}
{{first|09Apr10}}
{{last|09Apr10}}
{{totals_by_section|BG=0|SB=0|CC=0|OB=0|Lec=50|Con=8|Let=0}}
{{total|58}}
{{toc right}}
[[Category:Meaning of Sanskrit Words]]
</div>
<div id="Lectures" class="section" sec_index="4" parent="compilation" text="Lectures"><h2>Lectures</h2>
</div>
<div id="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="0" parent="Lectures" text="Bhagavad-gita As It Is Lectures"><h3>Bhagavad-gita As It Is Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG27LondonAugust71973_0" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="39" link="Lecture on BG 2.7 -- London, August 7, 1973" link_text="Lecture on BG 2.7 -- London, August 7, 1973">
<div class="heading">Śāstra means book, scripture. Just like Bhagavad-gītā. Everything is there. So we must be ruled, either by śāstra, śāstra or guru. Or becoming śiṣya.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 2.7 -- London, August 7, 1973|Lecture on BG 2.7 -- London, August 7, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So... "Kindly speak to me that." "So why shall I speak to you?" Here says: śiṣyas te 'ham ([[Vanisource:BG 2.7|BG 2.7]]). "Now I am accepting You as my guru. I become Your śiṣya." Śiṣya means: "Whatever you'll say, I'll accept." That is śiṣya. The śiṣya word comes from śas-dhātu. Śas-dhātu. Śāstra. Śāstra. Śāsana. Śiṣya. These are from the same root. Śas-dhātu. Śas-dhātu means rule, ruling. So we can rule in various ways. We can be ruled, becoming a śiṣya of a proper guru. That is śas-dhātu. Or we can be ruled by śāstra, weapon. Just like king has got weapon. If you don't follow the king's instruction or government's instruction, then there is police force, military force. That is śāstra. And there is śāstra also. Śāstra means book, scripture. Just like Bhagavad-gītā. Everything is there. So we must be ruled, either by śāstra, śāstra or guru. Or becoming śiṣya. Therefore it is said: śiṣyas te 'ham ([[Vanisource:BG 2.7|BG 2.7]]). "I become voluntarily... I surrender unto You." "Now you become śiṣya. What is the proof that you have become My śiṣya?" Śādhi māṁ tvāṁ prapannam. "Now I am fully surrender." Prapannam.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG222HyderabadNovember261972_1" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="85" link="Lecture on BG 2.22 -- Hyderabad, November 26, 1972" link_text="Lecture on BG 2.22 -- Hyderabad, November 26, 1972">
<div class="heading">Therefore the real seeing is through Vedic knowledge. That is seeing. Śāstra-cakṣus. Real knowledge, real seeing power, should be through the śāstras. And śāstra means infallible, not theory.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 2.22 -- Hyderabad, November 26, 1972|Lecture on BG 2.22 -- Hyderabad, November 26, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Anyone who knows that the living entity, soul, is avināśi, indestructible, then where is the question of killing? But that does not mean the Bhagavad-gītā is encouraging killing. No. That is not the purport. Killing is prohibited. But when we see that a brāhmaṇa is killing one animal in the sacrifice, it is not killing. Therefore we have to see with the eyes of Vedic knowledge. Not with these eyes. What is the value of these eyes? It has no value. We are very much proud: "Can you show me?" What is value of your seeing? Even if I show you, the value of your seeing power is nil. It sees only under certain conditions. That's all. If there is a light, you can see. What is the value of your eyes? Therefore the real seeing is through Vedic knowledge. That is seeing. Śāstra-cakṣus. Real knowledge, real seeing power, should be through the śāstras. And śāstra means infallible, not theory. Not theory. Just like a conditioned soul writes some book on some thesis. What is the value of it? It has no value. Because the man who is putting forward the thesis, he is blind. He's imperfect. So how you can get perfect knowledge from him?</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG222HyderabadNovember261972_2" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="85" link="Lecture on BG 2.22 -- Hyderabad, November 26, 1972" link_text="Lecture on BG 2.22 -- Hyderabad, November 26, 1972">
<div class="heading">So our proposition is that to receive knowledge from Kṛṣṇa, the perfect person, the Supreme Personality of Godhead. We accept śāstra, means which is infallible. There is no mistake.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 2.22 -- Hyderabad, November 26, 1972|Lecture on BG 2.22 -- Hyderabad, November 26, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So our proposition is that to receive knowledge from Kṛṣṇa, the perfect person, the Supreme Personality of Godhead. We accept śāstra, means which is infallible. There is no mistake. Just like when I was walking near the cowshed, heaps of, piles of cow dung was there. So I was explaining to my followers that if such heaps of animal, I mean to say, man stool was heaped up here, nobody would come here. Nobody would come here. But the cow dung, there are so much heaps of cow dung, still, we find it pleasure to go through it. And in the Vedas it is said, "Cow dung is pure." This is called śāstra. If you argue, "How it can, it has become pure? It is an animal stool." But the Vedas, they... Because the knowledge is perfect, that even in argument we cannot prove how animal stool becomes pure, but it is pure. Therefore Vedic knowledge is perfect. And if we take knowledge from the Vedas, we save so much time for investigating, or researching. We are very much fond of research. Everything is there in the Vedas. Why do you waste your time?</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG3610LosAngelesDecember231968_3" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="116" link="Lecture on BG 3.6-10 -- Los Angeles, December 23, 1968" link_text="Lecture on BG 3.6-10 -- Los Angeles, December 23, 1968">
<div class="heading">Ācāravatā puruṣeṇa paraḥ pumān viṣṇur ārādhyate (CC Madhya 8.58). By following the prescribed duties of a particular section of society in pursuance of the instruction of the śāstra means satisfaction of Viṣṇu.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 3.6-10 -- Los Angeles, December 23, 1968|Lecture on BG 3.6-10 -- Los Angeles, December 23, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Ācāravatā puruṣeṇa paraḥ pumān viṣṇur ārādhyate ([[Vanisource:CC Madhya 8.58|CC Madhya 8.58]]). By following the prescribed duties of a particular section of society in pursuance of the instruction of the śāstra means satisfaction of Viṣṇu. Yes.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG71BhuvanesvaraJanuary221977_4" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="249" link="Lecture on BG 7.1 -- Bhuvanesvara, January 22, 1977" link_text="Lecture on BG 7.1 -- Bhuvanesvara, January 22, 1977">
<div class="heading">Guru means who speaks on the basis of śāstra. They're sādhu guru śāstra. And śāstra means the statement of authorities. That is śāstra.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 7.1 -- Bhuvanesvara, January 22, 1977|Lecture on BG 7.1 -- Bhuvanesvara, January 22, 1977]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So this Kṛṣṇa consciousness movement is giving chance to everyone to hear from the authoritative sources, from the śāstra. Sādhu śāstra guru. These are authorities. So instead of hearing from the unauthorized persons, means... sādhu means who speaks on the basis of śāstra. Guru means who speaks on the basis of śāstra. They're sādhu guru śāstra. And śāstra means the statement of authorities. That is śāstra. Just like Bhagavad-gītā. It is śāstra because it is spoken by the supreme guru, Kṛṣṇa. So who is guru? At the present moment so many unauthorized persons are presenting themselves as guru. But you should be very careful. Guru, Caitanya Mahāprabhu has said, āmāra ājñāya guru hañā tāra' ei deśa ([[Vanisource:CC Madhya 7.128|CC Madhya 7.128]]). He says that "I order you that you become guru. And your business is to deliver this country." "This country" means wherever you are living, you can become guru and deliver them. And one may say that "You are asking me to become guru but I have no qualification." A sincere man will say like that, "How can I become guru, and how can I deliver this country?"</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG72SanFranciscoSeptember111968_5" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="256" link="Lecture on BG 7.2 -- San Francisco, September 11, 1968" link_text="Lecture on BG 7.2 -- San Francisco, September 11, 1968">
<div class="heading">A śiṣya means... There is a verb, Sanskrit verb, which is called śās. Śās means controlling. From śās, the "śāstra" comes. Śāstra means controlling books. And from śas, śastra. Śastra means weapons. When argument fails, reason fails... Just like the state controls. First of all they give you the laws.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 7.2 -- San Francisco, September 11, 1968|Lecture on BG 7.2 -- San Francisco, September 11, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Actually, these discussions of scripture is not to be acted unless there is relationship between the speaker and the audience. So audience means the disciples. Disciple means who accepts the discipline. Śiṣya. Śiṣya. The exact Sanskrit word is śiṣya. A śiṣya means... There is a verb, Sanskrit verb, which is called śās. Śās means controlling. From śās, the "śāstra" comes. Śāstra means controlling books. And from śas, śastra. Śastra means weapons. When argument fails, reason fails... Just like the state controls. First of all they give you the laws. If you break the laws, if you don't follow the regulation books, means śāstra, then next step is śastra. Śastra means weapons. If you don't follow the regulation of the government, keep to the right, then there is police batons—śastra. You have to be controlled. If you are gentleman, then you be controlled under the instruction of the śāstras. And if you are defying, then there is trident of Durgādevī. You have seen Durgādevī, the picture, trident, threefold miseries. You cannot, I mean to say, violate any rules and regulations; as of the state, similarly of the supreme state Kṛṣṇa. It is not possible. Just take for example there are some health rules.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG72SanFranciscoSeptember111968_6" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="256" link="Lecture on BG 7.2 -- San Francisco, September 11, 1968" link_text="Lecture on BG 7.2 -- San Francisco, September 11, 1968">
<div class="heading">Here it is said that manuṣyas teṣāṁ śāstra 'dhikara yajñānāṁ sahasra-madhye. Now, what I am, what is God, what is this material world, how it is working, these things are business of an educated man. A foolish man cannot take. Therefore śāstra adhikāra. Śāstra means one has got some knowledge in the śāstras, in the books of knowledge.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 7.2 -- San Francisco, September 11, 1968|Lecture on BG 7.2 -- San Francisco, September 11, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Here it is said that manuṣyas teṣāṁ śāstra 'dhikara yajñānāṁ sahasra-madhye. Now, what I am, what is God, what is this material world, how it is working, these things are business of an educated man. A foolish man cannot take. Therefore śāstra adhikāra. Śāstra means one has got some knowledge in the śāstras, in the books of knowledge. As soon as we find out one who has got books of knowledge, knowledge in books, or śāstra, the quantity will be at once reduced. In this quarter if you find out how many noneducated people are there, oh, you'll find many. And as soon as you want to find out how many M.A.'s are there, at once the number will be reduced. Similarly, there are many men, but if you want to search out some man who is trying to make perfection of his life, at once the number will be reduced. And out of them Just like so many transcendentalists, swamis, yogis there are. If you count amongst them who wants to understand God, who has got the knowledge of God, at once the number will be reduced. Again.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG77BombayApril11971_7" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="273" link="Lecture on BG 7.7 -- Bombay, April 1, 1971" link_text="Lecture on BG 7.7 -- Bombay, April 1, 1971">
<div class="heading">So śāstra means above these defects. Where there is no such defect, that is śāstra. And you can understand how five thousand years ago Lord Buddha's appearance was predicted.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 7.7 -- Bombay, April 1, 1971|Lecture on BG 7.7 -- Bombay, April 1, 1971]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Therefore it is said bhaviṣyati, "He will appear." This is called śāstra. Trikāla-jña. Śāstra writers, they are not ordinary men. Just like Kṛṣṇa is speaking. He is not ordinary man. Nobody will be interested so much if Bhagavad-gītā was written by ordinary man. It was spoken by the Supreme Personality of Godhead, and it was recorded by His incarnation, Vyāsadeva. So it is transcendental literature. Ordinary literatures, they cannot be perfect because there are four defect: bhrama-pramāda-karaṇāpāṭava-vipralipsā. Bhrama means "to commit mistake." Pramāda means "illusion," and vipralipsā means "cheating," and karaṇāpāṭava, "inefficiency of the senses." So śāstra means above these defects. Where there is no such defect, that is śāstra. And you can understand how five thousand years ago Lord Buddha's appearance was predicted. Similarly, still there is prediction about kalki-avatāra, which will take place about four lakhs and 27,000 years hereafter. Kalki-avatāra's name, his father's name and where he will appear, everything is there. This is called śāstra.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG71112BombayFebruary251974_8" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="280" link="Lecture on BG 7.11-12 -- Bombay, February 25, 1974" link_text="Lecture on BG 7.11-12 -- Bombay, February 25, 1974">
<div class="heading">The whole śāstra means regulation. Śāstra. The word śāstra has come from śās-dhātu. Śās-dhātu means ruling, controlling. So from śās-dhātu, the śāsana has come, government ruling.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 7.11-12 -- Bombay, February 25, 1974|Lecture on BG 7.11-12 -- Bombay, February 25, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Human life is meant for this purpose. Kīrtanīyaḥ sadā hariḥ. We require something to eat because we have got this body. So minimizing the bodily enjoyments... Bodily enjoyment means... Or necessities. When you use bodily necessities in excessive proportion, that is called kāma. Otherwise, to satisfy the bodily necessities, that is not kāma. Therefore Kṛṣṇa says that kāmo 'smi bharatarṣabha. Dharmāviruddho bhūteṣu. Dharma aviruddha. The religion, religion means regulation. Dharmaṁ tu sākṣād bhagavat-praṇītam ([[Vanisource:SB 6.3.19|SB 6.3.19]]). Everything has got regulation. Just like in our ordinary life, we get license. Even a man is keeping a wine shop—that is not good thing—but he must take license, regulation. The whole śāstra means regulation. Śāstra. The word śāstra has come from śās-dhātu. Śās-dhātu means ruling, controlling. So from śās-dhātu, the śāsana has come, government ruling.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG71112BombayFebruary251974_9" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="280" link="Lecture on BG 7.11-12 -- Bombay, February 25, 1974" link_text="Lecture on BG 7.11-12 -- Bombay, February 25, 1974">
<div class="heading">Śastra means weapon. Just like sword. It is called śastra. Or guns. And śāstra also. Śāstra is the regulative principles, the book of law.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 7.11-12 -- Bombay, February 25, 1974|Lecture on BG 7.11-12 -- Bombay, February 25, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Śastra means weapon. Just like sword. It is called śastra. Or guns. And śāstra also. Śāstra is the regulative principles, the book of law. You cannot violate the book of laws. Yaḥ śāstra-vidhim utsṛjya vartate kāma-kārataḥ ([[Vanisource:BG 16.23|BG 16.23]]), na sukhaṁ sāvāpnoti. You must keep yourself in regulative principles, according to the śāstra.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG71112BombayFebruary251974_10" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="280" link="Lecture on BG 7.11-12 -- Bombay, February 25, 1974" link_text="Lecture on BG 7.11-12 -- Bombay, February 25, 1974">
<div class="heading">Śāstra means which is giving you regulative life. In regulative life sex life is... (break) That is śāstra. That is regulative principle. And even with your wife you cannot have sex life unless it meant for progeny, for producing children, Kṛṣṇa conscious children, not cats and dogs.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 7.11-12 -- Bombay, February 25, 1974|Lecture on BG 7.11-12 -- Bombay, February 25, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Śāstra means which is giving you regulative life. In regulative life sex life is... (break) That is śāstra. That is regulative principle. And even with your wife you cannot have sex life unless it meant for progeny, for producing children, Kṛṣṇa conscious children, not cats and dogs. That is dharmāviruddhaḥ. That is not against religious principles. That is very nice. Just like to produce brahmacārīs. Brahmacārī, wherefrom the brahmacārī comes? It comes from the gṛhastha life. Unless one marries, how he can beget children who become brahmacārī? So if you produce brahmacārī, then you can produce hundreds of brahmacārī. That is allowed. But don't produce cats and dogs. That is dharmāviruddhaḥ. Kṛṣṇa says, "I am there." Everything is there. Kṛṣṇa is everything.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG71113BombayApril51971_11" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="281" link="Lecture on BG 7.11-13 -- Bombay, April 5, 1971" link_text="Lecture on BG 7.11-13 -- Bombay, April 5, 1971">
<div class="heading">Similarly, we require to eat, we require to sleep, we require to mate, and we require to defend. If these things are done on account of Kṛṣṇa or as enjoined in the śāstra... Śāstra means, as I have already told you, the orders of Kṛṣṇa or orders of God. Sādhu-śāstra-guru. They are the same thing.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 7.11-13 -- Bombay, April 5, 1971|Lecture on BG 7.11-13 -- Bombay, April 5, 1971]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Similarly, we require to eat, we require to sleep, we require to mate, and we require to defend. If these things are done on account of Kṛṣṇa or as enjoined in the śāstra... Śāstra means, as I have already told you, the orders of Kṛṣṇa or orders of God. Sādhu-śāstra-guru. They are the same thing. There is no difference. A sādhu follows the orders of the scriptures. A guru follows the order of the scriptures. And śāstra is description of the Supreme Lord. Just like we are reading Bhagavad-gītā. These are the injunction of Kṛṣṇa. Therefore it is śāstra. Or anyone who writes in terms of the śāstra, that is right direction. If we speak Bhagavad-gītā as Kṛṣṇa desires, then it is nice. And if we describe Bhagavad-gītā to fulfill our ulterior motives for some purpose, then it is useless.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG1312ParisAugust101973_12" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="339" link="Lecture on BG 13.1-2 -- Paris, August 10, 1973" link_text="Lecture on BG 13.1-2 -- Paris, August 10, 1973">
<div class="heading">Therefore Arjuna is asking not to a third-class so-called philosopher and chemist and economist, but to Kṛṣṇa. Kṛṣṇa. Because whatever answer Kṛṣṇa will give, that is fact. And śāstra means the things which have been spoken by Kṛṣṇa. That is śāstra. And guru means who speaks...
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 13.1-2 -- Paris, August 10, 1973|Lecture on BG 13.1-2 -- Paris, August 10, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Therefore Arjuna is asking not to a third-class so-called philosopher and chemist and economist, but to Kṛṣṇa. Kṛṣṇa. Because whatever answer Kṛṣṇa will give, that is fact. And śāstra means the things which have been spoken by Kṛṣṇa. That is śāstra. And guru means who speaks... Guru means who speaks on behalf of Kṛṣṇa. Sādhu-śāstra-guru. This is called. So Kṛṣṇa is asked. And the answer for Kṛṣṇa, which He gives, that is final. No experiment. No "future." Whatever answer He gives, that is final. Otherwise, why people read Bhagavad-gītā so carefully? Not now. Thousands of years. Thousands of years. Not only in India, in other countries also. So answers, real answers are there.</p>
<p>So this chapter, thirteenth chapter, is very important chapter. So many rascals are there. They're talking so many things. But if you want real answer, that is described by Kṛṣṇa to the six questions, Kṛṣṇa immediately answers in nutshell.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG133HyderabadApril191974_13" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="348" link="Lecture on BG 13.3 -- Hyderabad, April 19, 1974" link_text="Lecture on BG 13.3 -- Hyderabad, April 19, 1974">
<div class="heading">So sādhu-śāstra. Śāstra means Vedas, and sādhu, saintly persons, and guru. Saintly person means who abides by the śāstra, Vedic knowledge. One who does not accept Vedic knowledge, so, followers of Vedas, they do not accept him as an authority.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 13.3 -- Hyderabad, April 19, 1974|Lecture on BG 13.3 -- Hyderabad, April 19, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So sādhu-śāstra. Śāstra means Vedas, and sādhu, saintly persons, and guru. Saintly person means who abides by the śāstra, Vedic knowledge. One who does not accept Vedic knowledge, so, followers of Vedas, they do not accept him as an authority.</p>
<p>Even Lord Buddha, He, because he did not accept the authority of Vedas, therefore in India he was rejected. Although Lord Buddha appeared in India, for some time many people became followers of Buddhist religion, but later on it disappeared from India. It went outside. What was the reason? Because Lord Buddha did not accept the authority of the Vedas. So although Lord Buddha is accepted as incarnation of God... We Vaiṣṇava, we worship Lord Buddha, keśava dhṛta-buddha-śarīra jaya jagadīśa hare. Nindasi yajña-vidher ahaha śruti-jātam.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG161112HawaiiFebruary71975_14" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="400" link="Lecture on BG 16.11-12 -- Hawaii, February 7, 1975" link_text="Lecture on BG 16.11-12 -- Hawaii, February 7, 1975">
<div class="heading">So many demons there were, historical demons. But their process of life was the same as the modern demons. There is no change. Therefore śāstra means it is for all the time, not that śāstra was meant in the past for something else, and now something else. That is not the fact. That is, means, śāstra, that it does not change. The time, place and atmosphere, according to that, everything is the same.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 16.11-12 -- Hawaii, February 7, 1975|Lecture on BG 16.11-12 -- Hawaii, February 7, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So Kṛṣṇa spoke all these words five thousand years ago. Apart from taking account of millions of years, because nature's law is the same, so even in those days, five thousand years ago, you'll find the demonic people as they are now. These words about the demons... There were demons like Rāvaṇa and Hiraṇyakaśipu, Kaṁsa. So many demons there were, historical demons. But their process of life was the same as the modern demons. There is no change. Therefore śāstra means it is for all the time, not that śāstra was meant in the past for something else, and now something else. That is not the fact. That is, means, śāstra, that it does not change. The time, place and atmosphere, according to that, everything is the same.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="1" parent="Lectures" text="Srimad-Bhagavatam Lectures"><h3>Srimad-Bhagavatam Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB127VrndavanaOctober181972_0" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="46" link="Lecture on SB 1.2.7 -- Vrndavana, October 18, 1972" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.2.7 -- Vrndavana, October 18, 1972">
<div class="heading">Just like Bhakti-rasāmṛta-sindhu. One should read thoroughly this Bhakti-rasāmṛta-sindhu to understand the science of devotion. Sādhu-śāstra. And the śāstra means it is enunciated by sādhu, Rūpa Gosvāmī. You cannot read anyone's book.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.2.7 -- Vrndavana, October 18, 1972|Lecture on SB 1.2.7 -- Vrndavana, October 18, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So sādhu-vartmānuvartanam. Narottama dāsa Ṭhākura says: sādhu-śāstra-guru vākya, tinete kariyā aikya. You must learn from guru, from śāstra, what is actually pure devotional service. Just like Bhakti-rasāmṛta-sindhu. One should read thoroughly this Bhakti-rasāmṛta-sindhu to understand the science of devotion. Sādhu-śāstra. And the śāstra means it is enunciated by sādhu, Rūpa Gosvāmī. You cannot read anyone's book. If he's approved sādhu, you can read his book. Then you'll be benefited. If you read hodge-podge, then you will not be able to understand. Therefore sādhu. And sādhu means he gives quotation from śāstras, authorized śāstra He's sādhu. Sādhu will not give anything manufactured by him. No. He's not sādhu. Sādhu means whatever he'll speak, immediately he'll give evidence from the śāstra. Sādhu-śāstra-guru. And guru means who is following sādhu and śāstra. The guru does not follow sādhu and śāstra, who does not follow Rūpa Gosvāmī, does not follow shastric injunction... Shastric injunction is that if one wants to become leader, if one is the spiritual leader or political leader or brāhmaṇa, he must give up four principles of sinful life: illicit sex life, intoxication, gambling and meat-eating, fish-eating. He must give up.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB1325LosAngelesSeptember301972_1" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="122" link="Lecture on SB 1.3.25 -- Los Angeles, September 30, 1972" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.3.25 -- Los Angeles, September 30, 1972">
<div class="heading">Just like Lord Buddha's name was there. Bhaviṣyati yuga-sandhyāyām. Bhaviṣyati. Bhaviṣyati means "He will come." He was not visible. This is śāstra. Śāstra means tri-kāla-jña. The writer of śāstra should be a full cognizant of past, present, and future.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.3.25 -- Los Angeles, September 30, 1972|Lecture on SB 1.3.25 -- Los Angeles, September 30, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">There is still a place Sambhalpur in India. So everything is there. We should not be misled that "Here is another avatāra, here is another avatāra, here is... So many avatāras." No. So this is called śāstra: what will happen after 400,000's of years, that is mentioned. Future. Just like Lord Buddha's name was there. Bhaviṣyati yuga-sandhyāyām. Bhaviṣyati. Bhaviṣyati means "He will come." He was not visible. This is śāstra. Śāstra means tri-kāla-jña. The writer of śāstra should be a full cognizant of past, present, and future. That is called unmistakable. Past, present, and future. Kṛṣṇa says in the Bhagavad-gītā that "I know past, present, and future."</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB152LosAngelesJanuary101968_2" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="131" link="Lecture on SB 1.5.2 -- Los Angeles, January 10, 1968" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.5.2 -- Los Angeles, January 10, 1968">
<div class="heading">So it is the... Śāstra means that you cannot throw it away. Nobody has thrown Bhagavad-gītā at any time, anywhere, because it is perfect.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.5.2 -- Los Angeles, January 10, 1968|Lecture on SB 1.5.2 -- Los Angeles, January 10, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So it is the... Śāstra means that you cannot throw it away. Nobody has thrown Bhagavad-gītā at any time, anywhere, because it is perfect. Nobody has thrown Bible—because they are perfect in knowledge. Jijñāsitam adhītaṁ ca. Jijñāsitaṁ susampannam api te mahad-adbhutam: "You have done wonderful work." And kṛtavān bhārataṁ yas tvaṁ sarvārtha-paribṛṁhitam: "And you have created the great literature Mahābhārata, in which everything is there." Eh? Jijñāsitam adhītaṁ ca. "And not only simply you have inquired, but you have studied fully." There are many inquisitive persons, inquire so many things, but do not study. Reciprocation, there must be study and inquiry. Just like a nice scholar in the college, he inquires from the professor, at the same time studies. So the process of acquiring knowledge is to study and to inquire.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB173233VrndavanaSeptember271976_3" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="185" link="Lecture on SB 1.7.32-33 -- Vrndavana, September 27, 1976" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.7.32-33 -- Vrndavana, September 27, 1976">
<div class="heading">Guru means who speaks on the basis of śāstra; otherwise he's not guru. And śāstra means the opinion of the great authorities.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.7.32-33 -- Vrndavana, September 27, 1976|Lecture on SB 1.7.32-33 -- Vrndavana, September 27, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So it is the injunction of the śāstra, and Caitanya Mahāprabhu also inaugurated this Hare Kṛṣṇa movement for the benefit of the whole world. And it is being accepted practically. So this is the only way to save us from all kinds of difficulties, upadrava. Upadrutāḥ. Mandāḥ sumanda-matayo manda-bhāgyā hy upadrutāḥ ([[Vanisource:SB 1.1.10|SB 1.1.10]]). There will be upadruta, so many times. So we should accept, mataṁ ca vāsudevasya. We should accept the instruction given by Vāsudeva and the śāstra, sādhu. Sādhu, śāstra, guru, they'll speak the same thing. Guru means who speaks on the basis of śāstra; otherwise he's not guru. And śāstra means the opinion of the great authorities. Just like Vyāsadeva, Parāśara Muni, Nārada Muni, modern ācāryas. We do not neglect. We may differ from the philosophical point of view—just like Buddha, Śaṅkarācārya. Vaiṣṇavas, they do not accept the philosophy of Buddha or Śaṅkarācārya. Buddha's philosophy: zero, śūnyavādi; and Śaṅkara's philosophy: nirviśeṣa-vādi, impersonal. So we defy these, nirviśeṣa-śūnyavādi. But we have got all respect for them.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB1819MayapuraSeptember291974_4" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="203" link="Lecture on SB 1.8.19 -- Mayapura, September 29, 1974" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.8.19 -- Mayapura, September 29, 1974">
<div class="heading">Śāstra means what is said by the Supreme Personality of Godhead. That is śāstra. And guru. Guru says the same thing. And sādhu says the same thing.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.8.19 -- Mayapura, September 29, 1974|Lecture on SB 1.8.19 -- Mayapura, September 29, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So take some medicine, then gradually, your eyesight will be improved. Take the spectacle, some power, then more power, more power. So... But they'll not take the instruction of Kṛṣṇa, the instruction of spiritual master. So they want to remain mūḍha-dṛśā, rascal and fool. And still they want to see Kṛṣṇa. This is the difficulty. Na lakṣyase mūḍha-dṛśā ([[Vanisource:SB 1.8.19|SB 1.8.19]]). If you do not improve your eyes according to the direction of śāstra..., sādhu-śāstra-guru, these three things, then how you'll see Kṛṣṇa? Kṛṣṇa is saying. That is śāstra. Śāstra means what is said by the Supreme Personality of Godhead. That is śāstra. And guru. Guru says the same thing. And sādhu says the same thing.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB1828MayapuraOctober81974_5" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="219" link="Lecture on SB 1.8.28 -- Mayapura, October 8, 1974" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.8.28 -- Mayapura, October 8, 1974">
<div class="heading">Śāstra means, is, the record of the statement of authorities. That is called śāstra. Just like in law court, you put lawbooks. What is that lawbook? Lawbook means the statement of the authorities. Similarly, śāstra... Śāstra means śās-dhātu. Śāstra. Śāstra means weapon, and śāstra means the lawbooks. So what is the lawbook? Lawbook means some authority which has given the law. So the government gives law. So similarly, śāstra means the statement given by the authorities.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.8.28 -- Mayapura, October 8, 1974|Lecture on SB 1.8.28 -- Mayapura, October 8, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So that kālam, that eternal time, is Kṛṣṇa. Tvām. Manye: "I think that eternal time, You are, Kṛṣṇa." That's the fact. And īśānam. Īśānam means the Supreme Controller. Īśvaraḥ paramaḥ kṛṣṇaḥ (Bs. 5.1). Controller means īśvara; īśvara means controller. He's the Supreme Controller. He's controlling the whole creation. Īśānam. Kālam īśānam. But who is controlling Him? No, He is not controlled. Anādi-beginningless. Neither endless or beginningless, anādi or nidhanam. And vibhum, the Supreme. This is the understanding of Kṛṣṇa. We have to take lessons from authorities. Here is Kuntī, authority. Therefore his (her) statements are recorded in the śāstra. What is śāstra? Śāstra means, is, the record of the statement of authorities. That is called śāstra. Just like in law court, you put lawbooks. What is that lawbook? Lawbook means the statement of the authorities. Similarly, śāstra... Śāstra means śās-dhātu. Śāstra. Śāstra means weapon, and śāstra means the lawbooks. So what is the lawbook? Lawbook means some authority which has given the law. So the government gives law. So similarly, śāstra means the statement given by the authorities.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB1105LondonAugust281973_6" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="275" link="Lecture on SB 1.10.5 -- London, August 28, 1973" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.10.5 -- London, August 28, 1973">
<div class="heading">Guru means who knows how to follow previous saintly persons, who knows what is written there in the book of knowledge, he is guru. Sādhu-śāstra-guru. And śāstra means that the direction of Kṛṣṇa; that is called śāstra. Therefore Kṛṣṇa said, yaḥ śāstra-vidhim utsṛjya vartate kāma-kārataḥ, na sa siddhim avāpnoti (BG 16.23). Therefore you cannot manufacture scripture.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.10.5 -- London, August 28, 1973|Lecture on SB 1.10.5 -- London, August 28, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Where you get the direction? Sādhu-śāstra-guru-vākya. You get Kṛṣṇa's direction from saintly persons, from authorized scriptures, Vedic literature... Sādhu, śāstra, and guru. Guru means who knows how to follow previous saintly persons, who knows what is written there in the book of knowledge, he is guru. Sādhu-śāstra-guru. And śāstra means that the direction of Kṛṣṇa; that is called śāstra. Therefore Kṛṣṇa said, yaḥ śāstra-vidhim utsṛjya vartate kāma-kārataḥ, na sa siddhim avāpnoti ([[Vanisource:BG 16.23|BG 16.23]]). Therefore you cannot manufacture scripture. That is not possible. Therefore it is said, dharmaṁ tu sākṣād bhagavat-praṇītam ([[Vanisource:SB 6.3.19|SB 6.3.19]]). Śāstra, scripture, means the words and the laws given by God. So what is the law? How can I know? Bhagavad-gītā is there.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB11013MayapuraJune261973_7" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="279" link="Lecture on SB 1.10.13 -- Mayapura, June 26, 1973" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.10.13 -- Mayapura, June 26, 1973">
<div class="heading">There are strī-saṅga, vaidha-avaidha. Vaidha means regular, according to śāstra. According to śāstra means restricted. Śāstra restricts. Śāstra means śās-dhātu. Śās-dhātu means śāsana, ruling. From śās-dhātu, śāstra has come, śastra, weapon, has come.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.10.13 -- Mayapura, June 26, 1973|Lecture on SB 1.10.13 -- Mayapura, June 26, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So how much rascal they are we must know. So therefore we should give up their company. Asat-saṅga-tyāga vaiṣṇava-ācāra. Otherwise, asat... Asat eka strī-saṅgī kṛṣṇa... There are strī-saṅga, vaidha-avaidha. Vaidha means regular, according to śāstra. According to śāstra means restricted. Śāstra restricts. Śāstra means śās-dhātu. Śās-dhātu means śāsana, ruling. From śās-dhātu, śāstra has come, śastra, weapon, has come. And śās-dhātu, from śās-dhātu, śiṣya also comes. These words are derived from śās-dhātu. Śāstra, śastra, śāsana. Śāsana means ruling. Sanskrit is very nice language. From one verbal root, you can manufacture so many words; therefore it is very difficult to make Sanskrit dictionary. It is very difficult. The so-called Sanskrit dictionaries available in the market, you won't find all the words. It is not possible. Because so many words are manufactured by one dhātu. How many they will add? But there is one book, what is the name of that book?</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB11013MayapuraJune261973_8" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="279" link="Lecture on SB 1.10.13 -- Mayapura, June 26, 1973" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.10.13 -- Mayapura, June 26, 1973">
<div class="heading">So in order to check him from the animal life, sex intercourse, the marriage is there. This is the purpose. Therefore śāstra. Śāstra means simply restrict.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.10.13 -- Mayapura, June 26, 1973|Lecture on SB 1.10.13 -- Mayapura, June 26, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So in order to check him from the animal life, sex intercourse, the marriage is there. This is the purpose. Therefore śāstra. Śāstra means simply restrict. One who is accustomed to restriction, he's perfect. Not indulgence. The animals are not restricted. But nowadays, better animal is restricted. They have got a time for sexual intercourse. But these, these animals, the four-, two-legged, two-hands animal, they have no restriction. Any time. Less than animal. Therefore śāstra is there.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB11546LosAngelesDecember241973_9" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="313" link="Lecture on SB 1.15.46 -- Los Angeles, December 24, 1973" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.15.46 -- Los Angeles, December 24, 1973">
<div class="heading">This description of the Kali-yuga is given in the Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam. This is called śāstra. This Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam was written five thousand years ago when the Kali-yuga was to begin. Now, what will happen in future, everything is given there. Śāstra means... That is...Therefore we accept śāstra.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.15.46 -- Los Angeles, December 24, 1973|Lecture on SB 1.15.46 -- Los Angeles, December 24, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">This description of the Kali-yuga is given in the Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam. This is called śāstra. This Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam was written five thousand years ago when the Kali-yuga was to begin. Now, what will happen in future, everything is given there. Śāstra means... That is...Therefore we accept śāstra. Tri-kāla-jña. The śāstrakāra, or the compiler of the śāstra, must be liberated person so that he can describe past, present and future. In the Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam you will find so many things which was told to be happening in future. Just like in the Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam there is mention of Lord Buddha's appearance. Similarly, there is mention of Lord Kalki's appearance. There is mention of Lord Caitanya's appearance, although it was written five thousand years ago. Tri-kāla-jña. Know, they know what is past, present and future.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB11619HawaiiJanuary151974_10" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="332" link="Lecture on SB 1.16.19 -- Hawaii, January 15, 1974" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.16.19 -- Hawaii, January 15, 1974">
<div class="heading">So so many symptoms are described, but at the end the remedy is suggested because śāstra means it will guide you for the ultimate goal of life, for the perfection of life. So if the world condition is so bad, then how people will be saved?
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.16.19 -- Hawaii, January 15, 1974|Lecture on SB 1.16.19 -- Hawaii, January 15, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So so many symptoms are described, but at the end the remedy is suggested because śāstra means it will guide you for the ultimate goal of life, for the perfection of life. So if the world condition is so bad, then how people will be saved? That is also suggested in the śāstra: kaler doṣa-nidhe rājann asti hy eko mahān guṇaḥ. Parīkṣit Mahārāja was advised by Śukadeva Gosvāmī, "My dear King, I've described so many faults. It is like the ocean of faults. But there is one boon also. That is special prerogative, special advantage of this age." Kaler doṣa-nidhe rājann asti hy eko mahān guṇaḥ. Kalau, kalau means "In this age of Kali, it is full of faulty things. But there is one boon." What is that? Kīrtanād eva kṛṣṇasya mukta-saṅgaḥ paraṁ vrajet ([[Vanisource:SB 12.3.51|SB 12.3.51]]). Kīrtanād eva kṛṣṇasya: Simply by chanting the holy name of Kṛṣṇa—Hare Kṛṣṇa, Hare Kṛṣṇa, Kṛṣṇa Kṛṣṇa, Hare Hare/ Hare Rāma, Hare Rāma, Rāma Rāma, Hare Hare—simply by chanting the holy name...," kīrtanād eva kṛṣṇasya, kṛṣṇasya, so, mukta-saṅgaḥ, "he becomes free from all these contaminations, by one thing, simply chanting Hare Kṛṣṇa." Kīrtanād eva kṛṣṇasya mukta-saṅgaḥ. There are so many contaminations, so many faults of this age, but simply by chanting Hare Kṛṣṇa mahā-mantra, one becomes kīrtanād eva kṛṣṇasya mukta-saṅgaḥ, he becomes free from the contaminated association.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB11620HawaiiJanuary161974_11" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="334" link="Lecture on SB 1.16.20 -- Hawaii, January 16, 1974" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.16.20 -- Hawaii, January 16, 1974">
<div class="heading">Therefore we must abide by the sādhu-śāstra-guru. (aside:) Ah, what is this sound, is going on now? You can ask somebody to stop. Sādhu means saintly person. Śāstra means revealed scriptures. Sādhu, śāstra and guru, spiritual master. So we must follow the footprints of saintly persons, mahājano yena gataḥ sa panthāḥ (CC Madhya 17.186).
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.16.20 -- Hawaii, January 16, 1974|Lecture on SB 1.16.20 -- Hawaii, January 16, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Therefore we must abide by the sādhu-śāstra-guru. (aside:) Ah, what is this sound, is going on now? You can ask somebody to stop. Sādhu means saintly person. Śāstra means revealed scriptures. Sādhu, śāstra and guru, spiritual master. So we must follow the footprints of saintly persons, mahājano yena gataḥ sa panthāḥ ([[Vanisource:CC Madhya 17.186|CC Madhya 17.186]]). That is the way. We have to follow great superior personalities, just like ṣaḍ-gosvāmī. Narottama dāsa Ṭhākura says, ei chay gosāñi jāṅr mui tāṅr dāsa: "I become servant, servant or disciple, of such a person who follows the footprints of the six Gosvāmīs." Otherwise one becomes guru, anyone, just like nowadays they become. They are manufacturing guru. Guru is not manufactured. Guru is in the disciplic succession, one who is strictly follows the footsteps of the ṣaḍ-gosvāmīs. Ei chay gosāñi jāṅr. Anyone who is following the footsteps of the gosvāmīs, Rūpa Gosvāmī...</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB32541BombayDecember91974_12" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="461" link="Lecture on SB 3.25.41 -- Bombay, December 9, 1974" link_text="Lecture on SB 3.25.41 -- Bombay, December 9, 1974">
<div class="heading">So we have to give up this. "Give up this" means not that you have to become a sannyāsī or give up your... But you must know your position. At least, you must understand. You don't foolishly accept that you are very happy. Don't be fool. Be intelligent. That is śāstra. The śāstra means...
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 3.25.41 -- Bombay, December 9, 1974|Lecture on SB 3.25.41 -- Bombay, December 9, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So we have to give up this. "Give up this" means not that you have to become a sannyāsī or give up your... But you must know your position. At least, you must understand. You don't foolishly accept that you are very happy. Don't be fool. Be intelligent. That is śāstra. The śāstra means... A person goes to school, college, to become intelligent. Therefore there are so many śāstras, Veda, Vedas. Why Vedic literatures are there? To make us intelligent. Kṛṣṇa bhuliyā jīva... Anādi-bahirmukha jīva kṛṣṇa bhuli' gelā, ataeva kṛṣṇa veda-purāṇa kailā ([[Vanisource:CC Madhya 20.117|CC Madhya 20.117]]). We are so foolish rascals that we have forgotten. We are suffering every moment, and still, we are thinking we are very happy. Therefore it is our misfortune that human life is meant for understanding, "What is the position of my life? Why I am suffering?"</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB568VrndavanaNovember301976_13" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="574" link="Lecture on SB 5.6.8 -- Vrndavana, November 30, 1976" link_text="Lecture on SB 5.6.8 -- Vrndavana, November 30, 1976">
<div class="heading">As śāstra, there is no change. Not that "Modernize. The śāstra should be changed." No. That is nonsense. That is not śāstra. Śāstra cannot be changed. "Circumstantially, it will be changed, seasonal changes." No. That is not śāstra. Śāstra means it is perpetual.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 5.6.8 -- Vrndavana, November 30, 1976|Lecture on SB 5.6.8 -- Vrndavana, November 30, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So if this confidential knowledge, one who preaches without any compromise, he is the confidential servant of Kṛṣṇa. There is no compromise. This is real religion. The Kṛṣṇa says, na ca tasmād manuṣyeṣu kaścid me priya-kṛttamaḥ. So this is the person who has received the authority to draw mercy water from the ocean of mercy of Kṛṣṇa. Sākṣād-dharitvena samasta-śāstraiḥ. And what Kṛṣṇa said five thousand years ago, the same thing Caitanya Mahāprabhu said, same thing. There was no change, as there was no change between the statement of Viśvanātha Cakravartī Ṭhākura and Narottama dāsa Ṭhākura. Sādhu śāstra. As śāstra, there is no change. Not that "Modernize. The śāstra should be changed." No. That is nonsense. That is not śāstra. Śāstra cannot be changed. "Circumstantially, it will be changed, seasonal changes." No. That is not śāstra. Śāstra means it is perpetual.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB617SanFranciscoMarch11967_14" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="590" link="Lecture on SB 6.1.7 -- San Francisco, March 1, 1967" link_text="Lecture on SB 6.1.7 -- San Francisco, March 1, 1967">
<div class="heading">But the śāstra can say. Śāstra means the authoritative scriptures. Just the other day we described about the symptoms of this Kali-yuga.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 6.1.7 -- San Francisco, March 1, 1967|Lecture on SB 6.1.7 -- San Francisco, March 1, 1967]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">But the śāstra can say. Śāstra means the authoritative scriptures. Just the other day we described about the symptoms of this Kali-yuga. So many things are foretold five thousand years before, and they are coming true in this age. For example, one small example: lāvaṇyaṁ keśa-dhāraṇam. In this age people will think that by keeping long hairs they have become beautiful. This is stated in the Bhāgavata. A very small example. So many other things. Five thousand years before, ago, this was foretold, that in this age people will like to keep long hairs in order to become beautiful. So this is śāstra. Śāstra means direction—both past, present, and future. Everything is there. Therefore we have to consult the Vedic literature. It is perfect. It is without any mistake, without any cheating. This is śāstra.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB617SanFranciscoMarch11967_15" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="590" link="Lecture on SB 6.1.7 -- San Francisco, March 1, 1967" link_text="Lecture on SB 6.1.7 -- San Francisco, March 1, 1967">
<div class="heading">So this is called śāstra. Śāstra means you can consult. Just like you consult dictionary, you consult encyclopedia, you consult so many authoritative books for understanding knowledge, similarly, if you consult, you get all information. So in this Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam it is all stated: "If you do like this, you get birth like this. If you do like this, you get birth like this." And in the Śrīmad Bhagavad-gītā it is generally spoken, ūrdhvaṁ gacchanti sattva-sthāḥ (BG 14.18).
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 6.1.7 -- San Francisco, March 1, 1967|Lecture on SB 6.1.7 -- San Francisco, March 1, 1967]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So this is called śāstra. Śāstra means you can consult. Just like you consult dictionary, you consult encyclopedia, you consult so many authoritative books for understanding knowledge, similarly, if you consult, you get all information. So in this Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam it is all stated: "If you do like this, you get birth like this. If you do like this, you get birth like this." And in the Śrīmad Bhagavad-gītā it is generally spoken, ūrdhvaṁ gacchanti sattva-sthāḥ ([[Vanisource:BG 14.18|BG 14.18]]). Those who are in the modes of goodness... There are three qualities in this material world: the quality of goodness, the quality of passion, and the quality of ignorance. So in the Bhagavad-gītā it is stated that ūrdhvaṁ gacchanti sattva-sthāḥ. Those who are cultivating the quality of goodness, they can be promoted to the higher status of life in higher planetary system. Ūrdhvam. Ūrdhvam means higher. Ūrdhvaṁ gacchanti sattva-sthāḥ. And madhye tiṣṭhanti rājasāḥ.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB61813NewYorkJuly241971_16" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="599" link="Lecture on SB 6.1.8-13 -- New York, July 24, 1971" link_text="Lecture on SB 6.1.8-13 -- New York, July 24, 1971">
<div class="heading">Everyone sees. And in the lawbook it is said that if a man commits murder he'll be hanged. So śruta means we have heard it from authoritative sources; lawbook is authoritative source. Just like śāstra. Śāstra and lawbook is the same. Śāstra means that which controls.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 6.1.8-13 -- New York, July 24, 1971|Lecture on SB 6.1.8-13 -- New York, July 24, 1971]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">This is intelligent question. He says: dṛṣṭvā, dṛṣṭa-śrutābhyāṁ yat pāpam ([[Vanisource:SB 6.1.9|SB 6.1.9]]). Dṛṣṭa means just like one man sees this man has committed murder and he's hanged. Everyone sees. And in the lawbook it is said that if a man commits murder he'll be hanged. So śruta means we have heard it from authoritative sources; lawbook is authoritative source. Just like śāstra. Śāstra and lawbook is the same. Śāstra means that which controls. Śās-dhātu. Śāstra, śastra, śāsana, śiṣya comes from the same root. Śiṣya. Śiṣya also comes from the same root. Śiṣya means one agrees voluntarily to be governed by the spiritual master. He's called śiṣya. And śāsana, the government. So śāstra means that regulates our daily activities. So here it is called... Śāstra is learned by hearing, not by licking, not by seeing. Just like here is a śāstra, bhagavat-śāstra. You cannot learn it by seeing or by touching or... You have to learn it by hearing. Śās... This is called śruta.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB6142LosAngelesJune81976_17" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="671" link="Lecture on SB 6.1.42 -- Los Angeles, June 8, 1976" link_text="Lecture on SB 6.1.42 -- Los Angeles, June 8, 1976">
<div class="heading">Therefore śāstra says, Vedic knowledge, that śāstra-cakṣuṣāt, paśyati jñāna-cakṣuṣāt: "One can see by the eyes of knowledge," not by these blunt eyes.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 6.1.42 -- Los Angeles, June 8, 1976|Lecture on SB 6.1.42 -- Los Angeles, June 8, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">The real seeing is through the eyes, er, through the ears. Suppose one does not know who is your..., who is his father. So how he can see the father? Through the ear, not with the eyes. That is not possible. The mother says, "My dear child, here is your father," and you see through the eyes: "Here is my father." So therefore real eyes—the ear, not these eyes. Real eyes. That is real seeing. Therefore śāstra says, Vedic knowledge, that śāstra-cakṣuṣāt, paśyati jñāna-cakṣuṣāt: "One can see by the eyes of knowledge," not by these blunt eyes. This is useless. They cannot see. And how you can see through the śabda? Śāstra means śabda. Through the ear... My Guru Mahārāja used to say, "Don't try to see a saintly person by your eyes.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB6149DetroitJune151976_18" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="685" link="Lecture on SB 6.1.49 -- Detroit, June 15, 1976" link_text="Lecture on SB 6.1.49 -- Detroit, June 15, 1976">
<div class="heading">So by understanding knowledge, real life from sādhu-śāstra-guru-vākya, by approaching saintly persons, sādhu... Śāstra means authorized scriptures.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 6.1.49 -- Detroit, June 15, 1976|Lecture on SB 6.1.49 -- Detroit, June 15, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So by understanding knowledge, real life from sādhu-śāstra-guru-vākya, by approaching saintly persons, sādhu... Śāstra means authorized scriptures. Sādhu, śāstra and guru, and spiritual master. This is the source of knowledge. And the Vedic injunction is tad-vijñānārthaṁ sa gurum evābhigacchet (MU 1.2.12). In order to learn that higher transcendental platform of knowledge, one should approach a guru, bona fide guru, who knows.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB621214AllahabadJanuary171971atKumbhamela_19" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="713" link="Lecture on SB 6.2.12-14 -- Allahabad, January 17, 1971, at Kumbha-mela" link_text="Lecture on SB 6.2.12-14 -- Allahabad, January 17, 1971, at Kumbha-mela">
<div class="heading">The sādhu will speak only on the authority of śāstra. And śāstra means the description given by the sādhu. They are correlative. And guru means who follows the sādhu and the śāstra. So these are very instructive. Sādhu who is always engaged in the service of the Lord, he is sādhu, bhakta. And śāstra. Śāstra means description of the activities of the sādhu and Bhagavān.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 6.2.12-14 -- Allahabad, January 17, 1971, at Kumbha-mela|Lecture on SB 6.2.12-14 -- Allahabad, January 17, 1971, at Kumbha-mela]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">You'll never find any disagreement with the śāstra, sādhu, and guru. Therefore Narottama dāsa Ṭhākura says, sādhu-śāstra-guru-vākya. That is our guidance. Sādhu. If you say Caitanya Mahāprabhu was a sādhu or a devotee, so His words and the words of the scriptures are the same. The sādhu will speak only on the authority of śāstra. And śāstra means the description given by the sādhu. They are correlative. And guru means who follows the sādhu and the śāstra. So these are very instructive. Sādhu who is always engaged in the service of the Lord, he is sādhu, bhakta. And śāstra. Śāstra means description of the activities of the sādhu and Bhagavān.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB7531MauritiusOctober41975_20" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="732" link="Lecture on SB 7.5.31 -- Mauritius, October 4, 1975" link_text="Lecture on SB 7.5.31 -- Mauritius, October 4, 1975">
<div class="heading">That is the injunction of the śāstra. So, yaḥ śāstra-vidhim utsṛjya vartate kāma-kārataḥ (BG 16.23). If you do not follow the instruction of the śāstra-śāstra means the instruction of God—then na siddhiṁ sa, such civilization will never be perfect, na siddhiṁ sa avāpnoti, na sukham, neither they will be happy, na parāṁ gatim, neither they will be elevated back to home, back to Godhead. This is the defect.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 7.5.31 -- Mauritius, October 4, 1975|Lecture on SB 7.5.31 -- Mauritius, October 4, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">But in the human being is advised to do certain things. They must do it. Then there is no question of scarcity. There is... Everything is arranged there. Just like Kṛṣṇa says, annād bhavanti bhūtāni: ([[Vanisource:BG 3.14|BG 3.14]]) "You produce your food grains so that the animals and the man, both will be happy." But if you don't produce food grains, if you produce sugarcane, then how they will be satisifed? Food grains must be produced. That is the injunction of the śāstra. So, yaḥ śāstra-vidhim utsṛjya vartate kāma-kārataḥ ([[Vanisource:BG 16.23|BG 16.23]]). If you do not follow the instruction of the śāstra-śāstra means the instruction of God—then na siddhiṁ sa, such civilization will never be perfect, na siddhiṁ sa avāpnoti, na sukham, neither they will be happy, na parāṁ gatim, neither they will be elevated back to home, back to Godhead. This is the defect.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB7thCantoCalcuttaMarch71972_21" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="867" link="Lecture on SB 7th Canto -- Calcutta, March 7, 1972" link_text="Lecture on SB 7th Canto -- Calcutta, March 7, 1972">
<div class="heading">Then he says, viprād dvi-ṣaḍ-guṇa-yutād aravinda-nābha-pādāravinda-vimukhāt śvapacaṁ variṣṭham. Viprād, brāhmaṇa, dvi-ṣaḍ-guṇa, a brāhmaṇa not by birth but with quality. Guṇa-karma-vibhāgaśaḥ. That is śāstra. Śāstra means, Lord Kṛṣṇa says, cātur-varṇyaṁ mayā sṛṣṭaṁ guṇa-karma-vibhāgaśaḥ (BG 4.13).
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 7th Canto -- Calcutta, March 7, 1972|Lecture on SB 7th Canto -- Calcutta, March 7, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Then he says, viprād dvi-ṣaḍ-guṇa-yutād aravinda-nābha-pādāravinda-vimukhāt śvapacaṁ variṣṭham. Viprād, brāhmaṇa, dvi-ṣaḍ-guṇa, a brāhmaṇa not by birth but with quality. Guṇa-karma-vibhāgaśaḥ. That is śāstra. Śāstra means, Lord Kṛṣṇa says, cātur-varṇyaṁ mayā sṛṣṭaṁ guṇa-karma-vibhāgaśaḥ ([[Vanisource:BG 4.13|BG 4.13]]). A brāhmaṇa or a kṣatriya or a vaiśya or a śūdra or a brahmacārī or a gṛhastha, vānaprastha, sannyāsī, they are divided according to the quality. According to the quality. Never says janma. Quality. So here also it is said viprād dvi-ṣaḍ-guṇa-yutād. Dvi means double, twice, and ṣaḍ means six, then means twelve. Twelve kinds of qualities a brāhmaṇa meets. The twelve kinds of qualities are also mentioned here. (reads from Śrīdhara Swami commentary:) Evaṁ bhaktyeva kevalaya hari (indistinct) sambhavati tukta idaniṁ bhaktiṁ vinā na kiñcit toṣa (indistinct) dviṣaṭ (indistinct) guṇa (indistinct) variṣṭhaṁ manye.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Nectar_of_Devotion_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="2" parent="Lectures" text="Nectar of Devotion Lectures"><h3>Nectar of Devotion Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="TheNectarofDevotionVrndavanaNovember131972_0" class="quote" parent="Nectar_of_Devotion_Lectures" book="Lec" index="42" link="The Nectar of Devotion -- Vrndavana, November 13, 1972" link_text="The Nectar of Devotion -- Vrndavana, November 13, 1972">
<div class="heading">What is authorized method, we shall follow. Sādhu-guru-śāstra-vākya. Sādhu and guru means on the basis of śāstra. And śāstra means the statements of sādhu and guru. Therefore sādhu and guru and śāstra, they are identical. So they must be corroborated.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:The Nectar of Devotion -- Vrndavana, November 13, 1972|The Nectar of Devotion -- Vrndavana, November 13, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">We cannot follow an upstart, manufacturing some song, manufacturing some ideas. We cannot follow that. What is authorized song, we shall sing. What is authorized method, we shall follow. Sādhu-guru-śāstra-vākya. Sādhu and guru means on the basis of śāstra. And śāstra means the statements of sādhu and guru. Therefore sādhu and guru and śāstra, they are identical. So they must be corroborated. If somebody's sādhu is speaking against śāstra, then he's not sādhu. If somebody's guru, if he's going against śāstra, then he's not guru. And śāstra means the original guru and sādhu. What do you mean by śāstra? Just like in Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam. Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam means we are studying the character of original sādhu and guru. Just like Prahlāda Mahārāja, Prahlāda-caritra, Dhruva-caritra, Ambarīṣa-caritra, the Pāṇḍavas, Bhīṣma. So Bhāgavata means the glories of Bhagavān and bhaga, devotees. That's all. This is Bhāgavatam. So sādhu-guru-śāstra-vākya, tinete kariyā aikya.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Sri_Caitanya-caritamrta_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="3" parent="Lectures" text="Sri Caitanya-caritamrta Lectures"><h3>Sri Caitanya-caritamrta Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonCCMadhyalila20119121NewYorkNovember241966_0" class="quote" parent="Sri_Caitanya-caritamrta_Lectures" book="Lec" index="70" link="Lecture on CC Madhya-lila 20.119-121 -- New York, November 24, 1966" link_text="Lecture on CC Madhya-lila 20.119-121 -- New York, November 24, 1966">
<div class="heading">Here, he's called sādhu. Sādhu means these are the qualifications. Of course, not that we may develop all these qualities immediately, but sādhu means this. Sādhu means, what is called, pious man. These are the qualities of pious man, sādhu. And śāstra. Śāstra means the scripture.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on CC Madhya-lila 20.119-121 -- New York, November 24, 1966|Lecture on CC Madhya-lila 20.119-121 -- New York, November 24, 1966]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Poetic, expert and silent. One who is too much talkative, that means he's lacking in devotion. He should simply talk about Kṛṣṇa, nothing more. And when he, when one is actually absorbed in Kṛṣṇa thought, he cannot talk nonsense. He has no time. He does not waste time. So these are the qualities. Here, he's called sādhu. Sādhu means these are the qualifications. Of course, not that we may develop all these qualities immediately, but sādhu means this. Sādhu means, what is called, pious man. These are the qualities of pious man, sādhu. And śāstra. Śāstra means the scripture. By study of scripture, you can develop these qualities. That is called scripture. That is authorized scripture. Just like you study some book, and you develop some quality after reading that book, similarly, when you actually have scripture, then you develop all these qualities. And guru, spiritual master, means who teaches you all these things.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonCCMadhyalila20121124NewYorkNovember251966_1" class="quote" parent="Sri_Caitanya-caritamrta_Lectures" book="Lec" index="72" link="Lecture on CC Madhya-lila 20.121-124 -- New York, November 25, 1966" link_text="Lecture on CC Madhya-lila 20.121-124 -- New York, November 25, 1966">
<div class="heading">So śāstra-guru-ātma-rūpe āpanāre jānāna. So Kṛṣṇa, or the Supreme Lord, is always anxious to revive the memory of these forgotten souls, conditioned souls. Now, how He revives? He revives in śāstra. Śāstra means scripture. Śāstra, guru, spiritual master. Śāstra, guru, ātma-rūpe. And sometimes He comes Himself or as Paramātmā, or the Supersoul.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on CC Madhya-lila 20.121-124 -- New York, November 25, 1966|Lecture on CC Madhya-lila 20.121-124 -- New York, November 25, 1966]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So what is the utility of this Vedic knowledge? Now, by understanding, by hearing from authorized sources, or by reading from authorized sources, the forgetful living entities will come to his senses. That is the purpose. He will come to his sense: "Oh, my position is this, and I am suffering in this way." So śāstra-guru-ātma-rūpe āpanāre jānāna. So Kṛṣṇa, or the Supreme Lord, is always anxious to revive the memory of these forgotten souls, conditioned souls. Now, how He revives? He revives in śāstra. Śāstra means scripture. Śāstra, guru, spiritual master. Śāstra, guru, ātma-rūpe. And sometimes He comes Himself or as Paramātmā, or the Supersoul.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonCCMadhyalila20353354NewYorkDecember261966_2" class="quote" parent="Sri_Caitanya-caritamrta_Lectures" book="Lec" index="96" link="Lecture on CC Madhya-lila 20.353-354 -- New York, December 26, 1966" link_text="Lecture on CC Madhya-lila 20.353-354 -- New York, December 26, 1966">
<div class="heading">Sādhu means pious, religious, honest person. Sādhu, whose character is spotless, he's called sādhu. Śāstra means scripture, and guru, guru means spiritual master. They are on the equal level. Why? Because the medium is scripture. Guru is considered to be liberated because he follows the scripture.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on CC Madhya-lila 20.353-354 -- New York, December 26, 1966|Lecture on CC Madhya-lila 20.353-354 -- New York, December 26, 1966]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">We are just trying to make progress from ignorance to goodness and then transcend. This is the process of spiritual realization. Nobody should think that we are perfect. We cannot be. God is... Only God is perfect, and we are all imperfect. Even our so-called liberated stage, we are still imperfect. Therefore one has to take shelter of authority because, constitutionally, we are imperfect. Lord Caitanya says, āmā-sabā jīvera haya śāstra-dvārā 'jñāna'. So therefore, for real knowledge, we have to consult the scriptures, śāstra. Sādhu-śāstra-guru. Sādhu means pious, religious, honest person. Sādhu, whose character is spotless, he's called sādhu. Śāstra means scripture, and guru, guru means spiritual master. They are on the equal level. Why? Because the medium is scripture. Guru is considered to be liberated because he follows the scripture. Sādhu is considered to be honest and saintly because he follows scripture. Sādhu-śāstra-guru-vākya. Nobody can become a sādhu if he does not accept the principles of scripture. Nobody can be accepted as guru, or spiritual master, if he does not follow the principles of scripture. This is the test.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Festival_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="6" parent="Lectures" text="Festival Lectures"><h3>Festival Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="SriVyasapujaNewVrindabanSeptember21972_0" class="quote" parent="Festival_Lectures" book="Lec" index="24" link="Sri Vyasa-puja -- New Vrindaban, September 2, 1972" link_text="Sri Vyasa-puja -- New Vrindaban, September 2, 1972">
<div class="heading">O spiritual master is respected as good as God. Why? Sākṣād-dharitvena samasta-śāstraiḥ. They have already chanted this song. Samasta-śāstraiḥ, in all Vedic literatures. Samasta, all. Samasta means all. Śāstra means Vedic literature.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Sri Vyasa-puja -- New Vrindaban, September 2, 1972|Sri Vyasa-puja -- New Vrindaban, September 2, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So as the spiritual master is teacher of the student, he has to teach the disciple how to send back his respect and contribution to God. This is called Vyāsa-pūjā.</p>
<p>So spiritual master is respected as good as God. Why? Sākṣād-dharitvena samasta-śāstraiḥ. They have already chanted this song. Samasta-śāstraiḥ, in all Vedic literatures. Samasta, all. Samasta means all. Śāstra means Vedic literature. The all the śāstras in Vedic literature, they have declared that spiritual master is as good as God. Not God, but as good as God.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Initiation_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="8" parent="Lectures" text="Initiation Lectures"><h3>Initiation Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="InitiationofSatyabhamaDasiandGayatriInitiationofDevoteesGoingtoLondonMontrealJuly261968_0" class="quote" parent="Initiation_Lectures" book="Lec" index="5" link="Initiation of Satyabhama Dasi and Gayatri Initiation of Devotees Going to London -- Montreal, July 26, 1968" link_text="Initiation of Satyabhama Dasi and Gayatri Initiation of Devotees Going to London -- Montreal, July 26, 1968">
<div class="heading">So generally śruti-śāstra means Vedas, the books of knowledge. So one should not go beyond the books of knowledge, just like we are studying Bhagavad-gītā. So śruti-śāstra-nindanam. Nobody should criticize or malinterpret the statement in the scripture.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Initiation of Satyabhama Dasi and Gayatri Initiation of Devotees Going to London -- Montreal, July 26, 1968|Initiation of Satyabhama Dasi and Gayatri Initiation of Devotees Going to London -- Montreal, July 26, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">And śruti-śāstra-nindanam. No scriptures of the world shall be decried. Any scripture which is preaching about God consciousness, that is bona fide. It may be in some scriptures information of God is not fully explained, but if the idea, target, is God, that is a scripture. So generally śruti-śāstra means Vedas, the books of knowledge. So one should not go beyond the books of knowledge, just like we are studying Bhagavad-gītā. So śruti-śāstra-nindanam. Nobody should criticize or malinterpret the statement in the scripture.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="InitiationofLokanathadasaNewVrindabanMay211969_1" class="quote" parent="Initiation_Lectures" book="Lec" index="16" link="Initiation of Lokanatha dasa -- New Vrindaban, May 21, 1969" link_text="Initiation of Lokanatha dasa -- New Vrindaban, May 21, 1969">
<div class="heading">Artha-śāstra. Artha-śāstra means economics, how to increase wealth. That is called artha. So arthadam. This human form of life can bestow upon you artha.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Initiation of Lokanatha dasa -- New Vrindaban, May 21, 1969|Initiation of Lokanatha dasa -- New Vrindaban, May 21, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Mānuṣyam arthadam anityam apīha dhīraḥ, tūrṇaṁ yateta anumṛtyu pateta yāvat niḥśreyasāya viṣayaḥ khalu sarvataḥ syāt. The Vedic literature informs that labdhvā sudurlabham idam ([[Vanisource:SB 11.9.29|SB 11.9.29]]). Idam means "this." "This" means this body, this opportunity, human form of life, developed consciousness, full facility. The animals, they have no facility. They are living in the jungles. But we can utilize these jungles, these forests, for so many comfortable situation. So we have got developed consciousness, intelligence. We can utilize. So it is called arthadam. Artha. There are two meanings of artha. Artha-śāstra. Artha-śāstra means economics, how to increase wealth. That is called artha. So arthadam. This human form of life can bestow upon you artha. Artha means something substantial. Generally we understand substantial means money. If somebody gets money, that is substantial for material comforts, of course, but real substantial thing is Kṛṣṇa consciousness. That is real substance, arthadam.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="General_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="11" parent="Lectures" text="General Lectures"><h3>General Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureSeattleOctober181968_0" class="quote" parent="General_Lectures" book="Lec" index="25" link="Lecture -- Seattle, October 18, 1968" link_text="Lecture -- Seattle, October 18, 1968">
<div class="heading">Śāstra means scriptures, authoritative scriptures, Vedic scriptures, śāstra. Sādhu, śāstra, and guru, a spiritual master. Three parallel line.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture -- Seattle, October 18, 1968|Lecture -- Seattle, October 18, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">It is not difficult to understand. Nobody can say that it is not possible. In the śāstra we hear also. Sādhu śāstra, guru vākya, tinete kariya aikya. Spiritual realization can be perfected by three parallel process. Sādhu. Sādhu means saintly persons, who are realized souls, sādhu. And śāstra. Śāstra means scriptures, authoritative scriptures, Vedic scriptures, śāstra. Sādhu, śāstra, and guru, a spiritual master. Three parallel line. And if you place your car or vehicle on these three parallel line, your car will go direct to Kṛṣṇa. Tinete kariyā aikya. Just like in the railway line you see two parallel lines. If they are in order, the railway carriages are carried very smoothly to the destination. Here also, there are three parallel lines—sādhu, śāstra, guru: saintly person, association of saintly person, acceptance of bona fide spiritual master, and faith in the scriptures. That's all. Then your carriage will be going nicely, without any disturbance. Sādhu śāstra guru vākya, tinete kariya aikya.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureHawaiiMarch231969_1" class="quote" parent="General_Lectures" book="Lec" index="40" link="Lecture -- Hawaii, March 23, 1969" link_text="Lecture -- Hawaii, March 23, 1969">
<div class="heading">The student is called śiṣya. Śiṣya, the Sanskrit word śiṣya, this word comes from the root śas. Śas means ruling. From śas, the śāstra. Śāstra means authoritative books.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture -- Hawaii, March 23, 1969|Lecture -- Hawaii, March 23, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So Kṛṣṇa first of all chastised him—not in the beginning, because in the beginning there was friendly talk, but when Arjuna surrendered unto Kṛṣṇa that "You don't take me as Your friend. I accept You as my spiritual master. So You teach me." This relationship of spiritual master and student... The student is called śiṣya. Śiṣya, the Sanskrit word śiṣya, this word comes from the root śas. Śas means ruling. From śas, the śāstra. Śāstra means authoritative books. They have been derived. And śastra. Śastra means weapons, armaments. That is called śastra. Just like sword, guns, they are called śastra. These two things are rulings. The state has got lawbooks, authoritative books, and one who does not obey the lawbooks, then the next word is gun and sword. This, these two words, means to accept authority.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureSanFranciscoJune281971_2" class="quote" parent="General_Lectures" book="Lec" index="88" link="Lecture -- San Francisco, June 28, 1971" link_text="Lecture -- San Francisco, June 28, 1971">
<div class="heading">Then their next qualification, next engagement was nana-śāstra-vicaraṇaika-nipunau. Śāstra, all kinds of Vedic literature. Śāstra means which governs.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture -- San Francisco, June 28, 1971|Lecture -- San Francisco, June 28, 1971]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Then their next qualification, next engagement was nana-śāstra-vicaraṇaika-nipunau. Śāstra, all kinds of Vedic literature. Śāstra means which governs. The Vedic literature governs. There is a verbal root which is called śāst. Śāst means to rule. The ruling, there are three kinds of ruling. One ruling is śāstra, law codes. Just like every civilized country is ruled by the laws of the state, and the statute book which contains all the rules, that is called law books. That is also śāstra. That is śāstra. And then another śāsdhātu is śastra. Śastra means weapons, that like guns, swords. Śāstra and śastra. So there are two sections of people: those who are civilized, they are ruled by the śāstra, by the law codes, and those who are law-breakers, they are ruled by the śastra, weapons. Both things are required, śāstra and śastra.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="RotaryClubLectureAhmedabadDecember81972ThePresentNeedofHumanSociety_3" class="quote" parent="General_Lectures" book="Lec" index="125" link="Rotary Club Lecture -- Ahmedabad, December 8, 1972 'The Present Need of Human Society'" link_text="Rotary Club Lecture -- Ahmedabad, December 8, 1972 'The Present Need of Human Society'">
<div class="heading">Kali means disagreement and fighting, kālaḥ. So in this age, a slight disagreement will cause some fighting, some misunderstanding. And practically, this is the age of misguidance; therefore it is called Kali-yuga. So in different Purāṇas, the symptoms of Kali-yuga is described. Śāstra. Śāstra means tri-kāla-jña. Śāstra is not ordinary book.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Rotary Club Lecture -- Ahmedabad, December 8, 1972 'The Present Need of Human Society'|Rotary Club Lecture -- Ahmedabad, December 8, 1972 'The Present Need of Human Society']]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Mr. President, Rotarians, Ladies and Gentlemen, I thank you very much for your kindly inviting me to speak before you on the subject matter "The Present Need of the Human Society." At the present day... According to our Vedic calculation, this is called Kali-yuga. Kali means disagreement and fighting, kālaḥ. So in this age, a slight disagreement will cause some fighting, some misunderstanding. And practically, this is the age of misguidance; therefore it is called Kali-yuga. So in different Purāṇas, the symptoms of Kali-yuga is described. Śāstra. Śāstra means tri-kāla-jña. Śāstra is not ordinary book.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Philosophy_Discussions" class="sub_section" sec_index="13" parent="Lectures" text="Philosophy Discussions"><h3>Philosophy Discussions</h3>
</div>
<div id="PhilosophyDiscussiononSorenAabyeKierkegaard_1" class="quote" parent="Philosophy_Discussions" book="Lec" index="11" link="Philosophy Discussion on Soren Aabye Kierkegaard" link_text="Philosophy Discussion on Soren Aabye Kierkegaard">
<div class="heading">We can approach God by understanding a saintly person, by studying the Vedic scriptures, and explained directly by the bona fide spiritual master. So sādhu means saintly person, and śāstra means scriptures, and guru means spiritual master—and that they should be corroborated.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Philosophy Discussion on Soren Aabye Kierkegaard|Philosophy Discussion on Soren Aabye Kierkegaard]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Hayagrīva: God intervenes in the world through the individual acting according to scripture.</p>
<p>Prabhupāda: Yes. These is a word, sādhu śāstra guru vākya cittete koriyā aikya. We can approach God by understanding a saintly person, by studying the Vedic scriptures, and explained directly by the bona fide spiritual master. So sādhu means saintly person, and śāstra means scriptures, and guru means spiritual master—and that they should be corroborated. A sādhu is he who talks in terms of scripture. Similarly, guru is he who talks in terms of scripture. Guru cannot manufacture words which is not in the scriptures. And that is not scripture which does not tally with the words of guru and sādhu. So these three items should be corroborated, and then we can understand who is guru, who is sādhu, and who is, what is scripture. Then we take instruction from them, and we can perfectly make progress towards understanding of the Supreme Personality of Godhead.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="PhilosophyDiscussiononMaoTseTung_0" class="quote" parent="Philosophy_Discussions" book="Lec" index="23" link="Philosophy Discussion on Mao Tse Tung" link_text="Philosophy Discussion on Mao Tse Tung">
<div class="heading">When śāstra fails, then according to śāstra, there is śastra. Śastra means weapon. Both of them come from the śas-dhātu. Śas-dhātu, from śas-dhātu we take śāstra, śastra, śāsana, śiṣya, like that. It is coming from the same root.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Philosophy Discussion on Mao Tse Tung|Philosophy Discussion on Mao Tse Tung]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: He personally became a messenger and personally requested Duryodhana that "All right. Settle up things. They are kṣatriyas. They cannot take up the business of a brāhmaṇa or a vaiśya. Give them five villages, let them rule, and they will be satisfied." But he said, "Oh, what to speak of five villages, I cannot spare the, that small portion of land which can hold the tip of a needle." Then Kṛṣṇa said, "Yes. Then you do not come to reason? Then let us turn to weapon." So this śāstra and śastra. When śāstra fails, then according to śāstra, there is śastra. Śastra means weapon. Both of them come from the śas-dhātu. Śas-dhātu, from śas-dhātu we take śāstra, śastra, śāsana, śiṣya, like that. It is coming from the same root.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="section" sec_index="5" parent="compilation" text="Conversations and Morning Walks"><h2>Conversations and Morning Walks</h2>
</div>
<div id="1967_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="sub_section" sec_index="0" parent="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" text="1967 Conversations and Morning Walks"><h3>1967 Conversations and Morning Walks</h3>
</div>
<div id="DiscourseonLordCaitanyaPlayBetweenSrilaPrabhupadaandHayagrivaApril561967SanFrancisco_0" class="quote" parent="1967_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="1" link="Discourse on Lord Caitanya Play Between Srila Prabhupada and Hayagriva -- April 5-6, 1967, San Francisco" link_text="Discourse on Lord Caitanya Play Between Srila Prabhupada and Hayagriva -- April 5-6, 1967, San Francisco">
<div class="heading">Then Lord Caitanya said, "Yes. That is not killing. That is rejuvenating. That is not killing." The sacrifice of cow recommended in the Vedic śāstra means that the brāhmaṇas prove how powerful was Vedic mantra that it could give a new life to the old cows and bulls.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Discourse on Lord Caitanya Play Between Srila Prabhupada and Hayagriva -- April 5-6, 1967, San Francisco|Discourse on Lord Caitanya Play Between Srila Prabhupada and Hayagriva -- April 5-6, 1967, San Francisco]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: Yes. Muhammadan. Chand Kazi was a... Maulana Chand Kazi. His name is Maulana Chand Kazi. He was a great scholar in the Koran scripture. So Caitanya Mahāprabhu first of all asked the Chand Kazi, "My dear uncle, what is your religion that you are eating your mother and father?" (laughs) So he could understand that He was attacking the cow killing process. So he said, "Well, You are just trying to criticize our cow killing, but in Your Vedic literature also I have seen that cow killing is allowed in sacrifice." Then Lord Caitanya said, "Yes. That is not killing. That is rejuvenating. That is not killing." The sacrifice of cow recommended in the Vedic śāstra means that the brāhmaṇas prove how powerful was Vedic mantra that it could give a new life to the old cows and bulls. So then Caitanya Mahāprabhu said, that "Such kind of learned brāhmaṇas and Vedic yajña is not possible in this age. Therefore cow killing..." Not cow killing. "Sacrifice by offering cow, sacrifice by offering horse, and..." Aśvamedhaṁ gavālambhaṁ ([[Vanisource:CC Adi 17.164|CC Adi 17.164]]). And sannyāsaṁ pala paitṛkam. Sannyāsa means to become in the renounced order of life. And these five things. One thing is sacrifice by offering cow. Second, sacrifice by offering horse. Third, to accept renounced order of life. And fourth, offering ablutions... Or what is called? Offering some, something to the forefathers? What is called?</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1973_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="sub_section" sec_index="6" parent="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" text="1973 Conversations and Morning Walks"><h3>1973 Conversations and Morning Walks</h3>
</div>
<div id="RoomConversationwithMalcolmJuly181973London_0" class="quote" parent="1973_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="46" link="Room Conversation with Malcolm -- July 18, 1973, London" link_text="Room Conversation with Malcolm -- July 18, 1973, London">
<div class="heading">Śāstra means the transcendental literature, not ordinary writings. That is śāstra. Just like Bhagavad-gītā is śāstra, Veda is śāstra, or Bible, śāstra. Scripture means given by God or His authorized representative.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Room Conversation with Malcolm -- July 18, 1973, London|Room Conversation with Malcolm -- July 18, 1973, London]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">That means very merciful. He's not rejecting. Although he's torturing him, but he's trying to convince him, Kṛṣṇa. Therefore kāruṇikāḥ. And he is not friend of any particular society or man. Suhṛdaḥ sarva-dehinām. He is well-wisher of all living entities. It doesn't matter whether he's Indian, American, or black and white. No, no conception. Or even human being or animal. He is kind to everyone, friend, well-wisher of everyone. Ajāta-śatravaḥ. He does not create any enemies. Such... These are the qualifications of sādhu. Śāstra means the transcendental literature, not ordinary writings. That is śāstra. Just like Bhagavad-gītā is śāstra, Veda is śāstra, or Bible, śāstra. Scripture means given by God or His authorized representative. That is śāstra. So sādhu-śāstra-guru. And guru means who is completely devotee of Kṛṣṇa without any material motives. This is sādhu-śāstra-guru. Anyābhilāṣitāśūnyaṁ jñāna-karmādy-anāvṛtam, ānukūlyena kṛṣṇānuśīlanam ([[Vanisource:CC Madhya 19.167|CC Madhya 19.167]]).</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1975_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="sub_section" sec_index="8" parent="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" text="1975 Conversations and Morning Walks"><h3>1975 Conversations and Morning Walks</h3>
</div>
<div id="MorningWalkNovember21975Nairobi_0" class="quote" parent="1975_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="231" link="Morning Walk -- November 2, 1975, Nairobi" link_text="Morning Walk -- November 2, 1975, Nairobi">
<div class="heading">Similarly śāstra means weapon: "If you don't follow, then I shall cut your throat." Similarly śāstra. So śāstra says that "Now you must leave your family life."
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Morning Walk -- November 2, 1975, Nairobi|Morning Walk -- November 2, 1975, Nairobi]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: Similarly, this conditioned soul, he has got attachment. And śāstra and śāstra... These people were driven away by śāstra,, by weapon, knife. That is śāstra. And śāstra is the same thing, but it is books. Therefore it is called śāstra. The original word is coming from śās. Sas means ruling, śās-dhātu. Śāstra, śāstra, śāsana, śisya. Śisya. Śisya means voluntarily accepting ruling. That is called śisya. The word is the same, śās. From śās, śisya. From śās, śāstra. From śās, śāstra. From śās, śāsana. These are. So sometimes by force, sometimes by voluntarily... So just like guru-śisya. The guru, he gives enlightenment, and śisya voluntarily accepts. That is guru-śisya. Similarly śāstra means weapon: "If you don't follow, then I shall cut your throat." Similarly śāstra. So śāstra says that "Now you must leave your family life." That is called vānaprastha. So that is not being carried out, although the śāstra injunction is there. Brahmacari, gṛhastha, vānaprastha, sannyāsa. So brahmacārī is the beginning of life, how to become controlled life. Then he is allowed the concession for sense gratification. This is gṛhastha. Then śāstra says, "Now you have done up to fifty years. Now get out." But nobody is following. They are not prepared to get out unless death forces to get out.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1976_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="sub_section" sec_index="9" parent="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" text="1976 Conversations and Morning Walks"><h3>1976 Conversations and Morning Walks</h3>
</div>
<div id="MorningWalkMarch81976Mayapur_0" class="quote" parent="1976_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="46" link="Morning Walk -- March 8, 1976, Mayapur" link_text="Morning Walk -- March 8, 1976, Mayapur">
<div class="heading">Therwise, śiṣya... Śiṣya, the word śiṣya, it comes from the root, verb, śās-dhātu. Śās. Śās means ruling. From this word, sasana. Sasana means government. Śāstra. Śāstra means weapon, and śāstra, scripture, and sisya... These things have come from the one root śās-dhātu.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Morning Walk -- March 8, 1976, Mayapur|Morning Walk -- March 8, 1976, Mayapur]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: Discipline... Disciple means discipline. The word discipline comes from disciple, or disciple comes from discipline. So unless there is discipline, there is no question of disciple. This discipline must... That should be uniform. Otherwise, śiṣya... Śiṣya, the word śiṣya, it comes from the root, verb, śās-dhātu. Śās. Śās means ruling. From this word, sasana. Sasana means government. Śāstra. Śāstra means weapon, and śāstra, scripture, and sisya... These things have come from the one root śās-dhātu. So śās-dhātu means ruling under discipline. There is another English word, that "Obedience is the first law of discipline," or something. They say, "Obedience is the first law of discipline"? So I am right? "Obedience is..."? </p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="AnswerstoaQuestionnairefromBhavansJournalJune281976Vrndavana_1" class="quote" parent="1976_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="169" link="Answers to a Questionnaire from Bhavan's Journal -- June 28, 1976, Vrndavana" link_text="Answers to a Questionnaire from Bhavan's Journal -- June 28, 1976, Vrndavana">
<div class="heading">To engage oneself devotional service under the order of spiritual master and the śāstra means to remain on the transcendental platform.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Answers to a Questionnaire from Bhavan's Journal -- June 28, 1976, Vrndavana|Answers to a Questionnaire from Bhavan's Journal -- June 28, 1976, Vrndavana]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: You cannot become a devotee unless you are completely sinless. So to become completely sinless you have to begin with these four prohibitory injunctions, or avoid sinful activities like illicit sex, meat-eating, smoking, intoxication and gambling. Then you'll be gradually completely sinless. One side, to practice things, and another side, to engage yourself in devotional service. To engage oneself devotional service under the order of spiritual master and the śāstra means to remain on the transcendental platform. Transcendental platform means there is no sinful activity. It is above. Sinful.... Pious and sinful activities are there so long you are on the material platform. Good and bad. Piety and sinful. But when you are on the transcendental platform, then you are automatically without sin.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="ConversationwithSevenMinistersofAndhraPradeshAugust221976Hyderabad_2" class="quote" parent="1976_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="278" link="Conversation with Seven Ministers of Andhra Pradesh -- August 22, 1976, Hyderabad" link_text="Conversation with Seven Ministers of Andhra Pradesh -- August 22, 1976, Hyderabad">
<div class="heading">Similarly, there are authorities which are called śāstra. Śās-dhātu means to rule. From Śās-dhātu, śāstra and śastra. Śastra means weapon.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Conversation with Seven Ministers of Andhra Pradesh -- August 22, 1976, Hyderabad|Conversation with Seven Ministers of Andhra Pradesh -- August 22, 1976, Hyderabad]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Our subject matter of Kṛṣṇa consciousness movement is that systematize... The progress of human society should be systematized according to śāstra. Just like your government, it is conducted under certain rules and regulations. You have to refer to the government regulative principles, and expert government officers, they are selected. Formally it was ICS, now it is IAS. That means reference to the authorities. Similarly, there are authorities which are called śāstra. Śās-dhātu means to rule. From Śās-dhātu, śāstra and śastra. Śastra means weapon. If you do not act according to the śāstra then there is śastra. Śastra means weapon, government. If you violate the rules of the government then there is police department, there is military department which will force you to accept the government regulation. And from the same śās-dhātu is śiṣya, one who voluntarily accepts the discipline.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="PressConferenceDecember161976Hyderabad_3" class="quote" parent="1976_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="347" link="Press Conference -- December 16, 1976, Hyderabad" link_text="Press Conference -- December 16, 1976, Hyderabad">
<div class="heading">The śāstra means what is spoken by God and His representative. That's all. That is śāstra. Unless Kṛṣṇa accepts śāstra, how He saying like that? Tasmāc chāstraṁ pramāṇaṁ te. Śāstra should be...
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Press Conference -- December 16, 1976, Hyderabad|Press Conference -- December 16, 1976, Hyderabad]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: The śāstra means what is spoken by God and His representative. That's all. That is śāstra. Unless Kṛṣṇa accepts śāstra, how He saying like that? Tasmāc chāstraṁ pramāṇaṁ te. Śāstra should be...</p>
<p>Dr. Ramachandra: Some śāstras must be existing before...</p>
<p>Prabhupāda: Eh?</p>
<p>Dr. Ramachandra: Some śāstras after, existing before Kṛṣṇa and Arjuna.</p>
<p>Prabhupāda: Śāstra? Śāstra means it is authorized. Just like Bhagavad-gītā is śāstra because it is spoken by Kṛṣṇa, the supreme authority. Therefore all the ācāryas, they accept it. Still the ācārya-sampradāyas are there. Rāmānujācārya, Madhvācārya, Viṣṇu Svāmī, Śaṅkara, they accept all this. And at the time of...</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1977_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="sub_section" sec_index="10" parent="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" text="1977 Conversations and Morning Walks"><h3>1977 Conversations and Morning Walks</h3>
</div>
<div id="RoofConversationJanuary51977Bombay_0" class="quote" parent="1977_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="10" link="Roof Conversation -- January 5, 1977, Bombay" link_text="Roof Conversation -- January 5, 1977, Bombay">
<div class="heading">Śiṣya, this word, very word, means voluntarily accepting the chastisement. This word, śiṣ, śās, śās-dhātu... From śās-dhātu comes śāstra. Śastra means weapon.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Roof Conversation -- January 5, 1977, Bombay|Roof Conversation -- January 5, 1977, Bombay]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: Śiṣya, this word, very word, means voluntarily accepting the chastisement. This word, śiṣ, śās, śās-dhātu... From śās-dhātu comes śāstra. Śastra means weapon. So weapon is meant for maintaining peace and order. And śāstra. Śāsana. These are the derivation from original root... Śiṣya. Śiṣya means who has voluntarily accepted to be chastised and ruled by the spiritual master.</p>
<p>Dr. Patel: Śikṣā means instruction. So the one who takes the instruction in śiṣya. Śikṣā.</p>
<p>Prabhupāda: To obey. Śiṣya means to obey, discipline.</p>
</div>
</div>
</div>

Purana means

2010-04-09T09:55:58Z

Partha-sarathi: Created page with '<div id="compilation"> <div id="facts"> {{terms|"purana means"}} {{notes|}} {{compiler|Partha-sarathi}} {{complete|ALL}} {{first|09Apr10}} {{last|09Apr10}} {{totals_by_section|BG…'

<div id="compilation">
<div id="facts">
{{terms|"purana means"}}
{{notes|}}
{{compiler|Partha-sarathi}}
{{complete|ALL}}
{{first|09Apr10}}
{{last|09Apr10}}
{{totals_by_section|BG=0|SB=0|CC=0|OB=0|Lec=1|Con=0|Let=0}}
{{total|1}}
{{toc right}}
[[Category:Meaning of Sanskrit Words]]
</div>
<div id="Lectures" class="section" sec_index="4" parent="compilation" text="Lectures"><h2>Lectures</h2>
</div>
<div id="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="0" parent="Lectures" text="Bhagavad-gita As It Is Lectures"><h3>Bhagavad-gita As It Is Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG2711NewYorkMarch21966_0" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="40" link="Lecture on BG 2.7-11 -- New York, March 2, 1966" link_text="Lecture on BG 2.7-11 -- New York, March 2, 1966">
<div class="heading">He is the original person. Because from God everyone has born, therefore He is the original person, ādyam. Purāṇa-puruṣam. Purāṇa means the oldest person.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 2.7-11 -- New York, March 2, 1966|Lecture on BG 2.7-11 -- New York, March 2, 1966]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Now, if you see the picture of Kṛṣṇa, you'll see Him just like a boy of twenty-two, twenty-five years old. He was so beautiful. He was so beautiful. Then... That is the sign of God. It is stated in Brahma-saṁhitā, advaitam acyutam anādim ananta-rūpam ādyaṁ purāṇa-puruṣaṁ nava-yauvanaṁ ca (Bs. 5.33). He is the original person. Because from God everyone has born, therefore He is the original person, ādyam. Purāṇa-puruṣam. Purāṇa means the oldest person. Still, nava-yauvanaṁ ca. Whenever you will see God... That is the... This is the sign of God. You'll find Him just like a youth, a new youth. Youthfulness means, say, sixteen to twenty-four years. So nava-yauvanaṁ ca. That is the sign of God. So He was so beautiful that when He was a boy of fifteen years old His, the whole, I mean, of His, of the same age girls, girls of His age, they were after Him. He was so beautiful. So in beauty He was superexcellent. In wealth He was superexcellent. In strength He was superexcellent. And in knowledge...</p>
</div>
</div>
</div>

Brahma means

2010-04-07T13:45:28Z

Partha-sarathi: Created page with '<div id="compilation"> <div id="facts"> {{terms|"brahma means"}} {{notes|}} {{compiler|Partha-sarathi}} {{complete|ALL}} {{first|07Apr10}} {{last|07Apr10}} {{totals_by_section|BG…'

<div id="compilation">
<div id="facts">
{{terms|"brahma means"}}
{{notes|}}
{{compiler|Partha-sarathi}}
{{complete|ALL}}
{{first|07Apr10}}
{{last|07Apr10}}
{{totals_by_section|BG=0|SB=4|CC=0|OB=3|Lec=13|Con=0|Let=0}}
{{total|20}}
{{toc right}}
[[Category:Brahma]]
[[Category:Meaning of Sanskrit Words]]
</div>
<div id="Srimad-Bhagavatam" class="section" sec_index="1" parent="compilation" text="Srimad-Bhagavatam"><h2>Srimad-Bhagavatam</h2>
</div>
<div id="SB_Canto_4" class="sub_section" sec_index="4" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam" text="SB Canto 4"><h3>SB Canto 4</h3>
</div>
<div id="SB4115_0" class="quote" parent="SB_Canto_4" book="SB" index="15" link="SB 4.1.15" link_text="SB 4.1.15">
<div class="heading">N this verse we find the words ātma-īśa-brahma-sambhavān. Ātma means the Supersoul, or Viṣṇu, īśa means Lord Śiva, and brahma means the four-headed Lord Brahmā.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:SB 4.1.15|SB 4.1.15, Purport]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="purport text"><p style="display: inline;">In this verse we find the words ātma-īśa-brahma-sambhavān. Ātma means the Supersoul, or Viṣṇu, īśa means Lord Śiva, and brahma means the four-headed Lord Brahmā. The three sons born of Anasūyā—Dattātreya, Durvāsā and Soma—were born as partial representations of these three demigods. Ātma is not in the category of the demigods or living entities because He is Viṣṇu; therefore He is described as vibhinnāṁśa-bhūtānām. The Supersoul, Viṣṇu, is the seed-giving father of all living entities, including Brahmā and Lord Śiva. Another meaning of the word ātma may be accepted in this way: the principle who is the Supersoul in every ātma, or, one may say, the soul of everyone, became manifested as Dattātreya, because the word aṁśa, part and parcel, is used here.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="SB4230_1" class="quote" parent="SB_Canto_4" book="SB" index="89" link="SB 4.2.30" link_text="SB 4.2.30">
<div class="heading">Brahma means the Vedas. Ahaṁ brahmāsmi means "I am in full knowledge." The Vedic assertion is that one should think that he is Brahman, for actually he is Brahman.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:SB 4.2.30|SB 4.2.30, Purport]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="purport text"><p style="display: inline;">Here it is stated, brahma ca brāhmaṇān. Brahma means the Vedas. Ahaṁ brahmāsmi means "I am in full knowledge." The Vedic assertion is that one should think that he is Brahman, for actually he is Brahman. If brahma, or the Vedic spiritual science, is condemned, and the masters of the spiritual science, the brāhmaṇas, are condemned, then where does human civilization stand? Bhṛgu Muni said, "It is not due to my cursing that you shall become atheists; you are already situated in the principle of atheism. Therefore you are condemned."</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="SB_Canto_5" class="sub_section" sec_index="5" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam" text="SB Canto 5"><h3>SB Canto 5</h3>
</div>
<div id="SB5416_0" class="quote" parent="SB_Canto_5" book="SB" index="102" link="SB 5.4.16" link_text="SB 5.4.16">
<div class="heading">The word brahma means "perfect knowledge of all activities," and this knowledge is very confidentially described in the Vedic literatures.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:SB 5.4.16|SB 5.4.16, Purport]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="purport text"><p style="display: inline;">Although Ṛṣabhadeva knew all the Vedic instructions perfectly well, He nonetheless followed the instructions of the brāhmaṇas in order to perfectly maintain the social order. The brāhmaṇas would give advice according to the śāstras, and all the other castes would follow. The word brahma means "perfect knowledge of all activities," and this knowledge is very confidentially described in the Vedic literatures. Men trained perfectly as brāhmaṇas should know all Vedic literature, and the benefit derived from this literature should be distributed to the general populace. The general populace should follow the perfect brāhmaṇa. In this way, one can learn how to control the mind and senses and thus gradually advance to spiritual perfection.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="SB_Canto_101_to_1013" class="sub_section" sec_index="10" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam" text="SB Canto 10.1 to 10.13"><h3>SB Canto 10.1 to 10.13</h3>
</div>
<div id="SB1091314_0" class="quote" parent="SB_Canto_10.1_to_10.13" book="SB" index="356" link="SB 10.9.13-14" link_text="SB 10.9.13-14">
<div class="heading">In Bhagavad-gītā (10.12), Kṛṣṇa is described as the Supreme Brahman (paraṁ brahma paraṁ dhāma). The word brahma means "the greatest."
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:SB 10.9.13-14|SB 10.9.13-14, Purport]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="purport text"><p style="display: inline;">In Bhagavad-gītā (10.12), Kṛṣṇa is described as the Supreme Brahman (paraṁ brahma paraṁ dhāma). The word brahma means "the greatest." Kṛṣṇa is greater than the greatest, being unlimited and all-pervading. How can it be possible for the all-pervading to be measured or bound? Then again, Kṛṣṇa is the time factor. Therefore, He is all-pervading not only in space but also in time. We have measurements of time, but although we are limited by past, present and future, for Kṛṣṇa these do not exist. Every individual person can be measured, but Kṛṣṇa has already shown that although He also is an individual, the entire cosmic manifestation is within His mouth. All these points considered, Kṛṣṇa cannot be measured. How then did Yaśodā want to measure Him and bind Him? We must conclude that this took place simply on the platform of pure transcendental love.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Other_Books_by_Srila_Prabhupada" class="section" sec_index="3" parent="compilation" text="Other Books by Srila Prabhupada"><h2>Other Books by Srila Prabhupada</h2>
</div>
<div id="Krsna_The_Supreme_Personality_of_Godhead" class="sub_section" sec_index="4" parent="Other_Books_by_Srila_Prabhupada" text="Krsna, The Supreme Personality of Godhead"><h3>Krsna, The Supreme Personality of Godhead</h3>
</div>
<div id="KB87_0" class="quote" parent="Krsna,_The_Supreme_Personality_of_Godhead" book="OB" index="91" link="KB 87" link_text="Krsna Book 87">
<div class="heading">Sarvaṁ khalv idaṁ brahma means that everything is Lord Kṛṣṇa in the sense that everything is His energy. That is the vision of the mahā-bhāgavatas. They see everything in relation to Kṛṣṇa.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:KB 87|Krsna Book 87]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Sarvaṁ khalv idaṁ brahma means that everything is Lord Kṛṣṇa in the sense that everything is His energy. That is the vision of the mahā-bhāgavatas. They see everything in relation to Kṛṣṇa. The impersonalists argue that Kṛṣṇa Himself has been transformed into many and that therefore everything is Kṛṣṇa and worship of anything is worship of Him. This false argument is answered by Kṛṣṇa in the Bhagavad-gītā: although everything is a transformation of the energy of Kṛṣṇa, He is not present everywhere. He is simultaneously present and not present. By His energy He is present everywhere, but as the energetic He is not present everywhere. This simultaneous presence and nonpresence is inconceivable to our present senses. But a clear explanation is given in the beginning of the Īśopaniṣad, in which it is stated that the Supreme Lord is so complete that although unlimited energies and their transformations emanate from Kṛṣṇa, Kṛṣṇa's personality is not in the least bit transformed. Therefore, since Kṛṣṇa is the cause of all causes, intelligent persons should take shelter of His lotus feet.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="KB87_1" class="quote" parent="Krsna,_The_Supreme_Personality_of_Godhead" book="OB" index="91" link="KB 87" link_text="Krsna Book 87">
<div class="heading">The Vedic version sarvaṁ khalv idaṁ brahma means that since both the energies have emanated from the Supreme Brahman, everything we experience is nondifferent from Brahman.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:KB 87|Krsna Book 87]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Therefore, the spirit soul is not produced from matter; it takes on a particular type of body under superior arrangement. According to our present experience, this material world is a combination of matter and spirit. The spirit is moving the matter. The spirit soul (the living entity) and matter are different energies of the Supreme Lord, and since both the energies are products of the Supreme Eternal, or the Supreme Truth, they are factual, not false. Because the living entity is part and parcel of the Supreme, he exists eternally. Therefore, for him there cannot be any question of birth or death. So-called birth and death occur because of the material body. The Vedic version sarvaṁ khalv idaṁ brahma means that since both the energies have emanated from the Supreme Brahman, everything we experience is nondifferent from Brahman.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="KB88_2" class="quote" parent="Krsna,_The_Supreme_Personality_of_Godhead" book="OB" index="92" link="KB 88" link_text="Krsna Book 88">
<div class="heading">Brahma means unlimitedly great and unlimitedly expanding. That mercy is also described as paramam, for it has no comparison within this material world, and it is also called sūkṣmam, very fine.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:KB 88|Krsna Book 88]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Lord Kṛṣṇa said to King Yudhiṣṭhira, "My devotee is not deterred by any adverse conditions of life; he always remains firm and steady. Therefore I give Myself to him, and I favor him so that he can achieve the highest success of life." The mercy bestowed upon the tried devotee by the Supreme Personality is described as brahma, which indicates that the greatness of that mercy can be compared only to the all-pervasive greatness of Brahman. Brahma means unlimitedly great and unlimitedly expanding. That mercy is also described as paramam, for it has no comparison within this material world, and it is also called sūkṣmam, very fine. Not only is the Lord's mercy upon the tried devotee great and unlimitedly expansive, but it is of the finest quality of transcendental love between the devotee and the Lord. Such mercy is further described as cin-mātram, completely spiritual. The use of the word mātram indicates absolute spirituality, with no tinge of material qualities. That mercy is also called sat (eternal) and anantakam (unlimited). Since the devotee of the Lord is awarded such unlimited spiritual benefit, why should he worship the demigods? A devotee of Kṛṣṇa does not worship Lord Śiva or Brahmā or any other, subordinate demigod. He completely devotes himself to the transcendental loving service of the Supreme Personality of Godhead.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Lectures" class="section" sec_index="4" parent="compilation" text="Lectures"><h2>Lectures</h2>
</div>
<div id="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="0" parent="Lectures" text="Bhagavad-gita As It Is Lectures"><h3>Bhagavad-gita As It Is Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG143LondonJuly301973_0" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="26" link="Lecture on BG 1.43 -- London, July 30, 1973" link_text="Lecture on BG 1.43 -- London, July 30, 1973">
<div class="heading">So Brahmā means the manager of one brahmāṇḍa, universe. And there are millions of Brahmās, millions, trillions. They are numberless. Ananta-koṭi.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 1.43 -- London, July 30, 1973|Lecture on BG 1.43 -- London, July 30, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Several departments is being managed by another director. Several directors is being managed by another secretary. As... The same system. Kṛṣṇa is the supreme proprietor, sarva-loka-maheśvara ([[Vanisource:BG 5.29|BG 5.29]]), and He has got many secretaries, assistants. They are called Brahmā. So Brahmā means the manager of one brahmāṇḍa, universe. And there are millions of Brahmās, millions, trillions. They are numberless. Ananta-koṭi. Yasya prabhā prabhavato jagad-aṇḍa-koṭiḥ (Bs. 5.40). Koṭi. Koṭi means unlimited. Jagad-aṇḍa. Jagad-aṇḍa means universe. Brahmāṇḍa or jagad-aṇḍa. Aṇḍa. Aṇḍa means it is egg-shaped, round, egg-shaped. Therefore it is called aṇḍa, brahmāṇḍa. Bhū-gola. Gola means round. I have heard that before the science, the people were under the impression that this world is square. Is it not?</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG27LondonAugust71973_1" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="39" link="Lecture on BG 2.7 -- London, August 7, 1973" link_text="Lecture on BG 2.7 -- London, August 7, 1973">
<div class="heading">Tene brahma hṛdā. Brahma, brahma means the Vedic knowledge. Śabda-brahma. Tene. He injected Vedic knowledge from hṛdā. Teṣāṁ satata-yuktānāṁ bhajatāṁ pritī-pūrvakam (BG 10.10). When Brahmā was created, he was perplexed: "What is my duty? Everything is dark." So he meditated, and Kṛṣṇa gave him knowledge that: "Your duty is this.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 2.7 -- London, August 7, 1973|Lecture on BG 2.7 -- London, August 7, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So Brahmā is mahājana. You'll find Brahmā's picture with Veda in his hand. So he's the, he gave the first instruction of Veda. But wherefrom he got the Vedic knowledge? Therefore Vedic knowledge is apauruṣeya. It is not man-made. It is God-made. Dharmaṁ tu sākṣād bhagavat-praṇītam ([[Vanisource:SB 6.3.19|SB 6.3.19]]). So how God, Kṛṣṇa gave to Brahmā? Tene brahma hṛdā. Brahma, brahma means the Vedic knowledge. Śabda-brahma. Tene. He injected Vedic knowledge from hṛdā. Teṣāṁ satata-yuktānāṁ bhajatāṁ pritī-pūrvakam ([[Vanisource:BG 10.10|BG 10.10]]). When Brahmā was created, he was perplexed: "What is my duty? Everything is dark." So he meditated, and Kṛṣṇa gave him knowledge that: "Your duty is this. You do like this." Tene brahma hṛdā ya ādi-kavaye. Ādi-kavaye ([[Vanisource:SB 1.1.1|SB 1.1.1]]). Brahmā is ādi-kavaye. So actual guru is Kṛṣṇa. And here is... Kṛṣṇa is advising the Bhagavad-gītā. These rascals and fools will not accept Kṛṣṇa as guru. They'll go to some rascal and fool and miscreants, sinful person, and accept guru. How he can be guru?</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG79VrndavanaAugust151974_2" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="278" link="Lecture on BG 7.9 -- Vrndavana, August 15, 1974" link_text="Lecture on BG 7.9 -- Vrndavana, August 15, 1974">
<div class="heading">Brahma means Veda. Brahma, śabda-brahma. So Kṛṣṇa tene, imparted, injected brahma, Vedic, Vedic śabda, śabda-brahma, Vedas, tene brahma hṛdā, through the heart.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 7.9 -- Vrndavana, August 15, 1974|Lecture on BG 7.9 -- Vrndavana, August 15, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Therefore Kṛṣṇa says that tapaś cāsmi tapasviṣu. That acceptance of tapasya means that tapasya is itself Kṛṣṇa. You associate with Kṛṣṇa. When you voluntarily give up meat-eating or intoxication, this giving-up, this process, is Kṛṣṇa. Kṛṣṇa says, tapaś cāsmi tapasviṣu. This is tapasya. Tapasya means to accept voluntarily something as enjoined in the śāstras. Śāstra says... Kṛṣṇa says. Whatever Kṛṣṇa says, that is śāstra. What is Veda? Veda means what Kṛṣṇa says; that is Veda. There is no other Veda. Just like in the Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam it is said, tene brahma hṛdā. Brahmā hṛdā. Brahma means Veda. Brahma, śabda-brahma. So Kṛṣṇa tene, imparted, injected brahma, Vedic, Vedic śabda, śabda-brahma, Vedas, tene brahma hṛdā, through the heart. Kṛṣṇa is situated in everyone's heart. So Brahmā had no other spiritual master, but Kṛṣṇa is there within the heart. Therefore Kṛṣṇa's name is Caitya-guru.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG7910BombayFebruary241974_3" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="279" link="Lecture on BG 7.9-10 -- Bombay, February 24, 1974" link_text="Lecture on BG 7.9-10 -- Bombay, February 24, 1974">
<div class="heading">Brahma means Vedic knowledge. Tene means imparted. Ādi-kavaye, the ādi-kavi, the original person. Tene brahma hṛdā ādi-kavaye muhyanti yat sūrayaḥ. Even big, big personalities, they become bewildered to understand Kṛṣṇa.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 7.9-10 -- Bombay, February 24, 1974|Lecture on BG 7.9-10 -- Bombay, February 24, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">This is the Vedic version. Sarva-kāraṇa-kāraṇam (Bs. 5.1). Father's father, his father, his father, you go on, go on. you come to Brahmā. Brahmā is considered as the forefather or grandfather, pitāmaha. But Kṛṣṇa is addressed in the Bhagavad-gītā: prapitāmaha, even the father of Brahmā. Prapitāmaha. You'll find in the Eleventh Chapter, prapitāmaha ([[Vanisource:BG 11.39|BG 11.39]]). He's father of... Tene brahma hṛdā ādi-kavaye ([[Vanisource:SB 1.1.1|SB 1.1.1]]). You know, those who are conversant with the śāstras, that Brahmā's another name is Svayambhū. He's not born of any material father and mother. He's born on the lotus flower sprouted from the navel of Mahā-Viṣṇu, Garbhodakaśāyī Viṣṇu. Therefore his name is Svayambhū. Svayambhū is one of the authorities because he was first educated about the Vedic knowledge by Kṛṣṇa, or Viṣṇu. Tene brahma hṛdā. Brahma means Vedic knowledge. Tene means imparted. Ādi-kavaye, the ādi-kavi, the original person. Tene brahma hṛdā ādi-kavaye muhyanti yat sūrayaḥ. Even big, big personalities, they become bewildered to understand Kṛṣṇa.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG72886NewYorkOctober231966_4" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="287" link="Lecture on BG 7.28-8.6 -- New York, October 23, 1966" link_text="Lecture on BG 7.28-8.6 -- New York, October 23, 1966">
<div class="heading">And brahma means indestructible, Brahman. Indestructible or which is eternal, that is called Brahman. Now, akṣaraṁ paramaṁ brahma. Paramaṁ brahma.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 7.28-8.6 -- New York, October 23, 1966|Lecture on BG 7.28-8.6 -- New York, October 23, 1966]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So Kṛṣṇa is answering one and each gradually. Śrī bhagavān uvāca. Bhagavān uvāca means Lord Kṛṣṇa, He's the Supreme Personality of Godhead, He's replying. Śrī bhagavān uvāca. What is that? Now, akṣaraṁ paramaṁ brahma svabhāvo 'dhyātmam ucyate. Akṣaraṁ paramaṁ brahma. Now, akṣaram means infallible. Infallible. And paramam means supreme. And brahma means indestructible, Brahman. Indestructible or which is eternal, that is called Brahman. Now, akṣaraṁ paramaṁ brahma. Paramaṁ brahma. Now, eternal, we are eternal. This has been explained in the Second Chapter of Bhagavad-gītā. Na hanyate hanyamāne śarīre ([[Vanisource:BG 2.20|BG 2.20]]). We do not die even after the destruction of this body. So we are Brahman. Brahman means indestructible and eternal. Some, some matter may be indestructible sometimes, but not eternal. Matter is not eternal. Therefore two things are to be understood about Brahman: indestructible and eternal.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG94CalcuttaMarch91972_5" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="306" link="Lecture on BG 9.4 -- Calcutta, March 9, 1972" link_text="Lecture on BG 9.4 -- Calcutta, March 9, 1972">
<div class="heading">So everything is Kṛṣṇa's energy; therefore Kṛṣṇa says, mayā tatam idaṁ sarvam (BG 9.4). Sarvaṁ khalv idaṁ brahma means Kṛṣṇa's energy is spread everywhere, everything. Parasya brahmaṇaḥ śaktiḥ.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 9.4 -- Calcutta, March 9, 1972|Lecture on BG 9.4 -- Calcutta, March 9, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So everything is Kṛṣṇa's energy; therefore Kṛṣṇa says, mayā tatam idaṁ sarvam ([[Vanisource:BG 9.4|BG 9.4]]). Sarvaṁ khalv idaṁ brahma means Kṛṣṇa's energy is spread everywhere, everything. Parasya brahmaṇaḥ śaktiḥ.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG133HyderabadApril191974_6" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="348" link="Lecture on BG 13.3 -- Hyderabad, April 19, 1974" link_text="Lecture on BG 13.3 -- Hyderabad, April 19, 1974">
<div class="heading">In the beginning of Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam it is also stated, tene brahma hṛdā ādi-kavaye (SB 1.1.1). Ādi-kavi is Lord Brahmā, and brahma means the Vedic knowledge.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 13.3 -- Hyderabad, April 19, 1974|Lecture on BG 13.3 -- Hyderabad, April 19, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">In the beginning of Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam it is also stated, tene brahma hṛdā ādi-kavaye ([[Vanisource:SB 1.1.1|SB 1.1.1]]). Ādi-kavi is Lord Brahmā, and brahma means the Vedic knowledge. So there was nobody to teach Brahmā. Brahmā is called prapitāmaha ([[Vanisource:BG 11.39|BG 11.39]]), the first-class knower of the Vedic knowledge, ādi-kavi. But wherefrom he got the knowledge? He got the knowledge form Kṛṣṇa. Tene brahma hṛdā ādi-kavaye. And Brahmā distributed it to Nārada. Nārada distributed it to Vyāsadeva. Vyāsadeva distributed it to other ācāryas. In this way, evaṁ paramparā-prāptam imaṁ rājarṣayo viduḥ ([[Vanisource:BG 4.2|BG 4.2]]). So there is paramparā. The knowledge is the same. There is no alteration. But it is coming through disciplic succession, one after an... So one who receives the knowledge from the disciplic succession...</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG1314BombayOctober71973_7" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="362" link="Lecture on BG 13.14 -- Bombay, October 7, 1973" link_text="Lecture on BG 13.14 -- Bombay, October 7, 1973">
<div class="heading">So Kṛṣṇa says jñeyam. Jñeyam means mat-paraṁ brahma. In a previous verse it has been explained, anādi mat-paraṁ brahma. Brahmā means bṛhatya bṛhanatyād iti brahma.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 13.14 -- Bombay, October 7, 1973|Lecture on BG 13.14 -- Bombay, October 7, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So Kṛṣṇa says jñeyam. Jñeyam means mat-paraṁ brahma. In a previous verse it has been explained, anādi mat-paraṁ brahma. Brahmā means bṛhatya bṛhanatyād iti brahma.(?) Nothing is great than Brahman. That is being explained, how Brahman, what is the meaning of Brahman. Brahman means sarvataḥ pāṇi-pādaṁ tat: "Brahman has got His hands and legs everywhere." Just like I have got my hands and legs, this is limited. I have got my hands. Why I cannot stretch five feet? Only three feet. That is also with great difficulty. But the Brahman's hand, sarvataḥ, sarvataḥ, everywhere.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG1841StockholmSeptember71973_8" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="403" link="Lecture on BG 18.41 -- Stockholm, September 7, 1973" link_text="Lecture on BG 18.41 -- Stockholm, September 7, 1973">
<div class="heading">Brahma means the Absolute Truth. So, that should be the subject matter for studying in human form of life. So Bhagavad-gītā is the right book to understand about that brahma, or the Supreme Personality of Godhead, or the Absolute Truth, whatever you call.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 18.41 -- Stockholm, September 7, 1973|Lecture on BG 18.41 -- Stockholm, September 7, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Therefore, the Vedānta-sūtra philosophy, that begins with the word athāto brahma jijñāsā. Now, this life, this human form of life, is meant for inquiring about the Absolute Truth. Athāto brahma jijñāsā. Brahma means the Absolute Truth. So, that should be the subject matter for studying in human form of life. So Bhagavad-gītā is the right book to understand about that brahma, or the Supreme Personality of Godhead, or the Absolute Truth, whatever you call. The Absolute Truth is known in three phases: Brahman, Paramātmā and Bhagavān.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="1" parent="Lectures" text="Srimad-Bhagavatam Lectures"><h3>Srimad-Bhagavatam Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB111LondonAugust61971_0" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="1" link="Lecture on SB 1.1.1 -- London, August 6, 1971" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.1.1 -- London, August 6, 1971">
<div class="heading">The Vedic literature means, as it is stated in this verse, tene brahma hṛdā. Brahma means Vedic literature, śabda-brahma. So He distributed the... Vāsudeva, original person, Absolute Truth, He, I mean to say, transferred this Vedic knowledge.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.1.1 -- London, August 6, 1971|Lecture on SB 1.1.1 -- London, August 6, 1971]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So Caitanya Mahāprabhu gives reference of Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam with Brahma-saṁhitā. That means Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam also is eternal. They are not man-made, manufactured books. The Vedic literature means, as it is stated in this verse, tene brahma hṛdā. Brahma means Vedic literature, śabda-brahma. So He distributed the... Vāsudeva, original person, Absolute Truth, He, I mean to say, transferred this Vedic knowledge. Tene brahma hṛdā. Brahmā was alone. He could not see Kṛṣṇa eye to eye, but īśvaraḥ sarva-bhūtānāṁ hṛd-deśe arjuna tiṣṭhati ([[Vanisource:BG 18.61|BG 18.61]]). Kṛṣṇa is everyone's heart, so He taught him from within. Kṛṣṇa's name is Caitya-guru, "guru, spiritual master from within." So Kṛṣṇa is trying to help us from within, and He manifests again externally also as spiritual master, directly teaching. So from within, from without, He is trying to help us. Kṛṣṇa is so kind. From within and without. Tene brahma hṛdā ādi-kavaye ([[Vanisource:SB 1.1.1|SB 1.1.1]]).</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB152LosAngelesJanuary101968_1" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="131" link="Lecture on SB 1.5.2 -- Los Angeles, January 10, 1968" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.5.2 -- Los Angeles, January 10, 1968">
<div class="heading">So here it is said jijñāsitam adhītaṁ ca brahma. Brahma means the Supreme Absolute Truth. "You have inquired sufficiently..."
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.5.2 -- Los Angeles, January 10, 1968|Lecture on SB 1.5.2 -- Los Angeles, January 10, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So here it is said jijñāsitam adhītaṁ ca brahma. Brahma means the Supreme Absolute Truth. "You have inquired sufficiently..." Because he was spiritual master, Nārada, he knows how he was inquisitive. So, "You have inquired about the Supreme Absolute Truth." Jijñāsitam adhītaṁ ca yat tat sanātanam. Absolute Truth, sanātana means eternal. Absolute Truth is not relative. Here in this world everything we see relative. This world, material world, is called relative world. And therefore it is not sanātanam. Sanātanam means eternal. As soon as we are in the relative world, there is no eternal life. Relative world means that one thing has to be understood by another thing. Just like what is the meaning of "son"? The son is the son of a father. So unless there is father, there is no question of son. Unless there is husband, there is no question of wife. Unless there is black, there is no question of white.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB177VrndavanaSeptember61976_2" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="165" link="Lecture on SB 1.7.7 -- Vrndavana, September 6, 1976" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.7.7 -- Vrndavana, September 6, 1976">
<div class="heading">Still, Vāsudeva was there. Īśvaraḥ sarva-bhūtānāṁ hṛd-deśe 'rjuna (BG 18.61). So He gave the knowledge. Tene brahma. Brahma means Vedic knowledge.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.7.7 -- Vrndavana, September 6, 1976|Lecture on SB 1.7.7 -- Vrndavana, September 6, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So you can say "He is the first creature, there was nobody there. How he took knowledge? Who gave him knowledge?" The answer is there in the Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam, that Vāsudeva gave him. "Where is Vāsudeva? There was nothing." No. Īśvaraḥ sarva-bhūtānāṁ hṛd-deśe 'rjuna tiṣṭhati ([[Vanisource:BG 18.61|BG 18.61]]). Vāsudeva means who stays everywhere. Vasati sarvatra. Vāsudevaḥ sarvam iti sa mahātmā su-durlabhaḥ ([[Vanisource:BG 7.19|BG 7.19]]). So Vāsudeva is there. So Brahmā was, although there was nobody else except Brahmā, he was in the darkness. Still, Vāsudeva was there. Īśvaraḥ sarva-bhūtānāṁ hṛd-deśe 'rjuna ([[Vanisource:BG 18.61|BG 18.61]]). So He gave the knowledge. Tene brahma. Brahma means Vedic knowledge.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB1718VrndavanaSeptember151976_3" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="174" link="Lecture on SB 1.7.18 -- Vrndavana, September 15, 1976" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.7.18 -- Vrndavana, September 15, 1976">
<div class="heading">Sabda-brahma means Vedic literature. One is completely in awareness of Vedic knowledge. Śābde pare ca niṣṇātam. Niṣṇātam means one has taken a dip in the ocean of this Vedic literature.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.7.18 -- Vrndavana, September 15, 1976|Lecture on SB 1.7.18 -- Vrndavana, September 15, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">You have to go to the guru. Why? Jijñāsuḥ śreya... If you want to know the real life, then you have to go to guru. Jijñāsuḥ śreya uttamam. Then what is the sign, what is the symptom of such guru where I shall get real information? That is also stated. Jijñāsuḥ śreya uttamam, śābde pare ca niṣṇātam. One who is fully aware of the transcendental science or words, śabda, śabda-brahma. Śabda-brahma means Vedic literature. One is completely in awareness of Vedic knowledge. Śābde pare ca niṣṇātam. Niṣṇātam means one has taken a dip in the ocean of this Vedic literature. Niṣṇātam. And what is the result? Śābde pare ca niṣṇātaṁ brahmaṇy upaśamāśrayam. The Supreme Brahman... Brahman, Paramātmā, Bhagavān. Brahmaṇi, either of them. But Bhagavān is the best. Or, if you cannot approach Bhagavān, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Brahman is also. Because if one is in Brahman, he has a chance to make further progress.</p>
</div>
</div>
</div>

Siva means

2010-04-07T13:25:59Z

Partha-sarathi: Created page with '<div id="compilation"> <div id="facts"> {{terms|"siva means"}} {{notes|}} {{compiler|Partha-sarathi}} {{complete|ALL}} {{first|07Apr10}} {{last|07Apr10}} {{totals_by_section|BG=0…'

<div id="compilation">
<div id="facts">
{{terms|"siva means"}}
{{notes|}}
{{compiler|Partha-sarathi}}
{{complete|ALL}}
{{first|07Apr10}}
{{last|07Apr10}}
{{totals_by_section|BG=0|SB=5|CC=0|OB=0|Lec=5|Con=2|Let=1}}
{{total|13}}
{{toc right}}
[[Category:Siva]]
[[Category:Meaning of Sanskrit Words]]
</div>
<div id="Srimad-Bhagavatam" class="section" sec_index="1" parent="compilation" text="Srimad-Bhagavatam"><h2>Srimad-Bhagavatam</h2>
</div>
<div id="SB_Canto_3" class="sub_section" sec_index="3" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam" text="SB Canto 3"><h3>SB Canto 3</h3>
</div>
<div id="SB3213839_0" class="quote" parent="SB_Canto_3" book="SB" index="854" link="SB 3.21.38-39" link_text="SB 3.21.38-39">
<div class="heading">Śiva means "curing." Anyone who drinks the water of Bindu-sarovara is cured of all material diseases; similarly, anyone who takes his bath in the Ganges also is relieved of all material diseases.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:SB 3.21.38-39|SB 3.21.38-39, Purport]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="purport text"><p style="display: inline;">Just as drops of perspiration which fell from the toe of the Lord became the sacred Ganges, so teardrops from the transcendental eyes of the Lord became Bindu-sarovara. Both are transcendental entities and are worshiped by great sages and scholars. The water of Bindu-sarovara is described here as śivāmṛta jala. Śiva means "curing." Anyone who drinks the water of Bindu-sarovara is cured of all material diseases; similarly, anyone who takes his bath in the Ganges also is relieved of all material diseases. These claims are accepted by great scholars and authorities and are still being acted upon even in this fallen age of Kali.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="SB_Canto_4" class="sub_section" sec_index="4" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam" text="SB Canto 4"><h3>SB Canto 4</h3>
</div>
<div id="SB421_0" class="quote" parent="SB_Canto_4" book="SB" index="61" link="SB 4.2.1" link_text="SB 4.2.1">
<div class="heading">The word śiva means "all auspicious." No one can be an enemy of Lord Śiva's, for he is so peaceful and renounced that he does not even construct a house for his residence, but lives underneath a tree, always detached from all worldly things.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:SB 4.2.1|SB 4.2.1, Purport]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="purport text"><p style="display: inline;">In the Second Chapter of the Fourth Canto, the cause of the dissension between Lord Śiva and Dakṣa, which was due to a great sacrifice arranged by Dakṣa for the pacification of the entire universe, is explained. Lord Śiva is described here as the best of the gentle because he is not envious of anyone, he is equal to all living entities, and all other good qualities are present in his personality. The word śiva means "all auspicious." No one can be an enemy of Lord Śiva's, for he is so peaceful and renounced that he does not even construct a house for his residence, but lives underneath a tree, always detached from all worldly things. The personality of Lord Śiva symbolizes the best of gentleness. Why, then, was Dakṣa, who offered his beloved daughter to such a gentle personality, inimical towards Lord Śiva so intensely that Satī, the daughter of Dakṣa and wife of Lord Śiva, gave up her body?</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="SB4414_1" class="quote" parent="SB_Canto_4" book="SB" index="131" link="SB 4.4.14" link_text="SB 4.4.14">
<div class="heading">Śiva means maṅgala, or auspicious.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:SB 4.4.14|SB 4.4.14, Purport]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="purport text"><p style="display: inline;">Since Lord Śiva is the greatest soul among the living entities within this material world, his name, Śiva, is very auspicious for persons who identify the body with the soul. If such persons take shelter of Lord Śiva, gradually they will understand that they are not the material body but are spirit soul. Śiva means maṅgala, or auspicious. Within the body the soul is auspicious. Ahaṁ brahmāsmi: "I am Brahman." This realization is auspicious. As long as one does not realize his identity as the soul, whatever he does is inauspicious. Śiva means "auspicious," and devotees of Lord Śiva gradually come to the platform of spiritual identification, but that is not all. Auspicious life begins from the point of spiritual identification.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="SB4643_2" class="quote" parent="SB_Canto_4" book="SB" index="217" link="SB 4.6.43" link_text="SB 4.6.43">
<div class="heading">Śiva means "auspicious," and śakti means "energy." There are many types of energies of the Supreme Lord, and all of them are auspicious.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:SB 4.6.43|SB 4.6.43, Purport]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="purport text"><p style="display: inline;">In this verse the word śiva-śakti is significant. Śiva means "auspicious," and śakti means "energy." There are many types of energies of the Supreme Lord, and all of them are auspicious. Brahmā, Viṣṇu and Maheśvara are called guṇa-avatāras, or incarnations of material qualities. In the material world we compare these different incarnations from different angles of vision, but since all of them are expansions of the supreme auspicious, all of them are auspicious, although sometimes we consider one quality of nature to be higher or lower than another. The mode of ignorance, or tamo-guṇa, is considered very much lower than the others, but in the higher sense it is also auspicious. The example may be given herein that the government has both an educational department and criminal department. An outsider may consider the criminal department inauspicious, but from the government's point of view it is as important as the education department, and therefore the government finances both departments equally, without discrimination.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="SB42474_3" class="quote" parent="SB_Canto_4" book="SB" index="1052" link="SB 4.24.74" link_text="SB 4.24.74">
<div class="heading">Śiva means Lord Śiva, and viriñci means Lord Brahmā. Both of these demigods are engaged in offering prayers to Lord Vāsudeva, Kṛṣṇa.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:SB 4.24.74|SB 4.24.74, Purport]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="purport text"><p style="display: inline;">Erfection means becoming a devotee of Lord Kṛṣṇa. As stated in the First Canto of Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam (1.2.28): vāsudeva-parā vedā vāsudeva-parā makhāḥ. The ultimate goal of life is Vāsudeva, or Kṛṣṇa. Any devotee of Lord Kṛṣṇa can attain all perfection, material gains and liberation simply by offering prayers to Him. There are many varieties of prayers to Lord Kṛṣṇa chanted by great sages and great personalities such as Lord Brahmā and Lord Śiva. Lord Kṛṣṇa is known as śiva-viriñcinutam ([[Vanisource:SB 11.5.33|SB 11.5.33]]). Śiva means Lord Śiva, and viriñci means Lord Brahmā. Both of these demigods are engaged in offering prayers to Lord Vāsudeva, Kṛṣṇa. If we follow in the footsteps of such great personalities and become devotees of Lord Kṛṣṇa, our lives will become successful. Unfortunately people do not know this secret. Na te viduḥ svārtha-gatiṁ hi viṣṇum: "They do not know that the real interest and the highest perfection of life is to worship Lord Viṣṇu (Kṛṣṇa)." ([[Vanisource:SB 7.5.31|SB 7.5.31]]) It is impossible to become satisfied by trying to adjust the external energy.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Lectures" class="section" sec_index="4" parent="compilation" text="Lectures"><h2>Lectures</h2>
</div>
<div id="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="0" parent="Lectures" text="Bhagavad-gita As It Is Lectures"><h3>Bhagavad-gita As It Is Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG915NewYorkDecember11966_0" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="316" link="Lecture on BG 9.15 -- New York, December 1, 1966" link_text="Lecture on BG 9.15 -- New York, December 1, 1966">
<div class="heading">Śiva means the Lord Śiva, and viriñci means Lord Brahmā. They are considered to be the topmost demigods in this material world. So they also offer their respectful obeisances to Viṣṇu, or God.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 9.15 -- New York, December 1, 1966|Lecture on BG 9.15 -- New York, December 1, 1966]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">God is supreme. Nobody can God. Nobody can be equal with God. God is called in the Vedic literature, asamaurdhva. Asama means nobody's equal to Him. And nobody is higher than Him. Ūrdhva means higher. Nobody can be higher than God, and nobody can be equal to God. Everyone is lower than God, however great he may be. And there is a nice verse, śiva-viriñci-nutam ([[Vanisource:SB 11.5.33|SB 11.5.33]]). Śiva-viriñci. Śiva means the Lord Śiva, and viriñci means Lord Brahmā. They are considered to be the topmost demigods in this material world. So they also offer their respectful obeisances to Viṣṇu, or God.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="1" parent="Lectures" text="Srimad-Bhagavatam Lectures"><h3>Srimad-Bhagavatam Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB1826MayapuraOctober61974_0" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="216" link="Lecture on SB 1.8.26 -- Mayapura, October 6, 1974" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.8.26 -- Mayapura, October 6, 1974">
<div class="heading">Because a Vaiṣṇava, generally, they remain humble and poor, brāhmaṇa also. "Whereas the worshiper of Lord Śiva..." Lord Śiva means..., at least, he voluntarily accepts all poverty. His wife is Durgā devī, so powerful. Sṛṣṭi-sthiti-pralaya-sādhana-śaktir ekā (Bs. 5.44).
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.8.26 -- Mayapura, October 6, 1974|Lecture on SB 1.8.26 -- Mayapura, October 6, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So therefore it was enquired by Yudhiṣṭhira Mahārāja... There is a verse in the Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam, that... This question was raised by Parīkṣit Mahārāja to Śukadeva Gosvāmī. So "Your Honor, we see just the opposite thing, that one who is devotee of Lord Viṣṇu, the wife, the husband of the goddess of fortune, they become gradually poorer." Because a Vaiṣṇava, generally, they remain humble and poor, brāhmaṇa also. "Whereas the worshiper of Lord Śiva..." Lord Śiva means..., at least, he voluntarily accepts all poverty. His wife is Durgā devī, so powerful. Sṛṣṭi-sthiti-pralaya-sādhana-śaktir ekā (Bs. 5.44).</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB32519BombayNovember191974_1" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="441" link="Lecture on SB 3.25.19 -- Bombay, November 19, 1974" link_text="Lecture on SB 3.25.19 -- Bombay, November 19, 1974">
<div class="heading">Therefore it is recommended here, na yujyamānayā bhaktyā bhagavaty akhilātmani, sadṛśo 'sti śivaḥ panthā. Śiva means auspicious.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 3.25.19 -- Bombay, November 19, 1974|Lecture on SB 3.25.19 -- Bombay, November 19, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Those who are engaged twenty-four hours with love and faith in devotional service. Teṣāṁ satata-yuktānāṁ bhajatāṁ prīti-pūrvakam, dadāmi buddhi-yogaṁ tam. The buddhi-yogam. He directs, "Do like this, do like that." Then... What for buddhi? Yena mām upayānti te. Then, gradually, you come to Kṛṣṇa, back to home, back to Godhead. Therefore it is recommended here, na yujyamānayā bhaktyā bhagavaty akhilātmani, sadṛśo 'sti śivaḥ panthā. Śiva means auspicious.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB32519BombayNovember191974_2" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="441" link="Lecture on SB 3.25.19 -- Bombay, November 19, 1974" link_text="Lecture on SB 3.25.19 -- Bombay, November 19, 1974">
<div class="heading">Śiva means auspiciousness. So if you actually interested for self-realization, if you want to become perfect in this life, śivaḥ panthā, the most auspicious, most perfect panthā is... What is that?
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 3.25.19 -- Bombay, November 19, 1974|Lecture on SB 3.25.19 -- Bombay, November 19, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Śiva means auspiciousness. So if you actually interested for self-realization, if you want to become perfect in this life, śivaḥ panthā, the most auspicious, most perfect panthā is... What is that? Now, bhaktyā bhagavati. You just become a devotee and engage yourself in devotional service to the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Not the so-called rascal Bhagavān, but bhagavaty akhilātman. One, the..., that Bhagavān who is present everywhere. That Bhagavān. Not this false bhagavān. Akhilātmani. These are the shastric injunction. So that Bhagavān... "I don't find that Bhagavān." No. That Bhagavān is within your heart. Īśvaraḥ sarva-bhūtānām ([[Vanisource:BG 18.61|BG 18.61]]). That is real Bhagavān. So as soon... Tene brahma hṛdā ādi-kavaye. That Bhagavān is always acting. He instructed Brahmā. Brahmā, the lord of the universe, he got instruction from Kṛṣṇa, and he created the whole universe, and what to speak of you?</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Sri_Caitanya-caritamrta_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="3" parent="Lectures" text="Sri Caitanya-caritamrta Lectures"><h3>Sri Caitanya-caritamrta Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonCCAdilila112MayapurApril51975_0" class="quote" parent="Sri_Caitanya-caritamrta_Lectures" book="Lec" index="12" link="Lecture on CC Adi-lila 1.12 -- Mayapur, April 5, 1975" link_text="Lecture on CC Adi-lila 1.12 -- Mayapur, April 5, 1975">
<div class="heading">Worshiping Lord Śiva means to gain some material profit. And in the worshiping Viṣṇu there is material profit. That is given by Viṣṇu.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on CC Adi-lila 1.12 -- Mayapur, April 5, 1975|Lecture on CC Adi-lila 1.12 -- Mayapur, April 5, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Worshiping Lord Śiva means to gain some material profit. And in the worshiping Viṣṇu there is material profit. That is given by Viṣṇu. That is not karma. But Vaiṣṇava, they are not aspiring after any material profit. The material profit automatically comes. But they, they do not desire. Anyābhilāṣitā-śūnyam (Brs. 1.1.11). Material profit is not their aim of life. Their aim of life—how to satisfy Viṣṇu, Lord Viṣṇu. That is Vaiṣṇava. Viṣṇur asya devataḥ. Na te... And the demons, they do not know that to become Vaiṣṇava, that is the highest perfection of life. They do not know it.</p>
<p>So anyway, our request is that you all young men who have taken to this path of Vaiṣṇavism, and there is very good chance to preach this cult in your country, so even if you are not very much successful in other countries, in your country you'll be very successful. There is good potency. And try to make them stronger to fight with the demonic principles.</p>
<p>Thank you very much. (end)</p>
<p>Śrī Caitanya-caritāmṛta, Ādi-līlā 1.12</p>
<p>--</p>
<p>Māyāpur, April 5, 1975</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="section" sec_index="5" parent="compilation" text="Conversations and Morning Walks"><h2>Conversations and Morning Walks</h2>
</div>
<div id="1975_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="sub_section" sec_index="8" parent="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" text="1975 Conversations and Morning Walks"><h3>1975 Conversations and Morning Walks</h3>
</div>
<div id="MorningWalkMay161975Perth_0" class="quote" parent="1975_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="75" link="Morning Walk -- May 16, 1975, Perth" link_text="Morning Walk -- May 16, 1975, Perth">
<div class="heading">Śiva means Lord Śiva, and viriñci means Brahmā. All of them offer respect to Nārāyaṇa. Indian astrology was taken by the Arabians first. The one, two, three, four, five, six, these figures were taken from India, up to nine, then zero. Then you make all mathematical, arithmetical calculation.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Morning Walk -- May 16, 1975, Perth|Morning Walk -- May 16, 1975, Perth]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: How, one after another, how one is born out of the... That is... How the brāhmaṇas were there, kṣatriyas were there—everything in Vedic... These Vedic mantra means the history of human society. And the origin is God, Kṛṣṇa, Nārāyaṇa. There are other mantras wherein it is stated, eko nārāyaṇa āsīt. "Only Nārāyaṇa was there." Neither Lord Śiva nor Brahmā. Later on, they came. When he first cites the mantra, vande mahā-puruṣa te caraṇāravindam, śiva-viriñci-nutam ([[Vanisource:SB 11.5.33|SB 11.5.33]]). Śiva means Lord Śiva, and viriñci means Brahmā. All of them offer respect to Nārāyaṇa. Indian astrology was taken by the Arabians first. The one, two, three, four, five, six, these figures were taken from India, up to nine, then zero. Then you make all mathematical, arithmetical calculation.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="ConversationwithProfessorHopkinsJuly131975Philadelphia_1" class="quote" parent="1975_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="143" link="Conversation with Professor Hopkins -- July 13, 1975, Philadelphia" link_text="Conversation with Professor Hopkins -- July 13, 1975, Philadelphia">
<div class="heading">Yes. Lord Śiva means you get material opulence but not salvation.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Conversation with Professor Hopkins -- July 13, 1975, Philadelphia|Conversation with Professor Hopkins -- July 13, 1975, Philadelphia]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prof. Hopkins: But do you get benefits?</p>
<p>Prabhupāda: Benefit there must.</p>
<p>Prof. Hopkins: Benefits there are but not the same.</p>
<p>Prabhupāda: Yes. Lord Śiva means you get material opulence but not salvation.</p>
<p>Prof. Hopkins: So you would see Śiva as more related to material.</p>
<p>Prabhupāda: Yes.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Correspondence" class="section" sec_index="6" parent="compilation" text="Correspondence"><h2>Correspondence</h2>
</div>
<div id="1947_to_1965_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="0" parent="Correspondence" text="1947 to 1965 Correspondence"><h3>1947 to 1965 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoSriPadampatSinghaniaKanpur7May1957_0" class="quote" parent="1947_to_1965_Correspondence" book="Let" index="30" link="Letter to Sri Padampat Singhania -- Kanpur 7 May, 1957" link_text="Letter to Sri Padampat Singhania -- Kanpur 7 May, 1957">
<div class="heading">In other words to accept the supremacy of Lord Siva means Namah Sivaya.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Sri Padampat Singhania -- Kanpur 7 May, 1957|Letter to Sri Padampat Singhania -- Kanpur 7 May, 1957]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Now this Mantra is practically indicating the holy name of Lord Siva. Na means negation and Ma means false ego or Ahamkara. Therefore Namah means surrendering to the name Siva. In other words to accept the supremacy of Lord Siva means Namah Sivaya. Therefore the conclusion is that in Mantra the name of the deity is unavoidably amalgamated. And in the Mantra the spiritual power, by the Rsis like Narada etc. is surcharged like the copper is electrified by magnetic force. The etymological alphabets are so surcharged with spiritual potency and as such all Mantra indicating the transcendental holy name of God or Godhead is to be understood in that way. When we chant the Mantra as were presented by the authorities—the process helps communication with the personality of Godhead by the sound waves as we have now experienced in the material world of physical waves vibrations. The powerful Mantras have such potency if they are sounded in the right direction.</p>
</div>
</div>
</div>

Bhagavad-Gita means

2010-04-07T10:34:25Z

Partha-sarathi: Created page with '<div id="compilation"> <div id="facts"> {{terms|"Bhagavad-Gita means"}} {{notes|}} {{compiler|Partha-sarathi}} {{complete|ALL}} {{first|07Apr10}} {{last|07Apr10}} {{totals_by_sec…'

<div id="compilation">
<div id="facts">
{{terms|"Bhagavad-Gita means"}}
{{notes|}}
{{compiler|Partha-sarathi}}
{{complete|ALL}}
{{first|07Apr10}}
{{last|07Apr10}}
{{totals_by_section|BG=0|SB=1|CC=1|OB=0|Lec=20|Con=6|Let=0}}
{{total|28}}
{{toc right}}
[[Category:Bhagavad-gita]]
[[Category:Meaning of Sanskrit Words]]
</div>
<div id="Srimad-Bhagavatam" class="section" sec_index="1" parent="compilation" text="Srimad-Bhagavatam"><h2>Srimad-Bhagavatam</h2>
</div>
<div id="SB_Canto_6" class="sub_section" sec_index="6" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam" text="SB Canto 6"><h3>SB Canto 6</h3>
</div>
<div id="SB6119_0" class="quote" parent="SB_Canto_6" book="SB" index="18" link="SB 6.1.19" link_text="SB 6.1.19">
<div class="heading">Therefore, to follow the direction of Bhagavad-gītā means to surrender unto Kṛṣṇa, and to surrender in this way is the highest perfection of bhakti-yoga.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:SB 6.1.19|SB 6.1.19, Purport]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="purport text"><p style="display: inline;">Because neophyte devotees cannot understand what the forms of Nārāyaṇa, Vāsudeva and Govinda are, Kṛṣṇa directly says, mām ekam. Herein, this is also supported by the word kṛṣṇa-padāravindayoḥ. Nārāyaṇa does not speak personally, but Kṛṣṇa, or Vāsudeva, does, as in Bhagavad-gītā for example. Therefore, to follow the direction of Bhagavad-gītā means to surrender unto Kṛṣṇa, and to surrender in this way is the highest perfection of bhakti-yoga.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Sri_Caitanya-caritamrta" class="section" sec_index="2" parent="compilation" text="Sri Caitanya-caritamrta"><h2>Sri Caitanya-caritamrta</h2>
</div>
<div id="CC_Madhya-lila" class="sub_section" sec_index="2" parent="Sri_Caitanya-caritamrta" text="CC Madhya-lila"><h3>CC Madhya-lila</h3>
</div>
<div id="CCMadhya687_0" class="quote" parent="CC_Madhya-lila" book="CC" index="1057" link="CC Madhya 6.87" link_text="CC Madhya 6.87">
<div class="heading">This is a very important verse. Even big scholars cannot understand Kṛṣṇa, yet they dare comment on the Bhagavad-gītā. Reading the Bhagavad-gītā means understanding Kṛṣṇa, yet we actually see many scholars making blunders in trying to understand Kṛṣṇa.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:CC Madhya 6.87|CC Madhya 6.87, Purport]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="purport text"><p style="display: inline;">This is a very important verse. Even big scholars cannot understand Kṛṣṇa, yet they dare comment on the Bhagavad-gītā. Reading the Bhagavad-gītā means understanding Kṛṣṇa, yet we actually see many scholars making blunders in trying to understand Kṛṣṇa. Gopīnātha Ācārya's statement is confirmed in many places in the Vedic literature.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Lectures" class="section" sec_index="4" parent="compilation" text="Lectures"><h2>Lectures</h2>
</div>
<div id="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="0" parent="Lectures" text="Bhagavad-gita As It Is Lectures"><h3>Bhagavad-gita As It Is Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG211RotaryClubAddressHotelImperialDelhiMarch251976_0" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="51" link="Lecture on BG 2.11 -- Rotary Club Address -- Hotel Imperial, Delhi, March 25, 1976" link_text="Lecture on BG 2.11 -- Rotary Club Address -- Hotel Imperial, Delhi, March 25, 1976">
<div class="heading">So Bhagavad-gītā means to understand what is God, the science of God. And God Himself is speaking about Himself.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 2.11 -- Rotary Club Address -- Hotel Imperial, Delhi, March 25, 1976|Lecture on BG 2.11 -- Rotary Club Address -- Hotel Imperial, Delhi, March 25, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So Bhagavad-gītā means to understand what is God, the science of God. And God Himself is speaking about Himself. Otherwise it is not possible to understand what is God. So if we carefully understand the ślokas and the passages mentioned in the Bhagavad-gītā, we can understand what is God. And the human form of life is meant for understanding God. He has no other business. In the lower bodies, less than human form of body... According to Darwin's theory, the human form of body comes from monkey. But the evolution is accepted in the Vedic literature but not like Darwin's. The evolution, again according to Vedic scripture, is that the living entity is different from the body, and the living entity is passing through many forms of body.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG213HyderabadNovember181972_1" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="62" link="Lecture on BG 2.13 -- Hyderabad, November 18, 1972" link_text="Lecture on BG 2.13 -- Hyderabad, November 18, 1972">
<div class="heading">Bhagavad-gītā means the song sung by the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Bhagavata. From the word bhagavata, we speak Bhagavān.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 2.13 -- Hyderabad, November 18, 1972|Lecture on BG 2.13 -- Hyderabad, November 18, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">The Second Chapter is the summary study of the Bhagavad-gītā. The First Chapter is the preparatory study of Bhagavad-gītā, and the Second Chapter is the summary study of the contents of Bhagavad-gītā. Bhagavad-gītā means the song sung by the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Bhagavata. From the word bhagavata, we speak Bhagavān.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG213HyderabadNovember181972_2" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="62" link="Lecture on BG 2.13 -- Hyderabad, November 18, 1972" link_text="Lecture on BG 2.13 -- Hyderabad, November 18, 1972">
<div class="heading">If we study Bhagavad-gītā, we have to accept the statements, Bhagavad-gītā. Bhagavad-gītā means the speeches which is delivered, or the song which is sung by the Supreme Personality of Godhead.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 2.13 -- Hyderabad, November 18, 1972|Lecture on BG 2.13 -- Hyderabad, November 18, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So those who are duṣkṛtina... Na māṁ prapadyante, na māṁ duṣkṛtino mūḍhāḥ ([[Vanisource:BG 7.15|BG 7.15]]). One class is duṣkṛtina and the other class is mūḍha. Mūḍha means less intelligence, or no intelligence. na māṁ duṣkṛtino mūḍhāḥ prapadyante narādhamāḥ. And narādhama means the lowest of the mankind. And māyayā apahṛta-jñānāḥ, those whose knowledge have been taken by māyā, āsuraṁ bhāvam āśritāḥ. These classes of men do not surrender unto Kṛṣṇa. We are not manufacturing these words. These words are in the Bhagavad-gītā. If we study Bhagavad-gītā, we have to accept the statements, Bhagavad-gītā. Bhagavad-gītā means the speeches which is delivered, or the song which is sung by the Supreme Personality of Godhead.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG327MelbourneJune271974_3" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="127" link="Lecture on BG 3.27 -- Melbourne, June 27, 1974" link_text="Lecture on BG 3.27 -- Melbourne, June 27, 1974">
<div class="heading">Now it is known, Bhagavad-gītā. Bhagavad-gītā means the, generally in this Western world they say, "Song of God."
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 3.27 -- Melbourne, June 27, 1974|Lecture on BG 3.27 -- Melbourne, June 27, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Now it is known, Bhagavad-gītā. Bhagavad-gītā means the, generally in this Western world they say, "Song of God." So Bhagavad-gītā is spoken by the Supreme Personality of Godhead. So He said that "This is not a new literature. Millions of years ago I spoke about this yoga system, imaṁ vivasvate yogaṁ proktavān... ([[Vanisource:BG 4.1|BG 4.1]]). Proktavān means, "I said." Whom? Vivasvān. Vivasvān is the name of the sungod or the president of the sun planet.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG41BombayMarch211974_4" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="133" link="Lecture on BG 4.1 -- Bombay, March 21, 1974" link_text="Lecture on BG 4.1 -- Bombay, March 21, 1974">
<div class="heading">So we are beginning today speaking on Bhagavad-gītā, the preliminary scientific study of this science of Godhead. Bhagavad-gītā means Bhagavān, the Supreme Personality of Godhead.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 4.1 -- Bombay, March 21, 1974|Lecture on BG 4.1 -- Bombay, March 21, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So we are beginning today speaking on Bhagavad-gītā, the preliminary scientific study of this science of Godhead. Bhagavad-gītā means Bhagavān, the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Bhagavān means the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Bhaga, we generally know, bhāgya, opulence, fortune, a man is called bhāgyavān. This bhāgyavān word comes from the word bhaga, Bhagavān. Bhaga means opulence, six kinds of opulences: wealth, strength, influence, education, wisdom, beauty, and renunciation. These are opulences. If a man is wealthy, he's attractive. He attracts. Any man, very wealthy, he attracts.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG413BombayApril21974_5" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="168" link="Lecture on BG 4.13 -- Bombay, April 2, 1974" link_text="Lecture on BG 4.13 -- Bombay, April 2, 1974">
<div class="heading">"Oh, I am a very good scholar. I passed my DHC or MAC or MA. I can comment on Bhagavad-gītā in my own way." That is rascaldom. That is not understanding of Bhagavad-gītā. Bhagavad-gītā means you must understand what Kṛṣṇa says.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 4.13 -- Bombay, April 2, 1974|Lecture on BG 4.13 -- Bombay, April 2, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Ow to read? Evaṁ paramparā-prāptam ([[Vanisource:BG 4.2|BG 4.2]]), through the disciplic succession. As Kṛṣṇa said, you have to accept that teaching through the disciplic succession, not concocted meanings. "Oh, I am a very good scholar. I passed my DHC or MAC or MA. I can comment on Bhagavad-gītā in my own way." That is rascaldom. That is not understanding of Bhagavad-gītā. Bhagavad-gītā means you must understand what Kṛṣṇa says. That is understanding. But generally, it is done, "Kill Kṛṣṇa. There was no Kṛṣṇa. There was no battlefield. There was no Mahābhārata. I have my concoction about Kṛṣṇa." This kind of commentary and understanding of Bhagavad-gītā has spoiled the whole world.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG92CalcuttaMarch81972_7" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="301" link="Lecture on BG 9.2 -- Calcutta, March 8, 1972" link_text="Lecture on BG 9.2 -- Calcutta, March 8, 1972">
<div class="heading">It is simply based on this Bhagavad-gītā—Kṛṣṇa. Bhagavad-gītā means Kṛṣṇa. Kṛṣṇa, everything Kṛṣṇa.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 9.2 -- Calcutta, March 8, 1972|Lecture on BG 9.2 -- Calcutta, March 8, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So you should (read) Bhagavad-gītā very carefully with attention, as it is, without malinterpretation, with rascal interpretation. Try to understand, make your life successful. This is our propaganda, Kṛṣṇa consciousness. Kṛṣṇa consciousness movement is not a manufactured movement. It is simply based on this Bhagavad-gītā—Kṛṣṇa. Bhagavad-gītā means Kṛṣṇa. Kṛṣṇa, everything Kṛṣṇa. That is Kṛṣṇa consciousness. We are simply placing Bhagavad-gītā as it is. And if we are fortunate enough to understand Bhagavad-gītā, our life is successful. The Bhagavad-gītā is there, the teaching is there, the example is there. Why should we not accept and make our life successful? That is the first law.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG135BombaySeptember281973_8" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="354" link="Lecture on BG 13.5 -- Bombay, September 28, 1973" link_text="Lecture on BG 13.5 -- Bombay, September 28, 1973">
<div class="heading">If we accept that, that Kṛṣṇa is the supreme authority, then you'll learn Bhagavad-gītā. And if you try to make minus Kṛṣṇa, or if you want to take the position of Kṛṣṇa like the Māyāvādīs, then you become a rascal. There is no knowledge of Bhagavad-gītā. Bhagavad-gītā means to accept Kṛṣṇa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead. And Kṛṣṇa also demands, sarva-dharmān parityajya mām ekaṁ śaraṇaṁ vraja (BG 18.66). That is the authority.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 13.5 -- Bombay, September 28, 1973|Lecture on BG 13.5 -- Bombay, September 28, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">First study Bhagavad-gītā, and when we are actually realized... What is realization Bhagavad-gītā? Realization of Bhagavad-gītā is to know Kṛṣṇa—the Supreme Personality of Godhead. That is realization. Ārādhyo bhagavān vrajeśa-tanayaḥ. Kṛṣṇa is the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Kṛṣṇa says in the Bhagavad-gītā, mattaḥ parataraṁ nānyat kiñcid asti dhanañjaya: ([[Vanisource:BG 7.7|BG 7.7]]) "There is no more superior authority than Me." If we accept that, that Kṛṣṇa is the supreme authority, then you'll learn Bhagavad-gītā. And if you try to make minus Kṛṣṇa, or if you want to take the position of Kṛṣṇa like the Māyāvādīs, then you become a rascal. There is no knowledge of Bhagavad-gītā. Bhagavad-gītā means to accept Kṛṣṇa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead. And Kṛṣṇa also demands, sarva-dharmān parityajya mām ekaṁ śaraṇaṁ vraja ([[Vanisource:BG 18.66|BG 18.66]]). That is the authority.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG13812BombaySeptember301973_9" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="357" link="Lecture on BG 13.8-12 -- Bombay, September 30, 1973" link_text="Lecture on BG 13.8-12 -- Bombay, September 30, 1973">
<div class="heading">Bhagavad-gītā is based on philosophy, this system, Kṛṣṇa-bhakti. Bhagavad-gītā means Kṛṣṇa-bhakti, devotion to Kṛṣṇa, Kṛṣṇa consciousness.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 13.8-12 -- Bombay, September 30, 1973|Lecture on BG 13.8-12 -- Bombay, September 30, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Bhagavad-gītā is based on philosophy, this system, Kṛṣṇa-bhakti. Bhagavad-gītā means Kṛṣṇa-bhakti, devotion to Kṛṣṇa, Kṛṣṇa consciousness. That is Bhagavad-gītā. Bhagavad-gītā, the teaching is man-manā bhava mad-bhakto mad-yājī māṁ namaskuru ([[Vanisource:BG 18.65|BG 18.65]]). This is Bhagavad-gītā. "Always think of Me." Kṛṣṇa conscious, pure and simple. Man-manā bhava mad-bhakto mad-yājī māṁ namaskuru ([[Vanisource:BG 18.65|BG 18.65]]). Everywhere Kṛṣṇa stressed on His personality. Aham ādir hi devānām: ([[Vanisource:BG 10.2|BG 10.2]]) "I am the origin of all the devatās." Mattaḥ parataraṁ nānyat kiñcid asti dhanañjaya ([[Vanisource:BG 7.7|BG 7.7]]).</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="1" parent="Lectures" text="Srimad-Bhagavatam Lectures"><h3>Srimad-Bhagavatam Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB1218VrndavanaOctober291972_0" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="78" link="Lecture on SB 1.2.18 -- Vrndavana, October 29, 1972" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.2.18 -- Vrndavana, October 29, 1972">
<div class="heading">Bhagavad-gītā means minus Kṛṣṇa. That's all. Such rascals have spoiled the whole country, you see.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.2.18 -- Vrndavana, October 29, 1972|Lecture on SB 1.2.18 -- Vrndavana, October 29, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Now, when I see, when we see that one man is not a devotee or Kṛṣṇa, or he does not surrender to Kṛṣṇa, immediately we take him belonging to the four classes: duṣkṛtinaḥ, mūḍhāḥ, narādhamāḥ, māyayā apahṛta-jñānāḥ. Immediately we take. It doesn't require much time to test him, what he is, because he has no surrender to Kṛṣṇa and talks all nonsense. There are so many Gītā explainers in our country—simply talking nonsense, minus Kṛṣṇa. That's all. Bhagavad-gītā means minus Kṛṣṇa. That's all. Such rascals have spoiled the whole country, you see. Everyone is so... Politicians, and this, that, all, they are... "Oh, we are student of Bhagavad-gītā." And what do you know about Kṛṣṇa? "Kṛṣṇa is zero." That's all. This is going on. So therefore Kṛṣṇa says, na māṁ duṣkṛtino mūḍhāḥ prapadyante narādhamāḥ ([[Vanisource:BG 7.15|BG 7.15]]). So we have to hear. If we actually want to diminish our anarthas, then we must hear Kṛṣṇa as He's speaking, without any interpretation.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB32514BombayNovember141974_1" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="436" link="Lecture on SB 3.25.14 -- Bombay, November 14, 1974" link_text="Lecture on SB 3.25.14 -- Bombay, November 14, 1974">
<div class="heading">Bhagavad-gītā means to understand Kṛṣṇa. So although everything is explained there, but it is on the bhakti line, not in any other line.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 3.25.14 -- Bombay, November 14, 1974|Lecture on SB 3.25.14 -- Bombay, November 14, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">"And I am speaking that very yoga system again to you." So this is real incarnation. They'll not say anything which is, which was not spoken before. The same thing. Yogo naṣṭaḥ parantapa. "That yoga has been lost. Therefore, My dear Arjuna, I am repeating the same yoga system unto you." "Why to me? Why not to others?" Bhakto 'si: "Because you are My dear friend." Priyo 'si: ([[Vanisource:BG 4.3|BG 4.3]]) "You are My dear friend." Because, without being bhakta, nobody will understand Bhagavad-gītā. It is not possible. Bhagavad-gītā means to understand Kṛṣṇa. So although everything is explained there, but it is on the bhakti line, not in any other line. Therefore Kṛṣṇa says at the end, bhaktyā mām abhijānāti ([[Vanisource:BG 18.55|BG 18.55]]). If anyone wants to understand Kṛṣṇa and wants relationship with Kṛṣṇa, then one must take to this process of bhakti-yoga. That is sāṅkhya-yoga. That will be explained by Kapiladeva. Bhakti-yoga means sāṅkhya-yoga.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB32535BombayDecember41974_2" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="456" link="Lecture on SB 3.25.35 -- Bombay, December 4, 1974" link_text="Lecture on SB 3.25.35 -- Bombay, December 4, 1974">
<div class="heading">In the Bhagavad-gītā Kṛṣṇa says to Arjuna that "I am speaking to you this science of Bhagavad-gītā." Imaṁ vivasvate yogaṁ proktavān aham avyayam (BG 4.1). Idaṁ yogam. Bhagavad-gītā means bhakti-yogam. So Kṛṣṇa said formerly, say, four hundred millions of years ago.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 3.25.35 -- Bombay, December 4, 1974|Lecture on SB 3.25.35 -- Bombay, December 4, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">In the Bhagavad-gītā Kṛṣṇa says to Arjuna that "I am speaking to you this science of Bhagavad-gītā." Imaṁ vivasvate yogaṁ proktavān aham avyayam ([[Vanisource:BG 4.1|BG 4.1]]). Idaṁ yogam. Bhagavad-gītā means bhakti-yogam. So Kṛṣṇa said formerly, say, four hundred millions of years ago. Bhagavad-gītā is not new. It is... First of all it was spoken to sun-god, and from the Manu's age and others' age we can calculate it is about some millions of years ago it was spoken. Imaṁ vivasvate yogaṁ proktavān aham avyayam ([[Vanisource:BG 4.1|BG 4.1]]). So Kṛṣṇa said, "That very old yoga system I am speaking to you again. It is not a new thing that I am manufacturing for you. No." Everything... God is eternal and His instruction is also eternal. And the followers are also eternal. There is nothing new. Nityaḥ śāśvato 'yaṁ purāṇaḥ. Nityaḥ śāśvato 'yaṁ purāṇaḥ. Very old, but still, it is eternal and fresh. This is spiritual matter. You read Bhagavad-gītā.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB32535BombayDecember41974_3" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="456" link="Lecture on SB 3.25.35 -- Bombay, December 4, 1974" link_text="Lecture on SB 3.25.35 -- Bombay, December 4, 1974">
<div class="heading">Therefore to understand Bhagavad-gītā means one has to become first of all a bhakta. The so-called nondevotee, atheist class, scholar and politician, they cannot understand. It is not possible. They cannot enter into it. The same thing, licking up the honey bottle, that's all. What you will taste? It is not possible.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 3.25.35 -- Bombay, December 4, 1974|Lecture on SB 3.25.35 -- Bombay, December 4, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So those who have got developed love of Godhead, they can hear. As it is said in the Bhagavad-gītā, Kṛṣṇa says that "I am speaking to you the old message, Bhagavad-gītā, which I spoke to sun-god some millions of years ago." So "Why You are speaking to me? I am not a Vedantist. I am not a sannyāsī. I am not any advance in spiritual understanding." People may say. But Kṛṣṇa says, "Yes. You are My bhakta." Bhakto 'si. Therefore to understand Bhagavad-gītā means one has to become first of all a bhakta. The so-called nondevotee, atheist class, scholar and politician, they cannot understand. It is not possible. They cannot enter into it. The same thing, licking up the honey bottle, that's all. What you will taste? It is not possible.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB613940SuratDecember211970_5" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="664" link="Lecture on SB 6.1.39-40 -- Surat, December 21, 1970" link_text="Lecture on SB 6.1.39-40 -- Surat, December 21, 1970">
<div class="heading">Bhagavad-gītā means as Kṛṣṇa says. Kṛṣṇa says, man-manā bhava mad-bhakto mad-yājī māṁ namaskuru (BG 18.65). But a commentator, big commentator, says, "Oh, it is not to Kṛṣṇa, to the person." Just see. This kind of commentary is going on.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 6.1.39-40 -- Surat, December 21, 1970|Lecture on SB 6.1.39-40 -- Surat, December 21, 1970]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I think we should finish here. Any questions? Now we have come to the conclusion: dharma means the words of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. This is sum and substance, what we mean by dharma. That means dharma cannot be manufactured by any conditioned soul. Conditioned souls, they are subjected to so many deficiencies; therefore they cannot create any dharma. That will not be accepted as dharma. Here, as the assistants of Yamarāja says, that veda-praṇihito dharmo... Dharma means what is stated in the Vedas. And Vedas means the Supreme Personality of Godhead, sākṣād, directly. Just like when you speak, when you speak or hear Bhagavad-gītā, immediately we should know—at least this vision we take—that Kṛṣṇa is directly speaking. And if we interpret, then the whole thing is lost. That is not Bhagavad-gītā, and that is going on, malinterpretation of Bhagavad-gītā. Everyone is taking Bhagavad-gītā, and he is interpreting in his own way. So that is not Bhagavad-gītā. Bhagavad-gītā means as Kṛṣṇa says. Kṛṣṇa says, man-manā bhava mad-bhakto mad-yājī māṁ namaskuru ([[Vanisource:BG 18.65|BG 18.65]]). But a commentator, big commentator, says, "Oh, it is not to Kṛṣṇa, to the person." Just see. This kind of commentary is going on.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB616465VrndavanaSeptember11975_6" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="697" link="Lecture on SB 6.1.64-65 -- Vrndavana, September 1, 1975" link_text="Lecture on SB 6.1.64-65 -- Vrndavana, September 1, 1975">
<div class="heading">So Bhagavad-gītā means kṛṣṇa-kathā, what Kṛṣṇa has said. And Śrīmad Bhāgavatam is also kṛṣṇa-kathā because everything said about Kṛṣṇa.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 6.1.64-65 -- Vrndavana, September 1, 1975|Lecture on SB 6.1.64-65 -- Vrndavana, September 1, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">These externally very attractive news, we should avoid it completely. We shall simply talk of Kṛṣṇa. That is the safest method. We shall simply talk kṛṣṇa-kathā. And kṛṣṇa-kathā means what Kṛṣṇa has said. That is kṛṣṇa-kathā. Or what is spoken about Kṛṣṇa. So Bhagavad-gītā means kṛṣṇa-kathā, what Kṛṣṇa has said. And Śrīmad Bhāgavatam is also kṛṣṇa-kathā because everything said about Kṛṣṇa. So we don't We should not indulge in grāmya-kathā. That will mislead us. And if we do not indulge in grāmya-kathā, but if we make advancement on Kṛṣṇa-kathā, then we are always situated on transcendental position. We are no more affected by the modes of material nature. Sa guṇān samatītyaitān brahma-bhūyāya kalpate ([[Vanisource:BG 14.26|BG 14.26]]). So we should stick to this principle. Then we shall be saved. Otherwise, either I become man or woman, we are all condemned because we are implicated with grāmya-kathā.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB761VrndavanaDecember21975_7" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="742" link="Lecture on SB 7.6.1 -- Vrndavana, December 2, 1975" link_text="Lecture on SB 7.6.1 -- Vrndavana, December 2, 1975">
<div class="heading">Therefore you will see in the Bhagavad-gītā, it is Bhagavad-gītā means the dharma or the religious principle preached by the Supreme Personality of Godhead.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 7.6.1 -- Vrndavana, December 2, 1975|Lecture on SB 7.6.1 -- Vrndavana, December 2, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Dharma, there are many dharmas. Especially nowadays there is Hindu dharma, Mussulman dharma or Christian dharma, or Sikh dharma, Arya dharma, this dharma, hundreds and thousands. But in the Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam, in the beginning of Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam, it is declared, dharmo projjhita-kaitavo atra, atra śrīmad-bhāgavate: "In the Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam all rascaldom, cheating type of religion, is kicked out." This is bhāgavata-dharma. Bhāgavata-dharma means bhagavān, bhāgavata-śabda. From bhagavān the word bhāgavata has come. So bhāgavata-dharma means relationship with God, Bhagavān. Therefore you will see in the Bhagavad-gītā, it is Bhagavad-gītā means the dharma or the religious principle preached by the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Therefore Bhagavad-gītā is bhāgavata-dharma. Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam. That is bhāgavata-dharma. So dharma means bhāgavata-dharma. Any other dharma which does not teach anything about God, that is cheating, kaitava.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Nectar_of_Devotion_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="2" parent="Lectures" text="Nectar of Devotion Lectures"><h3>Nectar of Devotion Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="TheNectarofDevotionVrndavanaNovember131972_0" class="quote" parent="Nectar_of_Devotion_Lectures" book="Lec" index="42" link="The Nectar of Devotion -- Vrndavana, November 13, 1972" link_text="The Nectar of Devotion -- Vrndavana, November 13, 1972">
<div class="heading">So study of Bhagavad-gītā means if you follow the footprints of Arjuna, then you are also as good as Arjuna. Not as good; I mean to say, that your knowledge is perfect.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:The Nectar of Devotion -- Vrndavana, November 13, 1972|The Nectar of Devotion -- Vrndavana, November 13, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">From Brahma, we have got these Vedas, Vedic knowledge. Therefore, Kṛṣṇa is the original spiritual master. Aham evāsam agre. Before creation, Kṛṣṇa was there. Aham ādir hi devānām (Bg 10.2). Kṛṣṇa is the origin of all the devas. Devas means Brahmā, Viṣṇu, Maheśvara, then all other demigods. So, in this way, Kṛṣṇa is the original spiritual master. Just like He's the spiritual master of Arjuna. So study of Bhagavad-gītā means if you follow the footprints of Arjuna, then you are also as good as Arjuna. Not as good; I mean to say, that your knowledge is perfect. Perfect in this sense: that Arjuna accepted Kṛṣṇa as Paraṁ Brahma; you accept Kṛṣṇa as Paraṁ Brahma; then your study of Bhagavad-gītā is perfect. And if you make your so-called erudite scholarship, commentary, "It is not to Kṛṣṇa," then you are spoiled. Your life is spoiled, your study is spoiled. Sādhu-mārga-anugamanam</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Sri_Caitanya-caritamrta_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="3" parent="Lectures" text="Sri Caitanya-caritamrta Lectures"><h3>Sri Caitanya-caritamrta Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonCCMadhyalila20100WashingtonDCJuly51976_0" class="quote" parent="Sri_Caitanya-caritamrta_Lectures" book="Lec" index="51" link="Lecture on CC Madhya-lila 20.100 -- Washington, D.C., July 5, 1976" link_text="Lecture on CC Madhya-lila 20.100 -- Washington, D.C., July 5, 1976">
<div class="heading">That means they misinterpret and they misguide. So people should be intelligent enough that they are impersonalists but Bhagavad-gītā means Kṛṣṇa, the person, He is teaching.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on CC Madhya-lila 20.100 -- Washington, D.C., July 5, 1976|Lecture on CC Madhya-lila 20.100 -- Washington, D.C., July 5, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">That means they misinterpret and they misguide. So people should be intelligent enough that they are impersonalists but Bhagavad-gītā means Kṛṣṇa, the person, He is teaching. Where is the impersonalist? But nobody has any common sense even that Kṛṣṇa says aham ādir hi bhūtānām. Ahaṁ sarvasya prabhavo ([[Vanisource:BG 10.8|BG 10.8]]). This aham is person, so how He can be imperson? And He's talking personally with Arjuna. So how He is imperson? Can the air talk with you? Air is imperson. Sky is imperson. Can he talk with you? What do you think? No, sometimes talks.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Festival_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="6" parent="Lectures" text="Festival Lectures"><h3>Festival Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="SriVyasapujaHyderabadAugust191976_0" class="quote" parent="Festival_Lectures" book="Lec" index="26" link="Sri Vyasa-puja -- Hyderabad, August 19, 1976" link_text="Sri Vyasa-puja -- Hyderabad, August 19, 1976">
<div class="heading">Bhagavad-gītā means you have to accept as it is. That is Bhagavad-gītā.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Sri Vyasa-puja -- Hyderabad, August 19, 1976|Sri Vyasa-puja -- Hyderabad, August 19, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So it appears contradictory, the Vedic injunction. But still we accept because it is Vedic order. That is... That is the acceptance of Vedas. Just like Bhagavad-gītā. Bhagavad-gītā, there are so many rascals, they cut short: "I like this; I do not like this." No. Arjuna says sarvam etad ṛtaṁ manye ([[Vanisource:BG 10.14|BG 10.14]]). That is understanding of Vedas. If a rascal makes cut, cutting, "I do not like this, I interpret" this is not Bhagavad-gītā. Bhagavad-gītā means you have to accept as it is. That is Bhagavad-gītā</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="General_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="11" parent="Lectures" text="General Lectures"><h3>General Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LecturetoInternationalStudentSocietyBostonDecember281969_0" class="quote" parent="General_Lectures" book="Lec" index="67" link="Lecture to International Student Society -- Boston, December 28, 1969" link_text="Lecture to International Student Society -- Boston, December 28, 1969">
<div class="heading">Actually, Bhagavad-gītā means to develop Kṛṣṇa consciousness, and we are trying to do that.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture to International Student Society -- Boston, December 28, 1969|Lecture to International Student Society -- Boston, December 28, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So our point is that if we actually want to expand this international feeling, then we must find out the real center. That center is Kṛṣṇa. Kṛṣṇa, or God, I have already explained. Kṛṣṇa said in the Bhagavad-gītā... You'll please always remember that this Kṛṣṇa consciousness movement means placing Bhagavad-gītā as it is. Whatever I am speaking, it is there in the Bhagavad-gītā. Unfortunately, Bhagavad-gītā has been misinterpreted by so many commentators that people have misunderstood the Bhagavad-gītā. Actually, Bhagavad-gītā means to develop Kṛṣṇa consciousness, and we are trying to do that.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="section" sec_index="5" parent="compilation" text="Conversations and Morning Walks"><h2>Conversations and Morning Walks</h2>
</div>
<div id="1974_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="sub_section" sec_index="7" parent="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" text="1974 Conversations and Morning Walks"><h3>1974 Conversations and Morning Walks</h3>
</div>
<div id="RoomConversationwithRogerMarialeadingwriterofcommunistliteratureJune121974Paris_0" class="quote" parent="1974_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="112" link="Room Conversation with Roger Maria leading writer of communist literature -- June 12, 1974, Paris" link_text="Room Conversation with Roger Maria leading writer of communist literature -- June 12, 1974, Paris">
<div class="heading">No, teachings of Bhagavad-gītā means Kṛṣṇa.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Room Conversation with Roger Maria leading writer of communist literature -- June 12, 1974, Paris|Room Conversation with Roger Maria leading writer of communist literature -- June 12, 1974, Paris]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: No, teachings of Bhagavad-gītā means Kṛṣṇa. That is the folly of the so-called scholars. They want to study Bhagavad-gītā without Kṛṣṇa. Just like one wants to play Hamlet without Hamlet. (French, mentions Śaṅkara) Śaṅkara has accepted Kṛṣṇa as the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Does he know that, that Śaṅkara has accepted Kṛṣṇa the Supreme Personality? (French)</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1975_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="sub_section" sec_index="8" parent="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" text="1975 Conversations and Morning Walks"><h3>1975 Conversations and Morning Walks</h3>
</div>
<div id="RoomConversationwithReporterMarch91975London_0" class="quote" parent="1975_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="25" link="Room Conversation with Reporter -- March 9, 1975, London" link_text="Room Conversation with Reporter -- March 9, 1975, London">
<div class="heading">Reading Bhagavad-gītā is also taking lesson from the teacher. Teacher—Kṛṣṇa is personally the teacher, and you read Bhagavad-gītā means you take lessons from teacher, the supreme teacher.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Room Conversation with Reporter -- March 9, 1975, London|Room Conversation with Reporter -- March 9, 1975, London]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: Yes. Why you are asking? Anything you want to learn, you must go to a teacher. How you can learn independently?</p>
<p>Reporter: I mean just, say, by reading the Bhagavad-gītā.</p>
<p>Prabhupāda: Reading Bhagavad-gītā is also taking lesson from the teacher. Teacher—Kṛṣṇa is personally the teacher, and you read Bhagavad-gītā means you take lessons from teacher, the supreme teacher.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1976_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="sub_section" sec_index="9" parent="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" text="1976 Conversations and Morning Walks"><h3>1976 Conversations and Morning Walks</h3>
</div>
<div id="ConversationwithNewsReportersMarch251976Delhi_0" class="quote" parent="1976_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="63" link="Conversation with News Reporters -- March 25, 1976, Delhi" link_text="Conversation with News Reporters -- March 25, 1976, Delhi">
<div class="heading">Bhagavad-gītā means that there is God, and we are part and parcel of God. God is great, and we are very tiny, small, fragmental portion of God.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Conversation with News Reporters -- March 25, 1976, Delhi|Conversation with News Reporters -- March 25, 1976, Delhi]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: They make modernized meaning of Bhagavad-gītā. That is insanity. Do you agree or...</p>
<p>Reporter (1): What would you regard to be the essence of Bhagavad-gītā?</p>
<p>Prabhupāda: Bhagavad-gītā means that there is God, and we are part and parcel of God. God is great, and we are very tiny, small, fragmental portion of God. In quality we and God are the same, just like a drop of ocean water is qualitatively the same as the big ocean.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="RoomConversationDecember271976Bombay_1" class="quote" parent="1976_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="357" link="Room Conversation -- December 27, 1976, Bombay" link_text="Room Conversation -- December 27, 1976, Bombay">
<div class="heading">Bhagavad-gītā means the words of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. And which other way can be authorized way? You have to impress that upon.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Room Conversation -- December 27, 1976, Bombay|Room Conversation -- December 27, 1976, Bombay]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: It is authorized, and it is taught by Kṛṣṇa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Others are unauthorized. This is authorized. And that's a fact. This is authorized. And others, those, they are manufactured. Just like they have manufa...</p>
<p>Gopāla Kṛṣṇa: It is authorized in the Bhagavad-gītā.</p>
<p>Prabhupāda: In every... Bhagavad... This is Vedic. Bhagavad-gītā means the words of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. And which other way can be authorized way? You have to impress that upon.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1977_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="sub_section" sec_index="10" parent="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" text="1977 Conversations and Morning Walks"><h3>1977 Conversations and Morning Walks</h3>
</div>
<div id="RoomConversationApril131977Bombay_0" class="quote" parent="1977_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="137" link="Room Conversation -- April 13, 1977, Bombay" link_text="Room Conversation -- April 13, 1977, Bombay">
<div class="heading">Where is their knowledge of Bhagavad-gītā? And misleading all, writing commentary, "Bhagavad-gītā means nationalism, nonviolence," protesting that "If Kṛṣṇa is fighting, I don't want that Kṛṣṇa, even I am extricated from the Hindu society."
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Room Conversation -- April 13, 1977, Bombay|Room Conversation -- April 13, 1977, Bombay]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Where is their knowledge of Bhagavad-gītā? And misleading all, writing commentary, "Bhagavad-gītā means nationalism, nonviolence," protesting that "If Kṛṣṇa is fighting, I don't want that Kṛṣṇa, even I am extricated from the Hindu society." Gandhi has said. Bhagavad-gītā should be according to his whims. If you can change the verdict of Bhagavad-gītā, then why you take Bhagavad-gītā? Is that authority? If you..., government gives you some law. If you say, "No, no, I don't like this item. I... It should be like this," then is that law, that "I'll take Bhagavad-gītā..."? All these rascals are doing that.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="EveningDarsanaMay131977Hrishikesh_1" class="quote" parent="1977_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="169" link="Evening Darsana -- May 13, 1977, Hrishikesh" link_text="Evening Darsana -- May 13, 1977, Hrishikesh">
<div class="heading">These are the statement in the Bhagavad-gītā. So if we do not try to understand the real purpose of Bhagavad-gītā, and if we theorize, "Bhagavad-gītā means nonviolence.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Evening Darsana -- May 13, 1977, Hrishikesh|Evening Darsana -- May 13, 1977, Hrishikesh]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">. So this requires knowledge, intelligence, that "If I am eternal," na hanyate hanyamāne śarīre ([[Vanisource:BG 2.20|BG 2.20]]), "I am not destroyed even this body is destroyed," then you should seek after eternal happiness. Why temporary? That is not in your interest. That happiness is there when you go back to Kṛṣṇa; otherwise not. These are the statement in the Bhagavad-gītā. So if we do not try to understand the real purpose of Bhagavad-gītā, and if we theorize, "Bhagavad-gītā means nonviolence. Bhagavad-gītā means to become patriot," these are materialism. We should avoid this wrong interpretation, misguiding direction of blind leaders. We'll not get any benefit out of it. So we are trying to rectify this. That's all. Everything is there.</p>
</div>
</div>
</div>

Seva means

2010-04-07T09:56:58Z

Partha-sarathi: Created page with '<div id="compilation"> <div id="facts"> {{terms|"seva means"}} {{notes|}} {{compiler|Partha-sarathi}} {{complete|ALL}} {{first|07Apr10}} {{last|07Apr10}} {{totals_by_section|BG=0…'

<div id="compilation">
<div id="facts">
{{terms|"seva means"}}
{{notes|}}
{{compiler|Partha-sarathi}}
{{complete|ALL}}
{{first|07Apr10}}
{{last|07Apr10}}
{{totals_by_section|BG=0|SB=0|CC=0|OB=0|Lec=10|Con=2|Let=0}}
{{total|12}}
{{toc right}}
[[Category:Meaning of Sanskrit Words]]
</div>
<div id="Lectures" class="section" sec_index="4" parent="compilation" text="Lectures"><h2>Lectures</h2>
</div>
<div id="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="0" parent="Lectures" text="Bhagavad-gita As It Is Lectures"><h3>Bhagavad-gita As It Is Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG42BombayMarch221974_0" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="136" link="Lecture on BG 4.2 -- Bombay, March 22, 1974" link_text="Lecture on BG 4.2 -- Bombay, March 22, 1974">
<div class="heading">So sevā means bhakti. Śravaṇaṁ kīrtanaṁ viṣṇoḥ smaraṇaṁ pāda-sevanam, arcanaṁ vandanam... (SB 7.5.23). These are the sevā formula. So the devotees are engaged in sevā, in service of the Lord.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 4.2 -- Bombay, March 22, 1974|Lecture on BG 4.2 -- Bombay, March 22, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">The rāja, the kings, the government, or the government, they must study Bhagavad-gītā. Then it will be nice. Imaṁ rāja... And ṛṣayaḥ. Ṛṣayaḥ will give you... Ṛṣayaḥ means great saintly persons, the brāhmaṇas. They should give to the government men... But who is consulting the saintly persons? Just like we are trying to preach this Bhagavad-gītā. We are trying to give the essence of knowledge. Satataṁ kīrtayanto māṁ yatantaś ca dṛḍha-vratāḥ ([[Vanisource:BG 9.14|BG 9.14]]). Mahātmā. The symptoms of mahātmā is that he is always engaged in chanting the glories of the Lord. Satataṁ kīrtayanto mām ([[Vanisource:BG 9.14|BG 9.14]]). The Bhagavad-gītā says that catur-vidhā bhajante mām: "Four classes of men comes to worship Me." Bhajana means sevā. Sevā. So sevā means bhakti. Śravaṇaṁ kīrtanaṁ viṣṇoḥ smaraṇaṁ pāda-sevanam, arcanaṁ vandanam... ([[Vanisource:SB 7.5.23|SB 7.5.23]]). These are the sevā formula. So the devotees are engaged in sevā, in service of the Lord.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG434NewYorkAugust141966_1" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="195" link="Lecture on BG 4.34 -- New York, August 14, 1966" link_text="Lecture on BG 4.34 -- New York, August 14, 1966">
<div class="heading">Sevā means service. Not that "Oh, I have inquired so many things from such and such person. Oh, I have not rendered any payment or any service, so I have gained."
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 4.34 -- New York, August 14, 1966|Lecture on BG 4.34 -- New York, August 14, 1966]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Sevā means service. Not that "Oh, I have inquired so many things from such and such person. Oh, I have not rendered any payment or any service, so I have gained." No. Without service, your inquiry will be futile. So three things here. Praṇipāta, paripraśna and sevā. Praṇipāta. Praṇipāta means you must have the qualification to, at least to find out a person who is actually qualified to give you real instruction. That you have to do. That remains on you.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="1" parent="Lectures" text="Srimad-Bhagavatam Lectures"><h3>Srimad-Bhagavatam Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB11625HawaiiJanuary211974_0" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="344" link="Lecture on SB 1.16.25 -- Hawaii, January 21, 1974" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.16.25 -- Hawaii, January 21, 1974">
<div class="heading">Here are two things: dayā and sevā. Sevā means to give service to the superior, and dayā means to give service to the inferior. Both of them are service.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.16.25 -- Hawaii, January 21, 1974|Lecture on SB 1.16.25 -- Hawaii, January 21, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Dayā. One must be merciful. Dayā means... When a man is suffering a fellow man, another fellow man must feel for it. That is called dayā. There are two things: dayā and sevā. Sevā means to give service to the superior, and dayā means to give service to the inferior. Both of them are service. Dayā, I mean to say... A man is suffering. He is in helpless condition. Just like in hospital, those who are patients, who are diseased, they go to the hospital There is also sevā. The nurse is serving. The doctor is serving. But that is not sevā. That is called dayā. He is not obliged, but out of his compassion, he's giving service to the patient. That is called dayā. And sevā means superior. Just like spiritual master. Sevayā. Tad viddhi praṇipātena paripraśnena sevayā ([[Vanisource:BG 4.34|BG 4.34]]). Because the Vedic injunction is that "You must go to a spiritual master." Tad-vijñānārthaṁ sa gurum evābhigacchet (MU 1.2.12). Abhigacchet means "must." There is no alternative. If you're actually interested in transcendental knowledge, tad-vijñānam... Tad-vijñānam means transcendental knowledge. Athāto brahma jijñāsā. And the human life is meant for tad-vijñānam, to understand.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB5512StockholmSeptember71973_1" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="521" link="Lecture on SB 5.5.1-2 -- Stockholm, September 7, 1973" link_text="Lecture on SB 5.5.1-2 -- Stockholm, September 7, 1973">
<div class="heading">Tad viddhi praṇipātena paripraśnena sevayā (BG 4.34), to associate. Therefore, it is the custom whenever one goes to see one saintly person, he gives something for service, either fruits or something presentation. That is necessary. Mahat-sevā it is said. Sevā means service.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 5.5.1-2 -- Stockholm, September 7, 1973|Lecture on SB 5.5.1-2 -- Stockholm, September 7, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">If we are, our heart is attached to limited circle of my friends, wife, children, home, country, then I am kṣūdrātmā, because that is limited. Kṣūdrātmā or durātmā. The opposite is mahātmā. Mahan, great. So we have to associate with mahātmā. Mahat-sevā. How associate? Tad viddhi praṇipātena paripraśnena sevayā ([[Vanisource:BG 4.34|BG 4.34]]), to associate. Therefore, it is the custom whenever one goes to see one saintly person, he gives something for service, either fruits or something presentation. That is necessary. Mahat-sevā it is said. Sevā means service. Maha-sevā. Not that I go to see one mahātmā, saintly person, and talk with him with all rascal proposal, and waste his time and his own time also. That is not association of the mahātmā. Mahat sevā. You must approach a saintly person to give him some service. This is the beginning. Spiritual advancement of life means you have to give some service. That service begins when we serve the representative of Kṛṣṇa, mahātmā. He's spiritual master or saintly person.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB552BostonApril281969_3" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="525" link="Lecture on SB 5.5.2 -- Boston, April 28, 1969" link_text="Lecture on SB 5.5.2 -- Boston, April 28, 1969">
<div class="heading">If you want to approach to the perfectional point of purificatory birth, then you associate with mahat-sevā. Sevā means service. Service. Our whole process is service. This spiritual life can be attained simply by service, not by any other qualification.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 5.5.2 -- Boston, April 28, 1969|Lecture on SB 5.5.2 -- Boston, April 28, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">F you associate and serve mahat—mahat means the great, great personality—mahat-sevāṁ dvāram, then your door for purification will be open. Mahat-sevāṁ dvāram āhur vimuktes tamo-dvāram... And the opposite is, if you want to enter into the darkest region of ignorance, then you associate with persons who are simply meant for sense gratification. Two ways, this way or that way. If you want to approach to the perfectional point of purificatory birth, then you associate with mahat-sevā. Sevā means service. Service. Our whole process is service. This spiritual life can be attained simply by service, not by any other qualification. Therefore in the Bhagavad-gītā the last instruction is surrender. You cannot render service to a person unless you surrender. That is the first condition, mahat-sevā.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB6118DenverJuly11975_4" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="621" link="Lecture on SB 6.1.18 -- Denver, July 1, 1975" link_text="Lecture on SB 6.1.18 -- Denver, July 1, 1975">
<div class="heading">It cannot be infected by any material things. In this way prasāda should be taken. It is called prasāda-sevā, not "prasāda enjoyment." Sevā means giving service.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 6.1.18 -- Denver, July 1, 1975|Lecture on SB 6.1.18 -- Denver, July 1, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So in our other branches, all the devotees, they take together prasādam. That is nice. Why one should be not liking to take prasādam in the temple? What is the fault? No, this is not good. We should... Everyone should take prasādam. You see still if you go to Jagannātha Purī. Even outsiders who go there, they do not cook. Strictly, they do not cook. They purchase prasādam. And if you go there, one thousand men—because there are pilgrims, they are coming, there is no—you will get immediately ready prasādam, purchased from the the market, the Jagannātha Purī, still. And there is no such thing as infection. I am taking your prasādam remnants. Whatever you left, I am... He is taking. Even if you are outcaste, if you are not brāhmaṇa, still there is. Because prasāda is transcendental. It is not material thing. So one must have faith that it is not material. It cannot be infected by any material things. In this way prasāda should be taken. It is called prasāda-sevā, not "prasāda enjoyment." Sevā means giving service. Prasāda is as good as Kṛṣṇa; therefore prasāda should be respected as good as Kṛṣṇa. As soon as one gets prasādam, immediately he touches on the head because it is Kṛṣṇa, absolute. In this way we have to be trained up as it is prescribed in the śāstras.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB7619NewVrindabanJuly21976_5" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="772" link="Lecture on SB 7.6.19 -- New Vrindaban, July 2, 1976" link_text="Lecture on SB 7.6.19 -- New Vrindaban, July 2, 1976">
<div class="heading">Everything is sevayā. Prasāda-seva, bhāgavata-sevā. Because, sevā means service. Just like maha-prasāda, not eating. The exact term is sevā.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 7.6.19 -- New Vrindaban, July 2, 1976|Lecture on SB 7.6.19 -- New Vrindaban, July 2, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">We have got so many dirty things within our hearts, and as soon as we are a little inclined to hear about Kṛṣṇa, He removes the dirty things, then we become more and more enthused. In this way, nityaṁ bhāgavata sevayā. Naṣṭa-prāyeṣv abhadreṣu ([[Vanisource:SB 1.2.18|SB 1.2.18]]). Not that cent percent we are cleansed, but even a little percentage cleansed, naṣṭa-prāyeṣv abhadreṣu nityaṁ bhāgavata-sevayā. Nityam, daily, there must be bhāgavata-sevā. Everything is sevayā. Prasāda-seva, bhāgavata-sevā. Because, sevā means service. Just like maha-prasāda, not eating. The exact term is sevā. Kṛṣṇa has sent him maha-prasāda. So by taking it, it is sevā, it is service to Kṛṣṇa, Kṛṣṇa likes it, that you take the prasādam. Therefore it is sevā. In this way, increasing sevā.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Nectar_of_Devotion_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="2" parent="Lectures" text="Nectar of Devotion Lectures"><h3>Nectar of Devotion Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="TheNectarofDevotionVrndavanaNovember11972_0" class="quote" parent="Nectar_of_Devotion_Lectures" book="Lec" index="29" link="The Nectar of Devotion -- Vrndavana, November 1, 1972" link_text="The Nectar of Devotion -- Vrndavana, November 1, 1972">
<div class="heading">Hṛṣīkeṇa hṛṣīkeśa-sevanam (CC Madhya 19.170). Sevanam means activity. Sevanam does not mean sit down idle, inert. No. As soon as seva... Sevā means activity. One has to preach, one has to write, one has to do this, do that, cook, offer the prasādam, everything. Sevā, activity.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:The Nectar of Devotion -- Vrndavana, November 1, 1972|The Nectar of Devotion -- Vrndavana, November 1, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Here is, sitting, Śrī Gosvāmījī. He's coming from Gopāla Bhaṭṭa Gosvāmī. So all these six Gosvāmīs, they were not inactive. They were always active. As we are active in the karma, karmī life, so bhakti life is also activity. It is not sitting down idly or gossiping. One must find out some job to serve Kṛṣṇa. That is bhakti life. Hṛṣīkeṇa hṛṣīkeśa-sevanam ([[Vanisource:CC Madhya 19.170|CC Madhya 19.170]]). Sevanam means activity. Sevanam does not mean sit down idle, inert. No. As soon as seva... Sevā means activity. One has to preach, one has to write, one has to do this, do that, cook, offer the prasādam, everything. Sevā, activity.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Initiation_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="8" parent="Lectures" text="Initiation Lectures"><h3>Initiation Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="InitiationLectureHamburgAugust271969_0" class="quote" parent="Initiation_Lectures" book="Lec" index="20" link="Initiation Lecture -- Hamburg, August 27, 1969" link_text="Initiation Lecture -- Hamburg, August 27, 1969">
<div class="heading">So sevā, sevā means service; jihvā ādau, beginning from the tongue. So if we can keep our tongue engaged, always chanting Hare Kṛṣṇa mantra... Because "Kṛṣṇa," this sound, is not different from Kṛṣṇa. Kṛṣṇa is absolute.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Initiation Lecture -- Hamburg, August 27, 1969|Initiation Lecture -- Hamburg, August 27, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So this tongue in the human body can be engaged. In other body, in the cat's body, dog's body, tiger's body... Tiger may be a very powerful animal. No animal is powerful or better than human beings. That is accepted. So this human form of life is a great boon to the living entity who is traveling through the cycle of birth and death, perpetually changing different sorts of body. Here is the opportunity, human form of body. We can utilize the tongue properly and get out of these clutches. Sevonmukhe hi jihvādau. So sevā, sevā means service; jihvā ādau, beginning from the tongue. So if we can keep our tongue engaged, always chanting Hare Kṛṣṇa mantra... Because "Kṛṣṇa," this sound, is not different from Kṛṣṇa. Kṛṣṇa is absolute.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="General_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="11" parent="Lectures" text="General Lectures"><h3>General Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureatUpsalaUniversityFacultyStockholmSeptember71973_0" class="quote" parent="General_Lectures" book="Lec" index="140" link="Lecture at Upsala University Faculty -- Stockholm, September 7, 1973" link_text="Lecture at Upsala University Faculty -- Stockholm, September 7, 1973">
<div class="heading">Otherwise, what is the use of approaching? Tad viddhi praṇipātena paripraśnena sevayā. And sevā means service. You cannot challenge.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture at Upsala University Faculty -- Stockholm, September 7, 1973|Lecture at Upsala University Faculty -- Stockholm, September 7, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">These three things are the basic principle of receiving knowledge. So submission means I must approach somebody who is actually in better position or higher position. Otherwise, what is the use of approaching? Tad viddhi praṇipātena paripraśnena sevayā. And sevā means service. You cannot challenge. You approach such person whose instruction you shall receive. You can inquire submissively, but you cannot challenge. That is not allowed in Vedic system. Samit-pāṇiḥ śrotriyaṁ brahma-niṣṭham (MU 1.2.12). Therefore before selecting a teacher, you must decide whether you can submit there. If you cannot submit there, don't approach, don't waste time. So that is the process. And Arjuna submitted to Arjuna, uh, Kṛṣṇa.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="section" sec_index="5" parent="compilation" text="Conversations and Morning Walks"><h2>Conversations and Morning Walks</h2>
</div>
<div id="1974_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="sub_section" sec_index="7" parent="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" text="1974 Conversations and Morning Walks"><h3>1974 Conversations and Morning Walks</h3>
</div>
<div id="RoomConversationwithCatholicCardinalandSecretarytothePopeMay241974Rome_0" class="quote" parent="1974_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="84" link="Room Conversation with Catholic Cardinal and Secretary to the Pope -- May 24, 1974, Rome" link_text="Room Conversation with Catholic Cardinal and Secretary to the Pope -- May 24, 1974, Rome">
<div class="heading">Seva means service. So service is offered to the superior.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Room Conversation with Catholic Cardinal and Secretary to the Pope -- May 24, 1974, Rome|Room Conversation with Catholic Cardinal and Secretary to the Pope -- May 24, 1974, Rome]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: Seva means service. So service is offered to the superior. And to the inferior or subordinate, we offer our compassion. So similarly, as we are eager to give service, similarly, we should be eager to be compassionate. So it is not very good idea. Just like in India they say, daridra-nārāyaṇa. Some nation, that to give service to the human being, and cut the throat of the animals. This philosophy is not good.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1977_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="sub_section" sec_index="10" parent="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" text="1977 Conversations and Morning Walks"><h3>1977 Conversations and Morning Walks</h3>
</div>
<div id="SecondMeetingwithMrDwivediApril241977Bombay_0" class="quote" parent="1977_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="153" link="Second Meeting with Mr. Dwivedi -- April 24, 1977, Bombay" link_text="Second Meeting with Mr. Dwivedi -- April 24, 1977, Bombay">
<div class="heading">Sevā means offered to the superior. And to the inferior, if you want to do something, that is dayā. There are words. Sevā is only capable to accept, Kṛṣṇa.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Second Meeting with Mr. Dwivedi -- April 24, 1977, Bombay|Second Meeting with Mr. Dwivedi -- April 24, 1977, Bombay]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Indians, they are fortunate. They have got their birth in Bhāratavarṣa. The knowledge is here. So assimilate this knowledge. Make your life successful and distribute it to persons outside India. That is paropakāra. That is real paropakāra. That is real sevā. But sevā, no. It is dayā. The sevā cannot be used. Sevā means offered to the superior. And to the inferior, if you want to do something, that is dayā. There are words. Sevā is only capable to accept, Kṛṣṇa.</p>
</div>
</div>
</div>

Puja means

2010-04-07T09:35:36Z

Partha-sarathi: Created page with '<div id="compilation"> <div id="facts"> {{terms|"puja means"}} {{notes|}} {{compiler|Partha-sarathi}} {{complete|ALL}} {{first|07Apr10}} {{last|07Apr10}} {{totals_by_section|BG=0…'

<div id="compilation">
<div id="facts">
{{terms|"puja means"}}
{{notes|}}
{{compiler|Partha-sarathi}}
{{complete|ALL}}
{{first|07Apr10}}
{{last|07Apr10}}
{{totals_by_section|BG=0|SB=0|CC=0|OB=1|Lec=5|Con=0|Let=1}}
{{total|7}}
{{toc right}}
[[Category:Meaning of Sanskrit Words]]
</div>
<div id="Other_Books_by_Srila_Prabhupada" class="section" sec_index="3" parent="compilation" text="Other Books by Srila Prabhupada"><h2>Other Books by Srila Prabhupada</h2>
</div>
<div id="Krsna_The_Supreme_Personality_of_Godhead" class="sub_section" sec_index="4" parent="Other_Books_by_Srila_Prabhupada" text="Krsna, The Supreme Personality of Godhead"><h3>Krsna, The Supreme Personality of Godhead</h3>
</div>
<div id="KB74_0" class="quote" parent="Krsna,_The_Supreme_Personality_of_Godhead" book="OB" index="78" link="KB 74" link_text="Krsna Book 74">
<div class="heading">After all arrangements were made for Yudhiṣṭhira's sacrifice, the next consideration was who should be worshiped first in the ceremony. This particular ceremony is called Agra-pūjā. Agra means "first," and pūjā means "worship." This Agra-pūjā is similar to the election of a president. In the sacrificial assembly, all the members were very exalted. Some.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:KB 74|Krsna Book 74]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Another important procedure is that the most exalted personality in the assembly of such a sacrificial ceremony is first offered worship. After all arrangements were made for Yudhiṣṭhira's sacrifice, the next consideration was who should be worshiped first in the ceremony. This particular ceremony is called Agra-pūjā. Agra means "first," and pūjā means "worship." This Agra-pūjā is similar to the election of a president. In the sacrificial assembly, all the members were very exalted. Some proposed to elect one person as the perfect candidate for accepting Agra-pūjā, and others proposed someone else.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Lectures" class="section" sec_index="4" parent="compilation" text="Lectures"><h2>Lectures</h2>
</div>
<div id="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="0" parent="Lectures" text="Bhagavad-gita As It Is Lectures"><h3>Bhagavad-gita As It Is Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG216LondonAugust221973_0" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="74" link="Lecture on BG 2.16 -- London, August 22, 1973" link_text="Lecture on BG 2.16 -- London, August 22, 1973">
<div class="heading">Vyāsadeva is the original ācārya. Therefore the birthday of guru is called vyāsa-pūjā. Vyāsa-pūjā means original guru. Guru is the representative of Vyāsadeva.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 2.16 -- London, August 22, 1973|Lecture on BG 2.16 -- London, August 22, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">O sat... Our business should be to be engaged in the sat platform, not in the asat platform. Asat platform, nonpermanent, or according to somebody's opinion, false. So false or nonpermanent, whatever it may be, the real human civilization should be based on the purpose of becoming immortal, sat, not asat. That is the distinction between India and other countries. Now I am not speaking of India of today, but India as it is. Big, big ācāryas, just like Vyāsadeva. Vyāsadeva is the original ācārya. Therefore the birthday of guru is called vyāsa-pūjā. Vyāsa-pūjā means original guru. Guru is the representative of Vyāsadeva.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG71518NewYorkOctober91966_1" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="284" link="Lecture on BG 7.15-18 -- New York, October 9, 1966" link_text="Lecture on BG 7.15-18 -- New York, October 9, 1966">
<div class="heading">These material assets are three. Something, I want some gain out of my work, profit. And pūjā. Pūjā means people will adore me: "Oh, you are such a rich man. You are so great man." Lābha, pūjā, and pratiṣṭhā, and fame: "People may know me that 'I am Carnegie,' 'I am Rockefeller,' 'I am Birla.'.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 7.15-18 -- New York, October 9, 1966|Lecture on BG 7.15-18 -- New York, October 9, 1966]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Therefore Kṛṣṇa says that udārāḥ: "They are also good, because gradually they will come to this understanding." Because a jñānī knows that "What are these material things? They are only flickering, flickering. Suppose I get too much wealth and too much everything. What is this mighty lābha?" Lābha, pūjā, pratiṣṭhā. These material assets are three. Something, I want some gain out of my work, profit. And pūjā. Pūjā means people will adore me: "Oh, you are such a rich man. You are so great man." Lābha, pūjā, and pratiṣṭhā, and fame: "People may know me that 'I am Carnegie,' 'I am Rockefeller,' 'I am Birla.' " But he does not know that Birla or Rockefeller is this body. As soon as this body is finished, all Birla or Rockefeller is finished. Then I do not know whether I am entering into cat or dog. Because after finishing this body, you are neither Birla, neither Rockefeller—you are spirit soul.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="1" parent="Lectures" text="Srimad-Bhagavatam Lectures"><h3>Srimad-Bhagavatam Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB1156LondonAugust231971_0" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="16" link="Lecture on SB 1.1.5-6 -- London, August 23, 1971" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.1.5-6 -- London, August 23, 1971">
<div class="heading">This vyāsa-pūjā means a spiritual master is representative of Vyāsa. Just as we are teaching this Bhāgavata-dharma, the Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam—we are following the footsteps of Vyāsadeva. So actually, the preacher's seat is Vyāsadeva's āsana; it is the seat of Vyāsadeva.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.1.5-6 -- London, August 23, 1971|Lecture on SB 1.1.5-6 -- London, August 23, 1971]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Vyāsāsana means... Vyāsa means guru, because he's our original guru. When spiritual master's birthday is observed, it is called vyāsa-pūjā. This vyāsa-pūjā means a spiritual master is representative of Vyāsa. Just as we are teaching this Bhāgavata-dharma, the Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam—we are following the footsteps of Vyāsadeva. So actually, the preacher's seat is Vyāsadeva's āsana; it is the seat of Vyāsadeva. Just like in the high-court the seat of judgment, or what is called? That seat nobody else can sit there, in that seat. Only the high-court judge, representative of king for giving law to the citizens, he can sit down. Similarly, the vyāsāsana is occupied by the representative of Vyāsadeva, who can speak on behalf of Vyāsadeva. This is the system. Go on.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB121416SanFranciscoMarch241967_1" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="69" link="Lecture on SB 1.2.14-16 -- San Francisco, March 24, 1967" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.2.14-16 -- San Francisco, March 24, 1967">
<div class="heading">Unless one narrates or unless one speaks, one cannot hear. So the two process are going on. Somebody is hearing and somebody is chanting. And then when hear and chant, there must be meditation. If we attentively hear, then there must be meditation. And pūjya. Pūjā means worship.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.2.14-16 -- San Francisco, March 24, 1967|Lecture on SB 1.2.14-16 -- San Francisco, March 24, 1967]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Therefore it is the duty of the devotee to hear. The hearing process is Bhagavad-gītā, Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam. And kīrtitavyaś ca, and narrate also. Unless one narrates or unless one speaks, one cannot hear. So the two process are going on. Somebody is hearing and somebody is chanting. And then when hear and chant, there must be meditation. If we attentively hear, then there must be meditation. And pūjya. Pūjā means worship. The simple process of worship in this age is this performance as we are doing—chanting, hearing, and offering some fruits, flowers, and showing this candle. This is simple, that's all. There are... According to Vedic literature there are many parapher..., sixty-four items for worshiping. That is not possible in this age. So this is all right.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB7943CalcuttaMarch231976_2" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="850" link="Lecture on SB 7.9.43 -- Calcutta, March 23, 1976" link_text="Lecture on SB 7.9.43 -- Calcutta, March 23, 1976">
<div class="heading">That is the material world, lābha, pūjā, pratiṣṭhā. Everyone is for some material profit. That is called lābha. And pūjā. Pūjā means he wants a position so that all others will come and worship him: "Sir, you are so great. You are big minister. You are big president. You are this, that. Kindly give me this favor, that favor." That is called pūjā, "Everyone will come and worship me." And pratiṣṭhā: "And I will be so celebrated man that even after my death, there will be a statue in the maidan and people will come to worship me."
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 7.9.43 -- Calcutta, March 23, 1976|Lecture on SB 7.9.43 -- Calcutta, March 23, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So those who are after these things... That is the material world, lābha, pūjā, pratiṣṭhā. Everyone is for some material profit. That is called lābha. And pūjā. Pūjā means he wants a position so that all others will come and worship him: "Sir, you are so great. You are big minister. You are big president. You are this, that. Kindly give me this favor, that favor." That is called pūjā, "Everyone will come and worship me." And pratiṣṭhā: "And I will be so celebrated man that even after my death, there will be a statue in the maidan and people will come to worship me." After death where he is going? He is going to be a dog or cat. He doesn't mind. But his statue should be worshiped. Such rascals. He does not know where he is going after death. Tathā dehāntara-prāptiḥ ([[Vanisource:BG 2.13|BG 2.13]]). He'll have to change his body. So as soon as he changes body, he has to accept another body, but he keeps in memory of this body. A drunkard, a woman-hunter, and such a person, most sinful life in this, and what will help him by having a statue? But they are fools, vimūḍhān, rascals. Māyā-sukhāya bharam udva... ([[Vanisource:SB 7.9.43|SB 7.9.43]]), making big, big arrangements. That is material world. Everyone is.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Correspondence" class="section" sec_index="6" parent="compilation" text="Correspondence"><h2>Correspondence</h2>
</div>
<div id="1972_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="7" parent="Correspondence" text="1972 Correspondence"><h3>1972 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoAtreyaRsiLosAngeles13September1972_0" class="quote" parent="1972_Correspondence" book="Let" index="491" link="Letter to Atreya Rsi -- Los Angeles 13 September, 1972" link_text="Letter to Atreya Rsi -- Los Angeles 13 September, 1972">
<div class="heading">Regarding your questions, Seva Puja* means only for daily worship of deities. The building fund will construct, the book fund will maintain, and this fund is for daily expenditure of Seva Puja or worship of the deities only.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Atreya Rsi -- Los Angeles 13 September, 1972|Letter to Atreya Rsi -- Los Angeles 13 September, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Please accept my blessings. I have received your letter dated September 5, 1972, duly delivered to me by hand of Syamasundara., and I have noted the contents carefully. Regarding your questions, Seva Puja* means only for daily worship of deities. The building fund will construct, the book fund will maintain, and this fund is for daily expenditure of Seva Puja or worship of the deities only. So far your administrative duties as secretary of Mayapur-Vrndavana Trust Fund are concerned, that will be informed by you. For the time being, rents should be collected by Karandhara and sent to India. How it will be done I shall think over and let you know. As for the responsibility for proper spending, the man in charge or the president will be responsible in Mayapur and Vrndavana.</p>
</div>
</div>
</div>

Rajo-guna means

2010-04-05T14:12:49Z

Partha-sarathi: Created page with '<div id="compilation"> <div id="facts"> {{terms|"rajo-guna means"}} {{notes|}} {{compiler|Partha-sarathi}} {{complete|ALL}} {{first|05Apr10}} {{last|05Apr10}} {{totals_by_section…'

<div id="compilation">
<div id="facts">
{{terms|"rajo-guna means"}}
{{notes|}}
{{compiler|Partha-sarathi}}
{{complete|ALL}}
{{first|05Apr10}}
{{last|05Apr10}}
{{totals_by_section|BG=0|SB=0|CC=0|OB=0|Lec=10|Con=1|Let=0}}
{{total|11}}
{{toc right}}
[[Category:Meaning of Sanskrit Words]]
</div>
<div id="Lectures" class="section" sec_index="4" parent="compilation" text="Lectures"><h2>Lectures</h2>
</div>
<div id="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="0" parent="Lectures" text="Bhagavad-gita As It Is Lectures"><h3>Bhagavad-gita As It Is Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG27LondonAugust71973_0" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="39" link="Lecture on BG 2.7 -- London, August 7, 1973" link_text="Lecture on BG 2.7 -- London, August 7, 1973">
<div class="heading">Rajo-guṇa means very active, but active like monkey. Just like monkey's very active, but they're all dangerous. You'll never see inactive. Whenever it will sit down, it will make gat gat gat gat.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 2.7 -- London, August 7, 1973|Lecture on BG 2.7 -- London, August 7, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">They have got knowledge. Just like brāhmaṇa. And those who are captured by the rajo-guṇa, they are busy in material activities. And those who have captured tamo-guṇa, they are lazy and sleepy. That's all. These are the symptoms. Tamo-guṇa means they're very lazy and sleepy. Rajo-guṇa means very active, but active like monkey. Just like monkey's very active, but they're all dangerous. You'll never see inactive. Whenever it will sit down, it will make gat gat gat gat.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG165HawaiiJanuary311975_1" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="385" link="Lecture on BG 16.5 -- Hawaii, January 31, 1975" link_text="Lecture on BG 16.5 -- Hawaii, January 31, 1975">
<div id="link_text" class="ui-state-default ui-corner-all" title="Click to change the link for this quote">Lecture on BG 16.5 -- Hawaii, January 31, 1975
</div><br>
<div id="fix_link"><label>Find link:</label><br><input class="ac_input" autocomplete="off" id="fix_link_input">
</div><br>
<label>Heading:</label><br><textarea id="heading" name="heading" cols="50" rows="4">And rajo-guṇa means activities for sense enjoyment. So rajo-guṇa, just like the karmīs, they are working hard day and night. What is the purpose? Sex, that's all.</textarea><br>
<label>Text:</label><br><textarea id="text" name="text" cols="50" rows="4">Tamo-guṇa means nidrā, alasya, ignorance, and sleeping more, laziness, and alasya, alasya, laziness, nidrā, means sleeping, and ignorance. Just like cats and dogs. They do not know what is the aim of life, what they are doing. This is tamo-guṇa. And rajo-guṇa means activities for sense enjoyment. So rajo-guṇa, just like the karmīs, they are working hard day and night. What is the purpose? Sex, that's all. "Why you are working so hard, sir?" "I will enjoy sex at night. (laughter) This is my ambition." "Oh, very good ambition. This ambition the dogs also have got.</textarea><br>
<div id="edit_buttons">
<input id="Update_quote" class="ui-state-default ui-corner-all" value="Update" title="Click or press Shift+Enter to update this quote" type="button">
<input id="Cancel_quote" class="ui-state-default ui-corner-all" value="Cancel" title="Click or press Esc to cancel the editing of this quote" type="button">
</div>
<div id="diacritics">
<span id="diacritics_toggle">Diacritics</span><p>
<a href="#">ā</a>
<a href="#">Ā</a>
<a href="#">ḍ</a>
<a href="#">Ḍ</a>
<a href="#">ḥ</a>
<a href="#">Ḥ</a>
<a href="#">ī</a>
<a href="#">Ī</a>
<a href="#">ḷ</a>
<a href="#">Ḷ</a>
<a href="#">ḹ</a>
<a href="#">ṁ</a>
<a href="#">Ṁ</a>
<a href="#">ñ</a>
<a href="#">Ñ</a>
<a href="#">ṅ</a>
<a href="#">Ṅ</a>
<a href="#">ṇ</a>
<a href="#">Ṇ</a>
<a href="#">ṛ</a>
<a href="#">Ṛ</a>
<a href="#">ṝ</a>
<a href="#">Ṝ</a>
<a href="#">ś</a>
<a href="#">Ś</a>
<a href="#">ṣ</a>
<a href="#">Ṣ</a>
<a href="#">ṭ</a>
<a href="#">Ṭ</a>
<a href="#">ū</a>
<a href="#">Ū</a>
</p>
</div>
<span id="prabhupada_icon" title="Place the cursor in text to insert Prabhupāda: as the speaker and click here"></span>
</div>
<div id="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="1" parent="Lectures" text="Srimad-Bhagavatam Lectures"><h3>Srimad-Bhagavatam Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB1219VrndavanaOctober301972_0" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="81" link="Lecture on SB 1.2.19 -- Vrndavana, October 30, 1972" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.2.19 -- Vrndavana, October 30, 1972">
<div class="heading">Because sattva-guṇa means knowledge, rajo-guṇa means passion, and tamo-guṇa means ignorance. So this world is being carried on by these three guṇas. Those who are accepting the tamo-guṇa, they are kāma, lusty, too much lusty. And those who are in rajo-guṇa, they're too much greedy.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.2.19 -- Vrndavana, October 30, 1972|Lecture on SB 1.2.19 -- Vrndavana, October 30, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Because sattva-guṇa means knowledge, rajo-guṇa means passion, and tamo-guṇa means ignorance. So this world is being carried on by these three guṇas. Those who are accepting the tamo-guṇa, they are kāma, lusty, too much lusty. And those who are in rajo-guṇa, they're too much greedy. And those are in the sattva-guṇa, they know things. That is brahminical qualification. Veda jānāti iti brāhmaṇaḥ. Veda-pāṭhād bhaved vipro brahma jānāti iti brāhmaṇaḥ. By reading Vedas, one becomes a vipra. Then not only vipra, but when... Vipra means brāhmaṇa. So to become brāhmaṇa by qualification is not sufficient.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB3269BombayDecember211974_1" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="473" link="Lecture on SB 3.26.9 -- Bombay, December 21, 1974" link_text="Lecture on SB 3.26.9 -- Bombay, December 21, 1974">
<div class="heading">And rajo-guṇa means on the ground. It gradually, the ignition, the fire of the spark, becomes finished. And if the spark falls down on some water, then immediately it is extinguished.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 3.26.9 -- Bombay, December 21, 1974|Lecture on SB 3.26.9 -- Bombay, December 21, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So brūhi kāraṇayor asya sad-asac ca yad-ātmakam. So the uttama-puruṣa, Puruṣottama, just like Kṛṣṇa or Kapiladeva, They come within this material world, but they are not affected. But we are affected. We are, according to our desire, conditioned. We are affected by the different modes of material nature. It is described in the Vedic literature just like the fire and the spark. The fire is always blazing, but the sparks coming out of the fire, they sometime fall down. And this falling down is described that if the spark falls on some dry grass, then immediately the grass is also ignited into fire. That is sattva-guṇa. And rajo-guṇa means on the ground. It gradually, the ignition, the fire of the spark, becomes finished. And if the spark falls down on some water, then immediately it is extinguished. Similarly, when we come down from the spiritual world on account of desire, icchā-dveṣa samutthena sarge yānti parantapa ([[Vanisource:BG 7.27|BG 7.27]]), by our icchā, Kṛṣṇa gives us to fulfill our desires.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB32627BombayJanuary41975_2" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="487" link="Lecture on SB 3.26.27 -- Bombay, January 4, 1975" link_text="Lecture on SB 3.26.27 -- Bombay, January 4, 1975">
<div class="heading">And rajo-guṇa means lusty desires, unending desires. And if desires are not fulfilled, then there is krodha, anger. In this way, kāma krodha lobha moha mātsarya—everything becomes very prominent, and we become servant of these propensities, kāma, krodha, moha, mātsarya, mada, lobha.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 3.26.27 -- Bombay, January 4, 1975|Lecture on SB 3.26.27 -- Bombay, January 4, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So this mind is material because it is the product of transformation of the modes of goodness. Then, gradually, being contaminated by different kinds of material desires, it becomes degraded. Kāma eṣa krodha eṣa rajo-guṇa-samudbhavaḥ. When it is deteriorated, then, from the standard of goodness, it comes to rajo-guṇa. And rajo-guṇa means lusty desires, unending desires. And if desires are not fulfilled, then there is krodha, anger. In this way, kāma krodha lobha moha mātsarya—everything becomes very prominent, and we become servant of these propensities, kāma, krodha, moha, mātsarya, mada, lobha. This is called illusion, gradually degraded mind. And the business of the mind is saṅkalpa and vikalpa. Saṅkalpa means decide to do something, and vikalpa means again to reject it.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB5523VrndavanaNovember101976_3" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="554" link="Lecture on SB 5.5.23 -- Vrndavana, November 10, 1976" link_text="Lecture on SB 5.5.23 -- Vrndavana, November 10, 1976">
<div class="heading">There are three guṇas—sattva-guṇa, rajo-guṇa, tamo-guṇa. If you remain in the lower platforms, tamo-guṇa, rajo-guṇa... Tamo-guṇa, rajo-guṇa means, as I have already explained, greediness and lust, desires. That is tamo-guṇa, rajo-guṇa. Tato rājas-tamo-bhava kāma-lobhādayaś ca ye.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 5.5.23 -- Vrndavana, November 10, 1976|Lecture on SB 5.5.23 -- Vrndavana, November 10, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">There are three guṇas—sattva-guṇa, rajo-guṇa, tamo-guṇa. If you remain in the lower platforms, tamo-guṇa, rajo-guṇa... Tamo-guṇa, rajo-guṇa means, as I have already explained, greediness and lust, desires. That is tamo-guṇa, rajo-guṇa. Tato rājas-tamo-bhava kāma-lobhādayaś ca ye. What is that rajo-guṇa, tamo-guṇa? Now, kama, lusty desires, and greediness, not satisfied with the minimum necessities of life, want to increase more and more, more and more. That is called greediness. The Vedic civilization teaches that "Be satisfied with the minimum necessities of life. Don't increase unnecessary necessities of life, and then you have to work for it very hard like hogs and dogs." That's all. Then you have to work very...</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB6147DallasJuly291975_4" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="680" link="Lecture on SB 6.1.47 -- Dallas, July 29, 1975" link_text="Lecture on SB 6.1.47 -- Dallas, July 29, 1975">
<div class="heading">If we cultivate rajo-guṇa... Rajo-guṇa means kāma-lobha, kāma, simply desiring. This is called rajo-guṇa. "I want this, I want this, I want this."
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 6.1.47 -- Dallas, July 29, 1975|Lecture on SB 6.1.47 -- Dallas, July 29, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So this future, past, present, future, is being controlled by the three modes of material nature. If we practice in this life sattva-guṇa, then ūrdhvaṁ gacchanti sattva-sthāḥ: ([[Vanisource:BG 14.18|BG 14.18]]) then we shall be promoted to the higher planetary system. Madhye tiṣṭhanti rājasāḥ. If we cultivate rajo-guṇa... Rajo-guṇa means kāma-lobha, kāma, simply desiring. This is called rajo-guṇa. "I want this, I want this, I want this." Because there is no satiation of want, therefore every man or woman planning something, "How my sense gratification will be fully satisfied." This is rajo-guṇa, kāma. Everyone is forgetting his real business. His real business is he should know, one should know, that "I am eternal. I have taken this temporary body and subjected to the laws of nature, birth, death and old age. So my real problem is how to become again eternal, not accepting any more birth, death, old age. That is my real business." But because I am infected with the material modes of nature, we are making different plans. Everyone is busy.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB6147DallasJuly291975_5" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="680" link="Lecture on SB 6.1.47 -- Dallas, July 29, 1975" link_text="Lecture on SB 6.1.47 -- Dallas, July 29, 1975">
<div class="heading">So these are all due to different infection of the guṇa. Tamo-guṇa means shameless, tamo-guṇa. Rajo-guṇa means lusty desire. And sattva-guṇa means knowledge, to see things as they are. So just like here in the temple, we are cultivating sattva-guṇa, or more than that, above sattva-guṇa.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 6.1.47 -- Dallas, July 29, 1975|Lecture on SB 6.1.47 -- Dallas, July 29, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So these are all due to different infection of the guṇa. Tamo-guṇa means shameless, tamo-guṇa. Rajo-guṇa means lusty desire. And sattva-guṇa means knowledge, to see things as they are. So just like here in the temple, we are cultivating sattva-guṇa, or more than that, above sattva-guṇa. Above sattva-guṇa. It is said in the śāstra that to live in the forest is sattva-guṇa. Sattva-guṇa, people have got tendency to live in a secluded place, solitary place, without any disturbance. That is sign of sattva-guṇa. And to live in the cities, big, big cities, skyscraper building, this is rajo-guṇa. And to live in the brothel, in the liquor shop, in the slaughterhouse, this is tamo-guṇa. Sattva-guṇa, rajo-guṇa, tamo-guṇa. But to live in the temple is transcendental. Transcendental.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB7954VrndavanaApril91976_6" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="859" link="Lecture on SB 7.9.54 -- Vrndavana, April 9, 1976" link_text="Lecture on SB 7.9.54 -- Vrndavana, April 9, 1976">
<div class="heading">Tamo-guṇa means animal, and rajo-guṇa means the karmis, and sattva-guṇa means jñānīs. So if one is struggling in this life how to accumulate money, that means rajo-guṇa.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 7.9.54 -- Vrndavana, April 9, 1976|Lecture on SB 7.9.54 -- Vrndavana, April 9, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">After death where is your beautiful wife? Where is your wealth? Where is your followers? Everything finished. Now according to your karma, you have to accept the body of a dog. Nature's way. Karmaṇā daiva-netreṇa ([[Vanisource:SB 3.31.1|SB 3.31.1]]). "You have infected doggish mentality. Now you become a dog." This is nature's way. Kāraṇaṁ guṇa-sango 'sya ([[Vanisource:BG 13.22|BG 13.22]]). You have simply associated with the tamo-guṇa, rajo-guṇa, no sattva-guṇa, so you have to accept a body, rajas-tamo-guṇa. Tamo-guṇa means animal, and rajo-guṇa means the karmis, and sattva-guṇa means jñānīs. So if one is struggling in this life how to accumulate money, that means rajo-guṇa.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Sri_Caitanya-caritamrta_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="3" parent="Lectures" text="Sri Caitanya-caritamrta Lectures"><h3>Sri Caitanya-caritamrta Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonCCMadhyalila221115NewYorkJanuary91967_0" class="quote" parent="Sri_Caitanya-caritamrta_Lectures" book="Lec" index="109" link="Lecture on CC Madhya-lila 22.11-15 -- New York, January 9, 1967" link_text="Lecture on CC Madhya-lila 22.11-15 -- New York, January 9, 1967">
<div class="heading">Now, this lion is the symbol of rajo-guṇa. Rajo-guṇa. Kāma eṣa krodha eṣa rajo-guṇa-samudbhavaḥ. Rajo-guṇa means we are full of lust and anger. When there is excess of rajo-guṇa, then we are full of lust and anger.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on CC Madhya-lila 22.11-15 -- New York, January 9, 1967|Lecture on CC Madhya-lila 22.11-15 -- New York, January 9, 1967]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Just like we ride on horse, Devī, she rides on lion. And the lion has attacked that demon. And demon is also very strong, fighting with the lion, and the mother, Goddess Durgā, she has caught the demon by the hair and piercing the trident on the chest, and the lion has attacked. So this is our position. We are thinking like the demon. Now, this lion is the symbol of rajo-guṇa. Rajo-guṇa. Kāma eṣa krodha eṣa rajo-guṇa-samudbhavaḥ. Rajo-guṇa means we are full of lust and anger. When there is excess of rajo-guṇa, then we are full of lust and anger. And when there is sattva-guṇa, then there is knowledge. And when there is tamo-guṇa, neither anger nor lust nor knowledge, simply just like the Bowery Road. You see? Lying down on the street. This is the sign of ignorance, tamo-guṇa, yes. So this is going on.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="section" sec_index="5" parent="compilation" text="Conversations and Morning Walks"><h2>Conversations and Morning Walks</h2>
</div>
<div id="1975_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="sub_section" sec_index="8" parent="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" text="1975 Conversations and Morning Walks"><h3>1975 Conversations and Morning Walks</h3>
</div>
<div id="MorningWalkAugust61975Detroit_0" class="quote" parent="1975_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="169" link="Morning Walk -- August 6, 1975, Detroit" link_text="Morning Walk -- August 6, 1975, Detroit">
<div class="heading">And rajo-guṇa means they are working for sense gratification. That is also useless. Tamo-guṇa is laziness and sleeping, and rajo-guṇa means working foolishly or for sense gratification.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Morning Walk -- August 6, 1975, Detroit|Morning Walk -- August 6, 1975, Detroit]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">The śūdras, they are in laziness and sleep. So if they have got something to eat, they will not work. Laziness. Or eat more and sleep. This is tamo-guṇa. And rajo-guṇa means they are working for sense gratification. That is also useless. Tamo-guṇa is laziness and sleeping, and rajo-guṇa means working foolishly or for sense gratification. And sattva-guṇa means they know how to work. And therefore above this sattva-guṇa they become devotee, work for Kṛṣṇa. So without working for Kṛṣṇa, everyone is under the spell of these modes of material nature. And there is no training how to work for Kṛṣṇa. That is the defect of modern civilization.</p>
</div>
</div>
</div>

Tamo-guna means

2010-04-05T11:02:13Z

Partha-sarathi: Created page with '<div id="compilation"> <div id="facts"> {{terms|"tamo-guna means"}} {{notes|}} {{compiler|Partha-sarathi}} {{complete|ALL}} {{first|05Apr10}} {{last|05Apr10}} {{totals_by_section…'

<div id="compilation">
<div id="facts">
{{terms|"tamo-guna means"}}
{{notes|}}
{{compiler|Partha-sarathi}}
{{complete|ALL}}
{{first|05Apr10}}
{{last|05Apr10}}
{{totals_by_section|BG=0|SB=0|CC=0|OB=0|Lec=14|Con=3|Let=0}}
{{total|17}}
{{toc right}}
[[Category:Meaning of Sanskrit Words]]
</div>
<div id="Lectures" class="section" sec_index="4" parent="compilation" text="Lectures"><h2>Lectures</h2>
</div>
<div id="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="0" parent="Lectures" text="Bhagavad-gita As It Is Lectures"><h3>Bhagavad-gita As It Is Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG27LondonAugust71973_0" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="39" link="Lecture on BG 2.7 -- London, August 7, 1973" link_text="Lecture on BG 2.7 -- London, August 7, 1973">
<div class="heading">Tamo-guṇa means they're very lazy and sleepy. Rajo-guṇa means very active, but active like monkey. Just like monkey's very active, but they're all dangerous.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 2.7 -- London, August 7, 1973|Lecture on BG 2.7 -- London, August 7, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">O those who are captured by the sattva-guṇa, sattva-guṇa, they are intelligent. They have got knowledge. Just like brāhmaṇa. And those who are captured by the rajo-guṇa, they are busy in material activities. And those who have captured tamo-guṇa, they are lazy and sleepy. That's all. These are the symptoms. Tamo-guṇa means they're very lazy and sleepy. Rajo-guṇa means very active, but active like monkey. Just like monkey's very active, but they're all dangerous. You'll never see inactive. Whenever it will sit down, it will make gat gat gat gat.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG93TorontoJune201976_1" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="305" link="Lecture on BG 9.3 -- Toronto, June 20, 1976" link_text="Lecture on BG 9.3 -- Toronto, June 20, 1976">
<div class="heading">So symptoms of rajo-guṇa and tamo-guṇa means material desires and greediness. And sattva-guṇa means enlightenment. If we cultivate the sattva-guṇa quality, just means, if we cultivate the brahminical qualification, that is the platform of sattva-guṇa.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 9.3 -- Toronto, June 20, 1976|Lecture on BG 9.3 -- Toronto, June 20, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So if we acquire the quality of goodness, there is chance of enlightenment, knowledge, so that again fire can be generated. But if we fall down on the water, practically it is finished. Ignorance. So sattva-guṇa, rajo-guṇa, tamo-guṇa. So in our fallen condition, mostly the rajo-guṇa and tamo-guṇa is very prominent, in our fallen condition, in this material condition. So symptoms of rajo-guṇa and tamo-guṇa means material desires and greediness. And sattva-guṇa means enlightenment. If we cultivate the sattva-guṇa quality, just means, if we cultivate the brahminical qualification, that is the platform of sattva-guṇa. So that is described in the Bhagavad-gītā, satyaṁ śamo damas titikṣā ārjavaṁ jñānaṁ vijñānam āstikyaṁ brahma-karma svabhāva-jam ([[Vanisource:BG 18.42|BG 18.42]]). If we cultivate this kind of life, to be truthful, to be peaceful, to be tolerant, to be men of wisdom, knowledge, faith in God and the śāstras, in this way there are nine to twelve qualities. If we acquire that qualities, then we become brāhmaṇa.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG165HawaiiJanuary311975_2" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="385" link="Lecture on BG 16.5 -- Hawaii, January 31, 1975" link_text="Lecture on BG 16.5 -- Hawaii, January 31, 1975">
<div class="heading">Tamo-guṇa means nidrā, alasya, ignorance, and sleeping more, laziness, and alasya, alasya, laziness, nidrā, means sleeping, and ignorance. Just like cats and dogs.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 16.5 -- Hawaii, January 31, 1975|Lecture on BG 16.5 -- Hawaii, January 31, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Nd that is stated in the Bhagavad-gītā, that our different types of bodies, desires, activities, are due to our being infected by the particular quality of material nature. Perfected quality. There are three qualities: sattva-guṇa, rajo-guṇa, tamo-guṇa. If you want to be infected by the tamo-guṇa quality, then you are suffering the infectious disease of tamo-guṇa. Tamo-guṇa means nidrā, alasya, ignorance, and sleeping more, laziness, and alasya, alasya, laziness, nidrā, means sleeping, and ignorance. Just like cats and dogs. They do not know what is the aim of life, what they are doing. This is tamo-guṇa.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="1" parent="Lectures" text="Srimad-Bhagavatam Lectures"><h3>Srimad-Bhagavatam Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB1212VrndavanaOctober231972_0" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="64" link="Lecture on SB 1.2.12 -- Vrndavana, October 23, 1972" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.2.12 -- Vrndavana, October 23, 1972">
<div class="heading">And rajo-guṇa and tamo-guṇa means kāma and lobha, lust and greediness. This is the symptoms. And when you come to the platform of goodness, then you are satisfied that "I don't want all these things. Now I want Brahman."
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.2.12 -- Vrndavana, October 23, 1972|Lecture on SB 1.2.12 -- Vrndavana, October 23, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">You cannot have a steady position unless you come to the platform of goodness. Sthitaṁ sattve. Sattva means sattva-guṇa, goodness. And rajo-guṇa and tamo-guṇa means kāma and lobha, lust and greediness. This is the symptoms. And when you come to the platform of goodness, then you are satisfied that "I don't want all these things. Now I want Brahman." Brahma jānāti iti brāhmaṇaḥ.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB1219VrndavanaOctober301972_1" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="81" link="Lecture on SB 1.2.19 -- Vrndavana, October 30, 1972" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.2.19 -- Vrndavana, October 30, 1972">
<div class="heading">Because sattva-guṇa means knowledge, rajo-guṇa means passion, and tamo-guṇa means ignorance.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.2.19 -- Vrndavana, October 30, 1972|Lecture on SB 1.2.19 -- Vrndavana, October 30, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Because sattva-guṇa means knowledge, rajo-guṇa means passion, and tamo-guṇa means ignorance. So this world is being carried on by these three guṇas. Those who are accepting the tamo-guṇa, they are kāma, lusty, too much lusty. And those who are in rajo-guṇa, they're too much greedy. And those are in the sattva-guṇa, they know things. That is brahminical qualification. Veda jānāti iti brāhmaṇaḥ. Veda-pāṭhād bhaved vipro brahma jānāti iti brāhmaṇaḥ.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB32516BombayNovember161974_2" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="438" link="Lecture on SB 3.25.16 -- Bombay, November 16, 1974" link_text="Lecture on SB 3.25.16 -- Bombay, November 16, 1974">
<div class="heading">Tamo-guṇa means completely darkness. Just like animals. You take one animal, you cut its throat. Another animal is standing and eating grass.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 3.25.16 -- Bombay, November 16, 1974|Lecture on SB 3.25.16 -- Bombay, November 16, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">They have no brain that this material body is kleśada, is simply miserable. So dull brain. That is tamo-guṇa. Tamo-guṇa means completely darkness. Just like animals. You take one animal, you cut its throat. Another animal is standing and eating grass. He does not know "The next time, next term is mine." This is animal life.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB32524BombayNovember241974_3" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="446" link="Lecture on SB 3.25.24 -- Bombay, November 24, 1974" link_text="Lecture on SB 3.25.24 -- Bombay, November 24, 1974">
<div class="heading">Rajo-guṇa and tamo-guṇa means kāma-lobhādayaś ca ye, to be contaminated by lusty desires and greediness.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 3.25.24 -- Bombay, November 24, 1974|Lecture on SB 3.25.24 -- Bombay, November 24, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So at our present moment we are saṅga-doṣa-yukta, we are contaminated by the attachment of modes of material nature. Some of us contaminated by the sattva-guṇa, some of us are contaminated by the rajo-guṇa, and some of us is contaminated by the tamo-guṇa, and some of us is contaminated by the tamo-guṇa. So out of the three, the rajo-guṇa and tamo-guṇa is very dangerous. Rajas-tamo-bhāvāḥ ([[Vanisource:SB 1.2.19|SB 1.2.19]]). Rajo-guṇa and tamo-guṇa means kāma-lobhādayaś ca ye, to be contaminated by lusty desires and greediness. So one has to overcome in the beginning, at least, the contamination by rajo-guṇa and tamo-guṇa. At the present moment, especially in this age, the contamination of tamo-guṇa is very prominent, and little rajo-guṇa also, but sattva-guṇa is practically nil in this age, Kali-yuga. It is said in the śāstra that sattva-guṇa will be practically nil.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB614142SuratDecember231970_4" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="669" link="Lecture on SB 6.1.41-42 -- Surat, December 23, 1970" link_text="Lecture on SB 6.1.41-42 -- Surat, December 23, 1970">
<div class="heading">Tamo-guṇa means ignorance. We have to act because in the material world sometimes we are under the influence of goodness, sometimes we are under the influence of passion, sometimes we are under the influence of ignorance.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 6.1.41-42 -- Surat, December 23, 1970|Lecture on SB 6.1.41-42 -- Surat, December 23, 1970]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So guṇa-nāma-kriyā-rūpair vibhāvyante yathā-tatham. Sūryaḥ agniḥ. Now, the creation, the God's creation, is going on, and we are acting under the influence of the material qualities. As such, when we act in tamo-guṇa, we become entangled with so many sinful activities. Tamo-guṇa. Tamo-guṇa means ignorance. We have to act because in the material world sometimes we are under the influence of goodness, sometimes we are under the influence of passion, sometimes we are under the influence of ignorance. So when we are in ignorance... Everyone commits sin or criminal activities simply by ignorance.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB6147DallasJuly291975_5" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="680" link="Lecture on SB 6.1.47 -- Dallas, July 29, 1975" link_text="Lecture on SB 6.1.47 -- Dallas, July 29, 1975">
<div class="heading">So dharma adharma jñāpaka, because in the past life this living entity practiced tamo-guṇa, no discrimination of eating... Tamo-guṇa means no discrimination.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 6.1.47 -- Dallas, July 29, 1975|Lecture on SB 6.1.47 -- Dallas, July 29, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Just like a pig. It is very much fond of eating stool. So if you want to ask, "Why this animal is fond of eating stool?"... So dharma adharma jñāpaka, because in the past life this living entity practiced tamo-guṇa, no discrimination of eating... Tamo-guṇa means no discrimination. Eating... We have got four businesses in this life, so long we have got this material body: āhāra-nidrā-bhaya-maithunaṁ ca, eating, sleeping and sex and defense. These are primary business of the body.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB6147DallasJuly291975_6" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="680" link="Lecture on SB 6.1.47 -- Dallas, July 29, 1975" link_text="Lecture on SB 6.1.47 -- Dallas, July 29, 1975">
<div class="heading">Tamo-guṇa means shameless, tamo-guṇa. Rajo-guṇa means lusty desire. And sattva-guṇa means knowledge, to see things as they are.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 6.1.47 -- Dallas, July 29, 1975|Lecture on SB 6.1.47 -- Dallas, July 29, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So these are all due to different infection of the guṇa. Tamo-guṇa means shameless, tamo-guṇa. Rajo-guṇa means lusty desire. And sattva-guṇa means knowledge, to see things as they are. So just like here in the temple, we are cultivating sattva-guṇa, or more than that, above sattva-guṇa. Above sattva-guṇa. It is said in the śāstra that to live in the forest is sattva-guṇa. Sattva-guṇa, people have got tendency to live in a secluded place, solitary place, without any disturbance.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB6217VrndavanaSeptember201975_7" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="718" link="Lecture on SB 6.2.17 -- Vrndavana, September 20, 1975" link_text="Lecture on SB 6.2.17 -- Vrndavana, September 20, 1975">
<div class="heading">Therefore even one is infected with these lusty desires, kāma-lobhadayas ca ye, rajo-guṇa, tamo-guṇa... Rajo-guṇa, and tamo-guṇa means lusty desires and greediness. Kāma-lobha.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 6.2.17 -- Vrndavana, September 20, 1975|Lecture on SB 6.2.17 -- Vrndavana, September 20, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So this is the process of bhakti. Therefore even one is infected with these lusty desires, kāma-lobhadayas ca ye, rajo-guṇa, tamo-guṇa... Rajo-guṇa, and tamo-guṇa means lusty desires and greediness. Kāma-lobha. So, so long we are influenced by the two material modes of nature, rajo-guṇa and tamo-guṇa, then we will be pushed for fulfilling our lusty desires and greediness. And that will help us to become implicated in sinful activities. The people are becoming implicated in sinful activities only for this kāma-lobha. He is never satisfied, and his greediness increases and we create sinful life.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB798MayapurFebruary151976_9" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="800" link="Lecture on SB 7.9.8 -- Mayapur, February 15, 1976" link_text="Lecture on SB 7.9.8 -- Mayapur, February 15, 1976">
<div class="heading">So without sattva-guṇa, if you keep people in the rajo-guṇa, tamo-guṇa, then your, their future is lost. Rajo-guṇa, tamo-guṇa, means people will become more greedy and lusty, that's all. And greedy and lusty means cats and dogs, animal life. Animal life.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 7.9.8 -- Mayapur, February 15, 1976|Lecture on SB 7.9.8 -- Mayapur, February 15, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So without sattva-guṇa, if you keep people in the rajo-guṇa, tamo-guṇa, then your, their future is lost. Rajo-guṇa, tamo-guṇa, means people will become more greedy and lusty, that's all. And greedy and lusty means cats and dogs, animal life. Animal life. They're trying to eat—no discrimination of eating. So that is hog's life. The hog has no discrimination of eating. It can eat even stool. So the... If you eat, become like hog—no discrimination of eating, whatever you..., just like so many swamis, they say, "Oh, why there is restriction of eating? You can eat anything you like," so nature will give you: "All right, you want to eat anything you like?</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB7954VrndavanaApril91976_10" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="859" link="Lecture on SB 7.9.54 -- Vrndavana, April 9, 1976" link_text="Lecture on SB 7.9.54 -- Vrndavana, April 9, 1976">
<div class="heading">Tamo-guṇa means animal, and rajo-guṇa means the karmis, and sattva-guṇa means jñānīs. So if one is struggling in this life how to accumulate money, that means rajo-guṇa. Rajas-tamo-bhāvā kāma-lobhādayaś ca ye.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 7.9.54 -- Vrndavana, April 9, 1976|Lecture on SB 7.9.54 -- Vrndavana, April 9, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Everything finished. Now according to your karma, you have to accept the body of a dog. Nature's way. Karmaṇā daiva-netreṇa ([[Vanisource:SB 3.31.1|SB 3.31.1]]). "You have infected doggish mentality. Now you become a dog." This is nature's way. Kāraṇaṁ guṇa-sango 'sya ([[Vanisource:BG 13.22|BG 13.22]]). You have simply associated with the tamo-guṇa, rajo-guṇa, no sattva-guṇa, so you have to accept a body, rajas-tamo-guṇa. Tamo-guṇa means animal, and rajo-guṇa means the karmis, and sattva-guṇa means jñānīs. So if one is struggling in this life how to accumulate money, that means rajo-guṇa. Rajas-tamo-bhāvā kāma-lobhādayaś ca ye.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Nectar_of_Devotion_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="2" parent="Lectures" text="Nectar of Devotion Lectures"><h3>Nectar of Devotion Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="TheNectarofDevotionBombayJanuary21973_0" class="quote" parent="Nectar_of_Devotion_Lectures" book="Lec" index="13" link="The Nectar of Devotion -- Bombay, January 2, 1973" link_text="The Nectar of Devotion -- Bombay, January 2, 1973">
<div class="heading">They want to expand their kingdom, ruling over the people, taxing the people. These are the qualification of the rajo-guṇa. And tamo-guṇa means śūdra, ignorance and lazy.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:The Nectar of Devotion -- Bombay, January 2, 1973|The Nectar of Devotion -- Bombay, January 2, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">They're very powerful. They want to control. They are not afraid of fighting. These are kṣatriya qualifications. Rajo-guṇa. Creative power. They want to expand their kingdom, ruling over the people, taxing the people. These are the qualification of the rajo-guṇa. And tamo-guṇa means śūdra, ignorance and lazy. That is tamo-guṇa. These are the symptoms. They have no activity. They cannot become independent, because they are very lazy. Brāhmaṇa, kṣatriya, vaiśya, they have their independent life, but the śūdras, they are dependent. Therefore śūdra... Just like a dog. A dog, if he has no master, it is street dog. It has no value. It must be chained by a very big master. That is his life.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="section" sec_index="5" parent="compilation" text="Conversations and Morning Walks"><h2>Conversations and Morning Walks</h2>
</div>
<div id="1974_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="sub_section" sec_index="7" parent="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" text="1974 Conversations and Morning Walks"><h3>1974 Conversations and Morning Walks</h3>
</div>
<div id="MorningWalkApril181974Bombay_0" class="quote" parent="1974_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="66" link="Morning Walk -- April 18, 1974, Bombay" link_text="Morning Walk -- April 18, 1974, Bombay">
<div class="heading">When one becomes free from the rajo-guṇa and tamo-guṇa, the symptom is... Rajo-guṇa and tamo-guṇa means lust and greediness.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Morning Walk -- April 18, 1974, Bombay|Morning Walk -- April 18, 1974, Bombay]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: When one becomes free from the rajo-guṇa and tamo-guṇa, the symptom is... Rajo-guṇa and tamo-guṇa means lust and greediness. So when this rajo-guṇa and tamo-guṇa is absent, then the sattva-guṇa becomes prominent. Every guṇa is there. Tato rajas-tamo-bhavaḥ kama-lobhadayas ca ye, ceta etaiḥ... The consciousness does not become infected by the resultant action of tamo-guṇa and rajo-guṇa. Then the only sattva-guṇa remains. So when one is situated in sattva-guṇa, sthita-sattve prasidati, then he becomes jubilant, prasidati.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1975_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="sub_section" sec_index="8" parent="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" text="1975 Conversations and Morning Walks"><h3>1975 Conversations and Morning Walks</h3>
</div>
<div id="RoomConversationwithDevoteesAugust11975NewOrleans_0" class="quote" parent="1975_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="165" link="Room Conversation with Devotees -- August 1, 1975, New Orleans" link_text="Room Conversation with Devotees -- August 1, 1975, New Orleans">
<div class="heading">Tamo-guṇa means sleeping and laziness.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Room Conversation with Devotees -- August 1, 1975, New Orleans|Room Conversation with Devotees -- August 1, 1975, New Orleans]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: They have no anxiety for food, for clothing. Others should supply them. They haven't got to work. Sannyāsī is always preaching, going outside. In this way keep everyone fully engaged. Then it will be ideal. Otherwise people will criticize that we are simply eating and sleeping, escaping, so many, so many. And actually that is the position. Unless one is fully engaged, oh, that is not good. That is tamo-guṇa. Tamo-guṇa, and rajo-guṇa very active, and sattva-guṇa, intellectual activity. Both of them, active, only tamo-guṇa, not active. (indistinct) Tamo-guṇa means sleeping and laziness. These are the symptoms of tamo-guṇa. Every saintly man can avoid these two things—laziness and sleeping. Of course, as much you require, sleeping allowed, not more than... And keep everyone active, man or woman-all. Then it will be ideal society.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="MorningWalkAugust61975Detroit_1" class="quote" parent="1975_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="169" link="Morning Walk -- August 6, 1975, Detroit" link_text="Morning Walk -- August 6, 1975, Detroit">
<div class="heading">Tamo-guṇa means laziness and sleep.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Morning Walk -- August 6, 1975, Detroit|Morning Walk -- August 6, 1975, Detroit]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: That is yajña. To work for Kṛṣṇa means yajña. Yajñarthe karma: "For yajña, performing yajña, one has to work." To work for Kṛṣṇa means yajña. That is performance of yajña. (break) ...Communistic idea is borrowing this idea from... But because they are imperfect, they have made center, state. And because it is imperfect, it is not successful. They have made center the state. (break) Tamo-guṇa means laziness and sleep. The śūdras, they are in laziness and sleep. So if they have got something to eat, they will not work. Laziness.</p>
</div>
</div>
</div>

Sattva-guna means

2010-04-05T10:43:22Z

Partha-sarathi: Created page with '<div id="compilation"> <div id="facts"> {{terms|"sattva-guna means"}} {{notes|}} {{compiler|Partha-sarathi}} {{complete|ALL}} {{first|05Apr10}} {{last|05Apr10}} {{totals_by_secti…'

<div id="compilation">
<div id="facts">
{{terms|"sattva-guna means"}}
{{notes|}}
{{compiler|Partha-sarathi}}
{{complete|ALL}}
{{first|05Apr10}}
{{last|05Apr10}}
{{totals_by_section|BG=0|SB=0|CC=0|OB=0|Lec=18|Con=0|Let=0}}
{{total|18}}
{{toc right}}
[[Category:Meaning of Sanskrit Words]]
</div>
<div id="Lectures" class="section" sec_index="4" parent="compilation" text="Lectures"><h2>Lectures</h2>
</div>
<div id="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="0" parent="Lectures" text="Bhagavad-gita As It Is Lectures"><h3>Bhagavad-gita As It Is Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG140LondonJuly281973_0" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="24" link="Lecture on BG 1.40 -- London, July 28, 1973" link_text="Lecture on BG 1.40 -- London, July 28, 1973">
<div class="heading">This material platform means three modes of material nature. Sattva-guṇa, rajo-guṇa, tamo-guṇa. Here, even one is brāhmaṇa... Sattva-guṇa means the brahminical qualification.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 1.40 -- London, July 28, 1973|Lecture on BG 1.40 -- London, July 28, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">He's already in the Brahman platform. Brahman platform means sa guṇān samatītya etān. This material platform means three modes of material nature. Sattva-guṇa, rajo-guṇa, tamo-guṇa. Here, even one is brāhmaṇa... Sattva-guṇa means the brahminical qualification. He's also contaminated. He's conditioned by the material nature. And what to speak of śūdra and varṇa-saṅkara? Everyone is conditioned by the material nature. Daivī hy eṣā guṇamayī ([[Vanisource:BG 7.14|BG 7.14]]). Brāhmaṇa means to be situated, a first-class prisoner.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG93TorontoJune201976_1" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="305" link="Lecture on BG 9.3 -- Toronto, June 20, 1976" link_text="Lecture on BG 9.3 -- Toronto, June 20, 1976">
<div class="heading">And sattva-guṇa means enlightenment. If we cultivate the sattva-guṇa quality, just means, if we cultivate the brahminical qualification, that is the platform of sattva-guṇa.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 9.3 -- Toronto, June 20, 1976|Lecture on BG 9.3 -- Toronto, June 20, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So sattva-guṇa, rajo-guṇa, tamo-guṇa. So in our fallen condition, mostly the rajo-guṇa and tamo-guṇa is very prominent, in our fallen condition, in this material condition. So symptoms of rajo-guṇa and tamo-guṇa means material desires and greediness. And sattva-guṇa means enlightenment. If we cultivate the sattva-guṇa quality, just means, if we cultivate the brahminical qualification, that is the platform of sattva-guṇa. So that is described in the Bhagavad-gītā, satyaṁ śamo damas titikṣā ārjavaṁ jñānaṁ vijñānam āstikyaṁ brahma-karma svabhāva-jam ([[Vanisource:BG 18.42|BG 18.42]]).</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG1713HonoluluJuly41974_2" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="402" link="Lecture on BG 17.1-3 -- Honolulu, July 4, 1974" link_text="Lecture on BG 17.1-3 -- Honolulu, July 4, 1974">
<div class="heading">The sattva-guṇa means brāhmaṇa. Sattva-guṇa in brāhmaṇa, their symptoms are mentioned in the Bhagavad-gītā.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 17.1-3 -- Honolulu, July 4, 1974|Lecture on BG 17.1-3 -- Honolulu, July 4, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">What are the symptoms to know that one is situated in the sattva-guṇa or one is situated in the rajo-guṇa or one is situated in tamo-guṇa? By the symptoms. The symptoms are also mentioned. The sattva-guṇa means brāhmaṇa. Sattva-guṇa in brāhmaṇa, their symptoms are mentioned in the Bhagavad-gītā. Everything is there, characteristic. You have to test it. Just like in the chemistry there is analytical study, whether it is pure or not. So every chemical has got characteristics, Its color, its formation, its taste, so many things.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="1" parent="Lectures" text="Srimad-Bhagavatam Lectures"><h3>Srimad-Bhagavatam Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB128HyderabadApril221974_0" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="52" link="Lecture on SB 1.2.8 -- Hyderabad, April 22, 1974" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.2.8 -- Hyderabad, April 22, 1974">
<div class="heading">If you remain in sattva-guṇa... Sattva-guṇa means brahminical qualification.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.2.8 -- Hyderabad, April 22, 1974|Lecture on SB 1.2.8 -- Hyderabad, April 22, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">There are three guṇas. Sattva-guṇa, if you associate with sattva-guṇa, then ūrdhvaṁ gacchanti sattva-sthāḥ ([[Vanisource:BG 14.18|BG 14.18]]). If you remain in sattva-guṇa... Sattva-guṇa means brahminical qualification.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB1219VrndavanaOctober301972_1" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="81" link="Lecture on SB 1.2.19 -- Vrndavana, October 30, 1972" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.2.19 -- Vrndavana, October 30, 1972">
<div class="heading">Because sattva-guṇa means knowledge, rajo-guṇa means passion, and tamo-guṇa means ignorance. So this world is being carried on by these three guṇas.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.2.19 -- Vrndavana, October 30, 1972|Lecture on SB 1.2.19 -- Vrndavana, October 30, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Because sattva-guṇa means knowledge, rajo-guṇa means passion, and tamo-guṇa means ignorance. So this world is being carried on by these three guṇas. Those who are accepting the tamo-guṇa, they are kāma, lusty, too much lusty. And those who are in rajo-guṇa, they're too much greedy. And those are in the sattva-guṇa, they know things. That is brahminical qualification. Veda jānāti iti brāhmaṇaḥ. Veda-pāṭhād bhaved vipro brahma jānāti iti brāhmaṇaḥ.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB1528VrndavanaAugust91974_2" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="148" link="Lecture on SB 1.5.28 -- Vrndavana, August 9, 1974" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.5.28 -- Vrndavana, August 9, 1974">
<div class="heading">Rajo-guṇa, tamo-guṇa is certainly entanglement, but even rajo-guṇa, even one is situated in the sattva-guṇa... Sattva-guṇa means perfect brāhmaṇa.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.5.28 -- Vrndavana, August 9, 1974|Lecture on SB 1.5.28 -- Vrndavana, August 9, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">The lowest is the tamo-guṇa, and via media is the rajo-guṇa, and the topmost, goodness, is sattva-guṇa. So even in sattva-guṇa, that is also entanglement. Rajo-guṇa, tamo-guṇa is certainly entanglement, but even rajo-guṇa, even one is situated in the sattva-guṇa... Sattva-guṇa means perfect brāhmaṇa. Satyaṁ śamo damas titikṣā ārjavam, jñānaṁ vijñānam āstikyaṁ brahma-karma svabhāva-jam ([[Vanisource:BG 18.42|BG 18.42]]). Even if you become a perfect brāhmaṇa, brāhmaṇa, with qualities, still, it is bondage.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB1528VrndavanaAugust91974_3" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="148" link="Lecture on SB 1.5.28 -- Vrndavana, August 9, 1974" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.5.28 -- Vrndavana, August 9, 1974">
<div class="heading">So sattva-guṇa means to remain satisfied whatever is obtained by, from God, by His free will. That's all. They are not after economic development.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.5.28 -- Vrndavana, August 9, 1974|Lecture on SB 1.5.28 -- Vrndavana, August 9, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">When you are in, in the platform of satisfaction, sattva-guṇa... Just like the brahminical qualification. They are satisfied with anything. A brāhmaṇa is not supposed to improve his economic condition. He's not interested. He's simply satisfied: "By the grace of God, whatever I have got, that is sufficient." God is supplying everyone, even birds and beasts and cats and dogs. Eko yo bahūnāṁ yo vidadhāti kāmān. He is giving food to everyone. So sattva-guṇa means to remain satisfied whatever is obtained by, from God, by His free will. That's all. They are not after economic development.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB1818NewYorkApril101973_4" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="197" link="Lecture on SB 1.8.18 -- New York, April 10, 1973" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.8.18 -- New York, April 10, 1973">
<div class="heading">These are the symptoms. As soon as you find a person is very greedy and lusty, he is to be understood under the control of the lower-grade qualities of this material world. And sattva-guṇa means prakāśa, illumination. When one is situated in the goodness, that is brahminical qualification.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.8.18 -- New York, April 10, 1973|Lecture on SB 1.8.18 -- New York, April 10, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">These are the symptoms. As soon as you find a person is very greedy and lusty, he is to be understood under the control of the lower-grade qualities of this material world. And sattva-guṇa means prakāśa, illumination. When one is situated in the goodness, that is brahminical qualification. Satyaṁ śamo damas titikṣā ([[Vanisource:BG 18.42|BG 18.42]]). He is truthful, he is controlling the mind, controlling the senses, śama, dama; titikṣā, he is tolerant; titikṣā, ārjavam, he is simple, simplicity. Śamo damas titikṣā śuci, he is clean; jñānam, he knows things what it is; vijñānam, he can apply the knowledge in practical life, jñānaṁ vijñānam āstikyam. Āstikyam means to have firm faith in God. He knows that God is there.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB3251BombayNovember11974_5" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="423" link="Lecture on SB 3.25.1 -- Bombay, November 1, 1974" link_text="Lecture on SB 3.25.1 -- Bombay, November 1, 1974">
<div class="heading">Sattva-guṇa means the brahminical qualification. Satyaṁ śamo damas titikṣā ārjavam, jñānaṁ vijñānam āstikyaṁ brahma-karma svabhāva-jam (BG 18.42).
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 3.25.1 -- Bombay, November 1, 1974|Lecture on SB 3.25.1 -- Bombay, November 1, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So Absolute Truth is Bhagavān Himself, Kṛṣṇa Himself. So we cannot understand the Absolute Truth or the Supreme Person by mental speculation. That is not possible, especially when we are under the influence of the three modes of material nature because material nature is divided into three status: sattva-guṇa, rajo-guṇa, and tamo-guṇa. Those who are in the sattva-guṇa, they are fit for understanding the Absolute Truth. Sattva-guṇa means the brahminical qualification. Satyaṁ śamo damas titikṣā ārjavam, jñānaṁ vijñānam āstikyaṁ brahma-karma svabhāva-jam ([[Vanisource:BG 18.42|BG 18.42]]).</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB32516BombayNovember161974_6" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="438" link="Lecture on SB 3.25.16 -- Bombay, November 16, 1974" link_text="Lecture on SB 3.25.16 -- Bombay, November 16, 1974">
<div class="heading">Sattva-guṇa means execute... The symbolic presentation is perfect brāhmaṇa.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 3.25.16 -- Bombay, November 16, 1974|Lecture on SB 3.25.16 -- Bombay, November 16, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Therefore in the previous verse it is said, guṇeṣu saktaṁ bandhāya. So long you'll be attached with these guṇeṣu, even you be attached to the sattva-guṇa, that is also bandhāya. Suppose... Sattva-guṇa means execute... The symbolic presentation is perfect brāhmaṇa. So even if we are very perfect brāhmaṇa, so I think that "I am so..., such a learned person. I understand the Vedic principles. So I..." The same, ahaṁ mameti ([[Vanisource:SB 5.5.8|SB 5.5.8]]). The same principle, ahaṁ mameti ([[Vanisource:SB 5.5.8|SB 5.5.8]]).</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB556VrndavanaOctober281976_7" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="541" link="Lecture on SB 5.5.6 -- Vrndavana, October 28, 1976" link_text="Lecture on SB 5.5.6 -- Vrndavana, October 28, 1976">
<div class="heading">Tamo-guṇa is very densely covering, and rajo-guṇa little open, and sattva-guṇa means prakāśa, there is illumination, brahminical qualifications.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 5.5.6 -- Vrndavana, October 28, 1976|Lecture on SB 5.5.6 -- Vrndavana, October 28, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">There are two kinds of strong avidyā, ignorance, unawareness. Sattva-guṇa, rajo-guṇa, tamo-guṇa. Rajo-guṇa and tamo-guṇa is covering. Tamo-guṇa is very densely covering, and rajo-guṇa little open, and sattva-guṇa means prakāśa, there is illumination, brahminical qualifications. When one is in the sattva-guṇa then he can understand that "I am not this body. I am different from this body." For them, those who are in the sattva-guṇa, for them it is easier.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB6147DallasJuly291975_8" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="680" link="Lecture on SB 6.1.47 -- Dallas, July 29, 1975" link_text="Lecture on SB 6.1.47 -- Dallas, July 29, 1975">
<div class="heading">So these are all due to different infection of the guṇa. Tamo-guṇa means shameless, tamo-guṇa. Rajo-guṇa means lusty desire. And sattva-guṇa means knowledge, to see things as they are.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 6.1.47 -- Dallas, July 29, 1975|Lecture on SB 6.1.47 -- Dallas, July 29, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So these are all due to different infection of the guṇa. Tamo-guṇa means shameless, tamo-guṇa. Rajo-guṇa means lusty desire. And sattva-guṇa means knowledge, to see things as they are. So just like here in the temple, we are cultivating sattva-guṇa, or more than that, above sattva-guṇa. Above sattva-guṇa. It is said in the śāstra that to live in the forest is sattva-guṇa. Sattva-guṇa, people have got tendency to live in a secluded place, solitary place, without any disturbance.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB6149NewOrleansFarmAugust11975_9" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="684" link="Lecture on SB 6.1.49 -- New Orleans Farm, August 1, 1975" link_text="Lecture on SB 6.1.49 -- New Orleans Farm, August 1, 1975">
<div class="heading">Sattva-guṇa means everything is clear, prakāśa.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 6.1.49 -- New Orleans Farm, August 1, 1975|Lecture on SB 6.1.49 -- New Orleans Farm, August 1, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">O ajñaḥ. Ajñaḥ means one who has no knowledge. And who has no knowledge? Now, tamasā. Those who are in the modes of ignorance. There are three kinds of material nature, modes: sattva, raja, tamas. Sattva-guṇa means everything is clear, prakāśa. Just like now the sky is covered with cloud; the sunshine is not clear. But above the cloud there is sunshine, everything clear.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB6167VrndavanaSeptember31975_10" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="699" link="Lecture on SB 6.1.67 -- Vrndavana, September 3, 1975" link_text="Lecture on SB 6.1.67 -- Vrndavana, September 3, 1975">
<div class="heading">Ajas-tamaḥ, these are the dirty qualities, and sattva-guṇa is pure quality, and you have to go above sattva-guṇa. Then your life is perfect. Even if you rise, elevate yourself to sattva-guṇa, means a pure brahminical stage—śama dama sataṁ śaucaṁ titikṣa ārjavaṁ, jñānaṁ vijñānam āstikyaṁ brahma-karma svabhāva-jam (BG 18.42)—still, you have to go further, śuddha-sattva.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 6.1.67 -- Vrndavana, September 3, 1975|Lecture on SB 6.1.67 -- Vrndavana, September 3, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Dirty things means greediness and lusty desires. These are dirty. Tato rajas-tamo-bhāvāḥ kāma-lobhādayaś ca ye ([[Vanisource:SB 1.2.19|SB 1.2.19]]). Rajas-tamaḥ, these are the dirty qualities, and sattva-guṇa is pure quality, and you have to go above sattva-guṇa. Then your life is perfect. Even if you rise, elevate yourself to sattva-guṇa, means a pure brahminical stage—śama dama sataṁ śaucaṁ titikṣa ārjavaṁ, jñānaṁ vijñānam āstikyaṁ brahma-karma svabhāva-jam ([[Vanisource:BG 18.42|BG 18.42]])—still, you have to go further, śuddha-sattva. Sattvaṁ viśuddhaṁ vasudeva-śabditam. Then you can understand what is Kṛṣṇa.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB798CalcuttaMarch51972_11" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="799" link="Lecture on SB 7.9.8 -- Calcutta, March 5, 1972" link_text="Lecture on SB 7.9.8 -- Calcutta, March 5, 1972">
<div class="heading">Sattva-guṇa means the quality of brāhmaṇa. Now the brahminical qualification is now fallen. They are not so very strict following the brahminical principles.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 7.9.8 -- Calcutta, March 5, 1972|Lecture on SB 7.9.8 -- Calcutta, March 5, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">A guṇān samatītyaitan ([[Vanisource:BG 14.26|BG 14.26]]). Etan means all these three qualities, tama-guṇa, raja-guṇa, and sattva-guṇa. Sattva-guṇa is good so far material consideration is there, but that is not perfect. Because from sattva-guṇa, if you are not very strict... Just like we have seen. Sattva-guṇa means the quality of brāhmaṇa. Now the brahminical qualification is now fallen. They are not so very strict following the brahminical principles. So there is chance of falling down. But if you keep yourself on the transcendental platform, aprakṛti, that is, beyond the material world, then there is no falldown.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB798MayapurFebruary281977_12" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="801" link="Lecture on SB 7.9.8 -- Mayapur, February 28, 1977" link_text="Lecture on SB 7.9.8 -- Mayapur, February 28, 1977">
<div class="heading">If you are always situated on the sattva-guṇa, then everything is clear to be done. Sattva-guṇa means prakāṣa. Everything is clear, full knowledge.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 7.9.8 -- Mayapur, February 28, 1977|Lecture on SB 7.9.8 -- Mayapur, February 28, 1977]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">They are situated on the sattva-guṇa by devotional service. Rajas, tamo-guṇa cannot touch them. Naṣṭa-prāyeṣv abhadreṣu nityaṁ bhāgavata-sevayā ([[Vanisource:SB 1.2.18|SB 1.2.18]]). The bhadra and abhadra, good and bad... So the rajo-guṇa and tamo-guṇa is bad, and sattva-guṇa is good. If we are situated, as it is said, sattvaikatāna-gatayo... If you are always situated on the sattva-guṇa, then everything is clear to be done. Sattva-guṇa means prakāṣa. Everything is clear, full knowledge. And rajo-guṇa is not clear. The example is given: just like the wood. There is fire, but the first symptom of fire, wood, you'll find smoke. When you set fire in the wood, first of all smoke comes. So smoke... First of all wood, then smoke, then fire. And from fire, when you engage the fire for fire sacrifice, that is the ultimate. Everything coming from the same source, from earth...</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB7954VrndavanaApril91976_13" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="859" link="Lecture on SB 7.9.54 -- Vrndavana, April 9, 1976" link_text="Lecture on SB 7.9.54 -- Vrndavana, April 9, 1976">
<div class="heading">Tamo-guṇa means animal, and rajo-guṇa means the karmis, and sattva-guṇa means jñānīs. So if one is struggling in this life how to accumulate money, that means rajo-guṇa. Rajas-tamo-bhāvā kāma-lobhādayaś ca ye.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 7.9.54 -- Vrndavana, April 9, 1976|Lecture on SB 7.9.54 -- Vrndavana, April 9, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">This is nature's way. Kāraṇaṁ guṇa-sango 'sya ([[Vanisource:BG 13.22|BG 13.22]]). You have simply associated with the tamo-guṇa, rajo-guṇa, no sattva-guṇa, so you have to accept a body, rajas-tamo-guṇa. Tamo-guṇa means animal, and rajo-guṇa means the karmis, and sattva-guṇa means jñānīs. So if one is struggling in this life how to accumulate money, that means rajo-guṇa. Rajas-tamo-bhāvā kāma-lobhādayaś ca ye.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Nectar_of_Devotion_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="2" parent="Lectures" text="Nectar of Devotion Lectures"><h3>Nectar of Devotion Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="TheNectarofDevotionBombayJanuary21973_0" class="quote" parent="Nectar_of_Devotion_Lectures" book="Lec" index="13" link="The Nectar of Devotion -- Bombay, January 2, 1973" link_text="The Nectar of Devotion -- Bombay, January 2, 1973">
<div class="heading">Sattva-guṇa means brahminical qualification. Satya śama dama titikṣa ārjava jñānaṁ vijñānam āstikyaṁ brahma-karma svabhāva-jam (BG 18.42).
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:The Nectar of Devotion -- Bombay, January 2, 1973|The Nectar of Devotion -- Bombay, January 2, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">But even if we remain in the sattva-guṇa, that is also not transcendental platform. Sattva-guṇa means brahminical qualification. Satya śama dama titikṣa ārjava jñānaṁ vijñānam āstikyaṁ brahma-karma svabhāva-jam ([[Vanisource:BG 18.42|BG 18.42]]). These, these are the symptoms of sattva-guṇa. But rajo-guṇa-tejo īśvara bhāvaś ca yuddhe cāpy apalāyanam. Just like kṣatriyas: They're very powerful. They want to control. They are not afraid of fighting. These are kṣatriya qualifications. Rajo-guṇa. Creative power. They want to expand their kingdom, ruling over the people, taxing the people. These are the qualification of the rajo-guṇa.</p>
</div>
</div>
</div>

Kirtanam means

2010-04-05T10:26:09Z

Partha-sarathi: Created page with '<div id="compilation"> <div id="facts"> {{terms|"kirtanam means"}} {{notes|}} {{compiler|Partha-sarathi}} {{complete|ALL}} {{first|05Apr10}} {{last|05Apr10}} {{totals_by_section|…'

<div id="compilation">
<div id="facts">
{{terms|"kirtanam means"}}
{{notes|}}
{{compiler|Partha-sarathi}}
{{complete|ALL}}
{{first|05Apr10}}
{{last|05Apr10}}
{{totals_by_section|BG=0|SB=0|CC=0|OB=0|Lec=14|Con=2|Let=0}}
{{total|16}}
{{toc right}}
[[Category:Process of Krsna Consciousness]]
[[Category:Meaning of Sanskrit Words]]
</div>
<div id="Lectures" class="section" sec_index="4" parent="compilation" text="Lectures"><h2>Lectures</h2>
</div>
<div id="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="0" parent="Lectures" text="Bhagavad-gita As It Is Lectures"><h3>Bhagavad-gita As It Is Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG434NewYorkAugust141966_0" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="195" link="Lecture on BG 4.34 -- New York, August 14, 1966" link_text="Lecture on BG 4.34 -- New York, August 14, 1966">
<div class="heading">Kīrtanam means to chant about the glories, about the holy name, about the form, about the quality. Then this is association with Kṛṣṇa because Kṛṣṇa, or God, is absolute. He is not different from His name, from His quality, from His form, from His pastimes.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 4.34 -- New York, August 14, 1966|Lecture on BG 4.34 -- New York, August 14, 1966]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Then kīrtanam. Kīrtanam means to chant about the glories, about the holy name, about the form, about the quality. Then this is association with Kṛṣṇa because Kṛṣṇa, or God, is absolute. He is not different from His name, from His quality, from His form, from His pastimes. He is not different. So hearing and chanting of the qualities or form or name of the Supreme, of the Absolute, means our association with God. Association. Direct association, in transcendental quality. So as we go on making association, then Kṛṣṇa helps us to understand Him.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG71LosAngelesMarch121970_1" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="230" link="Lecture on BG 7.1 -- Los Angeles, March 12, 1970" link_text="Lecture on BG 7.1 -- Los Angeles, March 12, 1970">
<div class="heading">One who has heard nicely, he will try to become a kīrtanīya, or preacher. That is natural. That is natural. Śravaṇaṁ kīrtanam. And śravaṇam means hearing, and kīrtanam means preaching or chanting. Then śravaṇaṁ kīrtanam. "Oh, I... People are hearing so many things daily.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 7.1 -- Los Angeles, March 12, 1970|Lecture on BG 7.1 -- Los Angeles, March 12, 1970]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">This yoga practice begins simply by hearing. You have got these ears. You simply just lend your ears and you become yogi. And as soon as you become experienced in hearing, you become a preacher—kīrtanam. Immediately. One who has heard nicely, he will try to become a kīrtanīya, or preacher. That is natural. That is natural. Śravaṇaṁ kīrtanam. And śravaṇam means hearing, and kīrtanam means preaching or chanting. Then śravaṇaṁ kīrtanam. "Oh, I... People are hearing so many things daily. They are going to the college, schools, and meetings and assembly and association. They are all hearing, śravaṇam. They are practicing yoga?" No. Śravaṇaṁ kīrtanaṁ viṣṇoḥ: you have to hear and preach and chant of Kṛṣṇa, nothing more. Not that simply by hearing any nonsense things you become yogi.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG915NewYorkDecember11966_2" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="316" link="Lecture on BG 9.15 -- New York, December 1, 1966" link_text="Lecture on BG 9.15 -- New York, December 1, 1966">
<div class="heading">Kīrtanam means chanting. Kīrtanam actually means describing. You can describe with music. You can describe with words. You can describe in speeches.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 9.15 -- New York, December 1, 1966|Lecture on BG 9.15 -- New York, December 1, 1966]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Now Lord Kṛṣṇa, after describing about the mahātmās, or the great souls, who worship the Supreme Lord by this process of kīrtana... Satataṁ kīrtayanto mām ([[Vanisource:BG 9.14|BG 9.14]]). Śravaṇaṁ kīrtanam ([[Vanisource:SB 7.5.23|SB 7.5.23]]). The process of devotion is nine different types. Śravaṇam. Śravaṇam means hearing. Kīrtanam. Kīrtanam means chanting. Kīrtanam actually means describing. You can describe with music. You can describe with words. You can describe in speeches.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="1" parent="Lectures" text="Srimad-Bhagavatam Lectures"><h3>Srimad-Bhagavatam Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB112LondonAugust151971_0" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="6" link="Lecture on SB 1.1.2 -- London, August 15, 1971" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.1.2 -- London, August 15, 1971">
<div class="heading">If you have heard nicely about the Kṛṣṇa consciousness movement, then you must... Next stage is kīrtanam. Kīrtanam means preaching, chanting. Kīrtanam. Śravaṇaṁ kīrtanaṁ viṣṇoḥ (SB 7.5.23).
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.1.2 -- London, August 15, 1971|Lecture on SB 1.1.2 -- London, August 15, 1971]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Simply one has to be given the chance. Because this, I mean to say, small girl has got the chance to live amongst Kṛṣṇa conscious people from the very birth, she's developing that "Oh, I shall also preach. I shall also preach." Developing. Similarly, advancement of Kṛṣṇa consciousness means you will be, I mean to say, pushed how to preach, how to preach. That is one of the signs. Śravaṇaṁ kīrtanam. If you have heard nicely about the Kṛṣṇa consciousness movement, then you must... Next stage is kīrtanam. Kīrtanam means preaching, chanting. Kīrtanam. Śravaṇaṁ kīrtanaṁ viṣṇoḥ ([[Vanisource:SB 7.5.23|SB 7.5.23]]).</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB123LondonAugust241971_1" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="21" link="Lecture on SB 1.2.3 -- London, August 24, 1971" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.2.3 -- London, August 24, 1971">
<div class="heading">Sravaṇam means to hear, to receive the knowledge. And next, kīrtanam, means to distribute, to describe the knowledge. Yaḥ svānubhāvam akhila-śruti-sāram ekam adhyātma-dīpam (SB 1.2.3).
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.2.3 -- London, August 24, 1971|Lecture on SB 1.2.3 -- London, August 24, 1971]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So what Śukadeva Gosvāmī did, that after assimilating the whole Vedic literature, he distributed it. That is another instinct. If you really have learned the essence of Vedic knowledge, automatically you'll be inclined to preach it. Śravaṇaṁ kīrtanam. Śravaṇam means to hear, to receive the knowledge. And next, kīrtanam, means to distribute, to describe the knowledge. Yaḥ svānubhāvam akhila-śruti-sāram ekam adhyātma-dīpam ([[Vanisource:SB 1.2.3|SB 1.2.3]]). Dīpam means lamp. So this Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam is just like the lamp in the darkness to see Kṛṣṇa, or God. Adhyātma-dīpam.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB215LosAngelesAugust131972_2" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="366" link="Lecture on SB 2.1.5 -- Los Angeles, August 13, 1972" link_text="Lecture on SB 2.1.5 -- Los Angeles, August 13, 1972">
<div class="heading">Kīrtanam means chanting. Smaraṇam, memorizing. Vandanam, prayers, offering prayers. So there are different methods.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 2.1.5 -- Los Angeles, August 13, 1972|Lecture on SB 2.1.5 -- Los Angeles, August 13, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Śravaṇam means hearing. Kīrtanam means chanting. Smaraṇam, memorizing. Vandanam, prayers, offering prayers. So there are different methods. Whichever method is possible by you, you can adopt and you can become perfect. Not that you have to execute all the methods. Even one method, if you perfectly do, you'll become perfect. You'll be transferred to the spiritual kingdom. So we do not say that "This religion is good," "This religion is bad." In every religion there is some form of worship out of these nine. Just like in Christian church there is offering of prayers. We also offer prayer, and that is also recommended in the list: vandanam. Vandanam means offering prayers. Muslim also, they offer prayers in the mosque.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB231LosAngelesMay191972_3" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="374" link="Lecture on SB 2.3.1 -- Los Angeles, May 19, 1972" link_text="Lecture on SB 2.3.1 -- Los Angeles, May 19, 1972">
<div class="heading">Kīrtanam means chanting about Lord Viṣṇu. Not for others. "Now I am hearing and chanting about Nixon."
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 2.3.1 -- Los Angeles, May 19, 1972|Lecture on SB 2.3.1 -- Los Angeles, May 19, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So this process of hearing from Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam, Bhagavad-gītā, must be continued. That is our life. Śravaṇaṁ kīrtanaṁ viṣṇoḥ ([[Vanisource:SB 7.5.23|SB 7.5.23]]). Śravaṇam means hearing. Kīrtanam means chanting about Lord Viṣṇu. Not for others. "Now I am hearing and chanting about Nixon." (chuckles) That will not help. Because everyone is busy in newspaper, "What Nixon said, what he is doing..." Everywhere. The politicians, they have made the minds of general people, general public, that they're very much interested what the politician says. Every day he says that he's simply speaking all nonsense; still, he's interested. Punaḥ punaś carvita-carvaṇānām ([[Vanisource:SB 7.5.30|SB 7.5.30]]). They are called, "chewing the chewed again and again."</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB32819NairobiOctober291975_4" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="507" link="Lecture on SB 3.28.19 -- Nairobi, October 29, 1975" link_text="Lecture on SB 3.28.19 -- Nairobi, October 29, 1975">
<div class="heading">Śravaṇaṁ kīrtanam means of the, by the name of Viṣṇu. The Māyāvādīs, they have invented. In Calcutta, in Bengal, they have invented Kali-kīrtana, Kali-kīrtana.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 3.28.19 -- Nairobi, October 29, 1975|Lecture on SB 3.28.19 -- Nairobi, October 29, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Kṛṣṇa also said... Somebody questioned me, that "Where is chanting is recommended in the Bhagavad-gītā?" That is there: satataṁ kīrtayanto māṁ yatantaś ca dṛḍha-vratāḥ ([[Vanisource:BG 9.14|BG 9.14]]). And they say, "Where is chanting in the word?" Here is chanting. Mām. Satataṁ kīrtayanto mām ([[Vanisource:BG 9.14|BG 9.14]]). Mām-Kṛṣṇa-kīrtana, not this kīrtana, that kīrtana. They have imitated. No. Śravaṇaṁ kīrtanaṁ viṣṇoḥ ([[Vanisource:SB 7.5.23|SB 7.5.23]]). Śravaṇaṁ kīrtanam means of the, by the name of Viṣṇu. The Māyāvādīs, they have invented. In Calcutta, in Bengal, they have invented Kali-kīrtana, Kali-kīrtana.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB6115NelloreJanuary81976_5" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="615" link="Lecture on SB 6.1.15 -- Nellore, January 8, 1976" link_text="Lecture on SB 6.1.15 -- Nellore, January 8, 1976">
<div class="heading">Then hearing, if your hearing is perfect, then kīrtanam, means describing or preaching.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 6.1.15 -- Nellore, January 8, 1976|Lecture on SB 6.1.15 -- Nellore, January 8, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Bhaktyā means "by devotional service." So bhaktyā, there are nine different processes. (break) ...and the same, but according to our capacity they are divided into nine processes. So it begins with śravaṇaṁ kīrtanaṁ viṣṇoḥ smaraṇaṁ pāda-sevanam arcanaṁ vandanaṁ dāsyaṁ sakhyam ātma... ([[Vanisource:SB 7.5.23|SB 7.5.23]]). Beginning with śravaṇam, hearing. (break) ...nine processes are hearing, chanting, then worshiping, serving, offering everything. In this way there are nine different ways. The beginning is hearing. Hearing, just you all ladies, gentlemen, you have come here to hear. Then hearing, if your hearing is perfect, then kīrtanam, means describing or preaching.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB752230LondonSeptember81971_6" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="728" link="Lecture on SB 7.5.22-30 -- London, September 8, 1971" link_text="Lecture on SB 7.5.22-30 -- London, September 8, 1971">
<div class="heading">Reading is also smaraṇam. That śravaṇam, kīrtanam, smaraṇam. It is clear? Śravaṇam means hearing, kīrtanam means chanting, and smaraṇam.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 7.5.22-30 -- London, September 8, 1971|Lecture on SB 7.5.22-30 -- London, September 8, 1971]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Reading is also smaraṇam. That śravaṇam, kīrtanam, smaraṇam. It is clear? Śravaṇam means hearing, kīrtanam means chanting, and smaraṇam. When you read, you remember God's activities, Kṛṣṇa's activities, His devotee's activities. Therefore it is smaraṇam. This is also one of the prescribed methods. But if anyone cannot read even... Suppose if he is not educated, illiterate. Does it mean that he will not get Kṛṣṇa consciousness? He will get, simply by hearing. The process is so perfect and nice, there is no need of education even.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB7943VisakhapatnamFebruary221972_7" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="849" link="Lecture on SB 7.9.43 -- Visakhapatnam, February 22, 1972" link_text="Lecture on SB 7.9.43 -- Visakhapatnam, February 22, 1972">
<div class="heading">Kīrtanam means to describe or to sing the glorious activities of the Lord, that is called kīrtanam. Kīrtanam does not mean always that we have to chant or sing with musical instrument.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 7.9.43 -- Visakhapatnam, February 22, 1972|Lecture on SB 7.9.43 -- Visakhapatnam, February 22, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So we are passing through, but we are not aware how to avoid it, how to become free from this life of anxiety. That is being described by Prahlāda Mahārāja. He says that "For me, my Lord, I am not at all anxious. I am completely free from all these calamities." Just see. He was a boy of five years old only, but he is confident that he is not subjected to the calamities. Duratyaya-vaitaraṇyāḥ. Why? Tvad-vīrya-gāyana-mahāmṛta-magna-cittaḥ ([[Vanisource:SB 7.9.43|SB 7.9.43]]), "Because I have learned to fulfill my heart by glorifying Your wonderful activities." Kīrtanam. Kīrtanam means to describe or to sing the glorious activities of the Lord, that is called kīrtanam. Kīrtanam does not mean always that we have to chant or sing with musical instrument.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Initiation_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="8" parent="Lectures" text="Initiation Lectures"><h3>Initiation Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="InitiationLectureCaracasFebruary221975_0" class="quote" parent="Initiation_Lectures" book="Lec" index="56" link="Initiation Lecture -- Caracas, February 22, 1975" link_text="Initiation Lecture -- Caracas, February 22, 1975">
<div class="heading">Kīrtanam means glorifying the activities of God. Then there are other. These two items are very important, and there are other items also. Smaraṇam-smaraṇam means meditation.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Initiation Lecture -- Caracas, February 22, 1975|Initiation Lecture -- Caracas, February 22, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">This means that first of all we have to hear about God from authorized persons. Then kīrtanam. Kīrtanam means glorifying the activities of God. Then there are other. These two items are very important, and there are other items also. Smaraṇam-smaraṇam means meditation. Vandanam means offering prayer. So smaraṇaṁ vandanaṁ dāsyam arcanam. Arcanam, Deity worship. There are other items also. In this way there are nine items. So if one is interested to understand God, then he must take all these items or some of them or at least one of them.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="General_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="11" parent="Lectures" text="General Lectures"><h3>General Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonMahamantraNewYorkSeptember81966_0" class="quote" parent="General_Lectures" book="Lec" index="2" link="Lecture on Maha-mantra -- New York, September 8, 1966" link_text="Lecture on Maha-mantra -- New York, September 8, 1966">
<div class="heading">These are different, nine processes. Śravaṇaṁ kīrtanam. Śravaṇam means hearing, and kīrtanam means chanting, chanting.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on Maha-mantra -- New York, September 8, 1966|Lecture on Maha-mantra -- New York, September 8, 1966]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">These are different, nine processes. Śravaṇaṁ kīrtanam. Śravaṇam means hearing, and kīrtanam means chanting, chanting. So by this process... Just like I chant and you hear, and you chant and I hear. Parasparam. Bodhayantaḥ parasparam. This is the factual activities of devotion in devotional society. This bodhayantaḥ parasparam: I chant, you hear, and you chant, I hear. So by this process, the transcendental name, the sound incarnation of the Supreme Lord, becomes manifest, manifest so that we can realize God simply by chanting and hearing. Simply by chanting and hearing that will be realized.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Purports_to_Songs" class="sub_section" sec_index="14" parent="Lectures" text="Purports to Songs"><h3>Purports to Songs</h3>
</div>
<div id="PurporttoParamaKorunaAtlantaFebruary281975_0" class="quote" parent="Purports_to_Songs" book="Lec" index="29" link="Purport to Parama Koruna -- Atlanta, February 28, 1975" link_text="Purport to Parama Koruna -- Atlanta, February 28, 1975">
<div class="heading">Śravaṇam means hearing, kīrtanam means glorifying. Of whom? About Viṣṇu, not for anything else. So Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu approved this point.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Purport to Parama Koruna -- Atlanta, February 28, 1975|Purport to Parama Koruna -- Atlanta, February 28, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Rocess, Vedic process. Therefore it is called śruti. Śravaṇam. Śravaṇaṁ kīrtanaṁ viṣṇoḥ ([[Vanisource:SB 7.5.23|SB 7.5.23]]). Śravaṇam means hearing, kīrtanam means glorifying. Of whom? About Viṣṇu, not for anything else. So Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu approved this point. When He was talking with Śrī Rāmānanda Rāya, Rāmānanda Rāya suggested various methods of self-realization. So Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu did not reject them. He said, "Yes, it is also nice, but you go farther above.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="section" sec_index="5" parent="compilation" text="Conversations and Morning Walks"><h2>Conversations and Morning Walks</h2>
</div>
<div id="1969_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="sub_section" sec_index="2" parent="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" text="1969 Conversations and Morning Walks"><h3>1969 Conversations and Morning Walks</h3>
</div>
<div id="RoomConversationMay101969ColumbusOhio_0" class="quote" parent="1969_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="12" link="Room Conversation -- May 10, 1969, Columbus, Ohio" link_text="Room Conversation -- May 10, 1969, Columbus, Ohio">
<div class="heading">Just like Arjuna heard from Kṛṣṇa. Come on. (People entering) (Break) ...because I was serious for hearing, and therefore now I am serious about kīrtanaṁ, means speaking, or preaching. Do you follow what I say?
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Room Conversation -- May 10, 1969, Columbus, Ohio|Room Conversation -- May 10, 1969, Columbus, Ohio]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: Everyone has gone, all others except a few selected godbrothers. So he marked it that "This boy is interested to hear me." So hearing is very important. Hearing. Just like Arjuna heard from Kṛṣṇa. Come on. (People entering) (Break) ...because I was serious for hearing, and therefore now I am serious about kīrtanaṁ, means speaking, or preaching. Do you follow what I say? Yes. So one who is serious about hearing, he can become a future nice preacher. Śravaṇaṁ kīrtanaṁ. Next stage is developed. That is development. If one has actually heard nicely, then he will speak nicely.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1974_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="sub_section" sec_index="7" parent="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" text="1974 Conversations and Morning Walks"><h3>1974 Conversations and Morning Walks</h3>
</div>
<div id="RoomConversationwithProfessorDurckheimGermanSpiritualWriterJune191974Germany_0" class="quote" parent="1974_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="123" link="Room Conversation with Professor Durckheim German Spiritual Writer -- June 19, 1974, Germany" link_text="Room Conversation with Professor Durckheim German Spiritual Writer -- June 19, 1974, Germany">
<div class="heading">And when the process goes on hearing and chanting or describing, kīrtanam means describing. Just like our, this whole society is hearing from these books and they're going out to describe.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Room Conversation with Professor Durckheim German Spiritual Writer -- June 19, 1974, Germany|Room Conversation with Professor Durckheim German Spiritual Writer -- June 19, 1974, Germany]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: Yes. This is the bhakti-mārga, means, the first thing is śravaṇam, hearing. Just like these books are being written to give chance people to hear. That is first business. If we don't hear about God we simply imagine something. No. We must hear about God. We are publishing eighty books like this, simply to hear about God. Then when you hear perfectly then you can describe to others. That is called kīrtanam. Śravaṇam, kīrtanam. And when the process goes on hearing and chanting or describing, kīrtanam means describing. Just like our, this whole society is hearing from these books and they're going out to describe. This is called kīrtana. Then by these two process, hearing and chanting, you remember, smaraṇam. That means remembering, you always associate with God.</p>
</div>
</div>
</div>

Sravanam means

2010-04-05T10:13:06Z

Partha-sarathi: Created page with '<div id="compilation"> <div id="facts"> {{terms|"sravanam means"}} {{notes|}} {{compiler|Partha-sarathi}} {{complete|ALL}} {{first|05Apr10}} {{last|05Apr10}} {{totals_by_section|…'

<div id="compilation">
<div id="facts">
{{terms|"sravanam means"}}
{{notes|}}
{{compiler|Partha-sarathi}}
{{complete|ALL}}
{{first|05Apr10}}
{{last|05Apr10}}
{{totals_by_section|BG=0|SB=0|CC=0|OB=0|Lec=14|Con=0|Let=0}}
{{total|14}}
{{toc right}}
[[Category:Hearing]]
[[Category:Meaning of Sanskrit Words]]
</div>
<div id="Lectures" class="section" sec_index="4" parent="compilation" text="Lectures"><h2>Lectures</h2>
</div>
<div id="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="0" parent="Lectures" text="Bhagavad-gita As It Is Lectures"><h3>Bhagavad-gita As It Is Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG434NewYorkAugust141966_0" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="195" link="Lecture on BG 4.34 -- New York, August 14, 1966" link_text="Lecture on BG 4.34 -- New York, August 14, 1966">
<div class="heading">First of all hearing. So similarly, if we want to see God, then we have to hear. That is the process. Kṛṣṇa consciousness process is first with hearing. Śravaṇam. Śravaṇam means hearing.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 4.34 -- New York, August 14, 1966|Lecture on BG 4.34 -- New York, August 14, 1966]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Just like suppose I came to your country, United States of America. Oh, in my childhood I heard of it in school when I was reading geometry or something like, history or geography. I heard first of all. I did not come first of all. So hearing, hearing, when I understood, "Oh, that's a very wonderful country, and it is far away, and if I go there..." Similarly, as you think also about going to India, so first of all hearing. Not immediately seeing what is America or what is India. First of all hearing. So similarly, if we want to see God, then we have to hear. That is the process. Kṛṣṇa consciousness process is first with hearing. Śravaṇam. Śravaṇam means hearing.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG71LosAngelesMarch121970_1" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="230" link="Lecture on BG 7.1 -- Los Angeles, March 12, 1970" link_text="Lecture on BG 7.1 -- Los Angeles, March 12, 1970">
<div class="heading">So the first principle is śravaṇam, it is said. Śravaṇam means hearing, that's all. The first principle of practicing this yoga, bhakti-yoga, beginning, "practicing yoga in full consciousness of Me."
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 7.1 -- Los Angeles, March 12, 1970|Lecture on BG 7.1 -- Los Angeles, March 12, 1970]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">These nine. So the first principle is śravaṇam, it is said. Śravaṇam means hearing, that's all. The first principle of practicing this yoga, bhakti-yoga, beginning, "practicing yoga in full consciousness of Me." This yoga practice begins simply by hearing. You have got these ears. You simply just lend your ears and you become yogi. And as soon as you become experienced in hearing, you become a preacher—kīrtanam. Immediately.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG71LosAngelesMarch121970_2" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="230" link="Lecture on BG 7.1 -- Los Angeles, March 12, 1970" link_text="Lecture on BG 7.1 -- Los Angeles, March 12, 1970">
<div class="heading">Śravaṇaṁ kīrtanam. And śravaṇam means hearing, and kīrtanam means preaching or chanting. Then śravaṇaṁ kīrtanam. "Oh, I... People are hearing so many things daily.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 7.1 -- Los Angeles, March 12, 1970|Lecture on BG 7.1 -- Los Angeles, March 12, 1970]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">One who has heard nicely, he will try to become a kīrtanīya, or preacher. That is natural. That is natural. Śravaṇaṁ kīrtanam. And śravaṇam means hearing, and kīrtanam means preaching or chanting. Then śravaṇaṁ kīrtanam. "Oh, I... People are hearing so many things daily. They are going to the college, schools, and meetings and assembly and association. They are all hearing, śravaṇam. They are practicing yoga?" No. Śravaṇaṁ kīrtanaṁ viṣṇoḥ: you have to hear and preach and chant of Kṛṣṇa, nothing more. Not that simply by hearing any nonsense things you become yogi.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG71SanDiegoJuly11972_3" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="234" link="Lecture on BG 7.1 -- San Diego, July 1, 1972" link_text="Lecture on BG 7.1 -- San Diego, July 1, 1972">
<div class="heading">So hearing is so important thing. Śravaṇam. Śravaṇam means hearing. So Caitanya Mahāprabhu was talking with Rāmānanda Rāya, the process of self-realization.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 7.1 -- San Diego, July 1, 1972|Lecture on BG 7.1 -- San Diego, July 1, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So hearing is so important thing. Śravaṇam. Śravaṇam means hearing. So Caitanya Mahāprabhu was talking with Rāmānanda Rāya, the process of self-realization. You will have it. For those who have got Teachings of Lord Caitanya, he'll read it. When Rāmānanda Rāya and Lord Caitanya (were) speaking, so Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu asked Rāmānanda Rāya, "What is the best process for self-realization?" Because life is meant for self-realization.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG915NewYorkDecember11966_4" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="316" link="Lecture on BG 9.15 -- New York, December 1, 1966" link_text="Lecture on BG 9.15 -- New York, December 1, 1966">
<div class="heading">Śravaṇam means hearing. Kīrtanam. Kīrtanam means chanting. Kīrtanam actually means describing.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 9.15 -- New York, December 1, 1966|Lecture on BG 9.15 -- New York, December 1, 1966]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Now Lord Kṛṣṇa, after describing about the mahātmās, or the great souls, who worship the Supreme Lord by this process of kīrtana... Satataṁ kīrtayanto mām ([[Vanisource:BG 9.14|BG 9.14]]). Śravaṇaṁ kīrtanam ([[Vanisource:SB 7.5.23|SB 7.5.23]]). The process of devotion is nine different types. Śravaṇam. Śravaṇam means hearing. Kīrtanam. Kīrtanam means chanting. Kīrtanam actually means describing.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG915NewYorkDecember11966_5" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="316" link="Lecture on BG 9.15 -- New York, December 1, 1966" link_text="Lecture on BG 9.15 -- New York, December 1, 1966">
<div class="heading">Therefore śravaṇam. Śravaṇam is the... Śravaṇam means hearing. Hearing is the first stage. And hearing is so powerful that simply by hearing from authoritative source, you can become completely perfect, simply by hearing.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 9.15 -- New York, December 1, 1966|Lecture on BG 9.15 -- New York, December 1, 1966]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Therefore śravaṇam. Śravaṇam is the... Śravaṇam means hearing. Hearing is the first stage. And hearing is so powerful that simply by hearing from authoritative source, you can become completely perfect, simply by hearing. Submissive hearing, of course. Submissive. Jñāne prayāsam udapāsya namanta eva. This is a verse from Bhāgavata, Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="1" parent="Lectures" text="Srimad-Bhagavatam Lectures"><h3>Srimad-Bhagavatam Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB123LondonAugust241971_0" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="21" link="Lecture on SB 1.2.3 -- London, August 24, 1971" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.2.3 -- London, August 24, 1971">
<div class="heading">Śravaṇam means to hear, to receive the knowledge. And next, kīrtanam, means to distribute, to describe the knowledge.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.2.3 -- London, August 24, 1971|Lecture on SB 1.2.3 -- London, August 24, 1971]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">What Śukadeva Gosvāmī did, that after assimilating the whole Vedic literature, he distributed it. That is another instinct. If you really have learned the essence of Vedic knowledge, automatically you'll be inclined to preach it. Śravaṇaṁ kīrtanam. Śravaṇam means to hear, to receive the knowledge. And next, kīrtanam, means to distribute, to describe the knowledge.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB215LosAngelesAugust131972_1" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="366" link="Lecture on SB 2.1.5 -- Los Angeles, August 13, 1972" link_text="Lecture on SB 2.1.5 -- Los Angeles, August 13, 1972">
<div class="heading">Śravaṇam means hearing. Kīrtanam means chanting. Smaraṇam, memorizing. Vandanam, prayers, offering prayers. So there are different methods.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 2.1.5 -- Los Angeles, August 13, 1972|Lecture on SB 2.1.5 -- Los Angeles, August 13, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Śravaṇam means hearing. Kīrtanam means chanting. Smaraṇam, memorizing. Vandanam, prayers, offering prayers. So there are different methods. Whichever method is possible by you, you can adopt and you can become perfect. Not that you have to execute all the methods. Even one method, if you perfectly do, you'll become perfect. You'll be transferred to the spiritual kingdom. So we do not say that "This religion is good," "This religion is bad." In every religion there is some form of worship out of these nine. Just like in Christian church there is offering of prayers. We also offer prayer, and that is also recommended in the list: vandanam. Vandanam means offering prayers. Muslim also, they offer prayers in the mosque.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB231LosAngelesMay191972_2" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="374" link="Lecture on SB 2.3.1 -- Los Angeles, May 19, 1972" link_text="Lecture on SB 2.3.1 -- Los Angeles, May 19, 1972">
<div class="heading">Śravaṇam means hearing. Kīrtanam means chanting about Lord Viṣṇu. Not for others. "Now I am hearing and chanting about Nixon." (chuckles) That will not help.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 2.3.1 -- Los Angeles, May 19, 1972|Lecture on SB 2.3.1 -- Los Angeles, May 19, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So this process of hearing from Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam, Bhagavad-gītā, must be continued. That is our life. Śravaṇaṁ kīrtanaṁ viṣṇoḥ ([[Vanisource:SB 7.5.23|SB 7.5.23]]). Śravaṇam means hearing. Kīrtanam means chanting about Lord Viṣṇu. Not for others. "Now I am hearing and chanting about Nixon." (chuckles) That will not help. Because everyone is busy in newspaper, "What Nixon said, what he is doing..." Everywhere. The politicians, they have made the minds of general people, general public, that they're very much interested what the politician says.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB32523BombayNovember231974_3" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="445" link="Lecture on SB 3.25.23 -- Bombay, November 23, 1974" link_text="Lecture on SB 3.25.23 -- Bombay, November 23, 1974">
<div class="heading">You simply hear about the Lord, you talk about the Lord. That is bhajana. Śravaṇam means you can further make progress.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 3.25.23 -- Bombay, November 23, 1974|Lecture on SB 3.25.23 -- Bombay, November 23, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">You simply hear about the Lord, you talk about the Lord. That is bhajana. Śravaṇam means you can further make progress. Śravaṇaṁ kīrtanaṁ viṣṇoḥ. Śravaṇaṁ kīrtanam is going on all over the world. Some is hearing about some politician, other is speaking about some politician or some other man, some important man in the society.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB752230LondonSeptember81971_4" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="728" link="Lecture on SB 7.5.22-30 -- London, September 8, 1971" link_text="Lecture on SB 7.5.22-30 -- London, September 8, 1971">
<div class="heading">Śravaṇam means hearing, kīrtanam means chanting, and smaraṇam. When you read, you remember God's activities, Kṛṣṇa's activities, His devotee's activities.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 7.5.22-30 -- London, September 8, 1971|Lecture on SB 7.5.22-30 -- London, September 8, 1971]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Reading is also smaraṇam. That śravaṇam, kīrtanam, smaraṇam. It is clear? Śravaṇam means hearing, kīrtanam means chanting, and smaraṇam. When you read, you remember God's activities, Kṛṣṇa's activities, His devotee's activities. Therefore it is smaraṇam. This is also one of the prescribed methods. But if anyone cannot read even... Suppose if he is not educated, illiterate. Does it mean that he will not get Kṛṣṇa consciousness?</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Arrival_Addresses_and_Talks" class="sub_section" sec_index="7" parent="Lectures" text="Arrival Addresses and Talks"><h3>Arrival Addresses and Talks</h3>
</div>
<div id="ArrivalConversationLosAngelesJune201975_0" class="quote" parent="Arrival_Addresses_and_Talks" book="Lec" index="25" link="Arrival Conversation -- Los Angeles, June 20, 1975" link_text="Arrival Conversation -- Los Angeles, June 20, 1975">
<div class="heading">Sravaṇam means hearing from the authority and again repeat it.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Arrival Conversation -- Los Angeles, June 20, 1975|Arrival Conversation -- Los Angeles, June 20, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Yes. And our men, all our men should write. Otherwise how we shall know that he has understood the philosophy? Writing means śravaṇaṁ kīrtanam. Śravaṇam means hearing from the authority and again repeat it. This is our business, śravaṇaṁ kīrtanam viṣṇoḥ ([[Vanisource:SB 7.5.23|SB 7.5.23]]), about Viṣṇu, not for any politician or any other man. Śravaṇaṁ kīrtanaṁ viṣṇoḥ, about Kṛṣṇa or Viṣṇu.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="General_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="11" parent="Lectures" text="General Lectures"><h3>General Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonMahamantraNewYorkSeptember81966_0" class="quote" parent="General_Lectures" book="Lec" index="2" link="Lecture on Maha-mantra -- New York, September 8, 1966" link_text="Lecture on Maha-mantra -- New York, September 8, 1966">
<div class="heading">These are different, nine processes. Śravaṇaṁ kīrtanam. Śravaṇam means hearing, and kīrtanam means chanting, chanting.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on Maha-mantra -- New York, September 8, 1966|Lecture on Maha-mantra -- New York, September 8, 1966]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">These are different, nine processes. Śravaṇaṁ kīrtanam. Śravaṇam means hearing, and kīrtanam means chanting, chanting. So by this process... Just like I chant and you hear, and you chant and I hear. Parasparam. Bodhayantaḥ parasparam. This is the factual activities of devotion in devotional society. This bodhayantaḥ parasparam: I chant, you hear, and you chant, I hear. So by this process, the transcendental name, the sound incarnation of the Supreme Lord, becomes manifest, manifest so that we can realize God simply by chanting and hearing.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Purports_to_Songs" class="sub_section" sec_index="14" parent="Lectures" text="Purports to Songs"><h3>Purports to Songs</h3>
</div>
<div id="PurporttoParamaKorunaAtlantaFebruary281975_0" class="quote" parent="Purports_to_Songs" book="Lec" index="29" link="Purport to Parama Koruna -- Atlanta, February 28, 1975" link_text="Purport to Parama Koruna -- Atlanta, February 28, 1975">
<div class="heading">Śravaṇam means hearing, kīrtanam means glorifying. Of whom? About Viṣṇu, not for anything else. So Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu approved this point.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Purport to Parama Koruna -- Atlanta, February 28, 1975|Purport to Parama Koruna -- Atlanta, February 28, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Tattva-darśī, one who has seen the things as it is. Go there and from him take the knowledge, not that one who is speculating. This is the process, Vedic process. Therefore it is called śruti. Śravaṇam. Śravaṇaṁ kīrtanaṁ viṣṇoḥ ([[Vanisource:SB 7.5.23|SB 7.5.23]]). Śravaṇam means hearing, kīrtanam means glorifying. Of whom? About Viṣṇu, not for anything else. So Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu approved this point. When He was talking with Śrī Rāmānanda Rāya, Rāmānanda Rāya suggested various methods of self-realization. So Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu did not reject them.</p>
</div>
</div>
</div>

Karmi means

2010-04-05T09:38:42Z

Partha-sarathi: Created page with '<div id="compilation"> <div id="facts"> {{terms|"karmi means"}} {{notes|}} {{compiler|Partha-sarathi}} {{complete|ALL}} {{first|05Apr10}} {{last|05Apr10}} {{totals_by_section|BG=…'

<div id="compilation">
<div id="facts">
{{terms|"karmi means"}}
{{notes|}}
{{compiler|Partha-sarathi}}
{{complete|ALL}}
{{first|05Apr10}}
{{last|05Apr10}}
{{totals_by_section|BG=0|SB=0|CC=0|OB=0|Lec=8|Con=3|Let=0}}
{{total|11}}
{{toc right}}
[[Category:Meaning of Sanskrit Words]]
</div>
<div id="Lectures" class="section" sec_index="4" parent="compilation" text="Lectures"><h2>Lectures</h2>
</div>
<div id="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="0" parent="Lectures" text="Bhagavad-gita As It Is Lectures"><h3>Bhagavad-gita As It Is Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG41MontrealAugust241968_0" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="131" link="Lecture on BG 4.1 -- Montreal, August 24, 1968" link_text="Lecture on BG 4.1 -- Montreal, August 24, 1968">
<div class="heading">And the difference between karma-yogī and karmī means he has to suffer the result, good or bad, and karma-yogī has nothing to suffer because he's doing everything for Kṛṣṇa.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 4.1 -- Montreal, August 24, 1968|Lecture on BG 4.1 -- Montreal, August 24, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">He karma-yoga, if somebody is describing the Bhagavad-gītā, yat karoṣi. "Whatever you are doing, kuruṣva tad mad-arpaṇam. You are working? All right. What you have earned?" "One thousand dollars." "Give Me." Are you prepared? Kṛṣṇa is asking, kuruṣva tad mad-arpaṇam. So if anyone is agreed, "Yes, Kṛṣṇa, here is the money for You," then he's a karma-yogī. Otherwise he's a karmī. And the difference between karma-yogī and karmī means he has to suffer the result, good or bad, and karma-yogī has nothing to suffer because he's doing everything for Kṛṣṇa. Just like Arjuna. In the beginning he considered that "If I kill my kinsmen and my grandfather I'll be sinful." Yes. But the same thing he acted under the direction of Kṛṣṇa.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG92CalcuttaMarch81972_1" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="301" link="Lecture on BG 9.2 -- Calcutta, March 8, 1972" link_text="Lecture on BG 9.2 -- Calcutta, March 8, 1972">
<div class="heading">Karmi means one who is acting according to the direction. Dharma karma.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 9.2 -- Calcutta, March 8, 1972|Lecture on BG 9.2 -- Calcutta, March 8, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So anyone who has fully surrendered to Kṛṣṇa, he's the greatest mahātmā. Sa mahātmā su-durlabhaḥ. It is very, very difficult to find out a Kṛṣṇa devotee. Caitanya Mahāprabhu has described that out of many, many human being, common man, one is karmi. Karmi, karmi means honestly working according to the direction of the Veda. Karmi does not mean that a monkey also jumping, that is also karma. No. Karmi means one who is acting according to the direction. Dharma karma.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG91114NewYorkNovember271966_2" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="314" link="Lecture on BG 9.11-14 -- New York, November 27, 1966" link_text="Lecture on BG 9.11-14 -- New York, November 27, 1966">
<div class="heading">Moghāśā. Just the karmī... Karmī means the fruitive actor. They are always hoping, "Something better, something better, something better."
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 9.11-14 -- New York, November 27, 1966|Lecture on BG 9.11-14 -- New York, November 27, 1966]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So why they cannot understand? Moghāśā. Moghāśā means whatever they are aspiring, whatever they are desiring, that will be baffled. Moghāśā. Just the karmī... Karmī means the fruitive actor. They are always hoping, "Something better, something better, something better." There is no limit where they will stop. So much money, so much bank balance, so much money, so much... Still... So moghāśā. Mogha means they are hoping to be very happy at a certain point, but that point never comes. That point never comes. Moghāśā. This means moghāśā. Because he does not know "what is the ultimate point of my satiation." Na te viduḥ svārtha-gatiṁ hi viṣṇuṁ durāśayā ye bahir-artha-māninaḥ ([[Vanisource:SB 7.5.31|SB 7.5.31]]). People, they do not know... Who are, I mean to say, enamored by the external beauty of this illusory material energy, they cannot understand that what is the aim and objective of life. They cannot understand. Therefore moghāśā.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="1" parent="Lectures" text="Srimad-Bhagavatam Lectures"><h3>Srimad-Bhagavatam Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB1533VrndavanaAugust141974_0" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="153" link="Lecture on SB 1.5.33 -- Vrndavana, August 14, 1974" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.5.33 -- Vrndavana, August 14, 1974">
<div class="heading">Karmī means they are working for their so-called interest, and bhakti means they are working for Kṛṣṇa's interest.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.5.33 -- Vrndavana, August 14, 1974|Lecture on SB 1.5.33 -- Vrndavana, August 14, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So this is cikitsitam. Don't work for sense gratification or personal interest. Real interest is how to satisfy Kṛṣṇa. That is real interest. But they do not know. Na te viduḥ svārtha-gatiṁ hi viṣṇum ([[Vanisource:SB 7.5.31|SB 7.5.31]]). Everyone is, "I have got my interest." But you do not know what is your interest. Your interest is to satisfy Kṛṣṇa. But the rascals, they do not know. They say, "Why Kṛṣṇa? Myself, I shall enjoy everything." This is karma and bhakti. When karma... Karmī means they are working for their so-called interest, and bhakti means they are working for Kṛṣṇa's interest. They..., superficially, the activities are the same. Same means superficially, not in essence. So our senses are so trained up that we want to satisfy the senses. Now these devotional activities means instead of satisfying my personal senses, if we want to satisfy Kṛṣṇa's senses, this method is called bhakti. So the activities of the senses should not be stopped, it should be repaired or reformed.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB11539LosAngelesDecember171973_1" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="307" link="Lecture on SB 1.15.39 -- Los Angeles, December 17, 1973" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.15.39 -- Los Angeles, December 17, 1973">
<div class="heading">Everyone, karmī... Karmī means he is working hard, day and night, but he wants the fruit of the work to enjoy himself. That is karmī.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.15.39 -- Los Angeles, December 17, 1973|Lecture on SB 1.15.39 -- Los Angeles, December 17, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">What is the sannyāsī definition? Sannyāsī means he works, but not as the enjoyer of the fruit of the work. That is sannyāsī. Everyone, karmī... Karmī means he is working hard, day and night, but he wants the fruit of the work to enjoy himself. That is karmī. Sannyāsī also will work hard, day and night, but he will not take the fruit. It is for Kṛṣṇa. That is sannyāsī. Sannyāsī means sat-nyāsī. Nyāsī means renounced, and sat means the supreme truth. One who renounces everything for the sake of supreme truth, he is called sannyāsī. That sannyāsī formality is to change the dress. But anyone... Just like this Mahārāja Yudhiṣṭhira, Arjuna and his brothers, they were all sannyāsīs.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB2111LosAngelesAugust11970_2" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="371" link="Lecture on SB 2.1.11 -- Los Angeles, August 1, 1970" link_text="Lecture on SB 2.1.11 -- Los Angeles, August 1, 1970">
<div class="heading">Karmī means fruitive worker, and jñānīs means empiric philosophers, and yogis, mystic, I mean to say, yogis, and bhaktas, and the devotees.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 2.1.11 -- Los Angeles, August 1, 1970|Lecture on SB 2.1.11 -- Los Angeles, August 1, 1970]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So here, icchatām akutaḥ. Icchatām means those who are desiring. Nirvidyamānānām means those who are not desiring, renouncing. And the other class, akuto-bhayam, fearless. And yoginām. Another class-mystic yogis. So generally, these four classes men are there. So Śukadeva Gosvāmī says that for all of them, either he is karmī or he is jñānī or he is yogi or he is bhakta. Karmī means fruitive worker, and jñānīs means empiric philosophers, and yogis, mystic, I mean to say, yogis, and bhaktas, and the devotees. Generally, these four classes of men.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Nectar_of_Devotion_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="2" parent="Lectures" text="Nectar of Devotion Lectures"><h3>Nectar of Devotion Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="TheNectarofDevotionVrndavanaNovember41972_0" class="quote" parent="Nectar_of_Devotion_Lectures" book="Lec" index="32" link="The Nectar of Devotion -- Vrndavana, November 4, 1972" link_text="The Nectar of Devotion -- Vrndavana, November 4, 1972">
<div class="heading">So devotional service is the only way. Karmī, karmī means they are working very hard for their personal benefit. Not for Kṛṣṇa's benefit.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:The Nectar of Devotion -- Vrndavana, November 4, 1972|The Nectar of Devotion -- Vrndavana, November 4, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So devotional service is the only way. Karmī, karmī means they are working very hard for their personal benefit. Not for Kṛṣṇa's benefit. Similarly, jñānīs, they are also trying for personal benefit, mukti. He wants mukti, liberation, nirbheda-brahmānu-sandhana. And similarly, yogis also, they want personal benefit, some material power, aṣṭa-siddhi-yoga, aṇimā-laghimā-siddhi. Bhukti-mukti-siddhi-kāmī sakali aśānta. Caitanya-caritāmṛta Kaja says except pure devotee, who only wants to satisfy Kṛṣṇa, everyone is working for his personal benefit, karmī, jñānī, yogi.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Sri_Caitanya-caritamrta_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="3" parent="Lectures" text="Sri Caitanya-caritamrta Lectures"><h3>Sri Caitanya-caritamrta Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonCCAdilila73947SanFranciscoFebruary11967_0" class="quote" parent="Sri_Caitanya-caritamrta_Lectures" book="Lec" index="27" link="Lecture on CC Adi-lila 7.39-47 -- San Francisco, February 1, 1967" link_text="Lecture on CC Adi-lila 7.39-47 -- San Francisco, February 1, 1967">
<div class="heading">That means jñānī, yogi and karmī. Karmī means those who are working very hard day and night simply for sense gratification.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on CC Adi-lila 7.39-47 -- San Francisco, February 1, 1967|Lecture on CC Adi-lila 7.39-47 -- San Francisco, February 1, 1967]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">But by intellectually, by making proper adjustment... Just the only benefit of such exercises is to concentrate the mind. The mind is very disturbed. So that is also materialist. That means jñānī, yogi and karmī. Karmī means those who are working very hard day and night simply for sense gratification. That's all. They are called karmīs. And jñānī means they are finding out solution by mental speculation.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="section" sec_index="5" parent="compilation" text="Conversations and Morning Walks"><h2>Conversations and Morning Walks</h2>
</div>
<div id="1974_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="sub_section" sec_index="7" parent="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" text="1974 Conversations and Morning Walks"><h3>1974 Conversations and Morning Walks</h3>
</div>
<div id="RoomConversationwithMonsieurRoostHathayogiMay311974Geneva_0" class="quote" parent="1974_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="92" link="Room Conversation with Monsieur Roost, Hatha-yogi -- May 31, 1974, Geneva" link_text="Room Conversation with Monsieur Roost, Hatha-yogi -- May 31, 1974, Geneva">
<div class="heading">So karmī means they want comfort of this body. And the yogis, they are also on the concept of this body.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Room Conversation with Monsieur Roost, Hatha-yogi -- May 31, 1974, Geneva|Room Conversation with Monsieur Roost, Hatha-yogi -- May 31, 1974, Geneva]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: As the karmīs, they are in the bodily concept of life. They are working day and night trying to improve the material condition of life, not only in this life, but also in the next life. They are performing different ritualistic ceremonies for being promoted to the heavenly planet, like that. So they are all karmīs. Either in this world or in the next world, they are called karmīs. So karmī means they want comfort of this body. And the yogis, they are also on the concept of this body. They are identifying this body as designated Brahman, upādhi-brahma, "Brahman with designation." But their central point is this body.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="MorningWalkJune51974Geneva_1" class="quote" parent="1974_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="98" link="Morning Walk -- June 5, 1974, Geneva" link_text="Morning Walk -- June 5, 1974, Geneva">
<div class="heading">Karmī means sense gratification, and bhakta means Kṛṣṇa's sense gratification. That is the difference.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Morning Walk -- June 5, 1974, Geneva|Morning Walk -- June 5, 1974, Geneva]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">His business was to fight. He fought, that's all. But fought for Kṛṣṇa. That is the secret. He did not change his fighting capacity as a warrior. But he changed his mentality. His mentality was that "Why shall I kill my kinsmen?" But Kṛṣṇa wanted, "Oh, that's all right." So therefore service is for Kṛṣṇa. That's all. Not for his sense gratification. Karmī means sense gratification, and bhakta means Kṛṣṇa's sense gratification. That is the difference. Sense gratification is there. When you do it for your personal sense grati..., it is karma. And you do it for Kṛṣṇa's sense gratification, it is bhakti.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1976_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="sub_section" sec_index="9" parent="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" text="1976 Conversations and Morning Walks"><h3>1976 Conversations and Morning Walks</h3>
</div>
<div id="RoomConversationwithLifeMemberMrMalhotraDecember221976Poona_0" class="quote" parent="1976_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="350" link="Room Conversation with Life Member, Mr. Malhotra -- December 22, 1976, Poona" link_text="Room Conversation with Life Member, Mr. Malhotra -- December 22, 1976, Poona">
<div class="heading">Yes, karmī means this how to enjoy this world. Whole life they have struggled how to enjoy this, how to enjoy myself, how to allow my men to enjoy.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Room Conversation with Life Member, Mr. Malhotra -- December 22, 1976, Poona|Room Conversation with Life Member, Mr. Malhotra -- December 22, 1976, Poona]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: Yes, karmī means this how to enjoy this world. Whole life they have struggled how to enjoy this, how to enjoy myself, how to allow my men to enjoy. This is karmī platform. Everyone is doing that. Everyone is working hard for himself, for his family, and expand the family, for society, and expand the society, for the nation. Here is karmī plan. Gandhi, Birla they are all... There is no question of spiritual life.</p>
</div>
</div>
</div>

Sraddha means

2010-04-05T08:48:21Z

Partha-sarathi: Created page with '<div id="compilation"> <div id="facts"> {{terms|"sraddha means"}} {{notes|}} {{compiler|Partha-sarathi}} {{complete|ALL}} {{first|05Apr10}} {{last|05Apr10}} {{totals_by_section|B…'

<div id="compilation">
<div id="facts">
{{terms|"sraddha means"}}
{{notes|}}
{{compiler|Partha-sarathi}}
{{complete|ALL}}
{{first|05Apr10}}
{{last|05Apr10}}
{{totals_by_section|BG=0|SB=0|CC=0|OB=1|Lec=24|Con=7|Let=0}}
{{total|32}}
{{toc right}}
[[Category:Meaning of Sanskrit Words]]
</div>
<div id="Other_Books_by_Srila_Prabhupada" class="section" sec_index="3" parent="compilation" text="Other Books by Srila Prabhupada"><h2>Other Books by Srila Prabhupada</h2>
</div>
<div id="Nectar_of_Instruction" class="sub_section" sec_index="2" parent="Other_Books_by_Srila_Prabhupada" text="Nectar of Instruction"><h3>Nectar of Instruction</h3>
</div>
<div id="NOI5_0" class="quote" parent="Nectar_of_Instruction" book="OB" index="6" link="NOI 5" link_text="Nectar of Instruction 5">
<div class="heading">It is not that one accepts a portion of Bhagavad-gītā according to his own whimsical interpretations and then rejects another portion. This is not śraddhā. Śraddhā means accepting the instructions of Bhagavad-gītā in their totality, especially the last instruction: sarva-dharmān parityajya mām ekaṁ śaraṇaṁ vraja.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:NOI 5|Nectar of Instruction 5, Purport]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="purport text"><p style="display: inline;">This is the correct way of understanding Bhagavad-gītā, and this is called śraddhā. It is not that one accepts a portion of Bhagavad-gītā according to his own whimsical interpretations and then rejects another portion. This is not śraddhā. Śraddhā means accepting the instructions of Bhagavad-gītā in their totality, especially the last instruction: sarva-dharmān parityajya mām ekaṁ śaraṇaṁ vraja. "Abandon all varieties of religion and just surrender unto Me." ([[Vanisource:BG 18.66|BG 18.66]]) When one becomes completely faithful in regard to this instruction, one's strong faith becomes the basis for advancing in spiritual life.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Lectures" class="section" sec_index="4" parent="compilation" text="Lectures"><h2>Lectures</h2>
</div>
<div id="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="0" parent="Lectures" text="Bhagavad-gita As It Is Lectures"><h3>Bhagavad-gita As It Is Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG211withSpanishtranslatorMexicoFebruary111975_0" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="49" link="Lecture on BG 2.11 (with Spanish translator) -- Mexico, February 11, 1975" link_text="Lecture on BG 2.11 (with Spanish translator) -- Mexico, February 11, 1975">
<div class="heading">This inclination is the beginning of spiritual life. This is called śraddhā. Śraddhā means faith.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 2.11 (with Spanish translator) -- Mexico, February 11, 1975|Lecture on BG 2.11 (with Spanish translator) -- Mexico, February 11, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">The guru strictly follows the Vedic injunction and teaches the same thing to his disciple. That is guru. So first thing is: one must be inquisitive to understand about the spiritual subject matter. Just like you have come here in this temple. You know that here nothing like political meeting is going on. Here something spiritual matter is being discussed. Therefore you have come. This inclination is the beginning of spiritual life. This is called śraddhā. Śraddhā means faith.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG410BombayMarch301974_1" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="153" link="Lecture on BG 4.10 -- Bombay, March 30, 1974" link_text="Lecture on BG 4.10 -- Bombay, March 30, 1974">
<div class="heading">Lecture on BG 4.10 -- Bombay, March 30, 1974:
So Rūpa Gosvāmī is giving us direction how to come to the bhāva stage. Ādau śraddhā. First of all, first thing is śraddhā. Śraddhā means faith, firm faith.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 4.10 -- Bombay, March 30, 1974|Lecture on BG 4.10 -- Bombay, March 30, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So Rūpa Gosvāmī is giving us direction how to come to the bhāva stage. Ādau śraddhā. First of all, first thing is śraddhā. Śraddhā means faith, firm faith. Śraddhā has been explained by Caitanya-caritāmṛta:</p>
<p>'śraddhā'-śabde—viśvāsa kahe sudṛḍha niścaya</p>
<p>kṛṣṇe bhakti kaile sarva-karma kṛta haya</p>
<p> (Cc. Madhya 22.62)</p>
<p>This is called śraddhā. One when believes firmly as Kṛṣṇa says, sarva-dharmān parityajya mām ekaṁ śaraṇaṁ vraja ([[Vanisource:BG 18.66|BG 18.66]]), one, if he is firmly fixed-up, "Yes, by surrendering to Kṛṣṇa I get all perfection of life...," that is called śraddhā. That is called śraddhā. That is explained by Caitanya-caritāmṛta. Śraddhā-śabde viśvāsa kahe sudṛḍha niścaya (Cc. Madhya 22.62).</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG410BombayMarch301974_2" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="153" link="Lecture on BG 4.10 -- Bombay, March 30, 1974" link_text="Lecture on BG 4.10 -- Bombay, March 30, 1974">
<div class="heading">I have got intention, "Why not this? Why not that? Why not this? Why not that?" then that is not śraddhā even. That is not śraddhā. Śraddhā means firm conviction. So śraddhā-śabde... So ādau śraddhā.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 4.10 -- Bombay, March 30, 1974|Lecture on BG 4.10 -- Bombay, March 30, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I have got intention, "Why not this? Why not that? Why not this? Why not that?" then that is not śraddhā even. That is not śraddhā. Śraddhā means firm conviction. So śraddhā-śabde... So ādau śraddhā.</p>
<p>Then next stage is: tataḥ sādhu-saṅgaḥ. If you have got śraddhā, "Yes, I want Kṛṣṇa in this life. I must do anything required," then that determination is called śraddhā. Then if you want to develop that determination, then you should associate with sādhu. Who is sādhu? Sādhu... Bhajate mām ananya-bhāk. That is sādhu. Api cet su-durācāro bhajate mām ananya-bhāk.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG428BombayApril171974_3" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="194" link="Lecture on BG 4.28 -- Bombay, April 17, 1974" link_text="Lecture on BG 4.28 -- Bombay, April 17, 1974">
<div class="heading">Śraddhā means, devotion means, gradually making the śraddhā more and more fixed up. Ādau śraddhā. Ādau śraddhā tataḥ sādhu-saṅga (Cc. Madhya 23.14-15).
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 4.28 -- Bombay, April 17, 1974|Lecture on BG 4.28 -- Bombay, April 17, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Just like you all ladies and gentlemen, you are coming. It is the śraddhā, "Let us hear something, what they are speaking about Kṛṣṇa." This is the beginning. So this śraddhā, as it grows and becomes firmly fixed up, that is devotion. Śraddhā means, devotion means, gradually making the śraddhā more and more fixed up. Ādau śraddhā. Ādau śraddhā tataḥ sādhu-saṅga (Cc. Madhya 23.14-15). First of all śraddhā, faith. Then association with the devotee. Atha bhajana-kriyā tato 'nartha-nivṛttiḥ syāt tato niṣṭhā rucis tataḥ, athāsaktis tato bhāvaḥ. Bhāva. So we have to come to the stage of bhāva.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG647AhmedabadDecember121972_4" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="225" link="Lecture on BG 6.47 -- Ahmedabad, December 12, 1972" link_text="Lecture on BG 6.47 -- Ahmedabad, December 12, 1972">
<div class="heading">This is the śraddhā. Śraddhā means firm faith. As Kṛṣṇa says, sarva-dharmān parityajya mām ekaṁ śaraṇaṁ vraja (BG 18.66).
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 6.47 -- Ahmedabad, December 12, 1972|Lecture on BG 6.47 -- Ahmedabad, December 12, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">This is the śraddhā. Śraddhā means firm faith. As Kṛṣṇa says, sarva-dharmān parityajya mām ekaṁ śaraṇaṁ vraja ([[Vanisource:BG 18.66|BG 18.66]]).</p>
<p>So unless one has got faith. Why one should consider himself that "I must be completely surrendered to Kṛṣṇa," unless one has got faith? Therefore faith is the beginning. And to create faith, Kṛṣṇa has explained about Himself in the whole Bhagavad-gītā. So one who is fortunate, after reading Bhagavad-gītā thoroughly, he'll have a strong faith in Kṛṣṇa. If you have failed to achieve this status of faith, then there is no question of progress. That is explained by Kṛṣṇadāsa Kavirāja Gosvāmī: śraddhā-śabde viśvāsa kahe sudṛḍha niścaya (Cc. Madhya 22.62). Śraddhā means firm faith, with conviction, "Yes, if I surrender to Kṛṣṇa, then all my business will be perfect, all my spiritual life will be perfect." Therefore Kṛṣṇa says: śraddhāvān bhajate.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG71BombayJanuary131973_5" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="236" link="Lecture on BG 7.1 -- Bombay, January 13, 1973" link_text="Lecture on BG 7.1 -- Bombay, January 13, 1973">
<div class="heading">Yoginām api sarveṣāṁ mad-gatenāntar-ātmanā, śraddhāvān. Unless you have got śraddhā, you cannot make any progress. Śraddhā. Śraddhā means faith.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 7.1 -- Bombay, January 13, 1973|Lecture on BG 7.1 -- Bombay, January 13, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Yoga process means to concentrate the mind upon the Supreme Personality of Godhead, generally Lord Viṣṇu. So Lord Viṣṇu and Kṛṣṇa, there is no difference. They are the same. Kṛṣṇa is the original Viṣṇu. So the first-class yogi is he who is always concentrating his mind upon Kṛṣṇa. Yoginām api sarveṣāṁ mad-gatenāntar-ātmanā, śraddhāvān. Unless you have got śraddhā, you cannot make any progress. Śraddhā. Śraddhā means faith. Just like you have all came. You have got little faith or more faith. There is faith. Without faith, how you could come here and spare some time for understanding Kṛṣṇa, or hearing about Kṛṣṇa? So this is the beginning, śraddhāvān. Śraddhāvān bhajate yo mām. With faith.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG71BombayJanuary131973_6" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="236" link="Lecture on BG 7.1 -- Bombay, January 13, 1973" link_text="Lecture on BG 7.1 -- Bombay, January 13, 1973">
<div class="heading">This is śraddhā. Śraddhā means śraddhā-śabde... (break) ...word means śraddhā-śabde viśvāsa, full faith; sudṛḍha, very firm; niścaya, with conviction.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 7.1 -- Bombay, January 13, 1973|Lecture on BG 7.1 -- Bombay, January 13, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">This is śraddhā. Śraddhā means śraddhā-śabde... (break) ...word means śraddhā-śabde viśvāsa, full faith; sudṛḍha, very firm; niścaya, with conviction. That is śraddhā. Śraddha-śabde viśvāsa kahe sudṛḍha niścaya. What is that viśvāsa? What is that faith? Kṛṣṇe bhakti kaile sarva-karma kṛta haya. "If I devote myself in Kṛṣṇa consciousness, in the service of Kṛṣṇa, all my work will be perfect." This is called śraddhā. If you have got hesitation, that "Some percentage to Kṛṣṇa, some percentage to my family, some percent to my country, some percent to my dog, some percentage..." In this... No. Simply sarva-dharmān parityajya mām ekaṁ śaraṇaṁ vraja ([[Vanisource:BG 18.66|BG 18.66]]). That faith, if you can raise yourself to that platform of faith, that is the beginning of faith. Kṛṣṇe bhakti kaile sarva-karma... Sarva-karma kṛta haya.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG71SydneyFebruary161973_7" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="238" link="Lecture on BG 7.1 -- Sydney, February 16, 1973" link_text="Lecture on BG 7.1 -- Sydney, February 16, 1973">
<div class="heading">The beginning of the Kṛṣṇa consciousness is śraddhā, a little faith. That is the beginning. Adau śraddhā. Śraddhā means to accept that "This is a nice movement." This a nice movement.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 7.1 -- Sydney, February 16, 1973|Lecture on BG 7.1 -- Sydney, February 16, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So this process, Kṛṣṇa consciousness movement, is to teach people how to increase his attachment for Kṛṣṇa. There are many processes. The beginning of the Kṛṣṇa consciousness is śraddhā, a little faith. That is the beginning. Adau śraddhā. Śraddhā means to accept that "This is a nice movement." This a nice movement. Just like you have come here with śraddhā, little faith, that "What these people are making in Kṛṣṇa consciousness movement? Let us go and see." This is called śraddhā. This is the first thing. So you have to increase this śraddhā. How? Adau śraddhā tataḥ sādhu-saṅga ([[Vanisource:CC Madhya 22.83|CC Madhya 22.83]]). If you want to increase this śraddhā, then you have to make association with the devotees.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG108NewYorkJanuary71967_8" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="335" link="Lecture on BG 10.8 -- New York, January 7, 1967" link_text="Lecture on BG 10.8 -- New York, January 7, 1967">
<div class="heading">The first stage is śraddhā. Śraddhā means faith. Faith. Ādau śraddhā. If one has got this faith, then he can develop that faith to the highest perfectional stage of transcendental emotion, bhāva, and then love of God.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 10.8 -- New York, January 7, 1967|Lecture on BG 10.8 -- New York, January 7, 1967]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Ti matvā bhajante mām. Bhajante means one engages himself in the transcendental loving service of the Lord in complete emotion. That is wanted. How that emotion is attained, that is also described by Rūpa Gosvāmī, how one can attain that stage one after another. The first stage is śraddhā. Śraddhā means faith. Faith. Ādau śraddhā. If one has got this faith, then he can develop that faith to the highest perfectional stage of transcendental emotion, bhāva, and then love of God.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="1" parent="Lectures" text="Srimad-Bhagavatam Lectures"><h3>Srimad-Bhagavatam Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB125VrndavanaOctober161972_0" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="29" link="Lecture on SB 1.2.5 -- Vrndavana, October 16, 1972" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.2.5 -- Vrndavana, October 16, 1972">
<div class="heading">Śraddhā, to advance in spiritual life, the beginning is śraddhā, faith. That is faith. Śraddhā... Not exactly faith. Śraddhā means respectful: "Oh, it is nice." That is called śraddhā.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.2.5 -- Vrndavana, October 16, 1972|Lecture on SB 1.2.5 -- Vrndavana, October 16, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Śraddhā, to advance in spiritual life, the beginning is śraddhā, faith. That is faith. Śraddhā... Not exactly faith. Śraddhā means respectful: "Oh, it is nice." That is called śraddhā.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB128NewVrindabanSeptember61972_1" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="49" link="Lecture on SB 1.2.8 -- New Vrindaban, September 6, 1972" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.2.8 -- New Vrindaban, September 6, 1972">
<div class="heading">Śraddhā means a faith or some respect. Actually it means respect.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.2.8 -- New Vrindaban, September 6, 1972|Lecture on SB 1.2.8 -- New Vrindaban, September 6, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Now, we should practice to give up the subtle body. To give up this subtle body, one has to develop love for God, prema. And the process is, how to give up the subtle body.</p>
<p>Ādau śraddhā, first of all śraddhā. Śraddhā means a faith or some respect. Actually it means respect. Just like you have come here out of faith and respect. So here they're talking about God. There is temple of God, let us go there. This is faith and respect.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB12910DelhiNovember141973_2" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="57" link="Lecture on SB 1.2.9-10 -- Delhi, November 14, 1973" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.2.9-10 -- Delhi, November 14, 1973">
<div class="heading">This is called śraddhā. Śraddhā means firm faith. What is that firm faith? Firm faith means that... Kṛṣṇa says that sarva-dharmān parityajya mām ekaṁ śaraṇam (BG 18.66).
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.2.9-10 -- Delhi, November 14, 1973|Lecture on SB 1.2.9-10 -- Delhi, November 14, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">This is called śraddhā. Śraddhā means firm faith. What is that firm faith? Firm faith means that... Kṛṣṇa says that sarva-dharmān parityajya mām ekaṁ śaraṇam ([[Vanisource:BG 18.66|BG 18.66]]). When you take this conclusion, "Yes, by surrender to Kṛṣṇa, by surrendering unto the lotus feet of Kṛṣṇa, everything is done very nicely," this is called śraddhā. And the more you increase this śraddhā, the more you become perfect.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB1212VrndavanaOctober231972_3" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="64" link="Lecture on SB 1.2.12 -- Vrndavana, October 23, 1972" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.2.12 -- Vrndavana, October 23, 1972">
<div class="heading">Śraddhā means that at least to understand that "These people are doing some nice things." Just like in Europe and America, the papers are now discussing about our Movement.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.2.12 -- Vrndavana, October 23, 1972|Lecture on SB 1.2.12 -- Vrndavana, October 23, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">What is my relationship with Him? Why I am suffering?" There are so many questions. So here it is suggested that if you are actually serious about tattva-jijñāsā, to understand the Absolute Truth, this is the process. What is that? Tat śraddadhānāḥ. Śraddhā. Śraddhā means that at least to understand that "These people are doing some nice things." Just like in Europe and America, the papers are now discussing about our Movement. They say, "They are nice people, and we want more of them." At least, they are saying like that. Yes. "These Hare Krishna people, they are very nice, and we want more of them."</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB1212DelhiNovember181973_4" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="65" link="Lecture on SB 1.2.12 -- Delhi, November 18, 1973" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.2.12 -- Delhi, November 18, 1973">
<div class="heading">This śraddhā means... I have already explained many times. It is explained in the Caitanya-caritāmṛta, śraddhā-śabde viśvāsa kahe sudṛḍha niścaya (Cc. Madhya 22.62).
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.2.12 -- Delhi, November 18, 1973|Lecture on SB 1.2.12 -- Delhi, November 18, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">He has got conjugal love with Rādhārāṇī. Everything is there. Therefore here it is said, tac chraddadhānā munayo jñāna-vairāgya-yuktayā, paśyanti ([[Vanisource:SB 1.2.12|SB 1.2.12]]). You can see all this ānandamaya-līlā, ātmani, within yourself. How? Tac chradda, chraddadhānāḥ. Śraddhā. This śraddhā means... I have already explained many times. It is explained in the Caitanya-caritāmṛta, śraddhā-śabde viśvāsa kahe sudṛḍha niścaya (Cc. Madhya 22.62). This is called śraddhā, when you firmly believe. Śraddhā-śabde viśvāsa kahe sudṛḍha. Without any shaking. Not shaking platform. Firmly.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB1218CalcuttaSeptember261974_5" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="79" link="Lecture on SB 1.2.18 -- Calcutta, September 26, 1974" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.2.18 -- Calcutta, September 26, 1974">
<div class="heading">That śraddhā, he has said, śraddhā-śabde viśvāsa kahe sudṛḍha niścaya. Śraddhā means firm faith, viśvāsa, sudṛḍha niścaya, unflinching.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.2.18 -- Calcutta, September 26, 1974|Lecture on SB 1.2.18 -- Calcutta, September 26, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">That śraddhā, he has said, śraddhā-śabde viśvāsa kahe sudṛḍha niścaya. Śraddhā means firm faith, viśvāsa, sudṛḍha niścaya, unflinching. What is that sudṛḍha niścaya? Kṛṣṇe bhakti kaile sarva-karma kṛta haya. This is the beginning of śraddhā. Śraddhā means... As in the Bhagavad-gītā it is said, sarva-dharmān parityajya mām ekaṁ śaraṇaṁ vraja ([[Vanisource:BG 18.66|BG 18.66]]). If one is agreeable to this condition, that kṛṣṇe bhakti kaile, if one agrees, "Yes, if I surrender to Kṛṣṇa, my all perfection of life is achieved," this is śraddhā. Not that "Kṛṣṇa is also good, and this demigod is also good, you are also good, I am also good. You are also God, I am also God." There is no śraddhā. Just like a chaste woman cannot say that every man is good. She'll say, "Only my husband is good." That is chastity. If some woman says that "Any man is good..." Similarly, śraddhā means to become chaste, pure kṛṣṇa-bhakta. That is śraddhā.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB1727VrndavanaSeptember241976_6" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="182" link="Lecture on SB 1.7.27 -- Vrndavana, September 24, 1976" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.7.27 -- Vrndavana, September 24, 1976">
<div class="heading">Many people come out of śraddhā. Śraddhā means little faith. But according to our Gosvāmī literature, that faith is not little faith.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.7.27 -- Vrndavana, September 24, 1976|Lecture on SB 1.7.27 -- Vrndavana, September 24, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So if you do not keep the bhāva... Bhāva means... That is on the liberation side. Ādau śraddhā tataḥ sādhu-saṅgo 'tha bhajana-kriyā tato 'nartha-nivṛttiḥ syāt (Cc. Madhya 23.14-15). First of all, you come to this Kṛṣṇa consciousness movement. Some of you, not all. Śraddhā: "Kṛṣṇa consciousness movement, Hare Kṛṣṇa movement is very good. Let us see how it is," or "Let us join." So first of all śraddhā. Many people come out of śraddhā. Śraddhā means little faith. But according to our Gosvāmī literature, that faith is not little faith. That faith is also very strong. Then the beginning is there. Caitanya-caritāmṛta kaṛacā has described about this faith. He describes... Faith means śraddhā. English word "faith," and Sanskrit word is śraddhā, "respectful." Śraddadhānā. So this śraddhā, ādau śraddhā... The beginning is śraddhā, faith.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB1727VrndavanaSeptember241976_7" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="182" link="Lecture on SB 1.7.27 -- Vrndavana, September 24, 1976" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.7.27 -- Vrndavana, September 24, 1976">
<div class="heading">That is not śraddhā; that is whims. And śraddhā means when you firmly believe on the words of Kṛṣṇa, that Kṛṣṇa said, sarva-dharmān parityajya mām ekaṁ śaraṇaṁ vraja (BG 18.66). Therefore Kṛṣṇadāsa Kavirāja Gosvāmī said, śraddhā-śabde viśvāsa kahe sudṛḍha niścaya (Cc. Madhya 22.62).
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.7.27 -- Vrndavana, September 24, 1976|Lecture on SB 1.7.27 -- Vrndavana, September 24, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Ordinary śraddhā is..., they are going this temple or another Kālī's temple or Durgā's temple. They say that "Everyone is all right." Yata mata tata patha: "Whatever you like." That is not śraddhā; that is whims. And śraddhā means when you firmly believe on the words of Kṛṣṇa, that Kṛṣṇa said, sarva-dharmān parityajya mām ekaṁ śaraṇaṁ vraja ([[Vanisource:BG 18.66|BG 18.66]]). Therefore Kṛṣṇadāsa Kavirāja Gosvāmī said, śraddhā-śabde viśvāsa kahe sudṛḍha niścaya (Cc. Madhya 22.62). Kṛṣṇa said that "Give up everything, I shall give you..." "Yes, it is fact. Why shall I bother with..." That is śraddhā. Viśvāsa kahe sudṛḍha niścaya. Sudṛḍha means very firm faith. Not flickering faith.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB11530LosAngelesDecember81973_8" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="298" link="Lecture on SB 1.15.30 -- Los Angeles, December 8, 1973" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.15.30 -- Los Angeles, December 8, 1973">
<div class="heading">That is called śraddhā. Śraddhā, real śraddhā means complete faith. That is described by Caitanya-caritāmṛta. Śraddhā-śabde viśvāsa kahe sudṛḍha niścaya (Cc. Madhya 22.62).
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.15.30 -- Los Angeles, December 8, 1973|Lecture on SB 1.15.30 -- Los Angeles, December 8, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Everyone can attain that bhāva stage. There is process. This process is described by Rūpa Gosvāmī how to come to the bhāva stage. Bhāva stage means just prior to perfection. One must come to the bhāva stage, next stage is perfection. Next stage is full perfection. So how to come to this bhāva stage, that is Rūpa Gosvāmī has described, ādau śraddhā. First of all little faith. Just like many outsider also come here, "What these people are doing, these Kṛṣṇa consciousness men? So let us see." So śraddhā. That is called śraddhā. Śraddhā, real śraddhā means complete faith. That is described by Caitanya-caritāmṛta. Śraddhā-śabde viśvāsa kahe sudṛḍha niścaya (Cc. Madhya 22.62). One who has got this much faith, strong faith, that Kṛṣṇa is the Supreme Personality of Godhead, this faith, not flickering, firm faith, "Yes, Kṛṣṇa is the Supreme Personality..." That is called śraddhā.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB32536BombayDecember51974_9" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="457" link="Lecture on SB 3.25.36 -- Bombay, December 5, 1974" link_text="Lecture on SB 3.25.36 -- Bombay, December 5, 1974">
<div class="heading">These are the gradual steps. Śraddhā. Śraddhā means faith. Faith is the beginning. Without faith, you cannot make..., there is no question of Kṛṣṇa consciousness.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 3.25.36 -- Bombay, December 5, 1974|Lecture on SB 3.25.36 -- Bombay, December 5, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">These are the gradual steps. Śraddhā. Śraddhā means faith. Faith is the beginning. Without faith, you cannot make..., there is no question of Kṛṣṇa consciousness. Faith means that faith is created after reading Bhagavad-gītā. If you read Bhagavad-gītā carefully and if you actually understand Bhagavad-gītā as it is, then the faith will be created. Without reading Bhagavad-gītā, there is no question of faith in Kṛṣṇa. So what is that faith? That Kṛṣṇa says that sarva-dharmān parityajya mām ekaṁ śaraṇaṁ vraja: ([[Vanisource:BG 18.66|BG 18.66]]) "You give up all other engagements. You just surrender to Me, and I shall give you protection." So if we have got faith, if we believe in the words of Kṛṣṇa, that is called faith. If we don't believe in the words of Kṛṣṇa, if we study as a literary thesis and then throw it away, that is not faith.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB552BostonApril281969_10" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="525" link="Lecture on SB 5.5.2 -- Boston, April 28, 1969" link_text="Lecture on SB 5.5.2 -- Boston, April 28, 1969">
<div class="heading">So many things will come. Ādau śraddhā. The processes I have explained many, many times. Ādau śraddhā. Śraddhā means... Actually, what is called śraddhā? Exact meaning? Some faith. Or some attraction.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 5.5.2 -- Boston, April 28, 1969|Lecture on SB 5.5.2 -- Boston, April 28, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Similarly, the same process. Nobody is Kṛṣṇa conscious, but if he associates with the person Kṛṣṇa conscious, he'll feel the urge of Kṛṣṇa consciousness, and that is your qualification. Then he'll urge, oh, then he'll inquire, "Oh, what is Kṛṣṇa? What is Kṛṣṇa consciousness? How to have it? How to prosecute it? How to execute...?" So many things will come. Ādau śraddhā. The processes I have explained many, many times. Ādau śraddhā. Śraddhā means... Actually, what is called śraddhā? Exact meaning? Some faith. Or some attraction. Not attraction. Some faith. Just like people come here that they have little faith what is Kṛṣṇa, about Kṛṣṇa. Ādau śraddhā, that... If that faith is increased little more, then the association is also needed, sādhu-saṅga ([[Vanisource:CC Madhya 22.83|CC Madhya 22.83]]), those who are in Kṛṣṇa consciousness.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB611MelbourneMay211975_11" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="578" link="Lecture on SB 6.1.1 -- Melbourne, May 21, 1975" link_text="Lecture on SB 6.1.1 -- Melbourne, May 21, 1975">
<div class="heading">The process is generally ādau śraddhā. Ādau śraddhā, in the beginning... Just like you have come here with some honor or with some respect. That is called śraddhā. Śraddhā means faith: "All right, let us go there. What is this Kṛṣṇa conscious temple?"
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 6.1.1 -- Melbourne, May 21, 1975|Lecture on SB 6.1.1 -- Melbourne, May 21, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">The process is generally ādau śraddhā. Ādau śraddhā, in the beginning... Just like you have come here with some honor or with some respect. That is called śraddhā. Śraddhā means faith: "All right, let us go there. What is this Kṛṣṇa conscious temple?" This is the beginning, that you come. This is called śraddhā. Then if you like it, "Now, here the people, they speak nicely from the books," then you come daily or weekly and associate with the... Ādau śraddhā tato sādhu-saṅgaḥ. Sādhu-saṅgaḥ.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB772931SanFranciscoMarch151967incompletelecture_12" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="779" link="Lecture on SB 7.7.29-31 -- San Francisco, March 15, 1967, (incomplete lecture)" link_text="Lecture on SB 7.7.29-31 -- San Francisco, March 15, 1967, (incomplete lecture)">
<div class="heading">Śraddhayā tat-kathāyāṁ ca. He is further explaining. Śraddhayā, with faith and devotion, śraddhā. Śraddha means faith and devotion.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 7.7.29-31 -- San Francisco, March 15, 1967, (incomplete lecture)|Lecture on SB 7.7.29-31 -- San Francisco, March 15, 1967, (incomplete lecture)]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Śraddhayā tat-kathāyāṁ ca. He is further explaining. Śraddhayā, with faith and devotion, śraddhā. Śraddha means faith and devotion. So this faith and devotion is the beginning, is the basic principle of Kṛṣṇa consciousness. Adau śraddhā tato sādhu-saṅga tato bhajana-kriyā anartha-nivṛttiḥ syāt. This is the process. So here it is also said, śraddhayā tat-kathāyāṁ ca. When there is a speech about Kṛṣṇa, or about Bhagavad-gītā or Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam. So śraddhayā tat-kathā...</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB797MayapurFebruary141976_13" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="793" link="Lecture on SB 7.9.7 -- Mayapur, February 14, 1976" link_text="Lecture on SB 7.9.7 -- Mayapur, February 14, 1976">
<div class="heading">Hat kramaḥ pantha is the same, ādau śraddhā. Ādau śraddhā. Śraddha means faith. "Yes, Kṛṣṇa says that, sarva-dharmān parityajya mām ekam (BG 18.66), it is right.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 7.9.7 -- Mayapur, February 14, 1976|Lecture on SB 7.9.7 -- Mayapur, February 14, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">These are the kramaḥ. You cannot get prema state artificially, crying, falling down and then smoking bidi, this is not prema. Prema you have to learn by the kramaḥ pantha. That kramaḥ pantha is the same, ādau śraddhā. Ādau śraddhā. Śraddha means faith. "Yes, Kṛṣṇa says that, sarva-dharmān parityajya mām ekam ([[Vanisource:BG 18.66|BG 18.66]]), it is right." This is faith, this is beginning of faith. Now to keep the faith or to increase the faith, you have to live with faithful servants of Kṛṣṇa.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Nectar_of_Devotion_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="2" parent="Lectures" text="Nectar of Devotion Lectures"><h3>Nectar of Devotion Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="TheNectarofDevotionVrndavanaOctober181972_0" class="quote" parent="Nectar_of_Devotion_Lectures" book="Lec" index="5" link="The Nectar of Devotion -- Vrndavana, October 18, 1972" link_text="The Nectar of Devotion -- Vrndavana, October 18, 1972">
<div class="heading">Śraddhā means sudṛḍha niścaya viśvāsa. What is that viśvāsa? Kṛṣṇe bhakti kaile sarva-karma kṛta haya. If I worship only Kṛṣṇa, then all other duties are performed.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:The Nectar of Devotion -- Vrndavana, October 18, 1972|The Nectar of Devotion -- Vrndavana, October 18, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">This is called śraddhā, that "If I surrender to Kṛṣṇa, then all business of my life is done." This is called śraddhā. Not that sometimes I worship Lord Kṛṣṇa, sometimes Lord Śiva, sometimes goddess Kali, sometimes this, sometimes that. That is not śraddhā. Śraddhā means sudṛḍha niścaya viśvāsa. What is that viśvāsa? Kṛṣṇe bhakti kaile sarva-karma kṛta haya. If I worship only Kṛṣṇa, then all other duties are performed. Automatically. The example is just like if you pour water on the root of the tree, the transmission of the water is automatically done to the other branches, leaves, and everything.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="section" sec_index="5" parent="compilation" text="Conversations and Morning Walks"><h2>Conversations and Morning Walks</h2>
</div>
<div id="1973_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="sub_section" sec_index="6" parent="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" text="1973 Conversations and Morning Walks"><h3>1973 Conversations and Morning Walks</h3>
</div>
<div id="MorningWalkDecember51973LosAngeles_0" class="quote" parent="1973_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="90" link="Morning Walk -- December 5, 1973, Los Angeles" link_text="Morning Walk -- December 5, 1973, Los Angeles">
<div class="heading">Śraddhā is explained in Caitanya-caritāmṛta. Śraddhā means firm conviction. That is śraddhā. Just like Kṛṣṇa says that "I am the Supermost." So if you have firm conviction in Kṛṣṇa's words, that is śraddhā.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Morning Walk -- December 5, 1973, Los Angeles|Morning Walk -- December 5, 1973, Los Angeles]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Umāpati: Śraddhā. And I have heard it variously interpreted as meaning "faith" or "belief," which really falls short of that interpretation.</p>
<p>Prabhupāda: What is that interpretation?</p>
<p>Umāpati: Could you elaborate on the definition of śraddhā?</p>
<p>Prabhupāda: Śraddhā is explained in Caitanya-caritāmṛta. Śraddhā means firm conviction. That is śraddhā. Just like Kṛṣṇa says that "I am the Supermost." So if you have firm conviction in Kṛṣṇa's words, that is śraddhā.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="MorningWalkDecember51973LosAngeles_1" class="quote" parent="1973_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="90" link="Morning Walk -- December 5, 1973, Los Angeles" link_text="Morning Walk -- December 5, 1973, Los Angeles">
<div class="heading">The beginning of śraddhā means firm conviction.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Morning Walk -- December 5, 1973, Los Angeles|Morning Walk -- December 5, 1973, Los Angeles]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Umāpati: How it is increased?</p>
<p>Prabhupāda: The beginning of śraddhā means firm conviction.</p>
<p>Umāpati: How is it śraddhā does not exist in one person, and it does exist...</p>
<p>Prabhupāda: No, śraddhā is there. It has to be awakened.</p>
<p>Umāpati: Śraddhā is in every person then.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="MorningWalkDecember191973LosAngeles_2" class="quote" parent="1973_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="105" link="Morning Walk -- December 19, 1973, Los Angeles" link_text="Morning Walk -- December 19, 1973, Los Angeles">
<div class="heading">This is the version of Caitanya-caritāmṛta. Śraddhā means firm faith. Śraddhā-śabde viśvāsa kahe sudṛḍha niścaya. Firm faith. And firm faith is trust. "I trust you," means I have got firm faith in you.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Morning Walk -- December 19, 1973, Los Angeles|Morning Walk -- December 19, 1973, Los Angeles]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: This is the version of Caitanya-caritāmṛta. Śraddhā means firm faith. Śraddhā-śabde viśvāsa kahe sudṛḍha niścaya. Firm faith. And firm faith is trust. "I trust you," means I have got firm faith in you. Is it not? So trust means firm faith. Firm faith means... Now that "So long God is my order supplier, I trust in Him, and as soon as He refuses to supply my order, I don't trust Him," that is not firm faith. "God is putting me in distress; still, I trust Him. Or God is putting me in happiness; still, I trust Him." That is called firm faith. In any circumstances, the faith is not withdrawn. That is firm faith.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1974_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="sub_section" sec_index="7" parent="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" text="1974 Conversations and Morning Walks"><h3>1974 Conversations and Morning Walks</h3>
</div>
<div id="RoomConversationFebruary131974Vrndavana_0" class="quote" parent="1974_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="20" link="Room Conversation -- February 13, 1974, Vrndavana" link_text="Room Conversation -- February 13, 1974, Vrndavana">
<div class="heading">Śraddha means faith in spiritual master. They are praising your faith in...
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Room Conversation -- February 13, 1974, Vrndavana|Room Conversation -- February 13, 1974, Vrndavana]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Guru dāsa: What is that śraddhā?</p>
<p>Prabhupāda: Śraddha means faith in spiritual master. They are praising your faith in...</p>
<p>Dr. Kapoor: People are impressed very much by your guru-bhakti (laughter). (Hindi)</p>
<p>Guru dāsa: If they associated with Śrīla Prabhupāda they would...(break) (end)</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1975_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="sub_section" sec_index="8" parent="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" text="1975 Conversations and Morning Walks"><h3>1975 Conversations and Morning Walks</h3>
</div>
<div id="MorningWalkJuly211975SanFrancisco_0" class="quote" parent="1975_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="151" link="Morning Walk -- July 21, 1975, San Francisco" link_text="Morning Walk -- July 21, 1975, San Francisco">
<div class="heading">Therefore in the Caitanya-caritāmṛta it is said that viśvāsa śabde śudṛdha niścaya. Śudṛdha niścaya, kṛṣṇe bhakti kaile sarva-karma kṛta haya. Śraddhā, śraddhā. Śraddhā means faith. So in Christian science also, there is state, faithful. So this faith may be blind, but that is required.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Morning Walk -- July 21, 1975, San Francisco|Morning Walk -- July 21, 1975, San Francisco]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: Yes, that's fact. Therefore for the neophytes, less intelligent, they should believe. That is the only way, viśvāsa. So generally mass of people they are not so educated. They should believe.</p>
<p>Devotee (6): It says in the Bhāgavatam...</p>
<p>Prabhupāda: Therefore in the Caitanya-caritāmṛta it is said that viśvāsa śabde śudṛdha niścaya. Śudṛdha niścaya, kṛṣṇe bhakti kaile sarva-karma kṛta haya. Śraddhā, śraddhā. Śraddhā means faith. So in Christian science also, there is state, faithful. So this faith may be blind, but that is required.</p>
<p>Paramahaṁsa: Like a child.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1977_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="sub_section" sec_index="10" parent="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" text="1977 Conversations and Morning Walks"><h3>1977 Conversations and Morning Walks</h3>
</div>
<div id="MorningDarsanaandRoomConversationRamkrishnaBajajandfriendsJanuary91977Bombay_0" class="quote" parent="1977_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="25" link="Morning Darsana and Room Conversation Ramkrishna Bajaj and friends -- January 9, 1977, Bombay" link_text="Morning Darsana and Room Conversation Ramkrishna Bajaj and friends -- January 9, 1977, Bombay">
<div class="heading">That śraddhā means when you firmly believe in Kṛṣṇa: "Yes, He'll give me protection." That is surrender. Kṛṣṇe bhakti kaile sarva-karma kṛta haya.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Morning Darsana and Room Conversation Ramkrishna Bajaj and friends -- January 9, 1977, Bombay|Morning Darsana and Room Conversation Ramkrishna Bajaj and friends -- January 9, 1977, Bombay]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Have no more fear. Kṛṣṇa will give me protection." To believe firmly... "Kṛṣṇa is all powerful. Kṛṣṇa is my master. He is not a fakir, that He's talking nonsense." We have to believe that. This is surrender. If you think, "Kṛṣṇa is another fakir like me. He's talking nonsense," then that is not surrender. You have to believe that. That is explained in the Caitanya-caritāmṛta, that śraddhā śabde viśvāsa niścaya. This is śraddhā. Sraddha is the beginning. That śraddhā means when you firmly believe in Kṛṣṇa: "Yes, He'll give me protection." That is surrender. Kṛṣṇe bhakti kaile sarva-karma kṛta haya. When you come to this stage, firmly believe in the words of Kṛṣṇa, that is surrender. First of all, you have to check yourself whether you firmly believe in the words of God.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="MorningDarsanaandRoomConversationRamkrishnaBajajandfriendsJanuary91977Bombay_1" class="quote" parent="1977_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="25" link="Morning Darsana and Room Conversation Ramkrishna Bajaj and friends -- January 9, 1977, Bombay" link_text="Morning Darsana and Room Conversation Ramkrishna Bajaj and friends -- January 9, 1977, Bombay">
<div class="heading">This śraddhā means when you firmly believe that "Kṛṣṇa will give me all protection if I surrender." And that is the beginning of śraddhā.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Morning Darsana and Room Conversation Ramkrishna Bajaj and friends -- January 9, 1977, Bombay|Morning Darsana and Room Conversation Ramkrishna Bajaj and friends -- January 9, 1977, Bombay]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">That requires education, training. You have become a lawyer not in one day. You have been trained up. Then you are lawyer. Similarly, everyone has to be trained up how to become perfect servant, but he must agree in the beginning that "Now I shall become servant of Kṛṣṇa." Then everything is there. Ādau śraddhā tataḥ sādhu-saṅgo 'tha bhajana-kriyā tato 'nartha-nivṛttiḥ syāt tato niṣṭhā tato ruciḥ tataḥ athāsaktiḥ tato bhavaḥ (Cc. Madhya 23.14-15). These are the different stages. Ādau śraddhā: "Yes. Now Kṛṣṇa says, 'You surrender.' I'll surrender. I believe in this, firmly believe." Śraddhā-śabde viśvāsa sudṛḍha niścaya. This śraddhā means when you firmly believe that "Kṛṣṇa will give me all protection if I surrender." And that is the beginning of śraddhā.</p>
</div>
</div>
</div>

Bhakta means

2010-04-05T08:16:46Z

Partha-sarathi: Created page with '<div id="compilation"> <div id="facts"> {{terms|"bhakta means"}} {{notes|}} {{compiler|Partha-sarathi}} {{complete|ALL}} {{first|05Apr10}} {{last|05Apr10}} {{totals_by_section|BG…'

<div id="compilation">
<div id="facts">
{{terms|"bhakta means"}}
{{notes|}}
{{compiler|Partha-sarathi}}
{{complete|ALL}}
{{first|05Apr10}}
{{last|05Apr10}}
{{totals_by_section|BG=0|SB=1|CC=0|OB=0|Lec=22|Con=5|Let=0}}
{{total|28}}
{{toc right}}
[[Category:Meaning of Sanskrit Words]]
</div>
<div id="Srimad-Bhagavatam" class="section" sec_index="1" parent="compilation" text="Srimad-Bhagavatam"><h2>Srimad-Bhagavatam</h2>
</div>
<div id="SB_Canto_3" class="sub_section" sec_index="3" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam" text="SB Canto 3"><h3>SB Canto 3</h3>
</div>
<div id="SB33242_0" class="quote" parent="SB_Canto_3" book="SB" index="1351" link="SB 3.32.42" link_text="SB 3.32.42">
<div class="heading">In the beginning, no one can be elevated to the highest stage of devotional service. Here bhakta means one who does not hesitate to accept the reformatory processes for becoming a bhakta.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:SB 3.32.42|SB 3.32.42, Purport]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="purport text"><p style="display: inline;">In the beginning, no one can be elevated to the highest stage of devotional service. Here bhakta means one who does not hesitate to accept the reformatory processes for becoming a bhakta. In order to become a devotee of the Lord, one has to accept a spiritual master and inquire from him about how to progress in devotional service. To serve a devotee, to chant the holy name according to a certain counting method, to worship the Deity, to hear Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam or Bhagavad-gītā from a realized person and to live in a sacred place where devotional service is not disturbed are the first out of sixty-four devotional activities for making progress in devotional service. One who has accepted these five chief activities is called a devotee.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Lectures" class="section" sec_index="4" parent="compilation" text="Lectures"><h2>Lectures</h2>
</div>
<div id="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="0" parent="Lectures" text="Bhagavad-gita As It Is Lectures"><h3>Bhagavad-gita As It Is Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG214MexicoFebruary141975_0" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="70" link="Lecture on BG 2.14 -- Mexico, February 14, 1975" link_text="Lecture on BG 2.14 -- Mexico, February 14, 1975">
<div class="heading">Nobody is allowed to enter kingdom of God without becoming bhakta. (break) And there is no difficulty of becoming bhakta because the..., to become bhakta means four principles.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 2.14 -- Mexico, February 14, 1975|Lecture on BG 2.14 -- Mexico, February 14, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Nobody is allowed to enter kingdom of God without becoming bhakta. (break) And there is no difficulty of becoming bhakta because the..., to become bhakta means four principles. One thing is to always think of Kṛṣṇa. Man-manā bhava mad-bhaktaḥ. That is bhakta. Simply by thinking of Kṛṣṇa... That is Hare Kṛṣṇa. When you chant Hare Kṛṣṇa, you think of Kṛṣṇa. You become bhakta immediately. Then after becoming man-manā bhava, mad-yājī: "You worship Me," māṁ namaskuru, "and offer obeisances." It is very simple thing. If you think of Kṛṣṇa and if you offer little obeisances and if you worship Him, these three things will make you bhakta and you go back to home, back to Godhead. We are teaching this thing: chant Hare Kṛṣṇa, offer obeisances unto Deity and worship. Finish all business. So why they should go to the jñāna path? It requires so much knowledge and so much grammatical, so much nose pressing, so many things. You avoid all these things. Simply do these three things and you become bhakta. Why don't you take the easiest process and go back to home, back to Godhead? Thank you very much.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBGLectureExcerpts24445258NewYorkMarch251966_1" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="104" link="Lecture on BG Lecture Excerpts 2.44-45, 2.58 -- New York, March 25, 1966" link_text="Lecture on BG Lecture Excerpts 2.44-45, 2.58 -- New York, March 25, 1966">
<div class="heading">Bhakta means devotees, devotees, spiritual realization. The objective of spiritual goal is realized in three different phases: Brahman, Paramātmā, and Bhagavān.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG Lecture Excerpts 2.44-45, 2.58 -- New York, March 25, 1966|Lecture on BG Lecture Excerpts 2.44-45, 2.58 -- New York, March 25, 1966]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">This haṭha-yoga meditation means that our senses are engaged in varieties of work, so by that haṭha-yoga gymnastic, the process, the mind is concentrated into the Paramātmā, Supersoul. That means those who are too much bodily addicted, for them, this haṭha-yoga process is good, recommended. So yogi, the jñānī and the yogi and the bhakta. Bhakta means devotees, devotees, spiritual realization. The objective of spiritual goal is realized in three different phases: Brahman, Paramātmā, and Bhagavān. Brahman is impersonal conception of the Supreme. So these jñānīs, those who are proceeding through philosophical speculation and metaphysical analysis, they attain up to the impersonal Brahman. Those who are meditating by yogic process, they attain to the Paramātmā feature, or Supersoul. And those who are devotees, they attain the Supreme Personality of Godhead.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG41MontrealAugust241968_2" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="131" link="Lecture on BG 4.1 -- Montreal, August 24, 1968" link_text="Lecture on BG 4.1 -- Montreal, August 24, 1968">
<div class="heading">Bhakta means... Who is bhakta? Bhakta means one who has revived his eternal relationship with God. Sarvopādhi-vinirmuktam (CC Madhya 19.170).
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 4.1 -- Montreal, August 24, 1968|Lecture on BG 4.1 -- Montreal, August 24, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Bhakta means... Who is bhakta? Bhakta means one who has revived his eternal relationship with God. Sarvopādhi-vinirmuktam ([[Vanisource:CC Madhya 19.170|CC Madhya 19.170]]). Now in this body I am thinking, "I am American." How long I am American? I am American so long this body is there. That's all. I am thinking, "I am Indian." I am thinking, "I am brāhmaṇa," "I am this or that." Whatever I may think. How long? So long this body is there. And the next life? If you get a dog's body, then you'll think, "I am dog." If you get a cat's body, then you'll think "I am cat." So bhakta means not that superficial relationship. My relationship with the society, family, country, or humanity, they're all superficial because my body is superficial. The real relationship is with Kṛṣṇa. Mamaivāṁśo jīva-bhūtaḥ ([[Vanisource:BG 15.7|BG 15.7]]). "All these living entities are My part and parcels," Kṛṣṇa claims. Sarva-yoniṣu kaunteya sambhavanti mūrtayaḥ yāḥ ([[Vanisource:BG 14.4|BG 14.4]]). "In each and every species of life, as many forms as there are, they're all My parts and parcels." Kṛṣṇa (is) explaining like that.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG41MontrealAugust241968_3" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="131" link="Lecture on BG 4.1 -- Montreal, August 24, 1968" link_text="Lecture on BG 4.1 -- Montreal, August 24, 1968">
<div class="heading">So bhakta means when we revive our relationship, how I am connected with Kṛṣṇa. Then he is bhakta. Then he is bhakta.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 4.1 -- Montreal, August 24, 1968|Lecture on BG 4.1 -- Montreal, August 24, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So bhakta means when we revive our relationship, how I am connected with Kṛṣṇa. Then he is bhakta. Then he is bhakta. That relationship is pervertedly reflected in this material world. That relationship. Somebody is related with Kṛṣṇa as master and servant. That is reflected here also. There is master and servant, but both of them are cheating one another. The master is trying to exploit the servant, and the servant is trying to exploit the master. They are also forming unions, how to exact money from the capitalists, and the capitalists trying to exploit this labor from the laborers. So here, that master and servant is there, but both of them are cheaters and cheated. That's all. But if we really want to be master and servant, the supreme master is Kṛṣṇa and you engage yourself in His service.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG41MontrealAugust241968_4" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="131" link="Lecture on BG 4.1 -- Montreal, August 24, 1968" link_text="Lecture on BG 4.1 -- Montreal, August 24, 1968">
<div class="heading">So to become bhakta means either you become a friend of Kṛṣṇa or a servant of Kṛṣṇa or a lover of Kṛṣṇa or father of Kṛṣṇa or mother of Kṛṣṇa.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 4.1 -- Montreal, August 24, 1968|Lecture on BG 4.1 -- Montreal, August 24, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So the same relationship is there, but it is perverted reflection, and there is no happiness. But when we become bhakta or establish one's relationship with Kṛṣṇa... Just like Arjuna. Arjuna is bhakta. What kind of bhakta? Bhakto 'si me sakhā, sakhā ceti. "You are bhakta, at the same time My friend." So to become bhakta means either you become a friend of Kṛṣṇa or a servant of Kṛṣṇa or a lover of Kṛṣṇa or father of Kṛṣṇa or mother of Kṛṣṇa. In this way, there are so many. Or you become enemy of Kṛṣṇa. Just like Hiraṇyakaśipu.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG43BombayMarch231974_5" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="137" link="Lecture on BG 4.3 -- Bombay, March 23, 1974" link_text="Lecture on BG 4.3 -- Bombay, March 23, 1974">
<div class="heading">So bhakta means... Bhagavān, if there is Bhagavān, then there is bhakta, and there is bhakti. But these people are denying the existence of bhakta, Bhagavān.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 4.3 -- Bombay, March 23, 1974|Lecture on BG 4.3 -- Bombay, March 23, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Therefore Kṛṣṇa has said... This is the old. It is not new type of religion. It is the, it is the oldest. Bhagavad-bhakti. Bhagavān is there, and the living entities are there. Their relationship is there. Now, by forgetting God, forgetting Kṛṣṇa, we are busy with the problems, but we are forgetting the real problems. Therefore Kṛṣṇa says that bhakto 'si. One has to become bhakta. So bhakta means... Bhagavān, if there is Bhagavān, then there is bhakta, and there is bhakti. But these people are denying the existence of bhakta, Bhagavān. "There is no God." Now, how he can become bhakta? Or how there will be execution of bhakti? Bhakta, Bhagavān, bhakti. The same thing. Bhakta is in relationship with Bhagavān, and the transaction between Bhagavān and bhakta is called bhakti. Bhakti means ānukūlyena kṛṣṇānuśīlanam ([[Vanisource:CC Madhya 19.167|CC Madhya 19.167]]).</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG43BombayMarch231974_6" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="137" link="Lecture on BG 4.3 -- Bombay, March 23, 1974" link_text="Lecture on BG 4.3 -- Bombay, March 23, 1974">
<div class="heading">These are the definitions of bhakti. Bhakti, without bhakti, nobody can become bhakta. Bhakta means one who is executing bhakti. That is bhakta. And the beneficiary, the beneficiary is the Bhagavān.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 4.3 -- Bombay, March 23, 1974|Lecture on BG 4.3 -- Bombay, March 23, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">These are the definitions of bhakti. Bhakti, without bhakti, nobody can become bhakta. Bhakta means one who is executing bhakti. That is bhakta. And the beneficiary, the beneficiary is the Bhagavān.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG47BombayMarch271974_7" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="145" link="Lecture on BG 4.7 -- Bombay, March 27, 1974" link_text="Lecture on BG 4.7 -- Bombay, March 27, 1974">
<div class="heading">Bhakta means who has dedicated his life to serve Kṛṣṇa. That is bhakta.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 4.7 -- Bombay, March 27, 1974|Lecture on BG 4.7 -- Bombay, March 27, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">As the devotee wants to serve Kṛṣṇa, similarly, Kṛṣṇa also wants to give credit to His devotee. That is the business between the Lord and His devotee. So Kṛṣṇa could do everything. He was competent, everything. But He wanted to give the credit to Arjuna. That was His plan. Kṛṣṇa has already done everything. But Arjuna as a common man, he was talking with Kṛṣṇa. Actually, Arjuna also knew that "Kṛṣṇa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, it is my duty to serve Him." This was known to Arjuna. Therefore he is bhakta. Bhakta means who has dedicated his life to serve Kṛṣṇa. That is bhakta.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG101NewYorkDecember271966_8" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="328" link="Lecture on BG 10.1 -- New York, December 27, 1966" link_text="Lecture on BG 10.1 -- New York, December 27, 1966">
<div class="heading">Man-manā bhava mad-bhaktaḥ. Bhakta means we should be always ready to render loving service to Kṛṣṇa. That sort of thinking.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 10.1 -- New York, December 27, 1966|Lecture on BG 10.1 -- New York, December 27, 1966]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Man-manā bhava. Just thinking, just be always thinking of Me does not mean that you shall think of Kṛṣṇa, the Supreme Lord, as your enemy, but as your friend, or lovable object. Man-manā bhava mad-bhaktaḥ. Bhakta means we should be always ready to render loving service to Kṛṣṇa. That sort of thinking. Man-manā bhava mad-bhakto mad-yājī. Just become a worshiper of Kṛṣṇa. And māṁ namaskuru. And offer your obeisances unto Him. By following these four principles, mām evaiṣyasi asaṁśayaḥ ([[Vanisource:BG 18.65|BG 18.65]]). Kṛṣṇa says to Arjuna, "My dear Arjuna, if you follow these four principles, then surely you'll come back to Me, back to home, back to Godhead." This has already been explained in the last verse of ninth chapter.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG1318BombayOctober121973_9" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="366" link="Lecture on BG 13.18 -- Bombay, October 12, 1973" link_text="Lecture on BG 13.18 -- Bombay, October 12, 1973">
<div class="heading">When you hear... Bhakta means through the devotees, or you becoming devotee. There must be devotional service. And bhakti means sevonmukha, the attitude of rendering service to the Lord.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 13.18 -- Bombay, October 12, 1973|Lecture on BG 13.18 -- Bombay, October 12, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">There must be vairāgya. That vairāgya can be achieved by bha... Bhaktyā śruta-gṛhītayā. When you hear... Bhakta means through the devotees, or you becoming devotee. There must be devotional service. And bhakti means sevonmukha, the attitude of rendering service to the Lord. That is bhakti. Hṛṣīkeṇa hṛṣīkeśa-sevanaṁ bhaktir ucyate ([[Vanisource:CC Madhya 19.170|CC Madhya 19.170]]). Bhakti means when you engage your senses for the service of the master of the senses, Hṛṣīkeśa. That is called is bhakti. Bhakti is not sentiment.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG167SanandDecember261975_10" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="391" link="Lecture on BG 16.7 -- Sanand, December 26, 1975" link_text="Lecture on BG 16.7 -- Sanand, December 26, 1975">
<div class="heading">They are all devotees of the Lord; therefore they are called devatā. They are not pure devotees, but they are not disobedient to the orders of the Supreme Lord. Śuddha-bhakta means they do not come to the material world. Anyābhilāṣitā-śūnyam (Brs. 1.1.11), the śuddha-bhaktas, nitya, nitya-siddha, they do not come to this material world.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 16.7 -- Sanand, December 26, 1975|Lecture on BG 16.7 -- Sanand, December 26, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">No... And whatever it may be, why you are interpreting? You stop. In the upper planetary system, beginning from the sun, there are Sūryaloka, Candraloka, Maṅgala, Bhūr, Bṛhaspati, up to Saturn, there are different lokas. So the upper planetary system, beginning from Sūrya, they are called devaloka. They are all devotees of the Lord; therefore they are called devatā. They are not pure devotees, but they are not disobedient to the orders of the Supreme Lord. Śuddha-bhakta means they do not come to the material world. Anyābhilāṣitā-śūnyam (Brs. 1.1.11), the śuddha-bhaktas, nitya, nitya-siddha, they do not come to this material world. They are everlastingly liberated soul, engaged in the service of Nārāyaṇa. This material creation is exhibition of one-fourth energy of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. The three-fourth creation is in the spiritual world, Vaikuṇṭhaloka.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG1867AhmedabadDecember101972_11" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="405" link="Lecture on BG 18.67 -- Ahmedabad, December 10, 1972" link_text="Lecture on BG 18.67 -- Ahmedabad, December 10, 1972">
<div class="heading">Prākṛta-bhakta means sentiment. But jñānī-bhakta, one who becomes a devotee, knowing Kṛṣṇa, what He is, he's very important.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 18.67 -- Ahmedabad, December 10, 1972|Lecture on BG 18.67 -- Ahmedabad, December 10, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Yes. That jñānī does not mean nirbheda-brahmānusandhanaḥ(?). Jñānī, without jñāna, how one can become bhakta. Because the result of jñāna is to become brahma-bhūtaḥ. So those who are taking bhakti as sentiment, they may fall down. Sa bhaktaḥ prākṛtaḥ smṛtaḥ. Prākṛta-bhakta means sentiment. But jñānī-bhakta, one who becomes a devotee, knowing Kṛṣṇa, what He is, he's very important.</p>
<p>Devotee: Śrīla Prabhupāda, someone has put the question that: "Who will carry on this movement after you?"</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="1" parent="Lectures" text="Srimad-Bhagavatam Lectures"><h3>Srimad-Bhagavatam Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB1210DelhiNovember161973_0" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="60" link="Lecture on SB 1.2.10 -- Delhi, November 16, 1973" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.2.10 -- Delhi, November 16, 1973">
<div class="heading">In the yoga stage, there is control of the senses. So yogis, and then bhaktas. Karmī, jñānī, yogi, and bhakta. Bhakta means devotee.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.2.10 -- Delhi, November 16, 1973|Lecture on SB 1.2.10 -- Delhi, November 16, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">That I have explained last night. Then, out of many thousands of karmīs, one becomes jñānī, jñānī, in true knowledge. They are called jñānī. When one is fed up with this karmī, he comes to the stage of jñānī, knowledge, that "I am not this body. Why I am working so hard for this body like cats and dogs?" He comes to the platform of jñānī. Then above the jñānī, the yogi. Those who are trying to connect, link with the Supreme, they are called yogi. Yoga indriya-saṁyamaḥ. In the yoga stage, there is control of the senses. So yogis, and then bhaktas. Karmī, jñānī, yogi, and bhakta. Bhakta means devotee.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB1740VrndavanaOctober11976_1" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="189" link="Lecture on SB 1.7.40 -- Vrndavana, October 1, 1976" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.7.40 -- Vrndavana, October 1, 1976">
<div class="heading">Devotee means he's not blind. Yasyāsti bhaktir bhagavaty akiñcanā sarvair guṇais tatra samāsate surāḥ (SB 5.18.12). Bhagavad-bhakta means he will act in such a way that all qualified, nobody can criticize him. That is bhagavad-bhakta. Sarvair guṇais tatra samāsate surāḥ.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.7.40 -- Vrndavana, October 1, 1976|Lecture on SB 1.7.40 -- Vrndavana, October 1, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Therefore na aicchad dhantuṁ guru-sutam. He did not... Although Kṛṣṇa advised him "You kill him," he did not like it. Guru-sutam. This is consciousness. Even there is duty, we have to see what will be the effect of the duty. Not everything should be done very blindly. Arjuna... This is devotee. Devotee means he's not blind. Yasyāsti bhaktir bhagavaty akiñcanā sarvair guṇais tatra samāsate surāḥ ([[Vanisource:SB 5.18.12|SB 5.18.12]]). Bhagavad-bhakta means he will act in such a way that all qualified, nobody can criticize him. That is bhagavad-bhakta. Sarvair guṇais tatra samāsate surāḥ.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB3253940BombayDecember81974_2" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="460" link="Lecture on SB 3.25.39-40 -- Bombay, December 8, 1974" link_text="Lecture on SB 3.25.39-40 -- Bombay, December 8, 1974">
<div class="heading">So Kapiladeva is describing bhakti-yoga. Yesterday, last night, we have already discussed the previous verse. Then bhaktas yeṣām ahaṁ priya. Bhakta means who takes Kṛṣṇa or the Supreme Personality of Godhead as the most dears, dearest of everything.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 3.25.39-40 -- Bombay, December 8, 1974|Lecture on SB 3.25.39-40 -- Bombay, December 8, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So Kapiladeva is describing bhakti-yoga. Yesterday, last night, we have already discussed the previous verse. Then bhaktas yeṣām ahaṁ priya. Bhakta means who takes Kṛṣṇa or the Supreme Personality of Godhead as the most dears, dearest of everything. And ātmā sutaś ca sakhā guruḥ suhṛdo daivam iṣṭam. Everything. "Kṛṣṇa is my guru. Kṛṣṇa is my ātmā because I am part and parcel of Kṛṣṇa." Mamaivāṁśo jīva-bhūtaḥ ([[Vanisource:BG 15.7|BG 15.7]]). "So Kṛṣṇa is origin; I am part and parcel. Then Kṛṣṇa is my..." One who wants to love Kṛṣṇa as son... We have described already. Kṛṣṇa is prepared to become your son because we love sons. We offer respect to guru. We offer respect to devatā. So everything should be Kṛṣṇa. Yeṣām ahaṁ priya ātmā sutaś ca sakhā, friend. Just like Arjuna. He accepted Kṛṣṇa as his friend.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB559VrndavanaOctober311976_3" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="544" link="Lecture on SB 5.5.9 -- Vrndavana, October 31, 1976" link_text="Lecture on SB 5.5.9 -- Vrndavana, October 31, 1976">
<div class="heading">So bhakta means there must be Bhagavān. Sevya, sevaka, and sevā. Sevya sevaka sevā, three things. Sevya means who is to be served, the master, sevya.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 5.5.9 -- Vrndavana, October 31, 1976|Lecture on SB 5.5.9 -- Vrndavana, October 31, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Kṛṣṇa consciousness is described by Kṛṣṇa in the Bhagavad-gītā, man-manā bhava mad-bhaktaḥ. That's all. Always think of Me, man-manāḥ, and bhava mad-bhaktaḥ, be ready always to serve Me. Bhakta means, where there is bhakti and Bhagavān. Then bhakta. If there is no Bhagavān, and there is no activities to serve Bhagavān, there is no bhakta also. They are demons. So bhakta means there must be Bhagavān. Sevya, sevaka, and sevā. Sevya sevaka sevā, three things. Sevya means who is to be served, the master, sevya.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB6155LondonAugust131975_4" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="691" link="Lecture on SB 6.1.55 -- London, August 13, 1975" link_text="Lecture on SB 6.1.55 -- London, August 13, 1975">
<div class="heading">Bhakta means anyābhilāṣitā-śūnyaṁ jñāna-karmādy-anāvṛtam (Brs. 1.1.11). The bhakta has nothing to do with this jñāna and karma. Jñāna means to understand.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 6.1.55 -- London, August 13, 1975|Lecture on SB 6.1.55 -- London, August 13, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Bhakta means anyābhilāṣitā-śūnyaṁ jñāna-karmādy-anāvṛtam (Brs. 1.1.11). The bhakta has nothing to do with this jñāna and karma. Jñāna means to understand. So you understand simply that "I am part and parcel of Kṛṣṇa, and Kṛṣṇa is the Supreme Personality of Godhead." Then your jñāna is full. Your knowledge is full. These two words, that "Kṛṣṇa is the Supreme Personality of Godhead, and I am Kṛṣṇa's part and parcel," if we realize these things only, then our jñāna, our knowledge, is perfect. And then, as soon as knowledge is perfect, then next is vairāgya. Jñāna-vairāgya-yuktayā ([[Vanisource:SB 1.2.12|SB 1.2.12]]). Two things required.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB772931SanFranciscoMarch151967incompletelecture_5" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="779" link="Lecture on SB 7.7.29-31 -- San Francisco, March 15, 1967, (incomplete lecture)" link_text="Lecture on SB 7.7.29-31 -- San Francisco, March 15, 1967, (incomplete lecture)">
<div class="heading">Sādhu means a devotee, and bhakta means who is actually engaged in devotional service. With their association you have to develop, not with the karmīs.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 7.7.29-31 -- San Francisco, March 15, 1967, (incomplete lecture)|Lecture on SB 7.7.29-31 -- San Francisco, March 15, 1967, (incomplete lecture)]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So here Prahlāda Mahārāja does not recommend that you have to make your association with karmīs or you have to make your association with jñānīs or you have to make your association with the yogis. But here it is clearly stated, saṅgena sādhu-bhaktānām. Sādhu means a devotee, and bhakta means who is actually engaged in devotional service. With their association you have to develop, not with the karmīs. Who are karmīs? Karmīs means those who are after sense gratification.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Nectar_of_Devotion_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="2" parent="Lectures" text="Nectar of Devotion Lectures"><h3>Nectar of Devotion Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="TheNectarofDevotionVrndavanaOctober231972_0" class="quote" parent="Nectar_of_Devotion_Lectures" book="Lec" index="11" link="The Nectar of Devotion -- Vrndavana, October 23, 1972" link_text="The Nectar of Devotion -- Vrndavana, October 23, 1972">
<div class="heading">Anyone who has got the identification of this body, he is engaged in Deity worship, but he does not actually realize his self, he does not know who is a devotee, and he does not know his duty to other persons, he remains a prākṛta-bhakta. Prākṛta-bhakta means he's situated on the material platform, but under the direction of spiritual master, under the direction of the śāstras, he's trying to improve his condition of material existence.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:The Nectar of Devotion -- Vrndavana, October 23, 1972|The Nectar of Devotion -- Vrndavana, October 23, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">He's nothing more than a cow and an ass. So bhakti, devotional service begins when one is actually self-realized. Before that, sa bhaktaḥ prākṛtaḥ smṛtaḥ. Anyone who has got the identification of this body, he is engaged in Deity worship, but he does not actually realize his self, he does not know who is a devotee, and he does not know his duty to other persons, he remains a prākṛta-bhakta. Prākṛta-bhakta means he's situated on the material platform, but under the direction of spiritual master, under the direction of the śāstras, he's trying to improve his condition of material existence.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="TheNectarofDevotionVrndavanaOctober231972_1" class="quote" parent="Nectar_of_Devotion_Lectures" book="Lec" index="11" link="The Nectar of Devotion -- Vrndavana, October 23, 1972" link_text="The Nectar of Devotion -- Vrndavana, October 23, 1972">
<div class="heading">Madhyama-bhakta means he knows what is God, what is Kṛṣṇa. He knows what is Kṛṣṇa's devotee. He knows the people in general, and he knows the atheistic persons.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:The Nectar of Devotion -- Vrndavana, October 23, 1972|The Nectar of Devotion -- Vrndavana, October 23, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So we should not remain perpetually a prākṛta bhakta. We must improve, madhyama-bhakta. Madhyama-bhakta means he knows what is God, what is Kṛṣṇa. He knows what is Kṛṣṇa's devotee. He knows the people in general, and he knows the atheistic persons. Four categories of persons manifest before him. It is not that the... Artificially, if we say that "In my view, everyone is the same..." That is, of course, higher stage. Paṇḍitāḥ sama-darśinaḥ ([[Vanisource:BG 5.18|BG 5.18]]). But we should not imitate that stage. Because we are in the neophyte stage, we should not imitate the vision of mahā-bhāgavata. Mahā-bhāgavata does not see anyone nondevotee.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="TheNectarofDevotionVrndavanaNovember11972_2" class="quote" parent="Nectar_of_Devotion_Lectures" book="Lec" index="29" link="The Nectar of Devotion -- Vrndavana, November 1, 1972" link_text="The Nectar of Devotion -- Vrndavana, November 1, 1972">
<div class="heading">If one does not want to become advanced, if one does not want to become purified, then he remains a prakṛta-bhakta. Prakṛta-bhakta means executing devotional service under the instruction of spiritual master and the regulative principles of śāstra, but he's still on the platform of material understanding.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:The Nectar of Devotion -- Vrndavana, November 1, 1972|The Nectar of Devotion -- Vrndavana, November 1, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So this is the sūtra given by Nārada. Tat tenaiva vinirdiśet ([[Vanisource:SB 7.11.35|SB 7.11.35]]). So we must follow the path of mahājana, the instruction of the ācārya. Then we can become purified. And unless we are purified, there is no question of pure devotional service. Sa bhaktaḥ prakṛtaḥ smṛta. If one does not want to become advanced, if one does not want to become purified, then he remains a prakṛta-bhakta. Prakṛta-bhakta means executing devotional service under the instruction of spiritual master and the regulative principles of śāstra, but he's still on the platform of material understanding. That is called prakṛta-bhakta. A prakṛta-bhakta cannot understand how another bhakta is transcendental. A prakṛta-bhakta cannot understand that Vṛndāvana is always transcendental.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Festival_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="6" parent="Lectures" text="Festival Lectures"><h3>Festival Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="SrilaKrsnadasaKavirajaGosvamisAppearanceDayVrndavanaOctober191972_0" class="quote" parent="Festival_Lectures" book="Lec" index="31" link="Srila Krsnadasa Kaviraja Gosvami's Appearance Day -- Vrndavana, October 19, 1972" link_text="Srila Krsnadasa Kaviraja Gosvami's Appearance Day -- Vrndavana, October 19, 1972">
<div class="heading">And the lowest stage is called prākṛta-bhakta, means persons in material condition gradually being elevated to the supreme position of self-realization.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Srila Krsnadasa Kaviraja Gosvami's Appearance Day -- Vrndavana, October 19, 1972|Srila Krsnadasa Kaviraja Gosvami's Appearance Day -- Vrndavana, October 19, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">The first stage is called mahā-bhāgavata, liberated devotee. And the second stage is via media between the lowest stage and liberated stage. And the lowest stage is called prākṛta-bhakta, means persons in material condition gradually being elevated to the supreme position of self-realization. So Caitanya Mahāprabhu dealt with Sanātana Gosvāmī because he was to write one book for direction, Hari-bhakti-vilāsa. You know—his famous book. This is a book giving directions especially to the householders, how to keep oneself on the proper standard of Vaiṣṇava behavior.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="section" sec_index="5" parent="compilation" text="Conversations and Morning Walks"><h2>Conversations and Morning Walks</h2>
</div>
<div id="1974_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="sub_section" sec_index="7" parent="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" text="1974 Conversations and Morning Walks"><h3>1974 Conversations and Morning Walks</h3>
</div>
<div id="MorningWalkFebruary171974Bombay_0" class="quote" parent="1974_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="21" link="Morning Walk -- February 17, 1974, Bombay" link_text="Morning Walk -- February 17, 1974, Bombay">
<div class="heading">Yes, śānta-bhakta means the bhakta who appreciates the greatness of the Supreme, but does not take Kṛṣṇa as very intimate. That is śānta-bhakta.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Morning Walk -- February 17, 1974, Bombay|Morning Walk -- February 17, 1974, Bombay]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Dr. Patel: Mādhurya-bhakta is the best. Like gopīs. But that is very difficult to be.</p>
<p>Prabhupāda: No, best, it is just one's conception, you see? Otherwise, all are best. All are best. But śānta-bhaktas do not take Kṛṣṇa very intimately.</p>
<p>Dr. Patel: (laughs) You are... You take me below the belt.</p>
<p>Prabhupāda: Yes, śānta-bhakta means the bhakta who appreciates the greatness of the Supreme, but does not take Kṛṣṇa as very intimate. That is śānta-bhakta.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="MorningWalkFebruary171974Bombay_1" class="quote" parent="1974_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="21" link="Morning Walk -- February 17, 1974, Bombay" link_text="Morning Walk -- February 17, 1974, Bombay">
<div class="heading">Bhakta means he's already qualified with jñāna and vairāgya. That is bhakta.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Morning Walk -- February 17, 1974, Bombay|Morning Walk -- February 17, 1974, Bombay]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: No, no, yourself also. A bhaktas, they're not ajñānī. That is rascaldom. If says the bhaktas are ajñānī, that is rascaldom because Kṛṣṇa says, teṣām evānukampārtham aham ajñāna-jaṁ tamaḥ, nāśayāmi ([[Vanisource:BG 10.11|BG 10.11]]). If Kṛṣṇa helps him to become jñānī, then how he's ajñānī? It is a, ignorance, they say bhaktas are not jñānīs. Without jñāna, there is no question of bhakta. Jñāna-vairāgya-yuktayā ([[Vanisource:SB 1.2.12|SB 1.2.12]]). Bhakta means he's already qualified with jñāna and vairāgya. That is bhakta.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="MorningWalkJune51974Geneva_2" class="quote" parent="1974_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="98" link="Morning Walk -- June 5, 1974, Geneva" link_text="Morning Walk -- June 5, 1974, Geneva">
<div class="heading">Karmī means sense gratification, and bhakta means Kṛṣṇa's sense gratification.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Morning Walk -- June 5, 1974, Geneva|Morning Walk -- June 5, 1974, Geneva]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: So therefore service is for Kṛṣṇa. That's all. Not for his sense gratification. Karmī means sense gratification, and bhakta means Kṛṣṇa's sense gratification. That is the difference. Sense gratification is there. When you do it for your personal sense grati..., it is karma. And you do it for Kṛṣṇa's sense gratification, it is bhakti.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1975_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="sub_section" sec_index="8" parent="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" text="1975 Conversations and Morning Walks"><h3>1975 Conversations and Morning Walks</h3>
</div>
<div id="RoomConversationwithIndianGuestsMarch131975Tehran_0" class="quote" parent="1975_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="28" link="Room Conversation with Indian Guests -- March 13, 1975, Tehran" link_text="Room Conversation with Indian Guests -- March 13, 1975, Tehran">
<div class="heading">No, methods I have all explained. Kṛṣṇa bhakta means do what Kṛṣṇa says. That is Kṛṣṇa bhakti. Ānukūlyena kṛṣṇanu-śilānam (CC Madhya 19.167).
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Room Conversation with Indian Guests -- March 13, 1975, Tehran|Room Conversation with Indian Guests -- March 13, 1975, Tehran]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: No, methods I have all explained. Kṛṣṇa bhakta means do what Kṛṣṇa says. That is Kṛṣṇa bhakti. Ānukūlyena kṛṣṇanu-śilānam ([[Vanisource:CC Madhya 19.167|CC Madhya 19.167]]). Just like Arjuna did. He did not like to fight with his cousin-brothers, but after hearing instruction of Kṛṣṇa, he said, "Yes," naṣṭo mohaḥ, "my illusion is now over." Smṛtir labdhā: "I have got my consciousness." Kariṣye vacanaṁ tava: ([[Vanisource:BG 18.73|BG 18.73]]) "I shall act as You are saying, that's all." This is Kṛṣṇa bhakta. We may have different decisions. That is natural. But when you agree to abide by the orders of Kṛṣṇa, then your life is perfect. That is Kṛṣṇa consciousness. So you have to agree. Kṛṣṇa does not force; He says, "Do this like this," and if we agree, then we are Kṛṣṇa conscious.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1977_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="sub_section" sec_index="10" parent="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" text="1977 Conversations and Morning Walks"><h3>1977 Conversations and Morning Walks</h3>
</div>
<div id="EveningDarsanaMay91977Hrishikesh_0" class="quote" parent="1977_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="166" link="Evening Darsana -- May 9, 1977, Hrishikesh" link_text="Evening Darsana -- May 9, 1977, Hrishikesh">
<div class="heading">Bhakta means he must be a servant, sakha or father or conjugal lover. They are bhaktas. There are five rasas. So a bhakta is situated in one of them: śānta, dāsya, sākhya, vātsalya... That is Vṛndāvana atmosphere. So bhakta means either of them.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Evening Darsana -- May 9, 1977, Hrishikesh|Evening Darsana -- May 9, 1977, Hrishikesh]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: Bhakta means he must be a servant, sakha or father or conjugal lover. They are bhaktas. There are five rasas. So a bhakta is situated in one of them: śānta, dāsya, sākhya, vātsalya... That is Vṛndāvana atmosphere. So bhakta means either of them. Arjuna sākhye. By friendship Arjuna became perfect, by making Kṛṣṇa as friend. Hanumān dāsye. Vajrāṅgajī, Hanumān, he, by serving Lord Rāmacandra, the order... He was not even human being, animal, (indistinct), not very intelligent, but by giving service constantly, he worshiped with love. So as soon as you become a bhakta, you must be related with Kṛṣṇa with some rasa, in some particular position. That is bhakta. So the point is that without becoming a bhakta, nobody can understand bhakta.</p>
</div>
</div>
</div>

Jnana-yoga means

2010-04-04T15:13:05Z

Partha-sarathi: Created page with '<div id="compilation"> <div id="facts"> {{terms|"jnana-yoga means"}} {{notes|}} {{compiler|Partha-sarathi}} {{complete|ALL}} {{first|04Apr10}} {{last|04Apr10}} {{totals_by_sectio…'

<div id="compilation">
<div id="facts">
{{terms|"jnana-yoga means"}}
{{notes|}}
{{compiler|Partha-sarathi}}
{{complete|ALL}}
{{first|04Apr10}}
{{last|04Apr10}}
{{totals_by_section|BG=0|SB=0|CC=0|OB=0|Lec=5|Con=0|Let=0}}
{{total|5}}
{{toc right}}
[[Category:Jnana-yoga]]
[[Category:Meaning of Sanskrit Words]]
</div>
<div id="Lectures" class="section" sec_index="4" parent="compilation" text="Lectures"><h2>Lectures</h2>
</div>
<div id="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="0" parent="Lectures" text="Bhagavad-gita As It Is Lectures"><h3>Bhagavad-gita As It Is Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG24849NewYorkApril11966_0" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="107" link="Lecture on BG 2.48-49 -- New York, April 1, 1966" link_text="Lecture on BG 2.48-49 -- New York, April 1, 1966">
<div class="heading">Now, jñāna-yoga, take for example jñāna-yoga. Jñāna-yoga means to keep in touch with the Supreme by speculation of higher knowledge, that discriminating what is spirit and what is matter.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 2.48-49 -- New York, April 1, 1966|Lecture on BG 2.48-49 -- New York, April 1, 1966]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Now, there are three processes of yoga: jñāna-yoga, and karma-yoga, and bhakti-yoga. Now, jñāna-yoga, take for example jñāna-yoga. Jñāna-yoga means to keep in touch with the Supreme by speculation of higher knowledge, that discriminating what is spirit and what is matter. So there are philosophers, they are discriminating that "This is matter..." Neti neti: "This is matter, and this is spirit." Now, that requires study, and that requires knowledge also.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG43953NewYorkAugust241966_1" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="201" link="Lecture on BG 4.39-5.3 -- New York, August 24, 1966" link_text="Lecture on BG 4.39-5.3 -- New York, August 24, 1966">
<div class="heading">So there are many different kinds of yoga, but they have been divided into three: the jñāna-yoga, karma-yoga, and bhakti-yoga. Jñāna-yoga means realization of self by culture of philosophical discussion.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 4.39-5.3 -- New York, August 24, 1966|Lecture on BG 4.39-5.3 -- New York, August 24, 1966]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Everything, anything, any attempt, which we perform, which we do for spiritual realization is called yoga. Yoga. So there are many different kinds of yoga, but they have been divided into three: the jñāna-yoga, karma-yoga, and bhakti-yoga. Jñāna-yoga means realization of self by culture of philosophical discussion. That is called jñāna-yoga. And dhyāna-yoga... Oh. And karma-yoga... Karma-yoga means that the ordinary persons who are engaged in working...</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG61315LosAngelesFebruary161969_2" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="214" link="Lecture on BG 6.13-15 -- Los Angeles, February 16, 1969" link_text="Lecture on BG 6.13-15 -- Los Angeles, February 16, 1969">
<div class="heading">And jñāna-yoga means by, through philosophical process. By analytical process what is Brahman and what is not Brahman. Neti neti. That is jñāna-yoga.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 6.13-15 -- Los Angeles, February 16, 1969|Lecture on BG 6.13-15 -- Los Angeles, February 16, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Sāṅkhya-yoga is the aṣṭāṅga-yoga. This sitting posture and meditation, this is called sāṅkhya-yoga. And jñāna-yoga means by, through philosophical process. By analytical process what is Brahman and what is not Brahman. Neti neti. That is jñāna-yoga. Just like Vedānta-sūtra, jñāna-yoga. You study Vedānta-sūtra, it says janmādy asya yataḥ ([[Vanisource:SB 1.1.1|SB 1.1.1]]). They give one hint codes, that the Supreme Brahman, Absolute Truth is that from whom everything is emanated. Now we try to understand what must be that.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="1" parent="Lectures" text="Srimad-Bhagavatam Lectures"><h3>Srimad-Bhagavatam Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB32529BombayNovember291974_0" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="451" link="Lecture on SB 3.25.29 -- Bombay, November 29, 1974" link_text="Lecture on SB 3.25.29 -- Bombay, November 29, 1974">
<div class="heading">They think that bhakti-yoga is also karma. "These people are less intelligent, so they are in the... Because jñāna-yoga means vikarma or akarma, akarma.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 3.25.29 -- Bombay, November 29, 1974|Lecture on SB 3.25.29 -- Bombay, November 29, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">They think that bhakti-yoga is also karma. "These people are less intelligent, so they are in the... Because jñāna-yoga means vikarma or akarma, akarma. There is no resultant action." That is the view of the jñānīs, Māyāvādī philosophers. But because they see that the bhaktas they are working also just like ordinary man, therefore it is māyā, that is Māyāvāda. They think bhakti activities as māyā. Therefore we call them Māyāvāda.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Philosophy_Discussions" class="sub_section" sec_index="13" parent="Lectures" text="Philosophy Discussions"><h3>Philosophy Discussions</h3>
</div>
<div id="PhilosophyDiscussiononEdmundHusserl_0" class="quote" parent="Philosophy_Discussions" book="Lec" index="16" link="Philosophy Discussion on Edmund Husserl" link_text="Philosophy Discussion on Edmund Husserl">
<div class="heading">No. Jñāna-yoga does not think that. Jñāna-yoga means you have to receive jñāna, knowledge, from others.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Philosophy Discussion on Edmund Husserl|Philosophy Discussion on Edmund Husserl]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Devotee: Isn't that jñāna-yoga?</p>
<p>Prabhupāda: Hm?</p>
<p>Devotee: Isn't that the same thing as jñāna-yoga?</p>
<p>Prabhupāda: No. Jñāna-yoga does not think that. Jñāna-yoga means you have to receive jñāna, knowledge, from others.</p>
<p>Śyāmasundara: Just like he uses another example...</p>
<p>Prabhupāda: They are called adaksi (?). Adaksi, simply that sense perception. That's all. So they are not perfect.</p>
</div>
</div>
</div>

Karma-yoga means

2010-04-04T10:47:40Z

Partha-sarathi: Created page with '<div id="compilation"> <div id="facts"> {{terms|"karma-yoga means"}} {{notes|}} {{compiler|Partha-sarathi}} {{complete|ALL}} {{first|04Apr10}} {{last|04Apr10}} {{totals_by_sectio…'

<div id="compilation">
<div id="facts">
{{terms|"karma-yoga means"}}
{{notes|}}
{{compiler|Partha-sarathi}}
{{complete|ALL}}
{{first|04Apr10}}
{{last|04Apr10}}
{{totals_by_section|BG=0|SB=0|CC=0|OB=0|Lec=10|Con=2|Let=0}}
{{total|12}}
{{toc right}}
[[Category:Karma]]
[[Category:Meaning of Sanskrit Words]]
</div>
<div id="Lectures" class="section" sec_index="4" parent="compilation" text="Lectures"><h2>Lectures</h2>
</div>
<div id="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="0" parent="Lectures" text="Bhagavad-gita As It Is Lectures"><h3>Bhagavad-gita As It Is Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG315LosAngelesDecember201968_0" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="115" link="Lecture on BG 3.1-5 -- Los Angeles, December 20, 1968" link_text="Lecture on BG 3.1-5 -- Los Angeles, December 20, 1968">
<div class="heading">Yes. Karma-yoga means... Karma means action, fruitive action. Everyone is working in this world to get some result.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 3.1-5 -- Los Angeles, December 20, 1968|Lecture on BG 3.1-5 -- Los Angeles, December 20, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Yes. Karma-yoga means... Karma means action, fruitive action. Everyone is working in this world to get some result. Somebody is working in business, earning millions of dollars yearly. Why he is earning? He's earning for his sense gratification. As soon as he has got money, he changes his car, he changes his apartment, changes his standard of life only for increasing. The whole world is working so hard, and the result is that increasing their objects of sense gratification. This is called karma.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG41andReviewNewYorkJuly131966_1" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="130" link="Lecture on BG 4.1 and Review -- New York, July 13, 1966" link_text="Lecture on BG 4.1 and Review -- New York, July 13, 1966">
<div class="heading">Karma-yoga means you have to adopt this process of karma-yoga in such a way that even within your material body you shall be able to act on spiritual platform, consciousness. That we have already discussed.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 4.1 and Review -- New York, July 13, 1966|Lecture on BG 4.1 and Review -- New York, July 13, 1966]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Or spiritual emancipation we have to act on the platform of consciousness, and because we are now engaged in material engagement, it is not possible for us to at once get rid of this material consciousness, but we have gradually to get out of it. And that is called karma-yoga. Karma-yoga means you have to adopt this process of karma-yoga in such a way that even within your material body you shall be able to act on spiritual platform, consciousness. That we have already discussed.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG41MontrealAugust241968_2" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="131" link="Lecture on BG 4.1 -- Montreal, August 24, 1968" link_text="Lecture on BG 4.1 -- Montreal, August 24, 1968">
<div class="heading">Karma-yoga means just to dovetail your karma with yoga principles to arrive to the bhakti-yoga.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 4.1 -- Montreal, August 24, 1968|Lecture on BG 4.1 -- Montreal, August 24, 1968]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Devotee: And karma-yoga then?</p>
<p>Prabhupāda: Karma means sense gratification and bhakti-yoga means Kṛṣṇa's satisfaction.</p>
<p>Devotee: Well, karma-yoga...</p>
<p>Prabhupāda: Karma-yoga means just to dovetail your karma with yoga principles to arrive to the bhakti-yoga.</p>
<p>Devotee: To eventually arrive.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG43953NewYorkAugust241966_3" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="201" link="Lecture on BG 4.39-5.3 -- New York, August 24, 1966" link_text="Lecture on BG 4.39-5.3 -- New York, August 24, 1966">
<div class="heading">And karma-yoga... Karma-yoga means that the ordinary persons who are engaged in working...
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 4.39-5.3 -- New York, August 24, 1966|Lecture on BG 4.39-5.3 -- New York, August 24, 1966]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Now, Lord Kṛṣṇa says, "O Dhanañjaya, Arjuna, anyone who is working in the Kṛṣṇa consciousness, or yoga..." Yoga means God conscious, or Kṛṣṇa conscious. Everything, anything, any attempt, which we perform, which we do for spiritual realization is called yoga. Yoga. So there are many different kinds of yoga, but they have been divided into three: the jñāna-yoga, karma-yoga, and bhakti-yoga. Jñāna-yoga means realization of self by culture of philosophical discussion. That is called jñāna-yoga. And dhyāna-yoga... Oh. And karma-yoga... Karma-yoga means that the ordinary persons who are engaged in working...</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG43953NewYorkAugust241966_4" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="201" link="Lecture on BG 4.39-5.3 -- New York, August 24, 1966" link_text="Lecture on BG 4.39-5.3 -- New York, August 24, 1966">
<div class="heading">And karma-yoga... Karma-yoga means that the ordinary persons who are engaged in working...
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 4.39-5.3 -- New York, August 24, 1966|Lecture on BG 4.39-5.3 -- New York, August 24, 1966]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Now, Lord Kṛṣṇa says, "O Dhanañjaya, Arjuna, anyone who is working in the Kṛṣṇa consciousness, or yoga..." Yoga means God conscious, or Kṛṣṇa conscious. Everything, anything, any attempt, which we perform, which we do for spiritual realization is called yoga. Yoga. So there are many different kinds of yoga, but they have been divided into three: the jñāna-yoga, karma-yoga, and bhakti-yoga. Jñāna-yoga means realization of self by culture of philosophical discussion. That is called jñāna-yoga. And dhyāna-yoga... Oh. And karma-yoga... Karma-yoga means that the ordinary persons who are engaged in working...</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG64042NewYorkSeptember161966_5" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="221" link="Lecture on BG 6.40-42 -- New York, September 16, 1966" link_text="Lecture on BG 6.40-42 -- New York, September 16, 1966">
<div class="heading">Simply working is not karma-yoga. Karma-yoga means... It is described in the Bhagavad-gītā, yat karoṣi (BG 9.27). Whatever you are doing. Yat karoṣi yaj juhoṣi.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 6.40-42 -- New York, September 16, 1966|Lecture on BG 6.40-42 -- New York, September 16, 1966]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Therefore we have to follow the direction of authoritative persons, scriptures, to mold our life how to work. That is called karma-yoga. Simply working is not karma-yoga. Karma-yoga means... It is described in the Bhagavad-gītā, yat karoṣi ([[Vanisource:BG 9.27|BG 9.27]]). Whatever you are doing. Yat karoṣi yaj juhoṣi. Whatever you are sacrificing. Yad aśnāsi, whatever you are eating. Yad dadāsi, whatever you are giving in charity. Kuruṣva tad mad-arpaṇam, "give Me." "You want to give some charity, give Me," Kṛṣṇa says. But people will not give Kṛṣṇa. If the members of the Kṛṣṇa consciousness goes to some foundation, that "We are being doing this work. Give us some money." "No. Our money is meant for hospital and educational institution."</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG64647LosAngelesFebruary211969_6" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="224" link="Lecture on BG 6.46-47 -- Los Angeles, February 21, 1969" link_text="Lecture on BG 6.46-47 -- Los Angeles, February 21, 1969">
<div class="heading">Yes, the gradual progress of yoga system. Karma-yoga to jñāna-yoga. Karma-yoga means ordinary activities, fruitive activities.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 6.46-47 -- Los Angeles, February 21, 1969|Lecture on BG 6.46-47 -- Los Angeles, February 21, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Yes, the gradual progress of yoga system. Karma-yoga to jñāna-yoga. Karma-yoga means ordinary activities, fruitive activities. Ordinary activities means sinful activities also, but karma-yoga does not mean sinful activities. Only good, pious activities or prescribed activities. That is called karma-yoga. Then, by performing karma-yoga one comes to the platform of jñāna-yoga, knowledge. And from knowledge to this aṣṭāṅga-yoga, eightfold yoga system—dhyāna, dhāraṇā, prāṇāyāma, āsana—like that, those who are practicing the aṣṭāṅga-yoga. Then from aṣṭāṅga-yoga concentrating the mind on Viṣṇu come to the point of bhakti-yoga.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="1" parent="Lectures" text="Srimad-Bhagavatam Lectures"><h3>Srimad-Bhagavatam Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB1821MayapuraOctober11974_0" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="207" link="Lecture on SB 1.8.21 -- Mayapura, October 1, 1974" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.8.21 -- Mayapura, October 1, 1974">
<div class="heading">Karma-yoga... Yoga means connection with Kṛṣṇa, or God, but when there is the word karma-yoga, it is adulterated. It is not pure yoga. Karma-yoga means,
yat karoṣi yad aśnāsi
yaj juhoṣi dadāsi yat
yat tapasyasi kaunteya
tat kuruṣva mad-arpaṇam.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.8.21 -- Mayapura, October 1, 1974|Lecture on SB 1.8.21 -- Mayapura, October 1, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Karma-yoga... Yoga means connection with Kṛṣṇa, or God, but when there is the word karma-yoga, it is adulterated. It is not pure yoga. Karma-yoga means,</p>
<p>yat karoṣi yad aśnāsi</p>
<p>yaj juhoṣi dadāsi yat</p>
<p>yat tapasyasi kaunteya</p>
<p>tat kuruṣva mad-arpaṇam</p>
:([[Vanisource:BG 9.27|BG 9.27]])
<p>That is karma-yoga. Whatever you doing... In the beginning one cannot take to pure bhakti-yoga. Therefore karma-yoga is recommended: "Never mind whatever you doing. In that position you can become a devotee." Karma-yoga, that is.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB5533VrndavanaNovember201976_1" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="564" link="Lecture on SB 5.5.33 -- Vrndavana, November 20, 1976" link_text="Lecture on SB 5.5.33 -- Vrndavana, November 20, 1976">
<div class="heading">Karma-yoga means one who has got attachment for producing something, working something.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 5.5.33 -- Vrndavana, November 20, 1976|Lecture on SB 5.5.33 -- Vrndavana, November 20, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Those who are simply working hard day and night for sense gratification, they are no better than the hogs and dogs. They are no good. But karma-yoga is different thing. Karma-yoga means one who has got attachment for producing something, working something. So Kṛṣṇa said that "Yes, you can do, but," yat karoṣi yaj juhoṣi yad aśnāsi yat tapasyasi kuruṣva tad mad-ar... ([[Vanisource:BG 9.27|BG 9.27]]), "the result you must give to Me." Anāśritaḥ karma-phalaṁ kāryaṁ karma karoti yaḥ, sa sannyāsī ([[Vanisource:BG 6.1|BG 6.1]]).</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Sri_Caitanya-caritamrta_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="3" parent="Lectures" text="Sri Caitanya-caritamrta Lectures"><h3>Sri Caitanya-caritamrta Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonCCMadhyalila221420NewYorkJanuary101967_0" class="quote" parent="Sri_Caitanya-caritamrta_Lectures" book="Lec" index="110" link="Lecture on CC Madhya-lila 22.14-20 -- New York, January 10, 1967" link_text="Lecture on CC Madhya-lila 22.14-20 -- New York, January 10, 1967">
<div class="heading">Plus... Karma-yoga means karma, your working capacity, plus Kṛṣṇa consciousness; your speculative capacity plus Kṛṣṇa consciousness; your meditating capacity plus Kṛṣṇa consciousness.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on CC Madhya-lila 22.14-20 -- New York, January 10, 1967|Lecture on CC Madhya-lila 22.14-20 -- New York, January 10, 1967]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Now, it is clearly explained that if you simply prosecute the other system of yoga, then you'll never be able to reach to the final goal. Therefore it is tenth leg. Kṛṣṇa-bhakti vinā, unless you add to it Kṛṣṇa-bhakti... Plus... Karma-yoga means karma, your working capacity, plus Kṛṣṇa consciousness; your speculative capacity plus Kṛṣṇa consciousness; your meditating capacity plus Kṛṣṇa consciousness. When you make a plus, then it becomes successful. Kṛṣṇa consciousness minus karma or Kṛṣṇa consciousness minus knowledge, that will never be able to give you the desired result.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="section" sec_index="5" parent="compilation" text="Conversations and Morning Walks"><h2>Conversations and Morning Walks</h2>
</div>
<div id="1974_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="sub_section" sec_index="7" parent="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" text="1974 Conversations and Morning Walks"><h3>1974 Conversations and Morning Walks</h3>
</div>
<div id="MorningWalkApril11974Bombay_0" class="quote" parent="1974_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="51" link="Morning Walk -- April 1, 1974, Bombay" link_text="Morning Walk -- April 1, 1974, Bombay">
<div class="heading">Karma-yoga means yat karoṣi yaj juhoṣi kuruṣva tat mad-arpaṇam.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Morning Walk -- April 1, 1974, Bombay|Morning Walk -- April 1, 1974, Bombay]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: Unless one is inclined to take to devotion, it is not possible to take to karma-yoga. Who can sacrifice the profit?</p>
<p>Yaśomatīnandana: Does karma-yoga mean to follow exactly the śāstras?</p>
<p>Prabhupāda: Karma-yoga means yat karoṣi yaj juhoṣi kuruṣva tat mad-arpaṇam.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1976_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="sub_section" sec_index="9" parent="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" text="1976 Conversations and Morning Walks"><h3>1976 Conversations and Morning Walks</h3>
</div>
<div id="ConversationwithProfSaligramandDrSuklaJuly51976WashingtonDC_0" class="quote" parent="1976_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="186" link="Conversation with Prof. Saligram and Dr. Sukla -- July 5, 1976, Washington, D.C." link_text="Conversation with Prof. Saligram and Dr. Sukla -- July 5, 1976, Washington, D.C.">
<div class="heading">Karma-yoga means bhakti. That is the difficulty, that these Māyāvādīs, they have killed India's Vedic civilization. Now India is atheist. Very tragic position.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Conversation with Prof. Saligram and Dr. Sukla -- July 5, 1976, Washington, D.C.|Conversation with Prof. Saligram and Dr. Sukla -- July 5, 1976, Washington, D.C.]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Dr. Sukla: According to Bhagavad-gītā, all the karma should be done for Kṛṣṇa consciousness.</p>
<p>Prabhupāda: For Kṛṣṇa, yes. So that is bhakti-yoga. Yat karoṣi kuruṣva tad mad-arpaṇam. That is bhakti. Karma-yoga means bhakti. That is the difficulty, that these Māyāvādīs, they have killed India's Vedic civilization. Now India is atheist. Very tragic position.</p>
</div>
</div>
</div>

Yoga means...

2010-04-04T09:11:22Z

Partha-sarathi: Created page with '<div id="compilation"> <div id="facts"> {{terms|"yoga means"}} {{notes|}} {{compiler|Partha-sarathi}} {{complete|}} {{goal|0}} {{first|04Apr10}} {{last|04Apr10}} {{totals_by_sect…'

<div id="compilation">
<div id="facts">
{{terms|"yoga means"}}
{{notes|}}
{{compiler|Partha-sarathi}}
{{complete|}}
{{goal|0}}
{{first|04Apr10}}
{{last|04Apr10}}
{{totals_by_section|BG=5|SB=15|CC=0|OB=2|Lec=46|Con=0|Let=0}}
{{total|68}}
{{toc right}}
[[Category:Meaning of Sanskrit Words]]
[[Category:Yoga]]
</div>
<div id="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is" class="section" sec_index="0" parent="compilation" text="Bhagavad-gita As It Is"><h2>Bhagavad-gita As It Is</h2>
</div>
<div id="BG_Chapters_1_-_6" class="sub_section" sec_index="1" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is" text="BG Chapters 1 - 6"><h3>BG Chapters 1 - 6</h3>
</div>
<div id="BG239_0" class="quote" parent="BG_Chapters_1_-_6" book="BG" index="78" link="BG 2.39" link_text="BG 2.39">
<div class="heading">One should therefore understand that buddhi-yoga means to work in Kṛṣṇa consciousness, in the full bliss and knowledge of devotional service.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:BG 2.39|BG 2.39, Purport]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="purport text"><p style="display: inline;">One should therefore understand that buddhi-yoga means to work in Kṛṣṇa consciousness, in the full bliss and knowledge of devotional service. One who works for the satisfaction of the Lord only, however difficult such work may be, is working under the principles of buddhi-yoga and finds himself always in transcendental bliss. By such transcendental engagement, one achieves all transcendental understanding automatically, by the grace of the Lord, and thus his liberation is complete in itself, without his making extraneous endeavors to acquire knowledge. There is much difference between work in Kṛṣṇa consciousness and work for fruitive results, especially in the matter of sense gratification for achieving results in terms of family or material happiness.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="BG248_1" class="quote" parent="BG_Chapters_1_-_6" book="BG" index="86" link="BG 2.48" link_text="BG 2.48">
<div class="heading">Yoga means to concentrate the mind upon the Supreme by controlling the ever-disturbing senses. And who is the Supreme?
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:BG 2.48|BG 2.48, Purport]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="purport text"><p style="display: inline;">Kṛṣṇa tells Arjuna that he should act in yoga. And what is that yoga? Yoga means to concentrate the mind upon the Supreme by controlling the ever-disturbing senses. And who is the Supreme? The Supreme is the Lord. And because He Himself is telling Arjuna to fight, Arjuna has nothing to do with the results of the fight. Gain or victory are Kṛṣṇa's concern; Arjuna is simply advised to act according to the dictation of Kṛṣṇa. The following of Kṛṣṇa's dictation is real yoga, and this is practiced in the process called Kṛṣṇa consciousness. By Kṛṣṇa consciousness only can one give up the sense of proprietorship.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="BG249_2" class="quote" parent="BG_Chapters_1_-_6" book="BG" index="87" link="BG 2.49" link_text="BG 2.49">
<div class="heading">As already explained, buddhi-yoga means transcendental loving service to the Lord. Such devotional service is the right course of action for the living entity.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:BG 2.49|BG 2.49, Purport]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="purport text"><p style="display: inline;">One who has actually come to understand one's constitutional position as an eternal servitor of the Lord gives up all engagements save working in Kṛṣṇa consciousness. As already explained, buddhi-yoga means transcendental loving service to the Lord. Such devotional service is the right course of action for the living entity.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="BG_Chapters_7_-_12" class="sub_section" sec_index="2" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is" text="BG Chapters 7 - 12"><h3>BG Chapters 7 - 12</h3>
</div>
<div id="BG1010_0" class="quote" parent="BG_Chapters_7_-_12" book="BG" index="101" link="BG 10.10" link_text="BG 10.10">
<div class="heading">Now buddhi-yoga is explained. Buddhi-yoga itself is action in Kṛṣṇa consciousness; that is the highest intelligence. Buddhi means intelligence, and yoga means mystic activities or mystic elevation.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:BG 10.10|BG 10.10, Purport]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="purport text"><p style="display: inline;">In this verse the word buddhi-yogam is very significant. We may remember that in the Second Chapter the Lord, instructing Arjuna, said that He had spoken to him of many things and that He would instruct him in the way of buddhi-yoga. Now buddhi-yoga is explained. Buddhi-yoga itself is action in Kṛṣṇa consciousness; that is the highest intelligence. Buddhi means intelligence, and yoga means mystic activities or mystic elevation. When one tries to go back home, back to Godhead, and takes fully to Kṛṣṇa consciousness in devotional service, his action is called buddhi yoga.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="BG_Chapters_13_-_18" class="sub_section" sec_index="3" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is" text="BG Chapters 13 - 18"><h3>BG Chapters 13 - 18</h3>
</div>
<div id="BG1426_0" class="quote" parent="BG_Chapters_13_-_18" book="BG" index="52" link="BG 14.26" link_text="BG 14.26">
<div class="heading">Bhakti-yoga means that the Lord is there, the devotee is there and the activity of exchange of love between the Lord and the devotee is there.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:BG 14.26|BG 14.26, Purport]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="purport text"><p style="display: inline;">The Lord says that His nature is eternal, blissful and full of knowledge, and the living entities are part and parcel of the Supreme, as gold particles are part of a gold mine. Thus the living entity, in his spiritual position, is as good as gold, as good as Kṛṣṇa in quality. The difference of individuality continues, otherwise there would be no question of bhakti-yoga. Bhakti-yoga means that the Lord is there, the devotee is there and the activity of exchange of love between the Lord and the devotee is there.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Srimad-Bhagavatam" class="section" sec_index="1" parent="compilation" text="Srimad-Bhagavatam"><h2>Srimad-Bhagavatam</h2>
</div>
<div id="SB_Canto_1" class="sub_section" sec_index="1" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam" text="SB Canto 1"><h3>SB Canto 1</h3>
</div>
<div id="SB122829_0" class="quote" parent="SB_Canto_1" book="SB" index="51" link="SB 1.2.28-29" link_text="SB 1.2.28-29">
<div class="heading">Yoga means to get into touch with the Supreme Lord. The process, however, includes several bodily features such as āsana, dhyāna, prāṇāyāma and meditation, and all of them are meant for concentrating upon the localized aspect of Vāsudeva represented as Paramātmā.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:SB 1.2.28-29|SB 1.2.28-29, Purport]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="purport text"><p style="display: inline;">One may argue that the Vedic activities are based on sacrificial ceremonies. That is true. But all such sacrifices are also meant for realizing the truth about Vāsudeva. Another name of Vāsudeva is Yajña (sacrifice), and in the Bhagavad-gītā it is clearly stated that all sacrifices and all activities are to be conducted for the satisfaction of Yajña, or Viṣṇu, the Personality of Godhead. This is the case also with the yoga systems. Yoga means to get into touch with the Supreme Lord. The process, however, includes several bodily features such as āsana, dhyāna, prāṇāyāma and meditation, and all of them are meant for concentrating upon the localized aspect of Vāsudeva represented as Paramātmā. Paramātmā realization is but partial realization of Vāsudeva, and if one is successful in that attempt, one realizes Vāsudeva in full.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="SB1923_1" class="quote" parent="SB_Canto_1" book="SB" index="339" link="SB 1.9.23" link_text="SB 1.9.23">
<div class="heading">Yoga means concentration of the mind detached from all other subject matter. And actually such concentration is samādhi, or cent percent engagement in the service of the Lord.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:SB 1.9.23|SB 1.9.23, Purport]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="purport text"><p style="display: inline;">Yoga means concentration of the mind detached from all other subject matter. And actually such concentration is samādhi, or cent percent engagement in the service of the Lord. And one who concentrates his attention in that manner is called a yogī. Such a yogī devotee of the Lord engages himself twenty-four hours daily in the service of the Lord so that his whole attention is engrossed with the thoughts of the Lord in ninefold devotional service, namely hearing, chanting, remembering, worshiping, praying, becoming a voluntary servant, carrying out orders, establishing a friendly relationship, or offering all that one may possess, in the service of the Lord.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="SB1929_2" class="quote" parent="SB_Canto_1" book="SB" index="345" link="SB 1.9.29" link_text="SB 1.9.29">
<div class="heading">Perfection of yoga means attainment of such supermental states as to be able to leave the material body as desired. Yogīs can also reach any planet within no time without a material vehicle.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:SB 1.9.29|SB 1.9.29, Purport]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="purport text"><p style="display: inline;">N the Vedas these times are considered auspicious for quitting the body, and they are taken advantage of by the expert mystics who have perfected the system. Perfection of yoga means attainment of such supermental states as to be able to leave the material body as desired. Yogīs can also reach any planet within no time without a material vehicle.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="SB_Canto_3" class="sub_section" sec_index="3" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam" text="SB Canto 3"><h3>SB Canto 3</h3>
</div>
<div id="SB32034_0" class="quote" parent="SB_Canto_3" book="SB" index="797" link="SB 3.20.34" link_text="SB 3.20.34">
<div class="heading">Yoga means to link up with the Supreme Personality of Godhead, or to act in Kṛṣṇa consciousness.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:SB 3.20.34|SB 3.20.34, Purport]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="purport text"><p style="display: inline;">The demoniac can pay any price for the skin beauty of this material world. They work very hard all day and night, but the purpose of their hard work is to enjoy sex life. Sometimes they misrepresent themselves as karma-yogīs, not knowing the meaning of the word yoga. Yoga means to link up with the Supreme Personality of Godhead, or to act in Kṛṣṇa consciousness.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="SB32428_1" class="quote" parent="SB_Canto_3" book="SB" index="984" link="SB 3.24.28" link_text="SB 3.24.28">
<div class="heading">Complete practice of yoga means bhakti-yoga; unless one comes to the point of bhakti-yoga, or surrender unto the Supreme Personality of Godhead, one's yoga practice is not complete.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:SB 3.24.28|SB 3.24.28, Purport]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="purport text"><p style="display: inline;">Some important things are mentioned here about yoga. The word bahu janma-vipakvena means "after many, many births of mature yoga practice." And another word, samyag-yoga-samādhinā, means "by complete practice of the yoga system." Complete practice of yoga means bhakti-yoga; unless one comes to the point of bhakti-yoga, or surrender unto the Supreme Personality of Godhead, one's yoga practice is not complete. This same point is corroborated in the Śrīmad Bhagavad-gītā.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="SB32544_2" class="quote" parent="SB_Canto_3" book="SB" index="1046" link="SB 3.25.44" link_text="SB 3.25.44">
<div class="heading">Yoga means controlling the senses. The senses cannot be controlled in the proper sense of the term; they are always agitated.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:SB 3.25.44|SB 3.25.44, Purport]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="purport text"><p style="display: inline;">First of all, the mind should be engaged at the lotus feet of the Lord, very steadily and naturally. Because the mind is the master of the senses, when the mind is engaged, all the senses become engaged. That is bhakti-yoga. Yoga means controlling the senses. The senses cannot be controlled in the proper sense of the term; they are always agitated. This is true also with a child—how long can he be forced to sit down silently? It is not possible.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="SB32935_3" class="quote" parent="SB_Canto_3" book="SB" index="1223" link="SB 3.29.35" link_text="SB 3.29.35">
<div class="heading">Actually, yoga means meditation on the form of Lord Viṣṇu. If the yoga practice is actually performed according to the standard direction, there is no difference between yoga and bhakti-yoga.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:SB 3.29.35|SB 3.29.35, Purport]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="purport text"><p style="display: inline;">It is said herein that one can approach the Supreme Personality of Godhead by either the yoga process or the bhakti-yoga process. This indicates that factually there is no difference between yoga and bhakti-yoga because the target of both is Viṣṇu. In the modern age, however, a yoga process has been manufactured which aims at something void and impersonal. Actually, yoga means meditation on the form of Lord Viṣṇu. If the yoga practice is actually performed according to the standard direction, there is no difference between yoga and bhakti-yoga.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="SB_Canto_4" class="sub_section" sec_index="4" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam" text="SB Canto 4"><h3>SB Canto 4</h3>
</div>
<div id="SB4633_0" class="quote" parent="SB_Canto_4" book="SB" index="207" link="SB 4.6.33" link_text="SB 4.6.33">
<div class="heading">Yoga means meditation on the Supreme Personality of Godhead, and mahā-yoga means those who engage in the devotional service of Viṣṇu.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:SB 4.6.33|SB 4.6.33, Purport]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="purport text"><p style="display: inline;">In this verse the word mahā-yogamaye is very significant. Yoga means meditation on the Supreme Personality of Godhead, and mahā-yoga means those who engage in the devotional service of Viṣṇu. Meditation means remembering, smaraṇam. There are nine different kinds of devotional service, of which smaraṇam is one process; the yogī remembers the form of Viṣṇu within his heart. Thus there were many devotees engaged in meditation on Lord Viṣṇu under the big banyan tree.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="SB42478_1" class="quote" parent="SB_Canto_4" book="SB" index="1056" link="SB 4.24.78" link_text="SB 4.24.78">
<div class="heading">The bhakti-yoga process is different, for bhakti-yoga means acting according to the order of the supreme authority.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:SB 4.24.78|SB 4.24.78, Purport]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="purport text"><p style="display: inline;">As long as one's mind is absorbed in fruitive activities, he has to manufacture plans for happiness. The bhakti-yoga process is different, for bhakti-yoga means acting according to the order of the supreme authority. When we act under the direction of supreme authority, we do not become entangled by fruitive results. For instance, Arjuna fought because the Supreme Personality of Godhead wanted him to; therefore he was not responsible for the outcome of the fighting.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="SB43016_2" class="quote" parent="SB_Canto_4" book="SB" index="1326" link="SB 4.30.16" link_text="SB 4.30.16">
<div class="heading">The word yoga means "acting on behalf of the Supreme Personality of Godhead."
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:SB 4.30.16|SB 4.30.16, Purport]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="purport text"><p style="display: inline;">In this age a woman is forbidden to marry her husband's brother. This system is still practiced in some of the hilly tracts of India. The Lord says: apṛthag-dharma-śīleyaṁ bhūyāt patny arpitāśayā. With the blessings of the Lord, all things are possible. The Lord especially blessed the girl to surrender equally to all brothers. Apṛthag-dharma, meaning "occupational duty without difference of purpose," is taught in Bhagavad-gītā. Bhagavad-gītā is divided into three primary divisions-karma-yoga, jñāna-yoga and bhakti-yoga. The word yoga means "acting on behalf of the Supreme Personality of Godhead."</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="SB_Canto_6" class="sub_section" sec_index="6" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam" text="SB Canto 6"><h3>SB Canto 6</h3>
</div>
<div id="SB6432_0" class="quote" parent="SB_Canto_6" book="SB" index="171" link="SB 6.4.32" link_text="SB 6.4.32">
<div class="heading">Yoga means bhakti-yoga because yogīs also accept the existence of the all-pervading Supreme Soul and try to see that Supreme Soul within their hearts.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:SB 6.4.32|SB 6.4.32, Purport]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="purport text"><p style="display: inline;">In this verse the word yoga-sāṅkhyayoḥ is very important. Yoga means bhakti-yoga because yogīs also accept the existence of the all-pervading Supreme Soul and try to see that Supreme Soul within their hearts. As stated in Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam (12.13.1), dhyānāvasthita-tad-gatena manasā paśyanti yaṁ yoginaḥ. The devotee tries to come directly in touch with the Supreme Personality of Godhead, whereas the yogī tries to find the Supersoul within the heart by meditation. Thus, both directly and indirectly, yoga means bhakti-yoga. Sāṅkhya, however, means physical study of the cosmic situation through speculative knowledge. This is generally known as jñāna-śāstra. The Sāṅkhyites are attached to the impersonal Brahman, but the Absolute Truth is known in three ways.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="SB_Canto_7" class="sub_section" sec_index="7" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam" text="SB Canto 7"><h3>SB Canto 7</h3>
</div>
<div id="SB7126_0" class="quote" parent="SB_Canto_7" book="SB" index="25" link="SB 7.1.26" link_text="SB 7.1.26">
<div class="heading">Bhakti-yoga means ānukūlyena kṛṣṇānuśīlanam: (CC Madhya 19.167) one should serve Kṛṣṇa very favorably. This is the real injunction.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:SB 7.1.26|SB 7.1.26, Purport]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="purport text"><p style="display: inline;">From this verse one should not conclude that because Kṛṣṇa is unaffected by favorable prayers or unfavorable blasphemy one should therefore blaspheme the Supreme Lord. This is not the regulative principle. Bhakti-yoga means ānukūlyena kṛṣṇānuśīlanam: ([[Vanisource:CC Madhya 19.167|CC Madhya 19.167]]) one should serve Kṛṣṇa very favorably. This is the real injunction. Here it is said that although an enemy thinks of Kṛṣṇa unfavorably, the Lord is unaffected by such antidevotional service.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="SB769_1" class="quote" parent="SB_Canto_7" book="SB" index="240" link="SB 7.6.9" link_text="SB 7.6.9">
<div class="heading">Therefore, bhakti-yoga means vairāgya-vidyā, the art that can help one develop a distaste for material enjoyment.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:SB 7.6.9|SB 7.6.9, Purport]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="purport text"><p style="display: inline;">To return home, back to Godhead, one must be completely free from material attachment. Therefore, bhakti-yoga means vairāgya-vidyā, the art that can help one develop a distaste for material enjoyment.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="SB_Canto_8" class="sub_section" sec_index="8" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam" text="SB Canto 8"><h3>SB Canto 8</h3>
</div>
<div id="SB86Summary_0" class="quote" parent="SB_Canto_8" book="SB" index="152" link="SB 8.6 Summary" link_text="SB 8.6 Summary">
<div class="heading">As stated in Bhagavad-gītā (10.10), dadāmi buddhi-yogaṁ tam. Buddhi-yoga means bhakti-yoga. Only through the process of bhakti-yoga can one understand the Supreme Lord.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:SB 8.6 Summary|SB 8.6 Summary]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">The Supreme Personality of Godhead controls the entire material manifestation through His subordinate agent, the external energy. Because of His inconceivable transcendental position, He is always the master of the material energy. The Supreme Personality of Godhead, in His various forms, is always present even within this material world, but the material qualities cannot touch Him. One can understand His position only by His instructions, as given in Bhagavad-gītā." As stated in Bhagavad-gītā (10.10), dadāmi buddhi-yogaṁ tam. Buddhi-yoga means bhakti-yoga. Only through the process of bhakti-yoga can one understand the Supreme Lord.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="SB_Canto_101_to_1013" class="sub_section" sec_index="10" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam" text="SB Canto 10.1 to 10.13"><h3>SB Canto 10.1 to 10.13</h3>
</div>
<div id="SB1026_0" class="quote" parent="SB_Canto_10.1_to_10.13" book="SB" index="69" link="SB 10.2.6" link_text="SB 10.2.6">
<div class="heading">The word yoga means "link." Any system of yoga is an attempt to reconnect our broken relationship with the Supreme Personality of Godhead.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:SB 10.2.6|SB 10.2.6, Purport]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="purport text"><p style="display: inline;">The word yoga means "link." Any system of yoga is an attempt to reconnect our broken relationship with the Supreme Personality of Godhead. There are different types of yoga, of which bhakti-yoga is the best. In other yoga systems, one must undergo various processes before attaining perfection, but bhakti-yoga is direct.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Other_Books_by_Srila_Prabhupada" class="section" sec_index="3" parent="compilation" text="Other Books by Srila Prabhupada"><h2>Other Books by Srila Prabhupada</h2>
</div>
<div id="Renunciation_Through_Wisdom" class="sub_section" sec_index="5" parent="Other_Books_by_Srila_Prabhupada" text="Renunciation Through Wisdom"><h3>Renunciation Through Wisdom</h3>
</div>
<div id="RTW15_0" class="quote" parent="Renunciation_Through_Wisdom" book="OB" index="7" link="RTW 1.5" link_text="Renunciation Through Wisdom 1.5">
<div class="heading">What is needed is not this false karma-yoga but genuine buddhi-yoga, which Lord Kṛṣṇa several times explains in the Bhagavad-gītā. Buddhi-yoga means "devotion to the Supreme Lord."
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:RTW 1.5|Renunciation Through Wisdom 1.5]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Ordinary human activities are quite different from the activities recommended in the Śrīmad Bhagavad-gītā; understanding this difference is essential for us. In our times we find many fruitive workers who claim to be karma-yogīs but in fact are seen to enjoy the fruits of their labor. What is needed is not this false karma-yoga but genuine buddhi-yoga, which Lord Kṛṣṇa several times explains in the Bhagavad-gītā. Buddhi-yoga means "devotion to the Supreme Lord." The Lord says in the Gītā (10.10), "To those who are constantly devoted to serving Me with love, I give the understanding by which they can come to Me." Elsewhere in the Gītā (18.56) the Lord says, "One can understand Me as I am, as the Supreme Personality of Godhead, only by devotional service."</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="RTW51_1" class="quote" parent="Renunciation_Through_Wisdom" book="OB" index="39" link="RTW 5.1" link_text="Renunciation Through Wisdom 5.1">
<div class="heading">Abhyāsa-yoga means sincere engagement in the ninefold process of bhakti, beginning with hearing and chanting the holy name, pastimes, and so on, of Lord Kṛṣṇa. Proper execution of abhyāsa-yoga culminates in the awakening of divine consciousness, or superconsciousness.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:RTW 5.1|Renunciation Through Wisdom 5.1]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">When a person fixes his mind on the eternal, exquisite form of Śyāmasundara, the blackish, beautiful Lord Kṛṣṇa, all distress and anguish are vanquished. In the initial stages, the attempt to fix the mind on Kṛṣṇa may be unsuccessful, but with regulated practice (abhyāsa-yoga) it becomes possible. Abhyāsa-yoga means sincere engagement in the ninefold process of bhakti, beginning with hearing and chanting the holy name, pastimes, and so on, of Lord Kṛṣṇa. Proper execution of abhyāsa-yoga culminates in the awakening of divine consciousness, or superconsciousness. This is true success.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Lectures" class="section" sec_index="4" parent="compilation" text="Lectures"><h2>Lectures</h2>
</div>
<div id="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="0" parent="Lectures" text="Bhagavad-gita As It Is Lectures"><h3>Bhagavad-gita As It Is Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG12829LondonJuly221973_0" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="18" link="Lecture on BG 1.28-29 -- London, July 22, 1973" link_text="Lecture on BG 1.28-29 -- London, July 22, 1973">
<div class="heading">If you use... First of all fix up your mind. Yoga means indriya-saṁyama. Yoga practice means that controlling the mind and the senses.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 1.28-29 -- London, July 22, 1973|Lecture on BG 1.28-29 -- London, July 22, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So as my mind is absorbed in something, some subject matter, my bodily symptoms also will work, or the senses will work according to that mind. Therefore for spiritual advancement also, you have to train your mind. Sa vai manaḥ kṛṣṇa-padāravindayor vacāṁsi vaikuṇṭha-guṇānuvarṇane ([[Vanisource:SB 9.4.18|SB 9.4.18]]). If you use... First of all fix up your mind. Yoga means indriya-saṁyama. Yoga practice means that controlling the mind and the senses. That is yoga practice. Because our mind is very flickering and changing, something accepting immediately, something rejecting immediately, very flickering.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG131LondonJuly241973_1" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="20" link="Lecture on BG 1.31 -- London, July 24, 1973" link_text="Lecture on BG 1.31 -- London, July 24, 1973">
<div class="heading">Yoga means mystic power. Not this yoga, this playing some gymnastics. That is not yoga. Yoga means when one becomes perfect in yoga, he gets many siddhis.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 1.31 -- London, July 24, 1973|Lecture on BG 1.31 -- London, July 24, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Yoga means mystic power. Not this yoga, this playing some gymnastics. That is not yoga. Yoga means when one becomes perfect in yoga, he gets many siddhis. They are called aṣṭa-siddhi, eight kinds of siddhi. Aṇimā, laghimā, prāpti-siddhi, like that, so many. Īśitva, vaśitva. So a yogi, aṇimā, he can become the smaller than the smallest. We are already smaller than the smallest, because our real dimension, spiritual dimension, is one ten-thousandth part of the tip of the hair. This is our dimension. This is only outward covering, this body.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG131LondonJuly241973_2" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="20" link="Lecture on BG 1.31 -- London, July 24, 1973" link_text="Lecture on BG 1.31 -- London, July 24, 1973">
<div class="heading">But ultimate yoga means to get this power. That is yoga. So all these powers, they are simply fragmental. The yogis, they can attain.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 1.31 -- London, July 24, 1973|Lecture on BG 1.31 -- London, July 24, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">The two holes of the nostrils, one is blocked, one is open. So prāṇāyāma means to try to open the blocked side. That is called. So there are so many. But ultimate yoga means to get this power. That is yoga. So all these powers, they are simply fragmental. The yogis, they can attain. Although they can become, they are already smaller than the smallest. So Kṛṣṇa is the supreme master of all mystic power. Therefore He is called Yogeśvara.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG13235LondonJuly251973_3" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="21" link="Lecture on BG 1.32-35 -- London, July 25, 1973" link_text="Lecture on BG 1.32-35 -- London, July 25, 1973">
<div class="heading">Yoga means attempt to link with the supreme. That is called yoga. And viyoga means without any relationship, or without any attachment for the Supreme.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 1.32-35 -- London, July 25, 1973|Lecture on BG 1.32-35 -- London, July 25, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">That is also stated in the Bhagavad-gītā: śucīnāṁ śrīmatāṁ gehe yoga-bhraṣṭo 'bhijāyate ([[Vanisource:BG 6.41|BG 6.41]]). Yoga-bhraṣṭaḥ. Suppose one has begun yoga. Yoga means attempt to link with the supreme. That is called yoga. And viyoga means without any relationship, or without any attachment for the Supreme. Yoga means plus, and viyoga means minus. So plus. Plus means, one plus one equal to two.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG224HyderabadNovember281972_4" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="88" link="Lecture on BG 2.24 -- Hyderabad, November 28, 1972" link_text="Lecture on BG 2.24 -- Hyderabad, November 28, 1972">
<div class="heading">Yoga indriya-saṁyama. That is yoga. Yoga means not to show some magic. This is the first-class magic. If you are practicing yoga... I have seen so many so-called yogis, but they cannot control the sense for smoking.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 2.24 -- Hyderabad, November 28, 1972|Lecture on BG 2.24 -- Hyderabad, November 28, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Yoga indriya-saṁyama. That is yoga. Yoga means not to show some magic. This is the first-class magic. If you are practicing yoga... I have seen so many so-called yogis, but they cannot control the sense for smoking. You see. Smoking and so many things are going on. And still, they are passing on as yogi. What kind of yogi? Yogi means one who has controlled the senses. Śamena damena brahmacaryeṇa. There are... In the Bhagavad-gītā it is all explained where yoga system is described. And five thousand years ago, Arjuna was hearing about this yoga, controlling senses.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG224HyderabadNovember281972_5" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="88" link="Lecture on BG 2.24 -- Hyderabad, November 28, 1972" link_text="Lecture on BG 2.24 -- Hyderabad, November 28, 1972">
<div class="heading">Yoga means to meditate upon Viṣṇu. That was possible in the Satya-yuga. Just like Vālmīki. He meditated for sixty-thousands of years, and became perfect.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 2.24 -- Hyderabad, November 28, 1972|Lecture on BG 2.24 -- Hyderabad, November 28, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Five thousand years ago, how much favorable condition was there. And now, in such unfavorable condition, deteriorated condition, you want to become a so-called yogi? It is not possible. Kṛte yad dhyāyato viṣṇum ([[Vanisource:SB 12.3.52|SB 12.3.52]]). Yoga means to meditate upon Viṣṇu. That was possible in the Satya-yuga. Just like Vālmīki. He meditated for sixty-thousands of years, and became perfect. So who is going to live for sixty-thousand years? So it is not possible. So therefore Kṛṣṇa, to encourage him...</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG239LondonSeptember121973_6" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="101" link="Lecture on BG 2.39 -- London, September 12, 1973" link_text="Lecture on BG 2.39 -- London, September 12, 1973">
<div class="heading">So Kṛṣṇa has described so far... Sāṅkhya yoga means analytical study of the soul and the body. He has very nicely...
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 2.39 -- London, September 12, 1973|Lecture on BG 2.39 -- London, September 12, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So Kṛṣṇa has described so far... Sāṅkhya yoga means analytical study of the soul and the body. He has very nicely... So this analytical study of the soul and body means so far, He has described the activities of the body. That is sāṅkhya yoga. Just like a medical man has got full analysis—not full, to a portion—of this body, the anatomy, the physiology. They have studied how the veins are working, how different secretions are transforming into blood, how the heart is working.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG239LondonSeptember121973_7" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="101" link="Lecture on BG 2.39 -- London, September 12, 1973" link_text="Lecture on BG 2.39 -- London, September 12, 1973">
<div class="heading">Now buddhir yoge tv imām, another department of knowledge, buddhi-yoga. Buddhi-yoga means spiritual life.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 2.39 -- London, September 12, 1973|Lecture on BG 2.39 -- London, September 12, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So far the body is concerned, that is now fully analyzed. Now buddhir yoge tv imām, another department of knowledge, buddhi-yoga. Buddhi-yoga means spiritual life. That is buddhi-yoga. Just like you'll find in the Tenth Chapter. Kṛṣṇa says to Arjuna, buddhi-yogaṁ dadāmi tam. When there is talk between the spirit, supreme spirit, Kṛṣṇa and the individual spirit, subordinate spirit, the living entity... Kṛṣṇa is the Supreme Being, and we are subordinate being.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG239LondonSeptember121973_8" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="101" link="Lecture on BG 2.39 -- London, September 12, 1973" link_text="Lecture on BG 2.39 -- London, September 12, 1973">
<div class="heading">When you act according to the direction of the Supreme, Kṛṣṇa, or His representative, that is called buddhi-yoga. That is real... Buddhi means intelligence, and yoga means linking, connecting.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 2.39 -- London, September 12, 1973|Lecture on BG 2.39 -- London, September 12, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So when we act according to the direction of the Supreme... Because we are subordinate. This is our position. A subordinate position is that he must act according to the direction of the master or the supreme. That is natural. Everyone is acting like that. So that is called buddhi-yoga. When you act according to the direction of the Supreme, Kṛṣṇa, or His representative, that is called buddhi-yoga. That is real... Buddhi means intelligence, and yoga means linking, connecting.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG239LondonSeptember121973_9" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="101" link="Lecture on BG 2.39 -- London, September 12, 1973" link_text="Lecture on BG 2.39 -- London, September 12, 1973">
<div class="heading">So Kṛṣṇa is describing now buddhi-yoga. Buddhi-yoga means bhakti-yoga. This, this word, buddhi-yoga... Buddhi means intelligence.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 2.39 -- London, September 12, 1973|Lecture on BG 2.39 -- London, September 12, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So Kṛṣṇa is describing now buddhi-yoga. Buddhi-yoga means bhakti-yoga. This, this word, buddhi-yoga... Buddhi means intelligence. One who is very intelligent, he can take to Kṛṣṇa consciousness. Therefore bhakti-yoga's another name is buddhi-yoga. Buddhi-yoga. Because buddhi-yoga... There are many verses in the Bhagavad-gītā, you'll find.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG240LondonSeptember131973_10" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="102" link="Lecture on BG 2.40 - London, September 13, 1973" link_text="Lecture on BG 2.40 - London, September 13, 1973">
<div class="heading">So we have explained yesterday, buddhi-yoga. Buddhi-yoga means bhakti-yoga. So, svalpam apy asya dharmasya trāyate mahato bhayāt.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 2.40 - London, September 13, 1973|Lecture on BG 2.40 - London, September 13, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So we have explained yesterday, buddhi-yoga. Buddhi-yoga means bhakti-yoga. So, svalpam apy asya dharmasya trāyate mahato bhayāt. Bhakti-yoga, begun, some way or other, it has got great effect. There is story that in the Deity room, a lamp was burning. You know oil lamp has to be watched. Sometimes the wick has to be pushed. So the lamp was almost going to be extinguished. In the meantime a rat came there. He thought that it is something eatable. So he touched with mouth, the wick, and it became pushed. Simply by that action he got salvation. Just try to understand. Because he gave some service to the Deity.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG24849NewYorkApril11966_11" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="107" link="Lecture on BG 2.48-49 -- New York, April 1, 1966" link_text="Lecture on BG 2.48-49 -- New York, April 1, 1966">
<div class="heading">Yoga means keeping touch with the Supreme. That is called yoga.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 2.48-49 -- New York, April 1, 1966|Lecture on BG 2.48-49 -- New York, April 1, 1966]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I have given you several times the example that the sun is far, far away from us. Still, he can distribute his heat and light to us. So if we work with God consciousness, although we are here in this platform, material platform, that work is admitted by the Supreme Lord. That is called yoga-sthaḥ. Yoga-sthaḥ... Yoga means keeping touch with the Supreme. That is called yoga. There are different kinds of yoga mentioned in the Bhagavad-gītā, especially jñāna-yoga, karma-yoga, and bhakti-yoga.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG24849NewYorkApril11966_12" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="107" link="Lecture on BG 2.48-49 -- New York, April 1, 1966" link_text="Lecture on BG 2.48-49 -- New York, April 1, 1966">
<div class="heading">Now, jñāna-yoga, take for example jñāna-yoga. Jñāna-yoga means to keep in touch with the Supreme by speculation of higher knowledge, that discriminating what is spirit and what is matter.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 2.48-49 -- New York, April 1, 1966|Lecture on BG 2.48-49 -- New York, April 1, 1966]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Now, there are three processes of yoga: jñāna-yoga, and karma-yoga, and bhakti-yoga. Now, jñāna-yoga, take for example jñāna-yoga. Jñāna-yoga means to keep in touch with the Supreme by speculation of higher knowledge, that discriminating what is spirit and what is matter. So there are philosophers, they are discriminating that "This is matter..." Neti neti: "This is matter, and this is spirit." Now, that requires study, and that requires knowledge also.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG24951NewYorkApril51966_13" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="108" link="Lecture on BG 2.49-51 -- New York, April 5, 1966" link_text="Lecture on BG 2.49-51 -- New York, April 5, 1966">
<div class="heading">Dhanañjaya is another name of Arjuna. "My dear Dhanañjaya, buddhi-yogāt, by your intelligence..." And as we have explained, buddhi-yoga means devotional service to the Lord. So on the criterion of buddhi-yoga, on the criterion of devotional service to the Lord, you have to do everything.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 2.49-51 -- New York, April 5, 1966|Lecture on BG 2.49-51 -- New York, April 5, 1966]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">But we have to know the art, "Whether these activities are being done from the spiritual platform or from the material platform?" If we can discriminate in that way, as Lord Kṛṣṇa advises to Arjuna, dūreṇa hy avaraṁ karma buddhi-yogād dhanañjaya: "O Dhanañjaya..." Dhanañjaya is another name of Arjuna. "My dear Dhanañjaya, buddhi-yogāt, by your intelligence..." And as we have explained, buddhi-yoga means devotional service to the Lord. So on the criterion of buddhi-yoga, on the criterion of devotional service to the Lord, you have to do everything.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG25859NewYorkApril271966_14" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="112" link="Lecture on BG 2.58-59 -- New York, April 27, 1966" link_text="Lecture on BG 2.58-59 -- New York, April 27, 1966">
<div class="heading">Bhakti-yoga means devotional service. If it is applied, if we apply our devotional service unto the Supreme Lord Śrī Kṛṣṇa, then the result will be that janayaty āśu vairāgyam, very soon you'll be detached from this material attraction.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 2.58-59 -- New York, April 27, 1966|Lecture on BG 2.58-59 -- New York, April 27, 1966]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">But the easiest process is that if one is engaged in the devotional service. That is the formula given in Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam. Vāsudeve bhagavati. Vāsudeve bhagavati, "in the Personality of Godhead, Kṛṣṇa." Vāsudeva is Kṛṣṇa. Vāsudeve bhagavati bhakti-yogaḥ prayojitaḥ ([[Vanisource:SB 1.2.7|SB 1.2.7]]). Bhakti-yoga means devotional service. If it is applied, if we apply our devotional service unto the Supreme Lord Śrī Kṛṣṇa, then the result will be that janayaty āśu vairāgyam, very soon you'll be detached from this material attraction. Very soon. And jñānaṁ ca yad ahaitukam. And you'll gain also knowledge. You do not know how you have received knowledge. That is the magic. That is the magic. Because how you'll get knowledge? That is also stated in the Bhagavad-gītā.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG25969NewYorkApril291966_15" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="113" link="Lecture on BG 2.59-69 -- New York, April 29, 1966" link_text="Lecture on BG 2.59-69 -- New York, April 29, 1966">
<div class="heading">The whole process of yoga means indriya-saṁyama, controlling the senses. Controlling the senses. But I have seen. They have no control over senses.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 2.59-69 -- New York, April 29, 1966|Lecture on BG 2.59-69 -- New York, April 29, 1966]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">The whole process of yoga means indriya-saṁyama, controlling the senses. Controlling the senses. But I have seen. They have no control over senses. The whole yoga process means controlling the senses, nothing more. The haṭha-yoga means by different practice of āsana, posture or sitting posture or breathing posture... All these means concentrating myself, focusing my attention to the Supersoul.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG315LosAngelesDecember201968_16" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="115" link="Lecture on BG 3.1-5 -- Los Angeles, December 20, 1968" link_text="Lecture on BG 3.1-5 -- Los Angeles, December 20, 1968">
<div class="heading">Yes. Karma-yoga means... Karma means action, fruitive action. Everyone is working in this world to get some result. Somebody is working in business, earning millions of dollars yearly. Why he is earning? He's earning for his sense gratification.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 3.1-5 -- Los Angeles, December 20, 1968|Lecture on BG 3.1-5 -- Los Angeles, December 20, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Yes. Karma-yoga means... Karma means action, fruitive action. Everyone is working in this world to get some result. Somebody is working in business, earning millions of dollars yearly. Why he is earning? He's earning for his sense gratification. As soon as he has got money, he changes his car, he changes his apartment, changes his standard of life only for increasing. The whole world is working so hard, and the result is that increasing their objects of sense gratification. This is called karma.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG315LosAngelesDecember201968_17" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="115" link="Lecture on BG 3.1-5 -- Los Angeles, December 20, 1968" link_text="Lecture on BG 3.1-5 -- Los Angeles, December 20, 1968">
<div class="heading">That is called karma-yoga. Yoga means to link up with the Supreme, and karma... You are inclined to work. All right, work. But link up your result of work with Kṛṣṇa.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 3.1-5 -- Los Angeles, December 20, 1968|Lecture on BG 3.1-5 -- Los Angeles, December 20, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">That is called karma-yoga. Yoga means to link up with the Supreme, and karma... You are inclined to work. All right, work. But link up your result of work with Kṛṣṇa. That is called karma-yoga. Yoga means linking up with the Supreme, and karma, when it is linked up with Kṛṣṇa, that is called karma-yoga. It will be explained. Now go on.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG3610LosAngelesDecember231968_18" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="116" link="Lecture on BG 3.6-10 -- Los Angeles, December 23, 1968" link_text="Lecture on BG 3.6-10 -- Los Angeles, December 23, 1968">
<div class="heading">This is very important thing. Yoga indriya-saṁyamya. Yoga, the definition of yoga means sense control, controlling the sense.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 3.6-10 -- Los Angeles, December 23, 1968|Lecture on BG 3.6-10 -- Los Angeles, December 23, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">This is very important thing. Yoga indriya-saṁyamya. Yoga, the definition of yoga means sense control, controlling the sense. So here Kṛṣṇa says that you cannot control your senses artificially. It is not possible. Those who are trying... Just like some of the yogis, they close their eyes, "Oh, I'll not see beautiful woman." That is another practice, but that does not mean that he can control his senses. No. You cannot curb down the natural force of sense. This is the secret.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG31316NewYorkMay231966_19" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="120" link="Lecture on BG 3.13-16 -- New York, May 23, 1966" link_text="Lecture on BG 3.13-16 -- New York, May 23, 1966">
<div class="heading">Yoga means spiritual perfection or linking up with the Supreme.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 3.13-16 -- New York, May 23, 1966|Lecture on BG 3.13-16 -- New York, May 23, 1966]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">And therefore Lord Kṛṣṇa says that in order to reach to that stage of perfection, you should work. Your work should not be stopped. We have already discussed this point, that niyataṁ kuru karma tvaṁ karma jyāyo hy akarmaṇaḥ, that "Your prescribed duty should be prosecuted nicely. Go on. Don't stop it, but work for the life of karma-yoga. Karma-yoga. Ordinary work is called karma. Ordinary work is karma. And when it is added with yoga, that means spiritualized work. Yoga. Yoga means spiritual perfection or linking up with the Supreme.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG31316NewYorkMay231966_20" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="120" link="Lecture on BG 3.13-16 -- New York, May 23, 1966" link_text="Lecture on BG 3.13-16 -- New York, May 23, 1966">
<div class="heading">Yoga means in connection with the Supreme. That connection with the Supreme begins with this formula, yajña, sacrifice.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 3.13-16 -- New York, May 23, 1966|Lecture on BG 3.13-16 -- New York, May 23, 1966]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Similarly, this is our prison life. This material existence is our prison life. And prakṛti, nature, is the forceful agent. She is always enforcing us to do, to act. Prakṛteḥ kriyamāṇāni guṇaiḥ karmāṇi sarvaśaḥ ([[Vanisource:BG 3.27|BG 3.27]]). So this is going on. Now, if you want to get rid of this imprisonment, then you should begin this karma-yoga, karma plus yoga. Yoga means in connection with the Supreme. That connection with the Supreme begins with this formula, yajña, sacrifice.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG41andReviewNewYorkJuly131966_21" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="130" link="Lecture on BG 4.1 and Review -- New York, July 13, 1966" link_text="Lecture on BG 4.1 and Review -- New York, July 13, 1966">
<div class="heading">Karma-yoga means you have to adopt this process of karma-yoga in such a way that even within your material body you shall be able to act on spiritual platform, consciousness.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 4.1 and Review -- New York, July 13, 1966|Lecture on BG 4.1 and Review -- New York, July 13, 1966]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">For spiritual emancipation we have to act on the platform of consciousness, and because we are now engaged in material engagement, it is not possible for us to at once get rid of this material consciousness, but we have gradually to get out of it. And that is called karma-yoga. Karma-yoga means you have to adopt this process of karma-yoga in such a way that even within your material body you shall be able to act on spiritual platform, consciousness. That we have already discussed.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG41MontrealAugust241968_22" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="131" link="Lecture on BG 4.1 -- Montreal, August 24, 1968" link_text="Lecture on BG 4.1 -- Montreal, August 24, 1968">
<div class="heading">Yoga means bhakti. Somebody is addicted to these material activities. So they are advised to act in the terms of karma-yoga.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 4.1 -- Montreal, August 24, 1968|Lecture on BG 4.1 -- Montreal, August 24, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Yes, when you add this word yoga, that means bhakti. Yoga means bhakti. Somebody is addicted to these material activities. So they are advised to act in the terms of karma-yoga. What is that karma-yoga? The karma-yoga, if somebody is describing the Bhagavad-gītā, yat karoṣi. "Whatever you are doing, kuruṣva tad mad-arpaṇam.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG41MontrealAugust241968_23" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="131" link="Lecture on BG 4.1 -- Montreal, August 24, 1968" link_text="Lecture on BG 4.1 -- Montreal, August 24, 1968">
<div class="heading">Karma-yoga means just to dovetail your karma with yoga principles to arrive to the bhakti-yoga.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 4.1 -- Montreal, August 24, 1968|Lecture on BG 4.1 -- Montreal, August 24, 1968]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Devotee: And karma-yoga then?</p>
<p>Prabhupāda: Karma means sense gratification and bhakti-yoga means Kṛṣṇa's satisfaction.</p>
<p>Devotee: Well, karma-yoga...</p>
<p>Prabhupāda: Karma-yoga means just to dovetail your karma with yoga principles to arrive to the bhakti-yoga</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG49BombayMarch291974_24" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="151" link="Lecture on BG 4.9 -- Bombay, March 29, 1974" link_text="Lecture on BG 4.9 -- Bombay, March 29, 1974">
<div class="heading">Bhakti-yoga means, as I have repeatedly explained, that you have to forget your identification with the matter, sarvopādhi-vinirmuktam (CC Madhya 19.170).
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 4.9 -- Bombay, March 29, 1974|Lecture on BG 4.9 -- Bombay, March 29, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So spiritual activities means devotional service. Spiritual activities mean devotional service, activities in relationship with the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Bhakti-yoga. Bhakti-yoga means, as I have repeatedly explained, that you have to forget your identification with the matter, sarvopādhi-vinirmuktam ([[Vanisource:CC Madhya 19.170|CC Madhya 19.170]]).</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG49BombayMarch291974_25" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="151" link="Lecture on BG 4.9 -- Bombay, March 29, 1974" link_text="Lecture on BG 4.9 -- Bombay, March 29, 1974">
<div class="heading">These are useless, all bogus. Yoga means he has controlled his senses.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 4.9 -- Bombay, March 29, 1974|Lecture on BG 4.9 -- Bombay, March 29, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So this Kṛṣṇa consciousness movement means to train people to become the topmost yogi. Topmost yogi. Because they have controlled their senses. No meat eating, no intoxication, not even smoking or drinking tea. This is yoga (indistinct). Not that simply by pressing nose one becomes yogi. Practical life. After performing yoga, "Oh, my tongue is now dry, give me one bidi. (indistinct) one bidi." That is not yoga practice, smoking gañja, bidi, intoxication, tea, and he has become a yogi. These are useless, all bogus. Yoga means he has controlled his senses. Yoga indriya-samyamaḥ. The yoga practice means controlling the senses and engaging the mind on the lotus feet of Kṛṣṇa.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG426BombayApril151974_26" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="192" link="Lecture on BG 4.26 -- Bombay, April 15, 1974" link_text="Lecture on BG 4.26 -- Bombay, April 15, 1974">
<div class="heading">Yoga means indriya-saṁyama. Yoga indriya-saṁyamaḥ. The yogic practice is recommended for persons who are too much in the bodily concept of life.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 4.26 -- Bombay, April 15, 1974|Lecture on BG 4.26 -- Bombay, April 15, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So indriya-saṁyama, yoga. Yoga means indriya-saṁyama. Yoga indriya-saṁyamaḥ. The yogic practice is recommended for persons who are too much in the bodily concept of life. Anyone.... Why anyone? Practically any person. Therefore this yogic practice was recommended for general population so that they can control the senses. Gradually, one has to take to this platform of indriya-saṁyama or sattva-guṇa. Rajo-guṇa, sattva-guṇa and tamo-guṇa. So one has to promote himself to the platform of sattva-guṇa.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG43953NewYorkAugust241966_27" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="201" link="Lecture on BG 4.39-5.3 -- New York, August 24, 1966" link_text="Lecture on BG 4.39-5.3 -- New York, August 24, 1966">
<div class="heading">Karma-yoga means that the ordinary persons who are engaged in working...
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 4.39-5.3 -- New York, August 24, 1966|Lecture on BG 4.39-5.3 -- New York, August 24, 1966]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Now, Lord Kṛṣṇa says, "O Dhanañjaya, Arjuna, anyone who is working in the Kṛṣṇa consciousness, or yoga..." Yoga means God conscious, or Kṛṣṇa conscious. Everything, anything, any attempt, which we perform, which we do for spiritual realization is called yoga. Yoga. So there are many different kinds of yoga, but they have been divided into three: the jñāna-yoga, karma-yoga, and bhakti-yoga. Jñāna-yoga means realization of self by culture of philosophical discussion. That is called jñāna-yoga. And dhyāna-yoga... Oh. And karma-yoga... Karma-yoga means that the ordinary persons who are engaged in working...</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG537NewYorkAugust261966_28" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="202" link="Lecture on BG 5.3-7 -- New York, August 26, 1966" link_text="Lecture on BG 5.3-7 -- New York, August 26, 1966">
<div class="heading">Sāṅkhya-yoga means analytical study of these material elements.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 5.3-7 -- New York, August 26, 1966|Lecture on BG 5.3-7 -- New York, August 26, 1966]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Now Arjuna's question was that "You are engaging me sometimes in karma-yoga and sometimes in sannyāsa. So what is the real thing that You want me to do?" So Kṛṣṇa replied here that sāṅkhya-yogau pṛthag bālāḥ pravadanti na paṇḍitāḥ. Sāṅkhya-yoga. Sāṅkhya-yoga. Perhaps some of you or most of you know what is sāṅkhya-yoga, metaphysics, by Kapila, sāṅkhya-yoga. Sāṅkhya-yoga means analytical study of these material elements.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG537NewYorkAugust261966_29" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="202" link="Lecture on BG 5.3-7 -- New York, August 26, 1966" link_text="Lecture on BG 5.3-7 -- New York, August 26, 1966">
<div class="heading">And yoga means direct connection with the Lord, direct connection with the Lord. Just like in the darkness. In dark, in the darkness, you cannot see anything.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 5.3-7 -- New York, August 26, 1966|Lecture on BG 5.3-7 -- New York, August 26, 1966]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So study of, analytical study of this material world, they are not sufficient by themselves. You have to find out the spiritual power behind it. So sannyāsa means, generally, the sannyāsa, those who have taken up the renounced order of life, they search after the Supreme Truth and make an analytical study of this material world. That is called sāṅkhya-yoga. Kṛṣṇa says, sāṅkhya-yoga... Sāṅkhya and yoga. And yoga means direct connection with the Lord, direct connection with the Lord. Just like in the darkness. In dark, in the darkness, you cannot see anything. Suppose your room is closed and dark. You cannot see anything. But when you come to the light, you come to the sunlight, then you can see yourself and everything very nicely. So yoga, this word yoga, means to come in direct touch with the absolute light or Absolute Truth.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG614NewYorkSeptember21966_30" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="209" link="Lecture on BG 6.1-4 -- New York, September 2, 1966" link_text="Lecture on BG 6.1-4 -- New York, September 2, 1966">
<div class="heading">Yoga means to purify the process of our activities and to control the senses. Śrī-bhagavān uvāca. Bhagavān.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 6.1-4 -- New York, September 2, 1966|Lecture on BG 6.1-4 -- New York, September 2, 1966]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Today we shall begin the Sixth Chapter. In the Sixth Chapter you'll find the process of yoga. You have heard many times of the yoga system. That yoga system is approved by Bhagavad-gītā. But the system of yoga as prescribed in the Bhagavad-gītā, it is specially meant for purifying your status. Karma-śuddhasya vijitātmanaḥ. Karma-śuddhasya vijitātmanaḥ. To control the senses and to purify the process of work, that is the purpose of yoga. Yoga means to purify the process of our activities and to control the senses. Śrī-bhagavān uvāca. Bhagavān.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG625LosAngelesFebruary141969_31" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="210" link="Lecture on BG 6.2-5 -- Los Angeles, February 14, 1969" link_text="Lecture on BG 6.2-5 -- Los Angeles, February 14, 1969">
<div class="heading">Yoga means to join. Now in our conditional state, although we are part and parcel of the Supreme, but we are now separated.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 6.2-5 -- Los Angeles, February 14, 1969|Lecture on BG 6.2-5 -- Los Angeles, February 14, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Here is the point of yoga practice. Yoga means to join. Now in our conditional state, although we are part and parcel of the Supreme, but we are now separated. The same example. This finger is part and parcel of your body, but if it is separated, amputated, it has no value. But so long it is joined with this body, it's value is millions of dollars or more than that. If there is any disease you can spend any amount to cure. Similarly we at the present moment in the conditioned state of material existence, we are separated from God. Therefore we are so much reluctant to speak of God, to understand about God, our relationship with God.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG625LosAngelesFebruary141969_32" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="210" link="Lecture on BG 6.2-5 -- Los Angeles, February 14, 1969" link_text="Lecture on BG 6.2-5 -- Los Angeles, February 14, 1969">
<div class="heading">This is the perfectional stage of yoga system, yoga practice. A person is said to have attained to yoga, that means, yoga means connection.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 6.2-5 -- Los Angeles, February 14, 1969|Lecture on BG 6.2-5 -- Los Angeles, February 14, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">This is the perfectional stage of yoga system, yoga practice. A person is said to have attained to yoga, that means, yoga means connection. Just like, the same example. Suppose this finger was out of my body. Or don't take this finger, take any machine part. It is out of the machine, lying idle. And as soon as you join with the machine, it works with different functions.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG625LosAngelesFebruary141969_33" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="210" link="Lecture on BG 6.2-5 -- Los Angeles, February 14, 1969" link_text="Lecture on BG 6.2-5 -- Los Angeles, February 14, 1969">
<div class="heading">And yoga means connection with the Supreme. When the Supreme is connected, as soon as, just like Dhruva Mahārāja.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 6.2-5 -- Los Angeles, February 14, 1969|Lecture on BG 6.2-5 -- Los Angeles, February 14, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So my better standard of life does not mean any spiritual realization. A better standard of eating, sleeping, mating, that's all. So this is called fruitive activity. Fruitive activity is also another pattern of sense gratification but it is on the basis of sense gratification. And yoga means connection with the Supreme. When the Supreme is connected, as soon as, just like Dhruva Mahārāja. As soon as he saw God, Nārāyaṇa, the boy was undergoing severe austerities, penances to see God. He saw. But when he saw, then he said, svāmin kṛtārtho 'smi varaṁ na yāce ([[Vanisource:CC Madhya 22.42|CC Madhya 22.42]]).</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG625LosAngelesFebruary141969_34" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="210" link="Lecture on BG 6.2-5 -- Los Angeles, February 14, 1969" link_text="Lecture on BG 6.2-5 -- Los Angeles, February 14, 1969">
<div class="heading">Yoga means to control the senses. And above the sense, the mind. So if you control the mind, the senses are controlled automatically.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 6.2-5 -- Los Angeles, February 14, 1969|Lecture on BG 6.2-5 -- Los Angeles, February 14, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Therefore the highest perfectional yoga system is to control the mind. And you can control the mind very easily if you keep the lotus feet of Kṛṣṇa within you, that's all. Simply think of Kṛṣṇa and you are conqueror. You are victorious. You become topmost yogi. Because after all, the yoga system is, yoga indriya saṁyama. Yoga means to control the senses. And above the sense, the mind. So if you control the mind, the senses are controlled automatically. Your tongue wants to eat something nonsense, but if your mind is strong, mind says, "No. You cannot eat. You cannot eat anything except kṛṣṇa-prasāda."</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG6412NewYorkSeptember41966_35" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="211" link="Lecture on BG 6.4-12 -- New York, September 4, 1966" link_text="Lecture on BG 6.4-12 -- New York, September 4, 1966">
<div class="heading">Yoga means to... Because our whole life is disturbed due to the senses. Senses. This material life means sense gratification.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 6.4-12 -- New York, September 4, 1966|Lecture on BG 6.4-12 -- New York, September 4, 1966]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">The first qualification is called vijitendriyaḥ, sense control. Advancement in the yoga system means yoga indriya-saṁyamaḥ. Yoga means to... Because our whole life is disturbed due to the senses. Senses. This material life means sense gratification. That's all. The sum and substance of materialistic life means sense gratification. Therefore advancement of material science means giving you products for your sense gratification. Unnecessarily, so many things are produced just to satisfy my senses. That is the material advancement.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG61315LosAngelesFebruary161969_36" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="214" link="Lecture on BG 6.13-15 -- Los Angeles, February 16, 1969" link_text="Lecture on BG 6.13-15 -- Los Angeles, February 16, 1969">
<div class="heading">And jñāna-yoga means by, through philosophical process. By analytical process what is Brahman and what is not Brahman. Neti neti.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 6.13-15 -- Los Angeles, February 16, 1969|Lecture on BG 6.13-15 -- Los Angeles, February 16, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">āṅkhya-yoga is the aṣṭāṅga-yoga. This sitting posture and meditation, this is called sāṅkhya-yoga. And jñāna-yoga means by, through philosophical process. By analytical process what is Brahman and what is not Brahman. Neti neti. That is jñāna-yoga. Just like Vedānta-sūtra, jñāna-yoga. You study Vedānta-sūtra, it says janmādy asya yataḥ ([[Vanisource:SB 1.1.1|SB 1.1.1]]). They give one hint codes, that the Supreme Brahman, Absolute Truth is that from whom everything is emanated.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG61315LosAngelesFebruary161969_37" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="214" link="Lecture on BG 6.13-15 -- Los Angeles, February 16, 1969" link_text="Lecture on BG 6.13-15 -- Los Angeles, February 16, 1969">
<div class="heading">Bhakti-yoga means, the process is the same, target is the same.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 6.13-15 -- Los Angeles, February 16, 1969|Lecture on BG 6.13-15 -- Los Angeles, February 16, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">ñāna-yoga process means to search out the Absolute Truth or to understand the nature of the Absolute Truth by philosophical way. And this is called jñāna-yoga. And our is bhakti-yoga. Bhakti-yoga means, the process is the same, target is the same. One is trying to reach the supreme ultimate goal by philosophical way, one is trying to concentrate his mind on the supreme and the other, the bhaktas, they are simply engaging themselves to serve the Supreme Lord so He reveals.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG62529LosAngelesFebruary181969_38" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="217" link="Lecture on BG 6.25-29 -- Los Angeles, February 18, 1969" link_text="Lecture on BG 6.25-29 -- Los Angeles, February 18, 1969">
<div class="heading">So, yoga means to understand this self-realizing process. That is yoga. Go on.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 6.25-29 -- Los Angeles, February 18, 1969|Lecture on BG 6.25-29 -- Los Angeles, February 18, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">This is a Hindi verse by one devotee that this Kali-yuga is so abominable that if you speak truth, then people will come with some rod to beat you. But if you cheat them, bluff them. they'll be bewildered (?), they'll like it. If I say I'm God, people will say, "Oh, here is Swamiji, God." They won't inquire, that "How you have become God? What is the symptom of God? Have you got all the symptoms?" Nobody inquires. So these things happen. Unless one is not fixed up in the self, unless one does not understand what is real self, unless one does not understand what is Superself. So, yoga means to understand this self-realizing process. That is yoga. Go on.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG62529LosAngelesFebruary181969_39" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="217" link="Lecture on BG 6.25-29 -- Los Angeles, February 18, 1969" link_text="Lecture on BG 6.25-29 -- Los Angeles, February 18, 1969">
<div class="heading">Yoga means the whole yoga system means training. Our senses, our mind, our, this, that so many things.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 6.25-29 -- Los Angeles, February 18, 1969|Lecture on BG 6.25-29 -- Los Angeles, February 18, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So everything depends on training. That is yoga system. Yoga means the whole yoga system means training. Our senses, our mind, our, this, that so many things. Then we are fixed up in the self. Do you think that simply by fifteen minutes meditation we realize. And do all nonsense all the day? No. It requires training.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG63034LosAngelesFebruary191969_40" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="218" link="Lecture on BG 6.30-34 -- Los Angeles, February 19, 1969" link_text="Lecture on BG 6.30-34 -- Los Angeles, February 19, 1969">
<div class="heading">So concentration of yoga means to find out from the heart where Viṣṇu is sitting.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 6.30-34 -- Los Angeles, February 19, 1969|Lecture on BG 6.30-34 -- Los Angeles, February 19, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Yes, that example I have already given. As the sun can be present in many places simultaneously, similarly, Viṣṇu form or Kṛṣṇa can be present in everyone's heart, He is actually present: īśvaraḥ sarva-bhūtānāṁ hṛd-deśe 'rjuna ([[Vanisource:BG 18.61|BG 18.61]])—He's sitting. The localization is also stated. Hṛd-deśe. Hṛd-deśe means in the heart. So concentration of yoga means to find out from the heart where Viṣṇu is sitting. There is. Go on.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG64042NewYorkSeptember161966_41" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="221" link="Lecture on BG 6.40-42 -- New York, September 16, 1966" link_text="Lecture on BG 6.40-42 -- New York, September 16, 1966">
<div class="heading">Simply working is not karma-yoga. Karma-yoga means... It is described in the Bhagavad-gītā, yat karoṣi (BG 9.27). Whatever you are doing. Yat karoṣi yaj juhoṣi.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 6.40-42 -- New York, September 16, 1966|Lecture on BG 6.40-42 -- New York, September 16, 1966]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">But the spirit, as I am, I do not know wherefrom I have come, where I am going. Therefore we have to follow the direction of authoritative persons, scriptures, to mold our life how to work. That is called karma-yoga. Simply working is not karma-yoga. Karma-yoga means... It is described in the Bhagavad-gītā, yat karoṣi ([[Vanisource:BG 9.27|BG 9.27]]). Whatever you are doing. Yat karoṣi yaj juhoṣi. Whatever you are sacrificing. Yad aśnāsi, whatever you are eating. Yad dadāsi, whatever you are giving in charity. Kuruṣva tad mad-arpaṇam, "give Me."</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG64042NewYorkSeptember161966_42" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="221" link="Lecture on BG 6.40-42 -- New York, September 16, 1966" link_text="Lecture on BG 6.40-42 -- New York, September 16, 1966">
<div class="heading">Yoga means to link. We are part and parcel of the supreme absolute, Brahman or Bhagavān, whatever you call, Paramātmā, it doesn't matter.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 6.40-42 -- New York, September 16, 1966|Lecture on BG 6.40-42 -- New York, September 16, 1966]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Either any yoga system, any spiritual life is called yoga. Yoga means to link. We are part and parcel of the supreme absolute, Brahman or Bhagavān, whatever you call, Paramātmā, it doesn't matter. But yoga means linking. So the linking, either you link with impersonal formless, the Supreme Brahman, that is also linking.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG64647LosAngelesFebruary211969_43" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="224" link="Lecture on BG 6.46-47 -- Los Angeles, February 21, 1969" link_text="Lecture on BG 6.46-47 -- Los Angeles, February 21, 1969">
<div class="heading">Yoga means to keep your consciousness intact with Viṣṇu or Kṛṣṇa, the Supreme Lord. That is the perfection of yoga.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 6.46-47 -- Los Angeles, February 21, 1969|Lecture on BG 6.46-47 -- Los Angeles, February 21, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">That is the highest type of yoga. Yoga means to keep your consciousness intact with Viṣṇu or Kṛṣṇa, the Supreme Lord. That is the perfection of yoga. Here it is automatically, even the child can do it. The child is coming along with his mother and bowing down, "Kṛṣṇa, I bow down." So he is also Kṛṣṇa conscious.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG64647LosAngelesFebruary211969_44" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="224" link="Lecture on BG 6.46-47 -- Los Angeles, February 21, 1969" link_text="Lecture on BG 6.46-47 -- Los Angeles, February 21, 1969">
<div class="heading">Karma-yoga means ordinary activities, fruitive activities.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 6.46-47 -- Los Angeles, February 21, 1969|Lecture on BG 6.46-47 -- Los Angeles, February 21, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Yes, the gradual progress of yoga system. Karma-yoga to jñāna-yoga. Karma-yoga means ordinary activities, fruitive activities. Ordinary activities means sinful activities also, but karma-yoga does not mean sinful activities. Only good, pious activities or prescribed activities. That is called karma-yoga.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG64647LosAngelesFebruary211969_45" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="224" link="Lecture on BG 6.46-47 -- Los Angeles, February 21, 1969" link_text="Lecture on BG 6.46-47 -- Los Angeles, February 21, 1969">
<div class="heading">Bhakti-yoga means to understand God. Bhaktyā mām abhijānāti. You'll find in the Bhagavad-gītā, Eighteenth Chapter.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 6.46-47 -- Los Angeles, February 21, 1969|Lecture on BG 6.46-47 -- Los Angeles, February 21, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Bhakti-yoga is simply in connection with Kṛṣṇa. Bhakti-yoga cannot be applied to anyone, anything else. How Buddha philosophy can be dovetailed with bhakti-yoga? Bhakti-yoga means to understand God. Bhaktyā mām abhijānāti. You'll find in the Bhagavad-gītā, Eighteenth Chapter. By bhakti-yoga you can understand Lord, the Supreme Lord, God. But in Buddha philosophy there is no God? That you know? So where is bhakti-yoga?</p>
</div>
</div>
</div>

Visnu means

2010-04-03T13:17:22Z

Partha-sarathi: Created page with '<div id="compilation"> <div id="facts"> {{terms|"visnu means"}} {{notes|}} {{compiler|Partha-sarathi}} {{complete|ALL}} {{first|03Apr10}} {{last|03Apr10}} {{totals_by_section|BG=…'

<div id="compilation">
<div id="facts">
{{terms|"visnu means"}}
{{notes|}}
{{compiler|Partha-sarathi}}
{{complete|ALL}}
{{first|03Apr10}}
{{last|03Apr10}}
{{totals_by_section|BG=0|SB=1|CC=0|OB=0|Lec=23|Con=0|Let=0}}
{{total|24}}
{{toc right}}
[[Category:Meaning of Sanskrit Words]]
</div>
<div id="Srimad-Bhagavatam" class="section" sec_index="1" parent="compilation" text="Srimad-Bhagavatam"><h2>Srimad-Bhagavatam</h2>
</div>
<div id="SB_Canto_1" class="sub_section" sec_index="1" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam" text="SB Canto 1"><h3>SB Canto 1</h3>
</div>
<div id="SB11021_0" class="quote" parent="SB_Canto_1" book="SB" index="384" link="SB 1.10.21" link_text="SB 1.10.21">
<div class="heading">Viṣṇu means the Mahā-Viṣṇu, who is lying on the Causal Ocean.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:SB 1.10.21|SB 1.10.21, Purport]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="purport text"><p style="display: inline;">N the Śruti-mantra it is said that only Viṣṇu, the Supreme Lord, existed before the creation, and there was no Brahmā, Śiva or other demigods. Viṣṇu means the Mahā-Viṣṇu, who is lying on the Causal Ocean. By His breathing only all the universes are generated in seeds and gradually develop into gigantic forms with innumerable planets within each and every universe. The seeds of universes develop into gigantic forms in the way seeds of a banyan tree develop into numberless banyan trees.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Lectures" class="section" sec_index="4" parent="compilation" text="Lectures"><h2>Lectures</h2>
</div>
<div id="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="0" parent="Lectures" text="Bhagavad-gita As It Is Lectures"><h3>Bhagavad-gita As It Is Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG143LondonJuly301973_0" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="26" link="Lecture on BG 1.43 -- London, July 30, 1973" link_text="Lecture on BG 1.43 -- London, July 30, 1973">
<div class="heading">One who wants to satisfy Viṣṇu, he is called Vaiṣṇava. That is Vaiṣṇavism. Viṣṇu means the Supreme Lord.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 1.43 -- London, July 30, 1973|Lecture on BG 1.43 -- London, July 30, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So this is Vaiṣṇavism. One who wants to satisfy Viṣṇu, he is called Vaiṣṇava. That is Vaiṣṇavism. Viṣṇu means the Supreme Lord. So everything is arranged to satisfy the Lord Viṣṇu. So where from it begins? The cats and dogs, they can be trained up for satisfying Viṣṇu? No, there is no possibility. They are dogs, animals. They are simply busy with four principles of life: eating, sleeping, sex-life and defending. That's all. They cannot be trained up that "You become very obedient to Lord Viṣṇu. Become a devotee."</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG215LondonAugust211973_1" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="72" link="Lecture on BG 2.15 -- London, August 21, 1973" link_text="Lecture on BG 2.15 -- London, August 21, 1973">
<div class="heading">Viṣṇu means the Supreme Lord who is eternal, full of bliss and full of knowledge. So our aim should be how to approach Viṣṇu.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 2.15 -- London, August 21, 1973|Lecture on BG 2.15 -- London, August 21, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So Prahlāda Mahārāja said "People do not know the aim of life." The aim of life is here, amṛtatva, as good as Kṛṣṇa, as good as the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Blissful, full of knowledge and eternal. That is the aim of life. But people do not know. Na te viduḥ svārtha-gatiṁ hi viṣṇum ([[Vanisource:SB 7.5.31|SB 7.5.31]]). Viṣṇu means the Supreme Lord who is eternal, full of bliss and full of knowledge. So our aim should be how to approach Viṣṇu. Then we get the same power, same eternity, same blissfulness. Just like a motorcar is running at the speed of sixty miles, and if a cyclist someway or other catches the motorcar, he can also go at the speed of sixty miles.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG43BombayMarch231974_2" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="137" link="Lecture on BG 4.3 -- Bombay, March 23, 1974" link_text="Lecture on BG 4.3 -- Bombay, March 23, 1974">
<div class="heading">Viṣṇu means Bhagavān, or Kṛṣṇa. So śravaṇaṁ kīrtanam, you have to hear about Kṛṣṇa. That is śravaṇam. And kīrtanam, one has to chant. This is also kīrtanam.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 4.3 -- Bombay, March 23, 1974|Lecture on BG 4.3 -- Bombay, March 23, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So those who are engaged in this process of bhakti, śravaṇaṁ kīrtanaṁ viṣṇoḥ... ([[Vanisource:SB 7.5.23|SB 7.5.23]]). Viṣṇu means Bhagavān, or Kṛṣṇa. So śravaṇaṁ kīrtanam, you have to hear about Kṛṣṇa. That is śravaṇam. And kīrtanam, one has to chant. This is also kīrtanam. I am speaking to you; this is also kīrtanam. And you are hearing; this is bhakti. Śravaṇaṁ kīrtanam, about Kṛṣṇa. The chanting, dancing about Kṛṣṇa, this is bhakti. Śravaṇaṁ kīrtanaṁ viṣṇoḥ smaraṇam.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG468NewYorkJuly201966_3" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="143" link="Lecture on BG 4.6-8 -- New York, July 20, 1966" link_text="Lecture on BG 4.6-8 -- New York, July 20, 1966">
<div class="heading">Viṣṇu means the Supreme Lord. Viṣṇu. Not any other thing. If we make chanting and hearing in some other subject matter, no, that will not do.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 4.6-8 -- New York, July 20, 1966|Lecture on BG 4.6-8 -- New York, July 20, 1966]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">His is reciprocation of śravaṇam and kīrtanam, hearing and chanting, that I chanted, you heard, and you chanted, I heard. Reciprocation. So this is, these two methods are the first method in devotional service. Śravaṇaṁ kīrtanam. And, and what about hearing and chanting? Now, Viṣṇu. Viṣṇu means the Supreme Lord. Viṣṇu. Not any other thing. If we make chanting and hearing in some other subject matter, no, that will not do. We have to hear and chant about Viṣṇu, the Supreme Lord.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG48MontrealJune141968_4" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="148" link="Lecture on BG 4.8 -- Montreal, June 14, 1968" link_text="Lecture on BG 4.8 -- Montreal, June 14, 1968">
<div class="heading">Viṣṇu means the Supreme Lord, all-pervading. Why? Durāśayā. Durāśayā means ill-conceived plan. They are thinking that they will be happy by planning in this material world. This is called durāśā. It will never be fulfilled. It will never be fulfilled.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 4.8 -- Montreal, June 14, 1968|Lecture on BG 4.8 -- Montreal, June 14, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Na te viduḥ svārtha-gatiṁ hi viṣṇum ([[Vanisource:SB 7.5.31|SB 7.5.31]]). Viṣṇu means the Supreme Lord, all-pervading. Why? Durāśayā. Durāśayā means ill-conceived plan. They are thinking that they will be happy by planning in this material world. This is called durāśā. It will never be fulfilled. It will never be fulfilled. Durāśā. Dur means it is impossible. But they will not accept this. They will not accept. They are being knocked so many times—failure, failure, failure, failure. Still, they will not accept. Dur. Bahir-artha-māninaḥ: "They are captivated by the glamour of this external energy." Bahir-artha-māninaḥ.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG411NewYorkJuly271966_5" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="158" link="Lecture on BG 4.11 -- New York, July 27, 1966" link_text="Lecture on BG 4.11 -- New York, July 27, 1966">
<div class="heading">Viṣṇu means self-realization, the supreme soul.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 4.11 -- New York, July 27, 1966|Lecture on BG 4.11 -- New York, July 27, 1966]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">"People deluded by the material nature do not know what is the ultimate goal of life. The ultimate goal of life is Viṣṇu." Viṣṇu means self-realization, the supreme soul. Why they do not know it?</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG61315LosAngelesFebruary161969_6" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="214" link="Lecture on BG 6.13-15 -- Los Angeles, February 16, 1969" link_text="Lecture on BG 6.13-15 -- Los Angeles, February 16, 1969">
<div class="heading">Viṣṇu means, everything is Viṣṇu. The meditation is Viṣṇu. The bhakti is Viṣṇu. Not without Viṣṇu. And Kṛṣṇa is the original form of Viṣṇu.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 6.13-15 -- Los Angeles, February 16, 1969|Lecture on BG 6.13-15 -- Los Angeles, February 16, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So if you simply hear sincerely and submissively, then you will understand Kṛṣṇa. Kṛṣṇa will reveal to you. Śravaṇaṁ kīrtanaṁ viṣṇoḥ smaraṇaṁ pāda-sevanam arcanaṁ vandanaṁ dāsyam, there are different nine kinds of variety. So vandanam, offering prayers, that is also bhakti. Śravaṇam, to hear about it. Just like we are hearing about Kṛṣṇa from this Bhagavad-gītā. Chanting about His glory, Hare Kṛṣṇa. This is the beginning. Śravaṇaṁ kīrtanaṁ viṣṇoḥ ([[Vanisource:SB 7.5.23|SB 7.5.23]]). Viṣṇu means, everything is Viṣṇu. The meditation is Viṣṇu. The bhakti is Viṣṇu. Not without Viṣṇu. And Kṛṣṇa is the original form of Viṣṇu. Kṛṣṇas tu bhagavān svayam ([[Vanisource:SB 1.3.28|SB 1.3.28]]). The original form of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. So if we follow this process then we'll be able to understand without any doubt.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG915NewYorkDecember11966_7" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="316" link="Lecture on BG 9.15 -- New York, December 1, 1966" link_text="Lecture on BG 9.15 -- New York, December 1, 1966">
<div class="heading">Viṣṇu means the Supreme Lord. You should devote your time in hearing and chanting about Viṣṇu, Kṛṣṇa.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 9.15 -- New York, December 1, 1966|Lecture on BG 9.15 -- New York, December 1, 1966]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">And what about, hearing? Hearing, we are... Every, every day and night we are hearing something. There is television. There is radio. There is newspaper. There is so many things, hearing. Not that hearing. Śravaṇaṁ kīrtanaṁ viṣṇoḥ ([[Vanisource:SB 7.5.23|SB 7.5.23]]). Viṣṇu means the Supreme Lord. You should devote your time in hearing and chanting about Viṣṇu, Kṛṣṇa.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG166HawaiiFebruary21975_8" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="386" link="Lecture on BG 16.6 -- Hawaii, February 2, 1975" link_text="Lecture on BG 16.6 -- Hawaii, February 2, 1975">
<div class="heading">Daiva means generally viṣṇu-bhakta. Viṣṇu means the Supreme Lord who is all-pervasive. Everywhere He is present.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 16.6 -- Hawaii, February 2, 1975|Lecture on BG 16.6 -- Hawaii, February 2, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Daiva means generally viṣṇu-bhakta. Viṣṇu means the Supreme Lord who is all-pervasive. Everywhere He is present. Kṛṣṇa, the Supreme Lord, He is Viṣṇu also in His Paramātmā feature. Kṛṣṇa has got three features. Brahmeti paramātmeti bhagavān iti śabdyate ([[Vanisource:SB 1.2.11|SB 1.2.11]]). Kṛṣṇa, the Absolute Truth, He is known in three features or three angle of visions.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG167TokyoJanuary271975_9" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="389" link="Lecture on BG 16.7 -- Tokyo, January 27, 1975" link_text="Lecture on BG 16.7 -- Tokyo, January 27, 1975">
<div class="heading">Viṣṇu means the Supreme Lord, all-pervading. Viṣṇu-bhakto bhaved daiva asuras tad... And those who are not devotees, Godless, without any God consciousness, they are all asuras.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 16.7 -- Tokyo, January 27, 1975|Lecture on BG 16.7 -- Tokyo, January 27, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">When we speak of Kṛṣṇa, Kṛṣṇa means God. Anyone who is nondevotee of God, who is not God conscious, he is asura. That is the injunction. Viṣṇu-bhakto bhaved daiva asuras tad-viparyayaḥ. This is the distinction. Devatā means viṣṇu-bhakta, great devotee of the Supreme Lord. Viṣṇu means the Supreme Lord, all-pervading. Viṣṇu-bhakto bhaved daiva asuras tad... And those who are not devotees, Godless, without any God consciousness, they are all asuras.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="1" parent="Lectures" text="Srimad-Bhagavatam Lectures"><h3>Srimad-Bhagavatam Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB213DelhiNovember61973_0" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="361" link="Lecture on SB 2.1.3 -- Delhi, November 6, 1973" link_text="Lecture on SB 2.1.3 -- Delhi, November 6, 1973">
<div class="heading">Viṣṇu means viṣṇu-tattva. Rāmādi-mūrtiṣu kalā-niyamena tiṣṭhan. Viṣṇu-tattva means rāmādi-mūrti. Rāma, Nṛsiṁha, Varāha, Kṛṣṇa... There are so many.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 2.1.3 -- Delhi, November 6, 1973|Lecture on SB 2.1.3 -- Delhi, November 6, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Therefore, Kṛṣṇa question and Kṛṣṇa answer, they are not material things. Therefore, if we always engage ourself in Kṛṣṇa question and Kṛṣṇa answer... śravaṇaṁ kīrtanaṁ viṣṇoḥ ([[Vanisource:SB 7.5.23|SB 7.5.23]]). Therefore it is called Viṣṇu. Not that any other śravaṇaṁ kīrtanam. Only Viṣṇu. Viṣṇu means viṣṇu-tattva. Rāmādi-mūrtiṣu kalā-niyamena tiṣṭhan. Viṣṇu-tattva means rāmādi-mūrti. Rāma, Nṛsiṁha, Varāha, Kṛṣṇa... There are so many. They are described. They are viṣṇu-tattva.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB213DelhiNovember61973_1" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="361" link="Lecture on SB 2.1.3 -- Delhi, November 6, 1973" link_text="Lecture on SB 2.1.3 -- Delhi, November 6, 1973">
<div class="heading">So this śravaṇam Kṛṣṇa, Viṣṇu, means puṇya, puṇya-śravaṇa-kīrtanaḥ. Even if you do not understand anything, if you simply sit down silently and give aural reception to the sound vibration of Hare Kṛṣṇa mahā-mantra, you become purified. Puṇya-śravaṇa-kīrtanaḥ.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 2.1.3 -- Delhi, November 6, 1973|Lecture on SB 2.1.3 -- Delhi, November 6, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So this śravaṇam Kṛṣṇa, Viṣṇu, means puṇya, puṇya-śravaṇa-kīrtanaḥ. Even if you do not understand anything, if you simply sit down silently and give aural reception to the sound vibration of Hare Kṛṣṇa mahā-mantra, you become purified. Puṇya-śravaṇa-kīrtanaḥ. Śṛṇvatāṁ sva-kathāḥ kṛṣṇaḥ puṇya-śravaṇa-kīrtanaḥ ([[Vanisource:SB 1.2.17|SB 1.2.17]]). Simply by hearing, you become pious. Because we are all impious. Unless we are impious, we don't accept this material body. There may be difference of degrees. That does not make... Anyone who has come to this material world, he is to be considered as impious.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB32514BombayNovember141974_2" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="436" link="Lecture on SB 3.25.14 -- Bombay, November 14, 1974" link_text="Lecture on SB 3.25.14 -- Bombay, November 14, 1974">
<div class="heading">They have forgotten. Not now. This is the nature of this material world: na te viduḥ svārtha-gatiṁ hi..., to please Viṣṇu. Viṣṇu means Kṛṣṇa.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 3.25.14 -- Bombay, November 14, 1974|Lecture on SB 3.25.14 -- Bombay, November 14, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">The purpose they do not know. They have forgotten. Not now. This is the nature of this material world: na te viduḥ svārtha-gatiṁ hi..., to please Viṣṇu. Viṣṇu means Kṛṣṇa. Kṛṣṇa means Viṣṇu. Viṣṇu is expansion of Kṛṣṇa. So Kṛṣṇa has millions of forms, as Viṣṇu, Nārāyaṇa and other also. Advaitam acyutam anādim ananta-rūpam (Bs. 5.33). Ananta-rūpam. Ādyaṁ purāṇa-puruṣaṁ nava-yauvanaṁ ca. So viṣṇur ārādhyate panthā nānyat tat-toṣa-kāraṇam. There is no other alternative to please Him. Therefore varṇāśrama-dharma is very important. That is the beginning of perfect human civilization.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB326234BombayJanuary11975_3" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="484" link="Lecture on SB 3.26.23-4 -- Bombay, January 1, 1975" link_text="Lecture on SB 3.26.23-4 -- Bombay, January 1, 1975">
<div class="heading">How we can become Kṛṣṇa conscious? Śravaṇaṁ kīrtanaṁ viṣṇoḥ (SB 7.5.23). Viṣṇu means Kṛṣṇa. Simply hear and speak about Kṛṣṇa.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 3.26.23-4 -- Bombay, January 1, 1975|Lecture on SB 3.26.23-4 -- Bombay, January 1, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Artha means substance, and anartha means illusory things. So many things. So that is our material condition of life, and the only remedy is become Kṛṣṇa conscious, and that is... How we can become Kṛṣṇa conscious? Śravaṇaṁ kīrtanaṁ viṣṇoḥ ([[Vanisource:SB 7.5.23|SB 7.5.23]]). Viṣṇu means Kṛṣṇa. Simply hear and speak about Kṛṣṇa. That is Kṛṣṇa consciousness.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB32640BombayJanuary151975_4" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="496" link="Lecture on SB 3.26.40 -- Bombay, January 15, 1975" link_text="Lecture on SB 3.26.40 -- Bombay, January 15, 1975">
<div class="heading">Viṣṇu means all-pervading. So Kṛṣṇa's energies are spread everywhere, just like the illumination, dyotanam. It is called dyotanam, illumination.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 3.26.40 -- Bombay, January 15, 1975|Lecture on SB 3.26.40 -- Bombay, January 15, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Whenever there is sun, wherever there is sun, there is sunshine. Similarly, wherever there is Kṛṣṇa, the Kṛṣṇa's energies are also there. Therefore Viṣṇu. Viṣṇu means all-pervading. So Kṛṣṇa's energies are spread everywhere, just like the illumination, dyotanam. It is called dyotanam, illumination. If the fire is there, there must be illumination. And you have seen in the morning—as soon as the sun, before the sun rising actually, before we can see the sun, immediately there is illumination, dyotanam.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB551LondonAugust301971_5" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="513" link="Lecture on SB 5.5.1 -- London, August 30, 1971" link_text="Lecture on SB 5.5.1 -- London, August 30, 1971">
<div class="heading">He ultimate goal of life is to understand the Lord, the Supreme Lord, Viṣṇu. Viṣṇu means "all-pervading God." God is not localized.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 5.5.1 -- London, August 30, 1971|Lecture on SB 5.5.1 -- London, August 30, 1971]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">The aim of human life is to understand God. That is the main business of human life. Main... Na te viduḥ svārtha-gatiṁ hi viṣṇum ([[Vanisource:SB 7.5.31|SB 7.5.31]]). Viṣṇu is the Supreme Lord, Supreme Personality of Godhead. People, they do not know what is the ultimate goal of life. The ultimate goal of life is to understand the Lord, the Supreme Lord, Viṣṇu. Viṣṇu means "all-pervading God." God is not localized.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB616LosAngelesJanuary31970_6" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="582" link="Lecture on SB 6.1.6 -- Los Angeles, January 3, 1970" link_text="Lecture on SB 6.1.6 -- Los Angeles, January 3, 1970">
<div class="heading">Viṣṇu means Lord, and Vaiṣṇava means one who is devotee of Viṣṇu, he is called Vaiṣṇava. Godly. Godly person. Vaiṣṇava means godly person.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 6.1.6 -- Los Angeles, January 3, 1970|Lecture on SB 6.1.6 -- Los Angeles, January 3, 1970]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">What is the necessity of being crucified? Because he was a Vaiṣṇava. Vaiṣṇava means the servant of God or the devotee of God, Vaiṣṇava. Viṣṇu means Lord, and Vaiṣṇava means one who is devotee of Viṣṇu, he is called Vaiṣṇava. Godly. Godly person. Vaiṣṇava means godly person. So every godly person, he thinks for others. "Oh, people are suffering for want of knowledge, for want of God consciousness, for want of Kṛṣṇa consciousness. Oh, let me do some service. Let me enlighten them so that they may be happy."</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB761SanFranciscoMarch151968_7" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="735" link="Lecture on SB 7.6.1 -- San Francisco, March 15, 1968" link_text="Lecture on SB 7.6.1 -- San Francisco, March 15, 1968">
<div class="heading">Viṣṇu means the Supreme Lord. The Supreme Lord is called Viṣṇu, all-pervading, the word used here, viṣṇoḥ. Viṣṇu means who is all-pervading at the same time He's a person.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 7.6.1 -- San Francisco, March 15, 1968|Lecture on SB 7.6.1 -- San Francisco, March 15, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">And what is that spiritual consciousness? Puruṣasyeha viṣṇoḥ pādopasarpaṇam. Viṣṇu. Viṣṇu means the Supreme Lord. The Supreme Lord is called Viṣṇu, all-pervading, the word used here, viṣṇoḥ. Viṣṇu means who is all-pervading at the same time He's a person. The Supreme Personality of Godhead is person; at the same time, He is all-pervading. How it is? In our material conception we cannot imagine, but there is a proof in your presence.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB761MontrealJune101968_9" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="738" link="Lecture on SB 7.6.1 -- Montreal, June 10, 1968" link_text="Lecture on SB 7.6.1 -- Montreal, June 10, 1968">
<div class="heading">Viṣṇu means all-pervading God. God is everywhere. Just like the sun. The sun is a planet and there is a sun-god also. In each and every planet there is a predominating deity.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 7.6.1 -- Montreal, June 10, 1968|Lecture on SB 7.6.1 -- Montreal, June 10, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Viṣṇu means all-pervading God. God is everywhere. Just like the sun. The sun is a planet and there is a sun-god also. In each and every planet there is a predominating deity. Just like in this planet you have got a predominating man, president. Similarly, in each and every planet there is a predominating living creature. In the sun planet the predominating living creature is called sun-god. In the moon planet the predominating deity is called moon-god. And similarly, there are millions of millions of planets and there is a predominating deity. So similarly, the original planet, Kṛṣṇaloka, the predominating Deity is Kṛṣṇa who is Viṣṇu. So just like the sun is situated in the particular planet but the sunshine is spread all over the universe. Similarly, Kṛṣṇa or Viṣṇu, although He's in His planet, His energy is distributed all over the creation. Therefore He is all-pervading. Viṣṇu means all-pervading God. He is everywhere.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB761MontrealJune101968_10" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="738" link="Lecture on SB 7.6.1 -- Montreal, June 10, 1968" link_text="Lecture on SB 7.6.1 -- Montreal, June 10, 1968">
<div class="heading">So Viṣṇu means all-pervading. But by our material conception we think that anything which is all-pervading, how it can be localized personally? That is our material conception.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 7.6.1 -- Montreal, June 10, 1968|Lecture on SB 7.6.1 -- Montreal, June 10, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So Viṣṇu means all-pervading. But by our material conception we think that anything which is all-pervading, how it can be localized personally? That is our material conception. Just like I am sitting here, you are sitting here. You cannot be all-pervading. But your mind, because it is finer, the mind can be in so many places. Similarly, when you are still finer intelligence, you are still finer, a spirit soul, you can also become all-pervading. At the present moment we are hampered, conditioned, by the covering of this material body. Therefore our endeavor should be how we get out of this material body. That formula I've already explained that tyaktvā dehaṁ punar janma naiti ([[Vanisource:BG 4.9|BG 4.9]]). If you simply understand what is God, simply by this understanding, tyaktvā deham, after leaving this body, punar janma naiti, you don't get any more this material body.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Festival_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="6" parent="Lectures" text="Festival Lectures"><h3>Festival Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="HisDivineGraceSrilaBhaktisiddhantaSarasvatiGosvamiPrabhupadasAppearanceDaySB6324GorakhpurFebruary151971_0" class="quote" parent="Festival_Lectures" book="Lec" index="43" link="His Divine Grace Srila Bhaktisiddhanta Sarasvati Gosvami Prabhupada's Appearance Day, SB 6.3.24 -- Gorakhpur, February 15, 1971" link_text="His Divine Grace Srila Bhaktisiddhanta Sarasvati Gosvami Prabhupada's Appearance Day, SB 6.3.24 -- Gorakhpur, February 15, 1971">
<div class="heading">Viṣṇu means all-pervading. But their realization of Viṣṇu is impersonal.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:His Divine Grace Srila Bhaktisiddhanta Sarasvati Gosvami Prabhupada's Appearance Day, SB 6.3.24 -- Gorakhpur, February 15, 1971|His Divine Grace Srila Bhaktisiddhanta Sarasvati Gosvami Prabhupada's Appearance Day, SB 6.3.24 -- Gorakhpur, February 15, 1971]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">That is the stage of Gaṇapati. Gaṇa... Gaṇa means the number of people. Just like in nationalism they are counting upon the power. In this way, they realize some sort of power, I mean to say, moving force or the soul. That is the stage of... They say, śivo 'ham. Śivo 'ham. Ahaṁ brahmāsmi. That is the stage of śaiva. And when they expand that, that "This power, this spiritual power, soul, is all over, all-pervading, impersonal Brahman," that is... They, sometimes they accept Viṣṇu. Viṣṇu means all-pervading. But their realization of Viṣṇu is impersonal.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="General_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="11" parent="Lectures" text="General Lectures"><h3>General Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureNobodyWantstoDieBostonMay71968_0" class="quote" parent="General_Lectures" book="Lec" index="64" link="Lecture 'Nobody Wants to Die' -- Boston, May 7, 1968" link_text="Lecture 'Nobody Wants to Die' -- Boston, May 7, 1968">
<div class="heading">Viṣṇu means the Supreme Personality of Godhead. So your hearing, your chanting, your remembering, your acting—everything will be in connection with Viṣṇu.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture 'Nobody Wants to Die' -- Boston, May 7, 1968|Lecture 'Nobody Wants to Die' -- Boston, May 7, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">That means the same thing. Just like here, in this jīva-bhūta stage, false identification stage, we are also anxious to hear something. We are reading daily in the morning some newspaper, "This, this thing has happened there. This thing has happened here. Here is something available." But as soon you become brahma-bhūta ([[Vanisource:SB 4.30.20|SB 4.30.20]]), you lose all interest in such nonsense things. You'll be interested to hear about Kṛṣṇa, not about the newspaper. This is called liberation. No more attraction for material engagement. Śravaṇaṁ kīrtanaṁ viṣṇoḥ. Viṣṇu means the Supreme Personality of Godhead. So your hearing, your chanting, your remembering, your acting—everything will be in connection with Viṣṇu. That is real Brahman realization stage, active stage.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureJakartaMarch11973_1" class="quote" parent="General_Lectures" book="Lec" index="134" link="Lecture -- Jakarta, March 1, 1973" link_text="Lecture -- Jakarta, March 1, 1973">
<div class="heading">Viṣṇu means Kṛṣṇa. Śravaṇaṁ kīrtanam. Just hear about Kṛṣṇa. Chant Hare Kṛṣṇa.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture -- Jakarta, March 1, 1973|Lecture -- Jakarta, March 1, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I take it, without any desire to cheat you, satyam, the truth that he'll come back, back to home, back to Godhead." Simply by executing these four principles—always thinking of Kṛṣṇa, man-manā, becoming devotee of Kṛṣṇa, following the devotional process, śravaṇaṁ kīrtanaṁ viṣṇoḥ. Viṣṇu means Kṛṣṇa. Śravaṇaṁ kīrtanam. Just hear about Kṛṣṇa. Chant Hare Kṛṣṇa.</p>
</div>
</div>
</div>

Paramahamsa means

2010-04-03T12:32:52Z

Partha-sarathi: Created page with '<div id="compilation"> <div id="facts"> {{terms|"paramahamsa means"}} {{notes|}} {{compiler|Partha-sarathi}} {{complete|ALL}} {{first|03Apr10}} {{last|03Apr10}} {{totals_by_secti…'

<div id="compilation">
<div id="facts">
{{terms|"paramahamsa means"}}
{{notes|}}
{{compiler|Partha-sarathi}}
{{complete|ALL}}
{{first|03Apr10}}
{{last|03Apr10}}
{{totals_by_section|BG=0|SB=0|CC=0|OB=0|Lec=13|Con=3|Let=0}}
{{total|16}}
{{toc right}}
[[Category:Meaning of Sanskrit Words]]
</div>
<div id="Lectures" class="section" sec_index="4" parent="compilation" text="Lectures"><h2>Lectures</h2>
</div>
<div id="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="1" parent="Lectures" text="Srimad-Bhagavatam Lectures"><h3>Srimad-Bhagavatam Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB1227VrndavanaNovember71972_0" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="96" link="Lecture on SB 1.2.27 -- Vrndavana, November 7, 1972" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.2.27 -- Vrndavana, November 7, 1972">
<div class="heading">Paramahaṁsa means suhṛdaṁ sarva-bhūtānām, "friend for everyone." Not for this human society or this society. A paramahaṁsa is friend for everyone.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.2.27 -- Vrndavana, November 7, 1972|Lecture on SB 1.2.27 -- Vrndavana, November 7, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So Kṛṣṇa consciousness means to be completely nonenvious. In the Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam, in the beginning, it is said, dharmaḥ projjhita-kaitavaḥ atra paramo nirmatsarāṇām ([[Vanisource:SB 1.1.2|SB 1.1.2]]). Paramo nirmatsarāṇām. Those who are completely free from enviousness, they can understand what is Bhāgavatam. Paramo nirmat... Dharmaḥ projjhi... It is not a cheating type of religion, enviousness. Paramo nirmatsarāṇām, or paramahaṁsa, those who are not at all envious. They're always friend. Suhṛdaṁ sarva-bhūtānām ([[Vanisource:BG 5.29|BG 5.29]]). Paramahaṁsa means suhṛdaṁ sarva-bhūtānām, "friend for everyone." Not for this human society or this society. A paramahaṁsa is friend for everyone. Paramo nirmatsarāṇāṁ satām. They are satām, Vaiṣṇava. Vāstavam atra vedyam atra tāpa-trayonmūlanaṁ śivadam. These things are mentioned.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB1511NewVrindabanJune101969_1" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="135" link="Lecture on SB 1.5.11 -- New Vrindaban, June 10, 1969" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.5.11 -- New Vrindaban, June 10, 1969">
<div class="heading">Paramahaṁsa means the topmost transcendentalists.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.5.11 -- New Vrindaban, June 10, 1969|Lecture on SB 1.5.11 -- New Vrindaban, June 10, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So far, what you have done, that will be enjoyed by the crow class men. But you do something which will be enjoyed by the... Then you will be satisfied. Otherwise, you'll not be satisfied." That was his indirect hint. "You are not satisfied by, even after compiling Vedānta-sūtra. That means, that indicates that these literatures will not be satisfactory for the swan class of men, or paramahaṁsa." Paramahaṁsa means the topmost transcendentalists. They'll never...</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB181819BombayApril91971_2" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="201" link="Lecture on SB 1.8.18-19 -- Bombay, April 9, 1971" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.8.18-19 -- Bombay, April 9, 1971">
<div class="heading">Others, those who are paramahaṁsa... How... Kṛṣṇa does not become visible, because He is visible only to the paramahaṁsa. Paramahaṁsa means the supreme position of a human being.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.8.18-19 -- Bombay, April 9, 1971|Lecture on SB 1.8.18-19 -- Bombay, April 9, 1971]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Others, those who are paramahaṁsa... How... Kṛṣṇa does not become visible, because He is visible only to the paramahaṁsa. Paramahaṁsa means the supreme position of a human being. That is called paramahaṁsa. There are... You know, according to Vedic system, there are brāhmaṇa, kṣatriya, vaiśya, śūdra, and brahmacārī, gṛhastha, vānaprastha, sannyāsa. The eight stages. The sannyāsī is to be supposed the first-class stage.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB181819BombayApril91971_3" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="201" link="Lecture on SB 1.8.18-19 -- Bombay, April 9, 1971" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.8.18-19 -- Bombay, April 9, 1971">
<div class="heading">Amala means without any dirty things. paramahaṁsa means without any... What is that dirty thing? The dirty thing is to have any slight desire for enjoying this material body.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.8.18-19 -- Bombay, April 9, 1971|Lecture on SB 1.8.18-19 -- Bombay, April 9, 1971]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So this paramahaṁsa stage is... We have come to explain paramahaṁsānām. Here it is said, tathā paramahaṁsānāṁ munīnām amalātmanām ([[Vanisource:SB 1.8.20|SB 1.8.20]]). Amalātmanām. Amala means without any dirty things. paramahaṁsa means without any... What is that dirty thing? The dirty thing is to have any slight desire for enjoying this material body. That is called dirty thing. Amalam. Everyone is samala. Samala, with dirty things.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB181819BombayApril91971_4" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="201" link="Lecture on SB 1.8.18-19 -- Bombay, April 9, 1971" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.8.18-19 -- Bombay, April 9, 1971">
<div class="heading">So anyway, our point is that paramahaṁsa means one who has no such dirty things in the heart, bhukti-mukti-siddhi. All, they are dirty things.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.8.18-19 -- Bombay, April 9, 1971|Lecture on SB 1.8.18-19 -- Bombay, April 9, 1971]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So anyway, our point is that paramahaṁsa means one who has no such dirty things in the heart, bhukti-mukti-siddhi. All, they are dirty things. Bhukti means material enjoyment, mukti means to become, to merge into the existence of the Supreme Lord, and siddhi means yoga-siddhi. So they are all dirty things. So such dirty..., a person with such dirty things, he is not paramahaṁsa. He may be a sannyāsī, but he's not a paramahaṁsa. Paramahaṁsa means who has no dirty things.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB1820NewYorkApril121973_5" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="204" link="Lecture on SB 1.8.20 -- New York, April 12, 1973" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.8.20 -- New York, April 12, 1973">
<div class="heading">Parama means ultimate. Haṁsa means swan. So paramahaṁsa means the perfect haṁsa. Haṁsa. It is said that if you... Haṁsa means swan.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.8.20 -- New York, April 12, 1973|Lecture on SB 1.8.20 -- New York, April 12, 1973]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Therefore Kuntīdevī says: tathā paramahaṁsānām ([[Vanisource:SB 1.8.20|SB 1.8.20]]). Parama means ultimate. Haṁsa means swan. So paramahaṁsa means the perfect haṁsa. Haṁsa. It is said that if you... Haṁsa means swan. If you give to swan milk mixed with water, she will take the milk part and leave aside the water part. Similarly, a person who knows what is this material world... Material world is made of two natures—the inferior nature and the superior nature.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB225NewYorkMarch51975_6" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="373" link="Lecture on SB 2.2.5 -- New York, March 5, 1975" link_text="Lecture on SB 2.2.5 -- New York, March 5, 1975">
<div class="heading">Paramahaṁsa means the topmost amongst the sannyāsīs. Sannyāsī's the topmost. Above... Within the sannyāsī the paramahaṁsa is the topmost.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 2.2.5 -- New York, March 5, 1975|Lecture on SB 2.2.5 -- New York, March 5, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So here Śukadeva Gosvāmī, he's a sannyāsī. He's renounced order from the very beginning of his life. He never entered into any āśrama or varṇa. He's paramahaṁsa. Paramahaṁsa means the topmost amongst the sannyāsīs. Sannyāsī's the topmost. Above... Within the sannyāsī the paramahaṁsa is the topmost. Sannyāsīs are also, they are called kuṭīcaka, bahūdaka, parivrājakācārya, and paramahaṁsa. Kuṭīcaka means after accepting sannyāsa order... One has to accept the sannyāsa order.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB6119LosAngelesJanuary151970_7" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="623" link="Lecture on SB 6.1.19 -- Los Angeles, January 15, 1970" link_text="Lecture on SB 6.1.19 -- Los Angeles, January 15, 1970">
<div class="heading">Paramahaṁsa means they are interested with the essence of this world, not with the adulteration. What is the adulteration?
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 6.1.19 -- Los Angeles, January 15, 1970|Lecture on SB 6.1.19 -- Los Angeles, January 15, 1970]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Similarly, there are elevated persons who are also called paramahaṁsa. Paramahaṁsa. The same example of the haṁsa, swan. Paramahaṁsa means they are interested with the essence of this world, not with the adulteration. What is the adulteration? The adulteration is matter and the essence is spirit. Just like this body. What is this body? This body is that I am a spirit soul, living entity. I am encaged in this material body.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB6119LosAngelesJanuary151970_8" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="623" link="Lecture on SB 6.1.19 -- Los Angeles, January 15, 1970" link_text="Lecture on SB 6.1.19 -- Los Angeles, January 15, 1970">
<div class="heading">The paramahaṁsa means they take the essence. What is the essence of this body? The essence of this body is the spirit soul.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 6.1.19 -- Los Angeles, January 15, 1970|Lecture on SB 6.1.19 -- Los Angeles, January 15, 1970]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So we have to utilize. The paramahaṁsa means they take the essence. What is the essence of this body? The essence of this body is the spirit soul. So one should try to understand what is science of that spirit soul. They are not interested with the adulteration. Just like the example is given: the swan. The swan takes out the active principle. The swans, they live in a very nice place where there is very clear water, nice garden, nice fruits, flowers, birds chirping.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB7918MayapurFebruary251976_9" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="825" link="Lecture on SB 7.9.18 -- Mayapur, February 25, 1976" link_text="Lecture on SB 7.9.18 -- Mayapur, February 25, 1976">
<div class="heading">And paramahaṁsa, paramahaṁsa means although they are in the material world, they have kicked out the material things, but he has taken Kṛṣṇa.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 7.9.18 -- Mayapur, February 25, 1976|Lecture on SB 7.9.18 -- Mayapur, February 25, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Why haṁsa is taken, paramahaṁsa? Haṁsa has the capacity... Haṁsa means swan. He has got capacity. If you give to the haṁsa milk mixed with water, the haṁsa has got the capacity, so it will drink the milk and reject the water. Therefore haṁsa. And paramahaṁsa, paramahaṁsa means although they are in the material world, they have kicked out the material things, but he has taken Kṛṣṇa. That's all. Kṛṣṇa is there. Everywhere is Kṛṣṇa.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB7121BombayApril121976_10" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="861" link="Lecture on SB 7.12.1 -- Bombay, April 12, 1976" link_text="Lecture on SB 7.12.1 -- Bombay, April 12, 1976">
<div class="heading">He is very advanced. Those who are not... Paramahaṁsa means he's above all these material qualities.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 7.12.1 -- Bombay, April 12, 1976|Lecture on SB 7.12.1 -- Bombay, April 12, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Therefore you should be very, very careful. Very, very careful. And another place is, another... Just like in our society, compulsorily we have to mix with women—not only women, very beautiful young girls. But if one is not agitated even in this association of beautiful women and girls, then he is to be considered paramahaṁsa. He is very advanced. Those who are not... Paramahaṁsa means he's above all these material qualities.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Festival_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="6" parent="Lectures" text="Festival Lectures"><h3>Festival Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="SriVyasapujaLondonAugust221973_0" class="quote" parent="Festival_Lectures" book="Lec" index="25" link="Sri Vyasa-puja -- London, August 22, 1973" link_text="Sri Vyasa-puja -- London, August 22, 1973">
<div class="heading">So actually, married couples should be paramahaṁsas. Paramahaṁsa means the topmost stage of sannyāsī. Paramahaṁsa.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Sri Vyasa-puja -- London, August 22, 1973|Sri Vyasa-puja -- London, August 22, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So actually, married couples should be paramahaṁsas. Paramahaṁsa means the topmost stage of sannyāsī. Paramahaṁsa. A sannyāsī has got four stages: kuṭicaka, bahudaka, parivrājakācārya and paramahaṁsa. A sannyāsī, in the beginning, he's supposed to make a small cottage, just on the border of the village, does not go home, but the, his necessities are supplied by his home, but he does not go home. This is called kuṭicaka.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Purports_to_Songs" class="sub_section" sec_index="14" parent="Lectures" text="Purports to Songs"><h3>Purports to Songs</h3>
</div>
<div id="PurporttoBhajahuReManaLosAngelesMay271972_0" class="quote" parent="Purports_to_Songs" book="Lec" index="28" link="Purport to Bhajahu Re Mana -- Los Angeles, May 27, 1972" link_text="Purport to Bhajahu Re Mana -- Los Angeles, May 27, 1972">
<div class="heading">Similarly a swan, a haṁsa, paramahaṁsa, means in this human form of life, one who takes the spiritual portion of life and rejects the material portion of life, he is called haṁsa, paramahaṁsa.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Purport to Bhajahu Re Mana -- Los Angeles, May 27, 1972|Purport to Bhajahu Re Mana -- Los Angeles, May 27, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So this Kṛṣṇa consciousness society is the swans, paramahaṁsa. Haṁsa. Haṁsa means swan. Haṁsa, this example is given because the swan knows the technique how to take milk out of water. You give the swan milk and water, it will take the milk portion and give it up the water portion. Similarly a swan, a haṁsa, paramahaṁsa, means in this human form of life, one who takes the spiritual portion of life and rejects the material portion of life, he is called haṁsa, paramahaṁsa.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="section" sec_index="5" parent="compilation" text="Conversations and Morning Walks"><h2>Conversations and Morning Walks</h2>
</div>
<div id="1974_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="sub_section" sec_index="7" parent="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" text="1974 Conversations and Morning Walks"><h3>1974 Conversations and Morning Walks</h3>
</div>
<div id="MorningWalkApril11974Bombay_0" class="quote" parent="1974_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="51" link="Morning Walk -- April 1, 1974, Bombay" link_text="Morning Walk -- April 1, 1974, Bombay">
<div class="heading">Paramahaṁsa means he's above.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Morning Walk -- April 1, 1974, Bombay|Morning Walk -- April 1, 1974, Bombay]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: Paramahaṁsa means he's above. Paramo nirmatsarānām ([[Vanisource:SB 1.1.2|SB 1.1.2]]). That is paramahaṁsa.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1975_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="sub_section" sec_index="8" parent="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" text="1975 Conversations and Morning Walks"><h3>1975 Conversations and Morning Walks</h3>
</div>
<div id="ConversationwithProfessorHopkinsJuly131975Philadelphia_0" class="quote" parent="1975_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="143" link="Conversation with Professor Hopkins -- July 13, 1975, Philadelphia" link_text="Conversation with Professor Hopkins -- July 13, 1975, Philadelphia">
<div class="heading">So paramahaṁsa means one who has taken the essence of the existence, Absolute Truth, he is called paramahaṁsa.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Conversation with Professor Hopkins -- July 13, 1975, Philadelphia|Conversation with Professor Hopkins -- July 13, 1975, Philadelphia]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: One who has come to this conclusion, he is called paramahaṁsa. Haṁsa means swan. A swan, it has got a quality that if you give the swan to drink milk mixed with water, she will drink the milk and reject the water. She has got the capacity. So paramahaṁsa means one who has taken the essence of the existence, Absolute Truth, he is called paramahaṁsa.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1976_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="sub_section" sec_index="9" parent="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" text="1976 Conversations and Morning Walks"><h3>1976 Conversations and Morning Walks</h3>
</div>
<div id="MorningWalkMarch111976Mayapur_0" class="quote" parent="1976_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="49" link="Morning Walk -- March 11, 1976, Mayapur" link_text="Morning Walk -- March 11, 1976, Mayapur">
<div class="heading">Paramahaṁsa means, just like mlecchas and yavanas, they are not under any rules and regulation. Similarly, a paramahaṁsa is also not under any rules and regulation.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Morning Walk -- March 11, 1976, Mayapur|Morning Walk -- March 11, 1976, Mayapur]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: They are not under any rule and regulation, paramahaṁsa. Paramahaṁsa means, just like mlecchas and yavanas, they are not under any rules and regulation. Similarly, a paramahaṁsa is also not under any rules and regulation. He can do whatever he likes. Śāstra is not meant for him. Avadhūta. He is not in the material world, mahābhāva. So that is the last stage of sannyāsa. Kuṭicaka means when from family life, vānaprastha, and then one takes sannyāsa, that is kuṭicaka. Kuṭicaka means he does not remain at home but goes outside home, outside the village area and makes a kuti, cottage, and lives there. But because he is not accustomed to beg, from his house some foodstuff is sent.</p>
</div>
</div>
</div>

Hari means

2010-04-03T12:22:46Z

Partha-sarathi: Created page with '<div id="compilation"> <div id="facts"> {{terms|"hari means"}} {{notes|}} {{compiler|Partha-sarathi}} {{complete|ALL}} {{first|03Apr10}} {{last|03Apr10}} {{totals_by_section|BG=0…'

<div id="compilation">
<div id="facts">
{{terms|"hari means"}}
{{notes|}}
{{compiler|Partha-sarathi}}
{{complete|ALL}}
{{first|03Apr10}}
{{last|03Apr10}}
{{totals_by_section|BG=0|SB=1|CC=0|OB=2|Lec=20|Con=2|Let=0}}
{{total|25}}
{{toc right}}
[[Category:Meaning of Sanskrit Words]]
</div>
<div id="Srimad-Bhagavatam" class="section" sec_index="1" parent="compilation" text="Srimad-Bhagavatam"><h2>Srimad-Bhagavatam</h2>
</div>
<div id="SB_Canto_4" class="sub_section" sec_index="4" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam" text="SB Canto 4"><h3>SB Canto 4</h3>
</div>
<div id="SB43024_0" class="quote" parent="SB_Canto_4" book="SB" index="1334" link="SB 4.30.24" link_text="SB 4.30.24">
<div class="heading">The word hari means "one who takes away all miserable conditions," and hari-medhase means that the Lord is always planning ways to deliver the conditioned soul from the clutches of māyā.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:SB 4.30.24|SB 4.30.24, Purport]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="purport text"><p style="display: inline;">The word hari means "one who takes away all miserable conditions," and hari-medhase means that the Lord is always planning ways to deliver the conditioned soul from the clutches of māyā. The Lord is so kind that He personally incarnates to deliver the conditioned souls, and whenever He comes, He makes His plans.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Other_Books_by_Srila_Prabhupada" class="section" sec_index="3" parent="compilation" text="Other Books by Srila Prabhupada"><h2>Other Books by Srila Prabhupada</h2>
</div>
<div id="Teachings_of_Lord_Caitanya" class="sub_section" sec_index="0" parent="Other_Books_by_Srila_Prabhupada" text="Teachings of Lord Caitanya"><h3>Teachings of Lord Caitanya</h3>
</div>
<div id="TLC15_0" class="quote" parent="Teachings_of_Lord_Caitanya" book="OB" index="21" link="TLC 15" link_text="Teachings of Lord Caitanya, Chapter 15">
<div class="heading">Hari means that He takes away all inauspicious things from the devotee's life and that He attracts the mind of the devotee by awarding him transcendental love of Godhead.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:TLC 15|Teachings of Lord Caitanya, Chapter 15]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">The word hari has different meanings, of which two are foremost. Hari means that He takes away all inauspicious things from the devotee's life and that He attracts the mind of the devotee by awarding him transcendental love of Godhead. Kṛṣṇa is so attractive that anyone who can remember Him in some way or another becomes freed from the four kinds of material miseries. The Lord gives special attention to His devotee and banishes the devotee's various sinful activities, which are stumbling blocks for the advancement of devotional service.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Krsna_The_Supreme_Personality_of_Godhead" class="sub_section" sec_index="4" parent="Other_Books_by_Srila_Prabhupada" text="Krsna, The Supreme Personality of Godhead"><h3>Krsna, The Supreme Personality of Godhead</h3>
</div>
<div id="KB20_0" class="quote" parent="Krsna,_The_Supreme_Personality_of_Godhead" book="OB" index="24" link="KB 20" link_text="Krsna Book 20">
<div class="heading">Similarly, a person who takes to Kṛṣṇa consciousness immediately becomes cleansed of all dirty things within and without. Kṛṣṇa is therefore known as Hari. Hari means "he who takes away."
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:KB 20|Krsna Book 20]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">The autumn season takes away the rolling of dark clouds in the sky as well as the polluted water. Filthy conditions on the ground also become cleansed. Similarly, a person who takes to Kṛṣṇa consciousness immediately becomes cleansed of all dirty things within and without. Kṛṣṇa is therefore known as Hari. Hari means "he who takes away." Kṛṣṇa immediately takes away all unclean habits from anyone who takes to Kṛṣṇa consciousness. The clouds of autumn are white, for they do not carry any water. Similarly, a retired man, being freed from all responsibility of family affairs (namely, maintaining the home, wife and children) and taking completely to Kṛṣṇa consciousness, becomes freed from all anxieties and looks as white as clouds in autumn.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Lectures" class="section" sec_index="4" parent="compilation" text="Lectures"><h2>Lectures</h2>
</div>
<div id="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="0" parent="Lectures" text="Bhagavad-gita As It Is Lectures"><h3>Bhagavad-gita As It Is Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG213NewYorkMarch111966_0" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="58" link="Lecture on BG 2.13 -- New York, March 11, 1966" link_text="Lecture on BG 2.13 -- New York, March 11, 1966">
<div class="heading">Hari means Bhagavān, the Supreme Lord. That is the way of getting out of... And actually, this is so. In the Bhagavad-gītā you'll find in the last instruction to Arjuna is: sarva-dharmān parityajya mām ekaṁ śaraṇaṁ vraja: (BG 18.66).
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 2.13 -- New York, March 11, 1966|Lecture on BG 2.13 -- New York, March 11, 1966]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Now, here, here it is said that... Now let us finish that. Prahlāda Mahārāja said, sadā samudvigna-dhiyām: "My dear father, for persons who have accepted this temporary material body and is full of anxiety always, for them, my idea is that they should give up this materialistic life and surrender unto Hari." Hari means Bhagavān, the Supreme Lord. That is the way of getting out of... And actually, this is so. In the Bhagavad-gītā you'll find in the last instruction to Arjuna is: sarva-dharmān parityajya mām ekaṁ śaraṇaṁ vraja: ([[Vanisource:BG 18.66|BG 18.66]]) "This is the most confidential knowledge I am giving you because you are My friend and because I love you very much.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG31720NewYorkMay271966_1" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="123" link="Lecture on BG 3.17-20 -- New York, May 27, 1966" link_text="Lecture on BG 3.17-20 -- New York, May 27, 1966">
<div class="heading">Hari means the Supreme Personality of Godhead. If His relationship is completely understood and one is engaged in Him, then for him all these penances, meditation, and jñāna, yoga, all is nonsense.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 3.17-20 -- New York, May 27, 1966|Lecture on BG 3.17-20 -- New York, May 27, 1966]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Just like ārādhito yadi haris tapasā tataḥ kiṁ nārādhito yadi haris tapasā tataḥ kim antar bahir yadi haris tapasā tataḥ kiṁ nāntar bahir yadi haris tapasā tataḥ kim. Tapasā tataḥ kim: (Nārada-pañcarātra) "What is the use of this nonsense penance and meditation? What is the use?" There is no more use. For whom? Now, ārādhito yadi hariḥ. Hari means the Supreme Personality of Godhead. If His relationship is completely understood and one is engaged in Him, then for him all these penances, meditation, and jñāna, yoga, all is nonsense. Nonsense means he has no requisition for all these things. He has come to the highest stage.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG412ColumbusMay91969_2" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="134" link="Lecture on BG 4.1-2 -- Columbus, May 9, 1969" link_text="Lecture on BG 4.1-2 -- Columbus, May 9, 1969">
<div class="heading">Hari means the Supreme Lord. His word. Therefore it is warned that to "Do not try to hear this message of Hari or the Supreme Lord from rascal nondevotee.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 4.1-2 -- Columbus, May 9, 1969|Lecture on BG 4.1-2 -- Columbus, May 9, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Sarpocchiṣṭa-payo yathā. Avaiṣṇava-mukhodgirṇaṁ pūtaṁ hari-kathāmṛtam. Hari-kathā, this message of Bhagavad-gītā is hari-kathā. Hari means the Supreme Lord. His word. Therefore it is warned that to "Do not try to hear this message of Hari or the Supreme Lord from rascal nondevotee. Do not try to hear." Why? Sarpocchiṣṭa-payo yathā. Just like milk is very nutritious food, but if a little milk is touched by the tongue of a serpent, whole thing is spoiled. A serpent, a very thin tongue, if he touches the milk, oh, the whole milk is spoiled. So if we take such milk, "Oh, milk is very nice," no. Because it is touched by the serpent's lip, it should not be taken. Similarly, any transcendental message, any Vedic literature, unless it is presented by a self-realized devotee, it is poison. You simply misunderstand the whole thing, and you do not get the benefit.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG427BombayApril161974_3" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="193" link="Lecture on BG 4.27 -- Bombay, April 16, 1974" link_text="Lecture on BG 4.27 -- Bombay, April 16, 1974">
<div class="heading">This is the recommendation of Caitanya Mahāprabhu that you should glorify the holy name of Hari. Hari means Kṛṣṇa. So that is the recommendation.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 4.27 -- Bombay, April 16, 1974|Lecture on BG 4.27 -- Bombay, April 16, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">This is the recommendation of Caitanya Mahāprabhu that you should glorify the holy name of Hari. Hari means Kṛṣṇa. So that is the recommendation. But we are meeting so many obstacles because they think, "This chanting is nescience. This bhajana is nuisance. This is Kali-yuga. Not the Kali-yuga, even every yuga. So ataḥ śrī-kṛṣṇa-nāmādi na bhaved grāhyam indriyaiḥ ([[Vanisource:CC Madhya 17.136|CC Madhya 17.136]]). A devotee is hearing, he is enjoying, and the nondevotee is thinking, "It is a nuisance."</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG71SanFranciscoMarch261968_4" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="227" link="Lecture on BG 7.1 -- San Francisco, March 26, 1968" link_text="Lecture on BG 7.1 -- San Francisco, March 26, 1968">
<div class="heading">But this is the position. Anyway, so the conclusion made by Sañjaya was this, yatra yogeśvaraḥ hariḥ. Hari means the Supreme Personality of Godhead.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 7.1 -- San Francisco, March 26, 1968|Lecture on BG 7.1 -- San Francisco, March 26, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">But this is the position. Anyway, so the conclusion made by Sañjaya was this, yatra yogeśvaraḥ hariḥ. Hari means the Supreme Personality of Godhead. The side in which the Yogeśvara, Kṛṣṇa... My point is that Kṛṣṇa's name is Yogeśvara. Nobody can be better yogi than... Or the master of yoga. There are different systems of yoga, and Kṛṣṇa is the master of yoga. And Lord Śiva is called Yogīśvara.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG71GainesvilleJuly291971UniversityofFlorida_5" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="231" link="Lecture on BG 7.1 -- Gainesville, July 29, 1971 University of Florida" link_text="Lecture on BG 7.1 -- Gainesville, July 29, 1971 University of Florida">
<div class="heading">Hari means the Supreme Personality of Godhead; kīrtanāt—by glorifying Him.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 7.1 -- Gainesville, July 29, 1971 University of Florida|Lecture on BG 7.1 -- Gainesville, July 29, 1971 University of Florida]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">That thing can be attained by the simple method hari-kīrtanāt. Hari means the Supreme Personality of Godhead; kīrtanāt—by glorifying Him. This is the method recommended in the śāstras. And Lord Caitanya Mahāprabhu, five hundred years ago, He appeared in a town which is known as Navadvīpa. It is about sixty miles northern side of Calcutta. People still go there. We have got our temple, center there. It is also a sacred pilgrimage. So Caitanya Mahāprabhu appeared there, and He started this saṅkīrtana movement, mass saṅkīrtana movement, without any discrimination.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="1" parent="Lectures" text="Srimad-Bhagavatam Lectures"><h3>Srimad-Bhagavatam Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB1223LosAngelesAugust261972_0" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="89" link="Lecture on SB 1.2.23 -- Los Angeles, August 26, 1972" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.2.23 -- Los Angeles, August 26, 1972">
<div class="heading">Hari means Viṣṇu, viriñci means Brahmā, and hara means Lord Śiva. Hari-viriñci-hareti saṁjñāḥ. But, just like the Māyāvādī philosopher says that "Then, if Kṛṣṇa has become Hari, Viriñci and Hara, three, so I can worship anyone." No. That is hinted here: śreyāṁsi tatra khalu sattva-tanor nṛṇāṁ syuḥ.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.2.23 -- Los Angeles, August 26, 1972|Lecture on SB 1.2.23 -- Los Angeles, August 26, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Now the original person is Kṛṣṇa. Now, to maintain this creation, He expands Himself into three: hari, viriñci, hara. Hari means Viṣṇu, viriñci means Brahmā, and hara means Lord Śiva. Hari-viriñci-hareti saṁjñāḥ. But, just like the Māyāvādī philosopher says that "Then, if Kṛṣṇa has become Hari, Viriñci and Hara, three, so I can worship anyone." No. That is hinted here: śreyāṁsi tatra khalu sattva-tanor nṛṇāṁ syuḥ. But if you want your ultimate goal, then you take shelter of Viṣṇu—sattva-tanoḥ—not Śiva, not Brahmā. Here, clearly says. If you want... Because your conditioned life is due to your disobedience to the Supreme Personality of Godhead. So unless you surrender unto Him, you again become obedient, there is no question of your goodness or your good or fortune. That is not possible. That is explained here. Śreyāṁsi, if you want... Śreyāṁsi means if you want really ultimate benefit of your life, then sattva-tanoḥ. Sattva-tanoḥ means Viṣṇu.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB152LosAngelesJanuary101968_1" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="131" link="Lecture on SB 1.5.2 -- Los Angeles, January 10, 1968" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.5.2 -- Los Angeles, January 10, 1968">
<div class="heading">Kalau means this age, in the age of Kali. Hari-kīrtanāt, simply by chanting. Hari means God.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.5.2 -- Los Angeles, January 10, 1968|Lecture on SB 1.5.2 -- Los Angeles, January 10, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">That means meditation is not possible, sacrifice not possible, temple worship or church worship not possible. Then what is possible? Kalau tad dhari-kīrtanāt. In this age, simply by chanting the glories of the Lord, Hare Kṛṣṇa. These are prescribed. Therefore Lord Caitanya, you see, He is preaching this cult, Hare Kṛṣṇa, Hare Kṛṣṇa... There is no distinction whether you are in church or temple or mosque. You simply vibrate Hare Kṛṣṇa wherever you are, at home or in temple or anywhere. Or in the street or in bed, or in hospital or in office, you can chant. Hare Kṛṣṇa, Hare Kṛṣṇa. So kṛte yad dhyāyato viṣṇuṁ tretāyāṁ yajato makhaiḥ, dvāpare paricaryāyāṁ kalau... ([[Vanisource:SB 12.3.52|SB 12.3.52]]). Kalau means this age, in the age of Kali. Hari-kīrtanāt, simply by chanting. Hari means God.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB11542LosAngelesDecember201973_2" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="310" link="Lecture on SB 1.15.42 -- Los Angeles, December 20, 1973" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.15.42 -- Los Angeles, December 20, 1973">
<div class="heading">In all the śāstras, the guru is respected as Kṛṣṇa is respected. Sākṣād-dharitvena. Haritva. Hari means Lord.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.15.42 -- Los Angeles, December 20, 1973|Lecture on SB 1.15.42 -- Los Angeles, December 20, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Sākṣād-dharitvena samasta-śāstraiḥ. In all the śāstras, the guru is respected as Kṛṣṇa is respected. Sākṣād-dharitvena. Haritva. Hari means Lord. Samasta, in all the scriptures, guru is accepted as Kṛṣṇa. But he never says that I, he is Kṛṣṇa; neither he is Kṛṣṇa. Then what is his position? Kintu prabhor yaḥ priya eva tasya: he is the most confidential servant of Kṛṣṇa. He never says that "I am Kṛṣṇa, I am God." That is not guru. Guru must place... He knows perfectly well that he is serving Kṛṣṇa. His business is to serve Kṛṣṇa.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB11623HawaiiJanuary191974_3" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="340" link="Lecture on SB 1.16.23 -- Hawaii, January 19, 1974" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.16.23 -- Hawaii, January 19, 1974">
<div class="heading">Hari, hari means "who takes away all your miserable conditions." Hari, haran, harati. Harati means take away. He comes here just to give you benediction, to save you from all kinds of miseries.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.16.23 -- Hawaii, January 19, 1974|Lecture on SB 1.16.23 -- Hawaii, January 19, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So Kṛṣṇa comes down from there; therefore, avatāra: "comes down." Therefore He's called avatāra. Or any Viṣṇu incarnation who comes down, they come down from the higher planetary system. Therefore it is called avatāra. Incarnation means avatāra who comes down from higher position. Therefore, here it is said, kṛtāvatārasya hareḥ. Hareḥ, "of the Supreme Personality of Godhead." Hari, hari means "who takes away all your miserable conditions." Hari, haran, harati. Harati means take away. He comes here just to give you benediction, to save you from all kinds of miseries. Therefore His name is Hari. Yasyāham anugṛhṇāmi, er, yasya aham anugṛhṇāmi, anugṛhṇāmi... I forget now. Kṛṣṇa says that "When I shows to somebody special favor, I take away all his possessions." That is special favor.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB215ParisJune131974_4" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="368" link="Lecture on SB 2.1.5 -- Paris, June 13, 1974" link_text="Lecture on SB 2.1.5 -- Paris, June 13, 1974">
<div class="heading">Hari means if you surrender to such īśvara... You are being controlled. Foolishly, we are thinking, "I am free." How you can be free?
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 2.1.5 -- Paris, June 13, 1974|Lecture on SB 2.1.5 -- Paris, June 13, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So īśvara and hari. Hari means if you surrender to such īśvara... You are being controlled. Foolishly, we are thinking, "I am free." How you can be free? The biggest personality in this country, Napoleon Bonaparte, he was not free. And how you can be free? This is misconception. Nobody can be free. Everyone is controlled. But we are rebelled, "No, I don't want to. I don't want to be controlled." But you will be controlled. Just like in a state, if you don't want to be controlled by the state laws, the state will force you into the prison house to be controlled.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB32616BombayDecember251974_5" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="477" link="Lecture on SB 3.26.16 -- Bombay, December 25, 1974" link_text="Lecture on SB 3.26.16 -- Bombay, December 25, 1974">
<div class="heading">Hari means who takes away all subjective things of fearfulness.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 3.26.16 -- Bombay, December 25, 1974|Lecture on SB 3.26.16 -- Bombay, December 25, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Therefore Prahlāda Mahārāja advises hitvātma-pātaṁ gṛham andha-kūpaṁ vanaṁ gato yad dharim āśrayeta ([[Vanisource:SB 7.5.5|SB 7.5.5]]). The real position of fearlessness is harim āśrayeta, take shelter of Hari. Hari means who takes away all subjective things of fearfulness. That is Hari. He takes away all our miserable condition of life, Hari. Harim āśrayeta. Tat sādhu manye 'sura-varya dehināṁ sadā samudvigna-dhiyām asad-grahāt.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB32646BombayJanuary211975_6" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="502" link="Lecture on SB 3.26.46 -- Bombay, January 21, 1975" link_text="Lecture on SB 3.26.46 -- Bombay, January 21, 1975">
<div class="heading">Hari means God, the Supreme Lord. So He has got sambandha, relationship, because everything is His energy.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 3.26.46 -- Bombay, January 21, 1975|Lecture on SB 3.26.46 -- Bombay, January 21, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Nirbandhaḥ kṛṣṇa-sambandhe yuktaṁ vairāgyam ucyate. We do not give up anything; everything Kṛṣṇa's. Prāpañcikatayā buddhyā hari-sambandhi-vastunaḥ. Hari-sambandhi-vastunaḥ. Hari means God, the Supreme Lord. So He has got sambandha, relationship, because everything is His energy. Therefore it has got some relationship.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB5528VrndavanaNovember151976_7" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="559" link="Lecture on SB 5.5.28 -- Vrndavana, November 15, 1976" link_text="Lecture on SB 5.5.28 -- Vrndavana, November 15, 1976">
<div class="heading">Hari means Bhagavān, and here it is stated, bhagavaj-jana, and hari-jana, the same thing. But nowadays hari-jana means if somebody comes and presents himself as hari-jana, immediately we understand he must be a chamar or bhangi.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 5.5.28 -- Vrndavana, November 15, 1976|Lecture on SB 5.5.28 -- Vrndavana, November 15, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">He is the follower of devotees, bhagavaj-jana. Bhagavaj-jana and hari-jana, the same thing. Hari means Bhagavān, and here it is stated, bhagavaj-jana, and hari-jana, the same thing. But nowadays hari-jana means if somebody comes and presents himself as hari-jana, immediately we understand he must be a chamar or bhangi.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB627VrndavanaSeptember101975_8" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="708" link="Lecture on SB 6.2.7 -- Vrndavana, September 10, 1975" link_text="Lecture on SB 6.2.7 -- Vrndavana, September 10, 1975">
<div class="heading">Hari means Viṣṇu-tattva.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 6.2.7 -- Vrndavana, September 10, 1975|Lecture on SB 6.2.7 -- Vrndavana, September 10, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">The śāstra says, harer nāma, harer nāma ([[Vanisource:CC Adi 17.21|CC Adi 17.21]]), the holy name of Hari, Kṛṣṇa, Viṣṇu, Viṣṇu-tattva. Hari means Viṣṇu-tattva. There are... Tattva is manifested in different ways: Viṣṇu-tattva, Viṣṇu-śakti-tattva, jīva-tattva, like that. So śāstra says that harer nāma, Viṣṇu-tattva. Viṣṇu... Of course, Lord Viṣṇu has several thousands of names according to His different activities: Viṣṇu, Nārāyaṇa, Hari, Govinda, Mādhava, many names.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Festival_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="6" parent="Lectures" text="Festival Lectures"><h3>Festival Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="RadhastamiSrimatiRadharanisAppearanceDayMontrealAugust301968_0" class="quote" parent="Festival_Lectures" book="Lec" index="27" link="Radhastami, Srimati Radharani's Appearance Day -- Montreal, August 30, 1968" link_text="Radhastami, Srimati Radharani's Appearance Day -- Montreal, August 30, 1968">
<div class="heading">Therefore it is called rāmākhya, māyā mānuṣya hari. He is the Hari... Hari means the Supreme Personality of Godhead who can give you all pleasure, taking all your miserable condition. He is Hari.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Radhastami, Srimati Radharani's Appearance Day -- Montreal, August 30, 1968|Radhastami, Srimati Radharani's Appearance Day -- Montreal, August 30, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">They do not know that although He appeared as one of us in the form of human body, He is not a human being. He is the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Therefore it is called rāmākhya, māyā mānuṣya hari. He is the Hari... Hari means the Supreme Personality of Godhead who can give you all pleasure, taking all your miserable condition. He is Hari.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="SriSriRukminiDvarakanathaDeityInstallationLosAngelesJuly161969_1" class="quote" parent="Festival_Lectures" book="Lec" index="49" link="Sri Sri Rukmini Dvarakanatha Deity Installation -- Los Angeles, July 16, 1969" link_text="Sri Sri Rukmini Dvarakanatha Deity Installation -- Los Angeles, July 16, 1969">
<div class="heading">Hari means God, Kṛṣṇa, and jana means His person. Just like we have got here government servant, special, or ordinary person.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Sri Sri Rukmini Dvarakanatha Deity Installation -- Los Angeles, July 16, 1969|Sri Sri Rukmini Dvarakanatha Deity Installation -- Los Angeles, July 16, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">There is no hindrance for anyone to become Harijana. Harijana means God's person or devotee. Hari means God, Kṛṣṇa, and jana means His person. Just like we have got here government servant, special, or ordinary person. So Harijana means the servants of the Supreme Lord. So that is not ordinary thing. There is no harm to create Harijana by regular process, but you cannot make Harijana simply by stamping. Bhagavad-gītā says, equal opportunity for everyone. Māṁ hi pārtha vyapāśrityā ye 'pi syuḥ pāpa-yonayaḥ ([[Vanisource:BG 9.32|BG 9.32]]). Low-class born birth is understood due to sinful activities.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Initiation_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="8" parent="Lectures" text="Initiation Lectures"><h3>Initiation Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="SannyasaInitiationLectureCalcuttaJanuary261973_0" class="quote" parent="Initiation_Lectures" book="Lec" index="51" link="Sannyasa Initiation Lecture -- Calcutta, January 26, 1973" link_text="Sannyasa Initiation Lecture -- Calcutta, January 26, 1973">
<div class="heading">Hari means one who takes away all your sinful activities. Ahaṁ tvāṁ sarva-pāpebhyo mokṣayiṣyāmi (BG 18.66). He's taking; therefore His name is Hari.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Sannyasa Initiation Lecture -- Calcutta, January 26, 1973|Sannyasa Initiation Lecture -- Calcutta, January 26, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Because our business is to go out of this darkness to the light. Tamasi mā jyotir gama. We have to go to the light. So this is the process. Aham... And what is that process? Tama mukundāṅghri-niṣevayaiva. Mukunda means Kṛṣṇa, one who gives liberation. Hari. Hari means one who takes away all your sinful activities. Ahaṁ tvāṁ sarva-pāpebhyo mokṣayiṣyāmi ([[Vanisource:BG 18.66|BG 18.66]]). He's taking; therefore His name is Hari.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="General_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="11" parent="Lectures" text="General Lectures"><h3>General Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureNewYorkApril171969_0" class="quote" parent="General_Lectures" book="Lec" index="46" link="Lecture -- New York, April 17, 1969" link_text="Lecture -- New York, April 17, 1969">
<div class="heading">Hari means "who takes away all your miseries."
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture -- New York, April 17, 1969|Lecture -- New York, April 17, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Hare Kṛṣṇa. (chuckles) Ārādhito yadi haris tapasā tataḥ kim (Nārada-pañcarātra). Govindam ādi-puruṣa is known as Hari. Hari means "who takes away all your miseries." That is Hari. Hara. Hara means taking away. Harate. So just like thief also takes away, but he takes away the valuable things, material consideration, sometimes Kṛṣṇa also takes away your material valuables just to show you special favor.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureatHarvardUniversityBostonDecember241969_1" class="quote" parent="General_Lectures" book="Lec" index="66" link="Lecture at Harvard University -- Boston, December 24, 1969" link_text="Lecture at Harvard University -- Boston, December 24, 1969">
<div class="heading">Hari means the Supreme Lord, and toṣaṇam means satisfaction. Whether by your work and duties, discharging your duty, the Supreme Lord is satisfied—that is your perfection.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture at Harvard University -- Boston, December 24, 1969|Lecture at Harvard University -- Boston, December 24, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Similarly, you have to satisfy somebody. That is the perfection. The highest perfection is to satisfy hari-toṣaṇam. Hari means the Supreme Lord, and toṣaṇam means satisfaction. Whether by your work and duties, discharging your duty, the Supreme Lord is satisfied—that is your perfection. But this is very rare thing. At the present moment practically nobody has any information what is his relationship with God or what is God. Practically, they are declaring "God is dead," and "I am God, you are God, everyone is God." These things are all... "There is void." "There is no God," "There is no control."</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="section" sec_index="5" parent="compilation" text="Conversations and Morning Walks"><h2>Conversations and Morning Walks</h2>
</div>
<div id="1976_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="sub_section" sec_index="9" parent="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" text="1976 Conversations and Morning Walks"><h3>1976 Conversations and Morning Walks</h3>
</div>
<div id="EveningDarsanaJuly71976WashingtonDC_0" class="quote" parent="1976_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="191" link="Evening Darsana -- July 7, 1976, Washington, D.C." link_text="Evening Darsana -- July 7, 1976, Washington, D.C.">
<div class="heading">Bhagavān ka deśa hari. Hari, Hari means the Supreme Personality of Godhead, and dvāra means the door, the doorway to the Supreme Personality of Godhead.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Evening Darsana -- July 7, 1976, Washington, D.C.|Evening Darsana -- July 7, 1976, Washington, D.C.]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: Haridwar. (laughs) Bhagavān ka deśa hari. Hari, Hari means the Supreme Personality of Godhead, and dvāra means the door, the doorway to the Supreme Personality of Godhead. There is a place in India, Haridwar, people go there for pilgrimage, very famous place.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1977_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="sub_section" sec_index="10" parent="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" text="1977 Conversations and Morning Walks"><h3>1977 Conversations and Morning Walks</h3>
</div>
<div id="RoomConversationaboutHarijanasApril101977Bombay_0" class="quote" parent="1977_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="134" link="Room Conversation about Harijanas -- April 10, 1977, Bombay" link_text="Room Conversation about Harijanas -- April 10, 1977, Bombay">
<div class="heading">Jana means person. Hari means the Lord. A government man. Hari's man. Like Nārada.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Room Conversation about Harijanas -- April 10, 1977, Bombay|Room Conversation about Harijanas -- April 10, 1977, Bombay]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Tamāla Kṛṣṇa: What is the translation for the word jana?</p>
<p>Prabhupāda: Jana means person. Hari means the Lord. A government man. Hari's man. Like Nārada.</p>
<p>Tamāla Kṛṣṇa: Nārada Muni is a harijana.</p>
</div>
</div>
</div>

Rāma means

2010-04-03T12:06:38Z

Partha-sarathi: Created page with '<div id="compilation"> <div id="facts"> {{terms|"rama means"}} {{notes|}} {{compiler|Partha-sarathi}} {{complete|ALL}} {{first|03Apr10}} {{last|03Apr10}} {{totals_by_section|BG=0…'

<div id="compilation">
<div id="facts">
{{terms|"rama means"}}
{{notes|}}
{{compiler|Partha-sarathi}}
{{complete|ALL}}
{{first|03Apr10}}
{{last|03Apr10}}
{{totals_by_section|BG=0|SB=1|CC=2|OB=0|Lec=26|Con=3|Let=1}}
{{total|33}}
{{toc right}}
[[Category:Meaning of Sanskrit Words]]
</div>
<div id="Srimad-Bhagavatam" class="section" sec_index="1" parent="compilation" text="Srimad-Bhagavatam"><h2>Srimad-Bhagavatam</h2>
</div>
<div id="SB_Canto_1" class="sub_section" sec_index="1" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam" text="SB Canto 1"><h3>SB Canto 1</h3>
</div>
<div id="SB11223_0" class="quote" parent="SB_Canto_1" book="SB" index="458" link="SB 1.12.23" link_text="SB 1.12.23">
<div class="heading">Ramā means the goddess of fortune. And her shelter is Lord Viṣṇu. Lord Viṣṇu is the maintainer of all living beings. There are innumerable living beings, not only on the surface of this planet but also in all other hundreds of thousands of planets.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:SB 1.12.23|SB 1.12.23, Purport]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="purport text"><p style="display: inline;">Ramā means the goddess of fortune. And her shelter is Lord Viṣṇu. Lord Viṣṇu is the maintainer of all living beings. There are innumerable living beings, not only on the surface of this planet but also in all other hundreds of thousands of planets. All of them are provided with all necessities of life for the progressive march towards the end of self-realization, but on the path of sense gratification they are put into difficulty by the agency of māyā, the illusory energy, and so travel the path of a false plan of economic development. Such economic development is never successful because it is illusory. These men are always after the mercy of the illusory goddess of fortune, but they do not know that the goddess of fortune can live only under the protection of Viṣṇu. Without Viṣṇu, the goddess of fortune is an illusion.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Sri_Caitanya-caritamrta" class="section" sec_index="2" parent="compilation" text="Sri Caitanya-caritamrta"><h2>Sri Caitanya-caritamrta</h2>
</div>
<div id="CC_Adi-lila" class="sub_section" sec_index="1" parent="Sri_Caitanya-caritamrta" text="CC Adi-lila"><h3>CC Adi-lila</h3>
</div>
<div id="CCAdi5132_0" class="quote" parent="CC_Adi-lila" book="CC" index="734" link="CC Adi 5.132" link_text="CC Adi 5.132">
<div class="heading">One of them stated that "Hare Rāma" refers to Śrī Balarāma, and the other protested that "Hare Rāma" means Lord Rāma.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:CC Adi 5.132|CC Adi 5.132, Purport]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="purport text"><p style="display: inline;">In this connection we may mention an incident that took place between two of our sannyāsīs while we were preaching the Hare Kṛṣṇa mahā-mantra in Hyderabad. One of them stated that "Hare Rāma" refers to Śrī Balarāma, and the other protested that "Hare Rāma" means Lord Rāma. Ultimately the controversy came to me, and I gave the decision that if someone says that the "Rāma" in "Hare Rāma" is Lord Rāmacandra and someone else says that the "Rāma" in "Hare Rāma" is Śrī Balarāma, both are correct because there is no difference between Śrī Balarāma and Lord Rāma.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="CCAdi5132_1" class="quote" parent="CC_Adi-lila" book="CC" index="734" link="CC Adi 5.132" link_text="CC Adi 5.132">
<div class="heading">Similarly, if one says that Hare Rāma means "O Śrī Balarāma!" he is also right. Those who are aware of the viṣṇu-tattva do not fight over all these details.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:CC Adi 5.132|CC Adi 5.132, Purport]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="purport text"><p style="display: inline;">If someone calls Lord Rāmacandra by the vibration Hare Rāma, understanding it to mean "O Lord Rāmacandra!" he is quite right. Similarly, if one says that Hare Rāma means "O Śrī Balarāma!" he is also right. Those who are aware of the viṣṇu-tattva do not fight over all these details.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Lectures" class="section" sec_index="4" parent="compilation" text="Lectures"><h2>Lectures</h2>
</div>
<div id="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="0" parent="Lectures" text="Bhagavad-gita As It Is Lectures"><h3>Bhagavad-gita As It Is Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG31316NewYorkMay231966_0" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="120" link="Lecture on BG 3.13-16 -- New York, May 23, 1966" link_text="Lecture on BG 3.13-16 -- New York, May 23, 1966">
<div class="heading">Rāma means ramaṇa. Ramaṇa means enjoyment. So yoginaḥ.
Now, mind that, karma-yogī. Those who are yogis, those who are trying to get spiritual life, regain their spiritual vitality, they are called yogis.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 3.13-16 -- New York, May 23, 1966|Lecture on BG 3.13-16 -- New York, May 23, 1966]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Rāma means ramaṇa. Ramaṇa means enjoyment. So yoginaḥ.</p>
<p>Now, mind that, karma-yogī. Those who are yogis, those who are trying to get spiritual life, regain their spiritual vitality, they are called yogis. There are different kinds of yogis: karma-yogī, jñāna-yogī, dhyāna-yogī, rāja-yogī. The highest of all of them is the bhakti-yogī or the bhakta.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG412BombayApril11974_1" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="164" link="Lecture on BG 4.12 -- Bombay, April 1, 1974" link_text="Lecture on BG 4.12 -- Bombay, April 1, 1974">
<div class="heading">Therefore it is said, ramante yoginaḥ anante. So ananta-ramaṇa, that is the description of Rāma. Rāma means ananta-ānanda, unlimited happiness.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 4.12 -- Bombay, April 1, 1974|Lecture on BG 4.12 -- Bombay, April 1, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Antavanta ime dehāḥ. Anta means this body. Antavanta ime dehā nityasyoktāḥ śarīriṇaḥ: (2.18) "But within the body, the proprietor of the body is nitya." So nityo nityānām. If I am nitya, eternal, then I should be interested in eternal happiness. But the eternal happiness is not possible to enjoy by this body. Therefore it is said, ramante yoginaḥ anante. So ananta-ramaṇa, that is the description of Rāma. Rāma means ananta-ānanda, unlimited happiness. Iti rāma-padenāsau paraṁ brahmābhidhīyate ([[Vanisource:CC Madhya 9.29|CC Madhya 9.29]]). Rāma is paraṁ brahma, and Kṛṣṇa is also paraṁ brahma. Kṛṣṇa is recognized by Arjuna after understanding Bhagavad-gītā, paraṁ brahma paraṁ dhāma pavitraṁ paramaṁ bhavān ([[Vanisource:BG 10.12|BG 10.12]]). So there is no different between Rāma and Kṛṣṇa. Kṛṣṇa is also paraṁ brahma and Rāma is also paraṁ brahma.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG51422NewYorkAugust281966_2" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="204" link="Lecture on BG 5.14-22 -- New York, August 28, 1966" link_text="Lecture on BG 5.14-22 -- New York, August 28, 1966">
<div class="heading">This rāma... he rāma means that unlimited enjoyment in real happiness. There is another meaning of rāma. Rāma, Lord Rāma, that is all right.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 5.14-22 -- New York, August 28, 1966|Lecture on BG 5.14-22 -- New York, August 28, 1966]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Enjoys within him... That is real happiness. This word rāma... We chant Hare Kṛṣṇa Hare Kṛṣṇa Kṛṣṇa Kṛṣṇa Hare Hare, Hare Rāma Hare Rāma Rāma Rāma Hare Hare. This rāma... he rāma means that unlimited enjoyment in real happiness. There is another meaning of rāma. Rāma, Lord Rāma, that is all right. And also some grammatical meaning that rāma means ramante. Ramante means to enjoy.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG61121NewYorkSeptember71966_3" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="213" link="Lecture on BG 6.11-21 -- New York, September 7, 1966" link_text="Lecture on BG 6.11-21 -- New York, September 7, 1966">
<div class="heading">We described, this Rāma means to enjoy in the spiritual life. That is called Rāma.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 6.11-21 -- New York, September 7, 1966|Lecture on BG 6.11-21 -- New York, September 7, 1966]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">. In the unlimited, not into the limited. In the unlimited. Yoginaḥ anante and satyānande, that is real happiness. Satyānande cid-ātmani. And that is spiritual. That is not material. Iti rāma, this is the meaning of Rāma. Hare Rāma. We described, this Rāma means to enjoy in the spiritual life. That is called Rāma.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG72HyderabadApril281974New2003_4" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="255" link="Lecture on BG 7.2 -- Hyderabad, April 28, 1974 (New-2003)" link_text="Lecture on BG 7.2 -- Hyderabad, April 28, 1974 ">
<div class="heading">So we have to take the understanding of great personality. Rāma. Rāma. Rāma means paraṁ brahma.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 7.2 -- Hyderabad, April 28, 1974 (New-2003)|Lecture on BG 7.2 -- Hyderabad, April 28, 1974 ]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">. But real meaning of Kṛṣṇa is paraṁ brahma. Kṛṣi go va... Kṛṣi bhu-vacaka-sabda nasta nirvṛtti-vacaka (?) iti kṛṣṇa paraṁ brahma iti abhidhīyate. Kṛṣṇa means paraṁ brahma. Kṛṣṇa means all-attractive. So we have to take the understanding of great personality. Rāma. Rāma. Rāma means paraṁ brahma.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG72HyderabadApril281974New2003_5" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="255" link="Lecture on BG 7.2 -- Hyderabad, April 28, 1974 (New-2003)" link_text="Lecture on BG 7.2 -- Hyderabad, April 28, 1974 ">
<div class="heading">So this Hare Kṛṣṇa Hare Rāma means direct connection with the paraṁ brahma.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 7.2 -- Hyderabad, April 28, 1974 (New-2003)|Lecture on BG 7.2 -- Hyderabad, April 28, 1974 ]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So this Hare Kṛṣṇa Hare Rāma means direct connection with the paraṁ brahma.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG73VrndavanaAugust91974_6" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="263" link="Lecture on BG 7.3 -- Vrndavana, August 9, 1974" link_text="Lecture on BG 7.3 -- Vrndavana, August 9, 1974">
<div class="heading">These are the description. Rāma means one who takes ānanda in the reality, not in the false. So this is the way of understanding Kṛṣṇa.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 7.3 -- Vrndavana, August 9, 1974|Lecture on BG 7.3 -- Vrndavana, August 9, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Caitanya Mahāprabhu has described, ceto-darpaṇa-mārjanaṁ bhava-mahā-dāvāgni-nirvāpaṇaṁ śreyaḥ-kairava-candrikā-vitaraṇaṁ vidyā-vadhū-jīvanam ānandāmbudhi-vardhanam ([[Vanisource:CC Antya 20.12|CC Antya 20.12]]). Ānandāmbudhi... We have no experience that ambudhi... Ambudhi means the ocean. And ānandāmbudhi, the ocean of ānanda, vardhanam, it is increasing. It is increasing. We have no experience that the sea or the ocean is increasing. It is decreasing. So this is ānanda. Ramante yoginaḥ anante. That is ananta ānanda. Ramante yoginaḥ anante satyānande cid-ātmani. That is not jaḍātmā. Here this ānanda is jaḍa, dull. It is not ānanda, material, but cid-ātmani. Iti rāma-padenāsau paraṁ brahmābhidhīyate ([[Vanisource:CC Madhya 9.29|CC Madhya 9.29]]). These are the description. Rāma means one who takes ānanda in the reality, not in the false. So this is the way of understanding Kṛṣṇa.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="1" parent="Lectures" text="Srimad-Bhagavatam Lectures"><h3>Srimad-Bhagavatam Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB126MontrealAugust31968_0" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="32" link="Lecture on SB 1.2.6 -- Montreal, August 3, 1968" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.2.6 -- Montreal, August 3, 1968">
<div class="heading">That position is called rama. But if you have no idea what is God, how we can exchange our feelings, then there is no question of rama. Rama means when we are in position of exchanging our loving attachment to the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Then He's known as Rāma.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.2.6 -- Montreal, August 3, 1968|Lecture on SB 1.2.6 -- Montreal, August 3, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Ram means enjoy. We want enjoyment, but we do not know how we can have permanent enjoyment. When you have got permanent enjoyment by reciprocation of transaction with the Supreme, then that particular accepter of our reciprocation is called Rāma. That means by... We enjoy the loving exchange between God and ourselves. That position is called rama. But if you have no idea what is God, how we can exchange our feelings, then there is no question of rama. Rama means when we are in position of exchanging our loving attachment to the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Then He's known as Rāma. The capacity in which He accepts our service, loving service, is called Rāma, ramante.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB1514NewVrindabanJune181969_1" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="140" link="Lecture on SB 1.5.14 -- New Vrindaban, June 18, 1969" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.5.14 -- New Vrindaban, June 18, 1969">
<div class="heading">This is the description, this is the meaning of the word rāma. Rāma, this word, comes from ramante, ram. Ram-dhātu. Ram means enjoyment. And rāma means the full of pleasure.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.5.14 -- New Vrindaban, June 18, 1969|Lecture on SB 1.5.14 -- New Vrindaban, June 18, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">The goodness platform is very nice in the material world, but there is another platform, which is called śuddha-sattva. Sattvaṁ viśuddham, viśuddhaṁ vasudeva-śabditam. That is transcendental platform, and in that platform you can understand God. God is Vāsudeva, and in the vasudeva platform... So ramante yogino 'nante satyānande cid-ātmani. That is cid-ātmani. Cit means knowledge; ātmani means self. In that platform. Iti rāma-padenāsau paraṁ brahmābhidhīyate ([[Vanisource:CC Madhya 9.29|CC Madhya 9.29]]). This is the description, this is the meaning of the word rāma. Rāma, this word, comes from ramante, ram. Ram-dhātu. Ram means enjoyment. And rāma means the full of pleasure. If you contact with Rāma, or Kṛṣṇa, the absolute attractive, then you are placed in the absolute platform for eternal enjoyment.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB1719VrndavanaSeptember161976_2" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="175" link="Lecture on SB 1.7.19 -- Vrndavana, September 16, 1976" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.7.19 -- Vrndavana, September 16, 1976">
<div class="heading">So we address; Hare, "Oh, the energy, spiritual energy of the Lord," and Kṛṣṇa, "O the Supreme Lord," Hare Rāma, the same thing. Paraṁ Brahman. Rāma means Paraṁ Brahman, Kṛṣṇa means Paraṁ Brahman and... So what is the meaning of addressing, "He Kṛṣṇa, He Rādhe, He Rāma."
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.7.19 -- Vrndavana, September 16, 1976|Lecture on SB 1.7.19 -- Vrndavana, September 16, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So we address; Hare, "Oh, the energy, spiritual energy of the Lord," and Kṛṣṇa, "O the Supreme Lord," Hare Rāma, the same thing. Paraṁ Brahman. Rāma means Paraṁ Brahman, Kṛṣṇa means Paraṁ Brahman and... So what is the meaning of addressing, "He Kṛṣṇa, He Rādhe, He Rāma." Why? There should be some... Why you are asking? That "Just engage me in your service." That is taught by Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB5512ParisAugust121973_3" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="520" link="Lecture on SB 5.5.1-2 -- Paris, August 12, 1973" link_text="Lecture on SB 5.5.1-2 -- Paris, August 12, 1973">
<div class="heading">Rāma is also God, another name of God. Rāma means the "who enjoys." Kṛṣṇa means "who attracts." So God is the supreme enjoyer, therefore He is called Rāma.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 5.5.1-2 -- Paris, August 12, 1973|Lecture on SB 5.5.1-2 -- Paris, August 12, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Rāma is also God, another name of God. Rāma means the "who enjoys." Kṛṣṇa means "who attracts." So God is the supreme enjoyer, therefore He is called Rāma. And God is the supreme attractor. He attracts everyone, therefore He is called Kṛṣṇa. So the names are on the quality of God. You have already questioned. Yes.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB628VrndavanaSeptember111975_4" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="709" link="Lecture on SB 6.2.8 -- Vrndavana, September 11, 1975" link_text="Lecture on SB 6.2.8 -- Vrndavana, September 11, 1975">
<div class="heading">So Hare Kṛṣṇa means Rādhā-Kṛṣṇa, and Hare Rāma means Sītā-Rāma. So either you chant Hare Kṛṣṇa or Sītā-Rāma, it is the same. And this is the only way.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 6.2.8 -- Vrndavana, September 11, 1975|Lecture on SB 6.2.8 -- Vrndavana, September 11, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So Hare Kṛṣṇa and Hare Rāma. Therefore it is enjoined by the śāstra, "Chant these two names: Hare Kṛṣṇa, Hare Kṛṣṇa, Kṛṣṇa Kṛṣṇa, Hare Hare/ Hare Rāma, Hare Rāma, Rāma Rāma, Hare Hare." So Rāma and Kṛṣṇa is the Supreme Lord, and Hare means Harā. So Harā means the potency, pleasure potency of the Supreme Lord, Harā. It is addressed as Hare. So Hare Kṛṣṇa means Rādhā-Kṛṣṇa, and Hare Rāma means Sītā-Rāma. So either you chant Hare Kṛṣṇa or Sītā-Rāma, it is the same. And this is the only way. This is only. There is no difficulty.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Sri_Caitanya-caritamrta_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="3" parent="Lectures" text="Sri Caitanya-caritamrta Lectures"><h3>Sri Caitanya-caritamrta Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonCCAdilila17MayapurMarch311975_0" class="quote" parent="Sri_Caitanya-caritamrta_Lectures" book="Lec" index="7" link="Lecture on CC Adi-lila 1.7 -- Mayapur, March 31, 1975" link_text="Lecture on CC Adi-lila 1.7 -- Mayapur, March 31, 1975">
<div class="heading">That we know by following the footprints of mahājanas. Narottama dāsa Ṭhākura says, vrajendra-nandana yei, śacī-suta hoila sei, balarāma hoila nitāi: "Balarāma has appeared now as Nityānanda." So bala means strength, spiritual strength, and rāma means enjoyer.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on CC Adi-lila 1.7 -- Mayapur, March 31, 1975|Lecture on CC Adi-lila 1.7 -- Mayapur, March 31, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Balarāma is Nityānanda. That we know by following the footprints of mahājanas. Narottama dāsa Ṭhākura says, vrajendra-nandana yei, śacī-suta hoila sei, balarāma hoila nitāi: "Balarāma has appeared now as Nityānanda." So bala means strength, spiritual strength, and rāma means enjoyer. Iti rāma padenāsau param brahma ity abhidhīyate. Rāma means Parabrahman. Satyānande cid-ātmani. Ramante yoginaḥ anante ([[Vanisource:CC Madhya 9.29|CC Madhya 9.29]]). Yogi, they are also interested in enjoying life.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonCCAdilila17MayapurMarch311975_1" class="quote" parent="Sri_Caitanya-caritamrta_Lectures" book="Lec" index="7" link="Lecture on CC Adi-lila 1.7 -- Mayapur, March 31, 1975" link_text="Lecture on CC Adi-lila 1.7 -- Mayapur, March 31, 1975">
<div class="heading">Rāma means who enjoys. So this word rāma is explained in the śāstra that one who is expert in enjoying eternal happiness, he is perfect yogi.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on CC Adi-lila 1.7 -- Mayapur, March 31, 1975|Lecture on CC Adi-lila 1.7 -- Mayapur, March 31, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Rāma means who enjoys. So this word rāma is explained in the śāstra that one who is expert in enjoying eternal happiness, he is perfect yogi. Not flickering happiness. Flickering happiness, the yogis are not interested in flickering happiness or material happiness. Material happiness is always flickering, temporary. That is not happiness, but we take it. Real happiness is when we enjoy life with Kṛṣṇa, rāma. That is real happiness.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonCCMadhyalila20255281NewYorkDecember171966_2" class="quote" parent="Sri_Caitanya-caritamrta_Lectures" book="Lec" index="87" link="Lecture on CC Madhya-lila 20.255-281 -- New York, December 17, 1966" link_text="Lecture on CC Madhya-lila 20.255-281 -- New York, December 17, 1966">
<div class="heading">In the Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam, in the Tenth Canto, it is stated that "This Rāma and Kṛṣṇa"—Rāma means Balarāma, and Kṛṣṇa—"They are the root of this material creation.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on CC Madhya-lila 20.255-281 -- New York, December 17, 1966|Lecture on CC Madhya-lila 20.255-281 -- New York, December 17, 1966]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">In the Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam, in the Tenth Canto, it is stated that "This Rāma and Kṛṣṇa"—Rāma means Balarāma, and Kṛṣṇa—"They are the root of this material creation. And both of Them enters into each and every universe and maintains that." Aṇḍāntara-stha-paramāṇu-cayāntara-stham (Bs. 5.35).</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonCCMadhyalila253640SanFranciscoJanuary231967_3" class="quote" parent="Sri_Caitanya-caritamrta_Lectures" book="Lec" index="117" link="Lecture on CC Madhya-lila 25.36-40 -- San Francisco, January 23, 1967" link_text="Lecture on CC Madhya-lila 25.36-40 -- San Francisco, January 23, 1967">
<div class="heading">Rāma means to enjoy life in the Supreme, transcendental Supreme Personality of Godhead.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on CC Madhya-lila 25.36-40 -- San Francisco, January 23, 1967|Lecture on CC Madhya-lila 25.36-40 -- San Francisco, January 23, 1967]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Here we do not know what sort of enjoyment we are doing. Cid-ātmani. Iti rāma padenāsau paraṁ brahmābhidhīyate ([[Vanisource:CC Madhya 9.29|CC Madhya 9.29]]). This is the meaning of the word Rāma. We chant daily Hare Kṛṣṇa, Hare Kṛṣṇa, Kṛṣṇa Kṛṣṇa, Hare Hare/ Hare Rāma, Hare Rāma, Rāma Rāma, Hare Hare. Now, this word Rāma is explained in this way. Rāma means to enjoy life in the Supreme, transcendental Supreme Personality of Godhead. That means dovetail your activities with Kṛṣṇa consciousness and you will be able to enjoy life eternally, blissfully. This is the purpose of Kṛṣṇa consciousness.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Festival_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="6" parent="Lectures" text="Festival Lectures"><h3>Festival Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="RathayatraSanFranciscoJuly51970_0" class="quote" parent="Festival_Lectures" book="Lec" index="11" link="Ratha-yatra -- San Francisco, July 5, 1970" link_text="Ratha-yatra -- San Francisco, July 5, 1970">
<div class="heading">So Jagannātha means the proprietor or the master of all these movements, He is Jagannātha. And Balabhadra, Balarāma, bala means strength and rāma means enjoyment.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Ratha-yatra -- San Francisco, July 5, 1970|Ratha-yatra -- San Francisco, July 5, 1970]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So Jagannātha means the proprietor or the master of all these movements, He is Jagannātha. And Balabhadra, Balarāma, bala means strength and rāma means enjoyment. So Balarāma means who gives you spiritual strength for enjoying eternal blissful life, He is Balarāma. And Subhadrā, su means auspicious and bhadra means well-being. Subhadrā, Jagannātha and Balarāma combined together are present before you to reclaim you all from your miserable condition of life. That is the purport of this Ratha-yātrā Festival. (break) If anyone sees on the cart Jagannātha, Subhadrā, and Baladeva, then he does not take birth again in this material world. Ratheja vamanaṁ dṛṣṭa</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="RadhastamiSrimatiRadharanisAppearanceDayMontrealAugust301968_1" class="quote" parent="Festival_Lectures" book="Lec" index="27" link="Radhastami, Srimati Radharani's Appearance Day -- Montreal, August 30, 1968" link_text="Radhastami, Srimati Radharani's Appearance Day -- Montreal, August 30, 1968">
<div class="heading">Similarly Rāma, Rāma means the Supreme Enjoyer. Ramante yoginām anante sac-cid-ānanda-cirātmanīti rāma-padenāsau. Rāma means real bliss, and all the yogis, either dhyāna-yogī or a jñāna-yogī or a bhakta-yogī...
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Radhastami, Srimati Radharani's Appearance Day -- Montreal, August 30, 1968|Radhastami, Srimati Radharani's Appearance Day -- Montreal, August 30, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Kṛṣṇa is svayam. Kṛṣṇaḥ svayaṁ samabhavat paramaḥ pumān yo. Kṛṣṇa is paramaḥ pumān. Paramaḥ pumān means the ultimate Supreme Personality of Godhead. But He is always manifest in different incarnations, and of all the incarnation, Lord Rāma is the foremost, Balarāma. You have heard the name of Balarāma, Baladeva. Similarly Rāma, Rāma means the Supreme Enjoyer. Ramante yoginām anante sac-cid-ānanda-cirātmanīti rāma-padenāsau. Rāma means real bliss, and all the yogis, either dhyāna-yogī or a jñāna-yogī or a bhakta-yogī... There are three kinds of yogis. Everyone tries to enjoy that eternal bliss, and that is real pleasure. Therefore Rāma.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="RadhastamiSrimatiRadharanisAppearanceDayMontrealAugust301968_2" class="quote" parent="Festival_Lectures" book="Lec" index="27" link="Radhastami, Srimati Radharani's Appearance Day -- Montreal, August 30, 1968" link_text="Radhastami, Srimati Radharani's Appearance Day -- Montreal, August 30, 1968">
<div class="heading">Rāma means the ramanīyā, the beautiful, or the enjoyer, rāmākhyam. And jagad-īśvaram. And He is the master or the proprietor of the whole universes.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Radhastami, Srimati Radharani's Appearance Day -- Montreal, August 30, 1968|Radhastami, Srimati Radharani's Appearance Day -- Montreal, August 30, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Rāmākhyam. Rāma means the ramanīyā, the beautiful, or the enjoyer, rāmākhyam. And jagad-īśvaram. And He is the master or the proprietor of the whole universes. Sura-gurum. Sura means the demigods and gurum is spiritual master. Sura-gurum. Just like Arjuna is sura, and his guru is Kṛṣṇa. Vyāsadeva, his guru, Nārada; Nārada's guru is Brahmā; Brahmā's guru is Kṛṣṇa. So sura-gurum. māyā-manusyam. And when He appears as human being, that is māyā. māyā means actually He is not an ordinary man.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="VarahadvadasiLordVarahasAppearanceDayLectureBhuvanesvaraJanuary311977_3" class="quote" parent="Festival_Lectures" book="Lec" index="39" link="Varaha-dvadasi, Lord Varaha's Appearance Day Lecture -- Bhuvanesvara, January 31, 1977" link_text="Varaha-dvadasi, Lord Varaha's Appearance Day Lecture -- Bhuvanesvara, January 31, 1977">
<div class="heading">So this Rāma means enjoyment. So Kṛṣṇa's enjoyment... It does not mean, Kṛṣṇa has appeared as the boar; it does not mean He is suffering.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Varaha-dvadasi, Lord Varaha's Appearance Day Lecture -- Bhuvanesvara, January 31, 1977|Varaha-dvadasi, Lord Varaha's Appearance Day Lecture -- Bhuvanesvara, January 31, 1977]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Kṛṣṇa, Govinda, ādi-puruṣa, the original person, He is taking various forms. Rāmādi-murtiṣu specially. Three Rāma: Paraśurāma, Balarāma, and Daśarathi Rāma. So this Rāma means enjoyment. So Kṛṣṇa's enjoyment... It does not mean, Kṛṣṇa has appeared as the boar; it does not mean He is suffering. Everything is ānanda-cinmaya-rasa-pratibhāvitābhis (Bs. 5.37). Sometimes a big man becomes a horse. It is... There is a very nice interesting story that the big Prime Minister Gladstone, English, English Prime Minister, Gladstone?</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="General_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="11" parent="Lectures" text="General Lectures"><h3>General Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="NortheasternUniversityLectureBostonApril301969_0" class="quote" parent="General_Lectures" book="Lec" index="51" link="Northeastern University Lecture -- Boston, April 30, 1969" link_text="Northeastern University Lecture -- Boston, April 30, 1969">
<div class="heading">And Rāma means the supreme pleasure. So if God is not all-attractive and supreme pleasure, then what is the meaning of God? God must be.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Northeastern University Lecture -- Boston, April 30, 1969|Northeastern University Lecture -- Boston, April 30, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Lord Caitanya says that the Lord's name... Lord's name is not, I mean to say, limited with Kṛṣṇa. Kṛṣṇa is the perfect name. Kṛṣṇa means all-attractive. Kṛṣṇa means all-attractive. And Rāma means the supreme pleasure. So if God is not all-attractive and supreme pleasure, then what is the meaning of God? God must be. He must be the supreme pleasure. Otherwise how you can be satisfied with Him?</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="NortheasternUniversityLectureBostonApril301969_1" class="quote" parent="General_Lectures" book="Lec" index="51" link="Northeastern University Lecture -- Boston, April 30, 1969" link_text="Northeastern University Lecture -- Boston, April 30, 1969">
<div class="heading">Actually there are three names: Hare, Kṛṣṇa, and Rāma. Rāma means the supreme pleasure, Kṛṣṇa means all-attractive, and Hare means the energy.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Northeastern University Lecture -- Boston, April 30, 1969|Northeastern University Lecture -- Boston, April 30, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So we have to transfer our love from so many dogs to God. That is the perfection of life. And we are not teaching any particular type of religion. We are simply teaching that you love God. And this is possible simply by chanting these three names, Hare Kṛṣṇa, Hare Kṛṣṇa, Kṛṣṇa Kṛṣṇa, Hare Hare... It is sixteen names. Actually there are three names: Hare, Kṛṣṇa, and Rāma. Rāma means the supreme pleasure, Kṛṣṇa means all-attractive, and Hare means the energy. Then it is perfect. Energy and the Lord, that is whole sum and substance of all creation, cosmic manifestation, anything. They are detailed in this Bhagavad-gītā, Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam, but that is the sum and substance of everything.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureLondonSeptember161969_2" class="quote" parent="General_Lectures" book="Lec" index="62" link="Lecture -- London, September 16, 1969" link_text="Lecture -- London, September 16, 1969">
<div class="heading">That is the meaning, rāma. Iti rāma-padenāsau paraṁ brahma ity abhidhīyate. Rāma. Rāma means rāman. Rāma. The Supreme Personality of Godhead, Lord Rāma.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture -- London, September 16, 1969|Lecture -- London, September 16, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">That is the meaning, rāma. Iti rāma-padenāsau paraṁ brahma ity abhidhīyate. Rāma. Rāma means rāman. Rāma. The Supreme Personality of Godhead, Lord Rāma. If you associate with Him, Rāma or Kṛṣṇa or Viṣṇu, Nārāyaṇa... Nārāyaṇa parā avyaktāt. He is transcendental. So some way or other, if you make association with Him, if you are elevated to that position, then you get ananta, unlimited happiness. That is required.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureBombayMarch181972_3" class="quote" parent="General_Lectures" book="Lec" index="104" link="Lecture -- Bombay, March 18, 1972" link_text="Lecture -- Bombay, March 18, 1972">
<div class="heading">Therefore rāma, rāma means to enjoy spiritual bliss satyānanda.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture -- Bombay, March 18, 1972|Lecture -- Bombay, March 18, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">That is spiritual, cid-ātmani. Iti rāma-padenāsau paraṁ brahmābhidhīyate ([[Vanisource:CC Madhya 9.29|CC Madhya 9.29]]). Therefore rāma, rāma means to enjoy spiritual bliss satyānanda. That is, that should be the aim of human form of life. Human form of life is a chance to come back to the real platform of transcendental bliss. And if we waste our time simply for animal sense gratification like dogs and hogs, then you are wasting your time.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureatArtGalleryAucklandApril161972_4" class="quote" parent="General_Lectures" book="Lec" index="109" link="Lecture at Art Gallery -- Auckland, April 16, 1972" link_text="Lecture at Art Gallery -- Auckland, April 16, 1972">
<div class="heading">What is the meaning of Rāma, Rāma-Kṛṣṇa? So Rāma means ramante, enjoys, rāma. So who enjoys? Yoginaḥ, big, big yogis. Rāmante yoginaḥ.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture at Art Gallery -- Auckland, April 16, 1972|Lecture at Art Gallery -- Auckland, April 16, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">What is the meaning of Rāma, Rāma-Kṛṣṇa? So Rāma means ramante, enjoys, rāma. So who enjoys? Yoginaḥ, big, big yogis. Rāmante yoginaḥ. The greatest of all yogis is the bhakta-yogī.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureattheHareKrsnaFestivalatLaSallePleyelParisJune141974_5" class="quote" parent="General_Lectures" book="Lec" index="148" link="Lecture at the Hare Krsna Festival at La Salle Pleyel -- Paris, June 14, 1974" link_text="Lecture at the Hare Krsna Festival at La Salle Pleyel -- Paris, June 14, 1974">
<div class="heading">Similarly, Rāma means God. So there are three words in this verse: Hare Kṛṣṇa, Hare Kṛṣṇa, Kṛṣṇa Kṛṣṇa, Hare Hare/ Hare Rāma, Hare Rāma, Rāma Rāma, Hare Hare: Hare, Kṛṣṇa and Rāma. So anyone can chant these three names, Hare, Kṛṣṇa and Rāma, and make his life successful.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture at the Hare Krsna Festival at La Salle Pleyel -- Paris, June 14, 1974|Lecture at the Hare Krsna Festival at La Salle Pleyel -- Paris, June 14, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Similarly, Rāma means God. So there are three words in this verse: Hare Kṛṣṇa, Hare Kṛṣṇa, Kṛṣṇa Kṛṣṇa, Hare Hare/ Hare Rāma, Hare Rāma, Rāma Rāma, Hare Hare: Hare, Kṛṣṇa and Rāma. So anyone can chant these three names, Hare, Kṛṣṇa and Rāma, and make his life successful. I hope you shall join us in this chanting of Hare Kṛṣṇa mahā-mantra.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="section" sec_index="5" parent="compilation" text="Conversations and Morning Walks"><h2>Conversations and Morning Walks</h2>
</div>
<div id="1975_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="sub_section" sec_index="8" parent="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" text="1975 Conversations and Morning Walks"><h3>1975 Conversations and Morning Walks</h3>
</div>
<div id="MorningWalkOctober21975Mauritius_0" class="quote" parent="1975_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="196" link="Morning Walk -- October 2, 1975, Mauritius" link_text="Morning Walk -- October 2, 1975, Mauritius">
<div class="heading">Rāma means ramaṇa, enjoyment. Iti rāma-padenāsau paraṁ brahmābhidhiyate (CC Madhya 9.29). They do not know what is satyānanda.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Morning Walk -- October 2, 1975, Mauritius|Morning Walk -- October 2, 1975, Mauritius]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: Satyānanda-cid-ātmani. Yogis, bhakti-yogis, they also want ānanda, but not this false ānanda, satyānanda-cid-ātmāni, iti... Therefore they call Rāma. Rāma means ramaṇa, enjoyment. Iti rāma-padenāsau paraṁ brahmābhidhiyate ([[Vanisource:CC Madhya 9.29|CC Madhya 9.29]]). They do not know what is satyānanda. They do not understand, as soon as we accept this material body, it is misery, simply misery. The body is constructed within the womb of the mother in a miserable condition. These rascals, they do not understand. In a packed-up way, head down, leg up. And it is enjoyment. The body is created in this troublesome, from miserable condition; still, they say, "enjoyment." This is foolishness. This is called illusion.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1976_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="sub_section" sec_index="9" parent="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" text="1976 Conversations and Morning Walks"><h3>1976 Conversations and Morning Walks</h3>
</div>
<div id="RoomConversationwithEndowmentsCommissionerofAndhraPradeshAugust221976Hyderabad_0" class="quote" parent="1976_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="279" link="Room Conversation with Endowments Commissioner of Andhra Pradesh -- August 22, 1976, Hyderabad" link_text="Room Conversation with Endowments Commissioner of Andhra Pradesh -- August 22, 1976, Hyderabad">
<div class="heading">This policy, that take Sītā and kill Rāma, means he will destroy himself. So this is going on. Take Gītā and kill Kṛṣṇa.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Room Conversation with Endowments Commissioner of Andhra Pradesh -- August 22, 1976, Hyderabad|Room Conversation with Endowments Commissioner of Andhra Pradesh -- August 22, 1976, Hyderabad]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: You cannot do any harm to Rāma, but he will be destroyed. This policy, that take Sītā and kill Rāma, means he will destroy himself. So this is going on. Take Gītā and kill Kṛṣṇa. This will destroy the whole thing. This Rāvaṇa's policy. And Hanumān's policy is somehow or other rescue Sītā and get her seated by the side of Rāma. Therefore he's worshiped, Vajrāṅgajī. That is the difference between Rāvaṇa's policy. Sītā is the via media. But one is trying to bring back Sītā and seat her by the side of Rāma, and another is trying to take away Sītā and kill Rāma. This wrong policy will not take.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1977_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="sub_section" sec_index="10" parent="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" text="1977 Conversations and Morning Walks"><h3>1977 Conversations and Morning Walks</h3>
</div>
<div id="RoomConversationJanuary81977Bombay_0" class="quote" parent="1977_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="16" link="Room Conversation -- January 8, 1977, Bombay" link_text="Room Conversation -- January 8, 1977, Bombay">
<div class="heading">Rāma means Kṛṣṇa, the same. Rāmādi-mūrtiṣu kalā niyamena tiṣṭhan (Bs. 5.39). Kṛṣṇa is always existing with His different incarnation, expansions, rāmādi-mūrti-Rāma, Nṛsiṁha, Varāha....
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Room Conversation -- January 8, 1977, Bombay|Room Conversation -- January 8, 1977, Bombay]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: Rāma means Kṛṣṇa, the same. Rāmādi-mūrtiṣu kalā niyamena tiṣṭhan (Bs. 5.39). Kṛṣṇa is always existing with His different incarnation, expansions, rāmādi-mūrti-Rāma, Nṛsiṁha, Varāha.... There are hundreds and thousands of expansions. Advaita acyuta anādi ananta-rūpam. So Rāma is expansion of Kṛṣṇa. He's God. There is no difference between Rāma and Kṛṣṇa. Just like one candle, and if you light another candle, another candle, so one may be the first, second, third, like that, but in candle power they are all the same; similarly, Rāma is expansion of Kṛṣṇa. That does not mean Rāma is less than Kṛṣṇa. Rāma, Nṛsiṁha, Varāha. There are many.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Correspondence" class="section" sec_index="6" parent="compilation" text="Correspondence"><h2>Correspondence</h2>
</div>
<div id="1969_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="4" parent="Correspondence" text="1969 Correspondence"><h3>1969 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoArundhatiHamburg9September1969_0" class="quote" parent="1969_Correspondence" book="Let" index="557" link="Letter to Arundhati -- Hamburg 9 September, 1969" link_text="Letter to Arundhati -- Hamburg 9 September, 1969">
<div class="heading">Generally it means Krishna, because Rama means enjoyer. So either Ramacandra, Balarama or Krishna are all Visnu Tattvas and are always enjoying.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Arundhati -- Hamburg 9 September, 1969|Letter to Arundhati -- Hamburg 9 September, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Generally it means Krishna, because Rama means enjoyer. So either Ramacandra, Balarama or Krishna are all Visnu Tattvas and are always enjoying. The sakti tattva, or jiva tattva is always enjoyed. Our position is always predominated. If we remain in that position and properly use our small independence, then we remain happily eternally. But artificially, if we want to be independent and imitate the Supreme Enjoyer, then it is delusion. Material life means trying to imitate the Enjoyer, and spiritual life means to remain in one's eternal position as enjoyed.</p>
</div>
</div>
</div>

Svarupa means

2010-04-03T10:57:53Z

Partha-sarathi: Created page with '<div id="compilation"> <div id="facts"> {{terms|"svarupa means"}} {{notes|}} {{compiler|Partha-sarathi}} {{complete|ALL}} {{first|03Apr10}} {{last|03Apr10}} {{totals_by_section|B…'

<div id="compilation">
<div id="facts">
{{terms|"svarupa means"}}
{{notes|}}
{{compiler|Partha-sarathi}}
{{complete|ALL}}
{{first|03Apr10}}
{{last|03Apr10}}
{{totals_by_section|BG=0|SB=2|CC=0|OB=0|Lec=10|Con=2|Let=0}}
{{total|14}}
{{toc right}}
[[Category:Meaning of Sanskrit Words]]
</div>
<div id="Srimad-Bhagavatam" class="section" sec_index="1" parent="compilation" text="Srimad-Bhagavatam"><h2>Srimad-Bhagavatam</h2>
</div>
<div id="SB_Canto_3" class="sub_section" sec_index="3" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam" text="SB Canto 3"><h3>SB Canto 3</h3>
</div>
<div id="SB32844_0" class="quote" parent="SB_Canto_3" book="SB" index="1190" link="SB 3.28.44" link_text="SB 3.28.44">
<div class="heading">Svarüpa means that one has to know that he is not the Supreme Soul, but rather, part and parcel of the Supreme Soul; that is self-realization.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:SB 3.28.44|SB 3.28.44, Purport]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="purport text"><p style="display: inline;">It is also stated here, svarüpeëävatiñöhate. Svarüpa means that one has to know that he is not the Supreme Soul, but rather, part and parcel of the Supreme Soul; that is self-realization. To think falsely that one is the Supreme Soul and that one is all-pervading is not svarüpa. This is not realization of his actual position. The real position is that one is part and parcel. It is recommended here that one remain in that position of actual self-realization. In Bhagavad-gétä this understanding is defined as Brahman realization.</p>
<p>>>> Ref. VedaBase => SB 3.28.44</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="SB_Cantos_1014_to_12_Translations_Only" class="sub_section" sec_index="11" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam" text="SB Cantos 10.14 to 12 (Translations Only)"><h3>SB Cantos 10.14 to 12 (Translations Only)</h3>
</div>
<div id="SB10274_0" class="quote" parent="SB_Cantos_10.14_to_12_(Translations_Only)" book="SB" index="508" link="SB 10.27.4" link_text="SB 10.27.4">
<div class="heading">The word svarūpa means "one's own form or shape" and also "one's own condition, character or nature." Since Lord Kṛṣṇa, being pure spirit, is nondifferent from His body, there is absolutely no difference between the Lord and His visible form.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:SB 10.27.4|SB 10.27.4, Purport]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="purport text"><p style="display: inline;">Śrīla Śrīdhara Svāmī has brilliantly summarized all these meanings of the word dhāma by giving the Sanskrit term svarūpa as a synonym. The word svarūpa means "one's own form or shape" and also "one's own condition, character or nature." Since Lord Kṛṣṇa, being pure spirit, is nondifferent from His body, there is absolutely no difference between the Lord and His visible form. By contrast, in this material world we conditioned souls are all distinctly different from our bodies, whether those bodies be male, female, black, white or whatever. All of us are eternal souls, different from our temporary, flimsy bodies.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Lectures" class="section" sec_index="4" parent="compilation" text="Lectures"><h2>Lectures</h2>
</div>
<div id="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="0" parent="Lectures" text="Bhagavad-gita As It Is Lectures"><h3>Bhagavad-gita As It Is Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG2812LosAngelesNovember271968_0" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="42" link="Lecture on BG 2.8-12 -- Los Angeles, November 27, 1968" link_text="Lecture on BG 2.8-12 -- Los Angeles, November 27, 1968">
<div class="heading">Jīvera svarūpa haya nitya-kṛṣṇa-dāsa (Cc. Madhya 20.108-109). That is our svarūpa. Svarūpa means actual constitutional position. And mukti, liberation, means to come to that real position.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 2.8-12 -- Los Angeles, November 27, 1968|Lecture on BG 2.8-12 -- Los Angeles, November 27, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So we are trying to be Kṛṣṇa conscious. So one who is liberated is nothing but Kṛṣṇa conscious. You follow? Yes. Kṛṣṇa consciousness is the perfection of life. So we are trying to reach that platform of perfection by regulative principle. But when we are actually on the platform, there is nothing but Kṛṣṇa consciousness. That is the perfection of life. That is our actual, liberated stage. Jīvera svarūpa haya nitya-kṛṣṇa-dāsa (Cc. Madhya 20.108-109). That is our svarūpa. Svarūpa means actual constitutional position. And mukti, liberation, means to come to that real position. Just like healthy life means to come to the normal life from the diseased stage. That is healthy life and normal life. So Kṛṣṇa consciousness is our normal consciousness. This normal consciousness is now polluted. We have got so many other consciousness. So this is an attempt to get out of all, I mean to say, infected consciousness, come to the real stage of pure Kṛṣṇa consciousness.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="1" parent="Lectures" text="Srimad-Bhagavatam Lectures"><h3>Srimad-Bhagavatam Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB171314VrndavanaSeptember121976_0" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="171" link="Lecture on SB 1.7.13-14 -- Vrndavana, September 12, 1976" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.7.13-14 -- Vrndavana, September 12, 1976">
<div class="heading">That is described in a different place. Svarūpa means his original, spiritual form. All the soldiers or the kings who died, and at the time of death who were seeing Kṛṣṇa—Kṛṣṇa was there in the battlefield—all of them achieved their original, spiritual form.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.7.13-14 -- Vrndavana, September 12, 1976|Lecture on SB 1.7.13-14 -- Vrndavana, September 12, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So here it is said yadā mṛdhe kaurava-sṛñjayānām. In the fight all the parties who died, they all obtained vīra-gatim. And most of them they achieved svarūpa. That is described in a different place. Svarūpa means his original, spiritual form. All the soldiers or the kings who died, and at the time of death who were seeing Kṛṣṇa—Kṛṣṇa was there in the battlefield—all of them achieved their original, spiritual form. Svarūpam. And those who did not see Kṛṣṇa, they got promoted vīra-gatim, in the heavenly planet. So fight is not always bad. If it is dharma-yuddha, according to the prescribed rules, not whimsical fight, dharma-yuddha, then there is gain. This science is lost. There is no such thing. Now fighting means hooliganism, vandalism, guṇḍā-ism. That is not fight. Here is fight: vīra-gatim gate. They are all promoted.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB32541BombayDecember91974_1" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="461" link="Lecture on SB 3.25.41 -- Bombay, December 9, 1974" link_text="Lecture on SB 3.25.41 -- Bombay, December 9, 1974">
<div class="heading">Therefore Caitanya Mahāprabhu has defined that real svarūpa... Svarūpa means original identification, not artificially. Artificially you can think, "I have become God. I have become Bhagavān. I am this. I am that," all rascaldom. The real position is that eternal servitude.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 3.25.41 -- Bombay, December 9, 1974|Lecture on SB 3.25.41 -- Bombay, December 9, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Therefore Caitanya Mahāprabhu has defined that real svarūpa... Svarūpa means original identification, not artificially. Artificially you can think, "I have become God. I have become Bhagavān. I am this. I am that," all rascaldom. The real position is that eternal servitude. That is not this servitude. We sometimes shudder, "Oh, I have to become servant?" No, you do not know how much happy life is that servitude. That we do not know. We compare with this because materially, we are infected. We are thinking to become servant of God is like servant of... No. There, in the spiritual world, the servant of God and servant is the same.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB552HyderabadApril131975_2" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="529" link="Lecture on SB 5.5.2 -- Hyderabad, April 13, 1975" link_text="Lecture on SB 5.5.2 -- Hyderabad, April 13, 1975">
<div class="heading">Svarūpa means spiritual form. That is called svarūpa. At the present moment, our material conditional body, that is not svarūpa. Last night I tried to explain, svarūpa means sac-cit-ānanda-rūpa.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 5.5.2 -- Hyderabad, April 13, 1975|Lecture on SB 5.5.2 -- Hyderabad, April 13, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So mukti means to live without condition. That is called mukti. The mukti definition is given in the Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam: muktir sva-rūpeṇa vyavasthitiḥ, muktir hitvānyathā rūpaṁ sva-rūpeṇa vyavasthitiḥ. This is called mukti. We are not in the svarūpa. Svarūpa means spiritual form. That is called svarūpa. At the present moment, our material conditional body, that is not svarūpa. Last night I tried to explain, svarūpa means sac-cit-ānanda-rūpa. That is svarūpa, eternal, blissful life of knowledge. This is not svarūpa. This body is not eternal, neither it is blissful. It is full of miseries and without any knowledge. So this is not svarūpa. Svarūpa means eternal life, blissful life, and full of knowledge. That is called svarūpa.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB552HyderabadApril131975_3" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="529" link="Lecture on SB 5.5.2 -- Hyderabad, April 13, 1975" link_text="Lecture on SB 5.5.2 -- Hyderabad, April 13, 1975">
<div class="heading">There is, I think there is the word used in Bhagavad-gītā that all the persons assembled in the Battlefield of Kurukṣetra, after death they attained svarūpa.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 5.5.2 -- Hyderabad, April 13, 1975|Lecture on SB 5.5.2 -- Hyderabad, April 13, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">There is, I think there is the word used in Bhagavad-gītā that all the persons assembled in the Battlefield of Kurukṣetra, after death they attained svarūpa. Means liberated, all liberated and situated in spiritual life because they gave up their life in the presence of Kṛṣṇa. While dying they saw Kṛṣṇa. Therefore all of them after death attained svarūpa. So the mukti means sva-rūpena vyavasthitiḥ mukti hitva anyathā rūpam sva-rūpena vyavasthitiḥ. This is the meaning of mukti. So if we want that mukti, liberation, no more conditioned by the material nature, unconditional life, sa-guṇān samatītyaitān brahma-bhūyāya kalpate ([[Vanisource:BG 14.26|BG 14.26]]). That is svarūpa.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB559VrndavanaOctober311976_4" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="544" link="Lecture on SB 5.5.9 -- Vrndavana, October 31, 1976" link_text="Lecture on SB 5.5.9 -- Vrndavana, October 31, 1976">
<div class="heading">Our svarūpa means original, constitutional position is jīvera svarūpa haya nitya-kṛṣṇa-dāsa (Cc. Madhya 20.108-109), eternally servant of Kṛṣṇa.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 5.5.9 -- Vrndavana, October 31, 1976|Lecture on SB 5.5.9 -- Vrndavana, October 31, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So, if you are free from the resultant action of sinful life, then you are liberated. If you get shelter at the lotus feet of Kṛṣṇa, and do not act in such a way that you again fall down, then you are liberated. Liberation means, we have several times discussed, hitvā anyathā-rūpaṁ svarūpeṇa vyavasthitiḥ ([[Vanisource:SB 2.10.6|SB 2.10.6]]). Our svarūpa means original, constitutional position is jīvera svarūpa haya nitya-kṛṣṇa-dāsa (Cc. Madhya 20.108-109), eternally servant of Kṛṣṇa. So as soon as we place ourselves in our original place, then you are liberated immediately. If we determine, decide finally, that we shall now continuously vehemently (?) fixed up in Kṛṣṇa consciousness, very simple thing.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Sri_Caitanya-caritamrta_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="3" parent="Lectures" text="Sri Caitanya-caritamrta Lectures"><h3>Sri Caitanya-caritamrta Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonCCMadhyalila20120BombayNovember121975_0" class="quote" parent="Sri_Caitanya-caritamrta_Lectures" book="Lec" index="71" link="Lecture on CC Madhya-lila 20.120 -- Bombay, November 12, 1975" link_text="Lecture on CC Madhya-lila 20.120 -- Bombay, November 12, 1975">
<div class="heading">Svarūpa means original, constitutional position. That is svarūpa. Mukti means just like one is diseased, and there are many symptoms of disease.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on CC Madhya-lila 20.120 -- Bombay, November 12, 1975|Lecture on CC Madhya-lila 20.120 -- Bombay, November 12, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Caitanya Mahāprabhu directly says that jīvera svarūpa haya kṛṣṇera nitya-dāsa ([[Vanisource:CC Madhya 20.108|CC Madhya 20.108]]), two words. Svarūpa. Svarūpa means original, constitutional position. That is svarūpa. Mukti means just like one is diseased, and there are many symptoms of disease. So when one becomes free from the disease, the symptoms disappear. Similarly, mukti means that we have lost our original constitutional position. Because here Caitanya Mahāprabhu said that the real position of the living entity is that he is eternal servant of Kṛṣṇa. So our position is servant, subordinate position. That is the Vedic injunction also. Eko yo bahūnāṁ vidadhāti kāmān. Nityo nityānāṁ cetanaś cetanānām (Kaṭha Upaniṣad 2.2.13).</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonCCMadhyalila20120BombayNovember121975_1" class="quote" parent="Sri_Caitanya-caritamrta_Lectures" book="Lec" index="71" link="Lecture on CC Madhya-lila 20.120 -- Bombay, November 12, 1975" link_text="Lecture on CC Madhya-lila 20.120 -- Bombay, November 12, 1975">
<div class="heading">Caitanya Mahāprabhu describing the constitutional position of the living entity, svarūpa. Svarūpa means original position, and mukti means svarūpeṇa vyavasthitiḥ (SB 2.10.6).
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on CC Madhya-lila 20.120 -- Bombay, November 12, 1975|Lecture on CC Madhya-lila 20.120 -- Bombay, November 12, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">We are maintained, and Kṛṣṇa is maintainer. We are predominated, and Kṛṣṇa is predominator. This is our relation. How(?) Caitanya Mahāprabhu describing the constitutional position of the living entity, svarūpa. Svarūpa means original position, and mukti means svarūpeṇa vyavasthitiḥ ([[Vanisource:SB 2.10.6|SB 2.10.6]]). Mukti means hitvā anyathā rūpaṁ svarūpeṇa vyavasthitiḥ. This is the Vedic injunction. Mukti means hitvā anyathā rūpa. Now we are acting differently.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="General_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="11" parent="Lectures" text="General Lectures"><h3>General Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="PandalLectureNovember141971Delhi_0" class="quote" parent="General_Lectures" book="Lec" index="97" link="Pandal Lecture -- November 14, 1971, Delhi" link_text="Pandal Lecture -- November 14, 1971, Delhi">
<div class="heading">Svarūpa means original constitutional position. That is called svarūpa. And mukti means to be situated in that original condition.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Pandal Lecture -- November 14, 1971, Delhi|Pandal Lecture -- November 14, 1971, Delhi]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">That characteristic is described by Lord Caitanya Mahāprabhu, jīvera svarūpa haya nitya-kṛṣṇa-dāsa (Cc. Madhya 20.108-109). This is the characteristic. Svarūpa. Svarūpa means original constitutional position. That is called svarūpa. And mukti means to be situated in that original condition. That is the statement in the Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam, muktir hitvānyathā rūpaṁ sva-rūpeṇa vyavasthitiḥ. That is mukti.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Philosophy_Discussions" class="sub_section" sec_index="13" parent="Lectures" text="Philosophy Discussions"><h3>Philosophy Discussions</h3>
</div>
<div id="PhilosophyDiscussiononJohnDewey_0" class="quote" parent="Philosophy_Discussions" book="Lec" index="10" link="Philosophy Discussion on John Dewey" link_text="Philosophy Discussion on John Dewey">
<div class="heading">As Kṛṣṇa says, "I am..." (break) Svarūpa means ādayaḥ. Kṛṣṇa and Kṛṣṇa consciousness is the same thing.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Philosophy Discussion on John Dewey|Philosophy Discussion on John Dewey]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: Duṣkṛtām ([[Vanisource:BG 4.8|BG 4.8]]). So it can be improved, in any bad condition, by... How you can improve? By this Kṛṣṇa consciousness. As Kṛṣṇa says, "I am..." (break) Svarūpa means ādayaḥ. Kṛṣṇa and Kṛṣṇa consciousness is the same thing. If you are in Kṛṣṇa consciousness, that means you are living with Kṛṣṇa. And if you are living with Kṛṣṇa, then what is your fear? Just like Arjuna, fighting with Kṛṣṇa, he had no fear. Similarly, if you live with Kṛṣṇa and go on with Kṛṣṇa, then what is your fear?</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="section" sec_index="5" parent="compilation" text="Conversations and Morning Walks"><h2>Conversations and Morning Walks</h2>
</div>
<div id="1973_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="sub_section" sec_index="6" parent="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" text="1973 Conversations and Morning Walks"><h3>1973 Conversations and Morning Walks</h3>
</div>
<div id="RoomConversationNovember81973NewDelhi_0" class="quote" parent="1973_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="86" link="Room Conversation -- November 8, 1973, New Delhi" link_text="Room Conversation -- November 8, 1973, New Delhi">
<div class="heading">Svarūpa means jīvera svarūpa haya nitya-kṛṣṇa-dāsa (Cc. Madhya 20.108-109). Every living entity is eternally Kṛṣṇa dāsa.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Room Conversation -- November 8, 1973, New Delhi|Room Conversation -- November 8, 1973, New Delhi]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: Therefore they are muktas. They are all liberated. Because hitvānyathā-rūpam. Other people, they are reading newspaper, doing all nonsense, but they are not interested. The anyathā-rūpam. That is material business. Svarūpeṇa vyavasthitiḥ ([[Vanisource:SB 2.10.6|SB 2.10.6]]). Svarūpa means jīvera svarūpa haya nitya-kṛṣṇa-dāsa (Cc. Madhya 20.108-109). Every living entity is eternally Kṛṣṇa dāsa. So if you give up these material activities and engage yourself in Kṛṣṇa's service, you are mukta. That is stated in the Bhagavad-gītā.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1974_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="sub_section" sec_index="7" parent="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" text="1974 Conversations and Morning Walks"><h3>1974 Conversations and Morning Walks</h3>
</div>
<div id="MorningWalkMarch171974Vrndavana_0" class="quote" parent="1974_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="40" link="Morning Walk -- March 17, 1974, Vrndavana" link_text="Morning Walk -- March 17, 1974, Vrndavana">
<div class="heading">That is stated by Bhīṣmadeva. Svarūpa. Svarūpa means they came to their original Kṛṣṇa consciousness. All of them. Hare Kṛṣṇa Hare Kṛṣṇa...
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Morning Walk -- March 17, 1974, Vrndavana|Morning Walk -- March 17, 1974, Vrndavana]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: No, Duryodhana also agreed. All of them got salvation. That is mentioned. Anyone who was in the Battle of Kurukṣetra, all of them got salvation. By their being killed in the battle, they all got liberation and salvation. That is stated by Bhīṣmadeva. Svarūpa. Svarūpa means they came to their original Kṛṣṇa consciousness. All of them. Hare Kṛṣṇa Hare Kṛṣṇa... (break) (Hindi conversation continues for some time) Materially to get bācche (children) you require the help of husband, but spiritually you don't require anyone's help. In Kṛṣṇa only. That's all.</p>
</div>
</div>
</div>

Dehi means

2010-04-02T15:30:04Z

Partha-sarathi: Created page with '<div id="compilation"> <div id="facts"> {{terms|"Dehi means"}} {{notes|}} {{compiler|Partha-sarathi}} {{complete|ALL}} {{first|02Apr10}} {{last|02Apr10}} {{totals_by_section|BG=1…'

<div id="compilation">
<div id="facts">
{{terms|"Dehi means"}}
{{notes|}}
{{compiler|Partha-sarathi}}
{{complete|ALL}}
{{first|02Apr10}}
{{last|02Apr10}}
{{totals_by_section|BG=1|SB=0|CC=0|OB=0|Lec=30|Con=2|Let=0}}
{{total|33}}
{{toc right}}
[[Category:Meaning of Sanskrit Words]]
</div>
<div id="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is" class="section" sec_index="0" parent="compilation" text="Bhagavad-gita As It Is"><h2>Bhagavad-gita As It Is</h2>
</div>
<div id="BG_Chapters_13_-_18" class="sub_section" sec_index="3" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is" text="BG Chapters 13 - 18"><h3>BG Chapters 13 - 18</h3>
</div>
<div id="BG1420_0" class="quote" parent="BG_Chapters_13_-_18" book="BG" index="49" link="BG 14.20" link_text="BG 14.20">
<div class="heading">The Sanskrit word dehī means "embodied." Although one is within this material body, by his advancement in spiritual knowledge he can be free from the influence of the modes of nature.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:BG 14.20|BG 14.20, Purport]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="purport text"><p style="display: inline;">How one can stay in the transcendental position, even in this body, in full Kṛṣṇa consciousness, is explained in this verse. The Sanskrit word dehī means "embodied." Although one is within this material body, by his advancement in spiritual knowledge he can be free from the influence of the modes of nature.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Lectures" class="section" sec_index="4" parent="compilation" text="Lectures"><h2>Lectures</h2>
</div>
<div id="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="0" parent="Lectures" text="Bhagavad-gita As It Is Lectures"><h3>Bhagavad-gita As It Is Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG211EdinburghJuly161972_0" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="47" link="Lecture on BG 2.11 -- Edinburgh, July 16, 1972" link_text="Lecture on BG 2.11 -- Edinburgh, July 16, 1972">
<div class="heading">Dehī means the possessor of this body. I am not this body.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 2.11 -- Edinburgh, July 16, 1972|Lecture on BG 2.11 -- Edinburgh, July 16, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Dehī means the possessor of this body. I am not this body. If you ask me, "What..." Just like sometimes we ask the child, "What is this?" He will say, "It is my head." Similarly, if you ask me also, anyone, "What is this?" Anyone will say, "It is my head." Nobody will say, "I head." So if you scrutinizingly analyze all parts of the body, you'll say, "It is my head, my hand, my finger, my leg," but where is "I"? "My" is spoken when there is "I." But we have no information of the "I." We have simply information of "my." That is called ignorance.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG213NewYorkMarch111966_1" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="58" link="Lecture on BG 2.13 -- New York, March 11, 1966" link_text="Lecture on BG 2.13 -- New York, March 11, 1966">
<div class="heading">Dehī means soul. One who has accepted this body, material body, he's called dehī.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 2.13 -- New York, March 11, 1966|Lecture on BG 2.13 -- New York, March 11, 1966]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Unless one is firmly convinced that "I am not this body," he cannot progress in the spiritual line. So the first lesson in the Bhagavad-gītā is taken in that way. So here it is, that dehino 'smin. Now, dehī, the soul, soul. Dehī means soul. One who has accepted this body, material body, he's called dehī. So asmin, he is there. He is there, but his body is changing. You see? The body is changing.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG213MombassaSeptember131971_2" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="59" link="Lecture on BG 2.13 -- Mombassa, September 13, 1971" link_text="Lecture on BG 2.13 -- Mombassa, September 13, 1971">
<div class="heading">Dehī means one who possesses this body. Just like your coat, your shirt, you possess this coat and shirt. Not that you are the coat and the shirt.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 2.13 -- Mombassa, September 13, 1971|Lecture on BG 2.13 -- Mombassa, September 13, 1971]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">The basic principle of spiritual understanding. The basic principle of spiritual understanding is to know the spirit soul first of all. What is that spirit soul? That spirit soul is within this body. Dehinaḥ asmin dehe. Asmin, this, asmin means this, and dehe means the body. Asmin dehe, in this body there is spirit soul who is called dehī. Dehī means one who possesses this body. Just like your coat, your shirt, you possess this coat and shirt. Not that you are the coat and the shirt.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG213PittsburghSeptember81972_3" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="60" link="Lecture on BG 2.13 -- Pittsburgh, September 8, 1972" link_text="Lecture on BG 2.13 -- Pittsburgh, September 8, 1972">
<div class="heading">Here in the Bhagavad-gītā, it is explained, dehī. Dehī means the proprietor of this body. Both we all, not only we human being, but also lower than human being, all living entities...
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 2.13 -- Pittsburgh, September 8, 1972|Lecture on BG 2.13 -- Pittsburgh, September 8, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">This is the problem at the present moment. People are not educated about the vital force of this body. Here in the Bhagavad-gītā, it is explained, dehī. Dehī means the proprietor of this body. Both we all, not only we human being, but also lower than human being, all living entities... There are 8,400,000 forms of living entities. They are called dehī. Dehī means the proprietor of the body. The dog, the cat, the human being, the president, or higher or lower, there are different species of life. Everyone is the proprietor of the body. That we can experience. You know everything about the pains and pleasures of your body.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG213HyderabadNovember191972_4" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="63" link="Lecture on BG 2.13 -- Hyderabad, November 19, 1972" link_text="Lecture on BG 2.13 -- Hyderabad, November 19, 1972">
<div class="heading">Deha means this body, and dehī means the owner of the body.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 2.13 -- Hyderabad, November 19, 1972|Lecture on BG 2.13 -- Hyderabad, November 19, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Here Kṛṣṇa says that dehino 'smin yathā dehe ([[Vanisource:BG 2.13|BG 2.13]]). Dehī, deha. Deha means this body, and dehī means the owner of the body. There is the owner of the body. Now, modern scientists, modern philosophers, hardly they do know that there is a proprietor, owner of this body. This body is not the person. The person is within. Asmin dehe. Within this body, there is the proprietor of the body, soul. Asmin dehe. Dehino 'smin yathā dehe ([[Vanisource:BG 2.13|BG 2.13]]). Now kaumāraṁ yauvanaṁ jarā. The changes that are taking place, it is not of the owner of the body, but it is of the outward, external body. Just like if you live in a house.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG213LondonAugust191973_5" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="64" link="Lecture on BG 2.13 -- London, August 19, 1973" link_text="Lecture on BG 2.13 -- London, August 19, 1973">
<div class="heading">Dehi means the proprietor of the body, owner of the body, and deha means the body.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 2.13 -- London, August 19, 1973|Lecture on BG 2.13 -- London, August 19, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So those who are dhīra, gentlemen, sober-headed, cool-headed, they can understand that "I have changed my body. When I was a boy, up to fifteenth year, I remember how I was playing, how I was jumping. Then I became young man. How I was enjoying my life with friends and families. Now I am old man." "I am" means my body. Dehinaḥ. Dehi and dehinaḥ. Dehi means the proprietor of the body, owner of the body, and deha means the body.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG213PublicLectureWithGermanTranslationThroughoutHamburgSeptember101969_6" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="66" link="Lecture on BG 2.13 -- Public Lecture With German Translation Throughout -- Hamburg, September 10, 1969" link_text="Lecture on BG 2.13 -- Public Lecture With German Translation Throughout -- Hamburg, September 10, 1969">
<div class="heading">Dehī means one who possesses this body, or the occupier of the body, the spirit soul. That is eternal. Changing body only, but eternal.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 2.13 -- Public Lecture With German Translation Throughout -- Hamburg, September 10, 1969|Lecture on BG 2.13 -- Public Lecture With German Translation Throughout -- Hamburg, September 10, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So one has to become competent to transfer himself in a particular type of planet. So we, as spirit soul, dehī, the possessor of this body... Dehī means one who possesses this body, or the occupier of the body, the spirit soul. That is eternal. Changing body only, but eternal. Therefore we should not be interested to these different types of temporary body. That is not very good intelligence. So we have to prepare ourself. If we want... There is a full description of each and every planet. And we can prepare ourself according to our desire, which planet we wish to go. But Kṛṣṇa says, mad-yājino 'pi yānti mām ([[Vanisource:BG 9.25|BG 9.25]]). "Persons who are engaged in My occupational duties, they will come to Me."</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG215HyderabadNovember211972_7" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="71" link="Lecture on BG 2.15 -- Hyderabad, November 21, 1972" link_text="Lecture on BG 2.15 -- Hyderabad, November 21, 1972">
<div class="heading">Dehī means the proprietor of the body. So everyone is dehī, either animal or human being or tree or anyone.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 2.15 -- Hyderabad, November 21, 1972|Lecture on BG 2.15 -- Hyderabad, November 21, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Because we have accepted this material body. Asad-grahāt. Tat sādhu manye 'sura-varya dehināṁ sadā samudvigna-dhiyām. Dehinām. Dehinām means... Deha and dehī, we have already discussed. Dehī means the proprietor of the body. So everyone is dehī, either animal or human being or tree or anyone. Every living entity has accepted a material body. Therefore they are called dehī. So dehinām, every dehī, because he has accepted this material body, he's always full of anxiety.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG230LondonAugust311973_8" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="96" link="Lecture on BG 2.30 -- London, August 31, 1973" link_text="Lecture on BG 2.30 -- London, August 31, 1973">
<div class="heading">Dehī means one who possesses the body. Just like guṇī. Āsthate in prata.(?) The grammatical. Guṇa, in, deha, in, in prata.(?) Dehin śabda.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 2.30 -- London, August 31, 1973|Lecture on BG 2.30 -- London, August 31, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Dehī nityam avadhyo 'yaṁ dehe sarvasya bhārata. Dehe, dehe means body, within the body. This topic began, dehino 'smin yathā dehe kaumāraṁ yauvanaṁ jarā ([[Vanisource:BG 2.13|BG 2.13]]). Deha, dehī. Dehī means one who possesses the body. Just like guṇī. Āsthate in prata.(?) The grammatical. Guṇa, in, deha, in, in prata.(?) Dehin śabda. So the nominative case of dehin śabda is dehī. Dehī nityam, eternal. In so many ways, Kṛṣṇa has explained.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG71HongKongJanuary251975_9" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="241" link="Lecture on BG 7.1 -- Hong Kong, January 25, 1975" link_text="Lecture on BG 7.1 -- Hong Kong, January 25, 1975">
<div class="heading">Similarly, dehī and deha. Deha means this body, and dehī means who lives within the body.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 7.1 -- Hong Kong, January 25, 1975|Lecture on BG 7.1 -- Hong Kong, January 25, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">He is called gṛhī, gṛhastha. Gṛhastha. Gṛha, the room or the apartment, and stha, who is staying there with husband, wife, children—he is called gṛhastha. But the gṛhī is not the person who is staying within the gṛha. He is different from the gṛha. Similarly, dehī and deha. Deha means this body, and dehī means who lives within the body. That is first of all explained. Dehinaḥ asmin dehe: "In this body there is the resident of the body." That is soul. That is the beginning of spiritual knowledge.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG934NewYorkDecember261966WhoisCrazy_10" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="326" link="Lecture on BG 9.34 -- New York, December 26, 1966, 'Who is Crazy?'" link_text="Lecture on BG 9.34 -- New York, December 26, 1966, 'Who is Crazy?'">
<div class="heading">Dehe means in this body, and dehī means the person who is within this body, he is there, from that pea-like form.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 9.34 -- New York, December 26, 1966, 'Who is Crazy?'|Lecture on BG 9.34 -- New York, December 26, 1966, 'Who is Crazy?']]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Dehe means in this body, and dehī means the person who is within this body, he is there, from that pea-like form. Because my form, my measurement is so small that we cannot see. It is not possible. It is ten-thousand, one ten-thousandth part of the tip of the hair. It is so small. So with our material eyes, or with your material conception, we cannot see the soul. But the soul is there, and the proof is, evidence is, because the soul is there, therefore the pea-like form, material body, is growing.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG121314BombayMay121974_11" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="337" link="Lecture on BG 12.13-14 -- Bombay, May 12, 1974" link_text="Lecture on BG 12.13-14 -- Bombay, May 12, 1974">
<div class="heading">Dehī means the possessor of this body. I am not this body, you are not this body, but you possess this body.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 12.13-14 -- Bombay, May 12, 1974|Lecture on BG 12.13-14 -- Bombay, May 12, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">That is paṇḍitāḥ sama-darśinaḥ ([[Vanisource:BG 5.18|BG 5.18]]). We should not see to the dress. We should see inside the dress. What is the inside in the dress. Similarly, Kṛṣṇa says to Arjuna that dehino 'smin yathā dehe. Dehino 'smin yathā dehe kaumāraṁ yauvanaṁ jarā ([[Vanisource:BG 2.13|BG 2.13]]). One has to see, asmin dehe, in this body, there is the dehinaḥ, the proprietor. Dehinaḥ means one possesses the body. That is spiritual vision. The spiritual vision is... One who is advanced in spiritual knowledge, he does not see the outward dress, but he sees within the dress, who is living there. Asmin dehe dehinaḥ. Dehinaḥ. Dehī means the possessor of this body. I am not this body, you are not this body, but you possess this body.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="1" parent="Lectures" text="Srimad-Bhagavatam Lectures"><h3>Srimad-Bhagavatam Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB126DelhiNovember121973_0" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="40" link="Lecture on SB 1.2.6 -- Delhi, November 12, 1973" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.2.6 -- Delhi, November 12, 1973">
<div class="heading">Within this body there is the dehī. Dehī means the proprietor of this body. So that dehī, he is, tathā dehāntara-prāptiḥ, he is changing from one body to another.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.2.6 -- Delhi, November 12, 1973|Lecture on SB 1.2.6 -- Delhi, November 12, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Everyone is trying to be perfect. The whole struggle of existence is going on all over the world, how to become perfect. So that perfection ideal is different of different persons. Somebody is thinking that "If I have a nice bungalow and a nice bank balance and nice wife and children and family, then my life is perfect." Somebody is thinking that "If I can make my country very happy in comparison to other countries, then it is happy..." So there are different types of perfection. But actual perfection is... They do not know. That is indicated, that I am... Because I have been described, I am the soul. I am not this body. Dehino 'smin yathā dehe ([[Vanisource:BG 2.13|BG 2.13]]). Within this body there is the dehī. Dehī means the proprietor of this body. So that dehī, he is, tathā dehāntara-prāptiḥ, he is changing from one body to another.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB11621LosAngelesJuly111974_1" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="337" link="Lecture on SB 1.16.21 -- Los Angeles, July 11, 1974" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.16.21 -- Los Angeles, July 11, 1974">
<div class="heading">Dehī means the possessor of the deha is within the body, not the body is the person. But no education.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.16.21 -- Los Angeles, July 11, 1974|Lecture on SB 1.16.21 -- Los Angeles, July 11, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">That education begins in the Bhagavad-gītā in the beginning: dehino 'smin yathā dehe ([[Vanisource:BG 2.13|BG 2.13]]). Dehī means the possessor of the deha is within the body, not the body is the person. But no education. Throughout the whole scientific world, university education, there is no concern that "I am not this body; I am soul." Such a foolish, rascal civilization is going on in the name of advancement. No protection for woman, no protection of children, no respect for brahminical culture. So it is the animal civilization. Polished animal, that's all. Otherwise it is not civili... That is Vedic culture.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB11622HawaiiJanuary181974_2" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="338" link="Lecture on SB 1.16.22 -- Hawaii, January 18, 1974" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.16.22 -- Hawaii, January 18, 1974">
<div class="heading">Dehī means the possessor, the owner of the body. It is said clearly, and we can understand that when I meditate upon my body, actually what I am.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.16.22 -- Hawaii, January 18, 1974|Lecture on SB 1.16.22 -- Hawaii, January 18, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">These rascals will not understand. Even there is instruction by higher authorities that within this body there is the soul... Dehino 'smin yathā dehe kaumāraṁ yauvanam ([[Vanisource:BG 2.13|BG 2.13]]). Dehino 'smin dehe, in this body, dehī. The dehī... Dehī means the possessor, the owner of the body. It is said clearly, and we can understand that when I meditate upon my body, actually what I am. So if one is deep thinker, he'll immediately understand that "I am not this body." Take, for example, study on this finger; and if you think, "I am this finger"?</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB11625HawaiiJanuary211974_3" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="344" link="Lecture on SB 1.16.25 -- Hawaii, January 21, 1974" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.16.25 -- Hawaii, January 21, 1974">
<div class="heading">Dehī means the proprietor. So in this way you can understand what is the soul. This is realization of the existence of soul.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.16.25 -- Hawaii, January 21, 1974|Lecture on SB 1.16.25 -- Hawaii, January 21, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">I do not love your body or another's body, but I love my body. Why? Because I live in this body. This is proprietorship. I take care of my apartment because I live in that apartment. I'm not going to take care of your apartment. (laughter) These are common sense. And śāstra confirms it, asmin dehe, dehī. Dehī means the proprietor. So in this way you can understand what is the soul. This is realization of the existence of soul. Is it very difficult?</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB2313LosAngelesMay221972_4" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="375" link="Lecture on SB 2.3.1-3 -- Los Angeles, May 22, 1972" link_text="Lecture on SB 2.3.1-3 -- Los Angeles, May 22, 1972">
<div class="heading">Dehi means "give me." After pūjā... Therefore it is called pūjā. Pūjā, just like in business circle, if you want to take some business from a big merchant, so you satisfy him, flatter him, and sometimes invite him in hotel and give him nice dinner.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 2.3.1-3 -- Los Angeles, May 22, 1972|Lecture on SB 2.3.1-3 -- Los Angeles, May 22, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So everyone, all this description is given there: brahma-varcasa-kāma, vīrya-kāma, then vasu-kāma. Devīṁ māyāṁ tu śrī-kāmaḥ. Śrī. (aside) You can stand near the wall. Others may not... Śrī means beauty. In the Durgā-pūjā, Devī-pūjā, they ask... After offering Mother Durgā all sorts of paraphernalia, then they puṣpāñjali, they pray favor, dhanaṁ dehi rūpaṁ dehi balaṁ dehi. Dehi dehi. Dehi means "give me." After pūjā... Therefore it is called pūjā. Pūjā, just like in business circle, if you want to take some business from a big merchant, so you satisfy him, flatter him, and sometimes invite him in hotel and give him nice dinner.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB32513BombayNovember131974_5" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="435" link="Lecture on SB 3.25.13 -- Bombay, November 13, 1974" link_text="Lecture on SB 3.25.13 -- Bombay, November 13, 1974">
<div class="heading">Dehī means the proprietor of the body. We are thinking, "I am this... I am this body." No, I am not this body; I am the proprietor of this body.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 3.25.13 -- Bombay, November 13, 1974|Lecture on SB 3.25.13 -- Bombay, November 13, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Soul... First of all you have to understand what is soul. At the present moment, people are so much in darkness, they do not understand what is soul. Therefore Bhagavad-gītā teaches first to understand what is the soul. What is the soul? Dehino 'smin yathā dehe ([[Vanisource:BG 2.13|BG 2.13]]). Dehī, that soul. Dehī means the proprietor of the body. We are thinking, "I am this... I am this body." No, I am not this body; I am the proprietor of this body. That is real understanding of myself: "I am not this body." We say also, "This is my finger," "This is my head," "This is my leg." Nobody says, "I head," or "I finger." Nobody says. Everyone says, "My head." So I am the proprietor of this body. And then I am under the influence of māyā. This body has been given by māyā, the material energy.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB32521BombayNovember211974_6" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="443" link="Lecture on SB 3.25.21 -- Bombay, November 21, 1974" link_text="Lecture on SB 3.25.21 -- Bombay, November 21, 1974">
<div class="heading">Dehī means anyone who has got this body. So somebody has got body human being, somebody has got the cow's body, somebody has a dog's body, somebody has tree's body.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 3.25.21 -- Bombay, November 21, 1974|Lecture on SB 3.25.21 -- Bombay, November 21, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">The tree is not born in this land? But because they are not Kṛṣṇa conscious, they cannot be kind to all the dehīs. Sarva-dehinām. Dehī means anyone who has got this body. So somebody has got body human being, somebody has got the cow's body, somebody has a dog's body, somebody has tree's body. So the Vaiṣṇava is so kind that suhṛdaḥ sarva-dehinām. He is kind not only to the human being: to the cats, dogs, to the trees, to the plants, to the insects. A Vaiṣṇava will hesitate to kill even one mosquito. Sarva-dehinām. Not that "I shall take care of my brother. I am good, and my brother is good." No. Suhṛdaḥ sarva-dehinām. These are the Vaiṣṇava qualifications.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB32543BombayDecember111974_7" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="463" link="Lecture on SB 3.25.43 -- Bombay, December 11, 1974" link_text="Lecture on SB 3.25.43 -- Bombay, December 11, 1974">
<div class="heading">Dehī means... Dehinām means one who has accepted this material body. And Vaiṣṇava is suhṛdaḥ sarva-dehinām (SB 3.25.21). Kapiladeva has said.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 3.25.43 -- Bombay, December 11, 1974|Lecture on SB 3.25.43 -- Bombay, December 11, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Therefore Prahlāda Mahārāja said, tat sādhu manye 'sura-varya dehinām. Dehinām. Dehī means... Dehinām means one who has accepted this material body. And Vaiṣṇava is suhṛdaḥ sarva-dehinām ([[Vanisource:SB 3.25.21|SB 3.25.21]]). Kapiladeva has said. A Vaiṣṇava who is in connection with Kṛṣṇa, his business is to go door to door and canvass everyone, "My dear sir, you are not this body. You are wasting your time only under the concept of body. You are Kṛṣṇa's. You become Kṛṣṇa's servant." This is Kṛṣṇa consciousness movement. "My dear sir, you are not this body. You are not American. You are not Indian. You are not brāhmaṇa. You are not śūdra. You are not cat. You are not dog. You are part and parcel of Kṛṣṇa, and you serve Kṛṣṇa."</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB552VrndavanaOctober241976_8" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="531" link="Lecture on SB 5.5.2 -- Vrndavana, October 24, 1976" link_text="Lecture on SB 5.5.2 -- Vrndavana, October 24, 1976">
<div class="heading">You come to the spiritual platform." And what is that spirit? That is dehi. Dehi means "one who has got this body, " not "this body."
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 5.5.2 -- Vrndavana, October 24, 1976|Lecture on SB 5.5.2 -- Vrndavana, October 24, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">These are all bodily conception of life. You come to the spiritual platform." And what is that spirit? That is dehi. Dehi means "one who has got this body, " not "this body." This is the first instruction. Dehino 'smin yathā dehe ([[Vanisource:BG 2.13|BG 2.13]]). So deha and dehi. Dehi, in Sanskrit it is said if you possess something, then there is grammatical "in" pratyaya. Deha, dehin. Guṇa, guṇin. So when you possess something, then this in pratyaya is used. So I'm not deha, I'm dehin. Therefore this word is used, dehi. Dehi means "the possessor of the body."</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB567VrndavanaNovember291976_9" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="573" link="Lecture on SB 5.6.7 -- Vrndavana, November 29, 1976" link_text="Lecture on SB 5.6.7 -- Vrndavana, November 29, 1976">
<div class="heading">Dehī means the owner of the body. Just like I say, "It is my body." I don't say, "It is I body." Everyone has got this experience.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 5.6.7 -- Vrndavana, November 29, 1976|Lecture on SB 5.6.7 -- Vrndavana, November 29, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">This is not our actual body. But in the case of Supreme Personality of Godhead, there is no such difference. Deha, dehī. As we have got difference... Dehino 'smin yathā deha. Deha and dehī. Dehī means the owner of the body. Just like I say, "It is my body." I don't say, "It is I body." Everyone has got this experience. Even a child, ask him, pointing out to the finger. He will say, "It is my finger." Nobody says, "I finger," because there is difference between the body and the spirit soul. This is to be understood.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB763TorontoJune191976_10" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="750" link="Lecture on SB 7.6.3 -- Toronto, June 19, 1976" link_text="Lecture on SB 7.6.3 -- Toronto, June 19, 1976">
<div class="heading">Dehī means the person who possesses this deha. That is not understood. That is the beginning of spiritual education in the Bhagavad-gītā.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 7.6.3 -- Toronto, June 19, 1976|Lecture on SB 7.6.3 -- Toronto, June 19, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So this sukham, indriya-jam (indistinct), sense gratification. Here it is said deha yogena dehinam. Dehī, this is not understood. The dehī and deha. Dehī yogena dehinām. Dehī means the person who possesses this deha. That is not understood. That is the beginning of spiritual education in the Bhagavad-gītā. Dehino 'smin yathā dehe ([[Vanisource:BG 2.13|BG 2.13]]). You ask anybody, I think 99.9% will be unable to understand what is dehī and deha. This is our modern education. Dehina and deha. Dehī, the Sanskrit word, that is called inprotra (indistinct) a state in.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB763TorontoJune191976_11" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="750" link="Lecture on SB 7.6.3 -- Toronto, June 19, 1976" link_text="Lecture on SB 7.6.3 -- Toronto, June 19, 1976">
<div class="heading">The real meaning is, deha means this body and dehī means the possessor of the body.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 7.6.3 -- Toronto, June 19, 1976|Lecture on SB 7.6.3 -- Toronto, June 19, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Guṇa means gua, and you add in, then guṇin. Similarly, deha, and you add in, then dehin. The real meaning is, deha means this body and dehī means the possessor of the body. So actually in the modern age, the so-called civilization, they do not understand what is deha and dehī. They think this deha is everything, the body is everything. But that is not the fact. So dehī, the possessor of the body. So there are so many different types of body. But it is possessed, each and every deha, or body, is possessed by the dehī. So dehī, in a particular possession of deha. Dehī means the spirit soul.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB798MontrealJuly11968_12" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="795" link="Lecture on SB 7.9.8 -- Montreal, July 1, 1968" link_text="Lecture on SB 7.9.8 -- Montreal, July 1, 1968">
<div class="heading">Dehi means this body. We are different from this body.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 7.9.8 -- Montreal, July 1, 1968|Lecture on SB 7.9.8 -- Montreal, July 1, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">He is speaking universally. Not for himself or for his father, but he was speaking generally for everybody. Everybody. Anyone. Dehināṁ. Dehi means this body. We are different from this body. We have several times discussed this point. So in Sanskrit word there are two implications in the understanding of our existence. One is deha. Deha means this body. And dehi means the proprietor of this body. I am the proprietor of my body, you are the proprietor of your body.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB102235BombayMarch191971_13" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="868" link="Lecture on SB 10.22.35 -- Bombay, March 19, 1971" link_text="Lecture on SB 10.22.35 -- Bombay, March 19, 1971">
<div class="heading">Here are many dehī Dehī means one who accepts this material body, he is called dehī In the Bhagavad-gītā also it is said, kaumāraṁ yauvanam jara, tathā dehāntara-prāptiḥ dhīras tatra na muhyati (BG 2.13).
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 10.22.35 -- Bombay, March 19, 1971|Lecture on SB 10.22.35 -- Bombay, March 19, 1971]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">There are many dehī Dehī means one who accepts this material body, he is called dehī In the Bhagavad-gītā also it is said, kaumāraṁ yauvanam jara, tathā dehāntara-prāptiḥ dhīras tatra na muhyati ([[Vanisource:BG 2.13|BG 2.13]]). Dehinām iha dehiṣu. So dehī means I am not this body, but I have accepted this body. Just like we accept a kind of dress.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Sri_Caitanya-caritamrta_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="3" parent="Lectures" text="Sri Caitanya-caritamrta Lectures"><h3>Sri Caitanya-caritamrta Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonCCMadhyalila614950GorakhpurFebruary131971_0" class="quote" parent="Sri_Caitanya-caritamrta_Lectures" book="Lec" index="41" link="Lecture on CC Madhya-lila 6.149-50 -- Gorakhpur, February 13, 1971" link_text="Lecture on CC Madhya-lila 6.149-50 -- Gorakhpur, February 13, 1971">
<div class="heading">So dehi. Dehi means possessor of this body, the owner of this body. So owner of this body is different from this body.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on CC Madhya-lila 6.149-50 -- Gorakhpur, February 13, 1971|Lecture on CC Madhya-lila 6.149-50 -- Gorakhpur, February 13, 1971]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So dehi. Dehi means possessor of this body, the owner of this body. So owner of this body is different from this body. But in case of Kṛṣṇa or Viṣṇu-tattva, there is no such difference, the self and the body, no difference. That is confirmed in the Kūrma Purāṇa. Unfortunately the Māyāvādīs, they, either due to their poor fund of knowledge of the śāstras or by their whims, they say that "Kṛṣṇa or Viṣṇu, when comes, or the Absolute Truth when He descends, He assumes, He accepts, a material body." That is not the fact. Kṛṣṇa says, sambhavāmy ātma-māyayā ([[Vanisource:BG 4.6|BG 4.6]]).</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Festival_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="6" parent="Lectures" text="Festival Lectures"><h3>Festival Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="HisDivineGraceSrilaSaccidanandaBhaktivinodaThakurasAppearanceDayLectureLondonSeptember31971_0" class="quote" parent="Festival_Lectures" book="Lec" index="30" link="His Divine Grace Srila Sac-cid-ananda Bhaktivinoda Thakura's Appearance Day, Lecture -- London, September 3, 1971" link_text="His Divine Grace Srila Sac-cid-ananda Bhaktivinoda Thakura's Appearance Day, Lecture -- London, September 3, 1971">
<div class="heading">Asmin dehe, in this body, there is dehi. Dehi means who is the owner of this body. That is soul.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:His Divine Grace Srila Sac-cid-ananda Bhaktivinoda Thakura's Appearance Day, Lecture -- London, September 3, 1971|His Divine Grace Srila Sac-cid-ananda Bhaktivinoda Thakura's Appearance Day, Lecture -- London, September 3, 1971]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Asmin dehe, in this body, there is dehi. Dehi means who is the owner of this body. That is soul. That is passing through childhood, boyhood, babyhood, youthhood, old age. Everyone, you can perceive that you were a child, you were a baby, you were a boy. Now you are young man or old man. So you are there. So as you are passing through different types of bodies, similarly, when you give up this body you accept another body.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="General_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="11" parent="Lectures" text="General Lectures"><h3>General Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="PublicSpeechBadHomburgGermanyJune221974_0" class="quote" parent="General_Lectures" book="Lec" index="150" link="Public Speech -- Bad Homburg, Germany, June 22, 1974" link_text="Public Speech -- Bad Homburg, Germany, June 22, 1974">
<div class="heading">So we, as spirit soul, dehi, the possessor of this body... Dehi means one who possesses this body or the occupier of the body, the spirit soul.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Public Speech -- Bad Homburg, Germany, June 22, 1974|Public Speech -- Bad Homburg, Germany, June 22, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So one has to become competent to transfer himself in a particular type of planet. So we, as spirit soul, dehi, the possessor of this body... Dehi means one who possesses this body or the occupier of the body, the spirit soul. That is eternal, changing body only, but eternal. Therefore we should not be interested to these different types of temporary body. That is not very good intelligence. So we have to prepare ourself, if we want. There are the full description of each and every planet, and we can prepare ourself according to our desire which planet we wish to go. But Kṛṣṇa says, mad-yājino 'pi yānti mām: ([[Vanisource:BG 9.25|BG 9.25]]) "Persons who are engaged in My occupational duties, they will come to Me."</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="EveningLectureBhuvanesvaraJanuary191977_1" class="quote" parent="General_Lectures" book="Lec" index="178" link="Evening Lecture -- Bhuvanesvara, January 19, 1977" link_text="Evening Lecture -- Bhuvanesvara, January 19, 1977">
<div class="heading">In this body he is the proprietor of the body. Dehi and deha. Deha means this body, and dehi means the proprietor of the body. So that dehi, or the proprietor of the body, is Brahman.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Evening Lecture -- Bhuvanesvara, January 19, 1977|Evening Lecture -- Bhuvanesvara, January 19, 1977]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So Kṛṣṇa says in the Bhagavad-gītā, giving the first instruction to Arjuna, dehino 'smin yathā dehe kaumāraṁ yauvanaṁ jarā, tathā dehāntara-prāptir ([[Vanisource:BG 2.13|BG 2.13]]). The Brahman, the spirit soul, the part and parcel of Parabrahman, is dehi. Asmin dehe. In this body he is the proprietor of the body. Dehi and deha. Deha means this body, and dehi means the proprietor of the body. So that dehi, or the proprietor of the body, is Brahman. Brahma-jijñāsā. If we are inquisitive to know about Brahman, first of all we must know that I or you, any spirit soul, is Brahman, and he's within this body.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="section" sec_index="5" parent="compilation" text="Conversations and Morning Walks"><h2>Conversations and Morning Walks</h2>
</div>
<div id="1974_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="sub_section" sec_index="7" parent="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" text="1974 Conversations and Morning Walks"><h3>1974 Conversations and Morning Walks</h3>
</div>
<div id="RoomConversationwithBhurijanadasaandDisciplesJuly11974Melbourne_0" class="quote" parent="1974_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="135" link="Room Conversation with Bhurijana dasa and Disciples -- July 1, 1974, Melbourne" link_text="Room Conversation with Bhurijana dasa and Disciples -- July 1, 1974, Melbourne">
<div class="heading">Deha means body. And dehi means the owner of the body. So our this Kṛṣṇa consciousness is about the activities of the owner of the body, not the body.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Room Conversation with Bhurijana dasa and Disciples -- July 1, 1974, Melbourne|Room Conversation with Bhurijana dasa and Disciples -- July 1, 1974, Melbourne]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: We... Our work is on that platform, dehino 'smin yatha dehe kaumāraṁ yauvanam jara tatha dehāntaram ([[Vanisource:BG 2.13|BG 2.13]]), dehina, not the deha, dehi. We are not working on deha. Deha means body. And dehi means the owner of the body. So our this Kṛṣṇa consciousness is about the activities of the owner of the body, not the body. But the whole world is going on on acting on the body. That is the difference. Therefore it takes very, very, long time to understand. Those who are thinking, "I am this body..." One who knows that "I am not this body; I am soul, spirit soul," then his spiritual education... They do not know what is spiritual education. What do they mean generally, spiritual education?</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1976_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="sub_section" sec_index="9" parent="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" text="1976 Conversations and Morning Walks"><h3>1976 Conversations and Morning Walks</h3>
</div>
<div id="EveningDarsanaJuly71976WashingtonDC_0" class="quote" parent="1976_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="191" link="Evening Darsana -- July 7, 1976, Washington, D.C." link_text="Evening Darsana -- July 7, 1976, Washington, D.C.">
<div class="heading">Deha means this body, and dehī means the owner of the body. So unless we distinguish the owner of the body and the body, there is no spiritual knowledge. So long we identify with this body, that is material knowledge.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Evening Darsana -- July 7, 1976, Washington, D.C.|Evening Darsana -- July 7, 1976, Washington, D.C.]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: So long we keep ourself on this platform, then we are on the material platform. When we understand that "I am not this body..." That is the beginning of Bhagavad-gītā. Dehino 'smin yathā dehe ([[Vanisource:BG 2.13|BG 2.13]]). Deha means this body, and dehī means the owner of the body. So unless we distinguish the owner of the body and the body, there is no spiritual knowledge. So long we identify with this body, that is material knowledge. And when we understand that "I am not this body, I am a spirit soul, I have been entrapped by this body," that is spiritual knowledge.</p>
</div>
</div>
</div>

Tapasya means

2010-04-02T15:02:02Z

Partha-sarathi: Created page with '<div id="compilation"> <div id="facts"> {{terms|"tapasya means"}} {{notes|}} {{compiler|Partha-sarathi}} {{complete|ALL}} {{first|02Apr10}} {{last|02Apr10}} {{totals_by_section|B…'

<div id="compilation">
<div id="facts">
{{terms|"tapasya means"}}
{{notes|}}
{{compiler|Partha-sarathi}}
{{complete|ALL}}
{{first|02Apr10}}
{{last|02Apr10}}
{{totals_by_section|BG=0|SB=1|CC=0|OB=0|Lec=59|Con=17|Let=0}}
{{total|77}}
{{toc right}}
[[Category:Meaning of Sanskrit Words]]
</div>
<div id="Srimad-Bhagavatam" class="section" sec_index="1" parent="compilation" text="Srimad-Bhagavatam"><h2>Srimad-Bhagavatam</h2>
</div>
<div id="SB_Canto_1" class="sub_section" sec_index="1" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam" text="SB Canto 1"><h3>SB Canto 1</h3>
</div>
<div id="SB122829_0" class="quote" parent="SB_Canto_1" book="SB" index="51" link="SB 1.2.28-29" link_text="SB 1.2.28-29">
<div class="heading">The same applies to all kinds of austerities. Tapasya means voluntary acceptance of bodily pains to achieve some higher end of life.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:SB 1.2.28-29|SB 1.2.28-29, Purport]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="purport text"><p style="display: inline;">The same applies to all kinds of austerities. Tapasya means voluntary acceptance of bodily pains to achieve some higher end of life. Rāvaṇa and Hiraṇyakaśipu underwent a severe type of bodily torture to achieve the end of sense gratification. Sometimes modern politicians also undergo severe types of austerities to achieve some political end. This is not actually tapasya. One should accept voluntary bodily inconvenience for the sake of knowing Vāsudeva because that is the way of real austerities.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Lectures" class="section" sec_index="4" parent="compilation" text="Lectures"><h2>Lectures</h2>
</div>
<div id="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="0" parent="Lectures" text="Bhagavad-gita As It Is Lectures"><h3>Bhagavad-gita As It Is Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG213NewYorkMarch111966_0" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="58" link="Lecture on BG 2.13 -- New York, March 11, 1966" link_text="Lecture on BG 2.13 -- New York, March 11, 1966">
<div class="heading">Ārādhito yadi haris tapasā tathā kim. Tapasya means penances, accepting penances for spiritual realization. Now, one who has accepted the worship of the Supreme Lord, he has no more anything to do for spiritual realization.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 2.13 -- New York, March 11, 1966|Lecture on BG 2.13 -- New York, March 11, 1966]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So we can get free from all anxieties as soon as we are surrendered to Hari. That is the whole system of spiritual knowledge. Ārādhito yadi haris tapasā tathā kim. If you accept from the very beginning this principle, that "I must surrender unto the Supreme Lord," then there is no other necessity of prosecuting your spiritual knowledge. That is the final solution of life. Ārādhito yadi haris tapasā tathā kim. Tapasya means penances, accepting penances for spiritual realization. Now, one who has accepted the worship of the Supreme Lord, he has no more anything to do for spiritual realization. He has realized. And nārādhito yadi haris tapasā tathā kim. And undergoing so much severe penances, if one does not understand what is God, then whole thing is spoiled. Tapasā tathā kim. Whole penances is spoiled because he could not reach to the ultimate goal.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG219LondonAugust251973_1" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="81" link="Lecture on BG 2.19 -- London, August 25, 1973" link_text="Lecture on BG 2.19 -- London, August 25, 1973">
<div class="heading">Pravṛttiḥ eṣaṁ bhūtānām.(?) That is natural instinct. But if you can stop them, that is your excellence. That is called tapasya. Tapasya means I have got naturally some propensity, but that is not good.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 2.19 -- London, August 25, 1973|Lecture on BG 2.19 -- London, August 25, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So loke vyavāya āmiṣa mada-sevā nityas tu jantuḥ. This is propensity. Material life means every living entity has got these propensities. But they have to be restricted. Pravṛttiḥ eṣaṁ bhūtānām.(?) That is natural instinct. But if you can stop them, that is your excellence. That is called tapasya. Tapasya means I have got naturally some propensity, but that is not good. Not good in this sense, if we continue that propensity, then we have to accept this material body. This is the law of nature. There is a verse, pramattaḥ. What is called, that...? Now I'm forgetting that. That everyone is mad, mad after sense gratification. Na sādhu manye yata ātmano 'yam asann api kleśada āsa dehaḥ.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG26272LosAngelesDecember191968_2" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="114" link="Lecture on BG 2.62-72 -- Los Angeles, December 19, 1968" link_text="Lecture on BG 2.62-72 -- Los Angeles, December 19, 1968">
<div class="heading">So in the beginning, I may feel some inconvenience, but if you can tolerate that, that is tapasya. That is tapasya. Tapasya means I am feeling some inconvenience, bodily, but I am tolerating.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 2.62-72 -- Los Angeles, December 19, 1968|Lecture on BG 2.62-72 -- Los Angeles, December 19, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Now, one whose sense are restrained... This human life is meant for restraining the senses. Tapaḥ. This is called tapasya, penance. Suppose I am habituated to some type of sense gratification. Now, I take to Kṛṣṇa consciousness. My spiritual master or the scripture says, "Don't do this." So in the beginning, I may feel some inconvenience, but if you can tolerate that, that is tapasya. That is tapasya. Tapasya means I am feeling some inconvenience, bodily, but I am tolerating. That is called tapasya. And this human form of life is meant for that tapasya. Not that because my senses are demanding this satisfaction, I shall immediately offer. No. I shall train myself in such a way that my senses may demand, "My dear sir, give me this facility," I will say, "No. You cannot have."</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG327MadrasJanuary11976_3" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="128" link="Lecture on BG 3.27 -- Madras, January 1, 1976" link_text="Lecture on BG 3.27 -- Madras, January 1, 1976">
<div class="heading">Actually education, tapasya, means that you should understand what is the ultimate truth and how He is acting. Then your education, your scientific knowledge, is perfect.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 3.27 -- Madras, January 1, 1976|Lecture on BG 3.27 -- Madras, January 1, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So there are so many things to be learned about Kṛṣṇa. Kṛṣṇa says that "I am controlling the material nature." Now, if you are actually very great scientist you find out how Kṛṣṇa is controlling the material... That is... Idaṁ hi puṁsas tapasaḥ śrutasya vā ([[Vanisource:SB 1.5.22|SB 1.5.22]]). Actually education, tapasya, means that you should understand what is the ultimate truth and how He is acting. Then your education, your scientific knowledge, is perfect.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG410BombayMarch301974_4" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="153" link="Lecture on BG 4.10 -- Bombay, March 30, 1974" link_text="Lecture on BG 4.10 -- Bombay, March 30, 1974">
<div class="heading">So tapasya means to reduce these. That is tapasya. Tapasya... This is the general demand of the body, and if you want to be free from this material bondage, then you have to undergo tapasya.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 4.10 -- Bombay, March 30, 1974|Lecture on BG 4.10 -- Bombay, March 30, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So tapasya means to reduce these. That is tapasya. Tapasya... This is the general demand of the body, and if you want to be free from this material bondage, then you have to undergo tapasya. Tapasya means these demands of the body voluntarily reducing and coming to the point of nil. That is liberation. That is tapasya. Vīta-rāga-bhaya-krodhā man-mayā mām upāśritāḥ ([[Vanisource:BG 4.10|BG 4.10]]). But here, very nicely Kṛṣṇa de... It can be, tapasya can be executed very easily if one becomes man-mayā, always thinking of Kṛṣṇa. Hare Kṛṣṇa Hare Kṛṣṇa Kṛṣṇa Kṛṣṇa Hare Hare, Hare Rāma Hare Rāma Rāma Rāma Hare Hare. Man-mayā.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG410PublicMeetingRomeMay251974_5" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="154" link="Lecture on BG 4.10 Public Meeting -- Rome, May 25, 1974" link_text="Lecture on BG 4.10 Public Meeting -- Rome, May 25, 1974">
<div class="heading">This jñāna can be attained by tapasya. Tapasya means austerity.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 4.10 Public Meeting -- Rome, May 25, 1974|Lecture on BG 4.10 Public Meeting -- Rome, May 25, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">One has to take shelter of Kṛṣṇa or His representative. Therefore this movement is to give chance to the people how to think of Kṛṣṇa constantly. The human form of life is meant for attaining jñāna. Jñāna means knowledge that "I am not this body. I am spirit soul." This jñāna can be attained by tapasya. Tapasya means austerity. And if we attain knowledge and undergo austerities, then we become purified.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG410FestivalatMaisondeFaubourgGenevaMay311974_6" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="155" link="Lecture on BG 4.10 Festival at Maison de Faubourg -- Geneva, May 31, 1974" link_text="Lecture on BG 4.10 Festival at Maison de Faubourg -- Geneva, May 31, 1974">
<div class="heading">Tapasya means voluntarily accepting some inconvenience. That is called tapasya.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 4.10 Festival at Maison de Faubourg -- Geneva, May 31, 1974|Lecture on BG 4.10 Festival at Maison de Faubourg -- Geneva, May 31, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So the purificatory process, we are taking the essence of all Vedic literatures, that four principles, namely: no illicit sex, no intoxication, no meat-eating and no gambling. This is called tapasya. Tapasya means voluntarily accepting some inconvenience. That is called tapasya. Suppose I am accustomed to smoke or to drink. If I give it up, there will be certainly little inconvenience. But for the better cause, I have to suffer voluntarily. That is called tapasya. Nobody will die if he does not get facility for illicit sex or enjoying intoxicants and meat-eating. Nobody will die. All the members of Kṛṣṇa conscious society, they have given up. But for that reason we are not dying. It is not difficult. Simply we have to accept in the beginning there may be little inconvenience, but when you come to the platform, there is no inconvenience.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG410VrndavanaAugust21974_7" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="156" link="Lecture on BG 4.10 -- Vrndavana, August 2, 1974" link_text="Lecture on BG 4.10 -- Vrndavana, August 2, 1974">
<div class="heading">First of all jñāna, understanding our position. This is called jñāna. And then practice tapasya. Tapasya means make these things, material necessities, zero.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 4.10 -- Vrndavana, August 2, 1974|Lecture on BG 4.10 -- Vrndavana, August 2, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Just like in the life of the Gosvāmīs. Nidrāhāra-vihārakādi-vijitau **. Conquered. Conquered over these things, material necessities. So this is called penance. Here it is said. Bahavo jñāna-tapasā. First of all jñāna, understanding our position. This is called jñāna. And then practice tapasya. Tapasya means make these things, material necessities, zero. That is called tapasya. Tapasya. Because we are accustomed to all these things, eating, sleeping, mating and fearing. So to give up it is not possible all of a sudden. That is not possible. Because we are accustomed.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG410VrndavanaAugust21974_8" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="156" link="Lecture on BG 4.10 -- Vrndavana, August 2, 1974" link_text="Lecture on BG 4.10 -- Vrndavana, August 2, 1974">
<div class="heading">So therefore you require tapasya. Tapasya means voluntarily agree to suffer. That is called tapasya.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 4.10 -- Vrndavana, August 2, 1974|Lecture on BG 4.10 -- Vrndavana, August 2, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">This is the world. Even father will be enemy, what to speak of others. If you become Kṛṣṇa conscious, the whole world will be your enemy. You must be prepared for that. So therefore you require tapasya. Tapasya means voluntarily agree to suffer. That is called tapasya. Voluntarily. Suffering is there, but why not suffer for Kṛṣṇa? Everyone is unhappy. Everyone is in suffering condition. Who is not suffering? Everyone is suffering.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG421BombayApril101974_9" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="185" link="Lecture on BG 4.21 -- Bombay, April 10, 1974" link_text="Lecture on BG 4.21 -- Bombay, April 10, 1974">
<div class="heading">So nirāśīḥ, now, to go to our original position, that is called tapasya. Tapasya means to revive our original normal life of Kṛṣṇa consciousness.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 4.21 -- Bombay, April 10, 1974|Lecture on BG 4.21 -- Bombay, April 10, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Similarly, in the conditioned state, under the influence of māyā, we are also talking so many nonsense things, "I belong to this family, I belong to this nation, I belong to this community, my business is this," simply forgetting Kṛṣṇa consciousness. All other business, he will remember, but when he is requested to become Kṛṣṇa conscious, to understand Kṛṣṇa, he doesn't like it. Except Kṛṣṇa consciousness, he will take all responsibility and work hard for that purpose. This is called māyā-grasta jīva. So nirāśīḥ, now, to go to our original position, that is called tapasya. Tapasya means to revive our original normal life of Kṛṣṇa consciousness. That is called tapasya. This tapasya is not possible by the cats and dogs or animals.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG71HyderabadApril271974_10" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="240" link="Lecture on BG 7.1 -- Hyderabad, April 27, 1974" link_text="Lecture on BG 7.1 -- Hyderabad, April 27, 1974">
<div class="heading">So tapasya means come to the brahma-karma, not to the śūdra-karma. Kāraṇaṁ guṇa-saṅgo 'sya (BG 13.22).
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 7.1 -- Hyderabad, April 27, 1974|Lecture on BG 7.1 -- Hyderabad, April 27, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So tapasya means come to the brahma-karma, not to the śūdra-karma. Kāraṇaṁ guṇa-saṅgo 'sya ([[Vanisource:BG 13.22|BG 13.22]]). Don't associate with the śūdra qualifications. Now, what is the śūdra qualification? Paricaryātmakaṁ kāryaṁ śūdra-karma svabhāva-jam ([[Vanisource:BG 18.44|BG 18.44]]). You are highly educated, but your desire is how to get a service. Paricarya... I am highly educated, but unless I render service to somebody else like a dog, I am not recognized. This is called śūdra-karma. Why a brāhmaṇa, kṣatriya, vaiśya should search after service?</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG71NairobiOctober271975_11" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="246" link="Lecture on BG 7.1 -- Nairobi, October 27, 1975" link_text="Lecture on BG 7.1 -- Nairobi, October 27, 1975">
<div class="heading">First of all training is brahmacārī, how to train him to remain without sex. That is brahmacārī. Tapasā brahmacaryeṇa (SB 6.1.13). Tapasya means to remain brahmacārī.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 7.1 -- Nairobi, October 27, 1975|Lecture on BG 7.1 -- Nairobi, October 27, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">This is the law of nature. Therefore whole Vedic civilization is meant for curtailing sex life. First of all brahmacārī, no sex life. First of all training is brahmacārī, how to train him to remain without sex. That is brahmacārī. Tapasā brahmacaryeṇa ([[Vanisource:SB 6.1.13|SB 6.1.13]]). Tapasya means to remain brahmacārī. This is tapasya. It is very difficult. Therefore it is called tapasya, because the whole world is attracted by sex life, puṁsaḥ striyā mithunī-bhāvam, whole world, not only in this planet, every planet, even in the demigods' planet.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG71NairobiOctober271975_12" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="246" link="Lecture on BG 7.1 -- Nairobi, October 27, 1975" link_text="Lecture on BG 7.1 -- Nairobi, October 27, 1975">
<div class="heading">So tapasya means tapasā brahmacaryeṇa śamena damena vā (SB 6.1.13). You have to control. The more one controls, he becomes advanced in spiritual culture.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 7.1 -- Nairobi, October 27, 1975|Lecture on BG 7.1 -- Nairobi, October 27, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So tapasya means tapasā brahmacaryeṇa śamena damena vā ([[Vanisource:SB 6.1.13|SB 6.1.13]]). You have to control. The more one controls, he becomes advanced in spiritual culture. The yoga system means yoga indriya-saṁyamaḥ. "Yoga means how to control the senses." This is yoga system, and therefore Kṛṣṇa says, mayy āsakta-manāḥ pārtha. So sex indulgence is against spiritual advancement of life. Therefore you have seen that the brahmacārīs, they go there. It becomes very easy to enter into the spiritual kingdom. So that you can do here also.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG79VrndavanaAugust151974_13" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="278" link="Lecture on BG 7.9 -- Vrndavana, August 15, 1974" link_text="Lecture on BG 7.9 -- Vrndavana, August 15, 1974">
<div class="heading">Tapasya means to undergo voluntarily some inconveniences of this body. Because we are accustomed to enjoy bodily senses, and tapasya means voluntarily to give up the idea of sense gratification.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 7.9 -- Vrndavana, August 15, 1974|Lecture on BG 7.9 -- Vrndavana, August 15, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Tapasya means to undergo voluntarily some inconveniences of this body. Because we are accustomed to enjoy bodily senses, and tapasya means voluntarily to give up the idea of sense gratification. That is tapasya. Tapasya. Just like Ekādaśī. Ekādaśī, one day fasting, fortnight. That is also tapasya. Or fasting in some other auspicious day. That tapasya is good, even for health, and what to speak of advancing in Kṛṣṇa consciousness. So we should accept this tapasya. The upavāsa. There are many prescribed days for fasting.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG79VrndavanaAugust151974_14" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="278" link="Lecture on BG 7.9 -- Vrndavana, August 15, 1974" link_text="Lecture on BG 7.9 -- Vrndavana, August 15, 1974">
<div class="heading">Tapasya means to accept voluntarily something as enjoined in the śāstras. Śāstra says... Kṛṣṇa says. Whatever Kṛṣṇa says, that is śāstra.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 7.9 -- Vrndavana, August 15, 1974|Lecture on BG 7.9 -- Vrndavana, August 15, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Therefore Kṛṣṇa says that tapaś cāsmi tapasviṣu. That acceptance of tapasya means that tapasya is itself Kṛṣṇa. You associate with Kṛṣṇa. When you voluntarily give up meat-eating or intoxication, this giving-up, this process, is Kṛṣṇa. Kṛṣṇa says, tapaś cāsmi tapasviṣu. This is tapasya. Tapasya means to accept voluntarily something as enjoined in the śāstras. Śāstra says... Kṛṣṇa says. Whatever Kṛṣṇa says, that is śāstra. What is Veda? Veda means what Kṛṣṇa says; that is Veda. There is no other Veda.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG92627NewYorkDecember161966_15" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="323" link="Lecture on BG 9.26-27 -- New York, December 16, 1966" link_text="Lecture on BG 9.26-27 -- New York, December 16, 1966">
<div class="heading">Tapasya means penance. Now people are... There are great scientists, great philosophers, great thinkers. They are engaged in great penances.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 9.26-27 -- New York, December 16, 1966|Lecture on BG 9.26-27 -- New York, December 16, 1966]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Tapasya. Tapasya means penance. Now people are... There are great scientists, great philosophers, great thinkers. They are engaged in great penances. They are taking very severe type of pains for discovering something. We have got that tendency. Just like we have discovered this atomic bomb. That required some penance or austerity. But Kṛṣṇa says that "Don't discover atom bomb, but discover Me. If you are so painstaking, if you are so great scientist, discover Me." "Oh, that is not possible. We can kill. That is possible." So this is going on. That tapasyasi, kuruṣva mad-arpaṇam. Everything should be done for Kṛṣṇa. That is the greatest civilization. That is the perfection of civilization. That is peaceful civilization, everything for God. Thank you very much.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG1627BombayApril81971_16" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="382" link="Lecture on BG 16.2-7 -- Bombay, April 8, 1971" link_text="Lecture on BG 16.2-7 -- Bombay, April 8, 1971">
<div class="heading">The tapasya means they have simply given up some bad habits: no illicit sex life, no intoxication, no meat-eating, no gambling.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 16.2-7 -- Bombay, April 8, 1971|Lecture on BG 16.2-7 -- Bombay, April 8, 1971]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Ust like in the race, the horse which is weak, it gives, some concession is given. And those who are strong, they are overloaded. Similarly, because the people of this age are not very strong, spiritually inclined, therefore for this particular age of Kali the tapasya has been, I mean to say, decreased. Just like these boys and girls. The tapasya means they have simply given up some bad habits: no illicit sex life, no intoxication, no meat-eating, no gambling. That's all. Very easy. Now, you can see this is tapasya. And chanting Hare Kṛṣṇa mantra twenty-four hours. This is the tapasya for Kali-yuga.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG166HyderabadDecember131976_17" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="388" link="Lecture on BG 16.6 -- Hyderabad, December 13, 1976" link_text="Lecture on BG 16.6 -- Hyderabad, December 13, 1976">
<div class="heading">Tapasya means austerity. If you want to cure your disease, then you must follow some austerities, rules and regulation. One man is suffering from diarrhea.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 16.6 -- Hyderabad, December 13, 1976|Lecture on BG 16.6 -- Hyderabad, December 13, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">One should try to purify his existence. For that purpose there is necessity of tapasya. Tapo divyaṁ putrakā yena śuddhyet sattvam ([[Vanisource:SB 5.5.1|SB 5.5.1]]). Tapasya means austerity. If you want to cure your disease, then you must follow some austerities, rules and regulation. One man is suffering from diarrhea. If he is allowed to eat whatever he likes, then he will never be cured. He must observe fasting for few days; then it will be cured. So this is sattva-saṁśuddhi.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG1867AhmedabadDecember101972_18" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="405" link="Lecture on BG 18.67 -- Ahmedabad, December 10, 1972" link_text="Lecture on BG 18.67 -- Ahmedabad, December 10, 1972">
<div class="heading">Tapasya means voluntarily accepting some difficult things. That is called tapasya. Therefore those who have not taken to that, those who have taken Bhagavad-gītā as a table talk, they cannot understand.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 18.67 -- Ahmedabad, December 10, 1972|Lecture on BG 18.67 -- Ahmedabad, December 10, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">You have to approach a person who has seen tattva, tattva-darśinaḥ. So that tattva-darśī already explained. Bhaktyā mām abhijānāti ([[Vanisource:BG 18.55|BG 18.55]]). One can become tattva-darśī simply by devotional service. So for coming to the platform of devotional service one has to make some sacrifice. That is called tapasya. Tapasya means voluntarily accepting some difficult things. That is called tapasya. Therefore those who have not taken to that, those who have taken Bhagavad-gītā as a table talk, they cannot understand. Not Bhagavad-gītā should be preached amongst them.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="1" parent="Lectures" text="Srimad-Bhagavatam Lectures"><h3>Srimad-Bhagavatam Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB1825LosAngelesApril171973_0" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="213" link="Lecture on SB 1.8.25 -- Los Angeles, April 17, 1973" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.8.25 -- Los Angeles, April 17, 1973">
<div class="heading">Tapasya means we must prolong or proceed with, with our Kṛṣṇa consciousness business in spite of all dangerous and calamitous condition of this world.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.8.25 -- Los Angeles, April 17, 1973|Lecture on SB 1.8.25 -- Los Angeles, April 17, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Just like in your country it is very chilly in the morning to take bath, a little difficult task. But does it mean that those who are devotees, they will stop taking bath? No. Even it is chilly, cold, one must take bath. The duty must be done. The duty must be done. Even it is little suffering. That is called tapasya. Tapasya means we must prolong or proceed with, with our Kṛṣṇa consciousness business in spite of all dangerous and calamitous condition of this world. This is called tapasya. Tapasya means voluntarily accepting the difficulties of life. Sometimes tapasya, in the system of tapasya, in hot season, summer, in scorching heat of the sun, still they ignite some fire all around and sit down in the midst and meditate. There are some processes of tapasya like that. In chilly cold one goes into the water up to the neck and meditates. These things are prescribed in tapasya.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB1948MayapuraJune141973_1" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="266" link="Lecture on SB 1.9.48 -- Mayapura, June 14, 1973" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.9.48 -- Mayapura, June 14, 1973">
<div class="heading">Tapasya means I have got some tendency, but voluntarily I have to check it. That is called control, tapasya. My tongue is dictating: "Oh, let us go to some place and eat such-and-such thing."
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.9.48 -- Mayapura, June 14, 1973|Lecture on SB 1.9.48 -- Mayapura, June 14, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">That is the condition of this material nature. But we have to deny it. That is tapasya. Tendency's there. Tapasya means I have got some tendency, but voluntarily I have to check it. That is called control, tapasya. My tongue is dictating: "Oh, let us go to some place and eat such-and-such thing." But if you can control the tongue... "No," that is tapasya. "No, you cannot eat this. You cannot be allowed to eat anything and there's no and except Kṛṣṇa prasādam." That is tapasya. Not that "My tongue has dried up. I must drink a cup of tea," and I take it. "No. It is intoxication, prohibited. So I shall not take it." That is tapasya. And that tapasya, what for?</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB211DelhiNovember41973_2" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="350" link="Lecture on SB 2.1.1 -- Delhi, November 4, 1973" link_text="Lecture on SB 2.1.1 -- Delhi, November 4, 1973">
<div class="heading">Tapasya means voluntarily accepting some difficulties. Not difficulties. Just like in our Society we say, "No illicit sex life, no intoxication, no meat-eating, no gambling."
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 2.1.1 -- Delhi, November 4, 1973|Lecture on SB 2.1.1 -- Delhi, November 4, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So Ṛṣabhadeva warned, "My dear sons, this life, this human form of life, is not meant for working so hard simply for eating, sleeping, mating and defending." Then what it is meant for? Tapo divyaṁ putrakā yena śuddhyet ([[Vanisource:SB 5.5.1|SB 5.5.1]]). "My dear boys, just try to become austere. Just tapasya." Tapasya means voluntarily accepting some difficulties. Not difficulties. Just like in our Society we say, "No illicit sex life, no intoxication, no meat-eating, no gambling." But in the Western countries, these things are daily affair. But they have given up. But they have not..., have died. All these boys and girls who have taken up Kṛṣṇa consciousness movement, they have given up. No illicit sex life, no meat-eating, no intoxication. They do not drink even tea, coffee. They do not smoke even cigarette. This is tapasya, little tapasya.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB3257BombayNovember71974_3" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="428" link="Lecture on SB 3.25.7 -- Bombay, November 7, 1974" link_text="Lecture on SB 3.25.7 -- Bombay, November 7, 1974">
<div class="heading">That is tapasya means we should restrict sense gratification. Sense gratification, either regulated or nonregulated, is meant for animal life.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 3.25.7 -- Bombay, November 7, 1974|Lecture on SB 3.25.7 -- Bombay, November 7, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">They should think, "Whether we shall spoil our life simply by sense gratification, or there is some other business?" Yes, there is some other business. That is tapasya. That is tapasya means we should restrict sense gratification. Sense gratification, either regulated or nonregulated, is meant for animal life. Sense control is the human life. Therefore you'll find in Vedic culture big, big learned scholars, big, big kings, they dedicated their life for tapasya. Tapo divyaṁ putrakā yena śuddhyet sattvam ([[Vanisource:SB 5.5.1|SB 5.5.1]]). If you want to purify your existence, then you must take to the process of tapasya.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB32510BombayNovember101974_4" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="431" link="Lecture on SB 3.25.10 -- Bombay, November 10, 1974" link_text="Lecture on SB 3.25.10 -- Bombay, November 10, 1974">
<div class="heading">Tapasya means voluntarily accepting some... This is not inconvenience. Just like in our society it is enjoined, the students, they should voluntarily accept the principle: no illicit sex life, no meat-eating, no fish-eating, no, nothing of the sort, no intoxication, and no gambling.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 3.25.10 -- Bombay, November 10, 1974|Lecture on SB 3.25.10 -- Bombay, November 10, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">You purify yourself. And that purification begins when you accept the life of austerities, tapaḥ, tapasya. Tapasya means voluntarily accepting some... This is not inconvenience. Just like in our society it is enjoined, the students, they should voluntarily accept the principle: no illicit sex life, no meat-eating, no fish-eating, no, nothing of the sort, no intoxication, and no gambling. This is tapasya. Especially for these European and American students, they are, from the beginning of their life, they are accustomed to these habits.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB32643BombayJanuary181975_5" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="499" link="Lecture on SB 3.26.43 -- Bombay, January 18, 1975" link_text="Lecture on SB 3.26.43 -- Bombay, January 18, 1975">
<div class="heading">Therefore from tāpa... It comes from tāpa, tapasya. Tapasya means voluntarily accepting some unfavorable condition. Of course, the soul is not affected by any favorable or unfavorable condition.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 3.26.43 -- Bombay, January 18, 1975|Lecture on SB 3.26.43 -- Bombay, January 18, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So this is also one tāpa. In this material world we are suffering so many varieties of tāpa. Tāpan vindanti maithunyam agaram ajhaḥ.(?) It is simply full of tāpa. Tāpa means heat, and tāpa means unbearable, miserable condition. Therefore from tāpa... It comes from tāpa, tapasya. Tapasya means voluntarily accepting some unfavorable condition. Of course, the soul is not affected by any favorable or unfavorable condition. Asaṅgo 'yaṁ puruṣaḥ. Actually, it has no connection with the favorable, unfavorable condition. It is simply abhiniveśa.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB551LosAngelesJanuary201969_6" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="511" link="Lecture on SB 5.5.1 -- Los Angeles, January 20, 1969" link_text="Lecture on SB 5.5.1 -- Los Angeles, January 20, 1969">
<div class="heading">That is stated in the next line, tapo divyam (SB 5.5.1). "My dear boys, this life is meant for tapasya." Tapasya means restraining your senses.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 5.5.1 -- Los Angeles, January 20, 1969|Lecture on SB 5.5.1 -- Los Angeles, January 20, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">The hog does not discriminate. The monkeys, they do not discriminate—mother, sister, or anyone—they must have sex. So especially mentioned here, not like hog, don't live like hog. This is the instruction of Ṛṣabhadeva. This human form of life is not meant for living like a hog. Then what it is for? That is stated in the next line, tapo divyam ([[Vanisource:SB 5.5.1|SB 5.5.1]]). "My dear boys, this life is meant for tapasya." Tapasya means restraining your senses. That is. That is human life. That is human civilization. The more you restrain your senses from its activities, the more you're advanced, civilized, advanced human life. Tapasya. Tapasya means, tapa, tapa, from tap, tapa comes. Tapa means temperature.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB551TittenhurstLondonSeptember121969_7" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="512" link="Lecture on SB 5.5.1 -- Tittenhurst, London, September 12, 1969" link_text="Lecture on SB 5.5.1 -- Tittenhurst, London, September 12, 1969">
<div class="heading">Tapasya means I am habituated to smoking, suppose, and the spiritual master says, "You cannot smoke."
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 5.5.1 -- Tittenhurst, London, September 12, 1969|Lecture on SB 5.5.1 -- Tittenhurst, London, September 12, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">They are, from the very beginning of their life they are accustomed to certain habits, but we are restricting. We say, "You cannot do this," and they are accepting, following. This is called tapasya. Tapo. Tapasya. Tapasya means I am habituated to smoking, suppose, and the spiritual master says, "You cannot smoke." So if he gives up smoking, he feels some inconvenience, some uncomfortable position. But because the spiritual master has ordered, he gives it up. This is called tapasya. Even at his inconvenience, he abides by the order of the spiritual master, regulative principle.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB551TittenhurstLondonSeptember121969_8" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="512" link="Lecture on SB 5.5.1 -- Tittenhurst, London, September 12, 1969" link_text="Lecture on SB 5.5.1 -- Tittenhurst, London, September 12, 1969">
<div class="heading">So tapasya means even at the inconvenience of my personal comforts, I must abide by the orders of my spiritual master. This is called tapasya.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 5.5.1 -- Tittenhurst, London, September 12, 1969|Lecture on SB 5.5.1 -- Tittenhurst, London, September 12, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So tapasya means even at the inconvenience of my personal comforts, I must abide by the orders of my spiritual master. This is called tapasya. And who is spiritual master? He does not manufacture any rules and regulation. He refers to the śāstra. Therefore Narottama dāsa Ṭhākura says, sādhu-śāstra-guru-vākya, tinete kariyā aikya. If you want to know who is a spiritual master, if you know who is a saintly person, then you should keep in the middle the śāstra, the scriptures, and you will corroborate. The saintly person, the spiritual master, and the śāstra corroborate if they are abiding one another.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB551TittenhurstLondonSeptember121969_9" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="512" link="Lecture on SB 5.5.1 -- Tittenhurst, London, September 12, 1969" link_text="Lecture on SB 5.5.1 -- Tittenhurst, London, September 12, 1969">
<div class="heading">So therefore this tapasya means voluntarily accepting the rulings of scriptures, spiritual master, saintly person, and mold your life in that way.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 5.5.1 -- Tittenhurst, London, September 12, 1969|Lecture on SB 5.5.1 -- Tittenhurst, London, September 12, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So therefore this tapasya means voluntarily accepting the rulings of scriptures, spiritual master, saintly person, and mold your life in that way. So He is instructing His sons, "My dear sons, don't spoil your life, living like cats and dogs and hogs. Utilize your life by tapasya, by voluntarily accepting the rulings of śāstra, spiritual master, saintly person." The question may be that "Why this injunction? Why I shall not live like an animal?</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB551DelhiNovember281975_10" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="516" link="Lecture on SB 5.5.1 -- Delhi, November 28, 1975" link_text="Lecture on SB 5.5.1 -- Delhi, November 28, 1975">
<div class="heading">The next engagement is tapasya, tapo. Tapasya means austerity, penances, voluntarily acceptance of something, some means of activity which may not be very palatable.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 5.5.1 -- Delhi, November 28, 1975|Lecture on SB 5.5.1 -- Delhi, November 28, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Then, if we give up this kind of civilization, then what is to be done? Tapo divyaṁ putrakā yena sattvaṁ śuddhyet. The next engagement is tapasya, tapo. Tapasya means austerity, penances, voluntarily acceptance of something, some means of activity which may not be very palatable. But still, we have to do that. Just like a patient, if he is forbidden by the physician not to take a certain type of foodstuff, it may be pain... Just like typhoid fever. The doctor advises, "Don't take any solid food." But if we... I am accustomed to take paratha.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB551VrndavanaOctober231976_11" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="517" link="Lecture on SB 5.5.1 -- Vrndavana, October 23, 1976" link_text="Lecture on SB 5.5.1 -- Vrndavana, October 23, 1976">
<div class="heading">Just like a man walking on the street, pulling a thela. What is the purpose? He'll get five or ten rupees, whole day working like an ass. That is also tapasya. Tapasya means labor.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 5.5.1 -- Vrndavana, October 23, 1976|Lecture on SB 5.5.1 -- Vrndavana, October 23, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Just like a man walking on the street, pulling a thela. What is the purpose? He'll get five or ten rupees, whole day working like an ass. That is also tapasya. Tapasya means labor. So he's thinking, "I'll get ten rupees by working." He cannot pull it, the load is so heavy. Still, some way or other... That is also tapasya. A scientist discovering something, he has to work very hard, and make experiments So many things. That is also tapasya. But not that kind of tapasya. That kind of tapasya is not required. Tapo divyam ([[Vanisource:SB 5.5.1|SB 5.5.1]]). You are working hard for maintaining your body and soul together. You have to work hard. But here, that hard work should be for self-realization, divine contact. That is called divyam.</p>
<p>Divyam is explained in the Bhagavad-gītā: janma karma ca me divyam ([[Vanisource:BG 4.9|BG 4.9]]).</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB5512LondonTittenhurstSeptember131969_12" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="519" link="Lecture on SB 5.5.1-2 -- London (Tittenhurst), September 13, 1969" link_text="Lecture on SB 5.5.1-2 -- London (Tittenhurst), September 13, 1969">
<div class="heading">Tapaḥ means voluntarily accepting some penances. Just like I am inclined for sense gratification, and tapasya means voluntarily avoid too much sense gratification.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 5.5.1-2 -- London (Tittenhurst), September 13, 1969|Lecture on SB 5.5.1-2 -- London (Tittenhurst), September 13, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">That should be the aim of life. But people do not know it that what is the aim of life. The aim of life is self-realization and to understand and to know and to reestablish our lost relationship with the Supreme Personality of Godhead. That should be the aim of life. Therefore it requires tapaḥ. Tapaḥ means voluntarily accepting some penances. Just like I am inclined for sense gratification, and tapasya means voluntarily avoid too much sense gratification. The śāstra does not stop sense gratification. Āhāra-nidrā-bhaya-maithuna. If the nature law allows sense gratification to the lower animals, birds and beast, why not to the man? But it should be controlled. Tapasya.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB5512LondonTittenhurstSeptember131969_13" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="519" link="Lecture on SB 5.5.1-2 -- London (Tittenhurst), September 13, 1969" link_text="Lecture on SB 5.5.1-2 -- London (Tittenhurst), September 13, 1969">
<div class="heading">Tapasya means voluntary restraint. In India, still, the system is followed in conservative families that a widow cannot marry. There is no widow marriage in India.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 5.5.1-2 -- London (Tittenhurst), September 13, 1969|Lecture on SB 5.5.1-2 -- London (Tittenhurst), September 13, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So this is also tapasya. Just like if one man is satisfied with one woman or one woman is satisfied with one man and live peacefully, that is tapasya. Because natural inclination is that "I want to enjoy that man or that woman." But if you can control, that you be satisfied with woman or with one woman, that is called tapasya. That is austerity. That is, voluntarily, you are restraining himself. Tapasya means voluntary restraint. In India, still, the system is followed in conservative families that a widow cannot marry. There is no widow marriage in India.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB5512ParisAugust121973_14" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="520" link="Lecture on SB 5.5.1-2 -- Paris, August 12, 1973" link_text="Lecture on SB 5.5.1-2 -- Paris, August 12, 1973">
<div class="heading">Voluntarily, abnegation. But here Ṛṣabhadeva says that the human life is meant for tapasya, and not for living like pigs, hogs, and dogs. Next he says tapo divyam (SB 5.5.1), because tapasya means to accept voluntarily some painful situation.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 5.5.1-2 -- Paris, August 12, 1973|Lecture on SB 5.5.1-2 -- Paris, August 12, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Voluntarily, abnegation. But here Ṛṣabhadeva says that the human life is meant for tapasya, and not for living like pigs, hogs, and dogs. Next he says tapo divyam ([[Vanisource:SB 5.5.1|SB 5.5.1]]), because tapasya means to accept voluntarily some painful situation. It is not very much painful, but they consider. But we are undergoing already, some painful situation working day and night. To satisfy the senses that also requires tapasya, hard labor, but here Ṛṣabhadeva says that you accept some painful condition. It is not at all painful, but it appears. Tapo divyam, for God realization. (break) ...that everyone is working hard day and night, but that is for sense gratification.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB5518StockholmSeptember61973_15" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="523" link="Lecture on SB 5.5.1-8 -- Stockholm, September 6, 1973" link_text="Lecture on SB 5.5.1-8 -- Stockholm, September 6, 1973">
<div class="heading">Human life is meant for tapasya, tapasya. Tapasya means austerity. Denying this, denying. The cats and dogs are satisfied—as they eat more, they think they're enjoying.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 5.5.1-8 -- Stockholm, September 6, 1973|Lecture on SB 5.5.1-8 -- Stockholm, September 6, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Otherwise it is primitive, if we remain in the same standard, sleeping anywhere, without any furniture, with..." But after all the subject matter is sleeping, nothing more than that. Similarly, you take eating also, or mating also. Then, the question will be, then what do you say the human life is meant for? The answer is tapo divyaṁ putrakā yena sattvaṁ śuddhyed ([[Vanisource:SB 5.5.1|SB 5.5.1]]). Human life is meant for tapasya, tapasya. Tapasya means austerity. Denying this, denying. The cats and dogs are satisfied—as they eat more, they think they're enjoying. Nowadays the human being also. They're using so many appetizer, drinking. We study this in the aeroplane. Before eating, they supply wine, make the appetite very strong, then eat so much, huge quantity. You have marked it?</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB552BostonApril281969_16" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="525" link="Lecture on SB 5.5.2 -- Boston, April 28, 1969" link_text="Lecture on SB 5.5.2 -- Boston, April 28, 1969">
<div class="heading">Tapasya means accepting voluntarily some suffering. That is the way of spiritual realization.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 5.5.2 -- Boston, April 28, 1969|Lecture on SB 5.5.2 -- Boston, April 28, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So tapaḥ. Tapaḥ means just like sometimes we don't want scorching heat, but under certain conditions, we tolerate scorching heat for better purpose. Or very severe cold. Sometimes we do not like, but for some higher purpose we sometimes suffer. So these voluntary sufferings under the direction of superior authority is called tapasya. Tapasya. Tapasya means accepting voluntarily some suffering. That is the way of spiritual realization. That is not actually suffering. That is nectarean. But in the beginning it appears like suffering. So that is called austerity. Tapaḥ divyam. So Ṛṣabhadeva says, "My dear sons, you just voluntarily accept some austerities, divyam." Why? For transcendental realization. Tapo divyam ([[Vanisource:SB 5.5.1|SB 5.5.1]]). "If you accept this principle, then your existence will be purified."</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB552JohannesburgOctober221975_17" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="530" link="Lecture on SB 5.5.2 -- Johannesburg, October 22, 1975" link_text="Lecture on SB 5.5.2 -- Johannesburg, October 22, 1975">
<div class="heading">The suggestion was tapa, tapasya. Tapasya means austerity, voluntarily accepting some inconvenience. This is called tapasya.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 5.5.2 -- Johannesburg, October 22, 1975|Lecture on SB 5.5.2 -- Johannesburg, October 22, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">In the first verse it was suggested that this human form of life is not meant for wasting uselesly like the animals, dogs and hogs. It should be properly utilized. The suggestion was tapa, tapasya. Tapasya means austerity, voluntarily accepting some inconvenience. This is called tapasya. Tapa, one meaning is "disturbances." Suppose I am practiced to some habit. If I am advised to give it up, it becomes little troublesome. For example, if I am habituated to smoke and somebody or higher authority says, "Don't smoke," to give up smoking is little difficult, those who are habituated to smoke. Similarly... But according to the doctor's advice if somebody has to give up smoking, he has to. Otherwise his disease may not be cured.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB552VrndavanaOctober241976_18" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="531" link="Lecture on SB 5.5.2 -- Vrndavana, October 24, 1976" link_text="Lecture on SB 5.5.2 -- Vrndavana, October 24, 1976">
<div class="heading">Human life is meant for tapasya, and tapasya means beginning tapasā brahmacaryeṇa (SB 6.1.13). This is tapasya.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 5.5.2 -- Vrndavana, October 24, 1976|Lecture on SB 5.5.2 -- Vrndavana, October 24, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So in the previous verse it was recommended, tapo: "Don't live the life of cats and dogs." This is the advice. But be tapasvi. Tapasya. Human life is meant for tapasya, and tapasya means beginning tapasā brahmacaryeṇa ([[Vanisource:SB 6.1.13|SB 6.1.13]]). This is tapasya. Tapasya begins with brahmacarya, celibacy. No sex life. That is tapasya.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB5523VrndavanaNovember101976_19" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="554" link="Lecture on SB 5.5.23 -- Vrndavana, November 10, 1976" link_text="Lecture on SB 5.5.23 -- Vrndavana, November 10, 1976">
<div class="heading">We are practiced to sex life or sense gratification. Tapasya means first of all stop this. Tapasā brahmacaryeṇa (SB 6.1.13). This is practice.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 5.5.23 -- Vrndavana, November 10, 1976|Lecture on SB 5.5.23 -- Vrndavana, November 10, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Unfortunately the present civilization, they are not meant for decreasing. They are simply increasing. The Western civlization means increasing the means of sense gratification, "machine, machine, machine, machine." So, and the brahminical culture means śamo damo titikṣa. Titikṣa means without something I may suffer. Suffer. So one should be practiced to suffer. Suffer, that is tapasya. Tapasā brahmacaryenā ([[Vanisource:SB 6.1.13|SB 6.1.13]]). Tapasya begins from celibacy. We are practiced to sex life or sense gratification. Tapasya means first of all stop this. Tapasā brahmacaryeṇa ([[Vanisource:SB 6.1.13|SB 6.1.13]]). This is practice.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB562VrndavanaNovember241976_20" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="568" link="Lecture on SB 5.6.2 -- Vrndavana, November 24, 1976" link_text="Lecture on SB 5.6.2 -- Vrndavana, November 24, 1976">
<div class="heading">Tapasya means brahmacaryeṇa, no sex life. That is tapasya, real tapasya.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 5.6.2 -- Vrndavana, November 24, 1976|Lecture on SB 5.6.2 -- Vrndavana, November 24, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">But this is the business in the human...Tapaḥ. That is the instruction. Tapo divyaṁ putrakā yena śuddhyed sattva ([[Vanisource:SB 5.5.1|SB 5.5.1]]). You must purify your existence. This is the only business of human life, tapasya. So tapasya means brahmacārī. Tapasā brahmacaryeṇa ([[Vanisource:SB 6.1.13|SB 6.1.13]]). Tapasya means brahmacaryeṇa, no sex life. That is tapasya, real tapasya. Tapasā brahmacaryeṇa śamena damena ca. Even if you practice yoga system, this regulation must be followed, celibacy, not that fashion yoga system. Now in your country there are so many transcendental yogis, and they say, "Yes, whatever you like, you can do. God has given you senses, you must enjoy." These are manufactured cheating processes. But actually yoga means indriya-samyamaḥ. Yoga indriya-saṁyamaḥ. Not gymnastic. That is not yoga. Yoga indriya-saṁyamaḥ. Mind control. The same thing, mind control. So mind you cannot control unless your mind is fully engaged in the service of Kṛṣṇa. Sa vai manaḥ kṛṣṇa padāravindayor vacāṁsi vaikuṇṭha-guṇānuvarṇane ([[Vanisource:SB 9.4.18|SB 9.4.18]]). These are the examples.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB619NelloreJanuary71976_21" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="597" link="Lecture on SB 6.1.9 -- Nellore, January 7, 1976" link_text="Lecture on SB 6.1.9 -- Nellore, January 7, 1976">
<div class="heading">One should make his life successful by tapasya, austerity, penance. So brahmācārya is one of the item. Tapasya means beginning with brahmācārya, celibacy.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 6.1.9 -- Nellore, January 7, 1976|Lecture on SB 6.1.9 -- Nellore, January 7, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">One should make his life successful by tapasya, austerity, penance. So brahmācārya is one of the item. Tapasya means beginning with brahmācārya, celibacy. Here we have given the meaning of tapasya: "by austerity or voluntary rejection of material enjoyment." Tapasā bramacaryeṇa. So tapasya. I do not like something to do because it is pleasing to me, but for the sake of my advancement of spiritual life I must have it. This is called tapasya. We prescribe four kinds of regulative principle: no illicit sex, no meat-eating, no gambling, no intoxication. In the Western countries these four things are very ordinary means of life. In the Western countries practically cent percent population, they are addicted to these sinful activities. So in our society, anyone who joins, he has to accept these four principles of regulative life.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB6111NewYorkJuly251971_22" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="602" link="Lecture on SB 6.1.11 -- New York, July 25, 1971" link_text="Lecture on SB 6.1.11 -- New York, July 25, 1971">
<div class="heading">The first... Tapasya means you have to accept some austerity.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 6.1.11 -- New York, July 25, 1971|Lecture on SB 6.1.11 -- New York, July 25, 1971]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So this will not solve the question, problem. He suggests that you have to elevate yourself to the platform of knowledge. How it is done? That is prescribed herein. The first thing is tapasya. The first... Tapasya means you have to accept some austerity. The same example can be given that the doctor says... Suppose a diabetic patient. So doctor prohibits him that "You cannot eat. You have to starve for some days." So I do not like to starve, nobody likes to starve. But because doctor says you have to starve, if you want to cure a disease, then I have to voluntarily accept, accept starving.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB6111NewYorkJuly251971_23" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="602" link="Lecture on SB 6.1.11 -- New York, July 25, 1971" link_text="Lecture on SB 6.1.11 -- New York, July 25, 1971">
<div class="heading">Tapasya means voluntarily accept some bodily inconvenience. That is called tapasya.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 6.1.11 -- New York, July 25, 1971|Lecture on SB 6.1.11 -- New York, July 25, 1971]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So, apart from that historical point of view, the Vedic culture prescribes tapasya. Tapasya. Tapasya means voluntarily accept some bodily inconvenience. That is called tapasya. There are many tapasvīs undergoing austerity. They meditate in winter in water up to..., up to the neck, standing within water, meditating. To stand within water in winter, severe cold, is not very comfortable business, but they voluntarily accept it. This is called tapasya. And summer season, they blaze fire all round and sit down in the midst and meditate. I am giving you some of the examples, how severely they accept tapasya. So tapasya is required. Without tapasya you cannot make advancement in spiritual life, or life of knowledge.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB6112LosAngelesJune251975_24" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="604" link="Lecture on SB 6.1.12 -- Los Angeles, June 25, 1975" link_text="Lecture on SB 6.1.12 -- Los Angeles, June 25, 1975">
<div class="heading">So he is recommending, Śukadeva Gosvāmī, that this regulative life should be conducted: first of all tapasya. Tapasya means... Tapa. Tapa means voluntary suffering.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 6.1.12 -- Los Angeles, June 25, 1975|Lecture on SB 6.1.12 -- Los Angeles, June 25, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So he is recommending, Śukadeva Gosvāmī, that this regulative life should be conducted: first of all tapasya. Tapasya means... Tapa. Tapa means voluntary suffering. That is called tapasya. The voluntary suffering means what is our enjoyment? First of all let us see. The enjoyment is if we can eat voraciously, eating, and if we can sleep thirty hours, and if we have got sex life without any discrimination, and don't care for defense. That's all. This is enjoyment life, material enjoyment means. Now, tapasya means denying all these things, denying. Eating as much as I require to maintain my body—this is tapasya, not that voraciously eating. Tapasya means practically not eating.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB611314HonoluluMay141976_25" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="608" link="Lecture on SB 6.1.13-14 -- Honolulu, May 14, 1976" link_text="Lecture on SB 6.1.13-14 -- Honolulu, May 14, 1976">
<div class="heading">But tapasya means that "I have taken vow, no illicit sex." That is knowledge. "Why? Even if I am attracted, I shall not do this." This is tapasya. And "Because I am now attracted, now we shall enjoy"—that is not tapasya. Tapasya means even one is attracted, he should not act.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 6.1.13-14 -- Honolulu, May 14, 1976|Lecture on SB 6.1.13-14 -- Honolulu, May 14, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">But tapasya means that "I have taken vow, no illicit sex." That is knowledge. "Why? Even if I am attracted, I shall not do this." This is tapasya. And "Because I am now attracted, now we shall enjoy"—that is not tapasya. Tapasya means even one is attracted, he should not act. That is tapasya. There may be some difficulty to control, but that should be practiced. It can be practiced. It is not very difficult. But one has to practice the determination: "Now I have taken vow before Deity because at the time of initiation, it is promised before the Deity, before the fire, and before the spiritual master, before the Vaiṣṇava, that 'I'll not have illicit sex.' That is promised.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB6115LondonAugust31971_26" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="610" link="Lecture on SB 6.1.15 -- London, August 3, 1971" link_text="Lecture on SB 6.1.15 -- London, August 3, 1971">
<div class="heading">The beginning is the tapasya. Tapasya means just like a thief wants to steal others' property, but if he thinks at the same time, "No, no, it will be criminal. Father has said it is criminal.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 6.1.15 -- London, August 3, 1971|Lecture on SB 6.1.15 -- London, August 3, 1971]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So in order to become free from this criminality, there are so many prescriptions in the śāstras. They're called tapasya. The beginning is the tapasya. Tapasya means just like a thief wants to steal others' property, but if he thinks at the same time, "No, no, it will be criminal. Father has said it is criminal. I shall not steal others' property," this is tapasya. Because I have got the inclination to steal, to usurp other things, but if I restrain myself by the order of father or the śāstras, the laws... Just like a thief. He knows that if he steals, if he takes others' property, he'll be arrested and he will be punished.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB6217VrndavanaSeptember201975_27" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="718" link="Lecture on SB 6.2.17 -- Vrndavana, September 20, 1975" link_text="Lecture on SB 6.2.17 -- Vrndavana, September 20, 1975">
<div class="heading">Even if you have become manīṣi, very exalted great sage, still, you should continue this tapasya. And tapasya means voluntarily accepting some miserable condition.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 6.2.17 -- Vrndavana, September 20, 1975|Lecture on SB 6.2.17 -- Vrndavana, September 20, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Even if you have become manīṣi, very exalted great sage, still, you should continue this tapasya. And tapasya means voluntarily accepting some miserable condition. That is called tapasya. Just like they used to perform austerity in winter season, to go deep into the water. When one tries to avoid water, tapasya means one goes You have seen many persons, they are standing within the water and chanting Gāyatrī mantra. This is tapasya. And in summer season they ignite fire all around and sit down.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB763MontrealJune161968_28" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="748" link="Lecture on SB 7.6.3 -- Montreal, June 16, 1968" link_text="Lecture on SB 7.6.3 -- Montreal, June 16, 1968">
<div class="heading">Tapasya means austerity, penance, vows. These are the teachings of all scriptures.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 7.6.3 -- Montreal, June 16, 1968|Lecture on SB 7.6.3 -- Montreal, June 16, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">But it should not be aggravated. Therefore in the human form of life, tapasya. Tapasya means austerity, penance, vows. These are the teachings of all scriptures. Either you take Hindu scripture or Christian scripture or Muhammadan scripture, in every scripture human form of life is meant for training. Tapo divyam ([[Vanisource:SB 5.5.1|SB 5.5.1]]). Lord Ṛṣabha, He instructed His boys. He had one hundred children, boys. So He instructed them, nāyaṁ deho deha-bhājāṁ nṛloke kaṣṭān kāmān arhate viḍ-bhujāṁ ye: ([[Vanisource:SB 5.5.1|SB 5.5.1]])</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Sri_Caitanya-caritamrta_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="3" parent="Lectures" text="Sri Caitanya-caritamrta Lectures"><h3>Sri Caitanya-caritamrta Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonCCAdilila111MayapurApril41975_0" class="quote" parent="Sri_Caitanya-caritamrta_Lectures" book="Lec" index="11" link="Lecture on CC Adi-lila 1.11 -- Mayapur, April 4, 1975" link_text="Lecture on CC Adi-lila 1.11 -- Mayapur, April 4, 1975">
<div class="heading">That science is in India. That is tapasya. Tapasya means brahmacaryena. Tapasā brahmacaryeṇa yamena niyamena vā tyāgena śrota-śaucābhyām... (SB 6.1.13). This, this is the śāstra.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on CC Adi-lila 1.11 -- Mayapur, April 4, 1975|Lecture on CC Adi-lila 1.11 -- Mayapur, April 4, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">There is no thing, nothing to imitate. And if you say they have discovered so many material comforts, that is all right. But with all your material comforts, you cannot become immortal. That is certain. That is certain. But you are desiring how to become immortal. That science is in India. That is tapasya. Tapasya means brahmacaryena. Tapasā brahmacaryeṇa yamena niyamena vā tyāgena śrota-śaucābhyām... ([[Vanisource:SB 6.1.13|SB 6.1.13]]). This, this is the śāstra.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Festival_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="6" parent="Lectures" text="Festival Lectures"><h3>Festival Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="RadhastamiSrimatiRadharanisAppearanceDayMontrealAugust301968_0" class="quote" parent="Festival_Lectures" book="Lec" index="27" link="Radhastami, Srimati Radharani's Appearance Day -- Montreal, August 30, 1968" link_text="Radhastami, Srimati Radharani's Appearance Day -- Montreal, August 30, 1968">
<div class="heading">Tapasya means voluntarily accepting something severe for realizing the supreme pleasure. That is called tapasya.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Radhastami, Srimati Radharani's Appearance Day -- Montreal, August 30, 1968|Radhastami, Srimati Radharani's Appearance Day -- Montreal, August 30, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">There are many hundreds of instances in Indian history that to realize the Brahman pleasure they gave up everything. They gave up everything. That is the way. Tapasya means voluntarily accepting something severe for realizing the supreme pleasure. That is called tapasya. So if, for tasting a little Brahman pleasure, all materialistic pleasures are to be given up, do you think that the Supreme Brahman, Lord Kṛṣṇa, is enjoying this material pleasure? Is it very reasonable? This Kṛṣṇa, He's enjoying lakṣmī-sahasra-śata-sambhrama-sevyamānam (Bs. 5.29). Hundreds and thousands of goddess of fortune are engaged in His service. Do you think these lakṣmīs are material women? How Kṛṣṇa can take pleasure in the material women?</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="RadhastamiSrimatiRadharanisAppearanceDayBhagavadgita185LondonSeptember51973_1" class="quote" parent="Festival_Lectures" book="Lec" index="29" link="Radhastami, Srimati Radharani's Appearance Day -- Bhagavad-gita 18.5 -- London, September 5, 1973" link_text="Radhastami, Srimati Radharani's Appearance Day -- Bhagavad-gita 18.5 -- London, September 5, 1973">
<div class="heading">Tapasya means accepting voluntarily all kinds of inconveniences, voluntarily.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Radhastami, Srimati Radharani's Appearance Day -- Bhagavad-gita 18.5 -- London, September 5, 1973|Radhastami, Srimati Radharani's Appearance Day -- Bhagavad-gita 18.5 -- London, September 5, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Then dāna-pratigraha. Pratigraha means accept. But he cannot keep in bank a bank balance. He must, whatever extra he has got, he must immediately give in charity. Then he can accept, a gṛhastha-brāhmaṇa, accept charity. There is a proverb in Bengali, that "A brāhmaṇa, even if he gets one lakh of rupees, one hundred thousands of rupees, still he is a beggar." Because he will not keep it. He will not keep it for... He will immediately distribute it in charity. Therefore he is called in Bengali lakh take baundigi. (?) It doesn't matter he gets one lakh of rupees contribution, but still he remains a beggar. Because immediately he will distribute. So these things are very important things. Yajña-dāna-tapaḥ. And for sannyāsī and vānaprastha-tapasya. Tapo divyam ([[Vanisource:SB 5.5.1|SB 5.5.1]]). Tapasya means accepting voluntarily all kinds of inconveniences, voluntarily.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="HisDivineGraceSrilaBhaktisiddhantaSarasvatiGosvamiPrabhupadasDisappearanceDayLectureBombayDecember221975_2" class="quote" parent="Festival_Lectures" book="Lec" index="36" link="His Divine Grace Srila Bhaktisiddhanta Sarasvati Gosvami Prabhupada's Disappearance Day, Lecture -- Bombay, December 22, 1975" link_text="His Divine Grace Srila Bhaktisiddhanta Sarasvati Gosvami Prabhupada's Disappearance Day, Lecture -- Bombay, December 22, 1975">
<div class="heading">So tapasya means instead of being degraded, be elevated. This is called tapasya.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:His Divine Grace Srila Bhaktisiddhanta Sarasvati Gosvami Prabhupada's Disappearance Day, Lecture -- Bombay, December 22, 1975|His Divine Grace Srila Bhaktisiddhanta Sarasvati Gosvami Prabhupada's Disappearance Day, Lecture -- Bombay, December 22, 1975]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Ṛṣabhadeva's instruction: "My dear sons, you practice tapasya." The human life is meant for tapasya. "I have got tendency to do this, but that will not help me, that will degraded me." So tapasya means instead of being degraded, be elevated. This is called tapasya. Tapo divyam. This human life is meant for this purpose, to practice tapasya, or to practice nivṛtti. Then our life is successful. Tapo divyam.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Initiation_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="8" parent="Lectures" text="Initiation Lectures"><h3>Initiation Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="InitiationsSanDiegoJune301972_0" class="quote" parent="Initiation_Lectures" book="Lec" index="48" link="Initiations -- San Diego, June 30, 1972" link_text="Initiations -- San Diego, June 30, 1972">
<div class="heading">Tapasya means this following, voluntarily accepting all restrictive principles. Because we are addicted to all this license or nonsense.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Initiations -- San Diego, June 30, 1972|Initiations -- San Diego, June 30, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So many young men—svāhā! So much money—svāhā! You have to do that. Therefore better learn how to make svāhā for Kṛṣṇa. Otherwise you will have to make svāhā for māyā. That's all. The sooner you give up... Yajña-dāna. This is called yajña and dāna, and tapas, tapasya. Tapasya means this following, voluntarily accepting all restrictive principles. Because we are addicted to all this license or nonsense. Not license. It is nonsense. So unless you stop all these nonsense activities, you cannot understand Kṛṣṇa consciousness.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="General_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="11" parent="Lectures" text="General Lectures"><h3>General Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureBostonApril251969_0" class="quote" parent="General_Lectures" book="Lec" index="48" link="Lecture -- Boston, April 25, 1969" link_text="Lecture -- Boston, April 25, 1969">
<div class="heading">Tapasya means austerity, restriction. Restriction. Just like our students. We advise our students—and they follow—that "You don't have illicit sex life."
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture -- Boston, April 25, 1969|Lecture -- Boston, April 25, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Then what should be the purpose of life? This opportunity, this nice intelligence, nice education, nice beautiful body, nice economic condition—that should be utilized for tapasya. Tapasya means austerity, restriction. Restriction. Just like our students. We advise our students—and they follow—that "You don't have illicit sex life." Boys and girls, they are mixing, making friendship. That is nice. That is natural. A young boy is attracted by a young girl, or young girl is attracted by young boy. That is not unnatural, because it is in the Supreme Lord. That nice love attraction is Rādhā-Kṛṣṇa. Kṛṣṇa is a boy, sixteen-years-old boy, and Rādhārāṇī is also a fifteen-years-old girl. Not even one year's... I think, fifteen days younger. So our worshipable object is that spiritual love, Rādhā and Kṛṣṇa. But the so-called love in this material world is only a perverted reflection. It is only lust. So you have, by austerity, you have to change that lust into love.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureatInternationalStudentSocietyBostonMay31969_1" class="quote" parent="General_Lectures" book="Lec" index="53" link="Lecture at International Student Society -- Boston, May 3, 1969" link_text="Lecture at International Student Society -- Boston, May 3, 1969">
<div class="heading">Therefore it is called tapasya. The Sanskrit word is tapasya. Tapasya means voluntarily accepting some unpleasurable thing, voluntarily.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture at International Student Society -- Boston, May 3, 1969|Lecture at International Student Society -- Boston, May 3, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Therefore it is called tapasya. The Sanskrit word is tapasya. Tapasya means voluntarily accepting some unpleasurable thing, voluntarily. That is called tapasya.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureLondonSeptember161969_2" class="quote" parent="General_Lectures" book="Lec" index="62" link="Lecture -- London, September 16, 1969" link_text="Lecture -- London, September 16, 1969">
<div class="heading">Tapasya means voluntarily accepting some inconveniences. Voluntarily... Just like a man is very happy in his family life...
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture -- London, September 16, 1969|Lecture -- London, September 16, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">For that purpose we require tapasya, tapo divyam ([[Vanisource:SB 5.5.1|SB 5.5.1]]). Tapasya means voluntarily accepting some inconveniences. Voluntarily... Just like a man is very happy in his family life... He has good house, good wife, good children, and good bank balance, enjoying life, but śāstra says, "No. You are fifty years old; you must get out." So he has to get out. He cannot say that "I am so happy in my family life. My wife is so nice. My children are so obedient. I have got nice money, income. Why shall I go out?" But śāstra says, "No. Vanaṁ vrajet." Vrajet means must.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureatWorldHealthOrganizationGenevaJune61974_3" class="quote" parent="General_Lectures" book="Lec" index="147" link="Lecture at World Health Organization -- Geneva, June 6, 1974" link_text="Lecture at World Health Organization -- Geneva, June 6, 1974">
<div class="heading">Tapasya means... There are so many scholars. They also undergo tapasya for finding out, discovering... Just like we have now discovered this atomic energy.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture at World Health Organization -- Geneva, June 6, 1974|Lecture at World Health Organization -- Geneva, June 6, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So this human form of life, here, according to the instruction of Ṛṣabhadeva, is not meant for working hard simply for eating, sleeping, mating and defending. This is not human form of life. This is condemned in the śāstras. Human form, the civilization means they should mold the form of the society in such a way that easily we can live and save time for spiritual culture. Therefore it is said, tapo divyaṁ putrakā ([[Vanisource:SB 5.5.1|SB 5.5.1]]). The tapasya, the spiritual culture, is necessary. Divyam. Tapasya. Tapasya means... There are so many scholars. They also undergo tapasya for finding out, discovering... Just like we have now discovered this atomic energy. That is also tapasya.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Philosophy_Discussions" class="sub_section" sec_index="13" parent="Lectures" text="Philosophy Discussions"><h3>Philosophy Discussions</h3>
</div>
<div id="PhilosophyDiscussiononSigmundFreud_1" class="quote" parent="Philosophy_Discussions" book="Lec" index="17" link="Philosophy Discussion on Sigmund Freud" link_text="Philosophy Discussion on Sigmund Freud">
<div class="heading">Tapasya means stop sex life. That is tapasya. Tapasā brahmacaryeṇa (SB 6.1.13). So our philosophy is different from his philosophy.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Philosophy Discussion on Sigmund Freud|Philosophy Discussion on Sigmund Freud]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Human being is tapasya. Tapasya means stop sex life. That is tapasya. Tapasā brahmacaryeṇa ([[Vanisource:SB 6.1.13|SB 6.1.13]]). So our philosophy is different from his philosophy. And actually we are suffering. The pig has got good facilities for sex. Does it mean that is ideal life, eating stool and having sex without discrimination? They have no discrimination, whether mother or sister or daughter. That is hog life. So if sex life is final pleasure, then hog is in the greatest pleasure.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="PhilosophyDiscussiononThomasAquinas_0" class="quote" parent="Philosophy_Discussions" book="Lec" index="32" link="Philosophy Discussion on Thomas Aquinas" link_text="Philosophy Discussion on Thomas Aquinas">
<div class="heading">According to Vedic instruction one must take to the path of tapasya. Tapasya means voluntarily self-denial, sense gratification denial. That is tapasya.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Philosophy Discussion on Thomas Aquinas|Philosophy Discussion on Thomas Aquinas]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: Yes. It is called tapasya. According to Vedic instruction one must take to the path of tapasya. Tapasya means voluntarily self-denial, sense gratification denial. That is tapasya. Tapasā brahmacaryeṇa ([[Vanisource:SB 6.1.13|SB 6.1.13]]). Tapasya, our austerity begins with brahmacarya, celibacy, no sex life. That is the beginning of tapasya. Tapasā brahmacaryeṇa śamena damena vā, controlling the senses, controlling the mind. Then tyāgena, renouncement or giving in charity, whatever you have got, for the service of the Lord, tyāgena; satya-śaucābhyām, by following the path of truthfulness and remaining cleansed; yamena niyamena vā, by practice of mystic yoga. In this way one makes advancement towards spiritual kingdom or spiritual world.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="section" sec_index="5" parent="compilation" text="Conversations and Morning Walks"><h2>Conversations and Morning Walks</h2>
</div>
<div id="1969_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="sub_section" sec_index="2" parent="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" text="1969 Conversations and Morning Walks"><h3>1969 Conversations and Morning Walks</h3>
</div>
<div id="RoomConversationMay101969ColumbusOhio_0" class="quote" parent="1969_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="12" link="Room Conversation -- May 10, 1969, Columbus, Ohio" link_text="Room Conversation -- May 10, 1969, Columbus, Ohio">
<div class="heading">So tapasya means voluntarily one has to accept some so-called suffering.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Room Conversation -- May 10, 1969, Columbus, Ohio|Room Conversation -- May 10, 1969, Columbus, Ohio]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: This tapasya... This voluntary restraint means tapasya. Tapasya, there is a Sanskrit word, tapasya. Tapasya means voluntarily restraining or accepting some suffering condition. That is not actually suffering condition. Just like a patient. A doctor says, "You cannot take it." So he has the desire to take it, but doctor says that "you cannot take it." Therefore he mentally thinks that "Doctor has restricted this. I am suffering." Actually he is curing, but he thinks that "I am suffering." And when he's cured, he sees, "Oh, doctor is good friend. He told me not to indulge in this. Now I have done it. I am now cured." So tapasya means voluntarily one has to accept some so-called suffering.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1974_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="sub_section" sec_index="7" parent="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" text="1974 Conversations and Morning Walks"><h3>1974 Conversations and Morning Walks</h3>
</div>
<div id="MorningWalkJanuary211974Hawaii_0" class="quote" parent="1974_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="15" link="Morning Walk -- January 21, 1974, Hawaii" link_text="Morning Walk -- January 21, 1974, Hawaii">
<div class="heading">Tapasya means to keep the soul fit.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Morning Walk -- January 21, 1974, Hawaii|Morning Walk -- January 21, 1974, Hawaii]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: I don't... (break) ...and their exercise is to keep the body fit. Tapasya means to keep the soul fit.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1975_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="sub_section" sec_index="8" parent="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" text="1975 Conversations and Morning Walks"><h3>1975 Conversations and Morning Walks</h3>
</div>
<div id="RoomConversationwithYogaStudentMarch141975Iran_0" class="quote" parent="1975_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="31" link="Room Conversation with Yoga Student -- March 14, 1975, Iran" link_text="Room Conversation with Yoga Student -- March 14, 1975, Iran">
<div class="heading">You have to purify your existence by tapasya. And tapasya means stops material sense gratification. (Hindi) (Someone enters room) Ah, thank you.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Room Conversation with Yoga Student -- March 14, 1975, Iran|Room Conversation with Yoga Student -- March 14, 1975, Iran]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: No. Atīndriya. You haven't got to use this material (break) ...enjoy the spiritual senses, one has to not only stop, but undergo tapasya, tapo divyam. Just like a man is diseased, he wants to eat, but due to the disease he cannot eat. So first of all, you have to cure the disease, then your eating will be a pleasure. And if you want to eat in the diseased condition, then the taste will not be proper; you cannot eat. A man suffering from jaundice, if you give him sugar candy, he will taste it bitter. The same man, when he is cured, he will taste the sugar candy as very sweet. Tapo divyaṁ yena putrakā śuddhyed sattvam ([[Vanisource:SB 5.5.1|SB 5.5.1]]). You have to purify your existence by tapasya. And tapasya means stops material sense gratification. (Hindi) (Someone enters room) Ah, thank you. So you have translated in Parsi?</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="RoomConversationwithPressRepresentativeMarch211975Calcutta_1" class="quote" parent="1975_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="34" link="Room Conversation with Press Representative -- March 21, 1975, Calcutta" link_text="Room Conversation with Press Representative -- March 21, 1975, Calcutta">
<div class="heading">Tapasya means that by his knowledge... Suppose you are scientist.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Room Conversation with Press Representative -- March 21, 1975, Calcutta|Room Conversation with Press Representative -- March 21, 1975, Calcutta]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Guest: And what is the ultimate goal of tapasya?</p>
<p>Prabhupāda: Tapasya means that by his knowledge... Suppose you are scientist. You prove by scientific way that here is the supreme scientist who has given us all these laws.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="MorningWalkMay111975Perth_2" class="quote" parent="1975_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="66" link="Morning Walk -- May 11, 1975, Perth" link_text="Morning Walk -- May 11, 1975, Perth">
<div class="heading">So tapasā, tapasā... Tapasya means first brahmacarya, how to restrain this sex desire. That is first step. Where is their tapasya?
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Morning Walk -- May 11, 1975, Perth|Morning Walk -- May 11, 1975, Perth]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: That is tapasya, that voluntarily we accept some inconvenience. That is called tapasya. Tapasā brahmacaryena ([[Vanisource:SB 6.1.13|SB 6.1.13]]). The tapasa means first brahmacarya, how to avoid sex desire. That is the first tapasa. Tapasā brahmacaryena samena vā, yamena niyamena vā, damena tyāgena satya-śaucābhyām ([[Vanisource:SB 6.1.13|SB 6.1.13]]). The steps are there. So tapasā, tapasā... Tapasya means first brahmacarya, how to restrain this sex desire. That is first step. Where is their tapasya? "It is very difficult to do this tapasya. Oh." Therefore Caitanya Mahāprabhu has given harer nāma ([[Vanisource:CC Adi 17.21|CC Adi 17.21]]). If you chant Hare Kṛṣṇa mantra regularly, you'll be cured. Otherwise, regular tapasya is almost impossible nowadays.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="MorningWalkMay131975Perth_3" class="quote" parent="1975_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="69" link="Morning Walk -- May 13, 1975, Perth" link_text="Morning Walk -- May 13, 1975, Perth">
<div class="heading">Tapasā brahmacaryena (SB 6.1.13). Tapasya means brahmacarya. The so-called swamis, they are coming for this so-called yoga practice and..., but they are themself victim of sex.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Morning Walk -- May 13, 1975, Perth|Morning Walk -- May 13, 1975, Perth]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: Say that "You shall not have illicit sex," and their inclination is illicit sex, so therefore it is revolutionary. They are materialistic persons. They want sex enjoyment to the best capacity-homosex, this sex, that sex, naked dance, all sexually inclined, pravṛtti. And we say, "Stop this," nivṛtti. They do not like it because āsura. Pravṛtti jagat. They do not know this is essential. They do not know it. This is essential. Tapasā brahmacaryena ([[Vanisource:SB 6.1.13|SB 6.1.13]]). Tapasya means brahmacarya. The so-called swamis, they are coming for this so-called yoga practice and..., but they are themself victim of sex.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="MorningWalkNovember31975Bombay_4" class="quote" parent="1975_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="232" link="Morning Walk -- November 3, 1975, Bombay" link_text="Morning Walk -- November 3, 1975, Bombay">
<div class="heading">Tapasya means... Beginning is brahmācārya. Tapasā brahmacāryena (SB 6.1.13). So where is brahmācārya?
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Morning Walk -- November 3, 1975, Bombay|Morning Walk -- November 3, 1975, Bombay]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: No, tapasā brahmacāryena tyāgena yamena vā ([[Vanisource:SB 6.1.13|SB 6.1.13]]). This is wanted. Tapasa. Beginning. Tapasya means that controlling the senses. That is tapasya. And the tapasya begins...</p>
<p>Dr. Patel: (Sanskrit) ...brahma.</p>
<p>Prabhupāda: Yes. Tapasya means... Beginning is brahmācārya. Tapasā brahmacāryena ([[Vanisource:SB 6.1.13|SB 6.1.13]]). So where is brahmācārya?</p>
<p>Dr. Patel: Brahman prati ācarati āśā brahmacārī.(?) All the senses. Not only the upasthas, but all the ten senses, including your mind and the discriminating buddhi, all are directed toward serving feet of God, and then he does not... That is real brahmacārī.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="MorningWalkDecember121975Vrndavana_5" class="quote" parent="1975_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="259" link="Morning Walk -- December 12, 1975, Vrndavana" link_text="Morning Walk -- December 12, 1975, Vrndavana">
<div class="heading">Tapo divyam (SB 5.5.1). Tapasya means to purify the desire. Tat paratvena nirmalam (CC Madhya 19.170). Therefore if you simply keep your desires to the service of Kṛṣṇa, you become purified.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Morning Walk -- December 12, 1975, Vrndavana|Morning Walk -- December 12, 1975, Vrndavana]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Hari-śauri: It's very important to accept some tapasya to purify your desires.</p>
<p>Prabhupāda: Yes. Yes, that is, that requires tapasya. Tapo divyam ([[Vanisource:SB 5.5.1|SB 5.5.1]]). Tapasya means to purify the desire. Tat paratvena nirmalam ([[Vanisource:CC Madhya 19.170|CC Madhya 19.170]]). Therefore if you simply keep your desires to the service of Kṛṣṇa, you become purified.</p>
<p>Passerby: (singing) Govinda hari, gopāla. Harer jaya jaya, prabhu dina dayala hari.</p>
<p>Prabhupāda: Hare Kṛṣṇa!</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1976_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="sub_section" sec_index="9" parent="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" text="1976 Conversations and Morning Walks"><h3>1976 Conversations and Morning Walks</h3>
</div>
<div id="AnswerstoaQuestionnairefromBhavansJournalJune281976Vrndavana_0" class="quote" parent="1976_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="169" link="Answers to a Questionnaire from Bhavan's Journal -- June 28, 1976, Vrndavana" link_text="Answers to a Questionnaire from Bhavan's Journal -- June 28, 1976, Vrndavana">
<div class="heading">To advance in spiritual life these things are essential, tapasya. Tapasya means voluntarily accepting something which may be painful.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Answers to a Questionnaire from Bhavan's Journal -- June 28, 1976, Vrndavana|Answers to a Questionnaire from Bhavan's Journal -- June 28, 1976, Vrndavana]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: To advance in spiritual life these things are essential, tapasya. Tapasya means voluntarily accepting something which may be painful. Just like we are recommending no illicit sex, no gambling, no meat-eating. So those who are accustomed to these bad habits, for them, in he beginning it may be a little difficult. But in spite of becoming difficult, one has to do it. That is called tapasya.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="AnswerstoaQuestionnairefromBhavansJournalJune281976Vrndavana_1" class="quote" parent="1976_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="169" link="Answers to a Questionnaire from Bhavan's Journal -- June 28, 1976, Vrndavana" link_text="Answers to a Questionnaire from Bhavan's Journal -- June 28, 1976, Vrndavana">
<div class="heading">You cannot say, "I have to leave by this time. I must go." No. You must. That is tapasya. So tapasya means to follow the regulative principles strictly by the higher order and that is human life.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Answers to a Questionnaire from Bhavan's Journal -- June 28, 1976, Vrndavana|Answers to a Questionnaire from Bhavan's Journal -- June 28, 1976, Vrndavana]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: They do not follow, people do not follow any tapasya at the present moment. But human life is meant for tapasya, regulative principles. Even in ordinary life.... Just like you are driving your car, you are going to some urgent business, and you saw the red light. You have to stop. You cannot say, "I have to leave by this time. I must go." No. You must. That is tapasya. So tapasya means to follow the regulative principles strictly by the higher order and that is human life. And animal life means you can do whatever you like. They keep to the right, keep to the left, it doesn't matter. But their offense is not taken because they are animals.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="AnswerstoaQuestionnairefromBhavansJournalJune281976Vrndavana_2" class="quote" parent="1976_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="169" link="Answers to a Questionnaire from Bhavan's Journal -- June 28, 1976, Vrndavana" link_text="Answers to a Questionnaire from Bhavan's Journal -- June 28, 1976, Vrndavana">
<div class="heading">That is tapasya. Tapasya means in diet, in practice, in behavior, in dealing, and so on, so on. Everything there is tapasya.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Answers to a Questionnaire from Bhavan's Journal -- June 28, 1976, Vrndavana|Answers to a Questionnaire from Bhavan's Journal -- June 28, 1976, Vrndavana]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: That is also tapasya. That is also tapasya. Just like we are prohibiting meat-eating. So in your country this is little troublesome. From the very beginning of his life he is, I mean to say, habituated to eat meat. The mother purchases powdered meat and mix with... I have seen it. And by force. So he has been trained up eating meat, and I say, "Don't eat meat." So therefore that is troublesome. And if he's serious, he must accept the order. That is tapasya. Tapasya means in diet, in practice, in behavior, in dealing, and so on, so on. Everything there is tapasya. That is all described. Mental tapasya, bodily tapasya, and what is called? Word? Just like vāco-vegam, this is tapasya. You cannot talk nonsense.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="AnswerstoaQuestionnairefromBhavansJournalJune281976Vrndavana_3" class="quote" parent="1976_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="169" link="Answers to a Questionnaire from Bhavan's Journal -- June 28, 1976, Vrndavana" link_text="Answers to a Questionnaire from Bhavan's Journal -- June 28, 1976, Vrndavana">
<div class="heading">So everything, advancement of spiritual life, culture, tapasya means cleansing the heart. So this process, chanting the mahā-mantra, the first installment of benefit is cleansing the heart.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Answers to a Questionnaire from Bhavan's Journal -- June 28, 1976, Vrndavana|Answers to a Questionnaire from Bhavan's Journal -- June 28, 1976, Vrndavana]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: That is recommendation given by Caitanya Mahāprabhu, ceto-darpaṇa-mārjanam ([[Vanisource:CC Antya 20.12|CC Antya 20.12]]). The beginning is cleansing the heart, because we are impure on account of dirty things within our heart accumulated life after life in the animalistic way of life. So everything, advancement of spiritual life, culture, tapasya means cleansing the heart. So this process, chanting the mahā-mantra, the first installment of benefit is cleansing the heart.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="ConversationwithProfSaligramandDrSuklaJuly51976WashingtonDC_4" class="quote" parent="1976_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="186" link="Conversation with Prof. Saligram and Dr. Sukla -- July 5, 1976, Washington, D.C." link_text="Conversation with Prof. Saligram and Dr. Sukla -- July 5, 1976, Washington, D.C.">
<div class="heading">Tapasya means things we are going to accept may be not very pleasing, but still we have to do it.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Conversation with Prof. Saligram and Dr. Sukla -- July 5, 1976, Washington, D.C.|Conversation with Prof. Saligram and Dr. Sukla -- July 5, 1976, Washington, D.C.]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: There is no pain. It is painful in the beginning, but... Everything. If you take some medicine, it is bitter, it is painful, but if it helps to cure disease, we must take it. "Because the medicine is bitter, I'll not take it." That is not sense. If you want to be cured from the disease, even the medicine is bitter, you must take. That is tapasya. Tapasya means things we are going to accept may be not very pleasing, but still we have to do it.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="RoomConversationSeptember61976Vrndavana_5" class="quote" parent="1976_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="299" link="Room Conversation -- September 6, 1976, Vrndavana" link_text="Room Conversation -- September 6, 1976, Vrndavana">
<div class="heading">The tapasya means how to control this itching sensation. This is tapasya. Tapasā brahmacaryeṇa (SB 6.1.13). Tapasya means, tapasya begins, now brahmacārī.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Room Conversation -- September 6, 1976, Vrndavana|Room Conversation -- September 6, 1976, Vrndavana]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: When there is some itching, we cannot stop it. We cannot stop it. Even if I do not want it, still... So it is like itching. Nothing more. Kaṇḍūyanena karayor iva duḥkha-duḥkham. The tapasya means how to control this itching sensation. This is tapasya. Tapasā brahmacaryeṇa ([[Vanisource:SB 6.1.13|SB 6.1.13]]). Tapasya means, tapasya begins, now brahmacārī. That is tapasya. Tapasya means brahmacārī. Tapasā brahmacaryeṇa śamena damena, tyāgena, satya-śaucābhyāṁ yamena niyamena ([[Vanisource:SB 6.1.13|SB 6.1.13]]). This is tapasya. It is very strong power, this...</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="MorningWalkDecember271976Bombay_6" class="quote" parent="1976_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="356" link="Morning Walk -- December 27, 1976, Bombay" link_text="Morning Walk -- December 27, 1976, Bombay">
<div class="heading">Tapasya means restricted life, not unrestricted life. So if we do not follow the restricted life, that means I shall continue my disease or increase my disease.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Morning Walk -- December 27, 1976, Bombay|Morning Walk -- December 27, 1976, Bombay]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: Therefore it is useless. The real aim of life is how to get out of the clutches of māyā which is forcing me to accept the cycle of birth and death. That is my disease. Therefore tapasya. Tapasya means restricted life, not unrestricted life. So if we do not follow the restricted life, that means I shall continue my disease or increase my disease. The modern civilization, we are teaching how to enjoy this material world to the fullest extent, bhogaiśvarya, sense gratification and for sense gratification, material opulence.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="MorningWalkDecember271976Bombay_7" class="quote" parent="1976_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="356" link="Morning Walk -- December 27, 1976, Bombay" link_text="Morning Walk -- December 27, 1976, Bombay">
<div class="heading">Tapasya means to rescue the soul from this material condition, yena sattvaṁ śuddhyet, to purify your existence.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Morning Walk -- December 27, 1976, Bombay|Morning Walk -- December 27, 1976, Bombay]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Guest (Indian man): That tapasya means?</p>
<p>Prabhupāda: Tapasya means restricted.</p>
<p>Guest (1): Protect your mind... Wed it to the soul and taken away from all extraneous things which are made up of māyā, is that not the meaning?</p>
<p>Prabhupāda: Tapasya means to rescue the soul from this material condition, yena sattvaṁ śuddhyet, to purify your existence. What is the impurification? Impurification is that the soul is subjected to repetition of birth and... That is impurification.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="1977_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="sub_section" sec_index="10" parent="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" text="1977 Conversations and Morning Walks"><h3>1977 Conversations and Morning Walks</h3>
</div>
<div id="RoomConversationwithAdikesavaSwamiFebruary191977Mayapura_0" class="quote" parent="1977_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="96" link="Room Conversation with Adi-kesava Swami -- February 19, 1977, Mayapura" link_text="Room Conversation with Adi-kesava Swami -- February 19, 1977, Mayapura">
<div class="heading">Tapasya means voluntarily accepting some trouble. 'So I am feeling itching. I don't itch it. It is little troublesome, little.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Room Conversation with Adi-kesava Swami -- February 19, 1977, Mayapura|Room Conversation with Adi-kesava Swami -- February 19, 1977, Mayapura]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: One who knows, one who has got brain, 'All right, let me suffer little itching. I'll not itch it.' It will...This is intelligence. Tapasā brahmacaryeṇa ([[Vanisource:SB 6.1.13|SB 6.1.13]]). The suffering from the itching sensation by brahmacārī, that is recommended in our śāstra. Tapasya means voluntarily accepting some trouble. 'So I am feeling itching. I don't itch it. It is little troublesome, little. Never mind, I shall tolerate it.'</p>
</div>
</div>
</div>

Dharmyam means

2010-04-02T07:48:22Z

Partha-sarathi: Created page with '<div id="compilation"> <div id="facts"> {{terms|"dharmyam means"}} {{notes|}} {{compiler|Partha-sarathi}} {{complete|ALL}} {{first|02Apr10}} {{last|02Apr10}} {{totals_by_section|…'

<div id="compilation">
<div id="facts">
{{terms|"dharmyam means"}}
{{notes|}}
{{compiler|Partha-sarathi}}
{{complete|ALL}}
{{first|02Apr10}}
{{last|02Apr10}}
{{totals_by_section|BG=1|SB=0|CC=0|OB=0|Lec=1|Con=0|Let=0}}
{{total|2}}
{{toc right}}
[[Category:Meaning of Sanskrit Words]]
[[Category:Dharma]]
</div>
<div id="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is" class="section" sec_index="0" parent="compilation" text="Bhagavad-gita As It Is"><h2>Bhagavad-gita As It Is</h2>
</div>
<div id="BG_Chapters_7_-_12" class="sub_section" sec_index="2" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is" text="BG Chapters 7 - 12"><h3>BG Chapters 7 - 12</h3>
</div>
<div id="BG92_0" class="quote" parent="BG_Chapters_7_-_12" book="BG" index="60" link="BG 9.2" link_text="BG 9.2">
<div class="heading">The word dharmyam means "the path of religion." Nārada was actually a son of a maidservant. He had no opportunity to go to school.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:BG 9.2|BG 9.2, Purport]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="purport text"><p style="display: inline;">The word dharmyam means "the path of religion." Nārada was actually a son of a maidservant. He had no opportunity to go to school. He was simply assisting his mother, and fortunately his mother rendered some service to the devotees. The child Nārada also got the opportunity and simply by association achieved the highest goal of all religion. The highest goal of all religion is devotional service, as stated in Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam (sa vai puṁsāṁ paro dharmo yato bhaktir adhokṣaje). Religious people generally do not know that the highest perfection of religion is the attainment of devotional service. As we have already discussed in regard to the last verse of Chapter Eight (vedeṣu yajñeṣu tapaḥsu caiva), generally Vedic knowledge is required for self-realization. But here, although Nārada never went to the school of the spiritual master and was not educated in the Vedic principles, he acquired the highest results of Vedic study.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Lectures" class="section" sec_index="4" parent="compilation" text="Lectures"><h2>Lectures</h2>
</div>
<div id="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="0" parent="Lectures" text="Bhagavad-gita As It Is Lectures"><h3>Bhagavad-gita As It Is Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG82892NewYorkNovember211966_0" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="296" link="Lecture on BG 8.28-9.2 -- New York, November 21, 1966" link_text="Lecture on BG 8.28-9.2 -- New York, November 21, 1966">
<div class="heading">Dharmyam means the religious principles.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 8.28-9.2 -- New York, November 21, 1966|Lecture on BG 8.28-9.2 -- New York, November 21, 1966]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So uttamam. Pratyakṣa avagamam. Pratyakṣa avagamam means if you follow this path, then you will personally understand how far you are advancing. How far you have become on the path of perfection, you yourself will understand. Nobody will require to certify that "You have advanced so much." You'll understand yourself. Pratyakṣa avagamaṁ dharmyam. Dharmyam means the religious principles. Pratyakṣa avagamaṁ dharmyaṁ susukham. Susukham means that it is very happy to execute. Very happy to execute. Susukhaṁ kartum avyayam ([[Vanisource:BG 9.2|BG 9.2]]). And if you perform it, it will have never any lapse. It is permanent, permanent. We do many things which is, has no permanent effect, which has no permanent... Suppose we work in this material world for some perfection of education, or perfection of business. We get, amass a vast amount of money. But that is not avyayam. That is not eternal. As soon as your body is finished, everything is finished. Your education finished, your M.A. degree finished, your bank balance finished, and everything, your family finished—everything finished. Now again begin life.</p>
</div>
</div>
</div>

Rasa means

2010-04-01T15:18:13Z

Partha-sarathi: Created page with '<div id="compilation"> <div id="facts"> {{terms|"rasa means"}} {{notes|}} {{compiler|Partha-sarathi}} {{complete|ALL}} {{first|01Apr10}} {{last|01Apr10}} {{totals_by_section|BG=0…'

<div id="compilation">
<div id="facts">
{{terms|"rasa means"}}
{{notes|}}
{{compiler|Partha-sarathi}}
{{complete|ALL}}
{{first|01Apr10}}
{{last|01Apr10}}
{{totals_by_section|BG=0|SB=1|CC=1|OB=1|Lec=19|Con=1|Let=1}}
{{total|24}}
{{toc right}}
[[Category:Meaning of Sanskrit Words]]
</div>
<div id="Srimad-Bhagavatam" class="section" sec_index="1" parent="compilation" text="Srimad-Bhagavatam"><h2>Srimad-Bhagavatam</h2>
</div>
<div id="SB_Canto_4" class="sub_section" sec_index="4" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam" text="SB Canto 4"><h3>SB Canto 4</h3>
</div>
<div id="SB4198_0" class="quote" parent="SB_Canto_4" book="SB" index="760" link="SB 4.19.8" link_text="SB 4.19.8">
<div class="heading">The word rasa means "taste." Actually all rasas are tastes within the earth, and as soon as seeds are sown in the ground, various trees sprout up to satisfy our different tastes.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:SB 4.19.8|SB 4.19.8, Purport]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="purport text"><p style="display: inline;">If rivers are not polluted and are allowed to flow in their own way, or sometimes allowed to flood the land, the land will become very fertile and able to produce all kinds of vegetables, trees and plants. The word rasa means "taste." Actually all rasas are tastes within the earth, and as soon as seeds are sown in the ground, various trees sprout up to satisfy our different tastes. For instance, sugarcane provides its juices to satisfy our taste for sweetness, and oranges provide their juices to satisfy our taste for a mixture of the sour and the sweet.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Sri_Caitanya-caritamrta" class="section" sec_index="2" parent="compilation" text="Sri Caitanya-caritamrta"><h2>Sri Caitanya-caritamrta</h2>
</div>
<div id="CC_Madhya-lila" class="sub_section" sec_index="2" parent="Sri_Caitanya-caritamrta" text="CC Madhya-lila"><h3>CC Madhya-lila</h3>
</div>
<div id="CCMadhya14157_0" class="quote" parent="CC_Madhya-lila" book="CC" index="3096" link="CC Madhya 14.157" link_text="CC Madhya 14.157">
<div class="heading">The word rasa means "mellow," and ābhāsa means "a shadow." If one tastes one kind of mellow and something extra is imposed, that is uparasa.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:CC Madhya 14.157|CC Madhya 14.157, Purport]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="purport text"><p style="display: inline;">Rasābhāsa occurs when one's relationship with Kṛṣṇa is adulterated. There are different types of rasābhāsa—first class, second class and third class. The word rasa means "mellow," and ābhāsa means "a shadow." If one tastes one kind of mellow and something extra is imposed, that is uparasa. If something is derived from the original mellow, it is called anurasa. If something is appreciated that is far removed from the original mellow, it is called aparasa.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Other_Books_by_Srila_Prabhupada" class="section" sec_index="3" parent="compilation" text="Other Books by Srila Prabhupada"><h2>Other Books by Srila Prabhupada</h2>
</div>
<div id="Krsna_The_Supreme_Personality_of_Godhead" class="sub_section" sec_index="4" parent="Other_Books_by_Srila_Prabhupada" text="Krsna, The Supreme Personality of Godhead"><h3>Krsna, The Supreme Personality of Godhead</h3>
</div>
<div id="KB32_0" class="quote" parent="Krsna,_The_Supreme_Personality_of_Godhead" book="OB" index="36" link="KB 32" link_text="Krsna Book 32">
<div class="heading">Potency—is due to insufficient knowledge. Actually, outside the exhibition of His different potencies, the Absolute Truth is not complete. Ānanda-cin-maya-rasa means that His body is a transcendental form of eternal bliss and knowledge.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:KB 32|Krsna Book 32]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">The Māyāvāda conception of perfection—an Absolute Truth without potency—is due to insufficient knowledge. Actually, outside the exhibition of His different potencies, the Absolute Truth is not complete. Ānanda-cin-maya-rasa means that His body is a transcendental form of eternal bliss and knowledge. Kṛṣṇa is always surrounded by different potencies, and therefore He is perfect and beautiful. We understand from the Brahma-saṁhitā and Skanda Purāṇa that Kṛṣṇa is always surrounded by many thousands of goddesses of fortune. The gopīs are all goddesses of fortune, and Kṛṣṇa took them hand in hand on the bank of the Yamunā.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Lectures" class="section" sec_index="4" parent="compilation" text="Lectures"><h2>Lectures</h2>
</div>
<div id="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="0" parent="Lectures" text="Bhagavad-gita As It Is Lectures"><h3>Bhagavad-gita As It Is Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG61LosAngelesFebruary131969_0" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="208" link="Lecture on BG 6.1 -- Los Angeles, February 13, 1969" link_text="Lecture on BG 6.1 -- Los Angeles, February 13, 1969">
<div class="heading">Ānanda-cinmaya-rasa. Rasa means the taste, the mellow. Just like we try to taste a sweetmeat, a sweet candy, anything.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 6.1 -- Los Angeles, February 13, 1969|Lecture on BG 6.1 -- Los Angeles, February 13, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Ānanda-cinmaya-rasa. Rasa means the taste, the mellow. Just like we try to taste a sweetmeat, a sweet candy, anything. Why? Because there is a very nice taste. So everyone is trying to have some taste from everything. We want to enjoy sex life. There is some taste. So that is called ādi—taste. So there are so many tastes. There in the Brahma-saṁhitā, ānanda-cinmaya-rasa. That taste, material taste, you may taste it, but it will be finished immediately.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonBG71UpsalaUniversityStockholmSeptember81973_1" class="quote" parent="Bhagavad-gita_As_It_Is_Lectures" book="Lec" index="239" link="Lecture on BG 7.1 -- Upsala University Stockholm, September 8, 1973" link_text="Lecture on BG 7.1 -- Upsala University Stockholm, September 8, 1973">
<div class="heading">Rasa means the taste, or the attractive taste. Just like when you eat sweetmeat or any, any eatables, there is some nice taste for which you eat.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on BG 7.1 -- Upsala University Stockholm, September 8, 1973|Lecture on BG 7.1 -- Upsala University Stockholm, September 8, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">This will be very elaborately described. We have no time to read now, but one or two verses I can speak before you. Just like Kṛṣṇa says: raso 'ham apsu kaunteya prabhāsmi śaśi-sūryayoḥ ([[Vanisource:BG 7.8|BG 7.8]]). Raso 'ham. Rasa means the taste, or the attractive taste. Just like when you eat sweetmeat or any, any eatables, there is some nice taste for which you eat. Or you drink water. You are thirsty; you want water. But there is a good taste in the water. Otherwise, how you quench your thirst?</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="1" parent="Lectures" text="Srimad-Bhagavatam Lectures"><h3>Srimad-Bhagavatam Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB172829VrndavanaSeptember251976_0" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="183" link="Lecture on SB 1.7.28-29 -- Vrndavana, September 25, 1976" link_text="Lecture on SB 1.7.28-29 -- Vrndavana, September 25, 1976">
<div class="heading">So janmādy asya yataḥ (SB 1.1.1). Viśvanātha Cakravartī Ṭhākura has described this ādi from ādi-rasa. Ādi-rasa means the conjugal love. That is called ādi-rasa. So janmādy asya yataḥ (SB 1.1.1).
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 1.7.28-29 -- Vrndavana, September 25, 1976|Lecture on SB 1.7.28-29 -- Vrndavana, September 25, 1976]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">There are so many rasas-twelve rasas. Anaya(?) vyatireka, ādi-rasa. So janmādy asya yataḥ ([[Vanisource:SB 1.1.1|SB 1.1.1]]). Viśvanātha Cakravartī Ṭhākura has described this ādi from ādi-rasa. Ādi-rasa means the conjugal love. That is called ādi-rasa. So janmādy asya yataḥ ([[Vanisource:SB 1.1.1|SB 1.1.1]]). Wherefrom the ādi-rasa comes? The attraction between man and woman, that is a fact. The attraction is there in everywhere, either human society or animal society or bird society, bee society, the attraction is there. Puṁsaḥ striyā mithunī-bhāvam etam ([[Vanisource:SB 5.5.8|SB 5.5.8]]). This whole world is existing on mithunī-bhāva, sex.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB2434LosAngelesJune271972_1" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="402" link="Lecture on SB 2.4.3-4 -- Los Angeles, June 27, 1972" link_text="Lecture on SB 2.4.3-4 -- Los Angeles, June 27, 1972">
<div class="heading">The rasa... Rasa means the humor or mellow. Exchange between the mother and child is there and here also.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 2.4.3-4 -- Los Angeles, June 27, 1972|Lecture on SB 2.4.3-4 -- Los Angeles, June 27, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Just like Kṛṣṇa's mother. Motherly affection of mother Yaśodā upon Kṛṣṇa. And Kṛṣṇa is playing as child, pleasing mother Yaśodā. So that thing is also in this material world. Here also, the mother likes to raise his beloved child, the child also plays to give pleasure to the mother. The rasa... Rasa means the humor or mellow. Exchange between the mother and child is there and here also. Similarly friendship, similarly conjugal love. Everything, all the five rasas, mellows, are there. The impersonalists cannot understand. They're afraid of... As soon as they hear "love," "Oh, love?</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB32525BombayNovember251974_2" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="447" link="Lecture on SB 3.25.25 -- Bombay, November 25, 1974" link_text="Lecture on SB 3.25.25 -- Bombay, November 25, 1974">
<div class="heading">Rasa means when you are thirsty, when you drink water, you taste something very nice to quench your thirst. So Kṛṣṇa has instructed that "To begin with, you can think of Me, aham, while you drink water." It is not difficult.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 3.25.25 -- Bombay, November 25, 1974|Lecture on SB 3.25.25 -- Bombay, November 25, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Then... Just like in the Bhagavad-gītā Kṛṣṇa says, raso 'ham apsu kaunteya ([[Vanisource:BG 7.8|BG 7.8]]). Rasa. Rasa means when you are thirsty, when you drink water, you taste something very nice to quench your thirst. So Kṛṣṇa has instructed that "To begin with, you can think of Me, aham, while you drink water." It is not difficult. Everyone can practice it, so easy thing. Everyone can practice it. Everyone drinks water, and the rasa, the taste, the nice taste, when you are thirsty, how it is palatable by drinking water.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB3261114BombayDecember231974_3" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="475" link="Lecture on SB 3.26.11-14 -- Bombay, December 23, 1974" link_text="Lecture on SB 3.26.11-14 -- Bombay, December 23, 1974">
<div class="heading">Then next pañcabhiḥ , tan-mātra, means rūpa, rasa, gandha, śabda, sparśa. Form, rūpa. Rūpa means form; rasa means taste; śabda means sound; rūpa, rasa, śabda-sparśa means touch; and rūpa, rasa, śabda, sparśa, and...? Gandha.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 3.26.11-14 -- Bombay, December 23, 1974|Lecture on SB 3.26.11-14 -- Bombay, December 23, 1974]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Because material existence means the three guṇas. When there is interaction of the three guṇas, then this one mahat-tattva becomes divided into twenty-four catur-viṁśati tattva. This is called Sāṅkhya philosophy, to analyze and to study the twenty-four elements which is controlling the activities of the whole material world. That is called catur-viṁśati tattva. What are they? Pañcabhiḥ . First the five elements, namely earth, water, fire, air, sky. This is pañcabhiḥ . Then next pañcabhiḥ , tan-mātra, means rūpa, rasa, gandha, śabda, sparśa. Form, rūpa. Rūpa means form; rasa means taste; śabda means sound; rūpa, rasa, śabda-sparśa means touch; and rūpa, rasa, śabda, sparśa, and...? Gandha.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB32629BombayJanuary61975_4" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="489" link="Lecture on SB 3.26.29 -- Bombay, January 6, 1975" link_text="Lecture on SB 3.26.29 -- Bombay, January 6, 1975">
<div class="heading">Rasa, rasa means mellow, the juice. There is juice, but that is not material juice. Material juice is different. That is temporary, asat.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 3.26.29 -- Bombay, January 6, 1975|Lecture on SB 3.26.29 -- Bombay, January 6, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So this is all spiritual. Ānanda-cinmaya-rasa. Rasa, rasa means mellow, the juice. There is juice, but that is not material juice. Material juice is different. That is temporary, asat. That is not sat. So if we want to taste this material juice, then we must be put into always in anxiety. Material life is anxiety. Therefore in this material world we..., I may love somebody, but it is full with anxieties. "My lover may not cheat. She may not go away" or "He may not go away."</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB32643BombayJanuary181975_5" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="499" link="Lecture on SB 3.26.43 -- Bombay, January 18, 1975" link_text="Lecture on SB 3.26.43 -- Bombay, January 18, 1975">
<div class="heading">Then, when you develop your śānta-rasa, then there is dāsya-rasa. Dāsya-rasa means that you want to serve Him. That is further development.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 3.26.43 -- Bombay, January 18, 1975|Lecture on SB 3.26.43 -- Bombay, January 18, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So if you simply come here, take the impression of Kṛṣṇa and think of Kṛṣṇa while drinking water, you become a devotee. Is it very difficult job? Very easy. Anyone can do. Anyone can do. Patraṁ puṣpaṁ phalaṁ toyaṁ yo me bhaktyā prayacchati ([[Vanisource:BG 9.26|BG 9.26]]). Then, if you develop... This is śānta rasa. Then, when you develop your śānta-rasa, then there is dāsya-rasa. Dāsya-rasa means that you want to serve Him. That is further development. "Here is God. No, why not...?" Therefore, according to the Vedic principle, whoever comes to the temple, he brings something to offer to Kṛṣṇa. Not that He requires huge amount of money. No. You must offer something.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB32645BombayJanuary201975_6" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="501" link="Lecture on SB 3.26.45 -- Bombay, January 20, 1975" link_text="Lecture on SB 3.26.45 -- Bombay, January 20, 1975">
<div class="heading">Rasa means mellow. So we have presented a little book, Kṛṣṇa is the Reservoir of All Pleasure. Rasa means pleasure, taste, pleasing taste, rasa, or humor.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 3.26.45 -- Bombay, January 20, 1975|Lecture on SB 3.26.45 -- Bombay, January 20, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">That is in the material world. Kṛṣṇa is in twelve different varieties of taste: śānta, dāsya, sākhya, vātsalya, mādhurya, bhayānaka, bībhatsa, hāsya, the so many, twelve. In the Bhakti-rasāmṛta-sindhu it is..., Kṛṣṇa is worshiped there that akhila-rasāmṛta, akhila. There are many kinds of taste, and that taste are all combined together in Kṛṣṇa, akhila-rasāmṛta. In the Vedas it is said, raso vai saḥ. Rasa means mellow. So we have presented a little book, Kṛṣṇa is the Reservoir of All Pleasure. Rasa means pleasure, taste, pleasing taste, rasa, or humor. Everyone has got different taste. So all the taste are there in Kṛṣṇa. Raso vai saḥ, labdhvānandī. Anyone who has tasted Kṛṣṇa he gets real taste of pleasure, either in this rasa or that rasa.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB6150DetroitAugust31975_7" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="686" link="Lecture on SB 6.1.50 -- Detroit, August 3, 1975" link_text="Lecture on SB 6.1.50 -- Detroit, August 3, 1975">
<div class="heading">We have got eyes; therefore eyes are engaged for seeing something beautiful, rūpa. Rasa. Rasa means taste. That is the business of the tongue.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 6.1.50 -- Detroit, August 3, 1975|Lecture on SB 6.1.50 -- Detroit, August 3, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So we are fallen into great ocean of nescience, covered. First of all the five senses, knowledge-acquiring senses, jñānendriya and karmendriya, working senses, ten, and sense object... We have got eyes; therefore eyes are engaged for seeing something beautiful, rūpa. Rasa. Rasa means taste. That is the business of the tongue. And to see beautiful thing, that is the business of the eyes. Rūpa, rasa, śabda.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="LectureonSB798HawaiiMarch211969_8" class="quote" parent="Srimad-Bhagavatam_Lectures" book="Lec" index="798" link="Lecture on SB 7.9.8 -- Hawaii, March 21, 1969" link_text="Lecture on SB 7.9.8 -- Hawaii, March 21, 1969">
<div class="heading">Rasa means taste, mellow. So we are also seeking some rasa in everything—a juice.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on SB 7.9.8 -- Hawaii, March 21, 1969|Lecture on SB 7.9.8 -- Hawaii, March 21, 1969]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">The Brahma-saṁhitā says that His eternal form is ānanda-cinmaya-rasa. Rasa means taste, mellow. So we are also seeking some rasa in everything—a juice. When you taste any fruit or anywhere, you are seeking after some juice, everyone. So there is another juice which is ānanda-cinmaya, which is spiritual and simply blissful. That is Kṛṣṇa's form.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Nectar_of_Devotion_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="2" parent="Lectures" text="Nectar of Devotion Lectures"><h3>Nectar of Devotion Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="TheNectarofDevotionVrndavanaOctober191972_0" class="quote" parent="Nectar_of_Devotion_Lectures" book="Lec" index="6" link="The Nectar of Devotion -- Vrndavana, October 19, 1972" link_text="The Nectar of Devotion -- Vrndavana, October 19, 1972">
<div class="heading">Rasa means mellow. Everything we have, there is a rasa. Without rasa, we do not deal in anything.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:The Nectar of Devotion -- Vrndavana, October 19, 1972|The Nectar of Devotion -- Vrndavana, October 19, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Yes. Rasa. Rasa means mellow. Everything we have, there is a rasa. Without rasa, we do not deal in anything. So this material rasa or mellow, which we relish in our daily dealings... Suppose our dealings with wife, children, friends or others, enemy also. There is a rasa. When we kill our enemy, there is also some pleasure rasa. When we see something ghastly... In European and Western countries, they want to see some ghastly things in the television.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="TheNectarofDevotionBombayJanuary11973_1" class="quote" parent="Nectar_of_Devotion_Lectures" book="Lec" index="12" link="The Nectar of Devotion -- Bombay, January 1, 1973" link_text="The Nectar of Devotion -- Bombay, January 1, 1973">
<div class="heading">The parakīya-rasa means just like a man or woman has got his husband or wife, but he has got love with others. That is called parakīya-rasa.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:The Nectar of Devotion -- Bombay, January 1, 1973|The Nectar of Devotion -- Bombay, January 1, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So everyone can have Kṛṣṇa as his sons. Everyone can have Kṛṣṇa as his friend. Everyone can have Kṛṣṇa as his master. Dak, dāsya-rasa, sākhya-rasa, mādhurya-rasa. Even everyone can have Kṛṣṇa as their paramour. These things are very difficult to understand, but these rasas... They are called rasas. Parakīya-rasa. The parakīya-rasa means just like a man or woman has got his husband or wife, but he has got love with others. That is called parakīya-rasa. That is most abominable in this material world, but that is most first-class thing in the spiritual world.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="TheNectarofDevotionVrndavanaOctober261972_2" class="quote" parent="Nectar_of_Devotion_Lectures" book="Lec" index="18" link="The Nectar of Devotion -- Vrndavana, October 26, 1972" link_text="The Nectar of Devotion -- Vrndavana, October 26, 1972">
<div class="heading">So there are different rasas, five primary rasas. Rasa means the mellow or the taste which we enjoy in every activity.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:The Nectar of Devotion -- Vrndavana, October 26, 1972|The Nectar of Devotion -- Vrndavana, October 26, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So Kṛṣṇa is described as akhila-rasāmṛta-sindhu. So there are different rasas, five primary rasas. Rasa means the mellow or the taste which we enjoy in every activity. That is called rasa. Everything is done with some taste. Whatever you do, you must enjoy some taste out of it. So there are twelve rasas, out of which five rasas are primary and seven rasas are secondary. They are described here.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="TheNectarofDevotionVrndavanaOctober271972_3" class="quote" parent="Nectar_of_Devotion_Lectures" book="Lec" index="20" link="The Nectar of Devotion -- Vrndavana, October 27, 1972" link_text="The Nectar of Devotion -- Vrndavana, October 27, 1972">
<div class="heading">Rasa means ... Another meaning of rasa means... What is that? What is called? I forget.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:The Nectar of Devotion -- Vrndavana, October 27, 1972|The Nectar of Devotion -- Vrndavana, October 27, 1972]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">The Hari-bhakti-vilāsa, the Gauḍīya Vaiṣṇava sampradāya, they follow the principles of Hari-bhakti-vilāsa. In that Hari-bhakti-vilāsa Sanātana Gosvāmī recommends, tathā dīkṣā-vidhānena dvijatvaṁ jāyate nṛṇām. Dīkṣā-vidhāna, by the process of dīkṣā, a, any human being can be elevated to the position of a bona fide brāhmaṇa. Vidhānena. Vidhāna. The very word is used, vidhāna. Vidhāna means bona fide process. Tathā dīkṣā-vidhānena. There is another good suggestion: yathā kañcanatāṁ yāti kaṁsa-rasa-vidhānena. Rasa. Rasa means ... Another meaning of rasa means... What is that? What is called? I forget.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="TheNectarofDevotionBombayJanuary101973_4" class="quote" parent="Nectar_of_Devotion_Lectures" book="Lec" index="24" link="The Nectar of Devotion -- Bombay, January 10, 1973" link_text="The Nectar of Devotion -- Bombay, January 10, 1973">
<div class="heading">We have short cut the translation, Nectar of Devotion, but the, Rūpa Gosvāmī's purpose is to present the ocean of bhakti-rasa. Rasa means mellow.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:The Nectar of Devotion -- Bombay, January 10, 1973|The Nectar of Devotion -- Bombay, January 10, 1973]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">That Bhakti-rasāmṛta-sindhu, the Sanskrit word... We have short cut the translation, Nectar of Devotion, but the, Rūpa Gosvāmī's purpose is to present the ocean of bhakti-rasa. Rasa means mellow. The juice. It is just like ocean. This ocean has limitation, but that is unlimited.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Sri_Caitanya-caritamrta_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="3" parent="Lectures" text="Sri Caitanya-caritamrta Lectures"><h3>Sri Caitanya-caritamrta Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="LectureonCCAdilila15MayapurMarch291975_0" class="quote" parent="Sri_Caitanya-caritamrta_Lectures" book="Lec" index="5" link="Lecture on CC Adi-lila 1.5 -- Mayapur, March 29, 1975" link_text="Lecture on CC Adi-lila 1.5 -- Mayapur, March 29, 1975">
<div class="heading">Of all of them, the ādi-rasa... Ādi-rasa means the loving affair between man and woman.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Lecture on CC Adi-lila 1.5 -- Mayapur, March 29, 1975|Lecture on CC Adi-lila 1.5 -- Mayapur, March 29, 1975]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So when Kṛṣṇa wants to enjoy—the enjoy means these loving affairs between man and woman—that is a fact. That is not an artificial thing. Śrīla Viśvanātha Cakravartī Ṭhākura has explained Vedānta-sūtra, janmādy asya yataḥ ([[Vanisource:SB 1.1.1|SB 1.1.1]]). He has said, ādi rasasya janma yatra. Ādi-rasa. There are twelve kinds of rasas, mellow. Of all of them, the ādi-rasa... Ādi-rasa means the loving affair between man and woman. This is called ādi-rasa. So, Viśvanātha Cakravartī Ṭhākura explains, janmādy asya means the ādi-rasa, loving affairs between man and woman, that is from the Supreme Person.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Initiation_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="8" parent="Lectures" text="Initiation Lectures"><h3>Initiation Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="InitiationLectureExcerptLondonSeptember71971_0" class="quote" parent="Initiation_Lectures" book="Lec" index="41" link="Initiation Lecture Excerpt -- London, September 7, 1971" link_text="Initiation Lecture Excerpt -- London, September 7, 1971">
<div class="heading">Rasa, rasa means mercury. Tathā dīkṣā-vidhānena. Similarly, any lowborn, it doesn't matter what he is, if proper initiation is conducted, then tathā dīkṣā-vidhānena dvijatvaṁ jāyate nṛṇām, he becomes a brāhmaṇa.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Initiation Lecture Excerpt -- London, September 7, 1971|Initiation Lecture Excerpt -- London, September 7, 1971]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So it is clear that they were quite aware of all these chemical method. So the example is given, as the base metal or bell metal can be transferred into gold by mixture of mercury under certain process, yathā kāñcanatāṁ yāti kāṁsyaṁ rasa-vidhānataḥ... Rasa, rasa means mercury. Tathā dīkṣā-vidhānena. Similarly, any lowborn, it doesn't matter what he is, if proper initiation is conducted, then tathā dīkṣā-vidhānena dvijatvaṁ jāyate nṛṇām, he becomes a brāhmaṇa.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="General_Lectures" class="sub_section" sec_index="11" parent="Lectures" text="General Lectures"><h3>General Lectures</h3>
</div>
<div id="ClassinLosAngelesLosAngelesNovember151968_0" class="quote" parent="General_Lectures" book="Lec" index="30" link="Class in Los Angeles -- Los Angeles, November 15, 1968" link_text="Class in Los Angeles -- Los Angeles, November 15, 1968">
<div class="heading">So all these rasas... Rasa means rasa. Rasa means humor. All these humors are present even in this material world in different way, as perverted reflection of the spiritual rasa.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Class in Los Angeles -- Los Angeles, November 15, 1968|Class in Los Angeles -- Los Angeles, November 15, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">So there are twelve kinds of reciprocal exchange—seven secondary and five primary. So all these rasas... Rasa means rasa. Rasa means humor. All these humors are present even in this material world in different way, as perverted reflection of the spiritual rasa. Nothing can be new here, but here it is a reflection only. Reality is there. So the five primary principles of loving affairs is there in the Vaikuṇṭha world. And Kṛṣṇa consciousness means to practice Kṛṣṇa consciousness while we are in this material body, and after giving up this body, we enter into the spiritual realm for factually participating with Kṛṣṇa. That is Kṛṣṇa consciousness movement.</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="section" sec_index="5" parent="compilation" text="Conversations and Morning Walks"><h2>Conversations and Morning Walks</h2>
</div>
<div id="1977_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" class="sub_section" sec_index="10" parent="Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" text="1977 Conversations and Morning Walks"><h3>1977 Conversations and Morning Walks</h3>
</div>
<div id="ConversationonTraintoAllahabadJanuary111977India_0" class="quote" parent="1977_Conversations_and_Morning_Walks" book="Con" index="27" link="Conversation on Train to Allahabad -- January 11, 1977, India" link_text="Conversation on Train to Allahabad -- January 11, 1977, India">
<div class="heading">Ādi-rasa means sex enjoyment. So he has explained that sex has come from... Because we have used perverted sex, we have got a very bad idea.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Conversation on Train to Allahabad -- January 11, 1977, India|Conversation on Train to Allahabad -- January 11, 1977, India]]: </span><div class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Prabhupāda: Everything is emanating from the Supreme. Janmādy asya yataḥ ([[Vanisource:SB 1.1.1|SB 1.1.1]]). So how you can say there is no sex? Viśvanātha Cakravartī Ṭhākura explains that janmādy asya, ādi-rasa. Ādi. Ādi-rasa means sex enjoyment. So he has explained that sex has come from... Because we have used perverted sex, we have got a very bad idea. But actually sex is there in the original. Otherwise there is no question of mādhurya-rasa. Hlādinī-śakti. There is no question of sex. You do not understand Absolute. The opposition party will inquire you, but sex is originally from Brahman. That is why...</p>
</div>
</div>
<div id="Correspondence" class="section" sec_index="6" parent="compilation" text="Correspondence"><h2>Correspondence</h2>
</div>
<div id="1968_Correspondence" class="sub_section" sec_index="3" parent="Correspondence" text="1968 Correspondence"><h3>1968 Correspondence</h3>
</div>
<div id="LettertoRupanugaSanFrancisco12March1968_0" class="quote" parent="1968_Correspondence" book="Let" index="110" link="Letter to Rupanuga -- San Francisco 12 March, 1968" link_text="Letter to Rupanuga -- San Francisco 12 March, 1968">
<div class="heading">Santa-rasa means appreciation of the greatness of the Lord, but there is no active service of the Lord.
</div>
<span class="link">[[Vanisource:Letter to Rupanuga -- San Francisco 12 March, 1968|Letter to Rupanuga -- San Francisco 12 March, 1968]]: </span><div style="display: inline;" class="text"><p style="display: inline;">Santa-rasa means appreciation of the greatness of the Lord, but there is no active service of the Lord. The land, the grass, the trees, the plants, fruits, or the cows in the transcendental world are supposed to be situated in the santa-rasa. As spiritual beings, they are all conscious of Krishna, but they prefer to appreciate Krishna's greatness remaining as they are.</p>
</div>
</div>
</div>